Version 7.1.0 Release Notes

Data Sources

22387: OLAP and WMI data sources have been retired
	The OLAP and WMI data sources have been retired from RTView.

HTTP Data Source

22327: Added support for additional JSON formats
	The RTView HTTP Data Adapter JSON handlers have been enhanced to support 
	additional JSON formats. 
	 
	The RTView HTTP Data Adapter comes with two default handlers that allow data to 
	be sent to RTView applications by means of JSON data in specific formats as HTTP 
	POST requests. This JSON data is mapped to GmsTabularData and can be used to 
	update RTView function chains or write to RTView caches directly. 
	
	The default handlers are contained in the gmsjhttpds.jar. 
	Previously they expected JSON data in the same format as output by the rtvquery 
	servlet when fmt=json. Now, they have been enhanced to support JSON same format 
	as output by the rtvquery servlet when fmt=js, and fmt=json&arr=1. These new json 
	formats are more compact and reduce the size of the htttp response, compared to 
	the original fmt=json http response. 
	
	fmt=js is the JavaScript Array Response Format
	
	The following is a JavaScript Array response format, where <DataType> is one of 
	the following strings: string, int, long, double, or date. The first row in the 
	array contains the column names, the second row contains the column data types, 
	and the remaining rows are the data rows from the data table. This format is the 
	most compact format. 
	[
	 ["column 1 name", "column 2 name", ...],
	 [DataType, DataType, ...],
	 [value for column 1 in row 1, value for column 2 in row 1, ...],
	 [row 2 values, ...]
	 ...
	 ]
	 
	fmt=json&arr=1 is JSON Response Format, but the JavaScript array response will be 
	used for data rows in the response, thus 
	
	 "metadata":[
	 {"name":"column 1 name","type":DataType},
	 ... metadata for other columns ...
	 ],
	 "data":[
	 [value for column 1 in row 1, value for column 2 in row 1, ...],
	 [row 2 values, ...]
	 ...
	 ]
	 }

JMX Data Source

22083: Jmx commands no longer fail silently when RTView isn't connected
	In previous releases, if a jmx command failed because RTView wasn't connected, it 
	failed silently. This has been fixed and the error is reported. 

Demos

22395: WMI and OLAP have been removed from demos
	WMI and OLAP references have been removed from the dstutorials demo.

Display Server

22117: Tomcat no longer throws an error if image path contains a backslash
	A bug has been fixed in the thin client which would cause Tomcat 8.5+ to throw an 
	IllegalArgumentException if the path to an image contained a backslash. 
	
	The full exception is as follows:
	
	java.lang.IllegalArgumentException: Invalid character found in the request 
	target. The valid characters are defined in RFC 7230 and RFC 3986 

Distribution

21999: Signed .jar files have been retired
	The zip file of SL-signed libraries at lib\signed_jars.zip has been removed from 
	the product, as Java applets are no longer supported by RTView. 

22402: Bundled Apache Tomcat update to 8.5.24
	The version of Apache Tomcat that is included with RTView has been upgraded from 
	7.0.72 to 8.5.24. 

General

22080: Command line arguments with spaces now process properly on Unix
	In previous releases, quoted command line arguments with spaces did not work on 
	unix. This has been fixed. 

Java Version Dependencies

22161: Java 1.9 is now officially supported
	Java 1.9 is now officially supported.
	
	NOTES:
	Users of IBM DB2 may need to use the db2jcc.jar driver from DB2 11.1 for 
	compatibility with Java 1.9 

Object Library

22398: Fx Graphs now supported in 64 bit java on Windows
	The Fx Graph objects are now supported in the Builder & Viewer in 64 bit versions 
	of Java on Windows. Previously only 32 bit java was supported. 
	
	This enhancement does not affect Linux or MacOS rtview installations. The Fx 
	Graph objects are still not supported in the Builder/Viewer on those platforms. 

Charts (General)

22114: webChartFlag can now be set in styles sheet for bar and trend graphs
	In prior releases, the webChartFlag property could not be set on obj_bargraph and 
	obj_trendgraph02 objects via an rtview stylesheet (.rts) file. This has been 
	fixed, so the following stylesheet entries will now set webChartFlag on all such 
	objects: 
	
	obj_trendgraph02 {
	        webChartFlag: 1;
	}
	obj_bargraph {
	        webChartFlag: 1;
	}

Pie Charts

19863: Added support for HTML pie charts
	BASICS:
	
	The thin client now supports a web pie chart.
	
	The web pie chart is a pure HTML implementation of an RTView pie chart object. In 
	the RTView thin client, the web pie chart provides an interactive, high 
	performance chart without requiring the Flash player or other browser plugin. 
	
	There is no web pie chart in the Builder palette. Instead, a new property named 
	webChartFlag has been added to the flex (obj_fxpie) and swing (obj_pie) pie 
	charts. To enable the web pie chart the user simply sets the webChartFlag 
	property to true (checked) on a flex or swing pie chart instance. Then, when the 
	display is opened in the thin client in a web compatible browser, the web pie 
	chart will appear in place of the flex or swing pie chart. 
	
	This feature is similar to the webChartFlag property that has been available on 
	the flex and swing trend graph and bar graph objects in several prior releases. 
	
	PROPERTIES:
	
	The web pie chart supports all of the major properties available in the flex and 
	swing pie charts. However several minor properties are not supported or have 
	limited support in the web pie chart. These properties are listed at the end of 
	this note. 
	
	
	BEHAVIOR: 
	
	In addition to the properties listed below, there are some behavioral differences 
	between the web pie chart and the flex/swing pie chart as follows. 
	
	1) Stretching: Unlike the swing pie chart obj_pie, the web pie chart does not 
	stretch to an oval shape to fill the available space. Instead the web pie chart 
	remains round, with its diameter determined by the smaller dimension. (The flex 
	pie chart is always round too). 
	
	2) Slice order: In the swing and flex pie charts the bottom edge of the first 
	wedge/slice, corresponding to the first row in the valueTable, is drawn at 0 
	degrees (that is, its bottom edge is horizontal). The slices for subsequent rows 
	follow in counter-clockwise order. In the web pie chart, the first slice is drawn 
	at 90 degrees, so its left edge is vertical. The slices for subsequent rows 
	follow in clockwise order. 
	 
	3) Tooltip: The tooltip on the web pie chart shows the label and value for a 
	wedge, but does not show its computed % 
	 
	4) Wedge labels (on obj_fxpie only): On obj_fxpie, wedge labels are visible 
	unless wedgeLabelPosition = None(0), as expected. However, the label shows only 
	the wedge's label, not its value or %. Also the wedgeLabelPosition values of 
	"Inside with Callout(3)" and "Outside(4)" give the same result as "Callout(1)" on 
	the html5 chart. If wedgeLabelPosition = Inside(2), some wedge labels may spill 
	outside of their wedge, depending on the size of the label and wedge. 
	 
	
	ENABLING / DISABLING:
	
	The web pie chart can be enabled for all obj_fxpie (flex) instances by adding the 
	following rule to an rtview stylesheet (.rts) file loaded by the display server: 
	
	obj_fxpie {
	  webChartFlag : 1
	}
	
	Similarly, the web pie chart can be enabled for all obj_pie (Swing) instances by 
	the following rule: 
	
	obj_pie {
	  webChartFlag : 1
	}
	
	See the documentation for more information on using RTView stylesheets.
	
	If a stylesheet is used note that the webChartFlag value can still be overridden 
	and set to zero (false) on individual instances. 
	
	
	UNSUPPORTED/IGNORED PROPERTIES:
	
	As mentioned earlier, some chart properties are hidden in the builder if 
	webChartFlag is checked. 
	
	These properties of obj_fxpie are hidden if webChartFlag is checked:
	
		bg3dFlag    
		bgGradientFlag    
		labelColumnFormat    
		rowLabelVisFlag    
		rowNameVisFlag    
		legendBgGradientFlag
		legendWidthPercent
		legendValueVisFlag
		legendPercentVisFlag
		entranceDuration
		entranceTrigger
		entranceType
		exitDuration
		exitTrigger
		exitType
		wedgeExplodeRadiusPercent
		wedgeLabelTextColor
		wedgeLabelTextFont
	
	These properties of obj_pie are hidden if webChartFlag is checked:
	
		bgEdgeWidth
		bgGradientMode
		bgGradientColor2
		bgRaisedFlag
		bgShadowFlag
		bgStyle    
		borderPixels
		labelColumnFormat
		rowLabelVisFlag    
		rowNameVisFlag
		labelMinTabWidth
		legendBgGradientMode
		legendBgGradientColor2
		legendWidthPercent    
		legendValueVisFlag
		legendPercentVisFlag
		outlineColor    
		transparencyPercent

Version 7.0.0 Release Notes

Alerts

21795: Fixed an issue where the Cleared Reason for an alert was incorrect
	In prevous releases, the Cleared Reason was sometimes incorrect after an alert 
	was disabled and re-enabled. This has been fixed. 

21915: New Alert Scheduler added to RTView
	RTView Alerts have been enhanced to support enabling and disabling alerts via 
	schedule. In previous releases, schedules could only be applied to sql queries. 
	In this release, the same schedules can also be applied to alerts. See the 
	release note for 20179 or the Core User Guide for information on defining 
	schedules. 
	
	Configuration
	In addition to the schedule definitions, a table with the following columns is 
	required to apply the schedules to alerts: 
	Alert Name - The name of the alert to which the schedule will be applied.
	Alert Index - The alert index to which the schedule will be applied. If the Index 
	Type is Default, this values should also be Default. For scalar alerts, this must 
	be set to Default. 
	Index Type - The index type of the Alert Index. If the value is All, the Alert 
	Index value is assumed to contain all indexes. If the value is Default, this 
	schedule will be applied to all alert indexes on the specified alert that do not 
	match another row in this table. For scalar alerts, this must be set to Default. 
	For tabular alerts that do not define any index types, this must be set to 
	Default or All. 
	Schedule - The name of a schedule from the RtvScheduleTable.
	Enabled - If false, this alert map row is not used.
	
	Like the schedule and rule tables, this table can be xml, database or any other 
	table that can be retrieved via an RTView data source. The user must make the 
	RtvAlertScheduleMap table available to RTView by defining a global reference 
	function named RtvAlertScheduleMap. 
	
	For scalar alerts, the Alert Index and Index Type must both be set to Default. 
	For tabular alerts, if an alert name and alert index matches more than one row of 
	the RtvAlertScheduleMap, the row with the Index Type All takes precedence. For 
	all other Index Type values, the order in which they are specified in the 
	indexTypes property on the alert definition controls the order of precedence. If 
	an alert index doesn't match any of the rows, the schedule for the Default 
	Index Type for the matching Alert Name is used. If there is no Default Index Type 
	for that Alert Name, no schedules are applied to the alert. 
	
	Runtime Behavior
	Schedules are applied to scalar alerts as follows:
	- If the alertamp, schedule or rule is not Enabled, it is ignored. 
	- If the Exception for the Rule is set to true, the alert will be disabled from 
	the Start Time to the End Time at which point it will revert back to the 
	alert's enabled property value. This will have no effect if the alert's 
	enabledFlag property value was previously false. When an alert is cleared due to 
	being disabled via a schedule event, the Cleared Reason will be SCHEDULE STARTED 
	if the alert was disabled because a schedule rule became active. The Cleared 
	Reason will be SCHEDULE ENDED if the alert was disabled because a schedule rule 
	became inactive. 
	- If the Exception for the Rule is set to false, the alert will be enabled from 
	the Start Time to the End Time at which point it will revert back to the 
	alert's enabled property value. This will have no effect if the alert's 
	enabledFlag property value was previously true. 
	- Note that the Rule Interval value is not used by the alerts.
	
	Schedules are applied to tabular alerts as follows:
	- If the alert's enabledFlag is false, the scheduler will be ignored. In order to 
	use schedules for tabular alerts, the alert's enabledFlag must be turned on. 
	- If the alertmap, schedule or rule is not Enabled, it is ignored. 
	- If the Exception for the Rule is set to true, the alert index will be disabled 
	from the Start Time to the End Time at which point it will revert back to the 
	alert's rowEnabledTable property value. This will have no effect if the alert 
	index's rowEnabledTable property value was previously false for the alert 
	index. When an alert is cleared due to being disabled via a schedule event, the 
	Cleared Reason will be SCHEDULE STARTED if the alert was disabled because a 
	schedule rule became active. The Cleared Reason will be SCHEDULE ENDED if the 
	alert was disabled because a schedule rule became inactive. 
	- If the Exception for the Rule is set to false, the alert index will be enabled 
	from the Start Time to the End Time at which point it will revert back to the 
	alert index's rowEnabledTable property value. This will have no effect if the 
	alert index's rowEnabledTable property value was previously true for the alert 
	index. 
	- Note that the Rule Interval value is not used by the alerts.
	
	Schedule Events Table
	A new table, Schedule Events, has been added to the Alert Data Source. This table 
	allows visibility into schedule events. It is updated with a new row each time a 
	schedule sets the enabled flag on an alert or alert index. New rows replace the 
	previous table content. In order to see all schedule events, you will need to 
	store this table in a cache. This table contains the following columns: 
	- Timestamp - The timestamp of the schedule event.
	- Alert Name - The name of the alert on which the schedule event occurred.
	- Alert Index - The alert index on which the schedule event occurred. This will 
	be blank scalar alerts. For tabular alerts, this will be either be * or the name 
	of the alert index depending on how the alert is configured in the 
	RtvAlertScheduleMap. If the same schedule was applied to all alert indexes by 
	specifying "Default" for both the Alert Index and Index Type, this value will be 
	*. Otherwise, it will be the alert index value. 
	- Schedule - The name of the schedule that generated the event.
	- Rule - The name of the rule in the schedule that generated the event.
	- Rule State - This will be STARTED if a rule became active. It will be ENDED if 
	a rule became inactive. 
	- Enabled - The enabled value of the alert or alert index after this schedule 
	event occurred. 
	
	Note that the Schedule Events table will be updated any time a schedule event 
	occurs regardless of whether it results in a change to the enabled state of the 
	alert. For example, you have an alert configured with a schedule rule that sets 
	the enabled to false. If the alert's enabled state is already false when the 
	schedule rule becomes active, it will not result in a change to the enabled state 
	of the alert. 
	
	Limitations
	Event alerts that are not configured with an alert index are not currently 
	supported by the scheduler. 
	
	Additional Changes
	This task also fixed a bug in the SQL scheduler where if specific dates are 
	specified (instead of days of the week), the scheduler always returned the last 
	date in the list as the next scheduled query time even if it wasn't the soonest 
	date. 

21924: Fixed an issue with disabling event alerts
	In previous releases, disabling event alerts was sometimes ignored due to a bug 
	that was introduced in RTView Classic 6.7.0, RTView EM 3.2.0. This has been 
	fixed. 

Builder

21672: Builder enhanced to remember dialog window sizes and positions
	The Display Builder has been enhanced to automatically save and restore the size 
	and location of the following dialogs: 
	
	- Open (File->Open)
	- Save (File->Save/Save-As)
	- Function Results (Function Dialog->Result Button)
	
	The Tools->Reset Window Layout menu option and the -resetlayout command line 
	option restore the size and location of these windows in addition to the other 
	windows that were previously reset. 

Builder - Options Dialogs

18560: Fixed a typo in Application Options
	A typo in the Application Options Alert Global Notifications tab has been fixed.

Builder - Property Dialogs

15582: Japanese label for "Update Mode" property now shown on certain dialogs
	Previously, the Japanese label for "Update Mode" property was not shown on 
	certain polled ds attach to data dialogs when running on a Japanese OS. The 
	English label was used instead. This is no longer the case. 
	
	Affected dialogs include the custom polledds and polledds2 example data sources, 
	and the http rest data source 

Data Historian

21921: Microsoft SQL Server 2014 and 2016 now supported
	Microsoft SQL Server 2014 and 2016 are now supported as databases for use with 
	the Data Historian, provided that the latest JDBC driver is used (sqljdbc41.jar 
	with Java 1.7, sqljdbc42.jar with Java 1.8). 

Data Server

21898: Fixed an issue with rtvquery returning errors on valid query strings
	In previous releases, the rtvquery servlet would sometimes return an error of "No 
	data received before timeout, query may be invalid" for a specific, valid cache 
	query string, on every attempt. The servlet needed to be restarted to clear the 
	error. This has been fixed. 

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

21689: Fixed an issue with the "Extend with SQL" cache feature
	In prior releases, the "Extend with SQL" feature of the cache data source could 
	cause thread growth if the history database connection was undefined or 
	unavailable. This is now fixed. 

Display Server

21853: Fixed an issue with small numbers not updating to zero in the thin client
	In previous releases, the value displayed in an obj_rect_ilv object would not 
	change if the previous value was greater than zero and less than one, and a value 
	of zero was applied. This problem occurred only in the thin client and is now 
	fixed. 

21906: Thin client enhanced to check user role access on each request
	In prior releases, after a user had logged into the thin client, the user could 
	manually enter a specific URL in the same browser instance and possibly view data 
	from rtview displays to which the user's role should have denied access. This is 
	fixed. 

21908: Enhanced display server with option to limit access to specific panel files
	The display server now supports a "permitpanel" option to specify the panel 
	layout files that the server will read. 
	
	A panel layout for the thin client is requested from the display server with a 
	URL parameter as follows: 
	
	   panels.jsp?file=X
	   
	where X is the name of the panel layout file that the server should read. By 
	default, the display server will attempt to read any filename on the server that 
	is specified by the URL parameter. If the file is a valid panel layout file, the 
	thin client will use it. But if the file does not exist, a "no such file" error 
	is displayed in the browser, and if the file exists but does not contain the 
	expected layout information, a "no panels found" error is displayed in the 
	browser. 
	
	The permitpanel option allows you to specify the file(s) which the display server 
	will read in response to a panels.jsp request. Requests from panels.jsp for any 
	other files are rejected with a "Permission denied" error shown in the browser, 
	regardless of whether the file exists or not, and the server will not attempt to 
	read such files. 
	
	The option may be specified multiple times to allow access to multiple panel 
	files. 
	
	Command-line example:
	
	   run_displayserver -permitpanel:PANELS.ini -permitpanel:layout.xml
	
	DISPLAYSERVER.ini example:
	
	  permitpanel PANELS.ini
	  permitpanel layout.xml
	
	In addition, the display server supports another new option to prevent attempts 
	to load remote files, as follows: 
	
	    -permitfile:LOCAL_ONLY
	
	If that option is specified any rtv or image files that are referenced by URL 
	will not be read and the server will log a message similar to the following: 
	
	  non-local file read permission denied: http://host/somefile

21909: Tomcat logs no longer produce gratuitous rtvCleanup errors
	In previous releases the following error message appeared in the Tomcat log at 
	shutdown, for each deployed copy of the rtvdisplay servlet: 
	
	"SEVERE: The web application [/rtvdisplay] appears to have started a thread named 
	[rtvCleanup] but has failed to stop it. This is very likely to create a memory 
	leak." 
	
	Starting with this release, the error message should be seen less often in the 
	log file, although it may still appear occasionally. In any case, there is no 
	danger of a memory leak when tomcat is shutdown. 

21912: Fixed phishing vulnerabilities in thin client
	In prior releases, it was possible to create phishing URLs which appeared to be 
	directed at the rtview thin client but would redirect the user to another site, 
	or download and possibly execute a file. These vulnerabilities have been fixed. 

21990: Fixed a vulnerability in the thin client
	An XSS (cross-site scripting) vulnerability in the thin client login.jsp file has 
	been fixed. 

21996: Fixed an issue with thin client resizing
	In previous releases, after a display is resized by the thin client to fit the 
	browser window, the black border around the default button (if any) was drawn in 
	the button's original position, rather than the button's new position. This is 
	fixed. 

Distribution

21794: Bundled Apache Tomcat updated to 7.0.72
	The version of Apache Tomcat that is included with RTView has been upgraded from 
	6.0.18 to 7.0.72. 

Object Library

Tables

21045: Misconfigured table objects no longer cause javascript exceptions in the thin client
	A bug in the thin client has been fixed which could cause a javascript exception 
	if the columnFormat on a table object was misconfigured to specify a format for a 
	string column, and a backslash character appeared in the column. 

Platform Support

21871: Support for Java 1.6 dropped
	RTView is now built with Java 1.7. 
	
	Java 1.6 is no longer supported.

Version 6.9.0 Release Notes

21524: Format Table Columns function enhanced to preserve numeric column types
	The Format Table Columns function supports a new argument, described below, to 
	control its treatment of numeric columns. 
	
	Format Mode - If 0 then all numeric columns are converted to strings in the 
	result, using the local default format for any numeric columns not specified in 
	Column Format(s). If Format Mode is nonzero, then only the numeric columns 
	specified in Column Format(s) are formatted, all other numeric columns in the 
	table remain numeric. 
	
	The default value of Format Mode is zero, which makes the function behave as it 
	did prior to this enhancement. 

21582: Thin Client now adds scrollbars at smaller resolutions
	Displays in the thin client with a minimum size and resize mode = Layout now 
	correctly display scrollbars at smaller resolutions. 

21668: Enhanced caches with new initialization option
	BACKGROUND:
	If a cache's schemaTable property is not specified, then the cache's schema 
	(column names and types) is copied from the first data table applied to the cache 
	that contains at least one data row. Data tables that contain columns but no rows 
	are ignored. In some configurations that can delay cache initialization and cause 
	undesired behavior in functions and displays attached to the cache. 
	
	ENHANCEMENT:
	An option has been added to the cache data source to initialize a cache's schema 
	from the first data table applied to the cache, even if the table contains zero 
	data rows. 
	
	The new option can be specified on the command-line as follows:
	
	   -cacheds:storeempty
	   
	Or in CACHEOPTIONS.ini as follows:
	
	    storeempty true
		
	Or in an rtview properties file as follows:
	
	   sl.rtview.cache.storeempty=true
	   
	The new option is disabled by default. If the new option is not specified, the 
	cache's schema is initialized by the first data table containing at least one 
	data row that is applied to the cache, as in all prior releases. If a cache's 
	schemaTable property is specified then the cache's schema is always initialized 
	from that table, as in prior releases, regardless of the new property setting. 

Alerts

21677: Enhanced Alert data source
	The Alert data source has been enhanced to support a new table named Alert 
	Definitions. This table contains a row for each alert with the following columns: 
	
	Alert Name - the name of the alert
	File Name - the name of the file containing the alert definition
	Substitutions - the substitutions specified when the alert definition file was 
	loaded. 

Commands

21562: Open Browser command enhanced to open the url in a new browser tab
	For an Open Browser command with Browser Window = Named and Window Name = _tab, 
	the thin client will now open the URL in a new browser tab rather than in a popup 
	browser window. In all other cases the command behaves as in prior versions. 
	
	This feature requires the browser's settings to be configured to automatically 
	open a new tab for popup windows. That is the default setting in all browsers. 
	But if the settings are configured to open popups in a new window, then the Open 
	Browser command will open the URL in a new window as in prior releases. 

Data Historian

21683: Fixed a retention / compaction issue
	When a mixture of simple retention and retention via advanced compaction was 
	used, only the first table using simple retention was processed for retention. 
	This has been corrected. 

21699: Enhanced Historian compaction to avoid long delays
	The Historian smooth compaction code no longer performs a row count. This 
	prevents long delays during smoothing by avoiding Select Count(*) calls. 

Data Server

21648: Enhanced rtvquery servlet to handle +/- infinity and NaN
	In prior releases, the rtvquery servlet encoded the numeric values NaN (not a 
	number), positive infinity, and negative infinity in a json or jsonp response as 
	"" (an empty string). This makes it impossible for a client application to 
	distinguish between those three values, when processing a json or jsonp response. 
	
	In this release, the rtvquery servlet supports a URL parameter to encode NaN, 
	positive infinity, and negative infinity in a json or jsonp response as the 
	strings "NaN", "Infinity", and "-Infinity" respectively. The new parameter is 
	named "nanok" and a value of true specifies the new behavior. The default value 
	is false. For example, the following URL specifies the new option: 
	 
	    http://somehost/rtvquery/cache/MyCache/current?fmt=json&nanok=true
		
	The other response formats (xml, xmlrtv, js, text) supported by the rtvquery 
	servlet have always used NaN, Infinity, and -Infinity. That behavior has not been 
	changed, so the nanok=true parameter is not needed to make those values appear in 
	the response in those formats. 

21684: Enhanced rtvquery servlet to support CORS
	The rtvquery (REST) servlet has been enhanced to support CORS (Cross-Origin 
	Resource Sharing). 
	
	A new optional property named AllowOrigins may now be specified in 
	rtvquery.properties. The property value is a string that specifies which domains 
	are allowed to send requests to the servlet. By default AllowOrigins is blank, 
	which indicates that requests are allowed only from the same domain that hosts 
	the rtvquery servlet (as in all prior releases). Specify a value of * to indicate 
	that requests are allowed from any domain: 
	
	AllowOrigins=*
	
	Or, specify a comma-separated list of the domains which may make requests, in 
	this format: protocol://hostname_or_address:port 
	
	For example: 
	
	AllowOrigins=http://192.168.20.11:3456,https://SomeHost:6789

Data Sources

21658: HTTP REST DS
	The RTView HTTP REST Data Adapter, is an extensible data adapter that allows 
	RTView to interact with REST APIs by means of HTTP Requests. 
	The Data Adapter provides an extensible framework with RTView, using the Apache 
	HTTP Client to Make HTTP requests. 
	Handlers are used to abstract the process of making an HTTP request.
	
	The RTVHttpRest adapter supports data attachments which will execute an HTTP 
	Request, to get an HTTP Response, which can then be processed to extract a data 
	table for use within RTView. 
	The data attachments specify the handlers used for the various parts of making 
	and processing an HTTP Request and Response. 
	
	Default Handlers are available, and the user can implement custom handlers to 
	extend functionality.There are examples of custom handlers in the 
	custom/rtvhttprest directory of the RTView installation. 
	
	Abstracting the HTTP Request / Response sequence in RTView
	
	Consider the following simplified execution of an HTTP Request using the Apache 
	HTTP Client library which handles the response and updates a data attachment with 
	GmsTabularData: 
	
	// Get a HTTP Client
	CloseableHttpClient httpClient = getHttpClient(dataObj);
	
	// Get a HTTP Request
	HttpUriRequest request = getRequest(dataObj);
	
	// Execute request using client to get response
	CloseableHttpResponse response = httpClient.execute(request);
	
	// Handle response to get Tablular Data
	GmsTabularData table = getTabularData(response, dataObj, ...)
	
	// Update the data attachment(s)
	ds.storeData(dataObj, table);
	
	The above code can be used to interact with any HTTP REST API.
	The processing that varies has been abstracted out and can be supplied by 
	pluggable handlers (java classes) which implement the appropriate interface. 
	These can then be specified in the data attachment for the given HTTP Request and 
	must be on the classpath of the RTView application at run time. 
	
	The Attatch to RTVHttpRestData dialog contains the following fields:
	
	- Client Handler: A text field used to specify the fully qualified name of the 
	java class used to implement the ClientHandler interface 
	(com.sl.gmsjhttprestds.ClientHandler). 
	The ClientHandler returns a CloseableHttpClient (client) that is used to execute 
	a request (returned by a RequestHandler implementation) to return a response that 
	is processed by a ResponseHandler. 
	The DefaultClientHandler (com.sl.com.sl.gmsjhttprestds.DefaultClientHandler) can 
	be used to return a default client. For more sophisticated client interactions a 
	custom ClientHandler implementation can be written and used. See the RTView 
	javadocs for more details. 
	There are examples of custom handlers in the custom/rtvhttprest directory of the 
	RTView installation. Typical uses of a custom ClientHandler implementation would 
	be to set header 
	fields required to interact with a REST API, e.g. Authentication tokens
	 
	- Request Handler: A text field used to specify the fully qualified name of the 
	java class used to implement the RequestHandler interface 
	(com.sl.gmsjhttprestds.RequestHandler). 
	The RequestHandler returns a HttpUriRequest (request) that is executed by a 
	client handler to return a response that is processed by a ResponseHandler. 
	The DefaultGetRequestHandler 
	(com.sl.com.sl.gmsjhttprestds.DefaultGetRequestHandler) 
	can be used to return a default HTTP GET request. Default request handlers are 
	provided for all the HTTP request operations. 
	Typical uses of a custom RequestHandler implementation would be to set header 
	fields required to interact with a REST API (e.g. Authentication tokens) or 
	process information supplied in the request string argument to enhance the 
	contents of a request if it cannot be specified by the request URI alone. 
	For more sophisticated request handling, a custom RequestHandler implementation 
	can be written and used. 
	See the RTView javadocs for more details. 
	
	- Request: A Text field used to specify the URI used to make the request executed 
	by the request handler. 
	The Request Handler may use the request as is, or process it to extract 
	additional information used in the request. 
	The format of a URI, used by an HTTP 
	request:[//[user:password@]host[:port]][/]path[?query][#fragment] 
	
	- ResponseHandler: A text field used to specify the fully qualified name of the 
	java class used to implement the ResponseHandler interface 
	(com.sl.gmsjhttprestds.ResponseHandler) 
	The ResponseHandler returns a GmsTabularData that is extracted by the 
	RequestHandler from the response as a result of a request obtained from a 
	RequestHandler being executed by a client obtained from a ClientHandler. 
	The DefaultResponseHandler (com.sl.com.sl.gmsjhttprestds.DefaultResponseHandler) 
	can be used to obtain default GmsTabularData containing information from the 
	response. 
	Typical uses of a custom ResponseHandler implementation would be to extract 
	GmsTabularData from a given response. 
	For more sophisticated response handling a custom ResponseHandler implementation 
	can be written and used. 
	See the RTView javadocs for more details. 
	
	- Column(s): A combo box for specifying the names of the table columns to include 
	in the result, or * (the default) for all columns. 
	- Filter Rows: A checkbox to enable the following 2 fields: 
	- Filter Column: The name(s) of the columns(s) to which the Filter Value should 
	be applied. 
	- Filter Value: The filter value(s) to be applied to the filter columns. 
	
	See the RTView documentation for details on the format to be used for specifying 
	filter values. Note that wild cards and regular expressions are not supported in 
	the Filter Value field. For that type of filtering, various standard RTView 
	functions are available. 

Cache Data Source

21669: Enhanced caches with new trim option
	An option has been added to the cache data source to remove rows periodically 
	from a cache's history table according to its historyTimeSpan property. By 
	default, that operation is performed only when new data is applied to the cache. 
	
	The new option is useful in rare cases where new data may be applied to the cache 
	at time intervals (e.g. 1 hour) that are longer than the cache's historyTimeSpan 
	(e.g. 30 minutes). 
	
	The new option can be specified on the command-line as follows:
	
	   -cacheds:trimhist
	   
	Or in CACHEOPTIONS.ini as follows:
	
	    trimhist true
		
	Or in an rtview properties file as follows:
	
	   sl.rtview.cache.trimhist=true
	  
	If the new option is specified, the historyTimeSpan limit is checked on all 
	caches every 30 seconds, approximately. The new option is disabled by default. If 
	the new option is not specified, then the historyTimeSpan limit is only checked 
	when new data is applied to the cache as in all prior releases. 

HTTP Data Source

21522: Added new HTTP Data Adapter
	The RTView HTTP Data Adapter embeds a HTTP server in RTView to handle data sent 
	as HTTP Requests. When enabled, the embedded HTTP server is opened on a specified 
	port, and delegates requests to handlers on given URLs. 
	
	The RTView HTTP Data Adapter comes with two default handlers that allow data to 
	be sent to RTView applications by means of JSON data in a specific format as HTTP 
	POST requests. This JSON data is mapped to GmsTabularData and can be used to 
	update RTView function chains or write to RTView caches directly. 
	
	RTView can be updated by clients that can send HTTP POST requests, containing 
	JSON data. Handlers receive the data, map the data to GmsTabularData, and then 
	perform actions with that data. 
	
	The default handlers are contained in the gsmjhttpds.jar. They expect JSON data 
	in the same format as output by the rtvquery servlet when fmt=json. If no 
	metadata is present, all columns are defined as string type. 
	
	The rtvquery JSON response format is defined as:
	
	{
	  "metadata":[
	     {"name":"column 1 name","type":DataType},
	       ... metadata for other columns ...
	    ],
	    "data":[
	{"column 1 name":"row1, column1 value", ... data for other columns in row 1}, 
	        ... data for other rows ...
	    ]
	}
	
	The expected format is a JSON object that can be mapped to GmsTabularData.
	The JSON object has two named members: "metadata" describing the metadata (column 
	names and types for the following data), and "data" containing the data values. 
	
	The "metadata" member is a name:value pair where the value is a JSON array of 
	JSON objects, one per column. The column metadata objects have two members: 
	"name" and "type". The "name" member is a name:value pair with the column name as 
	its value. The "type" member is a name:value pair with the column type as its 
	value. Valid column types are GmsTabularData column types: "string", "long", 
	"int", "double", "float", "date", "boolean". 
	
	The metadata is used to define the column types for the mapped GmsTabularData. If 
	the metadata member is not present, the mapped GmsTabularData will use "string" 
	for all columns. 
	
	The "data" member is a name:value pair where the value is a JSON array of JSON 
	objects, one per row of data in the mapped GmsTabularData. Each row is a JSON 
	object, with member name:value pairs, one per column. Each column member is a 
	name:value pair, where the name is the name of the column, and the value is the 
	value of that column for that row. 
	
	When the RTView HTTP Data Adapter is enabled (using the default 
	RTVHTTPOPTIONS.INI file, contained in custom\rtvhttp), it has the following 
	options set: 
	
		Enabled: true
		Port: 9099
		Root Url: /rtview
		Use HTTPS: false
	
	And sets the following RTVHttp Handlers
	
	DEFAULT_CACHE_WRITER	
		Handler Name:DEFAULT_CACHE_WRITER
		Java Class: com.sl.gmsjhttpds.DefaultJsonCacheWriter
		Handler URL: /write/cache/
		
	DEFAULT_JSON_HANDLER	
		Handler Name:DEFAULT_JSON_HANDLER
		Java Class: com.sl.gmsjhttpds.DefaultJsonHandler
		Handler URL: /json/data/
	
	DEFAULT_JSON_HANDLER is the Default Handler.	
		
	The default handlers are contained in the gsmjhttpds.jar. They expect JSON data 
	in the same format as output by the rtvquery servlet. If no metadata is present, 
	all columns are defined as string type. 
	
	
	HTTP POST requests to /rtview/json/data/<table_name> will be handled by the 
	DEFAULT_JSON_HANDLER, which will make the data available via rtvhttp data 
	attachments using the supplied <table_name>. 
	
	Data sent to /rtview/json/data/<table_name> will be output by RTView HTTP data 
	attachments, 
	where the "Handler Name:" is set to DEFAULT_JSON_HANDLER, and the "Table Name:" 
	is specified as the <table name> in the URL. 
	
	For Example:
	Data sent to /rtview/json/data/MyData1 would be output by RTView HTTP data 
	attachments, where the "Handler Name:" is set to "DEFAULT_JSON_HANDLER", and the 
	"Table Name:" is "MyData1". 
	Likewise, data sent to /rtview/json/data/MyData2 would be output by RTView HTTP 
	data attachments, where the "Handler Name:" is set to "DEFAULT_JSON_HANDLER", and 
	the "Table Name:" is "MyData2". 
	
	Different data can be input to different function chains by being sent to 
	different URLs in this way. 
	
	HTTP POST requests to /rtview/write/cache/<cache_name> will be handled by the 
	DEFAULT_CACHE_WRITER, which will write the data to the current table of the named 
	cache, <cache_name>. 
	
	Since the data is written to the cache directly by the handler using the cache 
	name in the URL, 
	no data attachments need be configured in this case.
	
	For Example:
	Data sent to /rtview/write/cache/CACHE1 would be written to the current table in 
	cache "CACHE1". 
	Likewise, data sent to /rtview/write/cache/CACHE2 would be written to the current 
	table in cache "CACHE2". 
	
	Different data can be written to different caches by being sent to different URLs 
	in this way. 

21646: A new servlet has been added for use with the HTTP Data Source
	A new RTVPost Servlet has been added to RTView. This is a proxy servlet for use 
	with the HTTP Data Source. It is useful for cases where an application cannot 
	post directly to the application running the HTTP Data Source due to security or 
	post access limitations. For RTView Enterprise Monitor users, this is useful for 
	the NODEMON and DOCKERMON solution packages in the case where your node or docker 
	application is outside the firewall and is limited to posting to port 80. 
	
	The RTVPost servlet is in RTV_HOME\servlets\rtvpost\rtvpost.war. The following 
	properties are supported in rtvpost.properties: 
	
	proxyHost: The http host to which to post. The default is localhost.
	proxyPort: The http port to which to post. The default is 3275.
	proxyPath: The path to which to post. This is commented out by default.
	
	RTView Core users can modify RTV_HOME\servlets\rtvpost\rtvpost.properties and run 
	the make_war script to rebuild the rtvpost.war file. 
	
	RTView Enterprise Monitor users can run RTVAPM_HOME\common\bin\make_rtvpost_war 
	from their project\webapps directory as follows: 
	
	make_rtvpost_war appname -host:somehost -port:someport
	
	Where appname is the name of your application. The host and port options are 
	optional. If not specified, the defaults above will be used. The appname argument 
	is used to name the war file, appname_rtvpost.war. To modify the proxyPath, copy 
	RTV_HOME\servlets\rtvpost\rtvpost.properties to your webapps directory, modify 
	the proxyPath value and then run make_rtvpost_war as described above. 
	
	To use the rtvpost war file, deploy it to your application server. HTTP posts 
	should use the URL for rtvpost and will be forwarded to the specified proxyHost 
	and proxyPort. 

IBMMQ - IBM WebSphere MQ

20881: Version Restriction Removed for MQ Client jars
	Previously the IBM MQ data adapter checked for the presence of a class that was 
	only in a version specific set of MQ client jars. This is no longer the case. 
	Users can now use any version of MQ client jars (greater than or equal to MQ 
	version 6.0) in their classpath when using the IBM MQ data adapter. 
	
	Note: Since the actual set of required MQ client jars varies by version of MQ, it 
	is suggested that the set of MQ Client jars be put in a directory so that the 
	java classpath "wildcard" mechanism can be used to refer to all the jars in a 
	directory, rather than having to enumerate every jar file on the classpath. 
	
	The RTV_USERPATH environment variable can be used to set a user defined 
	classpath. 
	for example:
	SET RTV_USERPATH=".;.\lib_7.1\*"
	or
	SET RTV_USERPATH=".;.\lib_7.5\*"
	
	Note: for later versions of MQ (8.0, 9.0) a single relocatable jar 
	com.ibm.mq.allclient.jar is available. 

SQL Data Source

21680: Fixed an issue with encrypted database passwords
	In version 6.7, a problem was introduced that caused an error to print to the 
	console for sl.rtview.properties.databasePassword property if the property value 
	was encrypted. In the error message, the databasePassword in the error was shown 
	in plain text. This problem has been fixed. 

TIBCO Hawk Data Source

21851: An issue with the handling of the onTermination event has been fixed
	In a previous version, in task 21299, a bug was introduced to the onTermination() 
	error handling. In some cases, it would cause all data from the microagent that 
	sent the error to stop coming into RTView. This has been fixed. 

Display Server

21525: Added support for removing items from thin client context menu
	Items can now be removed from the thin client context menu. This is done by 
	specifying the names of the items in a property named MenuItemsToHide in 
	rtvdisplay.properties. Multiple names are separated by commas. For example, the 
	following will remove the "Export Table To HTML", "Export Table to Excel", 
	"Export PDF", and "Status" items from the menu: 
	
	MenuItemsToHide=PDF,ExcelTable,HtmlTable,Stat
	
	After adding the MenuItemsToHide property to rtvdisplay.properties, the 
	corresponding .war file must be rebuilt and redeployed. 
	
	Here are the names of all of the menu items, with the English label string of the 
	menu item in quotes if it differs from the item name: 
	
	Refresh
	Back
	Next
	Command    "Execute Command"
	Drill      "Drill Down"
	ExcelTable "Export Table to Excel"  (Internet Explorer only)
	HtmlTable  "Export Table to HTML"
	PDF        "Export PDF"
	CopyCell   "Copy Cell Value"
	Stat       "Status"
	Logoff     "Log Off"
	
	Use the menu item name when configuring MenuItemsToHide, not the label string.

Functions

21647: ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException has been fixed
	In previous releases, it was possible to get an ArrayOutOfBoundsException when 
	closing a display containing a composite that was configured with the 
	substititons property. This has been fixed. 

General

21638: Firefox now displays button states the same as other browsers
	In the thin client in Firefox, a button control (obj_c1button) will now appear 
	depressed when the user clicks on it, as it does in other browsers. 

21772: Extra-bold font in Firefox fixed
	In the previous release, objects using font index 7 (sans-serif bold) would 
	appear extra bold in some versions of Firefox if the display server was 
	configured to use the extended font feature with arimob.ttf assigned to font 7. 
	This has been fixed. 

Object Library

Bar Charts

19862: Added new web bar chart
	BASICS:
	
	The thin client now supports a web bar chart.
	
	The web bar chart is a pure HTML implementation of an RTView bar chart object. In 
	the RTView thin client, the web bar chart provides an interactive, high 
	performance chart without requiring the Flash player or other browser plugin. 
	
	There is no web bar chart in the Builder palette. Instead, a new property named 
	webChartFlag has been added to the flex (obj_fxbar) and swing (obj_bargraph) bar 
	charts. To enable the web bar chart the user simply sets the webChartFlag 
	property to true (checked) on a flex or swing bar chart instance. Then, when the 
	display is opened in the thin client in a web compatible browser, the web bar 
	chart will appear in place of the flex or swing bar chart. 
	
	This feature is similar to the webChartFlag property that has been available on 
	the flex and swing trend graph objects in several prior releases. 
	
	PROPERTIES:
	
	The web bar chart supports all of the major properties available in the flex and 
	swing bar charts. However several minor properties are not supported or have 
	limited support in the web bar chart. These properties are listed at the end of 
	this note. 
	
	
	BEHAVIOR: 
	
	In addition to the properties listed above, there are some behavioral differences 
	between the web bar chart and the flex/swing bar chart as follows. 
	
	- Legend: The legend does not show bar or trace data (y) values. Data values are 
	only shown in the mouseover tooltips (if mouseOverFlag = 1). Labels longer than 
	200 pixels are wrapped in the legend, and labels longer than 150 pixels are 
	clipped in the tooltip. The width and height of the legend is different between 
	the bar char implementations. 
		
		- Bar width and spacing will differ slightly between the chart implementations.
		
	- Bar values: The web chart automatically selects a text color and shadow to 
	contrast with the corresponding bar, ignoring barValueTextColor. 
	
	- Y axis autoscaling: Given the same y data values, the web bar chart may choose 
	a different value range for the y axes in autoscale mode as compared to the older 
	charts. Also the format and number of y axis labels shown on the web chart are 
	determined automatically, unlike the swing bar chart where various yAxis* 
	properties are used. 
		
	- X axis label rotation threshold, spacing, and count differ between 
	implementations. Also the web chart may skip labels on some bar groups to avoid 
	crowded or overlapping labels. 
		
	- Zooming: The user can zoom in on the chart's X axis (Y axis if 
	drawHorizontalFlag = 1) by dragging across the plot area. 
		
	- Reset button: If the user changes the chart's visible range, via the scrollbar 
	or by dragging the cursor to perform a zoom, then a button labeled Reset will 
	appear in the upper left corner of the plot area. A click on this button will 
	reset the x axis to its original settings. 
		
	- Scrolling: If the mouse is moved below the bottom of the chart while dragging 
	the scrollbar, the scrolling will stop. This is unlike the behavior of other 
	rtview objects, which will continue to scroll until the mouse button is released. 
		
	- The perspective in 3D mode differs (above-right perspective in swing chart, 
	center perspective in web chart). 
	
	- The waterfall total bar (if visible) is not labeled on the X axis of the web 
	chart 
	
	- The web chart plots each trace point in the center of the corresponding bar 
	group, while the swing chart plots each trace point on the center of each 
	corresponding bar. 
		
	OTHER KNOWN ISSUES/DIFFERENCES:
		
	- The max zoom-in level is one bar group. For example if there are 2 bars in each 
	bar group, there will usually be at least 2 bars visible regardless of how far 
	you zoom in. But, if the user intentionally zooms in on blank space between bars 
	it is possible to end up with no visible bars. 
	
	- After zooming or scrolling, the y axis range (x axis in horizontal mode) may 
	change to reflect the range of values of the visible bars. This is designed 
	behavior. 
	
	- If draw3dFlag is set, dragging the scrollbar will also initiate a zoom-in, as 
	though the user dragged in the plot area. This can be avoided by scrolling via 
	clicks on the scrollbar arrows, instead. 
		
	- Scrolling performance on a chart with many bars may be sluggish, depending on 
	the vintage of the browser & host. 
		
	- The chart's tooltip may overlap the Reset button making it difficult to click 
	the button. Moving the mouse a bit will correct this problem. 
	
	- Performance is affected by the number of bars, traces, trace points, use of 
	trace line shadows, bar/trace fill, and other properties. Performance is also 
	affected by the browser and version, and the CPU speed of the client host system. 
	
		- On a touch interface, a swipe will scroll the chart left or right.
	
	- On a touch interface, a pinch-open gesture in the plot area will zoom the 
	chart's range *in* to the pinched range. A pinch-close gesture will zoom out to 
	the pinched range. A left/right swipe (or an up/down swipe in horizontal mode) 
	will scroll the chart. The scrollbar (if visible) cannot be dragged reliably on a 
	touch device, but the scrollbar arrow keys can be tapped. 
	
	 
	
	ENABLING / DISABLING:
	
	The web bar chart can be enabled for all obj_fxbar (flex) instances by adding the 
	following rule to an rtview stylesheet (.rts) file loaded by the display server: 
	
	obj_fxbar {
	  webChartFlag : 1
	}
	
	Similarly, the web bar chart can be enabled for all obj_bargraph (Swing) 
	instances by the following rule: 
	
	obj_bargraph {
	  webChartFlag : 1
	}
	
	See the documentation for more information on using RTView stylesheets.
	
	If a stylesheet is used note that the webChartFlag value can still be overridden 
	and set to zero (false) on individual instances. 
	
	
	SUMMARY OF UNSUPPORTED/IGNORED PROPERTIES:
	
	As mentioned earlier, some chart properties are hidden in the builder if 
	webChartFlag is checked. An "n/a" after the property means the feature is not 
	supported, "auto" means the value is assigned automatically and is not 
	configurable, otherwise the assumed value of the property is shown. 
	
	traceValueAlarmStatusTable : n/a (alert coloring & styling of trace markers is 
	not supported, only supported for bars) 
	valueHighAlarmMarkColor : n/a
	valueHighAlarmMarkStyle : n/a
	valueHighWarningMarkColor : n/a
	valueHighWarningMarkStyle : n/a
	valueLowAlarmMarkColor : n/a
	valueLowAlarmMarkStyle : n/a
	valueLowWarningMarkColor : n/a
	valueLowWarningMarkStyle : n/a
			
	bgEdgeWidth : 1
	bgGradientMode : n/a
	bgGradientColor2 : n/a
	bgRaisedFlag : false
	bgShadowFlag : false
	bgStyle : Rectangle
	borderPixels : n/a
			
	barImage : n/a
	barValueTextColor : auto
	barValueTextFont : auto
	barValueTextHeight : auto
			
	labelColumnFormat : auto
	traceYValueFormat : auto
	yValueFormat : auto
			
	rowLabelVisFlag : true
	rowNameVisFlag : false
			
	mouseOverHighlightFlag : true
	scrollbarSize : auto
	scrollbarStartAtMaxFlag : true
			
	labelMinTabWidth : n/a
			
	barCenterFlag : true
	barFitFlag : true
	horizAxisLabelRotationAngle : auto
	horizAxisMinLabelHeight : n/a
	vertAxisMinLabelWidth : n/a
			
	legendBgGradientMode : n/a
	legendBgGradientColor2 : None
	legendWidthPercent : auto
	legendValueVisFlag : false (bar value is shown in tooltip, not legend)
	outlineColor : n/a
			
	markDefaultSize : auto
	markScaleMode : No scale
			
	transparencyPercent : 0
			
	gridBgGradientMode : None
	gridBgGradientColor2 : n/a
	gridBgImage : n/a
			
	traceYAxisFormat : auto
	traceYAxisMajorDivisions : auto
	traceYAxisMinorDivisions : auto
	yAxisFormat  : auto
	yAxisGridMode : Bar Axis
	yAxisMajorDivisions : auto
	yAxisMinorDivisions : auto
	
	traceProperties.MarkerColor (uses trace color)
	
	OTHER PROPERTY DIFFERENCES:
	
	scrollbarMode: "As Needed" mode is treated the same as "Always". The scrollbar is 
	always horizontal, even if bars are horizontal. 
	
	traceFillStyle: solid, gradient, & transparent gradient are all treated as 
	transparent. 
	
	traceProperties.MarkerStyle: For any value other than "No Marker" the marker 
	style is chosen automatically. 
	
	drillDownSelectMode: ignored, always treated as Element Only.
	
	barValueTextPos: if "Center" (4) position is selected, the bar values are shown 
	in the center of each bar, all other position settings are ignored and the value 
	position is chosen automatically. 
	
	minSpacePerBar: If the property is set to 1 (the default) or less the chart will 
	display a bar for every data value, even if that makes bars overlap when there 
	are more bars than can fit in the plot area. In the swing chart, if 
	minSpacePerBar > 1 it specifies the minimum pixel width for each bar (or height, 
	in horizontal mode) so if there are more bars than can fit in the plot area given 
	that minimum bar width (plus space between the bars) then only a subset of the 
	bars are visible, and the user must scroll to see the additional bars. But in the 
	web chart, the minSpacePerBar is instead used to calculate the minimum number of 
	bar groups that should always be visible regardless or the plot area width. The 
	calculation attempts to match the swing chart behavior but results will vary. 
	
	webChartVisBarGroups: This is a new property and is visible only if webChartFlag 
	= 1. It specifies the maximum number of bar groups that should be visible in the 
	plot area. This can be used as an alternative to minSpacePerBar to control the 
	size and number of visible bars. Depending on the size of the plot area and other 
	factors, there may sometimes be one more or one fewer bar group visible than 
	expected. The default value is zero which means there is no limit on the number 
	of visible bar groups. 

Charts (General)

21675: Enhanced charts with properties for legend text
	Properties named legendTextFont and legendTextSize have been added to 
	obj_trendgraph02, obj_bargraph, and obj_pie to allow the user to choose the font 
	and size for legend text. Previously the legends on those objects always used 
	SansSerif at 9 pixels (trend) or 10 pixels (bar and pie) . Those are now the 
	default values for the new properties. 
	

Links

21564: New Link Path Types have been added
	RTView links have been enhanced to support two new linkPathType property values:
	
	Horizontal Square - Links are drawn from the right/left side of the parent 
	closest to the child to the right/left side of the child closest to the parent. 
	The link is straight if the parent and child are aligned horizontally, otherwise 
	the link line has two 90 degree angles. This linkPathType has a limitation when 
	the right/left side of the parent and child nodes overlap. In this case, the link 
	line will be clipped. 
	
	Vertical Square - Links are drawn from the top/bottom side of the parent closest 
	to the child to the top/bottom side of the child closest to the parent. The link 
	is straight if the parent and child are aligned vertically, otherwise the link 
	line has two 90 degree angles. This linkPathType has a limitation when the 
	top/bottom side of the parent and child nodes overlap. In this case, the link 
	line will be clipped. 
	
	The links have also been enhanced with a new property, linkCrossBarSpacing, in 
	the Link Line category. This property is only applied if the linkPathType is set 
	to Horizontal Square or Vertical Square. If this property is set to -1, the 
	perpendicular line between the parent and child nodes is positioned in the center 
	of the space between the parent and child nodes. Otherwise, it is positioned the 
	specified number of pixels from the parent node. If the value is greater than the 
	space between the parent and child nodes, the perpendicular line will be drawn in 
	the center of the available space. 
	
	Links with these linkPathTypes have been added to the Links palette in the 
	builder. The Horizontal Square and Orthogonal links look the same in the palette, 
	but the linkPathType is shown in the status area to help differentiate them. 

Object Grid

21629: Style sheets are now correctly applied
	In previous releases, the style sheet was not applied correctly to the icons in 
	the object grid. The behavior was different in the viewer and the thin client. In 
	the thin client, the style sheet was never applied to the icons in the object 
	grid. In the viewer, the stylesheet properties always overrode the property 
	values specified in iconProperties. 
	
	This has been fixed so that both the viewer and thin client behave as follows: If 
	a property value is specified in iconProperties, this value takes precedence over 
	the style sheet value. Properties for which no value was specified in 
	iconProperties will use the style sheet values. 
	
	If you have an object grid in a display from a previous release that counts on 
	the previous behavior, you have 2 options: 
	
	1. Modify the iconProperties value for your object grid so that all properties 
	that should override the style sheet are specified and no properties that should 
	not override the style sheet are specified. 
	
	2. Use the following command line option to revert to the old behavior:
	
	-objgriduseoldss

Tables

21666: Tree Grid support added to Table objects
	The table object (obj_table02) now supports a "Tree Grid" mode. In this mode, the 
	first column of the table behaves as a tree, allowing table rows to be 
	expanded/collapsed in groups according to a hierarchy defined by the index 
	columns in the data table. 
	
	The new mode can be configured in the builder, but the feature is only fully 
	implemented in the thin client. 
	
	Three properties have been added to obj_table02 to support the new mode. These 
	are visible only if webGridFlag is checked: 
	
	  webTreeGridFlag:  check this to enable the new mode
	webTreeLabelColumn: the name of the column to be added as the tree (first) column 
	of the table 
	webTreeAggregateColumns: a list of column names and calculations to be applied to 
	data columns in parent rows 
	
	INDEX COLUMNS:  
	  
	To use the new mode, the table object's indexColumnNames property must be 
	specified. Each index column in the data table (attached to the valueTable 
	property) defines a level in the tree -- the first index column specifies the 
	values for the top level of the tree, the second index column specifies the 
	values for the second level in the tree, and so on. 
	
	For example, here is a portion of a data table containing Major League Baseball 
	(MLB) standings. The index columns are named League, Division, and Team: 
	
		League    Division    Team      W    L
		American    East     Red Sox    93   69
		American    East     Blue Jays  89   73
		American    Central  Indians    94   67
		American    Central  Tigers     86   75
		American    West     Rangers    95   67
		American    West     Mariners   86   76
		National    East     Phillies   95   67
		National    East     Mets       87   75
		National    Central  Cubs       103  58
		National    Central  Cardinals  86   76
		National    West     Dodgers    91   71
		National    West     Giants     87   75
		
	(Note: The full MLB table has 5 teams in each division). 
	
	The index column values in the above data table can be used to create a 3 level 
	tree, as follows: 
	
	> American
	   > East
	        Red Sox
			Blue Jays
	   > Central
	        Indians
			Tigers
	  ... etc ...
	> National
	   > East
	        Phillies
			Mets
	  ... etc
	
	
	DATA TABLE FORMAT:  
	  
	When tree grid mode is enabled, the data table is automatically converted to the 
	format required for the mode, as follows: 
	
	1) A row is added to the table for each parent level in the tree.
	 
	For example, when the MLB table above displayed in tree grid mode, it will 
	contain 8 additional "parent" rows which don't appear in the original table. 
	These rows are added for the parent levels in the tree, one for the American 
	League, one for the National League, and one for each of the 3 divisions in each 
	league (American East, American Central, American West, National East, National 
	Central, National West). The data columns (W, L) for each of the parent rows is 
	assigned a value of zero. This is because there is no data in the original table 
	for the parent rows. 
	
	2) A new column is added to the beginning of the table to display the tree 
	levels. By default the column is named "Node Label" but a different name can be 
	specified in the webTreeLabelColumn property. 
	  
	3) Columns named Node ID and Parent ID are added to the table. These define the 
	parent-child relationships in the table, and are used by the thin client to 
	construct the tree. These columns are automatically hidden, via the columnsToHide 
	property. 
	   
	   
	AGGREGATION:
	   
	As mentioned earlier, the parent rows added to the data table will contain a zero 
	in each numeric data column. The webTreeAggregateColumns can be configured to 
	show aggregated values (sum, min, max, or average) in those data columns. The 
	property expects a list of column name, calculation pairs, with semicolons 
	between the pairs. 
	 
	For example, to show the sum of the W and L columns of the child rows in each 
	parent row of the MLB table above: 
	
	  webTreeAggregateColumns: W,sum;L,sum
	 
	With that configuration each Division row will show the sum of its teams W and L 
	columns, and each League will show the sum of its divisions W and L columns. 
	
	FILTER & SORT:
	
	In the thin client, all of the web grid filter and sort features are available, 
	by clicking on the column header. There are a few differences to note. 
	
	The column filter menu can be used to hide rows in the table. However, this does 
	not affect the aggregate calculations (if any), since they are always performed 
	on all rows in the table, visible or not. Also, a parent row will be shown if any 
	of its children pass the filter test, even if the parent row itself does not pass 
	the filter. For example, if the filter Team = Phillies is applied to the MLB 
	table, only one row passes that filter but the table will display both of that 
	row's ancestor rows, for a total of 3 rows: 
	
	> National
	   > East
	       Phillies
	
	The column sort feature in the thin client applies the sort within each level. 
	That is, the sort will reorder rows within a tree level but won't move rows 
	between levels of the tree, and parent rows will still appear above the rows of 
	their children. 
	
	Limitations on webTreeGrid mode:
	
	- The webTreeGridMode behavior only works in thin client, and only in desktop 
	browsers that support the web (HTML5) grid. In all other cases the table will not 
	display a tree column. 
	
	- The webTreeGridMode does not support server-side paging, filtering & sorting. 
	This means that webTreeGridMode mode does not perform well on large data tables, 
	because the entire data table must be downloaded to the browser. For best results 
	it should only be applied to data tables with 1000 rows or fewer. The intended 
	use is to display the contents of an indexed cache table, with fewer than 1000 
	rows. 
	
	- The export to html/excel/pdf feature does not recognize webTreeGridMode and 
	instead exports the entire table. 
	
	Advanced use:
	
	If the data table attached to valueTable already contains rows for the parent 
	levels of the tree, with columns named exactly "Node ID" and "Parent ID" that 
	uniquely identify each row and its parent row, then the table won't be converted 
	as described above. In this case the column to be used as the tree column should 
	be identified by the webTreeLabelColumn property. 

Version 6.8.0 Release Notes

Builder - Property Dialogs

21074: Substitutions listbox in Builder no longer throws ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException
	In prior releases, the Builder would sometimes throw an 
	ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException while updating the list of substitutions shown in 
	the property sheet. This is fixed. 

Customization

18831: Implement a platform-agnostic font solution for display server
	A file named rtvfonts.jar is now included with RTView. This jar file is intended 
	to provide consistent text size on displays that are configured on Windows but 
	are deployed in the thin client via the display server running on Linux. On some 
	Linux installations, there can be significant sizing and spacing differences 
	between the Windows and Linux versions of the "generic" font types (serif, 
	sans-serif, monospaced). This jar contains open source fonts which can be used 
	instead, for font indexes 1 - 12. Each of the open source fonts was designed to 
	be equivalent in sizing and spacing to the corresponding Windows font. 
	
	The rtvfonts.jar should be used in the following situation:
	
	1) RTView displays were created on Windows, but are deployed in the thin client 
	from a display server running on Linux. 
	2) In the thin client, there are visible problems with text alignment and sizing 
	that are not seen when the same display is open in the builder/viewer on Windows. 
	
	If this situation occurs, then the display server should be configured as 
	follows: 
	
	1) Add rtvfonts.jar to the display server's classpath, for example:
	
	   > set RTV_USERPATH=$RTV_HOME/lib/rtvfonts.jar
	
	2) Add rtv_fonts.xml as a global file (rtv_fonts.xml is contained in 
	rtvfonts.jar). For example, add this line to the display server's OPTIONS.ini 
	file: 
	
	   global rtv_fonts.xml
	
	
	
	The open source fonts contained in rtvfonts.jar are:
	
	Arimo (sans-serif, equivalent to Arial)
	Cousine (monospace, equivalent to Courier)
	Tinos (serif, equivalent to Times New Roman)
	
	Each font is provided in regular (plain), bold, italic, and bold italic in .ttf 
	format (for the display server) and .woff format(for the thin client) for a total 
	of 24 font files. The .ttf files for each font were downloaded from 
	https://www.google.com/fonts. Each is licensed by the Apache 2 license. 
	
	The font files in this jar contain only the Latin character set, to reduce their 
	size. This means that CJK (Asian) characters will appear as boxes in text strings 
	that are rendered by the display server (e.g. a label object with webLabelFlag = 
	false). In text strings rendered by the browser, the expected characters will 
	appear in a fallback font, so the style and size may not match the Latin 
	characters in the font. 

Data Historian

21455: New mechanism to 'throttle' historian deletions.
	A command line argument has been provided to enable throttling of historian 
	deletions by separating large deletions into smaller groupings. This option will 
	help in scenarios where users see the following errors in the log: 
	
	   SQLException: The transaction log for database <DB Name> is full.
	ERROR: java.sql.SQLException: The transaction log for database <DB Name> is full. 
	retention doing delete in SQL: [delete from <DB Table Name> where "timestamp" < 
	'YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS'] failed. 
	
	To enable multi-chunk retention start the historian with the -retentionChunkSize 
	argument. 
	
	Example of deleting in 2 day chunks:
	-retentionChunkSize:2d  
	
	Example of deleting in 1 week chunks:
	-retentionChunkSize:1w
	
	This argument does not support time segments of multiple units, such as "1h 30m"

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

21428: Fix bug preventing removal of rows from current_condensed table
	A bug in the cache data source has been fixed that prevented rows in 
	current_condensed tables from being removed by the row expiration feature. 
	
	(The current_condensed table exists on caches that have the row condense feature 
	enabled. It has one row for the most recent condense result computed for each 
	unique index value). 
	
	The properties that remove rows from the current table are rowExpirationMode, 
	rowsToDeleteTable, and maxNumberOfCurrentRows. 

JMX Data Source

21151: Provide mechanism to connect to secure Tomcat instances via JMX
	A mechanism has been added to connect to secure Tomcat instances via JMX. A 
	secure connection requires the use of the following two parameters: 
	
	javax.net.ssl.trustStore
	javax.net.ssl.trustStorePassword
	
	Please see the User's Guide for more information.

21421: Unexpected JMX Mbean objects no longer cause exception
	Unexpected JMX object types could cause a NullPointerException. This has been 
	fixed. 

Splunk

21313: SSL Protocol field added to Splunk Connection
	The Splunk data adapter has been enhanced to allow explicit management of the SSL 
	Protocol used when communicating to the Splunk server. 
	
	A new field "SSL Protocol" has been added to the Add Splunk Connection dialog. 
	
	This allows you to explicitly select the SSL Protocol used when communicating to 
	the Splunk server, by means of a drop down. 
	
	The SSL protocols available are SSLv3, TLSv1, TLSv1.1 (TLSv1_1) and TLSv1.2 
	(TLSv1_2). TLSv1 is selected by default as "TLSv1 is available by default in 
	every modern version of Java" 
	
	SSL protocols are configured on the Splunk server using the "sslVersions" 
	property as described in 
	http://docs.splunk.com/Documentation/Splunk/latest/Security/SetyourSSLversion 
	
	The client (Splunk data adapter) connection will, obviously, have to use a 
	compatible SSL protocol connect. 
	
	Use of explicit SLL protocol requires use of com.splunk.SSLSecurityProtocol found 
	in the Splunk Java SDK jar (splunk-sdk-java-1.5.0.jar). A modified version of 
	this .jar is provided with RTView. It has been modified to remove dependency on 
	the existence of a ".splunkrc" file in the users home directory, which a client 
	system may not have. 
	
	Protocol Limitations 
	-----------------------------
	
	Different versions of Java have added and removed support for different SSL 
	protocols, so users will need to choose an SSL protocol that is supported by your 
	Java runtime. 
	
	TLSv1 is used as default by RTView as "TLSv1 is available by default in every 
	modern version of Java" 
	
	SSLv3 is provided for backwards compatibility, but its use is discouraged due to 
	the "POODLE" vulnerability as described here: 
	
	 http://www.splunk.com/view/SP-CAAANKE
	
	SSLv3 is disabled in recent versions of Java (1.7 + 1.8+) for this reason, and 
	will fail with an error message of the form 
	
	"java.lang.RuntimeException: No appropriate protocol (protocol is disabled or 
	cipher suites are inappropriate)" 
	
	TLSv1.1 and TLSv1.2 are not available in Java 1.6 and will fail with an error 
	message of the form 
	
	java.lang.IllegalArgumentException: TLSv1.1
	or
	java.lang.IllegalArgumentException: TLSv1.2

TIBCO Hawk Data Source

21273: RTView now attempts to re-subscribe to failed subscriptions
	A bug was introduce in version 6.0.2 that caused RTView not to attempt to 
	re-subscribe to failed subscriptions. This has been fixed. 

21299: Improved hawk error handling
	The TIBCO Hawk data source error handling has been enhanced as follows:
	
	1. Improved logging for onErrorExceptionEvent and onWarningExceptionEvent. These 
	events occur when there is a problem with one of the connected TIBCO Hawk 
	Transports. Also, RTView will now try reconnecting to the transport if an 
	onErrorExceptionEvent occurs. 
	
	2. Improved logging for subscription error events. Also, RTView will cancel all 
	subscriptions for a MicroAgent if an onTermination event occurs and attempt to 
	recreate them. 

21392: New reconnect option added to Hawk DS
	The TIBCO Hawk data source has been enhanced to attempt to reconnect when the 
	initial connection to a transport fails. By default, it will attempt to reconnect 
	once a minute for 60 attempts. You can set the max number of reconnect attempts 
	by command line or property. 
	
	command line: -hawkmaxreconnect:3
	property: sl.rtview.hawk.hawkmaxreconnect=3
	
	Every time a reconnect is attempted, you will see this in the console:
	016-03-07 13:00:50.282 re-attempt connection to transport <test_ems>: 1 of 60
	016-03-07 13:00:52.911 re-attempt connection to transport <test_ems>: 
	succeeded/failed 
	
	To disable reconnection attempts, set the max reconnect to 0.

21393: New connection table added to Hawk DS
	The TIBCO Hawk Data Source has been enhanced with a new method, 
	getConnectionTable, in the RTViewDs microagent. This table shows one row for each 
	defined connection with the following columns: 
	
	- Name - the connection name
	- Connected - true if we are connected, false otherwise
	
	This table updates with all rows regardless of the Disable Data Caching setting.

21437: Corrected slow Hawk Agent discovery by Hawk Datasource
	A change was introduced in RTView 6.4 that caused the Hawk Agent discovery to 
	slow down in cases where the Hawk Agents were slow in servicing requests for 
	MicroAgent Descriptors. This has been fixed. 

Demos

Energy Management Demo

20890: Corrected mismatch in column names in the data attachment
	Some column names in the eSphere demo were not corrected when the database was 
	changed to use HSQLDB. This has been corrected. 

Display Server

21435: Mouse wheel scrolling for tables when using Firefox 42 or newer
	In prior releases, the thin client did not support scrolling of table objects 
	using the mouse wheel, if webGridFlag = false, in Firefox version 42 or newer. 
	This is fixed. 

21436: Fixed crash with -clearsubs:true command line option
	A bug has been fixed which caused the display server to throw a 
	StackOverflowError at startup if the command-line option "-clearsubs:true" was 
	specified. This bug was introduced in RTView 6.4. 
	
	(Note: The default value of the clearsubs option is true, so there is no need to 
	specify -clearsubs:true). 

Functions

21262: Dataserver no longer turns inactive (zombie process) after an "Unlock Error"
	A problem in the function data source has been fixed that could cause an 
	IllegalMonitorStateException to be thrown while updating a function. 

General

18198: New option to change default fonts or use additional fonts
	The Extended Font feature, new in this release, allows users to extend the list 
	of fonts available on RTView displays beyond the 12 standard fonts. Extended 
	fonts can be used in the Builder/Viewer, or in the thin client, or in both 
	deployments. 
	
	The configuration and use of this feature requires a basic understanding of font 
	technology and terms, described below. 
	
	Two example configurations are provided in the RTV_HOME/custom/fonts directory
	
	
	BACKGROUND
	
	The following terms apply to font usage in RTView.
	
	- System fonts: System or platform fonts are provided by the local operating 
	system. A web browser can make use of the system fonts from the local (client) 
	machine. The system fonts vary between different operating systems, and between 
	versions of the same operating system. This presents a challenge to web 
	developers, since a font available to a browser on one system (e.g. Tahoma on 
	Windows) may not be available to a browser running on other systems, although 
	similar fonts (e.g. Helvetica on Mac OS) may be available. The solution is to (a) 
	use only web-safe fonts, (b) use font families or font stacks, or (c) use web 
	(downloaded) fonts. These are described below. 
	
	- Web-safe fonts: The serif, sans-serif, and monospace fonts are known as 
	"web-safe" or standard fonts because they are available in all browsers on all 
	platforms. They are also available in Java on all platforms. 
	
	- Font-family: A font-family is a comma separated list of font names, used in the 
	CSS style applied to text elements on a web page. The browser will attempt to use 
	the fonts in the order they are listed until it finds one that is available. This 
	browser also applies this process on a per-character basis if the text element 
	contains a character not defined in the specified font. The last font in the list 
	should be a web-safe font. This technique is also known as a "font stack" or 
	"fallback fonts". For example: 
	
		font-family: Helvetica, Lucida Sans, Arial, sans-serif
	 
	- Web fonts: A web page can identify a specific font to be downloaded from a web 
	server, rather than using a stack of system fonts. A specific font downloaded 
	from the web server is known as a "web font". 
		
	- Font files: A file that defines a font. A common format is TrueType (.ttf). In 
	a java application, additional fonts can be used by providing TrueType font 
	(.ttf) files. On a web page, web fonts can be downloaded as ttf files. Other 
	formats (.woff, .woff2) are also supported for web fonts. Font files are 
	licensed. Many system fonts are licensed by the OS vendor (e.g. Microsoft). A 
	large number of fonts are available under open source licenses (Apache 2.0, SIL). 
	The Web Font example in the custom/fonts directory uses several open source fonts 
	published on http://www.google.com/fonts. 
	
	
	FONTS IN RTVIEW
	
	By default RTView uses only the web-safe font types: serif, sans-serif, and 
	monospace. For each web-safe font type RTView provides a plain, bold, italic, and 
	bold-italic style, for a total of 12 font choices. Each is assigned an index, as 
	follows: 
	
	  1: sans-serif, plain
	  2: monospace, bold
	  3: monospace, plain
	  4: serif, plain
	  5: monospace, italic
	  6: serif, bold
	  7: sans-serif, bold
	  8: sans-serif, italic
	  9: serif, bold italic
	 10: serif, italic
	 11: sans-serif, bold italic
	 12: monospace, bold italic
	 
	The font indexes are used when configuring a font property (e.g. labelTextFont) 
	on an object in the RTView display Builder. 
	
	The Extended Font feature allows users to extend the list of fonts available on 
	RTView displays, beyond the 12 standard fonts. Extended fonts can be used in the 
	builder/viewer, or in the thin client, or in both deployments. 
	
	For use in Java (builder/viewer, display server) an extended font must be 
	available from a local .ttf or .otf file. 
	
	In the thin client, either the font-family (stack) or the web font (downloaded) 
	technique can be used. The font stack technique provides better performance and 
	requires no additional font files or licensing since it uses system fonts already 
	available on the local system. However, since different physical fonts are used, 
	a text element that uses a font stack may have a different appearance and size 
	when viewed in a browser on (say) Windows, vs iOS, vs Android. The web font 
	technique provides a consistent appearance and size in all browsers regardless of 
	the local platform, but requires additional time to download the web fonts the 
	first time the page is opened. Fonts that contain non-latin characters (Cyrillic, 
	Arabic, and especially CJK) can be large. Also, web fonts should be properly 
	licensed. 
	
	For use in a browser as a web font, the font must be downloadable as a .ttf, 
	.woff, .woff2, or .otf file. Internet Explorer will complain if a .ttf file is 
	not embeddable (most Microsoft-provided .ttf files are not embeddable). 
	
	
	EXTENDED FONTS CONFIGURATION AND USE
	
	The extended fonts are specified in a table created by the user, with one row per 
	font. The table has these columns: 
	
	- Index (int): the font's index, an integer value between 13 and 255 (see Note 1 
	below) 
	- Name (string): the name of the font as it should appear in the Builder property 
	sheet and font selection list 
	- Bold (Boolean): if true, a bold style font is created
	- Italic (Boolean): if true, an italic font style is created
	- CSS Font Family (string): for use by the RTView thin client (see Note 2)
	- URL (string): for the thin client, when using web fonts (see Note 3)
	- TTF Path (string): a local path to the fonts .ttf file, for use by RTView 
	builder/viewer and display server (see Note 4) 
	
	The required columns are Index, Name, Bold, and Italic. The other columns are 
	optional depending on the deployment(s) of interest, and the type of fonts used. 
	
	*** The extended font table must be made available to RTView by creating a global 
	function named RtvExtFontTable. *** 
	 
	The RtvExtFontTable function must return a table that contains the required 
	column names and types listed above. Typically, the RtvExtFontTable function 
	would be a global Reference function with its Table argument attached to a static 
	XML or SQL table. 
	
	- Note 1: The examples in the custom/fonts directory use index values of 100 and 
	above, as a convention. Index values of 1 - 12 can also be specified, but that 
	will override the default RTView font assignments and is not recommended. 
	
	- Note 2: The CSS Font Family string is used by the thin client to assign the CSS 
	font style to a client-side object that uses the corresponding font. If the thin 
	client should use a system font, then the string should specify the font family 
	or "font stack" to be used, as a comma-separated list of fallback font names, 
	ending with a web-safe font. For example: 
	
		Trebuchet MS, Helvetica, sans-serif
	   
	If instead the thin client should download a web font, then the string in the CSS 
	Font Family column can contain a single name, for example: 
	
		Roboto
	   
	- Note 3: The URL column can be omitted or left blank if the thin client should 
	use a system font. If the thin client should download a web font then the value 
	in this column should specify the URL for the thin client to use to download the 
	font file. For example: 
	
		fonts/Roboto-Regular.ttf
		
	The above example assumes that the user has created a subdirectory named "fonts" 
	beneath the rtvdisplay servlet's webapp directory, and it contains the indicated 
	ttf file. The URL can also specify an address on a different web server (e.g. 
	http://somewhere.com/fonts/xyz.woff), provided that server supports CORS 
	(cross-domain) requests. 
	
	Internet Explorer will complain if a .ttf file is not embeddable (most 
	Microsoft-provided .ttf files are not embeddable). 
	
	
	CHARACTER SETS
	
	The web-safe fonts support all Unicode characters. Other fonts may not. (In 
	particular, open source fonts may not support CJK characters). If a text string 
	contains a character that is not found in the specified font, the effect is as 
	follows: 
	
	In a browser, if a text element contains a character that is not found in the 
	specified font, the browser will try the fonts listed in the font-family, and 
	finally its default web-safe font, until it finds a font that supports the 
	character. This means the thin client always displays all of the characters in a 
	text string, but when using an extended font non-Latin characters may be 
	displayed using a fallback or system font. 
	
	In a Java application, if a text string contains a character that is not defined 
	in the specified font, the character may appear as a "tofu" character (a box or a 
	?) or it may not be drawn. This means that the builder/viewer will display tofu 
	or empty characters for non-Latin characters that are not found in an extended 
	font. This is also the case for the thin client, for text objects that are 
	rendered in the display server and not in the browser. 
	
	The google Noto Sans CJK fonts are in .OTF format with Postscript Type 1 glyphs 
	(.OTF w/PS Type1) which is not recognized by Java. 
	
	
	EXAMPLES
	
	Two example configurations are provided in the RTV_HOME/custom/fonts directory. 
	See the README.txt file in that directory for more information. The beginning of 
	the README file contains the same sections that appear above in this note, but 
	see the EXAMPLES section in the README for a description of each example. 

21177: Update-able single value properties now update when the property is removed
	In previous releases, the following update-able properties did not reset to the 
	default value if they were removed. This has been fixed. 
	
	sl.rtview.customWindowTitle
	sl.rtvapm.mx.mxtrace
	sl.rtvapm.km.kmtrace
	sl.rtview.sql.sqltime
	sl.rtview.jmx.jmx_metrics_period
	sl.rtview.alert.notifiertimetrace
	sl.rtview.alert.notifierdebug
	sl.rtview.hawk.hawkdstraceagentstatus

21301: New stop_hsqldb script
	New "stop_hsqldb" scripts for cleanly shutting down an HSQLDB instance are now 
	available. 
	
	The stop_hsqldb script requires a server.rc file in the directory you run it from 
	that is a counterpart to your server.properties file. 
	
	Example server.properties:
	
	server.port=9099
	server.database.0=file:../../DATA/alertdefs
	server.dbname.0=alertdefs
	server.database.1=file:../../DATA/rtvhistory
	server.dbname.1=rtvhistory
	
	Example corresponding server.rc:
	
	urlid alertdefs
	url jdbc:hsqldb:hsql://localhost:9099/alertdefs
	username SA
	password
	urlid rtvhistory
	url jdbc:hsqldb:hsql://localhost:9099/rtvhistory
	username SA
	password
	
	All demos with HSQLDB instances have been updated to include a server.rc file.

21302: Support for enabling/disabling individual db properties
	The properties database has been enhanced to support a new column, PROP_ENABLED. 
	This column is used to enable/disable the use of the property. This allows you to 
	temporarily disable the use of a database property without having to remove it 
	from the database. 
	
	If your application reads properties from a database and you are using the 
	properties database from a previous release, run the following alter table 
	command on your database table to add the new column: 
	
	ALTER TABLE PROP_TABLE ADD PROP_ENABLED INTEGER DEFAULT 1

Logging

19451: Viewer and builder now print copyright to log4j output
	Previously the Display Viewer and Builder did not show the copyright banner in 
	log files created using Log4j. This has been corrected. 

Platform Support

21076: Windows 10 and Edge Browser support
	Windows 10 and the Edge Browser are now supported by RTView products.

RTView Display Panel

21508: Support subtitutions in display value in panel config
	The rtvDisplayPanel tag in a PANELS.ini file now supports using an application 
	level substitution or login substitution for the display value as long as the 
	substitution name starts with a $. For example: 
	
		<?xml version="1.0" ?>
		<panels xmlns="www.sl.com" version="1.0">
		<rtvLayout title="Example">
			<rtvDisplayPanel region="north" name="title" display="$my_title"/>
			<rtvDisplayPanel region="center" name="main"  display="$my_main"/>
		</rtvLayout>
		</panels>

TIBCO EMS Manager

21275: EMS Manager retired
	The TIBCO EMS Manager application is no longer supported and has been removed 
	from RTView Core. It has been replaced by the RTView TIBCO EMS Monitor 
	application. TIBCO EMS Manager users should contact SL about moving over to 
	RTView TIBCO EMS Monitor. 

Transaction Message Monitor

21514: Transaction monitor end-of-life delayed
	In RTView 6.5, the Transaction Monitor was updated with a warning regarding the 
	end of life of that product. The retirement of the Transaction Monitor has been 
	postponed and the warning has been removed. 

Viewer - Applet

21366: Applet support dropped
	Due to dropped support for applet technology from browsers and Oracle, RTView has 
	discontinued support of deploying using java applets. All applet demo examples 
	have been removed from the product 

Version 6.7.0 Release Notes

18875: Support added for property groups for database properties
	The properties database has been enhanced to support a new column, PROP_GROUP. 
	This column is used as an additional optional index when the database properties 
	are processed. Specify the property group for an application using the 
	-propgroup:xx command line option (where xx corresponds to a value in the 
	PROP_GROUP column of your database). If no -propgroup command line option is 
	used, it will query for rows where PROP_GROUP is an empty string. 
	
	Properties queried from the database are ordered as follows:
	
	1. Order by PROP_GROUP according to the order of the -propgroup command line 
	options. 
	2. Within each PROP_GROUP, order by PROP_FILE according to the order of the 
	-properties command line options. 
	3. Within each PROP_FILE, order by PROP_FILTER according to the order of the 
	-propfilter command line options. Note that rows with blank PROP_FILTER that 
	match the PROP_GROUP and PROP_FILE filters are always included. 
	
	If your application reads properties from a database and you are using the 
	properties database from a previous release, run the following alter table 
	command on your database table to add the new column: 
	
	ALTER TABLE PROP_TABLE ADD PROP_GROUP VARCHAR DEFAULT ''

21152: Additional destination (topics/queues) metrics included from EMS Server
	The following columns have been added to the EMS Topics cache:
	
	prefetch
	expiryOverride
	store
	
	The following columns have been added to the EMS queues cache:
	
	prefetch
	expiryOverride
	store
	deliveredMessageCount

Alerts

18023: Alert ds no longer crashes if if indexTypes syntax is incorrect
	In previous releases, the alert data source threw a NullPointerException if there 
	was a syntax error in the indexTypes property. This has been fixed. 

19820: Alert notifications no longer fail if invalid global file is specified in properties
	In previous releases, if an invalid global file was specified in your properties 
	file, alert notifications failed to execute. This has been fixed. 

Builder - Editing

20933: Object selection in builder no longer broken after closing edit dialogs
	In the previous release, the Builder would occasionally exhibit problems with 
	object selection and keyboard focus after the user closed an editing dialog 
	opened from the property sheet. These problems are fixed. 

21221: Tab Control object no longer crashes  the Builder if valueTable cannot be resolved
	A bug in the tab control object (obj_c1tabs) has been fixed that caused the 
	Builder to throw a NullPointerException, or to perform an unexpected drilldown, 
	if a tab control's actionCommand was configured to perform a drilldown but the 
	control's valueTable property was attached to a nonexistent data table. 

Builder - Palette Handling

21046: Graph palette no longer sometimes shows only one object per row
	A problem has been fixed in the Builder which sometimes caused the Graphs tab of 
	the Obejct Palette to display just one graph object per row, with extra spacing 
	on all sides, rather than packing as many objects per row as can fit. 

Data Server

20910: RTVquery no longer hangs when the target data server re-boots
	In previous releases, the rtvquery servlet would occasionally fail to respond to 
	queries after its target data server was restarted. This problem is fixed 

20911: REST servlet enhanced for history queries
	The URL applied to the rtvquery servlet now supports a parameter named "arr". If 
	the value of the arr parameter is 1 then, if fmt = json or jsonp, the javascript 
	array format will be used for data rows in the response. This is intended for use 
	with fmt=jsonp, to reduce the response size. 
	
	Also, server-side paging and sorting are now applied properly to queries on cache 
	history tables. In prior releases, the sorting and paging was applied incorrectly 
	which could give confusing results. 

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

20895: Time range no longer ignored in cache history attachment if multi-column filter value = *
	The following bug in the cache data source has been fixed: If an attachment to a 
	cache history table specifies a time range, and also specifies a filter on 
	multiple columns but the filter value for each of those columns is * then the 
	time range is ignored and all rows from the history table are returned. 

IBMMQ - IBM WebSphere MQ

20871: New Expiry field added to connection definition
	A new field, Expiry, has been added to the definition of IBM MQ connections.

JMS Admin Data Source (for TIBCO EMS only)

20867: Improved performance of ConsumerDetails queries
	The process of getting detail info on EMS Consumers has been optimized; customers 
	who have previously found it necessary to disable collection of this data may 
	find this is no longer necessary. 

20967: ConsumerCount and ProducerCount added to the ServerInfo table
	Two columns have been added to the jmsadm ServerInfo table: ProducerCount and 
	ConsumerCount. These are the total counts before any filtering is applied. 

20977: New destination filter for Consumers and Producers metric data attachments
	The TIBCO EMS Data Adapter has been enhanced to include pattern filters in the 
	collection of Producer and Consumer data. In the Attach To Data Dialog the 
	Pattern field now becomes visible when the metric is Producers or Consumers (as 
	for Topics and Queues). 
	
	These patterns will be used via the Admin API to select the destinations for 
	which Producer and Consumer data will be fetched when the data attachment is 
	updated. This will make the operations faster and more efficient, by virtue of 
	being more specific. 

21146: Queries no longer made against inactive EMS servers configured with JSON
	In version 8.1 of TIBCO EMS a change was made such that inactive EMS servers 
	configured with JSON could no longer be queried via the admin interface. The 
	TIBCO EMS data adapter has been enhanced to detect this condition and avoid 
	making the queries. 

Splunk

19866: Splunk data adapter no longer generates NullPointerException message.
	In previous versions under certain circumstances, the Splunk data adapter would 
	generate a NullPointerException message. This is no longer the case. 

TIBCO Rendezvous Data Source

20975: Enhanced to work with rvtrace version 8.2.0+.
	The TIBCO Rendezvous data source has been enhanced to work with rvtrace version 
	8.2.0+. In 8.2.0, TIBCO modified the rvtrace output to add the SCid and R columns 
	to the Multicast Packet Statistics source rows and to add the SCid column to the 
	Multicast Subject Staticstics source rows. The TIBCO Rendezvous data source has 
	added the SCid and R columns to the RTViewDs.MulticastPacketsSource table and the 
	SCid column to the RTViewDs.MulticastSubjectsSource table. The rvmonitor demo has 
	been updated to show these new columns. 
	
	Note that versions of rvtrace older than 8.2.0 are no longer supported in the 
	TIBCO Rendezvous data source. 

Demos

19855: Demo applets updated to use signed jars
	The RTView Core demo applets provided in the demo Apache Tomcat server 
	(servers\apache-tomcat-6.0.18-sl\webapps\ROOT) have been updated to use .jar 
	files signed with SL's certificate. 
	
	At this time, SL's certificate is valid until May 2018.

Display Server

20929: New logout properly in multi-panel layout
	In the thin client, clicking the Log Off item in the context menu will navigate 
	back to the login screen, after logging off the user. 

21178: Copy Cell Value menu item supported in Chrome & Firefox
	The thin client now supports the "Copy Cell Value" context menu item on the table 
	object, in Chrome (version 43 or newer) and Firefox (version 41 or newer). This 
	menu item allows the user to copy a table cell's text contents to the clipboard. 
	Previously this menu item was only available in Internet Explorer. 
	

Functions

20846: New function: Execute Java Method
	Introduction
	
	The Execute Java Method function allows the user to write code for a Java method 
	that will be executed when the function is updated. The method can take zero or 
	more arguments of type String, Integer, Double, or GmsTabularData, and it can 
	return an object of any of those same types. 
	
	The Java code is saved with the display (.rtv) file that contains the function. 
	On the first update, the function compiles the given java code. Then, on all 
	updates, the function applies the given arguments to the compiled method and 
	executes it. 
	
	The Execute Java Method function is intended for implementing a 'one-of-a-kind' 
	java method that is useful on a single RTView display, in cases where the 
	Evaluate Expression functions are not adequate or perform poorly, and the 
	reusability of a custom function implementation is not required or is 
	inconvenient. 
	Requirements
	
	- The Java Development Kit (JDK) must be installed on systems which will be used 
	to configure or run the Execute Java Method function. The Java Runtime Kit (JRE) 
	is not sufficient since it does not include the java compiler tools. 
	- The person configuring the Execute Java Method function must be familiar with 
	Java. 
	- The person configuring the Execute Java Method function should be familiar with 
	the com.sl.gmsjrt.GmsTabularData class, as described in the RTView customization 
	document, if the function will deal with tabular data. 
	- The Code argument of the function must be a valid code string for a Java method 
	named eval with this signature: public Object eval() 
	- The method can take zero or more arguments of type String, Integer, Double, or 
	GmsTabularData. 
	- The method's return type must be Object, and the returned Object must be a 
	String, Integer, Double, or GmsTabularData instance. 
	- The heap usage of the RTView application increases by about 6 to 10 MB to 
	support the compiler. 
	
	Recommended usage:
	
	The Execute Java Method function is a useful feature but it should be use when 
	appropriate, to avoid maintenance and performance problems. 
	
	- The Execute Java Method function is intended for implementing a 'one-of-a-kind' 
	java method that is useful on a single RTView display, since its result can only 
	be used on the same display (.rtv file) in which it is defined. If a method is 
	needed on multiple RTView displays then it should be implemented in an RTView 
	custom function handler class, instead. 
	  
	- The display containing the Execute Java Method function must only be deployed 
	on systems with the JDK installed, otherwise the function's java code will not be 
	compiled. 
	
	Configuration:
	
	The internal name of the function is EVALJ. Its external name is "Execute Java 
	Method". It appears just after "Evaluate Expression as String" in the dropdown 
	list in the Builder's Edit Function dialog. 
	
	The function takes one predefined string argument named Code, plus any number of 
	user-defined arguments as described later. The Code string must be a java method 
	named eval with this signature: public Object eval(args) For each new instance of 
	the function, the Edit Function dialog will set the Code string to a "skeleton" 
	implementation of the eval method as shown below: 
	
	public Object eval() {
	   return "";
	}
	
	The eval method can take zero or more arguments of type String, Integer, Double, 
	or GmsTabularData. The method's return type must be declared as Object, but it 
	can return a String, Integer, Double, or GmsTabularData object. 
	 
	The arguments declared for the eval() method become arguments to the rtview 
	function instance, just like the %x, %y tokens in an Evaluate Expression 
	function. For example, here is a simple eval method that concatenates two String 
	args named s1 and s2: 
	
	 public Object eval(String s1, String s2) {
		return s1 + ":" + s2;
	}
	
	In the Edit Function dialog, s1 and s2 will appear as argument fields so their 
	values can be assigned to constants or attached to data: 
	
	Here is a more complex example that takes a GmsTabularData argument. The input 
	table is assumed to have an integer column named Value, and the function returns 
	a copy of the input table with all rows removed where the Value column item is < 
	25 or > 75. The method makes use of utility methods named cloneInputTable and 
	printErrorMessage, which are defined in the base class named 
	com.sl.gmsjrtview.GmsJavaCodeExecutor: 
	
	public Object eval(GmsTabularData t) {
		if (t == null)
			return t;
		int valCol = t.getColumnIndex("Value");
		if (valCol < 0) {
			printErrorMessage("no Value column in table");
			return t;
		}
		ArrayList<Integer> rowsToRemove = new ArrayList<Integer>();
		for (int row = 0; row < t.getNumRows(); ++row) {
			int val = t.getIntCellValue(row, valCol);
			if (val < 25 || val > 75) {
				rowsToRemove.add(row);
			}
		}
		if (rowsToRemove.size() > 0) {
			// don't modify input table, clone it
			t = cloneInputTable(t);
			t.removeRows(rowsToRemove);
		}
		return t;
	}
	
	
	For documentation on the GmsTabularData and GmsJavaCodeExecutor classes, refer to 
	the javadoc pages in the customization section of the RTView documentation. 
	Compilation:
	
	The java code entered as the value of the Code argument for a function named F101 
	is used to generate the source code for a subclass of 
	com.sl.gmsjrtview.GmsJavaCodeExecutor, as follows: 
	
	package rtvfuncs;
	import com.sl.gmsjrt.GmsTabularData;
	import com.sl.gmsjrtview.*;
	import java.util.*;
	public class F101_Cnn extends com.sl.gmsjrtview.GmsJavaCodeExecutor {
	// begin user-defined code
	public Object eval() {
	        return "";
	}
	// end user-defined code
	}
	
	The suffix _Cnn on the generated class name is not significant and will vary. The 
	source code for the class will be generated and compiled the first time the 
	function is updated after the .rtv file is loaded. In the Builder, source code 
	for the class will also be generated and compiled each time the user changes the 
	code for the eval method and clicks OK or Apply. The compiler will use the same 
	classpath as the RTView application. 
	
	No external .java or .class files are produced for an Execute Java Method 
	function. All source generation, compilation, and class loader operations are 
	performed using memory buffers. The user-defined java code for the eval method is 
	saved with the function in the .rtv file. 
	
	As shown above, the generated source code imports com.sl.gmsjrtview.*, 
	com.sl.gmsjrt.GmsTabularData, and java.util.*. If additional imports are needed 
	they can be defined on lines above the eval() method in the Code argument, or 
	globally with a property named sl.rtview.function.compiler_import. For example, 
	these lines could be added to an rtview .properties file to import java.sql.* and 
	java.math.* for all function instances: 
	
	sl.rtview.function.compiler_import=java.sql.*;
	sl.rtview.function.compiler_import=java.math.*;
	
	Compiler errors are logged to the console. The complete generated source code, as 
	described above, is shown before the compiler error so that the user can make 
	sense of the line numbers in the error message. 
	
	Examples:
	
	The following eval() implementation returns a table with 2 columns, "Name" and 
	"Value", where the Name column contains "this is row N" and the Value column 
	contains a random integer between 0 and 100. The number of rows in the table is 
	determined by the numRows argument. The "trigger" argument could be attached to 
	the result of a "Date Now" function, to trigger the function periodically. 
	Otherwise it will only update once. 
	
	public Object eval(int numRows, String trigger) {
	    GmsTabularData t = new GmsTabularData();
	    t.addColumn("Name", GmsTabularData.STRING);
	    t.addColumn("Value", GmsTabularData.INTEGER);
	    for (int row = 0; row < numRows; ++ row) {
	        String name = "this is row " + row;
	        int val = (int) (Math.random() * 100);
	        t.addRow("");
	        t.setCellValue(name, row, 0);
	        t.setCellValue(val, row, 1);
	    }
	    return t;
	}
	
	This eval method takes a table as an argument. The input table is assumed to have 
	an integer column named Value (e.g. the table returned from the previous 
	example), and the function returns a copy of the input table with all rows 
	removed where the Value column item is < 25 or > 75: 
	
	public Object eval(GmsTabularData t) {
	    if (t == null)
	        return t;
	    int valCol = t.getColumnIndex("Value");
	    if (valCol < 0)
	        return t;
	    ArrayList<Integer> rowsToRemove = new ArrayList<Integer>();
	    for (int row = 0; row < t.getNumRows(); ++row) {
	        int val = t.getIntCellValue(row, valCol);
	        if (val < 25 || val > 75) {
	            rowsToRemove.add(row);
	        }
	    }
	    if (rowsToRemove.size() > 0) {
	        // don't modify input table, clone it
	        t = cloneInputTable(t);
	        t.removeRows(rowsToRemove);
	    }
	    return t;
	}
	
	This eval method implements a simple counter function. It declares an integer 
	member variable named "count" and increments it on each update and returns the 
	new count. The "trigger" argument could be attached to the result of a "Date Now" 
	function, to trigger the function periodically. Otherwise it will only update 
	once. 
	
	private int count = 0;
	public Object eval(String trigger) {
	    return ++count;
	}
	
	
	This eval method implements a counter function, similar to the previous example, 
	but it demonstrates the use of the skipUpdate() method to prevent updating the 
	function result in certain cases: 
	
	private int count = 0;
	public Object eval(String trigger) {
	    ++count;
	    if (count % 5 == 0) {
	        // don't update result for multiples of 5
	        System.out.println("skip counter update: " + count);
	        skipUpdate();
	    }
	    return count;
	}
	
	This eval method takes a table as an argument. The input table is assumed to have 
	an string column named Status (e.g. production_table in update.xml produced by 
	the RTView xml data simulator). The function returns a copy of the input table 
	with the string in the Status column truncated to the length specified by the 
	second argument, numCharsForStatusCol: 
	
	public Object eval(GmsTabularData prodTable, int numCharsForStatusCol) {
	    if (prodTable == null || prodTable.getNumRows() < 1)
	        return prodTable;
	    prodTable = cloneInputTable(prodTable);
	    int statusCol = prodTable.getColumnIndex("Status");
	    if (statusCol < 0) {
	        printErrorMessage("no Status column");
	        return prodTable;
	    }
	    for (int row = 0; row < prodTable.getNumRows(); ++row) {
	        String sts = prodTable.getCellValue(row, statusCol);
	        if (sts != null && sts.length() > numCharsForStatusCol) {
	            sts = sts.substring(0, numCharsForStatusCol);
	            prodTable.setCellValue(sts, row, statusCol);
	        }
	    }
	    return prodTable;
	}

General

20179: Support custom schedules for SQL queries
	BACKGROUND:
	
	A new Update Mode named "Run Query On Schedule" is now available in the Attach to 
	SQL Data dialog. When that mode is selected, a dropdown list labelled "Schedule 
	Name" appears, allowing the user to select the name of a schedule. 
	
	This new mode is intended to give users more control over when specific queries 
	are run. A schedule is defined by one or more rules. A rule specifies the days of 
	the week, hours of the day, and frequency during those hours that a query should 
	be run. A rule can also specify days of the week or specific dates on which a 
	query should not be run. 
	
	SCHEDULE AND RULE TABLE FORMATS:
	 
	The query schedules are defined in a table with these columns:
	
	# Name : the unique name for the schedule
	# Rules : the name(s) of the rules (see below) that define the schedule, 
	separated by commas 
	# Enabled : set Enabled = false to disable all queries that use the schedule
	# Description  : a description of the schedule
	
	Schedule names should contain only letters, digits, space, underscore and dash. 
	They should not contain newlines, or tabs, or punctuation characters such as 
	colon, semicolon, or comma. The $ character should also not be used in a schedule 
	name to avoid conflicts with substitutions. 
	
	Each schedule is defined by one or more rules. The rules are defined in a table 
	with these columns: 
	
	# Name: the unique name for the rule
	# Days: a list of days of the week (e.g Mon, Wed, Fri) or specific dates 
	(dd-MMM-yyyy) that this rule is in effect. 
	# Start Time: the time of day that this rule goes into effect, in 24 hour 
	HH::mm:ss format. If empty, 00:00:00 is used. 
	# End Time: the time of day that this rule is no longer effect, in 24 hour 
	HH:mm:ss format. If empty, 23:59:59 is used. 
	# Exception: If false, then when this rule is in effect the query is run at the 
	indicated interval. If true, then when this rule is in effect the query is NOT 
	run. 
	# Interval: the time interval between queries when this rule is in effect (e.g. 
	1m, 30m, 1h, etc). 
	# Enabled : if false the rule is never in effect.
	# Time Zone: the name of the time zone for the rule (e.g. US/Central). A blank 
	string indicates the local time zone. 
	
	Rule names should follow the same restrictions as schedule names, described 
	earlier. 
	
	All of the column types in the rule and schedule tables are strings, except for 
	the Enabled and Exception columns, which are boolean. 
	
	EXAMPLES:
	
	Here is a Rule Table with a few Rule examples:
	
	 Name	Exception	Days	Start Time	End Time	Interval	Time Zone	Enabled	Description
	workdays_30m false Mon,Tue,Wed,Thu,Fri 09:00:00 17:00:00 30m true weekdays 9 - 5 
	every 30 min 
	weekends_9_12_15 false Sat,Sun 09:00:00 17:00:00 3h true weekends at 9am, noon, 
	3pm 
	lunch_hour_ex true Mon,Tue,Wed,Thu,Fri 12:00:00 12:59:59 true no queries during 
	lunch 
	holidays_2016_ex true 1-Jan-2016,4-Jul-2016,25-Dec-2016 true no queries during 
	holidays 
	workdays30m_central false Mon,Tue,Wed,Thu,Fri 09:00:00 17:00:00 30m US/Central 
	true weekdays 9 - 5 every 30 min in US/Central timezone 
	 
	The "workdays_30m" rule will run a query every 30 minutes between 9 am and 5 pm, 
	Mon - Fri. 
	
	The "weekends_9_12_15" rule will run a query on weekends at 9am, noon, and 3pm.
	
	The "lunch_hour_ex" rule is an exception rule and prevents a query from being run 
	between 12:00 and 12:59 on weekdays. 
	
	The "holidays_2016_ex" rule is an exception rule and prevents a query from being 
	run on 3 specific dates in 2016. (Note that this rule does not specify a Start 
	Time or End Time, so it is in effect for the entire day). 
	The "workdays30m_central" rule is the same as the "workdays_30m" rule, except 
	that it uses the US/Central timezone when checking the time of day against the 
	Start/End Time. 
	
	Here is a Schedule Table using some of the above rules:
	
	 Name	Rules	Enabled	Description
	Weekday30 9to5 workdays_30m, lunch_hour_ex, holidays_ex true weekdays @30 minutes 
	from 9 - 5, except lunchtime & holidays 
	AllWeek workdays_30m, weekends_9_12_15 true weekdays @30 minutes from 9 - 5, 
	weekends @ 9 & noon & 3pm 
	 test_timezone	workdays30m_central	true	weekdays 9 - 5, in central timezone
	
	CREATING SCHEDULES AND RULES:
	
	RTView does not provide any predefined rules or schedules nor does it provide a 
	UI for creating rules and schedules. Instead, the user can create a rule table 
	and schedule table in a database, an XML file, or any other table that can be 
	retrieved using an RTView data source. The tables must contain the columns 
	specified above. 
	
	The user must make the schedule table available to RTView by creating a global 
	function named RtvScheduleTable, using Function Type = Reference, and attaching 
	the function's Table argument to the XML file, or SQL query, or other rtview data 
	attachment that retrieves the schedule table. The attachment can specify a remote 
	Data Server if necessary. 
	
	Similarly, the user makes the schedule available to RTView by creating a global 
	function named RtvScheduleRuleTable, using Function Type = Reference, and 
	attaching the function's Table argument to the rtview data attachment that 
	retrieves the rule table. 
	
	If schedules and rules are added or modified at runtime, then the next update of 
	the data attachment used as the input to the RtvScheduleTable and 
	RtvScheduleRuleTable will apply those changes to all SQL queries using those 
	schedules and rules. 
	
	SCHEDULE SELECTION:
	
	Typically, when configuring a scheduled query in the Attach to SQL Data dialog, 
	the user selects the name of a schedule from the Schedule Name dropdown list. But 
	there are two other possibilities: (1) The user can enter a substitution string, 
	e.g. $mySchedule or (2) the user can enter a list of rule names separated by 
	commas, e.g. rule1,rule2,rule3. The 2nd option creates an "anonymous schedule" 
	and is useful in the case where no schedule is defined with the desired set of 
	rules. 
	
	DIAGNOSTICS:
	
	Two columns named Schedule and Next Query Time have been added to the 
	RTViewDS.Keys meta-table of the SQL data source. For each SQL query in the table, 
	the Schedule column shows the name of the Schedule, if any, configured for the 
	query. The Next Query Time shows the next time the query will be run according to 
	its schedule or, if the query doesn't have a schedule, the next time it will be 
	run according to its configured query interval. For Static and On Demand queries, 
	the Next Query Time will show 1/1/1970 GMT. 
	
	If the -sqltime option is specified, the console log will contain an additional 
	message for scheduled queries, indicating the next time the query will be run: 
	
	query for <schedule name>,<rule name> next due at <time>: <query string or query 
	ID> 
	   
	For example:
	
	query for Weekday30 9to5,workdays_30m next due at 2015-Oct-05 16:30:00: select * 
	from "plants" 
	
	The SQL data source checks for scheduled queries that should be run on each 
	update cycle. The default update cycle is 2 seconds. This means that a query will 
	typically be run within a second or two of its scheduled time. For example, if 
	the Next Query Time for a query is 16:30:00 the query may actually run between 
	16:30:00 and 16:30:02. 
	
	OPTIONS:
	
	The accepted formats for days of the week, specific dates, and time zones in the 
	Rule table will be printed to the console if the option 
	-scheduler.dumpFormats:true is specified on the command line. 
	
	For time zone, names that don't specify daylight savings, such as "US/Eastern", 
	should be used. 
	
	To add additional formats for specifying dates in rules, use the property 
	sl.rtview.scheduler.dateFormat, for example: 
	
	   sl.rtview.scheduler.dateFormat=MMM dd, yyyy

20815: Fixed array index exception thrown when client receives bad table delta
	A bug has been fixed that in certain conditions caused an 
	ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException to be thrown by a client when it received an 
	update from a data server. This was most likely to occur if the update was for 
	the current table of a cache which recently had multiple rows removed via its 
	rowsToDeleteTable property. 

Layouts

20966: New option to hide draggable divider on panel  in thin client
	In an RTView panels file with resizable dividers enabled, a panel can be 
	configured to hide its divider in the thin client by setting nodivider="true". 
	
	For example, in this panels file the divider that would normally appear below the 
	north panel is hidden: 
	
	<?xml version="1.0" ?>
	<panels xmlns="www.sl.com" version="1.0">
	<rtvLayout title="My Panels" dividers="true">
		<rtvDisplayPanel region="north" display="title.rtv" nodivider="true"/>
	<rtvAccordionPanel region="west" width="200" height="544" navdata="navtree.xml"/> 
		<rtvDisplayPanel region="center" name="main" display="test1"/>
	</rtvLayout>
	</panels>
	
	The nodivider attribute is only supported in the thin client, it is ignored by 
	the viewer. It is also ignored on the center panel. 

Licensing

20926: Generic PIN no longer returned on Red Hat Linux 7
	The license registration process will now correctly obtain a non-generic PIN from 
	Redhat Linux 7 servers. 

Object Library

20828: New bgClipTextFlag property added to obj_rect* label objects
	The following objects support a new property named bgClipTextFlag:
	
	    obj_rect_il
	    obj_rect_ilv
	    obj_rect_ilvs
	    obj_rect_ilvx_da3
	    obj_rect_ilvx_ra4
	    obj_ind_discrete
	
	If the object's bgClipTextFlag is checked and its bgVisFlag is checked then its 
	label and/or its valueString (whichever string is drawn within the background 
	rectangle) will be clipped by the object's background rectangle. 
	That is, the object's label will be clipped by the background rectangle if 
	labelTextPosX is Inside Left, Center, or Inside Right AND labelTextPosY is Inside 
	Top, Center, or Inside Bottom . The object's value or valueString (if any) will 
	be clipped by the background rectangle if valueTextPosX is Inside Left, Center, 
	or Inside Right AND valueTextPosY is Inside Top, Center, or Inside Bottom. 
	
	In the Builder, the bgClipTextFlag property appears in the Background category on 
	the property sheet. By default, bgClipTextFlag is unchecked. The property is not 
	visible if bgVisFlag is unchecked. 
	
	Only the visible text can be copied to the clipboard, in the thin client.

21219: bgClipTextFlag property now hidden for unsupported background styles
	In the Builder the bgClipTextFlag property is hidden for the indicator objects 
	obj_ind_multi, obj_ind_limits, and obj_ind_discrete if the bgStyle is set to 
	Circle or Diamond, since the flag is only supported for rectangular background 
	styles. 
	
	In prior releases the bgClipTextFlag property was always visible but did not work 
	in those 2 cases. 

Bar Charts

21006: New property rowSeriesTraceMode added to the bargraph object.
	A property named rowSeriesTraceMode has been added to the bargraph object. This 
	allows row-series behavior to be enabled or disabled on the traces independently 
	of the row-series setting for the bars. 
	
	The default value of rowSeriesTraceMode is "Use rowSeriesFlag". With this value, 
	the row-series behavior is enabled or disabled on the bars and the traces by the 
	rowSeriesFlag property, as in previous releases. 
	
	To enable row-series behavior on the bars but not the traces, check the 
	rowSeriesFlag property and set traceRowSeriesMode = Off. 
	
	To enable row-series behavior on the traces but not the bars, uncheck the 
	rowSeriesFlag property and set traceRowSeriesMode = On. 

Composite Object

20985: Fixes to objects with webLabelFlag enabled
	Two problems involving the webLabelFlag property have been fixed.
	
	1. If a composite object has a command or drilldown defined, and the subdisplay 
	within the composite contains an label object with webLabelFlag = 1, then a click 
	on that label object does not trigger the composite's command or drilldown. 
	
	2. Link lines drawn between objects with webLabelFlag = 1 may be mispositioned.
	
	Both problems are fixed.

Control Objects

20877: New property selectedValueColumnName to enhanced tree node selection
	A property named selectedValueColumnName has been added to the tree/accordion 
	controls. The property can be used to specify the name of the column in the 
	valueTable to which the selectedValue should be compared, for selecting a node in 
	the tree/accordion. 
	
	This can be useful in cases where the value from one column (specified by 
	valueColumnName) in the valueTable should be used to set the $value substitution 
	when a tree node is clicked by the user, but a value in a different column 
	(specified by selectedValueColumnName) should be used to highlight a tree node 
	via the selectedValue property, 
	
	If the selectedValueColumnName property is not set, then the existing 
	valueColumnName property value will be used instead as in prior versions when 
	highlighting the tree node that matches selectedValue. 

20921: Tree/accordion L&F enhancements
	Several properties have been added to the tree (obj_c1tree) and accordion 
	(obj_c1accordion) controls. 
	
	In all cases, the default value of the new property matches the default behavior 
	of the control in previous releases. 
	
	bgBorderFlag : This property appears in the Background category in the Builder's 
	property sheet, for the tree and the accordion. If bgBorderFlag is checked then a 
	1 pixel dark border is drawn around the control, otherwise no border is drawn. By 
	default the flag is checked and the border is visible, as it was in all prior 
	releases. [Note that the border color and width are not configurable, only the 
	visibility]. 
	
	accordionCollapseFlag : This property appears in the Interaction category in the 
	Builder's property sheet, for the accordion only. If accordionCollapseFlag is 
	checked, only one branch of the accordion is open at a time. If the user clicks a 
	node to open another branch, then the previously open branch is automatically 
	closed. If accordionCollapseFlag is unchecked, opening another branch has no 
	affect on other open branches. By default the flag is checked, to match the 
	behavior in all previous releases. 
	
	nodeClosedImage/nodeOpenImage : These two properties appear in the Node category 
	in the Builder's property sheet, for the tree only. Use these properties to 
	specify the names of the images to be shown to the left of a closed/open parent 
	(non-leaf) tree node, respectively. By default these properties are blank, 
	indicating that the default closed/open images should be used, as in all previous 
	releases. 
	
	nodeSelectColor/nodeSelectTextColor : These two properties appear in the Node 
	category in the Builder's property sheet, for the tree only. Use these properties 
	to set the background and text colors for the selected tree node. If set to 
	"Default", then the platform or browser default selection colors are used. 
	
	In addition, two thin client problems have been fixed: (1) A problem specific to 
	IE9 has been fixed in which a drilldown triggered from an accordion control would 
	sometimes fail and leave the target panel in the "Loading..." state. (2) A 
	problem that caused the navigation panel containing a tree/accordion control or 
	occasionally other panels to have the incorrect initial size has been fixed. 

20922: Padding and hovering enhancements for the tab control
	Several properties have been added to the tab control(obj_c1tabs). 
	
	In all cases, the default value of the new property matches the default behavior 
	of the control in previous releases. 
	
	1. paddingVertical : Extra padding, in pixels, to add above and below the label 
	of each tab. This can be used to make the tabs taller without increasing the font 
	size. 
	
	2. paddingHorizontal : Extra padding, in pixels, to add to the left and right of 
	the label of each tab. This can be used to make the tabs wider, without 
	increasing the font size. The default value is zero. 
	
	3. webHoverTabColor: The background color for an unselected tab when the cursor 
	is over it. The default value is the same as the normal tab background color. 
	This property only affects the thin client, it is ignored in the builder/viewer. 
	
	4. webHoverTextColor: The text color for an unselected tab when the cursor is 
	over it. The default value is the same as the normal tab text color. This 
	property only affects the thin client, it is ignored in the builder/viewer. 

20965: New properties to set selected tab bg and text color
	The tab control (obj_c1tabs) supports new properties named selectBgColor and 
	selectTextColor to set the background and text color of the selected tab. The 
	default value for both is Default, meaning that the background color of the 
	selected tab will be a brighter shade of the unselected tabs in the thin client, 
	and a darker shade in the viewer, and the text color of the selected tab is the 
	same as the unselected tabs. 

Tables

20996: Enable copy to clipboard on multiselect Kendo grid
	The text in selected row or rows of the web (kendo) grid can now be copied to the 
	clipboard by pressing Ctrl+c when the grid has keyboard focus. 
	
	Only text cells are copied. If a cell contains an image, its value is not copied 
	to the clipboard. The grid must have keyboard focus for the Ctrl+c keystroke to 
	have effect. 

Trend Charts

20625: Text properties handling in html5 chart improved
	The following problems have been fixed in the thin client for trend chart objects 
	with webChartFlag enabled: 
	
	1). For obj_trendgraph02, the labelTextColor property now sets the color of the 
	axes labels and lines, as expected. Previously in the thin client the axes lines 
	and labels were always black. 
	
	2) For obj_trendgraph02, the labelTextFont and labelTextHeight property now set 
	the font used for the chart's title as expected. Previously they were ignored. 
	
	3) On mouseover, the text color of legend items no longer changes to black.

Platform Support

20734: Deprecate Windows installers & Bundled Docs
	The Windows Installers for RTView Core have been deprecated. Windows users should 
	now use the cross-platform .zip archive. Please see the documentation for more 
	instructions on how to install RTView. 
	
	Also, the User Guide is now available as a separate downloadable PDF, rather than 
	bundled in the product installation. 

Security

21179: Check column names in servlet URL for code injection attacks
	The rtvquery servlet will now encode any < or > characters that appear in the 
	"cols" parameter as < and > in the response, to avoid possible XSS hacks. 

Version 6.6.0 Release Notes

20643: New option to restrict number of characters in alert comments in the alert ds
	The Alert data source has been enhanced with a new Maximum Characters Allowed in 
	Comments Field property to limit the number of characters it will store in the 
	Comments field. In previous releases, new comments were appended to the existing 
	contents of the Comments field with no limit on the amount of text. This caused 
	problems for alert persistence and alert history if the Comment field became 
	longer than corresponding database field could handle. 
	
	For this enhancement, the order of the comments has been reversed so that new 
	comments are added before existing contents in the Comments field. If the Maximum 
	Characters Allowed in Comments Field is greater than 0 and a new comment is added 
	to an alert, the content of the Comments field will be trimmed by removing 
	characters from the end of the contents if necessary to stay under the limit. 
	
	By default, this feature is disabled and the Comments field will grow unbounded 
	as new comments are added. To enable the limit, set the Maximum Characters 
	Allowed in Comments Field in the Alerts tab of the Application Options dialog to 
	a value greater than 0. You can set it using the following property: 
	
	sl.rtview.alert.commentlimit
	
	This comment limit is be available via a data attachment to alert-commentlimit to 
	facilitate building a UI that will prevent users to enter comments longer than 
	this limit. Note that the UI text entry limit should be set to 100 characters 
	less than the comment limit in order to account for the time stamp, user name and 
	hard returns between comments. 
	
	Persisted alerts with comments from a previous versions will have mixed order on 
	the Comments contents. It will be oldest->newest for persisted comments, then 
	newest->oldest for new comments added in this and later releases. Persisted 
	comments from previous versions that have been persisted and are longer than the 
	specified Maximum Characters Allowed in Comments Field will be trimmed on 
	startup. 

Alerts

20664: New option to exit if alert persistence is enabled but database table is unavailable
	The Alert data source has been enhanced with a new property:
	
	sl.rtview.alert.exitOnPersistInitFailed
	
	This property controls what happens when alert persistence is enabled but cannot 
	be initialized due to a database problem or configuration issue. When 
	exitOnPersistInitFailed is set to false (default), RTView will initialize the 
	alerts with persistence disabled. This is the behavior in previous releases. When 
	exitOnPersistInitFailed is set to true, RTView will exit after the persistence 
	initialization has failed without initializing the alerts. 

Builder

20330: Support aligning and distributing objects against objects from include files
	The Builder has been enhanced to support Aligning and Distributing objects in the 
	local .rtv file against objects in an included .rtv file. When the selection 
	contains both objects in the local file and objects in an include file, ony the 
	objects in the local file will move. Objects in include files can still only be 
	edited directly in the include file. 

20693: Builder no longer fails on Mac with JDK 1.7 or greater
	The RTView Builder no longer fails on Mac with JDK 1.7 or greater.

Builder - Editing

20091: Display Data option enabled for read-only data attachments
	The Builder has been enhanced so that the Display Data option is now available 
	for read-only data attachments. 

Commands

17078: Data attachments in multi-commands now work in thin client
	In prior releases, data attachments used in commands within a multiple command 
	did not work in a display server deployment. This is fixed. 

19854: Email command no longer garbles Japanese chars in name of attached file
	The Send Email command no longer garbles Japanese and other non-ascii characters 
	in the names of files attached to an email. 

Data Historian

20159: Sync up data from the history cache when historian starts
	The Historian supports a new option named persistInitTimeRange which affects the 
	cache persistence feature. 
	
	Normally, when the cache persistence feature is enabled in the historian, the 
	historian begins collecting cache history data starting at the time when each 
	data server connects. This is adequate in most situations. The 
	persistInitTimeRange option can be used to specify a time range, in seconds, back 
	from the current time that the historian should get cache history data from the 
	data server. This can be useful if the historian is started sometime after the 
	data server, so the data server has collected cache history that hasn't been sent 
	to the historian. For example, if the data server was started an hour before the 
	historian, then the historian could be started as follows, so that it will 
	request an hour of cache history from the data server: 
	
	   run_historian -persistCaches:true -persistInitTimeRange:3600

20637: New option to limit length of strings from cache table stored in db
	The historian has been enhanced to support a limit on the length of a string from 
	a cache table column that it will store in the database. If a string is longer 
	than the specified limit, it will be truncated to the limit before it is stored 
	in the database table. This can avoid SQL exceptions encountered when the length 
	of a string exceeds the capacity of the column's data type (for example, 4000 
	characters in an VARCHAR2 column in Oracle). 
	
	The limit is specified by a new property named stringColMaxLen. This can be 
	specified in HISTORY.ini as follows: 
	
	stringColMaxLen 3500
	
	It can also be specified on the command line or a properties file. By default the 
	property has no value, so no limit is enforced. 

Compaction

19992: New Smooth Compaction configuration options
	New arguments have been added to customize how compaction smoothing is performed.
	
	 -smoothingonly 
	Run smoothing only without data being provided
	
	-smoothcompaction:table1,table2
	Restrict the tables being smoothed to those specified

20019: Compaction smoothing no longer sets incorrect "run after" date
	Previously, the smooth compaction option caused an an incorrect "run after" date 
	to be set for further compaction. This could result in a small portion of data 
	not being compacted. This has been fixed. 

20067: Data retention (purging) now correctly performed after compaction/smoothing
	Previously, database retention logic was incorrectly postponed after 
	smoothing/compaction had taken place on a table. This could result in the 
	retention of more data than specified in historian configuration. This has been 
	fixed. 

20187: Option to perform compaction for a time range prior to "now"
	An option was added to the Historian to allow for the smoothing process to only 
	go back as far as a specified range in the form: 
	
	     -smoothCompactionRecent:NN Where NN is '1d' or '1w'

20254: Retention-only compaction now executed correctly
	Previously the historian would fail to run compaction if the Compaction Rules 
	consisted of a single rule that only specified a duration of Raw data (-). 
	
	This has been fixed.

Data Server

20138: add ProcessName, PID columns to ClientData attrib of data server mbean
	The data server's Manager mbean has a tabular attribute named ClientData which 
	contains one row for each client connected to the data server. In this release 
	the ClientData table has two new columns named PID and Process Name. These are 
	intended to help administrators identify the process that corresponds to each 
	client connection. 
	
	The value that appears in the Process Name column depends on the type of client. 
	If the client is an RTView application, then the Process Name shows the value of 
	the PROCESS_NAME property when the app was started. If the client process was 
	started with a standard RTView script (e.g. run_viewer, run_displayserver, etc) 
	then the Process Name will be viewer, builder, dataserver, displayserver, or 
	historian. For a server, a "d" at the end of the process name indicates it was 
	started with the -daemon option. If the PROCESS_NAME property was undefined when 
	the client process was started, then the Process Name will be RTView (the 
	viewer), RTView Display Builder, Display Server, Data Server, or Historian, or 
	the OEM names assigned to those applications. If the client is the viewer applet, 
	then "applet" is appended to the name. 
	
	If the client is the rtvdata or rtvquery servlet, the Process Name will be 
	RTVDataServlet and rtvquery, respectively, or the custom servlet name that has 
	been configured for the deployed servlet instance. 
	
	The PID column shows the PID (process ID) of the client process. Typically the 
	PID column value will appear as nnnn@hostname, where nnnn is the PID from the 
	client's host system (as reported by jps, top, or tasklist) and hostname is the 
	name of the client's host. If the client is the rtvdata or rtvquery servlet, then 
	the PID will correspond to the app server (e.g. tomcat) process on the client 
	host. The PID column may be blank if the client is unable to obtain its PID from 
	the local operating system. The @hostname portion may be omitted if it cannot be 
	obtained from the local operating system. 
	
	The PID and Process Name columns will both be blank if the client process is 
	running an older version of RTView that does not have this enhancement. 

20231: Cache extend-by-sql option now supported in REST api
	The REST (rtvquery) servlet now supports the "Extend with SQL" option on queries 
	of cache history tables. This is enabled by setting the parameter named sqlex to 
	true in a query URL. For example, the following URL is a query of the history 
	table of a cache named Apps for the past 24 hours with the Extend with SQL option 
	set: 
	
	http://host/rtvquery/cache/Apps/history?fmt=text&tr=86400&sqlex=true
	
	Note that the new option only applies to a history table query, and only in the 
	case where the time range (tr), begin time (tb), or end time (te) parameter is 
	also specified. Use this option with caution as it may generate a large result. 

20596: Fixed duplication in connection error messages
	A bug has been fixed which caused duplication of log messages when a client lost 
	its connection to a data server. 

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

18403: Fixed cache bug with maxNumberOfCurrentRows and blank timestampColumnName
	The cache data source no longer throws a NullPointerException if a cache has 
	maxNumberOfCurrentRows > 0 and a blank timestampColumnName. 

20191: Prevent data with timestamp < historyTimeSpan from going to history
	In prior releases, a row with a timestamp older than a cache's historyTimeSpan 
	could be added to the cache's history table and would not be removed until the 
	next update. In this release this has been fixed so that such a row is not added 
	to the history table in the first place. 

JMS Data Source

20767: xml parser no longer throws exception if token >= 8192 chars
	In previous releases, the JMS and XML data sources would throw an 
	ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException if an XML string token contained 8192 or more 
	characters and none of those characters was a space. This is fixed. 

JMX Data Source

19993: JMX handler now provides context information for operations
	The API "public String getTarget()" was added to GmsRtViewJmxDataObject for use 
	by JMX custom data handlers. 

RRD Data Source

19986: RRD data adapter fixed for Linux
	In previous versions the the RRD data adapter was not correctly executing rrdtool 
	on linux systems. This has been fixed. 

20589: Improved timezone support
	The Round Robin Database (RRD) data source now handles variations of start/stop 
	times in different time zones. 

SQL Data Source

19563: -sqltryodbc:false is now the default RTView behavior
	By default, the SQL data source will no longer attempt to make an ODBC connection 
	to XYZ if an sql query or command is executed that references a database XYZ but 
	there is no definition of XYZ in OPTIONS.ini. Instead the following error message 
	will appear in the console: 
	
	   Undefined SQL database XYZ
	
	To force the SQL data source to attempt an ODBC connection when an undefined 
	database is referenced as in prior releases, specify the following command-line 
	options: 
	
	-sqltryodbc:true
	
	The option can also be specified in OPTIONS.ini:
	
	sqltryodbc true
	
	or in a properties file:
	
	sl.rtview.sql.sqltryodbc=true
	
	Note that RTView will still make an ODBC connection to database XYZ if it appears 
	in OPTIONS.ini with the odbc driver specified, regardless of the -sqltrodbc 
	option. 
	
	However, note that the ODBC driver is not supported in Java 1.8 or newer. If an 
	ODBC connection is attempted in java 1.8 or newer, the following error messages 
	will appear in the console: 
	
	ClassNotFoundException: sun.jdbc.odbc.JdbcOdbcDriver (ODBC driver is not 
	available in Java 1.8 or newer) 
	   Unable to connect to database <XYZ>:
	         No suitable driver found for jdbc:odbc:XYZ

19928: ODBC option removed from Builder and Historian GUI
	The checkbox labeled "Use ODBC Driver" has been removed from the SQL Add Database 
	dialog in the Builder and also from the Database Options panel of the Historian 
	UI. This change was made because the JdbcOdbc driver is no longer supported by 
	Oracle beginning in Java 1.8 and in earlier releases it was not intended for 
	production use. 
	
	If an existing OPTIONS.ini or HISTORY.ini file contains a database connection 
	that was saved with the "Use ODBC Driver" box checked, those connections will 
	still work in this release if run with java < 1.8. In the new UI, such entries 
	will now show: 
	
	    JDBC Driver Class Name : sun.jdbc.odbc.JdbcOdbcDriver
	    JDBC Database URL : jdbc:odbc:<dbname>
	
	... rather than showing the checked "Use ODBC Driver" box.
	
	But, if run with java 1.8 or newer, the following error will appear in the 
	console for each database that is configured to use ODBC: 
	
	ClassNotFoundException: sun.jdbc.odbc.JdbcOdbcDriver (ODBC driver is not 
	available in Java 1.8 or newer) 

20692: Fixed bogus timeout of sql query
	A problem has been fixed in the SQL datasource which would sometimes cause a 
	query to fail with a bogus timeout error showing a very large and incorrect 
	timeout value. 

Demos

19927: ODBC connections in demos replaced with JDBC connections
	The use of ODBC for the dstutorial and esphere demos has been deprecated. These 
	demos now use JDBC HSQLDB databases. 

20130: Windows start menu simplified
	The Windows Installer now creates a much smaller set of Start Menu shortcuts. The 
	remaining shortcuts are: 
	
	About
	Documentation
	Registration
	RTView Command Prompt
	System Requirements
	Uninstaller

20644: Restricted the number of characters for alert comment in self service alerts
	Set Owner and Comments dialog in the Self Service Alerts demo has been enhanced 
	to respect the new Maximum Characters Allowed in Comments Field property on the 
	Alert data source. If the Maximum Characters Allowed in Comments Field has been 
	set, the field for entering comments enforces a limit of 100 characters less that 
	the Maximum Characters Allowed in Comments Field. This is to allow for the 
	timestamp and user name to be added to the comment. If the character limit is 
	exceeded, an error message is displayed and the Add Comment button is disabled. 

Display Server

18024: Fixed ArrayIndexOutOfBounds on Grid containing more than 1 icon type
	In prior releases, the display server threw an ArrayIndexOutOfBounds exception if 
	a display was opened containing an object grid configured with more than one icon 
	per item, and the display was not rendered in the thin client. This is fixed. 

19512: Support audio and threshold command in thin client
	The thin client now supports the Play Audio File command and threshold commands. 
	In addition, a new property named valueCommandResetTrigger has been added to the 
	display objects that support threshold commands. 
	
	-------------------
	Play Audio File command:
	
	The thin client now supports the Play Audio File command. The support for audio 
	file formats varies by platform, as follows. 
	
	- The Play Audio File command is not supported in Internet Explorer version 8 and 
	older. 
	- In a desktop browser (Internet Explorer 9 or newer, Firefox, Chrome) .wav and 
	.mp3 files are supported. However, Internet Explorer uses the Windows Media 
	Player to play .wav files, which may require user confirmation or may fail due to 
	security settings. 
	- In mobile browsers (e.g. Safari on iOS) only .mp3 files are supported, and the 
	user must click on the "Enable Audio" button that appears in a display the first 
	time an audio command is executed. 
	- The "Beep" command is still not supported in the thin client. 
	
	Note that in the builder/viewer, only .wav files are supported by the Play Audio 
	File command. This has always been the case and has not changed in this release. 
	
	---------------------
	Threshold command:
	
	There are four objects that support threshold commands: obj_circ2d_ilvx_ra4, 
	obj_rect_ilvx_ra4, obj_circ2d_ilvx_da3, and obj_rect_ilvx_da3. A threshold 
	command can be defined using any of the properties named value*Command on those 
	objects. 
	
	In this release, if the webChartFlag property is checked on an object with a 
	threshold command, the threshold command will be executed in a thin client 
	deployment when appropriate. In prior releases, threshold commands were ignored 
	in a thin client deployment. 
	
	If the threshold command is a supported client-side command it will be executed 
	in the browser. The client-side commands are: Play Audio File, Drilldown/Set 
	substitution, Execute Custom Command (if the custom command has a javascript 
	implementation), Open Browser. All other commands are executed by the display 
	server or (for a data source command) in the data server. 
	
	A new property named valueCommandResetTrigger was added to the objects that 
	support threshold commands. Typically, once a threshold command has been executed 
	by one of those objects because the value exceeds or equals a limit, the command 
	will not execute again until the value exceeds another limit. But now, if the 
	value of valueCommandResetTrigger property is changed, then the object's 
	threshold command will be executed again even if the value property has not 
	changed. Changing the value of valueCommandResetTrigger when the object's value 
	is not at or above a limit has no effect. 

19979: Added Sessions table to display server mbean
	The Display Server's JMX Manager mbean supports a new tabular attribute named 
	Sessions. The Sessions table contains one row for each active client session. 
	Typically, there will be one client session for each browser instance that is 
	currently viewing a thin client display. 
	
	The Sessions table contains the following columns.
	
	- Session ID: unique ID for client session
	
	- Client Address:  the IP address of the client.
	
	- Duration: elapsed time since this client session was created.
	
	- Last Reference Time: elapsed time since this client opened or refreshed a 
	display. 
	
	- User: the login user name
	
	- Role: the login user role
	
	Notes on each column:
	
	The Session ID is also a column in the mbean's DisplayData table, which contains 
	one row for each display that is currently open in a thin client. The Session ID 
	is a unique string assigned to a session by RTView and is not the same value as 
	the session identifier assigned by the webapp mananger (tomcat). 
	
	The Client Address will be in IPv4 (e.g. x.x.x.x) or IPv6 (x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x) 
	notation, depending on which protocol the client browser used to connect to the 
	rtvdisplay servlet. For example, if the client is on localhost then the client 
	address could be shown as 127.0.0.1 for IPv4, or 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 for IPv6. 
	
	The Duration column and the Last Reference Time column show elapsed time as "d 
	hh:mm:ss" where d = days, hh = hours, mm = minutes, and ss = seconds. 
	
	By default, a session expires and is removed from the table after about 10 or 11 
	minutes of inactivity (that is, when the elapsed time shown in the Last Ref Time 
	column is "0 00:11:00" or more). If the display server's display_timeout property 
	has been set, then the session expiration is 10 times the display_timeout value. 
	(The default display_timeout is 60 seconds). 
	
	The User and Role columns will be blank if the login feature of the rtvdisplay 
	servlet is disabled. 

20185: Kendo grid now supported
	The "web grid" is a new HTML implementation of the RTView table object 
	(obj_table02) that provides enhanced filtering, sorting, and other interactive 
	features. The web grid is available in the thin client only. 
	
	1. Enabling the Web Grid:
	
	A new property has been added to obj_table02, named webGridFlag. To enable the 
	web grid in the thin client for a specific obj_table02 instance, check the 
	object's webGridFlag property in the Builder property sheet. Alternatively, the 
	web grid can be enabled on all obj_table02 instances by adding the following rule 
	to an rtview stylesheet (.rts) file loaded by the display server: 
	
	obj_table02 {
	   webGridFlag : 1
	}
	
	The default value of webGridFlag is false, which indicates that the "classic" 
	html grid should be used in the thin client. 
	
	2. Requirements:
	
	If webGridFlag = true then the web grid will appear in the thin client in any 
	modern version of a supported browser. No plugin is required. For Internet 
	Explorer users, version 9 or newer is required and version 11 is recommended for 
	best performance. In IE8 or older, the web grid is not supported so the classic 
	grid will be used regardless of the webGridFlag setting. In this release the web 
	grid is not supported on iPad but may be supported in the future. 
	
	3. New Features:
	
	The web grid supports a number of new, interactive features: sorting on multiple 
	columns, filtering on multiple columns, column resizing, column reordering, and 
	hiding columns. In addition the user can "unsort" a previously selected sort 
	column, returning it to its original unsorted order. In a grid with 
	rowHeaderEnabledFlag = true, additional columns can be locked into the row header 
	so they remain visible regardless of the horizontal scroll position. 
	
	Many of these features are accessed from the column menu opened by clicking on 
	the menu icon that appears near the right edge of each column's header. 
	
	The user can save all of the aforementioned column settings/options permanently, 
	in the browser's local. The saved settings are automatically restored when the 
	user later reopens the display, with the same username and role. 
	
	Also, for improved performance and usability, if a data table contains more than 
	200 rows the web grid will display it in pages of 200 rows, using a page control 
	that appears at the bottom of the grid. 
	
	Each new feature is described below:
	
	 3a. Column Sorting:
	
	The user can click on a column header to sort the table by that column. On the 
	first click, the column is sorted in ascending order (smallest value at the top), 
	on the 2nd click the sort is in descending order, and on the 3rd click the column 
	is returned to its original unsorted state. A sort on a string column is 
	case-insensitive. 
	
	The user can select multiple sort columns. In that case, the sorting is performed 
	in the order that the column headers were clicked. Multiple column sorting is a 
	very useful feature, but can also cause confusion if the user intends to sort on 
	a single column, but forgets to "unsort" any previously selected sort columns 
	first. Users should check for the up/down sort icon in other column headers if a 
	sort gives unexpected results. 
	
	Column sorting is reflected in an export to html/excel.
	
	 3b. Column Visibility:
	
	The user can hide or show columns in the table by clicking on any column's menu 
	icon, and picking Columns from the menu. This will open a submenu with a checkbox 
	for each column that toggles the visibility of the column. All columns in the 
	data table will appear in the Columns menu, even those that are initially hidden 
	by the obj_table02 property columnsToHide. If the grid has the 
	rowHeaderEnabledFlag property checked then the leftmost column (the row header 
	column) cannot be hidden. 
	
	Column visibility changes are NOT reflected in an export to html/excel.
	
	 3c. Column Filtering:
	
	The user can create a filter on any column. If filters are created on multiple 
	columns, then only the rows that pass all of the filters are displayed. That is, 
	if there are multiple filters they are logically ANDed together to produce the 
	final result. 
	
	The background of a column's menu icon changes to white to indicate that a filter 
	is defined on that column. This is intended to remind the user which columns are 
	filtered. 
	
	The user can configure a filter on any column by clicking on the column's menu 
	icon and picking Filter from the menu. This will open the column filter dialog, 
	which varies according to the data type of the selected column: 
	
	- For a string column, the user can enter a filter string such as "abc" and, from 
	the dropdown list, select the operator (equal to, not equal to, starts with, 
	contains, etc) to be used when comparing the filter string to each string in the 
	column. All of the filter comparisons on strings are case-insensitive. The user 
	can optionally enter a second filter string (e.g. "xyz") and specify if an AND or 
	OR combination should be used to combine the first and second filter results on 
	the column. 
	
	- For a numeric column, the user enters numeric filter values and selects 
	arithmetic comparison operators, (=, !=, >, >=, <, <=). The user can optionally 
	enter a second filter value and comparison operator, and specify if an AND or OR 
	combination should be used to combine the first and second filter results. 
	
	- For a date column, the user can select a date and time and choose whether 
	matching items should have a timestamp that is the same as, before, or after the 
	filter time. The date is selected by clicking on the calendar icon and picking a 
	date from a calendar dialog. The time is selected by clicking on the time icon 
	and picking a time from a dropdown list. Alternatively, a date and time can be 
	typed into the edit box. (See the limitations section for a note on time 
	filtering when the client and server are located in different time zones). 
	
	- For a boolean column, the user simply selects whether matching items should be 
	true or false. 
	
	Data updates to the grid are suspended while the filter menu is opened. The 
	updates are applied when the menu is closed. 
	
	Column filtering is reflected in an export to html/excel.
	
	  3d. Column Locking:
	
	This feature is available only if the obj_table02 instance has the row header 
	feature enabled (rowHeaderEnabledFlag is checked). If so, the leftmost column is 
	"locked" in position, meaning that it will not scroll horizontally with the other 
	columns in the table. If the row header is enabled, then two items labelled Lock 
	and Unlock will appear in the column menu. These can be used to add or remove 
	additional columns from the non-scrolling row header area. If the row header is 
	enabled, at least one column must remain locked. 
	
	  3e. Column Reordering:
	
	The user can reorder the grid columns by dragging and dropping a column's header 
	into another position. If the grid has rowHeaderEnabledFlag checked, then 
	dragging a column into or out of the row header area (the leftmost columns) is 
	equivalent to locking or unlocking the column. 
	
	Column reordering is NOT reflected in an export to html/excel.
	
	  3f. Paging:
	
	If the data table contains more than one page of rows, the page controls are 
	displayed at the bottom of the grid. The default page size is 200 but can be set 
	on each obj_table02 instance via the new property named webGridRowsPerPage. The 
	default value of that property is zero, which indicates that the default size 
	(200) should be used. If the height of the grid is less than about 64 pixels, 
	there is insufficient space to display the page controls so only the rows on the 
	first page will be viewable. 
	
	  3g. Row mouseover:
	
	A new property named webGridHoverColor is available on obj_table02. It is visible 
	only if webGridFlag = true. The default value of webGridHoverColor is checked. If 
	it is set to any other color index value, then that color will be used to 
	highlight the row that is under the mouse cursor. But if the obj_table02 
	filterProperties feature is used to color rows, that color will take precedence, 
	so the webGridHoverColor may not be useful in those cases. Also, if the row 
	header is enabled, the row header column and the other columns are highlighted 
	separately, according to which section of the grid the mouse is over. 
	
	  3h. Saving settings:
	  
	The user can permanently save all of the custom settings made to the grid, 
	including filtering, sorting, column size (width), column order, column 
	visibility, and column locking. This is done by opening any column menu, clicking 
	Settings, and then clicking Save All. 
	
	The grid's settings are written as an item in the browser's local storage. The 
	item's value is the a string containing the grid's settings. The item uses a 
	unique key comprised of the URL path name, the display name, and the obj_table02 
	instance's rtview object name. If the thin client's login feature is enabled, the 
	key will also include the username and role, so different settings can be saved 
	for each user and role for a grid on any given display, in the same browser and 
	host. 
	
	If the user saves the grid settings and navigates away from the display or closes 
	the browser, then the next time the user returns to the display in the same 
	browser the settings are retrieved from the browser's local storage and applied 
	to the grid. The browser's local storage items are persistent, so the grid 
	settings are preserved if the browser is closed and reopened or if the host 
	system is restarted. 
	
	If the obj_table02 has autoResizeFlag = true then the column widths will not be 
	restored from the saved settings, and the values computed by the auto-resize 
	feature will be used instead. This is by design. 
	
	The user can delete the grid's item from local storage by clicking Settings -> 
	Clear All in any column menu. This will permanently delete the saved settings for 
	the grid and return the grid to the state defined in the display file. 
	
	Note that each browser has its own local storage on each host. The local storage 
	items are not shared between browsers on the same host or on different hosts. So, 
	if a user logs in as Joe with role = admin, in Internet Explorer on host H1, and 
	saves grid settings for display X, then those grid settings will be restored each 
	time a user logs in as Joe, role admin, on host H1 and opens display X in 
	Internet Explorer. But if all the same is true except that the browser is Chrome, 
	then the settings saved in Internet Explorer will not be applied. Or if the user 
	is Joe and role is admin and the browser is IE and the display is X, but the host 
	system is H2 not H1, then the grid settings saved on H1 will not be applied. 
	
	4. Support for large tables:
	
	The web grid can support data tables with many rows and columns. However, for 
	best performance the display server's cellsperpage property should be specified 
	so that the server will send large tables to the client in pages, rather than 
	sending all of the rows. In this server paging mode, large tables are also 
	filtered and sorted in the display server, to improve performance and decrease 
	data traffic. The cellsperpage option is not new or specific to the web grid, it 
	has been available for several years. See the RTView documentation for a 
	description of the cellsperpage property, and the related cellsperexport and 
	cellsperreport properties. A typical value for cellsperpage is 20000. 
	
	5. Unsupported obj_table02 features:
	
	The following are existing features of obj_table02 that are not supported by the 
	web grid 
	
	-The rowHeaderEnabledFlag property is supported, but rowHeaderBgColor, 
	rowHeaderTextColor, rowHeaderTextFont, rowHeaderTextSize are ignored. Instead the 
	row header column is rendered like all other columns. 
	 
	- The columnResizeEnabledFlag is ignored if it is false, the web grid always 
	allows column resizing. 
	 
	- The editDataEnabledFlag is ignored, the table editing feature using custom 
	commands is currently not supported. 
	 
	 6. Other limitations, and differences between the new & classic grids:
	 
	- Time zones: The strings shown in a date column are formatted by the display 
	server using its time zone. But if a filter is specified on a date column, the 
	date and time for the filter are computed using the client system's time zone. 
	This can be confusing if the display server and client are in different time 
	zones. 
	 
	- Selected rows: The grid's row selection is cleared if the sort is changed or if 
	columns are resized or reordered. 
	 
	- Scrollbars: In general the grid will only display scrollbars when they are 
	needed. However, the web grid and the classic grid use different algorithms for 
	deciding when to show or hide scrollbars, and do not use identical row heights 
	and column widths. So the web grid may sometimes display scrollbars when the 
	classic grid does not, for a grid instance with a given width and height. 
	    
	- Keyboard traversal: In the classic grid, selecting a row and then using the 
	up/down arrow keys will change the selection to the previous/next row. In the web 
	grid, the arrow keys will move the keyboard focus to another row, as indicated by 
	a highlight border around the focused table cell, but the user must press the 
	space bar to select the row that contains the highlighted (focused) cell. 
	
	- Column widths: On a web grid with no locked columns (rowHeaderEnabledFlag = 
	false), columns will expand to fill any unused width in the table, even if 
	autoResizeFlag = false. That is, if the total width of the columns is less than 
	the grid width (ie. the columns don't use all of the available width) then each 
	column is expanded proportionally to fill the table. In contrast, the classic and 
	Swing (viewer) grids just leave unused space at the right edge of the grid. If 
	the grid has locked columns (rowHeaderEnabledFlag = true), then the web grid 
	behaves the same as the classic and Swing grids. 
	
	- Export: The export to html and export to excel features are supported on the 
	web grid, and behave much the same as on the classic grid. The exported table 
	respects the grid's filter and sort settings but ignores any column reordering, 
	sizing, or hiding changes made by the user. 
	
	- Data updates to the grid are suspended while the filter menu is opened. The 
	updates are applied when the menu is closed. 
	
	7. An implementation note, for custom web page developers only:
	
	The rtview thin client now uses 2 versions of the jQuery javascript library
	
	jQuery 1.3.2, to support the jQuery UI components used for panels, layout, and 
	(some) navigation controls 
	    jQuery 1.9.1, to support the web grid
	
	Version 1.3.2 is bundled into the thin client js file named rtvNav1.js, while 
	version 1.9.1 is loaded as a separate js file. To prevent conflicts between the 
	two libraries, the jQuery $ alias is no longer used by rtview and is 
	intentionally removed. Instead the jQuery 1.3.2 library is referenced by the 
	alias rtv.jqNav as needed, and the jQuery 1.9.1 library is referenced by the 
	alias rtv.jq as needed. 
	
	This could affect existing custom javascript code that users have written. For 
	example, the following is a snippet of javascript from a custom html page that 
	uses jQuery UI tabs for navigation 
	
	    <script src="rtvNav1.js"></script>
	    <script>
	    $(document).ready(function () {
	        var outerLayout = $('body').layout({
	            north__size:64, north__spacing_open: 0,
	        });
	        $('#tabs').tabs();
	        ...
	
	The code above uses the jQuery $ alias, which it assumes is defined in the 
	rtvNav1.js file. But that is no longer true, so the custom code should be 
	rewritten to use the rtv.jqNav alias for jQuery in place of the $ alias, as 
	follows: 
	
	 <script src="rtvNav1.js"></script>
	 <script>
	    rtv.jqNav(document).ready(function () {
	    var outerLayout = rtv.jqNav('body').layout({
	        north__size:64, north__spacing_open: 0,
	    });
	    rtv.jqNav('#tabs').tabs();
		...

20237: Touchscreen PCs no longer display thin client in tablet mode
	In prior releases, if the thin client was opened in a browser on a PC with a 
	touchscreen, items would be missing from in the right-click context menu. The 
	missing items includied the Drill Down, Execute Command, and Export Table to 
	Excel items, plus any custom menu items. This is fixed. 

20582: Enable mouse cursor to change appearance when hovering over composites
	If a composite object has its drilldownTarget set, then in the thin client the 
	"hand" cursor will appear when the mouse is over the composite. This is 
	consistent with the behavior of other objects that have a drilldownTarget. 

20621: Fixed: obj_rect_il may not draw in comp grid if webLabelFlag=1
	A bug in the thin client has been fixed that sometimes caused objects with the 
	webLabelFlag property checked to not to be drawn if the objects were in a 
	composite display inside an object grid instance. 

20623: Table no longer fails to populate when cellsperpage is smaller than visible cells
	A bug in the display server has been fixed which sometimes caused table cells in 
	the thin client to always contain "..." if the cellsperpage property was set. 
	Typically this occurred if the cellsperpage value was small (in the range of 1000 
	to 2000) and a table with many columns was opened. It was unlikely to occur with 
	a typical cellsperpage value of 10000 or more. The problem is fixed for all 
	cellsperpage values. As before, a value less than 1000 is ignored. 

20679: Table row selection in AW grid no longer unreliable in IE >= 10
	In previous releases, when using the thin client in IE 10 and 11, after 
	performing a drilldown from a table object subsequent row clicks in the same 
	table may be ignored. This is fixed. 

Functions

19950: Fixed Group By Unique Values function error
	Previously, when the restrict to value list option was enabled, all rows from the 
	original table that were not found in the value list were incorrectly assigned to 
	the first element of the value list. 
	
	This has been fixed.

General

19466: Version info now available via RTView Manager MBean
	The RTView Manager MBean has been enhanced to support a new method, 
	VersionInfoDetails, which returns detailed version information about the RTView 
	application. The table will contain one row for each RTView jar in the 
	application and contains the following columns: 
	
	ApplicationName - The name of the application. Ex.RTView Data Server.
	ApplicationConfiguration - The configuration string for the application. This 
	string contains the main application version that corresponds to the version 
	information that is printed to the console at startup. 
	JarName - The name of the jar. 
	JarConfiguration- The configuration string for the jar. 
	JarVersionNumber - The version number for the jar.
	JarVersionDate - The version date for the jar.
	JarReleaseType - The release type for the jar.
	JarMicroVersion - The micro version for the jar.
	
	This table is useful when reporting problems to SL Technical Support as it 
	contains very detailed information about the version of each jar used in an 
	RTView application. 

19901: Stylesheet processing bug fixed
	When colors of objects are driven by both stylesheets and functions, the 
	functions should take precedence. 
	
	In the previous release, the stylesheet was being incorrectly applied to 
	properties that were attached to data. In many cases this was not noticeable 
	because an update to the data attachment would override the stylesheet setting. 
	However, in some cases where the data attachment didn't update after the display 
	was processed, the stylesheet value was used. This has been fixed so that 
	stylesheet values are no longer applied to properties that are attached to data. 

20326: New -version flag that prints version information without starting the app
	Each of the RTView applications now supports a -version option on the command 
	line which will cause the app to print the RTView version information and then 
	exit immediately. 
	
	For example:
	
	run_dataserver -version

Logging

19543: Alert notification script output error when using log4j
	Alert notifications from an RTView now go to a log4j output as desired.

Object Library

Charts (General)

20790: New Google Map object
	Introduction:
	-------------
	
	A new display object for embedding a Google Map in an RTView display is now 
	supported. The new object is named obj_gmap and is located on the Graphs tab in 
	the Builder's object palette. 
	
	In the builder, an obj_gmap instance appears as a gray "placeholder" rectangle 
	which is used to set the size and position of the map on the display, and to 
	allow configuration of the latitude, longitude, zoom level and other map 
	properties via the Builder's property sheet. The Google Map is only rendered when 
	the display is opened in the thin client. In the Builder and Viewer, and obj_gmap 
	instance will always appear as an empty gray rectangle. 
	
	Using the map properties and RTView data attachments, the map can be populated 
	with marker objects at specific lat/long positions, and also links between the 
	markers. RTView drilldown and command operations can be triggered by clicks on 
	the map, or on the markers or links on the map. Double click and right click 
	actions, and drillDownColumn subs are supported, as on other RTView table-driven 
	objects. Map operations such as zoom, pan, and marker selection can be tied to 
	rtview variables. 
	
	
	Requirements:
	-------------
	
	The thin client must have internet access in order to download the Google Maps 
	javascript API and map data. The thin client supports Google Maps in Internet 
	Explorer version 9 or newer, and any other RTView-supported browsers (Firefox, 
	Chrome, iOS Safari). The Viewer does not support the map object. 
	
	The thin client loads the Google Maps Javascript API to render and manipulate the 
	map. In most cases a key or license must be obtained from Google for business use 
	of the Google Maps Javascript API. See the "Licensing" section later in this 
	document. 
	
	
	Map Object Properties and Features:
	-----------------------------------
	
	A Google Map is added to an RTView display by creating an instance of the 
	obj_gmap display object, found on the Graphs tab of the Builder's object palette. 
	In the builder, an obj_gmap instance appears as a gray "placeholder" rectangle 
	which is used to set the size and position of the map on the display, and to 
	allow configuration of the latitude, longitude, zoom level and other map 
	properties via the Builder's property sheet. The Google Map is only rendered when 
	the display is opened in the thin client. 
	
	The following properties are supported by obj_gmap:
	
	("Data" category):
	
	+ valueTable: This property can be used to place markers (icons) on the map, at 
	specific locations. The property should be attached to a table that contains one 
	row for each marker, with the columns shown below. The column names are 
	unimportant, but the column order and type must be as follows. The first 3 
	columns are required, the others are optional. 
	
	column 1 (string): name
	column 2 (number): latitude
	column 3 (number): longitude
	column 4 (string): icon name/path
	column 5 (integer): icon height in pixels
	
	The marker name is used is drilldowns to indicate the selected (clicked) marker, 
	and can also be used to select a marker, so it should be unique. 
	If column 4 (icon name) is omitted or is empty, the default Google Maps marker 
	will be used. If column 5 (icon height) exists and its value is > 0, the value is 
	used to center the icon on the marker's lat/long position, otherwise the 0,0 
	pixel of the icon will be placed on the marker's lat/long position. 
	
	+ valueTableForLinks: This property can be used to draw links between markers on 
	the map. The property should be attached to a table that contains one row for 
	each link, with the columns shown below. The column names are unimportant, but 
	the column order and type must be as follows. The first 2 columns are required, 
	the others are optional. 
	
	column 1 (string): name of marker at start of link 
	column 2 (string): name of marker at end of link
	column 3 (string): link line color, as a css color name or #rrggbb hex value.
	column 4 (integer): link line width
	column 5 (integer): arrow mode
	
	The first two columns specify the names of the markers at the start and end of 
	the link. These must correspond to the names of markers in the valueTable. If 
	column 3 is omitted the link color is black. If column 4 is omitted the link 
	width is 2 pixels. The arrow mode values are 1 (one arrow, pointing to start 
	marker), 2 (one arrow, pointing to end marker) and 3 (two markers, at each end of 
	link). If column 5 is omitted the default mode of 3 is used. 
	
	("Interaction" category):
	
	+ command: the command to invoke when the user clicks on the map, a marker, or a 
	link 
	
	+ drillDownColumnSubs: this property is treated the same as for other 
	table-driven objects. If a marker is clicked, the drillDownColumnSubs are set 
	using values from the valueTable row that corresponds to that marker. If a link 
	is clicked, the drillDownColumnSubs are set using values from the 
	valueTableForLinks row that corresponds to that link. In addition, the following 
	predefined substitutions are also set when a drilldown is executed: 
	
	$mapSelLat : the latitude of the map location or marker clicked
	$mapSelLng : the longitude of the map location or marker clicked
	$mapLat : the latitude of the map's current center location
	$mapLng : the longitude of the map's current center location
	$mapZoom : the current zoom level of the map, a value between 0 and 21
	
	+ drillDownSelectMode: This property can be set to the following values: 
	
	Anywhere: a click anywhere on the map will trigger the object's command or 
	drilldown. 
	Markers: only a click on a marker will trigger the command or drilldown.
	Links:  only a click on a link  will trigger the command or drilldown.
	Markers & Links only a click on a marker or a link will trigger the command or 
	drilldown. 
	
	+ menuItemGroup: As with other objects (table, heatmap, tree) this property is 
	used to add custom items to the context menu, when a map marker is right-clicked. 
	
	+ label: The label string for the map placeholder object. This is visible only in 
	the Builder. 
	
	("Map" category):
	
	+ labelsZoomThreshold: If this property is set to a value > 0 a label balloon 
	will appear next to each marker when the zoom level is greater than or equal to 
	that value. The label text in the balloon is the name assigned to the marker, by 
	the first column in the valueTable. A label can be closed by clicking its "x" 
	button. The label will reappear if the display is closed and reopened or if the 
	zoom threshold is crossed again later. The default value of labelsZoomThreshold 
	is zero which disables the labels. 
	
	+ latitude: the latitude of the point on which the map is to be centered
	
	+ longitude: the longitude of the point on which the map is to be centered
	
	* selectedMarker: the name of the marker to select
	
	+ zoom: the zoom level of the map, between 0 and 21.
	
	The other properties supported by the map object but not listed here are common 
	to all display objects, and have the same purpose and behavior as on the other 
	display objects. 
	
	
	Licensing:
	----------
	
	Business use of the Google Maps Javascript API typically requires a key or 
	license from Google. For more information, see the following: 
	https://developers.google.com/maps/licensing 
	
	SL does not provide a key or license for the Google Maps Javascript API. However, 
	the thin client can be configured to download the API using a custom URL that 
	contains specific key or license information obtained from Google. The custom URL 
	is defined by modifying the rtv_custom.js file contained in rtvdisplay.war. 
	(Refer to the customization section of the RTView documentation for details on 
	modifying rtvdisplay.war) 
	
	To specify a custom URL to download the Google Maps Javascript API, add the 
	following line to rtv_custom.js: 
	
	  rtv.customGoogleMapsApiBaseURL = 'url';
	
	For example, to specify a URL containing a Google API key:
	
	rtv.customGoogleMapsApiBaseURL = 
	"https://maps.googleapis.com/maps/api/js?key=YOUR_GOOGLE_API_KEY"; 
	
	Or, to specify a "Google Maps API for Work" client ID and release version 3.20:
	
	rtv.customGoogleMapsApiBaseURL = 
	"https://maps.googleapis.com/maps/api/js?client=YOUR_GOOGLE_CLIENT_ID&v=3.20"; 
	
	If no rtv.customGoogleMapsApiBaseURL value is specified, the thin client will use 
	the following public URL to download the latest "experimental" version of the API 
	with no key or license information: https://maps.googleapis.com/maps/api/js 

Control Objects

20142: Fixed minor usability problems with tree/accordion control
	The following minor problems with the tree and accordion control object are 
	fixed: 
	
	1 The initialExpandDepth property is now only applied to new branches. 
	Previously, on a tree control with valueTableType = Row-node the 
	initialExpandDepth was improperly reapplied on each update to the tree, reopening 
	any existing branches that the user may have closed. 
	
	2. In the thin client, the labels on accordion buttons are now aligned properly: 
	Parent (non-leaf) node labels are left aligned, and leaf node labels are center 
	aligned. This is consistent with the accordion in the builder/viewer. Previously, 
	parent node labels were center aligned in the thin client, which was incorrect. 
	
	3. On a tree control In the thin client, a click on the +/- icon now opens/closes 
	the tree branch as expected but it no longer selects the node or triggers the 
	tree control's command. This is now consistent with the tree control behavior in 
	the viewer. 
	
	4. On an accordion control In the thin client in most browsers, a click on a 
	left/down arrow icon now opens/closes the branch as expected but it no longer 
	activates the accordion button or triggers the accordion control's command. 
	However, in IE version 8 or older, and in the viewer, the accordion button is 
	still activated and the control's command is executed. 

20638: New property to limit text entered into text area control
	The text area control (obj_c1textarea) has been enhanced to enforce an optional 
	maximum character limit. (The text field control, obj_c1textedit, has supported 
	this feature for several releases). 
	
	maxCharacters - The maximum number of characters that will be submitted to the 
	control's actionCommand. The default value is blank (no limit). The limit does 
	not restrict the length of the text in the control, instead the limit is checked 
	before the command is executed and if the limit is exceeded, the command is not 
	executed. 
	
	inputValidVarToSet - Attach to a local variable. This variable will be updated 
	with a value of 1 if the maxCharacters limit is blank or the text is less than or 
	equal to the maxCharacters limit, or updated with a value of 0 if the text length 
	exceeds the maxCharacters limit. 
	
	invalidInputMsgVarToSet - Attach to a local variable. This variable will be 
	updated with an error message if the text length exceeds the maxCharacters limit, 
	or updated with an empty string if the text length is less than or equal to the 
	maxCharacters limit. 

20710: Enhanced text controls to only execute actions if text changed
	A new property named executeOnlyIfChangedFlag has been added to the text control 
	objects (obj_c1text*). 
	
	If executeOnlyIfChangedFlag is true, and if the text control's varToset and its 
	valueString or value property are attached to the same local variable, then the 
	control's command will be executed only if the text in the control is changed. 
	
	By default executeOnlyIfChangedFlag is false, in which case the control's command 
	is executed whenever the control loses focus (if executeOnFocusLostFlag = true or 
	if the control is a text area) or whenever the user presses the Enter key in the 
	control (if the control is not a text area), regardless of whether the text in 
	the control was changed. This matches the text control behavior in all previous 
	releases. 

20771: New Tab Control object
	A tab control object is now supported in RTView. The name of the object is 
	obj_c1tabs. It appears on the Controls tab of the Builder's object palette. 
	
	The tab control has two "fake" tabs labelled A and B when it is drawn on the 
	palette, and also when the user places an instance on a display. The fake tabs 
	are replaced with the actual tabs by attaching the tab control's valueTable 
	property to a data table containing one row for each tab. 
	
	The size given to the control in the Builder determines the space available for 
	tabs. The tabs are drawn horizontally with the first tab at the left edge of the 
	control. If the control is not wide enough to show all of the tabs, the tabs will 
	wrap vertically. If the control is not tall enough to show all of the tabs, some 
	of the tabs may be clipped or invisible. 
	
	Changing the control's labelTextSize property will change the size of the tab 
	label text, which will also affect the size of the tabs. 
	
	The tab control is populated from a data table attached to its valueTable 
	property, with one tab created for each row in the table. The following tab 
	control properties are used to map the columns of the data table to each tab: 
	
	labelColumnName - the value from this column is used as the tab label. If 
	labelColumnName does not specify a column in the valueTable or if it contains an 
	empty string, then the tab for row N in the valueTable will be labelled "Tab N". 
	The labelColumnName property appears in the Label category. 
	
	valueColumnName - the value from this column is assigned to the variable (if any) 
	attached to the tab control's varToSet property when the corresponding tab is 
	selected by the user. If valueColumnName does not specify a column in the 
	valueTable, then the tab's index (0 through N - 1, for a table with N rows) is 
	used as the tab value. The valueColumnName property appears in the Data category. 
	
	imageColumnName - the value from this column is used to load an icon image, shown 
	to the left of the tab's label . If imageColumnName does not specify a column in 
	the valueTable, or if the column is empty, or if the image can't be found, the 
	tab will not contain an icon. An icon will affect the size of the tab. The 
	imageColumnName property appears in the Image category. 
	
	mouseOverColumnName - the value from this column is used as the tooltip for each 
	tab. If mouseOverColumnName does not specify a column in the valueTable, or if 
	the column is empty, the tab will not display a tooltip. The mouseOverColumnName 
	property appears in the Interaction category. 
	
	The tab control supports the drillDownColumnSubs property, which can be useful in 
	cases where the tab's command is a drilldown. As with other objects that support 
	drillDownColumnSubs, it can be used to set the values for substitutions and local 
	variables from columns in the row of the valueTable that corresponds to the 
	selected tab. 
	
	As usual, the control's visFlag property can be used to toggle the control's 
	visibility. 
	Unlike the other control objects, the tab control does not support the 
	enabledFlag property so it is always enabled. 
	
	As on other control objects, the predefined substitution named $value can be used 
	in the control's command. The value of the selected tab will be substituted for 
	$value when the command is executed. (See the valueColumnName property for a 
	description of how a tab's value is determined). 
	
	If a tab control has a command defined and the commandConfirm property is 
	checked, the user will be asked to confirm the command when a tab is clicked, but 
	the clicked tab will become the selected tab regardless of the user's response. 
	
	Limitations / Differences:
	
	- In the thin client, the tab control is not supported in IE version 8 or older 
	and will not appear in displays opened in those versions. 
	
	- The tab sizes and appearance may differ somewhat when viewed in the 
	Builder/Viewer vs. thin client. 
	
	- In the thin client, the background color of the selected tab is brighter than 
	the unselected tabs, while in the builder/viewer the selected tab is darker than 
	the other tabs. (This difference is intentional, to conform with the standard 
	appearance of tabs in Swing vs. a browser.) 

Status History

19936: Added support for data quality to obj_statushistory
	The status history chart (obj_statushistory) has been enhanced to indicate data 
	quality. 
	
	Two new properties have been added, named valueQualityColumnName and 
	valueQualityBadValuesList. These properties can be used to set a color and 
	pattern to be plotted when on a bar when the data quality is bad. 
	
	The valueQualityColumnName property can be set to the name of the table column 
	that contains a value indicating the data quality for each row. The column can 
	contain string, integer, or boolean values. The valueQualityBadValuesList 
	property can be set to a string containing value,label pairs with each pair 
	separated by semicolons. This is used to assign a label to a numeric bad quality 
	value, for example "-1,no data;0,stale data" 
	
	The default value for valueQualityColumnName is blank, which means that the new 
	feature is disabled. In this mode the color and pattern for each bar is 
	determined by getting the value for that row from the column specified by 
	valueColumnName, and looking up that value in the chart's barProperties. (This is 
	the behavior in all prior releases). 
	
	If valueQualityColumnName non-blank, then for each row R the row's value to be 
	plotted is determined as follows: 
	
	- let Q = value of quality column for row R, and V = value of value column for 
	row R 
	- if Q is blank, then the quality is considered good and V is used at the row 
	value, as normal. 
	- else if the valueQualityBadValuesList property is blank, then Q is used as the 
	row value. 
	- else if valueQualityBadValuesList contains an entry "Q,X" then X is used as the 
	row value 
	- else the quality is considered good (since no match was found in 
	valueQualityBadValuesList) and V is used at the row value 
	
	Then the row value is looked up in barProperties, as usual, to determine the 
	color and fill pattern. That value is also shown in the mouseover text as usual. 
	
	For example, consider the following data table:
	
	 Plant	Status	Quality
	 -----	------	-------
	 A	online	   1
	 B	offline	   1
	 C	online	  -1
	 D	offline	   0
	
	... where 1 = data OK, -1 = no data, and 0 = stale data.
	
	Next, consider a status history chart with these properties:
	
	 indexColumnNames = Plant
	 valueColumnName = Status
	 valueQualityColumnName = Quality
	 valueQualityBadValuesList = -1,no Data;0,stale data
	 barProperties = 
		online  : green
		offline : blue
		no data : red
		stale data : orange
	
	Note that valueQualityBadValuesList has no entry for quality = 1, because that is 
	the "good" quality value. 
	
	With that configuration, when the data table shown above is applied to the chart, 
	it will plot a segment for each Plant as follows: 
	
	A  green   (since Status = online and Quality = 1 / OK)
	B  blue    (since Status = online and Quality = 1 / OK)
	C  red     (since Quality = -1 / no data)
	D  orange  (since Quality = 0 / stale data)

Tables

19989: Default format for date columns added to table objects
	A property named columnFormatDate has been added to the table object 
	(obj_table02). By default the property's value is blank. If the property is set 
	to a valid time format, then that format will be used for all time/date columns 
	in the table that do not have a format specified in the table's columnFormat 
	property. 
	
	For example if an obj_table02 instance contains a date column named X, then the 
	format for column X is determined as follows: 
	
	1. If the table object's columnFormat property contains a valid date/time format 
	for column X, then that format is applied to column X. 
	
	2. If the table object's columnFormatDate contains a valid date/time format, then 
	that format is applied to column X. 
	
	3. Otherwise the default date/time format for the current locale, as returned by 
	java.text.DateFormat.getDateTimeInstance(), is applied to column X. 
	
	As with any object property, an rtview stylesheet entry can be used to set 
	columnFormatDate globally on all obj_table02 instances, for example: 
	
	obj_table02 {
	        columnFormatDate: "yyyy-MMM-dd HH:mm:ss"
	}

Platform Support

19925: Support Java 1.8
	Java 1.8 is now officially supported. 
	
	NOTES: 
	As noted in the release notes for 19927 and 19928, the JdbcOdbc driver is no 
	longer supported by Oracle beginning in Java 1.8. 
	
	Version v4.14.137 of IBM DB2's db2jcc.jar driver is required to work with Java 
	1.8 

RtvCacheDoc

18909: rtvcachedoc no longer generates incorrect "Expired" column
	In previous releases, rtvcachedoc incorrectly included the column specified in 
	the rowExpiredColumnName property in the generated db schemas. This only happened 
	for caches with a blank value for the historyColumnNames property. This has been 
	fixed. 

Security

20794: Fixed XSS Security Issue in Thin Client Deployment
	A cross-site scripting (XSS) vulnerability in the thin client has been fixed.

Transaction Message Monitor

20672: Transaction monitor end of life announced
	The Transaction Monitor application will be end of life in RTView version 6.7. A 
	warning about this has been added to the console and the tmdisplays demo has been 
	removed from the RTView demos directory. 
	
	In previous releases, the Transaction Monitor threw an exception at startup. This 
	has been fixed. 

Version 6.5.0 Release Notes

Builder - Editing

19879: Fixed NPE when deleting local var with same name as global
	A bug has been fixed in the Builder which caused a NullPointerException to be 
	thrown if a local variable was deleted and the local variable had the same name 
	as a global variable. 

Data Historian

19469: Avoid removal of all batch data when some data is wrong.
	The historian will no longer discard all rows in a batch if a SQL exception is 
	thrown during an row insert. Instead it will catch the exception and continue 
	with the other row inserts in the batch and commit all of the successful inserts 
	at the end of the batch. 

Compaction

19786: smoothCompaction no longer throws NPE when there are no compaction rules
	Previously a NPE was thrown when -smoothcompaction was used with a cache with a 
	compaction type of "aggregate" but with no compaction rules. 
	
	Now this scenario fails silently.

19915: Simple retention now applied only to tables without compaction rules
	If a cache history table that was persisted by the historian had no compaction 
	rules, then the simple retention time limit was applied to ALL tables persisted 
	by the historian. This was incorrect. The simple retention limit will now only be 
	applied to tables without compaction rules. 

19987: Compaction now recovers after a lost database connection is restored
	Compaction now recovers correctly after a lost database connection is restored.

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

19960: Fixed bogus extend-by-SQL query if history has future timestamps
	A bug in the cache data source has been fixed that triggered an unnecessary SQL 
	query if an attachment to a cache history table had the Extend with SQL option 
	checked, and the history table contained timestamps in the future as compared to 
	the current time on the system hosting the cache data source. 

20100: Cache extend-by-sql query now ignores row filters with value=*
	A bug has been fixed in the cache data source which affected cache data 
	attachments using the Extend with SQL option and which also use a row filter with 
	multiple columns or multiple values, where * is used as one or more filter 
	values. In those cases, the "where" clause in the SQL query generated by the 
	cache data source was incorrect and returned no rows. This is fixed. 
	

SQL Data Source

20072: Fixed concurrency exception when updating sql RTViewDs.Connections table
	A bug has been fixed in the sql data source which, in rare cases, caused a 
	ConcurrentModificationException to be thrown if a display was open with a data 
	attachment to the sql RTViewDs.connections table. 

TIBCO Hawk Data Source

19977: New onData Length column
	The TIBCO Hawk data source has been enhanced to include a new onData Length 
	column in the RTViewDs GetSubscriptionStatus method. This column contains the 
	amount of time, in milliseconds, that the last onData call took to process the 
	subscription data. 

Display Server

19880: Fixed unstable dropdown list in FF & Chrome
	In prior versions of the thin client, on each display refresh the dropdown list 
	of the combo box control would scroll and the highlighted list item would change, 
	even if the refresh did not change the items in the list. This behavior could 
	make it difficult to use the dropdown list. This problem has been fixed. 
	
	Note that this problem affected the thin client in Firefox and Chrome, but not 
	Internet Explorer. 

20009: Animated gif labels no longer mispositioned
	In previous releases, the animated gif image on a label object would sometimes 
	appear in the top left corner of the display, rather than positioned correctly on 
	the label object. This is fixed. 
	

20021: Images now found when rtv file loaded from subdirectory
	In prior releases, the thin client would fail to load images for some objects if 
	the images and the display containing the objects were in a subdirectory of the 
	display server's working directory. This is fixed. 
	

20097: “loading …” label no longer remains after loading finished
	A problem has been fixed in the thin client that would sometimes cause the 
	"loading..." message to remain on the display after the display had finished 
	loading. 
	

General

19933: rtvquery default time range for current table changed from 30s to ALL
	The rtvquery servlet will no longer apply a default time range of 30 seconds to 
	queries on the current table of a cache. Instead, it will apply a default time 
	range of zero, which will return all rows from the current table regardless of 
	their timestamp. 
	
	A default of 30 seconds will still be applied to all queries on cache history 
	tables. 
	
	Note that the time range, in seconds, can be specified with the tr parameter in 
	the URL. For example, this query will return the last 10 minutes of history data 
	from a cache named Servers: 
	
	  http://host:port/rtvquery/cache/Servers/history?tr=600

20017: rtvquery servlet now uses "UTF-8" instead of "UTF8"
	The rtvquery servlet will now specify UTF-8 character encoding for all responses. 
	Previously, the servlet specified UTF8 which was not recognized by Internet 
	Explorer versions 9 and older and caused an exception with the message "Could not 
	complete the operation due to error c00ce56e" 
	

Object Library

19861: Support HTML label object in the thin client
	A number of simple RTView graphical objects have been enhanced to allow them to 
	be rendered as HTML elements in a thin client deployment, rather than rendered in 
	the image generated by the Display Server. This enhancement can improve system 
	performance in some cases and also allows the user to copy text strings in the 
	objects to the clipboard. Most of the objects affected by this enhancement are 
	found on the General tab and Labels tab in the Builder's object palette. The 
	enhanced objects are: 
	
	    obj_rect
	    obj_rect_il
	    obj_rect_ilv
	    obj_rect_ilvs
	    obj_rect_ilvx_da3
	    obj_rect_ilvx_ra4
	    obj_circ2d
	    obj_circ2d_il
	    obj_circ2d_ilv
	    obj_circ2d_ilvs
	    obj_circ2d_ilvx_da3
	    obj_circ2d_ilvx_ra4
	    obj_label05
	    obj_label05s
	    obj_label11
	    obj_label11s
	    obj_text01
	    obj_c1btn_chk
	
	These objects now support a new a new property named webLabelFlag. In a display 
	server deployment, if webLabelFlag is true (checked) then the object will be 
	rendered as HTML in the thin client, rather than rendered in the image by the 
	display server. This allows the display server to update the individual object, 
	if necessary, when the display is refreshed, rather than regenerating the entire 
	display image. 
	
	If all of the dynamic objects on a display can be rendered as HTML, this can 
	improve the performance of the display server and thin client. The list of 
	objects that can be rendered as HTML now includes all the objects listed above, 
	all objects on the Controls tab in the object palette (obj_c1*), the table object 
	(obj_table02), and the trend chart (obj_fxtrend). Another advantage of setting 
	webLabelFlag on an object is that it allows the user to select the object's text 
	and copy it to the clipboard. 
	
	By default webLabelFlag is false (unchecked). The webLabelFlag property is listed 
	in the "Label" category in the Builder's property sheet. The webLabelFlag can be 
	set on all of the objects listed above via the following entry in an rtview 
	stylesheet (.rts) file: 
	
	rtv-all {
	   webLabelFlag: 1;
	}
	
	In certain cases, an object included in the list above will still be rendered in 
	the image by the display server even if webLabelFlag = true. These cases are: 
	
	 - the display is opened in Internet Explorer 8 or older.
	 - the display server is run with the -nohtml5 option on the command-line. 
	 - an obj_text01 instance with rotated text (a nonzero value for rotationAngle).
	 - an obj_rect* with labelTextPosY = Tab Top
	 - an obj_rect* with labelTextPosY= Title Top and bgBorderFlag = true
	 - an obj_label* with bgStyle = Round Rectangle
	- the object is inside an object grid, and is not inside a composite object in 
	that grid 
	- the object is an obj_rect* and there is a non-html object above it in Z-order 
	which overlaps (for example, an obj_rect instance used as a background behind 
	several meter objects) 
	 
	In other cases, an object may have a slightly different appearance in the thin 
	client when it is rendered as HTML, as follows: 
	
	- only vertical and horizontal gradients are supported on HTML objects in the 
	thin client, so if an object has its bgGradientMode property set to "Diagonal 
	Edge" or "Diagonal Center" it is treated as "Vertical Edge" instead. 
	 
	 - the object's bgShadowFlag property is ignored
	 
	Note that the webLabelFlag property has no effect in the builder or viewer (thick 
	client). 
	
	Also, as part of this enhancement the following bug was fixed which affected the 
	thin client in Internet Explorer: If the javascript debugging feature was enabled 
	(from IE's Internet Options dialog, Advanced tab) then after closing a window or 
	tab in some cases an error dialog would appear with this message (or similar): 
	"Line 269: Error: The object invoked has disconnected from its clients." 

Charts (General)

20007: HTML5 - Color of the Navigator Trace now matches the trace it is representing
	The navigator trace on the html5 chart will now use the same color as the trace 
	assigned to the chart's webChartNavigatorTrace. In previous releases, the 
	navigator trace was always blue. 
	
	

Status History

19934: New property to limit size of label area
	The status history object (obj_statushistory) supports a new property named 
	barLabelMaxLengthPct. This can be used to specify the maximum length for each bar 
	label as a percentage of the plot area width. The default is zero which means no 
	limit is applied to the label length. 
	
	If a positive value is specified for both the barLabelMaxLength and 
	barLabelMaxLengthPct properties, then the smaller length limit of the two will be 
	used. 

19935: Newlines supported in Description field in mouse over
	The status history chart (obj_statushistory) will now properly convert a 
	backslash-n sequence into a newline when displaying the mouseover (tooltip) 
	string. This string is acquired from the column specified by the chart's 
	descriptionColumnName property. 

20002: Right/Double-click features supported for status history chart
	The status history chart (obj_statushistory) can now be configured to extend the 
	right-click context menu and support double-click behavior, in the same manner as 
	the heatmap, table, and grid objects. To support this feature properties named 
	menuItemGroup and rightClickActionFlag have been added to the chart. See 17835 
	for more information on using these properties to extend the context menu and 
	control the double-click behavior. 

Trend Charts

19938: HTML5 obj_trendgraph02 no longer ignores data table with 1 column
	A problem in the display server has been fixed which prevented an 
	obj_trendgraph02 instance with webChartFlag = 1 from plotting any data points on 
	trace N if traceNValue was attached to a table containing a single numeric 
	column. 

Reporting

19939: obj_trendgraph02 using HTML 5 can now be exported to PDF
	A problem has been fixed which prevented an obj_trendgraph02 instance with 
	webChartFlag = 1 from being included in the output of the thin client's "Export 
	to PDF" option. 

Version 6.4.0 Release Notes

Alerts

19141: alertExpireMode added to event alerts
	Event Alerts have been enhanced with a new property, alertExpireMode. This 
	property supports 2 options: 
	
	- Initial Time - if selected and the alertExpireTime is greater than 0, the alert 
	will clear if the alertExpireTime has passed since the alert was generated. 
	- Last Update Time - if selected and the alertExpireTime is greater than 0, the 
	alert will clear if the alertExpireTime has passed since the alert received a 
	data update 
	
	Note that only indexed event alerts can receive data updates, so the Last Update 
	Time option will not work for unindexed event alerts. 

19291: Cleared event alerts no longer regenerated in ssa
	In previous releases, event alerts that did not have a mapping for Cleared in the 
	valueTableMap were erroneously regenerated after being cleared when running with 
	Self Service Alerts enabled. This has been fixed. 

19292: Unindexed event alerts can now be disabled in ssa
	In previous alerts, unindexed event alerts could not be disabled using Self 
	Service Alerts. This has been fixed. 

19714: Sybase schemas corrected
	Errors have been corrected in two sql scripts:
	
	RTV\dbconfig\alert_persist\createtables_sqlserver.sql
	demos\selfservicealerts\dbconfig\createtables_sybase.sql

Commands

18643: japanese chars no longer garbled by "Send Email" command
	The email command will now properly encode Japanese and other Asian characters 
	contained in the text of the email. In prior release, such characters were 
	garbled. 
	

Data Historian

16720: Table creation for Sybase now declares NULL for non-index columns
	Two problems in the Historian have been fixed related to Sybase:
	
	1) The following exception was sometimes thrown when the historian was storing or 
	compacting data: 
	SQLException: The column <abc> in table <xyz> does not allow null values.
	
	2) The following exception was sometimes thrown when the historian was compacting 
	data: 
	
	SybSQLException: The 'CREATE TABLE' command is not allowed within a 
	multi-statement transaction in the <xyz> database. 
	
	Both problems are fixed.

Compaction

19312: Sybase integer conversion error fixed
	A problem has been fixed that caused the Historian to throw an exception when 
	compaction of an integer column by averaging produced a floating point result, 
	when used with Sybase. The exception was reported as "Scale error during implicit 
	conversion of NUMERIC value". 
	
	This has been fixed by setting "arithabort numeric_truncation off" in the active 
	session between the Historian and the Sybase database. 

Data Server

19365: REST output generation breaks with special characters
	In previous releases, the output of the rtvquery (REST) servlet was truncated if 
	a query result contained a non-ascii character. This is fixed 
	

19420: Exception in data server if attachment has bogus column name
	A problem has been fixed that could cause the data server to become unresponsive. 
	The problem occurres if a client makes a cache data attachment with no row filter 
	and a column filter that specifies one or more nonexistent columns. In those 
	conditions, the data server would occasionally throw the following exception: 
	
	Exception in thread "GmsTimer-DataServer" 
	java.lang.ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException 
	  at com.sl.gmsjrt.GmsTabularData.gg$1(SourceFile:5925)
	  at com.sl.gmsjrt.GmsTabularData.writeObject(SourceFile:5849)
	  at java.io.ObjectStreamClass.invokeWriteObject(Unknown Source)
	  at java.io.ObjectOutputStream.writeSerialData(Unknown Source)
	 ...
	at 
	com.sl.gmsjrtvhistorian.GmsRtViewDataServerDs.sendDataToClients(SourceFile:860) 
	  at com.sl.gmsjrtvhistorian.GmsRtViewDataServerDs.gmsTimerFired(SourceFile:899)
	  at com.sl.gmsjrt.GmsTimer.run(SourceFile:106)

19477: Data Server NPE when DS is busy and pushing data to a disconnecting client
	A problem has been fixed that in rare circumstances caused the data server to 
	throw a NullPointerException and become unresponsive after a client disconnected. 

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

18738: Data type handling improvements for Extend by SQL option
	Three problems affecting the Extend By SQL option in cache data source 
	attachments have been fixed. 
	
	The first problem caused the following SQL error in some conditions when a cache 
	attachment was configured with the Extend By SQL option and a filter on a string 
	column, and the database in use was Sybase: 
	
	"Implicit conversion from datatype 'VARCHAR' to 'INT' is not allowed. Use the 
	CONVERT function to run this query." 
	
	The second problem caused SQL errors when a cache attachment was configured with 
	the Extend By SQL option and a filter on a Boolean column, and the database in 
	use was Sybase, Oracle, DB2, or MySQL. 
	
	The third problem caused the Extend By SQL query result to use integer columns 
	for columns that were Boolean in the cache, if the database was Oracle or DB2. 
	
	All three problems are fixed.

19164: Cache data source now reports missing config file
	The cache data source will now generate an error message if a cache definition 
	file cannot be loaded. For example, if a cache definition file named MyCaches,rtv 
	is specified in CACHEOPTIONS.ini but the file does not exist then the following 
	error message will be printed to the console: 
	
	  ERROR: can't load cache definition file MyCaches.rtv, file not found.
	
	In previous releases, no message was printed if a cache file could not be loaded.

19216: Added per-index row limit to cache history table
	To allow more control over the number of rows stored in a cache history table, a 
	new property named maxNumberOfRowsPerIndex has been added to the cache table 
	object (obj_cachetable). 
	
	In the Builder's property sheet, the new maxNumberOfRowsPerIndex property appears 
	in the Cache History Table category. The property is visible only if the cache's 
	maxNumberOfHistoryRows value is greater than zero. (Otherwise the cache does not 
	have a history table). 
	
	If a positive number N is assigned to maxNumberOfRowsPerIndex, then the cache's 
	history table will contain at most N rows for each unique combination of the 
	cache's index column values. 
	
	For example if a cache has one index column named Server and 
	maxNumberOfRowsPerIndex is 500, then the cache's history table will contain no 
	more than 500 rows for each unique name in the cache's Server column. 
	
	If the cache's condenseRowsFlag is set, then the maxNumberOfRowsPerIndex limit is 
	applied to the cache's history_condensed table. If the cache's 
	condenseRowsCombineHistoryFlag is also set, then the maxNumberOfRowsPerIndex 
	limit is also applied to the cache's history_combo table. 
	
	To reduce overhead, a cache's maxNumberOfRowsPerIndex is checked only once per 
	minute or, in the case of the history_condensed table, at the condense interval, 
	whichever is less frequent. This means that the maxNumberOfRowsPerIndex may be 
	exceeded until the next time the limit is checked. 
	
	By default the value of maxNumberOfRowsPerIndex is blank, meaning that no 
	per-index limit is applied to the cache's history tables. 
	
	With the addition of the maxNumberOfRowsPerIndex property the cache history table 
	size is now controlled by 3 properties: 
	
	1. If the historyTimeSpan property is set, the cache trims its history table by 
	removing rows with timestamps that are older than the limit, 
	
	2. Next, if the cache's history table exceeds the maxNumberOfHistoryRows limit 
	(which must be > 0 for the cache to store any history), then the oldest rows are 
	removed from the history table to satisfy the limit. 
	
	3. Next, if the cache's maxNumberOfRowsPerIndex limit is set then it is applied 
	as described above. 

19363: Fixed memory leak for cache attachment with column filter
	A memory leak has been fixed in the cache data source. The leak occurs if there 
	is a data attachment to the current table of a cache, and the data attachment 
	specifies a column filter but no row filter, and rows are never or only very 
	rarely removed from the cache. If there is such a data attachment the data server 
	will leak memory each time the cache is updated. The size of the leak depends on 
	the number of columns specified in the filter. The leak was introduced by changes 
	in RTView version 6.2. 
	

JMX Data Source

18767: JMX connection logic more robust
	A typo in a JMX connection line (jmxconn) will no longer crash RTView.
	

19204: Improved support for mbeans that serialize (Tabular/Composite)DataSupport
	The JMX adapter was updated to handle mbeans that serialize TabularDataSupport 
	and CompositeDataSupport objects, as used in some Tibco BusinessEvent mbeans. The 
	previous adapter would return a text blob for BE methods that returned these 
	types. Now, these objects are properly deserialized into an RTView table. 

Splunk

19379: Splunk data adapter updated
	The Splunk data adapter has been updated to make it compatible with recent 
	versions of Splunk (6.0+). 
	
	The Splunk data adapter uses the recent splunk java SDK so is compatible with 
	compatible with recent versions of Splunk (6.0+). This version of the SDK 
	requires java SE version 6 or higher (for both the splunk server and the data 
	adapter client). 
	
	If you are using Windows, make sure the JAVA_HOME system variable is set to the 
	directory where the JDK is installed. The required jars are included in the 
	delivery and added to the classpath by the GmsLauncher; The user does not need to 
	use RTV_USERPATH as in previous versions. 
	
	Splunk Connections are now defined using explicit Host and Port values rather 
	than a single URL as previously. 
	
	The Splunk options now contains a search job wait time field (in ms). This is 
	used to control the wait time when polling for search job completion; the user 
	will typically not need to modify this value. 
	
	The Attach To Splunk Data dialog has some new fields compared with previous 
	versions. 
	
	The new fields are as follows.
	
	Earliest Time: Filters the (splunk search) returned objects by their timestamp. 
	Only objects that have a timestamp that is >= earliest_time will be returned. 
	
	The time format is always ISO-8601 formatted. Ex:2008-01-29T11:40:58-0800. If 
	omitted, then no earliest time bound is used. 
	
	Latest Time: Filters the (splunk search) returned objects by their timestamp. 
	Only objects that have a timestamp that is < latest_time will be returned. 
	
	The time format is always ISO-8601 formatted. Ex:2008-01-29T11:40:58-0800. If 
	omitted, then no latest time bound is used. 
	
	
	Example Times are 
	2014-06-05T00:00:00-0800
	2014-06-06T00:00:00-0800
	
	ISO-8601 format is described on the web 
	http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601
	http://www.iso.org/iso/home/standards/iso8601.htm
	http://www.w3.org/TR/NOTE-datetime
	
	Offset: The starting offset (0-based) of the first object to return in the 
	(search result) list. Can be used together with Max Results: to "cursor" through 
	a large result set, a small "chunk" at a time. (not the effect on the internal 
	"_serial" splunk data column) 
	
	Divide Data Column: When Selected, this check box makes additional fields visible 
	for use in dividing up data in a returned column ,by means of a Java regular 
	expression, into numbered columns in the returned data. Typically this is used to 
	extract data that has an implicit token or field based positional location in the 
	raw data returned by splunk. Examples of use would be to break up raw log line / 
	HHTP request into fields / columns. 
	
	The additional Divide Column Data fields are as follows
	
	Divide Column Name: The name of the column to divide (split) into individual 
	values - typically this will be the raw data column returned from splunk "_raw" 
	
	Column Data Regexp: The Java Regular Expression (Regexp) specification used to 
	split the data in the named column into individual numbered columns that contain 
	matched occurrences of the regular expression, where the new column name is the 
	number of the occurrence (e.g. "1", "2", "3", etc) 
	
	The Column Data Regexp field contains a drop down with a number of predefined 
	regular expression literals, or you can enter your own. 
	
	Note: Normally Splunk will recognize and extract fields and make them available 
	for searching on, but sometimes you need to split up the raw data to extract 
	meaningful information. 
	
	
	
	

TIBCO Hawk Data Source

19818: Hawk 5.1 support
	The TIBCO Hawk data source has been enhanced to support running against Hawk 5.1. 
	Support for running against Hawk 5.0 has been removed. This means that the system 
	where you are running RTView must have the HAWK_ROOT environment variable 
	pointing to a Hawk 4.x or Hawk 5.1+ installation. The TIBCO Hawk data source can 
	still connect to agents that are running version 5.0, the limitations is only 
	that cannot run on a system where HAWK_ROOT is set to a Hawk 5.0 installation. 
	
	If RTView is run on a system where HAWK_ROOT is set to a Hawk 5.0 installation, 
	it will crash with the following exception: 
	Exception in thread "main" java.lang.IncompatibleClassChangeError: Found class 
	COM.TIBCO.hawk.console.hawkeye.AgentMonitor, but interface was expected 
	at com.sl.gmsjhawkds.GmsHawkConsole4x.initAgentMonitor(GmsHawkConsole4x.java:160) 
	        at com.sl.gmsjhawkds.GmsTibConsole.initHawk(GmsTibConsole.java:513)
	        at com.sl.gmsjhawkds.GmsRtViewHawkDs.initHawk(GmsRtViewHawkDs.java:1192)
	at com.sl.gmsjhawkds.GmsRtViewHawkDs.initializeData(GmsRtViewHawkDs.java:1296) 
	at 
	com.sl.gmsjrtview.GmsRtViewAppManager.initializeData(GmsRtViewAppManager.java:4099) 
	
	
	
	

Display Server

19813: Fixed javascript error thrown by obj_datechooser in IE
	A bug in the thin client has been fixed which caused an "unterminated string 
	constant" error message to appear in Internet Explorer's javascript console when 
	the date chooser control was clicked. 
	

Distribution

19692: Core version removed from derivative releases
	Due to changes in the build procedures for Enterprise Monitor, BW Monitor, EMS 
	Monitor, and OC Monitor, there is no longer a separate Core version number. The 
	console and About dialogs have been updated to reflect this change. A Build 
	Number has been added to the configuration information in order to identify the 
	build from which a release was generated. 
	
	The RTView Info function has been modified to reflect this change. Previously, 
	the RTView Version Info argument returned a table with EM version information and 
	the Product Version Info argument returned a table with Core version information. 
	Since there is now only one version, both arguments now return the same thing 
	which is the table previously returned by the Product Version Info argument. 

Functions

19150: Warning if subst string arg to SetSub function contains spaces
	An error message will now be logged if the Substitution String argument to the 
	Set Substitution function contains spaces. Spaces are not permitted in 
	substitution strings and will likely cause parsing problems elsewhere in RTView, 
	particularly in the thin client. 
	
	If a function named F has its Substitution String argument set to "$A B" the 
	following error message will be generated: 
	
	  ERROR: function <F>, substitution string $A B contains space
	
	To avoid breaking existing configurations that may already define substitution 
	strings with spaces and are working in spite of the potential parsing problems, 
	the function will still define the substitution including any space characters, 
	but will generate the error message. 
	
	Note that spaces are allowed in the Value argument of the Set Substitution 
	function. That has always been the case and is not affected by this task. 

19331: Pivot on Unique Values function upgraded to accept multiple index columns
	The Pivot On Unique Values function has been enhanced so that it accepts multiple 
	column names as the Key Column parameter. When multiple column names are used, 
	separated by semicolon, it groups the results by unique occurrences of the 
	combined values of all columns. When only one column is specified, the behavior 
	is the same as before. 

19557: Ensure Columns now allows a single value with semi-colons if only one column
	The Ensure Columns function has been enhanced to support semi-colons as literals 
	in the Value(s) argument under the following circumstances: 
	
	1. There is only one value in the Column(s) argument.
	2. The Value(s) argument is enclosed in single quotes.
	
	If those conditions are not met, the semi-colon is assumed to be a delimiter for 
	multiple values. 

Logging

19256: Log4J on Linux platforms
	Log4J functionality was restored on Linux platforms.
	

Object Library

Composite Object

19503: Fixed builder crash on save when display contains composite with tabular local vars
	A problem has been fixed that caused the Builder to throw a ClassCastException if 
	a display contains a composite whose subdisplay creates a tabular local variable. 

Control Objects

15035: Image property added to Button Control
	The button control (ob_c1button) now supports an Image property. 
	
	A button can display an image, a label, or both. If both the image and label are 
	set, the image will be to the left of the label. (This order is not 
	configurable). 
	
	This feature is supported in the viewer and thin client. However the appearance 
	can vary slightly between the viewer and the various supported browsers. When 
	displayed in the viewer and different browsers, you may notice differences in the 
	following: 
	
	1. Alignment of the image inside the button: The image may be somewhat closer to 
	the top or bottom edge of the button 
	
	2. Vertical alignment of the image with the button's label, if any: The center of 
	the image may be somewhat lower or higher than the center of the label 
	
	3. Appearance of the image and label if they don't fit inside the button: In some 
	cases the label may be clipped with a "..." replacing the clipped text, or the 
	label may be clipped with no indication, or the label may wrap and may extend 
	below the button. 
	
	It is best to leave several pixels of padding between the image and/or label of a 
	button to avoid wrapping or clipping of text in all browsers. Also, check the 
	button appearance in all browsers you intend to support. 
	
	In Firefox, a button with an image will not depress when it is clicked. However 
	the button's command will still be invoked. 
	
	In iOS Safari, if the image property is set on a small button (32 pixels or less 
	in width) the button will have square corners rather than rounded corners. 

18873: Corrected behavior of listValues property of a ComboBox or a ListBox
	A problem has been fixed that prevented the items listed in a combo box or list 
	box control from updating when a new string was assigned to the control's 
	listValues property. 

19504: listbox selection no longer clears when list changes
	A problem has been fixed in the viewer which caused the selected item in a list 
	box control (obj_c1tlb) to be deselected when the control's listValues property 
	was updated. 

19511: Listbox validation bug fixed
	A problem in the listbox control (obj_c1tlb) has been fixed which caused it to 
	ignore changes to the listValues property in some cases. 

Fx Trend Chart

18167: FX Graphs traceNVisFlag now work even if there is no data
	Previously there was a bug with FX Graphs where un-checking the traceNVisFlag did 
	not have an affect unless it was attached to data. This has been fixed. 

Tables

19796: Table Rows containing larger images no longer clip
	A problem in the display server has been fixed which could cause the heights of 
	table rows containing images to be too small to display the entire image. This 
	problem only occurred if multiple instances of the rtvdisplay servlet were 
	connected to the same display server instance. 
	

Trend Charts

19454: HTML5 chart basic support
	BASICS:
	
	The html5 trend chart is a pure HTML implementation of an RTView trend graph 
	object. In the RTView thin client, the html5 trend chart provides an interactive, 
	high performance trend chart without requiring the Flash player or other browser 
	plugin. 
	
	There is no html5 trend chart in the Builder palette. Instead, a new property 
	named webChartFlag has been added to the flex (obj_fxtrend) and swing 
	(obj_trendgraph02) trend graphs. To enable the html5 trend chart the user simply 
	sets the webChartFlag property to true (checked) on a flex or swing trend graph 
	instance. Then, when the display is opened in the thin client in an HTML5 
	compatible browser, the html5 trend chart will appear in place of the flex or 
	swing trend graph. 
	
	REQUIREMENTS:
	
	Firefox, iOS Safari, and Internet Explorer version 9 or newer support HTML5 and 
	will display the html5 trend chart on displays where enabled. Internet Explorer 
	version 8 and older do not support HTML5 so in those browsers the flex or swing 
	trend chart will be used regardless of the value of the webChartFlag property. 
	
	PROPERTIES:
	
	The html5 trend chart supports all of the major properties available in the flex 
	and swing trend graphs. 
	
	However several minor properties are not supported or have limited support in the 
	html5 trend chart, as follows: 
	
	- background styles: Not supported. Except for the bgColor property, none of the 
	background style properties are supported. This includes the properties whose 
	names begin with bg, traceBg, and border. 
	
	- gradients: Gradient fill is not supported, so none of the properties named 
	*GradientStyle, *GradientMode, or *GradientFlag are supported. 
	
	- markDefaultSize, markScale: Not supported. These default to 6 and No Scale. The 
	markers for each trace can be configured with the traceNMarkStyle/Color 
	properties. 
	
	- traceNMarkStyle: The markers for trace N can be enabled by setting 
	traceNMarkStyle > 0 but the shape of the markers (circle, square, triangle, etc) 
	is selected automatically. 
	
	   - traceNType: Supported types are Line and Bar. Event type is not supported.
	
	- legendWidthPercent, legendValueMinSpace: Not supported. The legend (if visible) 
	is sized automatically. 
	
	- scrollbarMode/Size, zoomEnabledFlag: Not configurable. The scroll and zoom 
	features are always enabled and the scrollbar size is fixed. 
	
	- traceFillStyle: Supported values are None and Transparent. All other values 
	(Solid, Gradient, Transparent Gradient) are converted to Transparent 
	
	- x/yAxisMajor/MinorDivisions: Not supported. The number of ticks on the x & y 
	axis are selected automatically according to the size of the chart. 
	
	   - yAxisPostion: Not configurable. The y axis position is always outer-left.
	
	   - yAxisAutoScaleVisTracesOnlyFlag: Not configurable, always true.
	
	- x/yAxisFlag, x/yAxisThickness: Not configurable. The x and y axes are always 
	visible with a thickness of 1 and 2 pixels, resp. 
	
	- traceGroupNBandedFlag: Not supported. Trace groups are supported but banding 
	within groups is not. 
	
	- alert properties (valueHighAlarm*, valueLowAlarm*, valueHighWarning*, 
	valueLowWarning*): The html5 chart supports one alert threshold per chart. If 
	more than one alert threshold is enabled, the html5 chart will not be used. Also, 
	the alert TraceColor is used only if the traceFillStyle is None. For any other 
	traceFillStlye the alert TraceColor is ignored. The alert TraceStyle, Mark, and 
	MarkColor are ignored. The alarmGlowFlag is not supported. 
	
	The properties marked as Not supported or Not configurable in the list above will 
	not appear in the Builder's property sheet when a trendgraph object is selected 
	and webChartFlag is checked. 
	
	In some cases if the properties listed above have been configured on a flex or 
	swing trendgraph instance, then the webChartFlag property will be automatically 
	set to false and hidden in the property sheet, because the html5 trend chart does 
	not support those features. This occurs if any traceGroupNBandedFlag is checked, 
	if more than one alarm threshold is enabled, or if the alarmGlowFlag is checked. 
	Are any new properties supported?
	
	The html5 trend chart supports two additional properties that are only visible in 
	the property sheet if webChartFlag = true. 
	
	- webChartNavigatorTrace: If this property is set to a trace number (a value 
	between 1 and the traceCount value) the html5 chart will display a "time 
	navigator" at the bottom of the chart, just below the x (time) axis. The 
	navigator plots the data for the indicated trace, and highlights the time range 
	that is currently visible in the chart. The highlighted section can be resized or 
	dragged to perform a time zoom or scroll. The navigator is intended to show the 
	user the entire data set and let the user zoom/pan to the time range of interest. 
	By default webChartNavigatorTrace = 0 so the navigator is disabled. 
	
	- yAxisAutoScaleVisDataOnlyFlag: If this property is checked the chart will 
	compute the y axis scale according to the min & max y values of the visible data 
	points only. This means that the y axis scale may change as the user changes the 
	visible time range by scrolling or zooming. By default the property is unchecked 
	and the y axis is scaled according to the y values of all of the data points, 
	visible or not, which matches the behavior of the swing and flex trendgraphs. 
	
	The Builder does not allow the webChartFlag property to be attached to data. This 
	is by design, since the flag's value is expected to be constant. 
	
	BEHAVIOR: 
	
	In addition to the properties listed above, there are some behavioral differences 
	between the html5 trend chart and the flex/swing trend graph as follows. 
	
	- Legend: The legend does not show trace point data (y) values. Data values are 
	only shown in the mouseover tooltips (if cursorFlag = 1). The cursor always snaps 
	to the nearest data point, it does not show interpolated values between data 
	points. Trace labels longer than 200 pixels are wrapped in the legend, and labels 
	longer than 150 pixels are clipped in the tooltip. 
	
	- Y axis autoscaling: Given the same y data values, the html5 trend chart may 
	choose a different value range for the y axes in autoscale mode as compared to 
	the other trendgraphs, because somewhat different algorithms are used. 
	
	- Reset button: If the user changes the chart's visible time range, via the 
	scrollbar or navigator or by dragging the cursor to perform a zoom, then a button 
	labeled Reset will appear in the upper left corner of the plot area. A click on 
	this button will reset the time axis to its original settings. The chart will 
	also resume shifting to show the newest trace points, unless the 
	timeRangeBegin/End properties are set. 
	
	- Data point grouping: The html5 trend chart makes use of a feature known as data 
	grouping to enhance performance when a trace has many data points. With data 
	grouping, the chart plots a single point using the average y value in cases where 
	otherwise multiple points would be plotted on the same x pixel coordinate. When 
	data grouping is in effect, the chart's tooltip will display a start time and end 
	time (rather than the usual single time value) to indicate the time range of the 
	averaged data points, for example: 
	
	      05-Mar 12:35:00 ~ 05-Mar 12:45:00
	
	[Notes: The data point grouping feature is enabled automatically and is not 
	configurable. Also data gropuing is performed independently of (and possibly in 
	addition to) any data condensing or compaction that has already been applied by 
	the RTVuew cache data source or the historian. Also the maxPointsPerTrace 
	property (3200 in the test1 display) is applied to the raw data, before any data 
	grouping is applied.} 
	
	The legendTimeFormat is used to format the date/time strings in the tooltip. If 
	that property is blank then the timeFormat property is used instead, but if the 
	string contains a newline it is replaced with a space character to avoid making 
	the tooltip overly tall. 
	
	- timeShift: The html5 trend chart does not attempt to keep the tick marks on the 
	time axis aligned on even multiples of the timeShift value, in the case where 
	timeShift > 1. 
	
	ENABLING / DISABLING:
	
	The html5 trend chart can be enabled for all obj_fxtrend (flex) instances by 
	adding the following rule to an rtview stylesheet (.rts) file loaded by the 
	display server: 
	
	obj_fxtrend {
	  webChartFlag : 1
	}
	
	Similarly, the html5 trend chart can be enabled for all obj_trendgraph02 (Swing) 
	instances by the following rule: 
	
	obj_trendgraph02 {
	  webChartFlag : 1
	}
	
	See the documentation for more information on using RTView stylesheets.
	
	If a stylesheet is used note that the webChartFlag value can still be overridden 
	and set to zero (false) on individual instances. Also, even if webCharFlag is set 
	on all instances, the flex or Swing trendgraph will still be used if a display is 
	opened in Internet Explorer 8 or older, or if certain properties not supported by 
	the html5 chart (as listed above) are configured on a specific trendgraph. 
	
	To disable the html5 trend chart globally, regardless of the webChartFlag value 
	on individual objects, specify the -nohtml5 argument on the display server 
	command line, or use the equivalent property. Alternatively, add the following 
	line to the rtvdisplay.properties file then rebuild and deploy the rtvdisplay.war 
	file: 
	
	HTML5Enabled=false
	
	Finally, the html5 chart can be disabled in a specific browser window by 
	appending nohtml5=true to the URL, for example: 
	
	http://myserver/rtvdisplay/getdisplay.jsp?display=test1&nohtml5
	http://myserver/rtvdisplay/panels.jsp?file=myapanels.xml&nohtml5
	
	KNOWN ISSUES/LIMITATIONS:
	
	- After zooming or scrolling, the time axis labels may briefly be misaligned or 
	overlap. They should be drawn correctly on the next refresh. 
	
	- The chart's tooltip may overlap the Reset button making it difficult to click 
	the button. Moving the mouse a bit will correct this problem. 
	
	- Like the flex chart, the web chart will display all timestamps using the local 
	time zone. This may cause user confusion if the display server is in a different 
	time zone. 
	
	- Performance is affected by the number of traces, trace points, use of trace 
	line shadows, trace line thickness, trace markers, trace fill, and other 
	properties. Performance is also affected by the browser and version, and the CPU 
	speed of the client host system. 
	
	- If any of the chart's graphical properties are changed while the chart is 
	displayed (eg. the traceFillStyle is toggled via a checkbox control) the chart is 
	rebuilt in the thin client, which in turn resets the chart's time range (as 
	though the Reset button was clicked). 
	
	- Scrolling: If the mouse is moved below the bottom of the chart while dragging 
	the scrollbar, the scrolling will stop. This is unlike the behavior of other 
	rtview objects, which will continue to scroll until the mouse button is released. 
	
	- Drilldown from trace points: If traceFillStyle is not "None" (i.e. trace fill 
	is enabled) and multiple traces share the same Y axis, then it is not possible to 
	click on a point belonging to trace N if the fill area of a higher numbered trace 
	is drawn over that point. 
	
	- When yAxisLogFlag = 1 and the chart has multiple y axes and traces, some y axis 
	labels may show ??? rather than numeric values. This is rare. 
	
	- Since the html5 trend chart does not support legendWidthPercent, the width of 
	each chart's legend will vary according to the trace labels. This makes it 
	difficult to create multiple trend chart instances on the same display whose time 
	axes are all the same length, even if the charts all have the same width. (A 
	single chart in stripchart mode may be more appropriate in those cases). 
	
	- On a touch interface, a swipe will scroll the chart left or right. To move the 
	cursor without scrolling, tap the location to which you want the cursor to move. 
	
	- On a touch interface, a pinch-open gesture in the plot area, scrollbar, or 
	navigator will zoom the chart's range in to the pinched range. A pinch-close 
	gesture will zoom out to the pinched range. The pinch-close operation may be 
	difficult to use. A tap on the Reset button gives a better zoom-out experience. 
	
	MISC:
	
	Here is a complete list of the obj_fxtrend properties that are hidden if 
	webChartFlag is checked: 
	
	  legendBgGradientFlag
	   legendWidthPercent
	   markDefaultSize
	   traceBgColor
	   traceBgGradientFlag
	   traceGroupNBandedFlag (for each trace N)
	   yAxisAutoScaleVisTracesOnlyFlag
	   yAxisThickness
	   yAxisPosition
	   yAxisFlag
	   xAxisFlag
	   yAxisMajor/MinorDivisions
	   xAxisMajor/MinorDivisions
	   xAxisThickness
	
	Here is complete list of the obj_trendgraph02 properties that are hidden if 
	webChartFlag is checked: 
	
	   borderPixels   
	   labelMinTabWidth   
	   legendWidthPercent   
	   legendBgGradientMode   
	   legendBgGradientColor2   
	   legendValueMinSpace   
	   markDefaultSize   
	   markScaleMode   
	   outlineColor   
	   scrollbarMode   
	   scrollbarSize   
	   zoomEnabledFlag   
	   timeRangeOfHistory   
	   traceBgColor    
	   traceBgGradientMode   
	   traceBgGradientColor2   
	   traceBgImage   
	   yAxisAutoScaleVisTracesOnlyFlag   
	   yAxisFormat   
	   yAxisFlag   
	   yAxisPosition   
	   yAxisValueLabels   
	   yAxisMajor/MinorDivisions   
	   xAxisFlag   
	   xAxisMajorDivisions
	
	 For each trace N:
	   traceNValueAlarmStatus   
	   traceNValueAlarmStatusTable   
	   traceNValueHistoryFlag   
	   traceGroupNBandedFlag
	   traceNYAxisGridVisFlag
	   traceNYAxisMinLabelWidth   
	   traceNYAxisValueLabels   
	   traceNYAxisVisFlag
	   traceNYAxisAutoScaleMode
	   traceNYAxisValueMin
	   traceNYAxisValueMax

Platform Support

15870: Improved management of Windows file permissions
	The RTView Windows installers have been changed in the following ways:
	
	- The "Registration" start menu launcher now runs as administrator
	- During installation, the following directories are given write permissions for 
	all Authorized Users: 
	
	demos
	servlets
	servers
	custom
	
	
	

19592: Support Chrome as a broswer for the thin client
	The thin client is now supported in Chrome, on Windows. The version tested was 
	Chrome 35.0. 
	
	Chrome was not tested on iOS or Android.

RtvCacheDoc

19327: Sybase schemas updated to conform to Sybase requirements
	All historian database schemas for Sybase have been updated with the following 
	syntax changes: 
	
	- All non-index columns now set the "NULL" parameter
	- The use of the BIT type for boolean columns has been changed to SMALLINT, to 
	allow the use of boolean columns in indexes. 
	
	If you have existing database tables for storing historical data, you should not 
	need to make any changes to them, unless you have seen errors EM server logs that 
	suggest that one of the above changes would resolve the problem.. 

Viewer - Applet

19308: Support applets in Java 1.7 with all permissions.
	In previous releases, the Registration and Viewer Applets failed to run using 
	Java 1.7 due to a security error. This has been fixed. 
	
	The Registration and Viewer jars have been enhanced to include the 
	Application-Name and Permissions parameters in their meta-data in order to pass 
	the Applet security check. Note that the Viewer applet Permissions parameter is 
	set to all-permissions. The Registration applet Permissions parameter is set to 
	sandbox. 

Version 6.3.1 Release Notes

Data Sources

JMS Admin Data Source (for TIBCO EMS only)

19297: ConsumerInfo.Details metrics made optional (now disabled by default)
	Task 19257 added 12 new columns with information from the 
	com.tibco.tibjms.admin.ConsumerInfo.Details class methods to the TIBCO EMS 
	Administration data source Consumer table.The query for this data can be slow, 
	and so by default these columns have been removed from the table. To include 
	these columns in the Consumer table, use the following command line argument: 
	
	-queryCIDetails
	
	Or the following property:
	
	sl.rtview.jmsadm.queryCIDetails=true
	
	Note that enabling this option will slow down the EMS metrics queries on servers 
	with a large number of consumers. 
	

Version 6.3.0 Release Notes

Alerts

18805: Bug loading alert definitions after multiple HA failovers fixed
	In previous releases, a bug with HA caused some alerts not to load in the backup 
	server in the case where the primary server in the pair had failed multiple times 
	without the backup server rebooting and the servers were configured with multiple 
	alert definition files. This has been fixed. 

19032: Fixed synch bug in alert ds for new data only listeners
	In previous releases, a synchronization bug caused some updates from alert 
	commands not to be applied to the new data only listeners in the case where 
	several command updates were executed at the same time. This has been fixed. 

19175: Fixed memory leak when no "new data only" alert table listeners
	In previous releases, the Alert data source leaked memory if there were no data 
	attachments to the AlertTable with either the New Data Only option selected or a 
	row filter. This has been fixed. 

Builder

18377: New mechanism to specify template for new displays
	The builder supports a new property named displayTemplate. It allows the user to 
	specify an rtv file that should be used as the template for all new displays. The 
	user can make any changes (e.g. add objects) to the template, and the builder 
	will prompt for a new file name when the user attempts to save the changes, so 
	the template remains unchanged. 
	
	Command-line example:
	
	run_builder -displayTemplate:MyTemplate.rtv
	
	Property file example:
	
	sl.rtview.displayTemplate=MyTemplate.rtv

Customization

18658: Support customization of user/role manager classnames
	In previous releases the java class names for the custom user manager and role 
	manager were hard-coded to MyUserManager and MyRoleManager, respectively. In this 
	release, MyUserManager and MyRoleManager are still the default class names but 
	they can be overridden on the command line via two new options, as shown in the 
	following example: 
	
	run_viewer -customUserManagerClassName:com.xyz.UserMgr 
	-customRoleManagerClassName:com.xyz.RoleMgr 
	
	The custom classnames can also be specified in a properties file, as follows:
	
	  sl.rtview.customUserManagerClassName=com.xyz.UserMgr
	  sl.rtview.customRoleManagerClassName=com.xyz.RoleMgr
	

18700: Role substitutions now queried on login
	The display server will now call GmsRoleManager.getSubstitutions(roleName) every 
	time a user logs in or changes roles. This will allow a custom role manager to 
	change the substitutions returned for a specific role without requiring a restart 
	of the display server. In prior releases, the method was only called once for 
	each unique role name. 

Data Historian

18791: New property to set the character limit of text index columns
	The historian supports a new property named charlimitindex to specify the length 
	of each text (VARCHAR) column that is an also index column in the corresponding 
	cache. 
	
	For example, if -charlimitindex:70 is specified on the command line when starting 
	the historian, then for each text column that is an index column in a cache, the 
	historian will add a VARCHAR(70) column to the database table it creates to 
	persist the cache. 
	
	If the charlimitindex property is not specified then all text columns, including 
	index text columns, will use the size specified by the charlimit property. 
	
	If the charlimit property is not specified, then all text columns will be created 
	as VARCHAR(50). 
	
	For example, if the following properties are specified on the historian command 
	line then all index text columns will be created as VARCHAR(70) and all non-index 
	text columns will be created as VARCHAR(200): 
	
	run_historian -charlimit:200 -charlimitindex:70
	
	The charlimitindex property is useful in cases where the database limits the 
	total width (in characters or bytes) that can be used in an index. This includes 
	DB2, Sybase, and Oracle. 

18854: New property to skip check for history/history_s
	The following property can now be specified to prevent the Historian from 
	attempting to create or modify the HISTORY and HISTORY_S tables 
	
	sl.rtview.historian.historyTableName=__none
	
	(Note that the value __none begins with two underscores).
	
	By default the Historian will create the HISTORY and HISTORY_S tables and, 
	depending on other properties, may periodically attempt to delete old rows from 
	those two tables. Since neither table is used in EM, it is convenient to prevent 
	the historian from attempting to create or modify those tables. 

19131: Data Historian Backlog property
	The historian now supports a property named local_backlog. This property can be 
	used to help avoid loss of data during busy periods when the historian is 
	receiving data from a data server at a higher rate than it can be stored in the 
	database. If the local_backlog property is set, the historian will use its local 
	heap space to keep the backlog of data rows to be stored in the database. If the 
	local_backlog property is not set then the row backlog is kept in the data 
	server, where it may be discarded after a relatively brief time if the historian 
	is unable to process it. By default the local_backlog property is not set. 
	
	The property can be set as follows on the command line:
	
	  run_historian  -local_backlog
	
	or in a properties file:
	 
	  sl.rtview.historian.local_backlog=true
	
	The local backlog will keep a minimum of 50,000 rows of data. If the Oracle 
	server jvm is used, the backlog will grow as large as the available heap space 
	allows. 
	
	The following message appear in the historian log each time the backlog is 
	increased by 1000 rows: 
	
	    backlog: increased to N rows
	
	or decreased by 1000 rows:
	
	    backlog: decreased to N rows
	
	where N is the current number of rows in the backlog. If the incoming rate of 
	data exceeds the rate at which data can be stored in the database for an extended 
	period of time, the backlog may need to be trimmed in order to avoid an 
	OutOfMemory exception in the historian. If that occurs, the following message 
	appear in the historian log: 
	
	    backlog: discarded N rows
	
	If this message is seen frequently, then it may be necessary to adjust the data 
	server, historian, and/or database configuration to reduce the incoming data 
	volume or increase database throughput. (That topic is beyond the scope of this 
	note). 

Compaction

18655: Historian smoothing and compaction on non-US date strings
	Historian smoothing and compaction no longer fail on non-US date strings in 
	non_US timezones. 

19100: Extraneous debug message removed from Advanced Compaction
	A leftover debug message was in the Historian code at the highest 
	-compactionverbose:2 level. This message was benign and has been removed. 

19101: Improved multi-thread support for Advanced Compaction
	A better method for multi-thread support for Advanced Compaction was implemented. 
	Messages like ?database connection busy, skip? should not appear. 

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

18670: Gaps in extend-by-sql cache data attachment fixed
	A bug has been fixed that caused time gaps to appear in data supplied a cache 
	attachment configured as follows: 
	
	Cache : MyCache
	Table : history, or history_combo
	Time Range : <any value larger than the time range of data available in the cache 
	table above> 
	Extend with SQL : on
	Begin Time: <blank>
	End Time: <blank>
	Update Once: off  (if Table = history)
	Update : On Condense or Always (if Table = history_combo)
	
	A cache attachment with that configuration will periodically update its 
	listeners, as new data is added to the cache history table. In prior releases, a 
	time gap would eventually appear between the most recent data retrieved by the 
	Extend with SQL query and the oldest data in the cache history table. This is 
	fixed. 

18707: Enhance rowExpiredIndexColumns behavior in Mark+Delete mode
	The row expiration feature of the cache data source has been enhanced to allow 
	the rowExpiredIndexColumns and the rowExpirationTimeForDelete properties to be 
	used in combination. If a cache is configured as follows ... 
	
	rowExpirationMode = 3 (Mark + Delete)
	rowExpirationTime = -1
	rowExpirationTimeForDelete = any value > 0
	rowExpiredIndexColumns = any subset of the cache's index columns
	
	... then if a row X exists in the cache's current table and that row's values in 
	the columns specified by the rowExpiredIndexColumns are not matched in the data 
	table applied to the cache's valueTable property, the row will be marked as 
	Expired. Subsequently, if row X is not updated again before the time specified by 
	the rowExpirationTimeForDelete property has elapsed then row X will be deleted 
	from the cache's current table. 

18737: Corrected extra rows in history_condensed table
	In prior releases the history_condensed and history_combo tables of a cache with 
	the condenseRowsFlag = true would contain 2 rows per condense interval per index, 
	instead of 1 row as expected, if the cache's condenseRowsRawDataTimeSpan < 
	condenseRowsInterval * 3. This is fixed. 

JMS Admin Data Source (for TIBCO EMS only)

19257: Gather Consumer Details information
	The TIBCO EMS Administration data source Consumers table has been enhanced to 
	include 12 new columns with information from the 
	com.tibco.tibjms.admin.ConsumerInfo.Details class methods: 
	
	curMsgSentCount (long) - getCurrentMsgCountSentByServer()  or -1 if unavailable
	totalMsgSentCount (long) - getTotalMsgCountSentByServer()  or -1 if unavailable
	curMsgSentSize (long) - getCurrentMsgSizeSentByServer()   or -1 if unavailable
	destinationPrefetch (int) - getDestinationPrefetch()   or -1 if unavailable
	prefetchDeliveredCount (int) - getPrefetchDelivered()   or -1 if unavailable
	elapsedSinceLastAck (long) - getElapsedSinceLastAcknowledged() or -1 if 
	unavailable 
	elapsedSinceLastSent (long) - getElapsedSinceLastSent()   or -1 if unavailable
	routeName (String) - getRouteName()  or blank if unavailable
	sessionAckMode (String) - getSessionAcknowledgeMode() or Unknown if unavailable 
	** 
	totalMsgAckCount(long) - getTotalAcknowledgedCount()   or -1 if unavailable
	isActive (Boolean) - isActive()  or false if unavailable
	isSystem (Boolean) - isSystem() or false if unavailable
	
	** The sessionAckMode column contains a String created from the value returned by 
	getSessionAcknowledgeMode() as follows: 
	TibjmsAdmin.SESSION_UNKNOWN_ACKNOWLEDGE: "Unknown Ack"
	TibjmsAdmin.SESSION_XA: "XA"
	TibjmsAdmin.SESSION_TRANSACTED: "Transacted"
	TibjmsAdmin.SESSION_NO_ACKNOWLEDGE: "No Ack"
	TibjmsAdmin.SESSION_AUTO_ACKNOWLEDGE: "Auto Ack"
	TibjmsAdmin.SESSION_DUPS_OK_ACKNOWLEDGE: "Dups OK Ack"
	TibjmsAdmin.SESSION_CLIENT_ACKNOWLEDGE: "Client Ack"
	
	If getSessionAcknowledgedMode() returns a value not listed here, the 
	sessionAckMode will be "Unrecognized Type(x)" where x is the value returned by 
	getSessionAcknowledgedMode(). 

19263: New option to disable FT discovery
	The TIBCO EMS Administration data source has been enhanced with a new command 
	line option: 
	
	-disableFTDiscovery
	
	This option is not used by default. 
	
	When this option is NOT used, for each server that is defined in the servers.xml 
	or discovered using Hawk or Routes, RTView queries the EMS Server for its fault 
	tolerant URL. The URL returned by the EMS Server is the value used in the 
	ft_active setting in the EMS Server configuration. If RTView does not already 
	have this URL in the ServerTable, it will be added and a connection to it will be 
	made. This can cause duplicate entries in the ServerTable in the case where the 
	server was specified in servers.xml using a different URL than was used in the 
	ft_active field. For example, the URL in ft_active uses a host name but the 
	servers.xml entry for the same server uses an IP address. Or, the servers.xml 
	uses a DNS alias, but the ft_active uses a host name or ip address. 
	
	When this option IS used, RTView will not query each EMS Server for its fault 
	tolerant URL. Instead, it expects that all fault tolerant EMS Server pairs are 
	added to servers.xml as compound urls (ex. tcp://myhost:7222,tcp://myhost2:7224). 
	For each server in the compound url, the fault tolerant url will be set to the 
	other server in the compound url. No error checking is done to confirm that the 2 
	urls listed are actually a fault tolerant pair. It is up to the user to be sure 
	that the servers.xml information is correct. 
	
	In addition to the command line option, you can also use the following property 
	to enable this feature: 
	sl.rtview.jmsadm.disableFTDiscovery=true
	

JMS Data Source

19176: Synchronization bug fixed
	In previous releases, the JMS data source had a synchronization bug that could 
	cause occasional data updates to be missed. This would only happen in the case 
	where multiple updates for the same listener came in almost simultaneously. 
	
	This bug has been fixed.

JMX Data Source

18747: Support for connecting to multiple security enabled WAS servers
	It is now possible to connect to more than one Secure WAS Server via JMX.
	

TIBCO Hawk Data Source

18796: Support Hawk 5.0
	The Hawk data source has been enhanced to support Hawk 5.0. In order to use Hawk 
	5.0, you must run with java 1.7+. 
	
	If Hawk 5.0 is configured for log4j logging, you will need to add your log4j jar 
	to the RTV_USERPATH. 
	
	RTView does not support AS (DataGrid) transports. Only RVD and EMS transports are 
	supported for Hawk 5.0. 
	
	The Hawkspot sample microagent application does not work with Hawk 5.0.
	

18820: Hawk DS now requesting for retransmitted alerts properly
	In previous releases, there was a bug with requesting existing alerts after an 
	agent expired and then came back. This has been fixed. 

19130: Hawk data synchronization improvement
	In previous releases, a synchronization bug in the hawk data source occasionally 
	resulted in some data being missed. This has been fixed. 

TIBCO Rendezvous Data Source

19177: Synchronization bug fixed
	In previous releases, the RV data source had a synchronization bug that could 
	cause occasional data updates to be missed. This would only happen in the case 
	where multiple updates for the same listener came in almost simultaneously. 
	
	This bug has been fixed.

Display Server

18663: Thin client now supported in in cross-domain iframe
	In prior releases, if a web page in domain xyz.com contains an iframe that loads 
	the thin client via getdisplay.jsp in a URL for domain abc.com, security 
	exceptions occur and disable the thin client. This is fixed. 

18689: Support updates to drillDownColumnSubs on table
	The drillDownColumnSubs property of the table object (obj_table02) can be 
	attached to data. However, in previous releases the thin client only read that 
	property when the display was opened and ignored subsequent updates from the data 
	attachment. This has been fixed. 

18694: Tooltips now accomodate quote and bracket characters
	In prior releases, if an object's mouseOverText property was assigned to a string 
	containing a ', ", <, or > character, the thin client would not render the 
	tooltips properly and sometime extraneous text characters would appear on the 
	display. This is fixed. 

18825: Display server memory leak fixed
	A memory leak has been fixed in the display server that caused memory to grow at 
	a small rate for each new session. 

18893: Global subs set in login no longer reset after navigation
	The following problem in the thin client has been fixed: If a global variable $x 
	is initialized to a value of (say) 100 via a login sub defined in users.xml or 
	roles.xml, and then $x is set to a value of 200 by user interaction with a 
	display, the value of $x will incorrectly revert to 100 when the user later 
	navigates to a new display. 

Functions

19143: GroupBy result now correct when possible index combos > 2 ^ 31
	A bug in the GroupByTimeAndUniqueValues function has been fixed which caused rows 
	to be missing from the result in the case where the input table has multiple 
	index columns and the union of all possible combinations of the index values 
	present in the table exceeds 2^31 

Object Library

18713: Support animated GIFs in some objects in thin client
	The thin client has been enhanced to support animated gif images on obj_rect_il 
	(simple label object), obj_ind_limits (indicator object with 4 analog alert 
	limits) and obj_ind_multi (indicator object with multiple discrete alert values). 
	In prior releases, only the first frame of an animated gif would appear on these 
	objects. 
	
	A new property named imageAnimatedFlag has been added to each of these objects. 
	This property must be checked (set to true) in order for the animation to occur 
	in the thin client. 
	
	To avoid excessive CPU usage in the display server, the frame delay in all 
	animated gif images should be 50 msec or larger. 
	
	If the object's label string overlaps with the image, then in the thin client the 
	string will be obscured by the image. To avoid this limitation, set the 
	labelTextPosY property to Outside Top/Bottom or set the labelTextPosX property to 
	Left or Right. 
	
	For obj_ind_limits and obj_ind_multi, if the value string overlaps with the image 
	then in the thin client the string will be obscured by the image. To avoid this 
	limitation, set the valueTextPosY property to Outside Top/Bottom or set the 
	valueTextPosX property to Left or Right. 
	
	This feature is only supported in the thin client. In the builder/viewer, the 
	animation will only update once every two seconds or after a mouse event. 
	

Tables

18712: Support animated GIFs in table cells in thin client
	An animated gif image will work properly in the thin client if used in a cell 
	value in obj_table02. In previous releases, only the first frame of an animated 
	gif was displayed. 
	
	To avoid excessive CPU usage in the display server, the frame delay in all 
	animated gif images should be 50 msec or larger. 
	
	Note that animated gifs are still not supported in the builder/viewer, where the 
	animation is only updated every two seconds or after a mouse click. This is a 
	known limitation that is not addressed by this task. 
	

Platform Support

18746: Table index names shortened for Oracle and Sybase
	The historian will now keep index names to 30 characters or less on Oracle and 
	Sybase to avoid "identifier is too long" errors from those databases. 
	

RTView Display Panel

18722: Panel can now be minimized by default in thin client
	The rtvDisplayPanel tag in a PANELS.ini file now supports an attribute named 
	minimized. If this attribute is set to true, as in the north panel in the 
	following example, then the panel will initially be hidden in the thin client: 
	
	<?xml version="1.0" ?>
	<panels xmlns="www.sl.com" version="1.0">
	<rtvLayout title="Panel Example" dividers="true">
		<rtvDisplayPanel region="north" minimized="true" display="title.rtv"/>
		<rtvDisplayPanel region="center" name="main"  display="test1.rtv"/>
	</rtvLayout>
	</panels>
	
	The minimized attribute is only effective if dividers="true" is specified in the 
	rtvLayout tag, as in the above example. The minimized attribute only works in the 
	thin client, it is ignored in the Viewer. 
	
	A minimized panel can be made visible by clicking in the dark area in the center 
	of its divider bar. 

Reporting

19178: Report generator now available for EM
	In previous releases, the report generator could not be used in EM. This has been 
	fixed. 
	

Viewer

18428: Support tabbing into composites in Viewer
	The Viewer now supports an option -tabcomposites:true which allows the keyboard 
	focus to be moved to controls inside obj_composite instances, via the Tab key. 
	
	If the option is not specified, the Tab key traversal does not include controls 
	inside composites, which was the behavior of the Viewer in all previous releases. 
	
	The thin client is not affected by this option, since it has always supported 
	keyboard traversal into composites. 

Version 6.2.1 Release Notes

Alerts

18671: alertTableValid correct after multiple HA failovers
	In EM 1.2, a bug was introduced with HA that caused the alert table to stop 
	receiving updates from backup servers in the case where the primary server in the 
	pair had failed multiple times without the backup server rebooting. This has been 
	fixed. 

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

18563: improve perf when incoming data not in time order
	The performance of the cache data source has been improved in the case where a 
	cache is configured to keep a history table and the cache's timestamp column is 
	contained in the data tables that are applied to the cache (rather than being 
	added by the cache itself) but the values in that timestamp column are not always 
	in ascending time order in the incoming data tables. The performance improvement 
	is most noticeable when the history table is large, the cache's 
	allowDuplicatesInHistoryFlag property is set to false, and new data is applied to 
	the cache frequently. 

JMX Data Source

18616: synchronization bug when multi-threading is enabled
	In the previous release, if the JMX option to Use Multile Threads for Commands 
	and Polled Queries was enabled, a synchronization problem caused data attachments 
	to multiple connections to miss some updates and duplicate others. This has been 
	fixed. 

SNMP Data Source

18551: Improvements for table index handling and data types
	The SNMP data adapter was unable to return SNMP tables with non-integer indexes. 
	The SNMP data adapter now treats table indexes as arbitrary strings and assigns 
	an integer index value to each unique index string. 
	
	Previously all SNMP variables were returned as strings. Now each variable is 
	returned with a reasonable java type (eg, 32 bit counters are mapped to longs). 
	
	Note that the new adapter requires more concise OID specifications.
	

Display Server

18660: thin client resize breaks scrolling in table
	Beginning with version 6.0.2 in the thin client, if the user resizes the browser 
	window, a table object may have unused space below the bottom row even though 
	there are more data rows that could be displayed, and may incorrectly display 
	empty cells in columns at the right edge of the table. This problem is fixed. 

Functions

18569: enhance Set Subs By Lookup to add $ to column names
	The Set Substitutions by Lookup function has been enhanced with a new argument, 
	Add Dollar To Column Names. By default, the value is 0 and the function behaves 
	as it did before. 
	
	If Add Dollar To Column Names is set to 1, each column after the Key column is 
	used to set a substitution regardless of whether or not it starts with $. For 
	columns that do not start with $, a $ is added to the beginning of the column 
	name when it is used as a substitution name. 

18589: Combine Multi-Server Tables now keep data after server restart
	In previous releases, the table returned by the "Combine Multi-Server Tables" 
	function was cleared when it received the first update from a reconnecting data 
	server, so the table was missing the rows from all the other servers until each 
	of those servers sent another update. This problem has been fixed. 

18591: Last table rows function returns incorrect value, may deadlock
	In 6.2.0 the Last Table Rows function returned an extra row if the Index Column 
	Names argument was blank. If the function was used in certain cache 
	configurations, it could also deadlock. Both problems are fixed. 

18602: Mark Time Gaps func throws array bounds exception.
	A bug in 6.2.0 has been fixed that caused the Mark Time Gaps function to throw an 
	ArrayOutOfBoundsException if a time gap was found in an integer data column. 

General

18581: cache history query not run if no cache props attached to data
	A bug has been fixed that prevented the initial sql query from being run to fill 
	cache history tables in some configurations. The problem occurred if a cache was 
	configured with constant values for all of its properties and either the cache 
	had no current data or the current data was provided indirectly by a Store Table 
	in Cache function rather than a data attachment on the cache's valueTable 
	property. 

Object Library

Charts (General)

18609: Mouseover on graph objects in rich client fixed
	The mouse over was broken for all graphs except the trendgraph in RTView 6.2. 
	This has been fixed. 
	

Tables

18545: New drilldown select mode to update ddColumnSubs at data update
	The drillDownSelectMode property on obj_table02 now supports a new mode of 2 
	(Element Only + Auto Update) in addition to the existing modes of 0 (Anywhere) 
	and 1 (Element Only). When drillDownSelectMode is set to 2 the table's command is 
	performed automatically when the row selection changes after a data update. 
	
	The new mode is available only if the table's command property is configured to 
	perform a drilldown to the current display in the current window, and if the 
	table's indexColumns property is set to a nonempty string. 
	
	The new mode is useful in cases where the substitutions set by the table's 
	drilldown command need to be updated if some of the selected rows in the table 
	are removed by a subsequent data update. 

18546: Support deselecting all rows in a table
	The table object (obj_table02) now supports a property named clearSelection. When 
	the property is set to a value of 1, all rows in the table are deselected. When 
	the property is set to a value of 2, all rows are deselected and the table's 
	action or its drillDownTarget are invoked. 
	
	Typically, a table's clearSelection property would be attached to a local 
	variable that is set by a control object on the same display. 
	
	For example, say you want a to add a Clear Selection button to a display that 
	contains a table that supports multiple row selection. This could be configured 
	as follows: 
	
	1. Add a local variable named $clearSelection with an initial value of 0.
	
	2. Create a button object, with these property values:
	     label : "Clear Selection"
	     valueToSet : 1
	     varToSet : <attached to the $clearSelection variable>
	
	3. Set these table object's properties:
	     clearSelection : <attached to the $clearSelection variable>
	
	4. If the table object has a drilldown command, or a drillDownTarget, add this to 
	its Drill Down Substitutions: 
	     $clearSelection : 0
	
	The last step is required to reset value of the $clearSelection variable to zero 
	when the user selects a row in the table. 

18554: New option to not display newlines in row data
	The table object (obj_table02) has been enhanced to support removing line breaks 
	from the text displayed in the table cells. To enable this feature, turn on the 
	removeLineBreaksFlag property in the Data Format category. 
	
	This option will only remove line breaks from the table cell, not from the drill 
	down values. For example, if you have your drillDownColumnSubs setup to set a 
	substitution from a cell with a line break, the substitution value will contain 
	the line break regardless of the removeLineBreaksFlag. This works correctly in 
	the Viewer Application. 
	
	In the Thin Client, the drill down substitution will not contain the line break 
	if the removeLineBreaksFlag is set. See the PAL for 18582 for more information. 

Version 6.2.0 Release Notes

Alerts

18553: Custom object properties and event attributes are now restored
	In previous releases, persisted custom event attributes and alert object 
	properties were not restored correctly. This has been fixed. 

18577: Timing problem with persisting disabled state during terminate
	After the addition of task 18308, the alert engine sometimes incorrectly 
	persisted the alert engine state as disabled during terminate or fail-over. This 
	has been fixed. 
	

Builder

18513: Icon Properties dialog requires Apply or you lose data
	A problem has been fixed in the Builder which required the user to click Apply 
	before closing the Icon Properties dialog after configuring a object grid with 
	Icon Class Name = obj_composite and changing the rtvName property value. If the 
	user simply clicked OK in that case, the changes were lost. 

18514: Cannot display data for attachment with blank data server sub
	A bug has been fixed in the Builder which caused the Display Data dialog to show 
	no data, when a data attachment was selected whose Data Server field was assigned 
	to a substitution whose value was an empty string. 

Customization

18344: New isDbConnected method in custom command handler
	A new method has been added to the GmsRtViewCustomCommandHandler class to test 
	the status of a SQL database connection in the local process: 
	
	/** Returns true if the specified database connection is connected. Note that
	 * this method has 2 limitations. First, it only works for databases accessed
	* via the sql ds in the local process (ie not in a separate data server). Second, 
	it 
	 * returns the current status which is only updated when a query is run against
	 * that connection. To keep the status current, add a data attachment to query 
	 * the first row in a table in each database you want to call this method on.
	 * @param dbName The name of the database to test.
	 * @return True if this process is connected to the database. False otherwise.
	 */
	public boolean isSqlDbConnected (String dbName)
	

Data Server

18018: Support active standby mode in backup data server
	The data server supports a new property named group_standby_mode that affects the 
	behavior of the backup data server in a redundant HA server group. The values for 
	group_standby_mode are "passive" and "active". If no value is specified the 
	default value is passive. 
	In prior releases, only passive standby mode is supported
	
	If group_standby_mode is set to passive, the backup server does not activate the 
	rtview global, cache, or alert data sources at startup. Instead it activates 
	those data sources only if it leaves standby mode because the primary server 
	fails or is unavailable. Later when the primary server is again available, the 
	backup server returns to passive standby mode by deactivating the alert, cache, 
	and global data sources.. 
	
	If group_standby_mode is set to active, the backup server activates the global 
	and cache data sources at startup, so it will immediately begin to collect data 
	and store it in caches as configured in the global and cache definition files. 
	The backup server does not activate the alert data source at startup, instead it 
	activates alerts only when it leaves standby mode, because the primary server 
	fails or is unavailable. Later when the primary server is again available, the 
	backup server returns to active standby mode by deactivating the alert data 
	source, but it leaves the global and cache data sources activated. 
	
	The intention of active standby mode is to avoid missing data in caches that 
	might otherwise occur during the failover of the primary server to the passive 
	backup server, while the backup server is activating the global and cache data 
	sources. 
	
	Note that there is some cost associated with active standby mode, because both 
	the primary and backup server will be collecting data and storing it in caches. 
	For example if a cache definition file defines SQL queries to collect data, then 
	if active standby mode is used both servers will always be performing those SQL 
	queries, but if passive standby mode is used then only the primary server would 
	perform the queries. 
	
	Note that the alert data source is inactivate in the backup server in both active 
	and passive standby mode, to avoid generation of duplicate alerts by the primary 
	and the backup servers. 
	
	The group_standby_mode property can be specified as follows, where X is either 
	passive or active: 
	
	On the command line:  run_dataserver -group_standby_mode:X  ...
	
	Or in DATASERVER.ini: group_standby_mode X
	
	Or in an rtview properties file:  sl.rtview.dataserver.group_standby_mode=X
	
	If no value is specified for group_standby_mode, passive is the default.

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

17554: add schemaTableStrictFlag to apply schema always
	By default, if a cache has a schemaTable with N columns and a data table with N 
	columns is applied to the cache, but the schema table's column order is different 
	than the data table's, the schema is not applied and the table's columns will be 
	stored in the wrong columns of the cache. 
	
	To address this problem, a property named schemaTableStrictFlag has been added to 
	the cache definition object (obj_cache_table). If this property is checked for a 
	cache which has a schemaTable, then the schemaTable will be applied to all 
	incoming data tables before they are stored in the cache even in the case where 
	the data table and the schema table have the same number of columns. If this flag 
	is unchecked (the default), then the schema is applied only when the data table 
	and schema table have different numbers of columns, as was the behavior in all 
	previous releases. 
	
	Note that applying the schema in all cases will incur additional cpu overhead 
	when updating a cache, if incoming data tables have a large number of columns and 
	a high update frequency. So the flag should only be checked if it is possible for 
	a data table to have the expected number of columns but those columns may be in 
	the wrong order. 
	

18331: max rows not applied to 1st update if extending cache by sql
	A bug has been fixed in the cache data source that prevented the Maximum Rows 
	limit in a cache data attachment from being applied to the first data update if 
	that attachment also had the Extend with SQL option checked. 

JMX Data Source

18459: Make JMX datasource connections multiple threaded
	The JMX data source has been enhanced to support using multiple threads for 
	commands and polled queries. This enhances performance in the case where some JMX 
	servers are slow. Without this feature, a single slow JMX server can delay the 
	data updates from all of the JMX servers. 
	
	By default, this option is disabled. To enable multiple threads, select the Use 
	Multiple Threads for Commands and Polled Queries on the JMX Administration tab of 
	the Application Options dialog. You can also enable or disable this feature with 
	the following command line option: 
	
	-jmx_use_multiple_threads:true/false
	
	When enabled, the thread that created the jmx connection will be used for all 
	commands and polled queries on that connection. The polled queries will initiated 
	based on the poll interval for the data attachment and each connection will 
	update their listeners asynchronously when the data becomes available. Note that 
	RTView will create one thread per connection, so this is not a practical option 
	for cases where hundreds of connections are defined. 
	
	When disabled, the commands and polled queries will behave as they did in 
	previous releases. In this case, the polled queries are executed synchronously 
	and the listener is not updated until the data from all connections in the data 
	attachment has returned. 
	
	For example, a data attachment for a table has * in the connection field and 
	there are 5 defined jmx connections. If this multi-threading option is disabled, 
	every update period or poll interval, RTView will synchronously query all 5 jmx 
	connections and then update the listener once with a table containing the data 
	for all 5 connections. If this multi-threading option is enabled, every update 
	period or poll interval, RTView will asynchronously initiate queries on all 5 jmx 
	connections. As each query returns data, the listener will be update with data 
	for that connection. Therefore the table will be updated 5 times per update 
	period or poll interval with each update only containing the data for one 
	connection. 
	
	Due to this difference in how the listeners are updated, users need to confirm 
	that the listeners for their jmx data attachments to multiple connections can 
	handle partial updates. 
	- If you want to see all connections in a single table, you must cache the data. 
	The indexColumnNames property on the cache must be configured correctly. 
	- For existing caches attached to jmx data that want to use this feature, users 
	should confirm that the indexColumnNames property is properly configured. Since 
	the previous behavior wrote all of the jmx data on every update, a cache could 
	have previously worked correctly even if the indexColumnNames property was not 
	configured correctly. When using the multi-threading option, this will no longer 
	be the case. 
	- For existing functions attached to jmx, users must confirm that the function 
	will operate as expected when receiving update containing only one connection at 
	a time. For example, a Join function attached to jmx might assume that all 
	connections are present in every update. If your function requires all of the 
	connections in each update in order to operate correctly, first put the jmx data 
	into a cache and then use the cache as input to the function. 
	

SQL Data Source

18535: add option to not try ODBC connection for undefined database
	In all prior releases, if an sql query or command is executed that references a 
	database name XYZ and there is no definition of XYZ in OPTIONS.ini then RTView 
	attempts to establish an ODBC connection to XYZ. In this release a new 
	coomand-line option has been added to change this behavior: 
	
	    -sqltryodbc:false
	
	The option can also be specified in OPTIONS.ini:
	
	  sqltryodbc false
	
	or in a properties file:
	
	  sl.rtview.sql.sqltryodbc=false
	
	If this option is specified and an sql query or command is executed that uses 
	database XYZ and there is no definition of XYZ in OPTIONS.ini, then no ODBC 
	connection attempt will be made and instead the following error message will 
	appear in the console: 
	
	    Undefined SQL database XYZ
	
	This option is useful in cases where ODBC connection attempts cause a JVM crash, 
	which has been reported in some JVM versions. 
	
	Note that RTView will still make an ODBC connection if a database has the "Use 
	ODBC Driver" option checked in the SQL tab of the options dialog, even if the 
	-sqltryodbc:false is specified. 

Drill Down

18516: Cannot edit drilldowns with data attachments to functions/vars
	A bug in the Builder's Drill Down Properties dialog has been fixed that prevented 
	changes made to existing data attachments from being saved when the user clicked 
	OK. 

Functions

18408: add column merge option to Join Outer
	The Join Outer function has been enhanced to support a "merge" option for the 
	Column Include Mode argument, in addition to the existing "all", "left", and 
	"right" options. Like the "left" option, the merge option uses the column names 
	and values from the column(s) specified in the Left Column Name argument, but 
	also the "merge" option will include the value from the column(s) specified in 
	the Right Table Column Name in the case where there is no matching index in the 
	left table, rather than null values. 
	
	The merge option is intended for use with Outer Join Type = Full.
	
	The merge option is useful for ensuring that the full outer join result contains 
	only one set of the join columns and that all of those columns contain valid 
	values for all rows in the result. 

18418: Join function result can have bad values and cause OutOfMemory.
	The join and combine functions now function correctly when attached directly to 
	cache tables that are updating at the same time the function is updating. 
	The performance of both functions has been improved.

18540: Replace function should allow replace with empty string
	The eval function replace function should allow an empty string as the second 
	argument, to permit the removal of a character, but in fact this caused an error: 
	
	Evaluating expression "replace(%str, " ", "")": One string argument and two 
	character arguments are required. 
	
	This has been corrected.

General

18552: Timeout added to stop_rtv and kill_dataserver scripts
	In this release, if the kill_dataserver or stop_rtv script is used to stop the 
	data server, display server, or historian process, the process will always 
	shutdown within 60 seconds. In prior releases, the process would sometimes wait 
	indefinitely for connections to close or stalled/deadlocked cleanup threads to 
	complete. Now by default the server will not wait for more than 60 seconds, and 
	at that point it will exit abruptly. A different timeout can be specified on the 
	command line as follows: 
	
	  -shutdown_timeout:N
	
	where N is the timeout period in seconds. If N is zero or less then the process 
	will wait indefinitely for all connections to close and cleanup threads to 
	complete, as in prior releases. If -shutdown_timeout is not specified then a 
	value of 60 seconds is assumed. Note that the process may shutdown more quickly 
	than the shutdown_timeout period if the shutdown proceeds quickly and cleanly. 
	
	The option may also be specified in DATASERVER.ini, DISPLAYSERVER.ini, or 
	HISTORY.ini file, e.g. 
	
	shutdown_timeout 30
	
	Or in a properties file:
	
	sl.rtview.NAME.shutdown_timeout=120
	
	where "NAME" is dataserver, displayserver, or historian as appropriate.
	

Object Library

Tables

18542: Enable deselection of a row in single select mode
	In prior releases, in the thin client it was possible to deselect a row only if 
	the table has multi-select enabled. In this release Ctrl + Click operation will 
	deselect a row in single-select mode as well. 
	
	This is useful because a selected row is highlighted in blue, which masks any 
	colors set in the row via the table's filterProperties property. By deselecting 
	the row the user can see the row colors if desired. 
	
	(Note that deselecting the selected row will not trigger the table object's 
	drilldown so any drilldown substitutions set by the table will remain set to the 
	values for the last row selected. This is the intended behavior). 

Security

18041: support command to change role after login
	INTERNAL
	
	This feature is intended for use in EM configurations, with a panels file.
	
	A new custom command has been implemented that allows the user's role to be 
	changed after login. The command is configured as follows in the command dialog: 
	
	 Command Type: Execute System Command
	 Command Name: rtvapm_change_role
	 Command Value: role=R;file=F
	
	where R is the desired role name and F is the panels file to be loaded. If the 
	file=F is omitted, then PANELS.ini is assumed. Note the R and F can both be 
	substitutions. 
	
	If R is a role that is not permitted for the current user, then the role will not 
	be changed by the command. 
	
	A table of the roles permitted for the current user can be obtained by defining a 
	function as follows: 
	
	  Function Name: getRolesForUser    (for example)
	  Function Type: RTView Info
	  Item: Roles
	
	The table returned by the function will contain a single column named "role" and 
	one row for each role defined for the user. 
	 
	A typical usage on a display would be as follows:
	
	1. Create a function named getRolesForUser, as shown above.
	
	2. Create a local variable named $rtvrole. Leave the Initial Value blank. (The 
	value will be set automatically by rtview, since it corresponds to a predefined 
	global substitution). 
	
	3. Add an obj_combobox instance to the display.
	
	4. Attach the combo's listValues property to the getRolesForUser result.
	
	5. Attach the combo's selectedValue and varToSet properties to the $rtvrole local 
	variable. 
	
	6. Configure the combo;s actionCommand property to invoke the rtvapm_change_role 
	command, as follows: 
	
	 Command Type: Execute System Command
	 Command Name: rtvapm_change_role
	 Command Value: role=$rtvrole

Version 6.1.5 Release Notes

Data Sources

JMS Data Source

18441: Queue browser fix when msgs have inconsistent props or fields
	In previous releases, data attachments to the Queue Browser would throw an 
	exception and fail to return data if all of the messages in the queue did not use 
	the exact same properties and fields. This has been fixed. 

Layouts

18409: Enhanced anchor property to support anchor objects
	The anchor property has been enhanced to support anchoring to anchor objects and 
	also to supporting floating within the extent of anchor objects. 
	
	The anchor property is applied when the window containing the display is resized 
	only if the Resize Mode is set to Layout. The Resize Mode is set in the 
	Background Properties dialog. It is also applied to objects in the composite 
	display when a composite is resized and its resizeMode is set to Layout. 
	Otherwise, this property is ignored. 
	
	By default, objects are not anchored and they float within the extent of the 
	display. For example, if the display is 100 pixels wide and objX is 50, when you 
	resize the display to be 200 pixels wide, the object's objX will move to 100. You 
	can also select an anchor object to float inside. In this case, the object will 
	float within the specified anchor object maintaining its relative position within 
	the anchor object's extent. The object's center must be inside the anchor 
	object's extent and the list of available anchor objects in the Float Inside list 
	in the Anchor Property Dialog is limited to the anchor objects with extents that 
	contain this object's center point. 
	
	When an object is anchored, you may select an anchor for the top, bottom, left 
	and right sides of the object. If you select Display, that side of the object 
	will be anchored to the corresponding side of the display. When the display 
	resizes, the number of pixels between the specified side of the object and that 
	side of the display remain constant. If an object is anchored on opposite sides 
	(ie. Top and Bottom or Left and Right), the object will be stretched to fill the 
	available space. If you select an anchor object, that side of the object will be 
	anchored to the center of the specified anchor object. When the display resizes, 
	the number of pixels between the specified side of the object and the center of 
	the anchor object remain constant. 
	
	Only objects that support the objWidth and objHeight properties support anchoring 
	on opposite sides. If an object has the dock property set, the anchor property is 
	ignored. 
	
	Circular anchor references are not allowed. An object cannot anchor to itself 
	directly or indirectly. 
	
	To make an object available for use as an anchor object, select the 
	isAnchorObject property for that object. When Anchor Property Dialog is open, all 
	of the available anchor objects in the display will show a tooltip displaying 
	their name. 
	
	Since an anchor object is referenced by name when anchoring to an object or 
	floating inside an anchor object, you must not have multiple anchor objects with 
	the same name. This could potentially happen when using include files. This can 
	be avoided by assigning a unique value to the objName property of objects in an 
	include file. For example, you might append "_Header" to the name of each object 
	when 
	building an include file named Header.rtv.

Version 6.1.3 Release Notes

Data Server

18366: Speed improvement for row delta calculation in data server
	The performance of the Data Server and its clients has been improved when 
	tracking and applying changes to large data tables. 

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

18367: Property updateListenersImmedFlag added to cache object
	A property named updateListenersImmedFlag has been added to the cache table 
	object (obj_cache table). The property is in the Cache category and is checked by 
	default. In very specific conditions, the property can be unchecked to improve 
	the performance of the Data Server. 
	
	If updateListenersImmedFlag is checked, then each time new data is stored in the 
	cache the updated contents of the cache's tables are immediately applied to any 
	listeners attached to those tables. This is the default behavior and is 
	appropriate for most caches. 
	
	If updateListenersImmedFlag is unchecked, the updated contents of the cache's 
	tables are not applied to the listeners immediately after new data is stored in 
	the cache. Instead the listeners are updated on the next RTView update cycle. 
	(The default rtview update interval is 2 seconds). This is more efficient in the 
	case where raw event-driven data is frequently stored in the cache (for example 
	high-frequency event data from a JMS, RV, or RtvAgent data attachment) and the 
	cache's current table or history table can grow large (more than 25k rows) and 
	the cache is maintained in a data server. 

18375: Improved row expiration performance
	The performance of the cache data source and data server have been improved when 
	rows with random timestamps expire and are removed from the current table of a 
	cache. 

Functions

18368: Buffer Rows function no longer loses rows
	A bug in the Buffer Rows function has been fixed which made it possible for some 
	rows in the buffer to be lost before the downstream function was updated with 
	those rows. 

Version 6.1.2 Release Notes

Data Server

18358: Fixed bug with RTVQuery Servlet HA functionality
	The following problem with the rtvquery servlet has been fixed:
	
	If the rtvquery.properties file specifies a connection to a backup data server 
	via the DataServerBackup property, then the servlet will be unable to connect to 
	its primary data server specified by the DataServerHost property, unless the 
	DataServerPort property is set to the default value of 3278. If any other value 
	is used for DataServerPort the servlet will only connect to DataServerBackup. 

Version 6.1.1 Release Notes

Alerts

18230: Custom event attributes are now restored
	In previous releases, persisted custom event attributes were not restored 
	correctly. This has been fixed. 

18286: $alertText and custom prop subs now work in cleared command
	In previous releases, the $alertText substitution and the custom property value 
	substitutions were not processed correctly for the alertClearedCommand. This has 
	been fixed. 

18288: Fixed execution of invalid alertClearedCommand
	In previous releases, a bug in the alert processing caused the 
	alertClearedCommand to execute for certain alerts that were never generated. If 
	an alert has the alertDelayTime set to a value greater than 0 (this is set from 
	the Duration in the Self Service Alerts Administration page), an alert will not 
	be generated until the value driving that alert has continuously the threshold 
	for longer than the alertDelayTime. The bug happened for alerts configured with 
	an alertDelayTime value greater than 0 if the value driving the alert exceeded 
	the threshold, then was updated with a value less than the threshold before the 
	alertDelayTime expired. In this case, the alertClearedCommand was executed even 
	though no alert had been generated or cleared. This has been fixed. 

18289: Persisted alerts should be applied before updates
	In previous releases, if the data driving a persisted alert changed during 
	failover, this data change was not always applied correctly if it changed the 
	state of the alert. 
	
	For example, an active alert has been persisted and the alert engine exits. While 
	it is not running, the data changes to a value less than the threshold. When the 
	alert engine restarts, the alert was cleared, but its severity was lost and the 
	alert cleared command was not executed. This has been fixed. 
	
	This fix has 2 side effects:
	
	1. The Alert Variables Table now does not start populating until after the 
	Initial Delay time has expired. Previously, it started populated as soon as any 
	data was received. 
	
	2. Only the last data update received before the Initial Delay time expires will 
	be processed. Previously, updates received before the Initial Delay time expired 
	would be processed, but no alerts would be triggered. This will not cause any 
	change in behavior for scalar alerts or for tabular alerts attached to cached 
	data (or any data where all alert indexes are included in all updates). For 
	alerts that are attached to data where only some indexes are included in each 
	update (ex. JMS messages), all updates except the last one before the Initial 
	Delay time expires will be lost. If this is a problem, put your data in a cache 
	and attach the alert to the cache. 

18293: Added AlertTableValid column to AlertingEnabled table
	The AlertingEnabled table in the Alert data source has been enhanced with a new 
	column, AlertTableValid. This column has a value of false at startup and returns 
	true one update pass after the following conditions have been met: 
	
	1. The alert engine has finished initializing. 
	- If self service is configured, alert initialization does not complete until the 
	alert engine has attached to the self service alerts database. 
	- If persistence is configured, alert initialization does not completed until 
	after the alert engine has read the persisted alerts and added them to the alert 
	table or the Persistence Connection Timeout has expired. 
	2. The Initial Delay time has expired (set on the Alert Definitions tab in 
	Application Options). 
	
	Displays built with previous versions of RTView that had scalar data attachments 
	to the AlertingEnabled table without specifying a Column Name in the data 
	attachment will break. This is because RTView updates scalar properties with the 
	value of the first cell in a one column table, but does not support scalar 
	properties attached to multi-column tables. In order to fix this, modify the data 
	attachment to specify the AlertingEnabled column. 

18308: Persist alert engine enabled state
	The Alert data source persistence has been enhanced to include the Alerts Enabled 
	state. This can be set in Application Options->Alert Definitions or via the 
	Enable Alerts command. 
	
	Previously, if the Enable Alerts command was used to set the enabled state to a 
	different value than had been set in Application Options, this setting would be 
	lost after failover or restart. It is now saved as part of alert persistence. 

Customization

18151: Support standard RTView command calls from custom commands
	Two new methods have been added to the GmsRtViewCustomCommandHandler class in 
	order to support executing standard RTView system and data source commands from a 
	custom command handler. 
	
	/** Executes an RTView System or data source command and returns the 
	 * resulting command status.
	 * @param command The command string. This must use the correct syntax
	 * for the system or data source command.
	 * @param dataServer The name of the dataServer connection to execute the 
	 * command on. If this is null or empty string, the command will be executed 
	 * in the local process. 
	 * 
	 */
	public GmsRtViewCommandStatus executeRtvCommand (String command, String 
	dataServer) 
	
	/** Utility method to create a properly formatted sql command string. This will
	 * return null if either the sqlStatement or the dbName is null or empty string.
	 * @param sqlStatement The sql statement to execute.
	 * @param dbName The name of the database connection to execute this command
	 * on.
	 * @return A string in correct format to pass into executeRtvCommand().
	 */
	public String makeSqlCommandStr (String sqlStatement, String dbName)
	

18194: Allow subs for the poll rate in Custom DS dialog
	Custom data sources and the following standard RTView data sources now support 
	substitutions in the Poll Interval field of the Attach to Data dialog: 
	
	IbmMq
	SNMP
	Splunk
	WMI
	

Data Historian

18097: Indexing on history table creation added
	The historian supports a new option to create indexes on the database tables it 
	creates to persist cache history tables. For large tables, this can improve the 
	performance of SQL queries that RTView executes to retrieve cache history data 
	from the database. 
	
	The command line option is:
	
	   -index_history_tables:true
	
	The option can also be specified in HISTORY.ini as follows:
	
	index_history_tables:true
	
	When this option set to true, the historian will create two indexes on each 
	database table that it creates to persist cache history. One index will use the 
	cache's timestamp column, the other index will use the cache's index columns plus 
	its timestamp column. If the cache has no index columns defined, then only the 
	first index is created. 
	

18162: Smooth Compaction fails to smooth all tables
	In previous releases, if the historian smoothCompaction option was specified and 
	if multiple database tables existed, the historian did not always apply the 
	compaction rules to the old data in all of the tables. This is fixed. 

18163: smoothCompaction should not re-write rows for unchanged interval
	The performance of the historian's smoothCompaction feature has been improved, by 
	avoiding updates to the database table for intervals in which the data has 
	already been compacted. 

Data Server

18281: Run alert persist db updates in correct order on remote server
	A bug in the data server has been fixed which sometimes caused the alert 
	persistence feature to fail when configured to use a data server connection 
	instead of a direct connection to the database, because the sql commands to 
	delete and insert database rows were run out of sequence on the remote data 
	server. 

18285: Ping timeout no longer disables primary and backup server
	A data server bug has been fixed that in rare cases could cause both the primary 
	and backup servers in a redundant HA pair to become unresponsive to clients. 
	
	The problem occurred when the backup server did not receive a ping from the 
	primary server for two consecutive time intervals specified by the group_timeout 
	property, causing the backup server to take over and the primary server to resign 
	and go to standby mode. That is the designed behavior, but in the some cases the 
	backup would incorrectly detect that the primary server was still running as 
	primary and the backup would immediately return to standby mode. This sequence 
	left both servers in standby mode and triggered continuous unsuccessful attempts 
	by both to connect to the other as primary. 
	
	The following changes have been made to fix this problem:
	
	The group_timeout property is no longer used to determine the interval at which 
	ping messages are to be sent and to be expected between the primary and backup 
	servers. Now the primary server will always send a ping to the backup every 5 
	seconds. A new property named group_ping_timeout has been added to determine how 
	long the backup server will wait, in seconds, for a ping from the primary before 
	deciding that the primary has been lost and taking over as primary. The default 
	value of group_ping_timeout is 30 seconds and 30 is also the minimum nonzero 
	value. A value of zero disables the ping timeout feature entirely. 
	
	The group_timeout property is still valid and has a default value of 5 seconds, 
	but now it is used only to determine the timeout on read & write operations on 
	the socket connection between the primary and backup server. 
	
	Note that the ping timeout feature is intended only to detect the rare case where 
	the primary data server is still running and connected to the backup server but 
	for some reason the primary server is stalled and unresponsive. If the primary 
	data server terminates or the host on which it is running is shut down, the 
	backup server will detect this immediately, regardless of the value of the 
	group_ping_timeout or group_timeout, and take over as primary. 

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

18309: Deadlock if cache's rowsToDeleteTable is attached to self
	A bug in the cache data source has been fixed which could cause a deadlock in the 
	case where a cache has rowExpirationMode enabled and also has its 
	rowsToDeleteTable property attached to a function, and that function is attached 
	to current table of the same cache. 

JMX Data Source

18283: Passwords in JMX connection string can now be encrypted
	It is now possible for users to encrypt JMX passwords passed in the additional 
	properties section of a JMX connection line. 
	

SQL Data Source

18166: ignore sqldb property with driver = __none
	If an SQL database connection is defined with a JDBC driver name or URL of __none 
	(two underscores before the 'n') then the SQL datasource will not attempt to 
	connect to the database and will ignore any sql data attachments that specify 
	that database. 
	
	The RTViewDs.Connections meta-table will contain a row for the database but the 
	Connected column and the Enabled column will always show false. 
	
	If the -sqltrace option is used, you'll see this trace message once in the 
	console: 
	          <dbname>: ignoring connection with driver/url=__none

Display Server

16983: hide navtree nodes based on user role in thin client
	The thin client has been enhanced so that nodes in display navigation trees can 
	be hidden according to the user's role. (This feature has been supported in the 
	display viewer in prior releases). 
	
	Access to displays can be determined by user roles. For example, the roles.xml 
	file might be configured to permit a user with the admin role to access all 
	displays but to deny a user with any other role access to any display named 
	"admin*.rtv". In the viewer, if a navigation panel (rtvTreePanel, 
	rtvAccordionPanel, rtvTabbedDisplayPanel) contains nodes or tabs whose display is 
	excluded from the user's role, those nodes/tabs will not appear. However, in 
	prior releases, those nodes/tabs would be visible in the thin client. In this 
	release, the thin client will also hide the nodes/tabs for displays that are 
	excluded from the user's role. No configuration changes are needed to take 
	advantage of this feature if an rtvTreePanel, rtvAccordionPanel, 
	rtvTabbedDisplayPanel is used. 
	
	If a tree or accordion control (obj_c1tree, obj_c1accordion) is configured for 
	display navigation, in this release the control can also be configured to hide 
	nodes for displays that are excluded from the user's role. A new property named 
	roleCheckColumnName has been added to support this feature. The property's value 
	should be set to the name of the column in the data table (to which the control's 
	valueTable property is attached) that contains the display names. The default 
	value of roleCheckColumnName is "Display". 
	

17059: size of dd windows uses the branch function display orig size
	In prior releases, if a display object's drillDownTarget was configured to open a 
	display in a new window, and to use a drilldown branch function to determine the 
	display name, then in the thin client the browser popup window was not sized to 
	fit the display in all cases. This is fixed. 
	
	The fix does not address the case where the drilldown is configured to use a 
	named window. In that case, the window will be sized for the first display that 
	is opened in the named window. If another display of a different size is 
	subsequently opened in the same named window, the window will not be resized in 
	most browsers. This is due to security settings in modern browsers. 

18204: ConcurrentModificationException possible when setting global var
	A ConcurrentModificationException is no longer thrown if a global variable is set 
	in a display in one panel while local variables are being created for a new 
	display loading in another panel. 

18239: Fixed NPE in drilldown branch function processing
	A problem has been fixed that caused the display server to throw a NPE if 
	multiple clients simultaneously performed drilldowns involving a branch function. 
	When the problem occurred the thin client would display a "Null reply from 
	display server" error message, and the display server log contained error 
	messages and stack traces similar to the following: 
	
	   GmsRtViewLocalDs: addObject($x) object is already in table, not added.
	   ... ERROR in process_client_subs :
	   java.lang.NullPointerException
	        at com.sl.gmsjrtview.GmsRtViewPanel.getLocalVarValue()

18241: Auto-failback to primary display server
	Background: 
	In a high availability configuration, the rtvdisplay servlet is configured to 
	have a primary display server (via the DisplayServerHost and DisplayServerPort 
	properties in rtvdisplay.properties) and a backup display server (viae the 
	DisplayServerBackup property). The servlet will connect to its primary server if 
	available otherwise it will connect to its backup display server. However, once 
	the servlet connects to its backup display server it will not (re)connect to the 
	primary later, unless the backup server is stopped or the app server (tomcat) is 
	restarted. 
	
	Enhancement:
	In this release, the rtvdisplay servlet can now be configured to periodically 
	attempt to (re)connect to its primary display server while it is connected to its 
	backup display server. If the connection to the primary server is made 
	successfully, then the servlet will disconnect from the backup server and use the 
	primary. It will attempt to connect to the primary approximately every 30 
	seconds. 
	
	To enable this new behavior, the following entry must be added to 
	rtvdisplay.properties: 
	
	DisplayServerConnectionFailback=true
	
	Then rtvdisplay.war must be rebuilt and deployed. By default, 
	DisplayServerConnectionFailback is set to false and in that case the behavior is 
	as described above for previous releases. 

18258: Support thin client in IE 10
	The thin client is supported on IE10. 
	
	An exception is the right-click feature in the tree control (obj_c1tree), which 
	is not yet supported in IE10. 
	

18272: URL is garbled if browseUrl command invoked via right click
	A problem has fixed that caused the URL in an "Open Browser" (browseUrl) command 
	to be garbled if it was invoked from a right-click on a row in a table object. 
	The ":" characters in the URL were sometimes replaced by the name of the column 
	in which the user had clicked. 

18279: Dropdown list selection now cleared
	A problem has been fixed in the thin client that prevented the previous selection 
	in a combo box control (obj_c1combox) from being cleared when the local variable 
	to which the control is attached was set to a value that did not appear in the 
	control's dropdown list. 

Functions

18108: enahnce Join functions with flag to not return duplicate columns
	The Join and Outer Join functions have been enhanced to support a new argument, 
	Column Include Mode: 
	
	Column Include Mode - (Optional) Specify whether or not to include the columns 
	specified in the Left Column Name and Right Column Name fields in the returned 
	table. Specified as "none" (don't include any columns specified in Left Column 
	Name or Right Column Name), "left" (don't include columns specified in Right 
	Column Name), "right" (don't include columns from the Left Column Name, or "all" 
	(include all columns specified in Left Column Name and Right Column Name) which 
	may be abbreviated to their first letters. If this field is left blank all 
	columns specified in Left Column Name and Right Column Name will be included. 

18168: Buffer Table Rows function no longer throws ClassCastException
	The Buffer Table Rows no longer throws a ClassCastException if the input table's 
	schema is concurrently modified by the data source that produced it. 
	
	In the case of BW Monitor this may cause a Server to stop updating and expire. In 
	this case the dataserver log file will contain a ClassCastException message such 
	as: 
	
	[rtview] Exception in thread "GmsTimer-RtViewBody" java.lang.ClassCastException: 
	[Ljava.lang.String; 
	[rtview]    at com.sl.gmsjrt.GmsTabularData.removeAllRows ...

General

17680: Table objects are drawn on top of the dashboards scrollbars
	The following problem has been fixed: In the builder/viewer, tables and control 
	objects are drawn on top of the display panel's scrollbars. This is most obvious 
	when using crop mode and when the panel is resized to be smaller than the display 
	so that the table or control objects overlap the bottom or right edge of the 
	panel. 

Object Library

Control Objects

18062: Allow right click menu items on tree control
	The tree control (obj_c1tree) can now be configured to extend the right-click 
	context menu and support double-click behavior, in the same manner as the 
	heatmap, table, and grid objects. To support this feature properties named 
	menuItemGroup, rightClickActionFlag, and drillDownTarget have been added to the 
	tree control. See 17835 for more information on using these properties to extend 
	the context menu and control the double-click behavior. 
	
	Limitations:
	
	The new feature is not supported on iPad.
	
	The accordion control does not support the new feature.
	
	If the tree control has valueTableFormat = Row-Leaf then the new feature will 
	apply to a right-click or a double-click on leaf nodes only. That is, a 
	right-click on a non-leaf node will not add items to the menu and a double-click 
	on a non-leaf node will simply expand or collapse the tree node, it will not 
	invoke the double-click action. 
	
	In Internet Explorer, if you double-click directly on a leaf node the node will 
	be selected but the double-click action will NOT be invoked. The double-click 
	action is invoked only if you click on the empty space in the tree to the left or 
	the right of the leaf node, or in the small hollow square located to the left of 
	the leaf node. 
	

18232: Tree control selection doesn't clear when labels change
	The tree control will now clear the selection when the tree is updated and any of 
	the node labels in the path to the selected node are changed. 

Tables

18237: Update that lowers row count no longer resets scrollbars
	In prior releases a data update that reduces the number of rows in a table object 
	in the thin client can reset the table's scrollbars to their left/top positions. 
	This has been fixed, except for the specific case where the table's row count is 
	>= 500 before an update and < 500 afterwards. 

Trend Charts

18235: fxreplace respects yAxisAutoScale = Incl.min/max, on strip chart
	If an obj_fxtrend instance with yAxisMultiRangeMode = "Strip Chart" also has 
	yAxisAutoScaleMode = "On:Include min/max", that setting will be obeyed by the 
	replacement trend graph when the -fxreplace option is used. In previous releases, 
	yAxisAutoScaleMode was always forced to "On" in the replacement graph. 

Version 6.1.0 Release Notes

17557: vis 0 fails on obj_c1button in obj grid of comps , displayserver
	In previous releases, controls, tables, object grids and flex objects inside a 
	composite in the thin client did not obey the compositie's visFlag setting. This 
	has been fixed. 

18059: Official Support for Java 1.7
	RTView applications are now validated for use with Java 1.7
	

Alerts

18038: Added global notification properties to alert ds
	A new Alert tab, Global Notifications, has been added to Application Options. 
	This allows you to setup global values for alert notifications. The following 
	options are available on this tab: 
	
	Alert Command: This command will be used as the alertCommand for all alerts where 
	the alertCommand property is empty. 
	
	Renotification Command: This command will be used as the reNotificationCommand 
	for all alerts where the reNotificationCommand property is empty. 
	
	Renotification Mode: This will be used as the reNotificationMode for all alerts 
	where the reNotificationMode property is set to Use Global Setting. 
	
	Renotification Time. This will be used as the reNotificationTime for all alerts 
	where the reNotificationTime property is set to a value less than 0. 
	
	Renotify on Severity Change Mode: This will be used as the 
	reNotificationOnSevChangeMode for all alerts where the 
	reNotificationOnSevChangeMode property is set to Use Global Setting. 
	
	Comment Command: This command will be used as the commentAddedCommand for all 
	alerts where the commentAddedCommand property is empty. 
	
	Cleared Command: This command will be used as the clearedCommand for all alerts 
	where the clearedCommand property is empty. 
	
	See the corresponding properties on the alert definitions for descriptions of 
	each option. 
	
	For all command fields, click on the ... button next to the command field you 
	want to edit to define, copy, paste or clear a command. Once the command field 
	contains a command, you can double-click on the field to edit it. 

Commands

18025: Allow some system commands to be redirected to a data server
	In prior releases, system commands were always executed in the client. In this 
	release, the following system commands can be redirected to a data server: 
	
	Execute Custom Command,
	Execute URL
	Run DOS Command or Unix Shell  (run external process)
	Send Email
	Send SNMP Trap
	
	In the Define System Command dialog, if one of the above commands is selected 
	then the "Data Server" dropdown list will appear at the bottom of the dialog. The 
	default value for the Data Server field is <none> indicating that the command 
	will be executed by the client (builder/viewer or display server). A value of 
	<default> can be selected to execute the command in the default data server. The 
	Data Server field can also be set to the name of a named data server, to execute 
	the command on that data server. 
	
	The Data Server field can also be set to a substitution, for example $server. If 
	$server is set to an empty string or to "__none" the command will be executed in 
	the client. If $server is set to "__default" the command will be executed in the 
	default data server. If $server is set to the name of a named data server, the 
	command will be executed in that data server. Note that if $server is set to 
	"__default" or the name of a named data server and there is no connection defined 
	for that data server, the command will not be executed. Note that "__none" and 
	"__default' both start with two underscore characters. 
	
	The following system commands cannot be redirected to a data server:
	
	Beep
	Drill Down or Set Sub
	Open Browser
	Play Audio File
	Close Window

18027: pass client credentials with commands from thin client
	In prior releases, a null username was passed to some rtview commands executed by 
	the data server, rather than the correct login username for the client (viewer or 
	thin client) that invoked the command. This is fixed. 

Common Server Support

18060: clients should reconnect to primary data server when it recovers
	The primary/backup data server feature (see task 17598) has been improved so that 
	clients that connected to the backup server when the primary server failed will 
	now reconnect directly to the primary server, if possible, when it recovers. 
	Previously, the clients would remain connected to the backup server which would 
	act as a proxy between the clients and the primary server. 
	

Data Server

18019: support client access lists to allow/deny data server connection
	BACKGROUND:
	
	The data server now supports client access lists. This feature allows the user to 
	specify which clients can connect to a data server. This is done by adding client 
	hostnames or IP addresses to three lists supported by the data server: 
	
	Blacklist : clients to be denied access to the data aserver
	Graylist : clients to be permitted access to the data server if they provide a 
	trusted SSL certificate 
	Whitelist : clients to be are permitted access to the data server, no SSL 
	certificate required. 
	
	To specify the client access lists, the data server supports three new options 
	named client_blacklist, client_graylist, and client_whitelist. Each option can be 
	specified multiple times. The format of the values for the these options is 
	described later in this note. 
	
	Note that any RTView application can be the client of a data server. That is, a 
	client could a builder, viewer, display server , or another data server. 
	
	PROCESSING CLIENT CONNECTION REQUESTS:
	
	By default all three of the client access lists are empty which means that any 
	client can connect to the data server. 
	
	If any of the three lists is not empty, then when the data server receives a 
	connection request from a client with IP address X and hostname H it is processed 
	as follows: 
	
	1. If the blacklist is not empty and X or H matches any entry in the blacklist, 
	the server rejects the client connection. 
	
	2. Otherwise, if the graylist is not empty and X or H matches any entry in the 
	graylist, the server performs an SSL handshake with the client. If the client 
	presents a certificate that the server trusts and vice-versa, the handshake 
	completes successfully and the connection is accepted. Otherwise the server 
	rejects the connection. 
	
	3. Otherwise, if the whitelist is not empty and X or H matches any entry in the 
	whitelist the server accepts the client connection. 
	
	4. Otherwise, neither X nor H is matched on any list. If the whitelist is empty, 
	the connection is accepted. If the whitelist is not empty, the connection is 
	rejected. 
	
	Some details to note about the preceding steps:
	
	- The blacklist has the highest precedence, the whitelist has the lowest. If a 
	client's address or hostname matches any entry on the blacklist its connection 
	will be denied regardless of whether the client also has a match in the graylist 
	or whitelist. In other words, if a client address or hostname has matches on 
	multiple lists, the most restrictive entry will always be the one that is used. 
	
	- If the the whitelist is not empty then any client that has no match in the 
	whitelist or graylist is rejected. But if the whitelist is empty, then any client 
	that is not blacklisted is accepted (with an SSL handshake if its graylisted, 
	unconditionally otherwise). 
	
	- The order in which the user specifies the client_*list options is unimportant. 
	It does not affect the results of applying the lists to each connection request. 
	
	- Using the hostname H in a list is effective only if the data server's host 
	system is able to lookup that hostname via its address X, using a naming service. 
	
	If a client's connection request to the data server is denied then that client 
	will make no further attempts to connect to that data server, unless the client 
	app is restated. This is by design so that a client whose connection request is 
	denied does not continue to pester the server with connection requests. This is 
	true even if the client has a failover connection specified for that data server. 
	
	SPECIFYING CLIENT LISTS:
	
	Each of the client access list options can be specified multiple times. They can 
	be specified as command line arguments of the data server, as options in 
	DATASERVER.ini, or as entries in a properties file. 
	
	The order in which the options are specified is unimportant. The value of each 
	option is either (1) a client hostname or IP address which may contain * 
	characters as wildcards, or (2) a range of IPv4 addresses in the format of 
	n.n.n.n-n.n.n.n where each n is a number between 0 and 255. The * character 
	cannot be used in an address range. 
	
	If client lists are specified, the data server will check both incoming socket 
	connections and http connections (via the rtvdata servlet) against those lists 
	using the steps described above. 
	
	Case is ignored when a client's hostname is compared to a list entry. For example 
	a list entry of host1 will match HOST1, or Host1, or host1, etc. 
	
	There may be a performance penalty involved in using hostnames in the client 
	access lists rather than IPv4 addresses. To determine a client's hostname the 
	data server must perform a lookup with the client's address, using a name 
	service. There may be a delay associated with each lookup. So for best 
	performance use only IPv4 addresses in the lists, if possible. 
	
	
	EXAMPLES:
	
	1. Example using command line arguments:
	
	  run_dataserver -client_whitelist:192.168.1.* -client_whitelist:localhost
	
	This configuration will accept connections from all clients on localhost or with 
	IPv4 addresses that begin with 192.168.1.Connections from any other clients are 
	denied (because the whitelist is not empty). 
	
	
	2. Another example using command line arguments:
	
	  run_dataserver -client_blacklist:DMZ
	
	This configuration denies connections from a client with hostname DMZ and accepts 
	connections from all other clients. 
	
	
	3. Example configuration using DATASERVER.ini :
	
	 client_whitelist localhost
	 client_blacklist 192.168.1.44
	 client_blacklist DEV*
	 client_whitelist 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.255
	
	This configuration will accept connections from the localhost and any clients 
	with IPv4 addresses in the range of 192.168.1.1 through 192.168.1.255 except for 
	address 192.168.1.44 or any client whose hostname begins with DEV, dev, Dev, etc. 
	Connections from any other clients are denied (because the whitelist is not 
	empty). 
	
	
	4. Same example as previous, but using an rtview properties file:
	
	 sl.rtview.dataserver.client_whitelist=localhost
	 sl.rtview.dataserver.client_blacklist=192.168.1.44
	 sl.rtview.dataserver.client_blacklist=DEV*
	 sl.rtview.dataserver.client_whitelist=192.168.1.1-192.168.1.255
	
	
	GRAYLIST AND SSL CERTIFICATES:
	
	If a client matches an entry on the graylist, then an SSL handshake is performed 
	between the client and the server, and each must provide a certificate that the 
	other will accept. That is, the client must provide a certificate that the server 
	trusts, and the server must provide a certificate that the client trusts. If the 
	SSL handshake is successful the client connection will be accepted. All traffic 
	between the client and server on that connection will be encrypted, typically 
	using a 128 bit key. (This may impact CPU and network performance on connections 
	that transmit high volumes of data). 
	
	The following example shows how that can be accomplished with self-signed 
	certificates using the keytool utility provided with the Java JDK. However, 
	please note that a full discussion of SSL and certificates is beyond the scope of 
	this document. Note that the keytool is not part of RTView it is part of the Java 
	JDK. Run "keytool -help" for usage information. 
	
	In the following example, the data server will run on host1 and the client will 
	run on host2. Note that the filenames, passwords, aliases, etc used below are 
	only for examples and are not required values. In particular, there is nothing 
	significant about the use of "rtview" in the example strings. In an actual 
	configuration all of these strings could be replaced with strings of your choice, 
	provided of course that they are replaced consistently. 
	
	Note: Some keytool commands may appear on multiple lines below for clarity, but 
	must be entered as a single line. 
	
	1. Create a keystore filed named server_keystore.jks to store the server's 
	private key and self-signed certificate, with a 10 year expiration 
	
	> keytool -genkey -keystore server_keystore.jks -alias rtview_server -validity 
	3650 -keyalg RSA -storepass mypswd -keypass mypswd -dname cn=host1 
	
	2. View the certificate just created:
	
	> keytool -list -v -keystore server_keystore.jks -storepass mypswd
	
	The output should be similar to the following:
	
	Keystore type: JKS
	Keystore provider: SUN
	Your keystore contains 1 entry
	Alias name: rtview_server
	Creation date: Nov 15, 2012
	Entry type: PrivateKeyEntry
	Owner: CN=host1
	Issuer: CN=host1
	Serial number: 50a567d2
	Valid from: Thu Nov 15 17:08:18 EST 2012 until: Sun Nov 13 17:08:18 EST 2022
	Certificate fingerprints:
	         MD5:  96:89:2D:37:71:8E:7F:89:7A:08:71:9F:7F:C2:C1:50
	         SHA1: 63:1B:1B:ED:75:58:11:34:F0:80:56:45:9B:C9:74:02:CD:D4:C6:89
	         Signature algorithm name: SHA1withRSA
	         Version: 3
	
	3. Export the server's certificate to a file named server.cer:
	
	> keytool -export -alias rtview_server -keystore server_keystore.jks -storepass 
	mypswd -file server.cer 
	
	4. Import the server certificate into a truststore file for the client:
	
	> keytool -importcert -alias rtview_server -file server.cer -v -noprompt 
	-keystore client_truststore.jks -storepass mypswd 
	
	5. Create a keystore filed named client_keystore.jks to store the client's 
	private key and self-signed certificate: 
	 
	> keytool -genkey -keystore client_keystore.jks -alias rtview_client -validity 
	3650 -keyalg RSA -storepass mypswd -keypass mypswd -dname cn=host2 
	
	6. Export the client's certificate to a file named client.cer:
	
	> keytool -export -alias rtview_client -keystore client_keystore.jks
	   -storepass mypswd -file client.cer
	
	7. Import the client certificate into a truststore file for the server:
	
	> keytool -importcert -alias rtview_client -file client.cer -v -noprompt 
	-keystore server_truststore.jks -storepass mypswd 
	
	8. You should now have 4 files with a .jks extension:
	
	   client_keystore.jks
	   client_truststore.jks
	   server_keystore.jks
	   server_truststore.jks
	
	Copy server_keystore.jks and server_truststore.jks to the directory on host1 
	where the data server will run. 
	Copy client_keystore.jks and client_truststore.jks to the directory on host2 
	where the client will run. 
	If you copy the keystore (.jks) files between Windows an linux/unix hosts, be 
	sure to copy them in binary mode. 
	The client.cer and server.cer files are not needed and can be deleted.
	
	9. On host1, run the data server as follows (Note: The "set RTV_JAVAOPTS" command 
	is shown in Windows command syntax and should be entered on a single line): 
	
	> set RTV_JAVAOPTS=-Djavax.net.ssl.keyStore=server_keystore.jks 
	-Djavax.net.ssl.keyStorePassword=mypswd 
	-Djavax.net.ssl.trustStore=server_truststore.jks 
	-Djavax.net.ssl.trustStorePassword=mypswd 
	
	> run_dataserver -daemon -verbose -client_graylist:host2
	
	10. On host2, run a viewer client as follows
	
	> set RTV_JAVAOPTS=-Djavax.net.ssl.keyStore=client_keystore.jks 
	-Djavax.net.ssl.keyStorePassword=mypswd 
	-Djavax.net.ssl.trustStore=client_truststore.jks 
	-Djavax.net.ssl.trustStorePassword=mypswd 
	
	> run_viewer -dataserver:remote:host1
	
	If all the steps were done correctly, the viewer's connection to the data server 
	should be accepted. You should see output similar to the following on the data 
	server console: 
	
	    GmsRtViewDataServer connect client 1, 192.168.1.200:55401
	    created SSL socket 192.168.1.200:55401
	    cipher=SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
	    add Client: 1 (127.0.0.1/127.0.0.1)
	    accept graylisted client 1 (127.0.0.1)
	
	Note the lines indicating creation of an SSL socket and the cipher used. If 
	errors occur, refer to the troubleshooting section below. 
	
	
	SSL ENCRYPTION WITHOUT CERTIFICATES:
	
	As in prior RTRView releases, the -ssl option can be specified when the data 
	server is started. This instructs the data server to use an SSL socket for each 
	socket connection to its clients but without performing an SSL handshake to 
	authenticate the client. All data transmitted on the socket will be encrypted 
	using an anonymous cipher. 
	
	The -ssl option can be used in combination with client access lists. In that 
	case, if a client is graylisted then an SSL handshake will be performed when it 
	connects to the data server, as described above. If a client is whitelisted its 
	connection will be accepted without an SSL handshake and an SSL socket with an 
	anonymous cipher will be used. The data server's verbose output will indicate 
	this with messages similar to the following: 
	
	    comparing client 192.168.1.200 to whitelist entry 192.168.1.*: MATCH
	    created SSL socket 192.168.1.200:55812
	    cipher=SSL_DH_anon_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
	    add Client: 4 (host2/192.168.1.200)
	
	Note that encryption may impact CPU and network performance on connections that 
	transmit high volumes of data. 
	
	
	RECOMMENDATIONS:
	
	If any client_whitelist values are specified and the data server belongs to a 
	redundant server group for failover, be sure to specify a client_whitelist entry 
	for the address or hostname of the other group member. Otherwise the server will 
	not be able to connect to its partner. 
	
	If the client_whitelist values are specified and the rtvdata servlet is used data 
	server belongs to a redundant server group for failover, be sure to specify a 
	client_whitelist entry for the address or hostname of the other group member. 
	Otherwise the server will not be able to connect to its partner. 
	
	For best performance use only IPv4 addresses and not hostnames in the client 
	access lists if possible. This avoids the need to lookup a client's hostname from 
	its address which can cause a delay. 
	
	Use graylisting only when necessary, to avoid certificate management issues, 
	delays of SSL handshaking when connecting, and the overhead of data encryption. 
	
	
	TROUBLESHOOTING:
	
	The data server also a new option named client_access_debug that will print 
	messages to the data server console as each client connection request is compared 
	to the client lists. This can be useful for determining which list entries match 
	and do not match a client connection. This can be specified on the data server 
	command line as follows: 
	
	 -client_access_debug
	
	or in DATASERVER.ini as follows:
	
	 client_access_debug true
	
	or in a properties file as follows:
	
	 sl.rtview.dataserver.client_access_debug=true
	
	For troubleshooting SSL handshaking and certificate issues, set the following in 
	RTV_JAVAOPTS before running the data server or client 
	
	    set RTV_JAVAOPTS=-Djavax.net.debug=ssl,keymanager
	
	or in an rtview properties file:
	
	    sl.rtview.jvm=-Djavax.net.debug=ssl,keymanager
	
	Note that this option may produce a great deal of output.

Data Sources

JMX Data Source

17959: Support the canonical name of javax.management.ObjectName
	RTView now correctly displays the contents of arrays of 
	javax.management.ObjectName as separate rows in a single column table and as a 
	semi-colon separated list when more than one columns shows. 
	
	If the array is empty, then a blank cell is displayed. If the array has one or 
	more elements, the JMX Canonical Name of the object is shown. 

Display Server

18049: add option to disable initial browser resize for layout
	The rtvdisplay servlet now supports a boolean property named 
	SizeBrowserForLayout. The property can be set to false in rtvdisplay.properties 
	to prevent the thin client from resizing Internet Explorer to match the full size 
	of the layout when it loads a panels file. For example: 
	
	SizeBrowserForLayout=false
	
	If the SizeBrowserForLayout property is not specified in rtvdisplay.properties 
	then its value defaults to true. 
	
	However, in all browsers other than Internet Explorer, the thin client always 
	behaves as if SizeBrowserForLayout = false. Also, in recent versions of Internet 
	Explorer if more than one tab is open it will always behave as if 
	SizeBrowserForLayout = false. 

General

17563: datasource ini files with defaults now removed more consistently
	In previous releases, data source initialization files that were reverted to 
	default options were sometimes not removed when the options were saved. This has 
	been fixed. 

Java Version Dependencies

18114: Table columns with Java 1.7
	A problem has been fixed in obj_table02 when using Java 1.7 that caused the 
	column header text to be shifted slightly down and right, and obscured the bottom 
	border of the column header. 

Object Library

Bar Charts

18112: Fixed outline on bargraph legend if legendBgGradientMode = None
	In releases 6.0.2 and 6.0.3, if the legendBgGradientMode property on obj_bargraph 
	is set to None then no outline is drawn around the legend. This is fixed so that 
	a 1 pixel outline is drawn around the legend using the color specified by 
	outlineColor, as expected. 

Control Objects

18132: defaultButtonFlag no longer broken in Viewer
	The defaultButtonFlag property on obj_c1button does not work in the Viewer in 
	releases 6.0.0 through 6.0.3. If the Enter key is pressed while a popup window is 
	opened containing a display in which a button has defaultButtonFlag = true, the 
	button's command should be executed. Instead the button just flickers and the 
	command is not executed. This is fixed. 

18157: Tree node status now updated if valueTable has column filter
	In previous releases, if the tree control's valueTable property was attached to a 
	local data table with a column filter, the status icons of the tree nodes were 
	not always updated to reflect changes in the data table. This is fixed. 

Version 6.0.3 Release Notes

Alerts

17921: Option to renotify when alert severity increases
	RTView alerts have been enhanced with 2 new options for what happens when an 
	alert's severity changes: 
	
	1. In the Alerts tab of the Application Options dialog, the Unacknowledge Alerts 
	on First Severity Change option has been changed to Unacknowledge on Severity 
	Change Mode. By default it is None. If set to First Severity Change, when an 
	acknowledged alert's severity changes the first time, the alert will be 
	unacknowledged. This is the same behavior that happened in the previous release 
	if the Unacknowledge Alerts on First Severity Change checkbox was selected. When 
	set to All Severity Increases, when an acknowledged alert's severity increases, 
	the alert will be unacknowledged. 
	
	When an alert is unacknowledged, the alert will start renotifying again if the 
	reNotificationMode is configured to do so. It also means that if the condition 
	meets the specified reNofifyOnSevChangeMode property on the alert, it will 
	renotify once regardless of the reNotificationMode. This unacknowledge action is 
	not tracked in the Alert Action Audit Table since it is not a user action. 
	
	When running against application options set from an older version of RTView, the 
	Unacknowledge Alerts on First Severity Change value will automatically be 
	converted to the correct value for Unacknowledge on Severity Change Mode so that 
	the application behavior will not change. 
	
	2. The limits, multi-state and event alerts reNotifyOnFirstSevChangeFlag property 
	has been changed to reNotifyOnSevChangeMode. By default, it is set to None. If 
	set to Renotify on First Sev Change, the alert will renotify when the severity of 
	the alert changes the first time. If set to Renotify on All Sev Increases, the 
	alert will renotify every time the severity of the alert increases. For both 
	Renotify on First Sev Change and Renotify on All Sev Increases, the alert 
	renotification will only occur if the alert has not been acknowledged or if the 
	Unacknowledge Alerts on First Severity Change application option is enabled. The 
	renotification will execute the reNotificationCommand if configured, otherwise it 
	will execute the alertCommand. 
	
	Note that the severity is only updated on acknowledged alerts if the Update 
	Severity on Acknowledged Alerts application option is selected. 
	
	When running alerts created with an older version of RTView, the 
	reNotifyOnFirstSevChangeFlag will automatically be converted to the correct value 
	for reNotifyOnSevChangeMode so the alert behavior will not change. When selected, 
	when an acknowledged alert's severity changes the first time, the alert will be 
	unacknowledged. This means that the alert will start renotifying again if the 
	reNotificationMode is configured to do so. It also means that if the 
	reNofifyOnFirstSevChangeFlag is selected for the alert, it will renotify once 
	regardless of the reNoficationMode. This unacknowledge action is not tracked in 
	the Alert Action Audit Table since it is not a user action. 

Common Server Support

17996: Added troubleshooting mbean to servers
	The data server, display server, and historian support a new MBean that provides 
	status information that can be useful in detecting and troubleshooting an 
	unresponsive server. 
	
	The MBean name is RTView:name=Troubleshooting
	
	It defines the following attributes:
	
	- LastUpdateTime : The time at which the server's main update timer most recently 
	fired. In a healthy server, this time will change on each update interval 
	(default 2 seconds). If the time stops changing for an extended period, it 
	indicates that the timer thread has stalled or terminated. 
	
	- DeadlockCount: The count of deadlocked threads. In a healthy server the count 
	is always zero. This attribute is only updated every 30 seconds, to reduce 
	overhead. The jstack utility can be used to obtain more information about the 
	deadlocked threads. 
	
	- UncaughtExceptionCount : The count of uncaught exceptions thrown since server 
	started. In a healthy server the count is always zero. An uncaught exception will 
	terminate the thread that threw it. 
	
	- UncaughtExceptions: A table of the server's uncaught exceptions listing the 
	type, time, executing thread, and code location for each exception. (For each 
	excpetion, a stack trace is also written in the server's log file) 

Customization

17923: Typos in custom user manager and dbprops
	A few minor errors in the docs for the custom user manager were corrected.

Data Historian

17582: Historian now attempts to reconnect to database in batch mode
	If batch mode is enabled in the historian and the database connection is lost, 
	the historian will now attempt to reconnect periodically. 

Data Server

17581: rtvquery servlet accepts primary & backup data server
	The rtvquery servlet now supports a backup data server connection. The backup 
	data server connection is specified by editing 
	%RTV_HOME%\servlets\rtvquery\rtvquery.properties and adding a line as follows: 
	
	DataServerBackup=host:port
	
	where host:port are the hostname and port number of the backup data server. After 
	editing the file, run the make_war script and redeploy the rtvquery.war file. 

17587: persistCaches should support allowDuplicatesInHistoryFlag
	If a cache is configured with allowDuplicatesInHistoryFlag = false, then the data 
	server will not send duplicate rows from the cache's history table to a historian 
	client that was run with the -persistCaches:true option. In prior releases, the 
	allowDuplicatesInHistoryFlag was ignored by the data server when it sent cache 
	history rows to the historian so duplicate rows could still be stored into the 
	database table. 

17838: GmsTimer thread stalls if data server connection is slow
	In prior releases, function updates could be delayed by a slow data server 
	connection. This is fixed. 

17973: New option to prevent a deadlock due to stalled client
	The data server supports a new option to prevent a deadlock condition that can 
	occur in abnormal situations. The new option is: 
	
	  -client_write_timeout:N
	
	or in a properties file:
	
	   sl.rtview.dataserver.client_write_timeout=N
	
	where N is an integer value in seconds. If the server attempts to push data to a 
	client that is connected via socket, and the corresponding write operation on the 
	client's socket stalls for more than N seconds, the server will close the 
	client's socket. 
	
	This timeout avoids the potential for deadlock with other threads in the server 
	that may be trying to access the same data table that was locked while being 
	pushed to the client. 
	
	A typical value for N is 60 seconds. The default is zero, which means the write 
	to a client socket will never timeout. 
	
	The write to the client's socket may stall because of networking problems, or a 
	deadlock or other error in the client that prevents it from reading its incoming 
	data. 

17974: New option to terminate server after OutOfMemory exception
	An option has been added to force the data server, display server, or historian 
	process to terminate when an OutOfMemoryException occurs. 
	
	This is intended for use in a HA deployment where a backup server is available, 
	since otherwise the process may continue to run in a crippled state after the 
	OutOfMemoryException occurs, preventing the backup from taking over. For example, 
	if the data server experiences an OutOfMemoryException it may still remain 
	connected to its clients, preventing failover, but may stop pushing any data to 
	the clients. 
	
	Note that the server is not restarted automatically by this option. The server 
	would need to be restarted manually. 
	
	The option is specified on the command line as follows:
	
	    -exit_on_out_of_memory
	
	or in a properties file (for the data server in this example):
	
	     sl.rtview.dataserver.exit_on_out_of_memory=true
	
	If the option is not specified, the process will continue to run after an 
	OutOfMemoryException occurs, as in prior releases. 

17990: Removed possible deadlock when -log4j option is specified
	A problem with the -log4j option has been fixed which sometimes caused a deadlock 
	in RTView, if multiple threads tried to write log messages simultaneously. 

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

17794: divide by zero exception if cache condenser is misconfigured
	In prior releases, a divide-by-zero exception was thrown in the case where a 
	cache was misconfigured with condenseRowsFlag = 1 and condenseRowsInterval = 0. 
	This is fixed. 

17845: Implement Once-only flag for Cache metdata attachments
	The 'Update Once' option on cache data attachments to the RTViewDs meta tables is 
	now supported. Previously the option could be set but it was ignored. 

17847: extend-by-sql mishandles databaseName prop assigned to blank sub
	The following problem has been fixed: If the databaseName property of a cache is 
	set to a substitution whose value is set to '' in OPTIONS.ini or a properties 
	file, and the cache's historyTableName property is non-blank, then in some cases 
	an attachment to that cache's history table which has the Extend by SQL option 
	checked never received any data. Now it behaves as though the databaseName is 
	blank, in which case the default database name of RTVHISTORY is used in SQl 
	queries to preload the cache's history table and for the Extend By SQL queries. 
	
	In addition, if a cache's databaseName property is set to "__none", then the 
	history preload and Extend By SQL queries are never performed for that cache, 
	even if its historyTableName is non-blank. 
	
	For consistency, the SQL data source will also ignore data attachments in which 
	Database Name = "__none". 

JMS Data Source

17398: New option to disable internal caching for jms messages
	The JMS data source has been enhanced with a new Disable Data Caching option in 
	the JMS Options tab of the Application Options dialog. The Disable Data Caching 
	option allows you to disable the caching in the JMS data source so that listeners 
	are only updated with the new rows instead of a combination of all rows for a 
	topic. This option should be used when using JMS as the input to a cache file so 
	that duplicate rows are not sent to the cache. 

17807: New general jms options tab
	The JMS data source has been enhanced to add a JMS Options tab to the Application 
	Options dialog. This tab has 2 options: 
	
	Maximum Message Count for Queue Browser: Enter the maximum number of messages 
	that will be queried from a queue browser for any queue. Default is 100. 
	
	Minimum Reconnect Time (seconds): Enter the minimum number of seconds that will 
	elapse before attempting to reconnect to the server. Default is 30. 
	
	These options are not new, but previously they were only settable from the 
	command line. 

Display Server

17698: 'Export table to html/excel' fails if column label has newline
	A bug has been fixed which caused the "Export Table to HTML/Excel" feature to 
	fail in the thin client if the table contained a column with a newline character 
	in its label. The bug was introduced in 5.9.2. 

17803: right-click-> drill down/command doesn't apply table subs in ff
	In prior releases of Firefox, if the user right-clicked in a table cell and then 
	clicked Drill Down in the popup menu, the table's drillDownColumnSubs were not 
	set to the values in the clicked row, unless the user had left-clicked on the 
	same row first . This is fixed. 

17805: IE8 and older throw js error if invis control has tabIndex=1
	In prior releases, if a display was opened in the thin client in Internet 
	Explorer version 8 or older and an invisible control object had the lowest 
	nonzero tabIndex in the display and therefore should have had the initial 
	keyboard focus, a javascript error was thrown. This problem is fixed.. 

17922: Display server leaves imageio*.tmp files if pngcompress is used
	The display server will no longer leave files named imageio*.tmp in the user's 
	temp directory when the -pngcompress or -imagequality options are specified. 

17971: rtvdisplay servlet throws NPE if string missing from properties
	The rtvdisplay servlet no longer throws a NPE if the 
	rtvdisplay_strings.properties files is missing any of its expected entries. 

17982: Fixed bogus error "No display name specified" in popups
	A problem has been fixed which sometimes caused a bogus message "Error: No 
	display name specified" to appear in popup displays in the thin client, in 
	Internet Explorer. 

Drill Down

17757: execute left-click action on right-click before showing popup
	The table object (obj_table02) has been enhanced with a new property, 
	rightClickActionFlag. When this flag is selected, the action that is performed on 
	left-click (drill down or execute command) will execute before the popup menu is 
	shown. This is useful when you have command string configured to set 
	substitutions in the current window and the drill down target to drill down using 
	those substitutions. In that case, the command is executed when you left-click 
	and when you right-click so the substitutions are guaranteed to be set before you 
	select Drill Down from the popup menu. This option should not be used if the left 
	click is configured to drill down to another display. 
	
	Limitation: This property is ignored in the thin client on iOS Safari 
	(iPad/iPhone). 

17777: Selected item in nav panel shouldn't update after dd in popup
	In a panel layout in the viewer, the highlighted node in a tree/accordion 
	navigation panel will only be updated to reflect a drilldown to a different 
	display in the main panel. In previous releases, the highlighted node was also 
	updated after a drilldown in a popup panel, which was incorrect behavior. 

Functions

17747: Setsub function no longer throws NPE if sub is used upstream
	The following problem has been fixed. 
	
	In a function chain, if a setsub function F1 modifies a substitution that is used 
	in data attachments that are inputs to functions upstream of F1, a null pointer 
	exception may be thrown when F1 is evaluated. 
	
	This symptom was observed in the OCM viewer client, with the following stack 
	trace; 
	
	Exception in thread "GmsClientDispatcherThread" java.lang.NullPointerException
	at com.sl.gmsjrtview.GmsRtViewDataObject.applyDataToListeners(SourceFile:466)
	at com.sl.gmsjrtview.GmsRtViewXmlDs.applyData(SourceFile:1068)
	at com.sl.gmsjrtview.GmsRtViewXmlDs.onData(SourceFile:956)
	at com.sl.gmsjrtview.GmsRtViewXmlSource.applyDataSet(SourceFile:1244)
	at com.sl.gmsjrtview.GmsRtViewXmlSource.dataUpdate(SourceFile:896)
	at com.sl.gmsjcs.GmsClientFO.gg$1(SourceFile:199)
	at com.sl.gmsjcs.GmsClient.gg$1(SourceFile:685)
	at com.sl.gmsjcs.GmsClient.gg$1(SourceFile:24)
	at com.sl.gmsjcs.GmsClient$b.run(SourceFile:864)

17970: Improved EVALR performance for rows with same values
	The performance of the EVALR (Evaluate Expression by Row) function has been 
	improved in the case where consecutive rows in the input table have the same 
	values in the columns used in the expression. 

Logging

17979: New options to avoid overwriting old log files
	The -logfile option has been available for several rtview releases. It can be 
	used to send the console output of an rtview application to a file, for example: 
	
	   run_dataserver -logfile:dataserver.log
	
	By default, if the dataserver.log file already exists, its previous contents are 
	overwritten and lost. To address this issue, two new features are supported in 
	this release. 
	
	1. A new option named -logappend has been added. It is used as follows:
	
	   run_dataserver -logfile:dataserver.log -logappend
	
	In this case if the dataserver.log file already exists, the output from the new 
	process will be appended to the file's previous contents. So, the -logappend 
	option will preserve the previous contents of the log file. Note that over time 
	the file could grow quite large, so its advisable to periodically rotate the 
	file. On Linux, the logrotate utility can be used to automate this. 
	
	2. The existing -logfile option has been enhanced. If the filename contains the 
	string DDDD (for upper case D characters) it will be replaced with the local date 
	and time using the format yyMMdd_HHmmss. For example this command: 
	
	   run_dataserver -logfile:dataserver_DDDD.log
	
	if executed at on Sep 27 2012 at 3:55:43 PM would produce a log file named 
	dataserver_120927_155543.log. In most cases, this will be a unique filename so 
	the previous log file, if any, would remain unchanged. Note that over time a 
	large number of log files could accumulate so its advisable to periodically purge 
	the old files. On Linux, the logrotate utility can be used to automate this. 

Object Library

17857: Fixed mouse over on composites, graphs, grids when panel offset
	In previous releases, the mouse over did not work correctly for the following 
	objects when the panel containing those objects was using a panel layout such 
	that there were panels to the left or top of it: 
	
	composites
	object grid icons
	graphs
	
	This has been fixed.

Composite Object

17961: Improved performance of subs handling on composites
	The substitution processing code has been enhanced to speed up loading of a 
	display that contains many composites when many top-level substitutions are 
	defined. 

Control Objects

17451: change default checkbox  label props to match general objects
	Some of the default values for the check box properties have been changed to 
	match the defaults used by the objects on the General tab of the Display Builder: 
	
	labelTextHeight = 9.6
	labelTextFont=San Serif Bold
	labelTextColor = 16 (dark gray)
	fgColor = 16 (dark gray)
	
	This has been changed both in the Display Builder palette and in the 
	rtv_defaults.rts stylesheet. 

17754: labelTextColor on tree control no longer ignored by thin client
	In the previous release, the thin client ignored the labelTextColor property on 
	obj_c1tree, so the text on tree nodes was always black. This is fixed. 

17790: New accordion control object
	An accordion control object is now supported. The new object is named 
	obj_c1accordion and appears on the Controls tab in the builder's Object Palette. 
	The accordion control is very similar to the tree control (obj_c1tree) introduced 
	in the previous release. But unlike the tree control, the accordion control 
	displays the tree nodes as pushbuttons and only one tree branch can expanded at a 
	time. 
	
	The accordion control and tree control have the same set of properties except as 
	noted below. 
	
	The following properties are defined only by the accordion control:
	
	 accordionColor: The color of the accordion nodes (button) that are not selected.
	 
	 accordionSelectColor: The color of the accordion node that is selected.
	
	accordionSelectTextColor: The text color for the accordion node that is selected. 
	(All nodes that are unselected use labelTextColor). 
	
	accordionClosedImage: The icon that appears to the left of the label for a closed 
	(collapsed) accordion node. The default is a small right arrow. 
	
	accordionOpenImage: The icon that appears to the left of the label for an open 
	(expanded) accordion node. The default is a small down arrow. 
	
	accordionWidth: The width in pixels for each accordion button. If a value of zero 
	(the default) is specified, the width of each node will be computed automatically 
	and may be different for each node. Specify a nonzero value if you want all 
	buttons to have the same size, for a more uniform appearance. 
	
	The following tree control property are not supported by the accordion control:
	
	nodeTypeProperties, nodeTypeColumnName: These properties are not needed for the 
	accordion control because the only accordion node types are closed, open, and 
	leaf and those are indicated by the accordionClosedImage icon, the accordionOpen 
	Image icon, and no icon, respectively. 
	
	As in the tree control, nodeStatusProperties can be used to assign a status icon 
	to each node in an accordion control. The icon will appear inside the node's 
	button, either to the left or right of the button label, according to the value 
	of the nodeStatusIconPos property. 

17791: Tree/accordion control selection updated after dd in main panel
	In a panel configuration using rtvLayout, if a tree or accordion control object 
	(obj1_c1tree or obj_c1accordion) is used in an rtvDisplayPanel named "nav" and a 
	drilldown is performed that changes the display in the center panel, the first 
	node in the tree/accordion control whose value matches the name of the display 
	will be selected. This is useful to keep the correct node in the tree/accordion 
	selected when a drilldown to another display is performed by clicking on an 
	object in the display itself, rather than by clicking on a node in the tree. The 
	rtvDisplayPanel that contains the tree or accordion control must be named "nav" 
	to enable this feature. 
	
	For an example of a panel configuration using this feature, see 
	PANELS_treecon.ini or PANELS_accordcon.ini in RTV_HOME/demos/features. To run the 
	example, type the following commands in an RTView command prompt: 
	
	> cd %RTV_HOME%\demos\features
	> run_viewer -panelconfig:PANELS_accordcon.ini
	
	Then, in the accordion control click on the "Navigate Displays" button, and in 
	the main display right click on the object labeled "Current Window" and pick 
	"Drill Down" from the popup menu. This opens the display named "object_variety2" 
	in the main window, which corresponds to the button labeled "Table Objects" in 
	the accordion, which should now be visible and highlighted. 
	
	
	Limitation: Note that only the display name is compared when determining which 
	node should be selected, substitutions are not compared. If several nodes in the 
	tree use the same display as their value, but with different substitutions (via 
	drilldownColumnSubs), this feature will always select the first node in the tree 
	whose display name matches regardless of the substitutions. 
	
	This is similar to the current behavior of the rtvTreePanel and 
	rtvAccordionPanel, except that the search for a match will only compare the 
	display name not substitutions. 

17792: Allow tree & accordion controls to attach to navtree.xml via xml
	The XML datasource has been enhanced to support data attachments to xml files 
	that use RTView's navtree.xml format. This enhancement will allow the RTView tree 
	control and accordion control objects to be populated by attaching to navtree.xml 
	
	In previous releases, the XML format used by navtree.xml files has only been 
	supported by the tree and accordion navigation panels (rtvAccordionPanel and 
	rtvTreePanel) in an rtvLayout panel configuration. Now, the XML datasource can 
	parse a navtree.xml file and convert it into a table in the "row-node" format, 
	accepted by the tree and accordion control objects (obj_c1control and 
	obj_c1accordion), which can be used on an rtview display. See the documentation 
	for the tree control for more information on the row-node table format. 
	
	The table created by parsing a navtree.xml file will be given a data key of 
	"navtree", which should be specified in the Data Key field of the Attach to XML 
	Data dialog. The table will have one row for each node that is defined in the 
	navtree.xml file. The table will contain the following columns: 
	
	  Node ID:  An unique integer assigned to a tree node 
	Parent ID: The ID of the node's parent, or blank if the node is a top-level node. 
	  Label: The value of the node's "label" attribute.
	  Display: The value of the node's "display" attribute.
	Subs: The value of the node's "subs" attribute (a string containing sub:value 
	pairs, separated by spaces). 
	
	Typically, the valueTable property of a tree control or an accordion control 
	would be attached to the navtree table, and the control's valueTableFormat 
	property would be set to Row-Node. Then the column names listed above would be 
	specified as values for other properties on the control as follows: 
	
	
	  nodeIdColumnName = Node ID
	  nodeLabelColumnName = Label
	  parentIdColumnName = Parent ID
	  uniqueNodeIdFlag = <checked>
	  valueColumnName = Display
	
	For an example of an accordion control configured in this manner, use the Builder 
	to examine the display named accordcon.rtv in RTV_HOME/demos/features. To see the 
	working example, type the following commands in an RTView command prompt: 
	
	> cd %RTV_HOME%\demos\features
	> run_viewer -panelconfig:PANELS_accordcon.ini
	
	
	In addition to the columns mentioned above, the navtree table's Subs column can 
	also be used to configure the drilldownColumnSubs property of a tree/accordion 
	control. In the Drill Down Column Substitutions dialog, find the row for Column 
	Name = Subs, and in the Substitution String column enter the string __parse 
	(note: there are 2 underscores in the prefix), that is: 
	
	Column Name	Substitution
	------------    ------------
	Subs		__parse
	
	This tells RTView to parse the string found in the Subs column for the select 
	tree node, which is expected to contain one or more sub:value pairs, separated by 
	spaces. For example, if the Subs column contains this string: 
	
	$sub1:abc $sub2:xyz
	
	and if the tree control's drilldownColumnSubs is configured as described, then on 
	a drilldown from the control the $sub1 and $sub2 substitutions will be assigned 
	the values abc and xyz respectively. 

17989: Node status propagation now works for valueTableFormat=Row-Node
	In prior releases, if a tree or accordion control had its valueTableFormat set to 
	Row-Node, the node status propagation feature did not work. The status of leaf 
	nodes was not propagated up to its ancestor nodes in the tree/accordion. Also the 
	nodeTypeColumnName property (tree control only) was ignored if 
	valueTableFormat=Row-Node. Both problems are fixed. 

17994: rtv(Tree/Accordion)Panel now displays Japanese chars
	Japanese characters are now displayed correctly in the rtvAccordionPanel or 
	rtvTreePanel in the thin client. 
	
	Note that the navtree.xml file that defines the tree/accordion labels must use 
	UTF8 encoding if it contains Japanese characters. 

Heatmap

17943: adjustSizeForLabelFlag refined to apply a smaller adjustment
	The adjustSizeForLabelFlag has been enhanced to apply a smaller adjustment. The 
	old algorithm made a much larger adjustment to the small nodes in the heatmap and 
	this often made the relative sizes of the nodes incorrect. The new algorithm 
	applies a much smaller adjustment, which works well when the nodeLabelNestDepth 
	is 1. When it is greater than one, the smaller adjustment does not always work. 
	When the nodeLabelNestDepth is greater than 1, RTView evaluates whether or not 
	the new algorithm will work and if not it uses the old one. 
	
	To use the old adjustSizeForLabelFlag algorithm for all cases, use the following 
	command line option: 
	
	-hmuseoldadjust

Object Grid

17858: Mouse over no longer shows for clipped object grid items
	In previous releases, the mouse over would show for items outside the visible 
	extent of the object grid. This has been fixed. 

Tables

17746: Support copying text from table cell to clipboard in IE
	An item labeled 'Copy Cell Value' has been added to the context menu in the thin 
	client, when using Internet Explorer (IE). This item allows the user to copy text 
	from a table cell to the system clipboard by right clicking in the cell and then 
	picking 'Copy Cell Value' from the menu. 
	
	If the selected cell contains multiline text, each newline will be converted to a 
	tab. If the selected cell displays an image, the underlying text value will be 
	copied. 
	
	The new menu item is available only in IE. Other browsers do not allow 
	applications to write to the clipboard. (In those browsers, the text in a cell 
	can be selected by dragging across the text and then pressing Ctrl+c). 
	
	In IE, the copy will fail if the security option "Scripting: Allow programmatic 
	clipboard access" is disabled in the security level that applies to the thin 
	client's URL. The IE security level is configured on the Security tab of IE's 
	Internet Options dialog. 

Platform Support

17299: run_*.bat scrips fail if JAVA_HOME contains parentheses
	In prior releases, the various RTView run_*.bat scripts would fail on Windows if 
	JAVA_HOME specified a path that contained parentheses, which is the case when a 
	32 bit version of Java is installed on 64 bit Windows. This is fixed. 

Version 6.0.2 Release Notes

Alerts

13676: New Unacknowledge Alert command
	The Alert data source has been enhanced to support a new Unacknowledge Alert 
	command. This command takes one argument, the alert id. The alert id can be a 
	single id or a semi-colon (;) delimited list of ids. 
	
	When an alert is unacknowledged, the renotification command will start back up 
	again and the Severity and Count fields in the alert table will start updating 
	again. 
	
	This command is tracked in the Alert Action Audit table as an Event Management 
	alert with the alert id being the Target value. 

17596: Alert update time column added to alert table
	The Alert Table has been enhanced to include a new column:
	
	Row Update Time
	
	The column contains the last time any column in that row was last updated. Note 
	that this is different than the Last Update Time column which lists the last time 
	the value or valueTable on the alert received a data update. 
	
	By default, the Last Update Time and Count columns are not tracked by the Row 
	Update Time. If you want the Row Update Time to include updates to those columns, 
	use the -lutupdatesnewdata command line option. 
	
	When using the New Data Only Alert Table as input to a cache, it is recommended 
	that you set the timestampColumnName property on the cache to the new Row Update 
	Time column. 
	
	The RtvAlertTable cache in the selfservicealerts demo has been enhanced to use 
	the Row Update Time for the timestampColumnName property and to limit the columns 
	from the Alert Table that will be stored in history. 
	
	Users upgrading from previous versions of RTView that are using alert persistence 
	will need to add the Row Update Time to the alert persistence database table. The 
	database schemas in RTV\dbconfig\alert_persist have been updated to include this 
	column. 

17618: New persistAlertDelayTime option added
	The Alerts have been enhanced to support the new primary/backup server feature 
	implemented in task 17598. A new option in ALERTOPTIONS.ini has been added to 
	support this: 
	
	persistInitDelayTime XX
	
	Where XX is the number of seconds to delay reading the alert persistence database 
	after going from warm standby to hot. The default is 5 seconds and should be 
	increased if the persistence database is slow or if a large number of alerts are 
	expected to change on each update period. 
	
	Even with HA, there are some limitations on persisting alerts. Some alerts might 
	not be persisted in the following cases: 
	- The persistence database is down. In this case, the alerts cannot be written to 
	the database or read from the database. If a server goes down and the backup 
	takes over while the database is down, persisted alerts will not be read into the 
	backup server. The same thing will happen if persistence is using a Persistence 
	Data Server which is down during fail over. 
	- The persistence database is slow. In this case, all of the alerts may not have 
	been written to the database from the server that is shutting down before the 
	server that is coming up can read them. Use the persistInitDelayTime to account 
	for this. 
	- The alert server is terminates in a non-orderly shutdown. Alerts are written 
	out once per update period and once turning orderly termination. If there is a 
	non-orderly shutdown, some alerts may not be written to the database yet. 
	
	In the case where alerts are not persisted, the data server that is taking over 
	will generate new alerts if the data is still in an alert state. It might also 
	re-use ID's that were used by the data server that failed for new alerts. 

17619: Enhanced performance for acknowledging thousands of alerts
	The performance of the acknowledge alert command has been improved. Previously, 
	when acknowledging a large number of alerts in a single command, this command 
	executed very slowly. 

17634: Improved performance of alert engine
	The alert processing performance has been improved. This has included several 
	enhancements. As part of this change, the Self Service Audit Table and Action 
	Audit Table data attachments now only return the 500 newest rows of that table. 
	To see more row, attach to the database table using an SQL data attachment. 
	
	For better performance, the AlertEngineName and ID columns should be specified as 
	the primary key for the alert persistence table. RTView will do this if it 
	creates the table. If the table is created manually, be sure to specify the NOT 
	NULL qualifier when creating those two columns, and then specify those columns as 
	the table's primary key. For example: 
	
	CREATE TABLE <alert persist tbl name> ("AlertEngineName" <type> NOT NULL, ... 
	,"ID" <type> NOT NULL, ...) 
	ALTER TABLE <alert persist tbl name> ADD CONSTRAINT pk_alert PRIMARY KEY 
	("AlertEngineName","ID") 

17643: Support empty string for set owner command
	The Set Owner command on the alert data source has been enhanced to allow you to 
	set the owner to an empty string. 

17645: Check the Last Update Time before incrementing the Count
	The alerts have been enhanced to check the Last Update Time before incrementing 
	the Count value. 
	
	In previous releases, if an alert was attached to a cache table, any time a 
	single row in the table was updated, the Count column in the alert was 
	incremented for all indexes, even if the value in the time_stamp column of the 
	cache only changed for the one row. This enhancement checks the value of the Last 
	Update Time before incrementing the Count. If the Last Update Time hasn't 
	changed, the Count is not incremented. 
	
	In order to set this up with the cache, include the time_stamp column of the 
	cache in your valueTable data attachment. Also set the timeStampColumnName to the 
	name of the time_stamp column from your cache. This will configure the alert to 
	use the cache's time stamp for the Last Update Time and the Count will only be 
	incremented if that time stamp has changed since the previous update. 
	
	To go back to the previous behavior of incrementing the Count column even if the 
	Last Update Time hasn't changed, use the following command line option: 
	
	-ignorelutforcount:true

Common Server Support

17661: Support deploying RTView as a Windows Service on 64 bit
	RTView has been enhanced so that the Display Server, Data Server and Historian 
	can be run as a service on 64-bit Windows systems. In previous releases, running 
	as a server was only supported on 32-bit Windows systems. 
	
	Previously, these services run using JavaService version 2.0.10, but this has 
	been replaced by AlwaysUp CLT. The following command line options are no longer 
	supported for install_service: 
	
	-serviceerr - The service now only supports a single log file for both stdout and 
	stderr. By default, both stdout and stderr will be written to a log file named 
	appName_out.log (ex. displayserver_out.log). You can override this using the 
	-serviceout command line option. 
	
	-overwritelogs - Logging is appended to the log file each time RTView restarts. 
	When the log file size exceeds 5MB, the oldest 25% of the log file will be 
	discarded. 
	
	For better control over your logging, use either the -logfile or the -log4j 
	command line options. See the documentation for more information on those command 
	line options. For both of those options, the service will still output any 
	information written to the console by 3rd party libraries to the log file 
	specified by -serviceout. 
	
	If UAT is enabled on your system, you will need to run install_service and 
	uninstall_service as Administrator. To do this, right-click on the RTView Command 
	Prompt in your Window's Start menu and select Run as Administrator. Use this 
	command prompt to execute the install_service and uninstall_service commands. 
	
	Some RTView applications use very long command line strings. If the command line 
	is too long, the Window Services dialog will show an error "The stub received bad 
	data" when you try to look at the properties of the service. In this case, you 
	can look at the properties of your service in the Windows Registry under 
	HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\services\Key where Key is the name of 
	your service. 
	
	Command lines with more than 10,240 characters cannot be installed as a service.

Data Server

17598: Support for primary/backup mode for data server
	High availability (HA) support in the data server has been improved to allow more 
	control over which server should run as the primary server by default and which 
	should run as backup, in a group of two redundant servers. Only the primary data 
	server will activate the cache and alert data sources. 
	
	Previous releases also had support for redundant data servers: A data server 
	could be started in standby:warm mode so that it would not activate the alert or 
	cache data sources at startup. However, as soon as the first client connected to 
	a standby data server, it would activate those data sources even if the other 
	data server was still running. This meant that multiple instances of the alert 
	data source could be active at the same time. 
	
	With this enhancement, the backup server will not activate the cache and alert 
	data sources as long as the primary server is up. If a client connects to the 
	backup data server, the backup server will simply act as a proxy and route all of 
	that client's requests to the primary data server. If the backup server detects 
	that the primary server is down, the backup will leave standby mode and become 
	the primary server and will immediately activate its alert and cache data sources 
	(even if no clients connect to it). Later, if the default primary server is 
	restarted, the backup server will return to standy mode and deactivate its local 
	instances of the cache and alert data sources. 
	
	For best performance, clients should be configured to try to connect to the 
	primary server before the backup server. For example, if the default primary data 
	server is A:5555 and the default backup server is B:5555, then each client's 
	connection string to that server pair should be "A:5555,B:5555" or, if 
	connections are made via the rtvdata servlet, "http://A/rtvdata,http://B/rtvdata" 
	
	The default primary and backup servers can be identified by the "group" 
	properties in each server's DATASERVER.ini file: 
	
	1. group_member - The hostname:port connection string of the other data server in 
	this redundant group. If a hostname is specified without a ":port" then port 
	number 3278 is assumed. Do not specify a URL for the rtvdata servlet. 
	
	2. group_priority - The value of this property is an integer value of 1 or more, 
	with 1 being the lowest priority. The running server in the group with the 
	highest priority will become the primary server. A larger number assigns a higher 
	priority. For example, say that two redundant data servers are run on host A and 
	host B, and the server on host A should normally run as primary with the server 
	on host B as backup. In that case, the server's group_priority on host A could be 
	set to 2 and the group_priority on host B could be set to 1. 
	
	3. group_timeout - The timeout (in seconds) that the backup server will wait for 
	a connection or a response from the primary, after which it assumes the primary 
	has failed. The default is 5 seconds. (Note that in most cases, if the primary 
	server terminates or the host on which it is running is shut down, the backup 
	server will detect this immediately). 
	
	4. group_initial_wait - The time in seconds that the server will wait at startup 
	for a connection to the other server in the group. The default is zero. This 
	property should only be specified for the backup server. A value of 30 (seconds) 
	would be typical. This wait time can be useful in the situation where the primary 
	and backup server are started at nearly the same time, and the backup server's 
	initial attempt to connect to the primary server fails because the primary has 
	not reached the point where it accepts connections. Without an initial wait, in 
	that case the backup would become the primary at startup but then would be forced 
	to resign shortly afterwards when the default primary server finished staring. 
	
	If the group_member property is specified but group_priority is not, the 
	group_priority defaults to 1. Note that 1 is the lowest priority. 
	
	If the group_member property is specified then it is not necessary to specify the 
	-standby:warm option. The server will remain in standby mode until its determined 
	which server is the primary. 
	
	
	Here are the contents of two DATASERVER.ini files for an example of two redundant 
	data servers are run on host A and host B, and the server on host A should 
	normally run as primary with the server on host B as backup, and both servers use 
	port 3278. 
	
	# DATASERVER.ini file for the default primary server, on host A
	port 3278
	group_priority 2
	group_member B:3278
	
	
	# DATASERVER.ini file for the default backup server, on host B
	port 3278
	group_priority 1
	group_initial_wait 30
	group_member A:3278
	
	Note that all of the properties listed above can also be specified on the command 
	line, for example: 
	
	  -group_priority:2
	
	The following properties have been added to the data server's JMX manager mbean, 
	to provide information about which server is currently running as primary. All of 
	the properties are read-only: 
	
	1. Port (integer) - the data server's port number, 3278 by default.
	
	2. PrimaryServer (boolean) - true if this server is currently the primary server 
	in a redundant group, false if this server is currently the backup server in a 
	redundant group. If the server is not in a redundant group, the value is always 
	true. 
	
	3. ProxyFor (string) - if this server is currently a backup server (that is, if 
	PrimaryServer is false) this property contains the host:port of the server that 
	is currently the primary, to which this server will forward all client requests 
	as a proxy. This property is empty if this server is currently the primary 
	server. 
	

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

17586: New property to specify data server to use for initial queries
	A property named queryServerName has been added to the cache table definition 
	object (obj_cache_table). This property defines the name of the data server that 
	should be used to perform the initial sql query to preload the cache's tables and 
	also to perform any extend-by-sql queries for data attachments to the cache. By 
	default the value of the property is blank, which means that the sql queries are 
	performed by the local application, as in prior releases. Note that sql queries 
	are only performed if the cache's historyTableName or currentTableName properties 
	specify a database table name. 

17605: Avoid high frequency trimming of cache history table
	To reduce overhead when the history table of a cache is large and new data 
	is frequently applied to the cache, the history row limit and time range limit 
	will not be enforced more than once every 2 seconds. This means that the 
	history table may exceed its limits, for a brief time.

17660: historyTableName value of '' now treated as empty string
	The following problem is fixed: If the historyTableName property of a cache is 
	set to $sub1 and $sub1 is set to '' (a pair of single quotes) in a .ini file or a 
	properties file, then that should be equivalant to setting the property to an 
	empty string, which the cache should ignore. Instead, it tries to load the cache 
	history by doing an sql query on a database table named '' which fails with an 
	sql exception. 

17667: %Full column in RTViewDs.Tables fixed for condensed hist
	A problem has been fixed which caused the %Full column in the RTViewDs.Tables 
	cache metadata table to always show NaN for condensed history tables. 

17669: Row condenser no longer fails if indexed row stops updating
	A problem has been fixed in the cache row condenser which could cause the 
	history_condensed table of a cache to stop updating. 

17795: RTViewDs.CacheObjectProperties shows subst string not value
	A bug has been fixed that affected the RTViewDs.CacheObjectProperties meta table. 
	It will now show the replacement value of a substitution string for a cache 
	property that is set to a substitution, rather than the substitution string 
	itself. 
	
	For example, say the historyTableName property of a cache is set to $histTable 
	and $histTable is set to MyDbTable. In prior releases the value shown in 
	RTViewDs.CacheObjectProperties for historyTableName would be $histTable. In this 
	release, the value shown would be MyDbTable. 

17815: cache keeps history table if max rows = 0 and row condenser enab
	If a cache has maxNumberOfHistoryRows <= 0 then no history table should be kept 
	for that cache. However in prior releases if the cache also had condenseRowsFlag 
	= 1 then the cache history table was kept, which was incorrect. This is fixed. 

SQL Data Source

17666: Static sql query no longer runs more than once at startup
	A problem in the SQL data source has been fixed which allowed a static query to 
	execute more than once in certain startup conditions. 

TIBCO Hawk Data Source

17326: Subscription processing moved to a separate thread
	The TIBCO Hawk data source has been enhanced to move subscription processing out 
	of the main update thread. In previous releases, this was done in the main update 
	thread, which could cause the application to become unresponsive if a large 
	number of subscriptions needed to be made at once or if an Hawk Agent was slow in 
	returning the requested subscription. The subscription processing is now handled 
	in a separate thread so that the application update thread is not blocked. 

17327: Added subscription logging to RTViewDs
	Two new RTViewDs methods have been added to the Hawk data source to assist in 
	debugging agent and subscription problems. Both of these methods are expensive 
	and should only be used for debug. They should not be included in standard user 
	displays. Both of these methods ignore the Disable Data Caching application 
	option and cache all of the data regardless of how that flag is configured. 
	
	getAgentStatus - this method returns the following columns containing information 
	about the agent: 
	Display Name - The display name of the agent.
	Status - Alive: RTView has received an onAgentAlive event for this agent and it 
	is currently active; Expired: RTView has received an onAgentExpired event and has 
	not yet received another onAgentAlive event; Not Discovered - RTView is 
	configured for this agent, but has not received an onAgentAlive event yet 
	onAgentAlive Time - The timestamp of the most recent onAgentAlive event for this 
	agent. 
	onAgentExpired Time - The timestamp of the most recent onAgentExpired event for 
	this agent. 
	onAgentExpired Count - The number of onAgentExpired events RTView has received 
	for this agent since startup. 
	Data Received Time - The last time RTView received data from this agent. This may 
	be subscription data or alert data. 
	
	getSubscriptionStatus - this method returns the following columns containing 
	information about the subscription: 
	Agent - The display name of the agent
	Key - The key used internall to track this subscription. It contains the agent, 
	microagent, method and listener information. 
	Status - Pending: RTView has queued the subscription request, but it has not been 
	processed yet; Active: RTView has processed the subscription; Cancelled: RTView 
	has cancelled the subscription. 
	Request Time - The time this subscription was requested. 
	Create Time - The time this subscription was created.
	Create Length - The amount of time, in milliseconds, it took for Hawk agent to 
	respond to the subscription request. 
	Queue Length - The amount of time, in milliseconds, this subscription waited in 
	the queue before RTView requested it from the agent. 
	Data Received Time - The last time RTView received data for this subscription.
	Cancel Time - The time this subscription was cancelled.
	Cancel Reason - The reason this subscription was cancelled. No Listeners: There 
	are no more listeners for this subscription; Microagent Removed: The microagent 
	is not longer available; Agent Connection - RTView received an onAgentExpired 
	event for the agent. 
	
	For debug situations where you need to see these values over time instead of just 
	the latest value, both of these tables can be attached to caches. For the 
	getAgentStatus table, set the indexColumnNames on the cache to Display Name and 
	for the getSubscriptionStatus table, set the indexColumnNames property on the 
	cache to Key. In both cases, deselect the allowDuplicatesInHistoryFlag on the 
	cache. Note that because both of these table are expensive you should not deploy 
	caches containing this information in a standard deployment. They should be used 
	in debug situations only as they will impact the performance of RTView. 

Display Server

17608: Fixed memory leak associated with sessions
	A memory leak has been fixed in the display server, which leaked a small 
	amount of memory for each browser session.

17651: Fixed unstable position of tree control +/- icon
	The following problem with the tree control in the thin client has been fixed:
	
	In IE8 or older versions, the horizontal position of the +/- icon on a non-leaf 
	tree node in the tree control is unstable. (This is the icon that is clicked to 
	expand/collapse the node). Sometimes it is positioned correctly just to the left 
	of the node's folder icon, but sometimes it is incorrectly positioned along the 
	left edge of the tree control. It wobbles back and forth when the mouse is moved 
	over the tree nodes 

17653: Display server no longer reopens display after panel resize
	In the thin client, if the browser panel containing a display is resized and the 
	resizeMode is set to scale or layout, the display server no longer reopens the 
	display in the panel causing the display to revert to its initial state. 
	
	However, this problem has not been fixed on the iPad because the fix had unwanted 
	affects on table objects in displays using resizeMode = layout. 

Drill Down

17105: Fixed problems in FFox with passing long sub strings
	A problem has been fixed in the thin client that caused the display image to 
	disappear if a drilldown set very long substitution strings on the display, in 
	Firefox. 

17637: Improved performance for large number of selected rows
	In previous releases, drill down from a table with several thousand selected rows 
	could be slow if the table was setting substitutions. This has been fixed. 

17744: Allow attaching sub name to data in drill down target dialog
	The Drill Down Target dialog has been enhanced to allow cells in the String 
	column of the Drill Down Substitutions table to be attached to data. 

Functions

17617: Max/Min Columns functions now work for Date type
	The Min Columns and Max Columns functions have been enhanced to work on date 
	columns. When using dates for these functions, both the First Column Name or 
	Numeric Value and the Second Column Name or Numeric Value arguments must specify 
	the name of a column of type date. These functions do not support entering a date 
	string into either of those arguments. 

17632: Improved performance of SortTable function on localized strings
	The performance of Sort Table function when sorting on string columns has been 
	improved. 

17633: New "Use Fast String Compare" argument in SortTable function
	An argument named "Use Fast String Compare" has been added to the Sort Table 
	function. This argument can be set to 1 to obtain optimum performance when 
	sorting a large table on a string column. 
	
	If the "Use Fast String Compare" argument is set to 1, the 
	java.lang.String.compareTo method is used to compare strings, which is fast but 
	non-localized. If the argument set to zero, the java.text.Collator.compare method 
	is used to provide a localized string sort, but the sort will be somewhat slower. 
	
	By default, the argument is set to zero, for compatibility with previous version, 
	in which the Sort Table function always performed a localized sort on strings. 
	
	For example,  say that a table contains a string column with 4 rows, as follows:
	
	ááá
	aaa
	bbb
	ccc
	
	Note that the first row contains accented lowercase A characters. If the Sort 
	Table function is applied to this table with "Use Fast String Compare" = 0, the 
	rows will be sorted into this order: 
	
	aaa
	ááá
	bbb
	ccc
	
	Note that the row with accented lowercase A characters is next after the row with 
	unaccented lowercase A's. 
	
	But if the Sort Table function is applied to this table with "Use Fast String 
	Compare" = 1, the rows will be sorted into this order: 
	
	aaa
	bbb
	ccc
	ááá
	
	Note that the row with accented lowercase A characters is last. This is because 
	the accented lowercase A character appears after all of the ascii characters in 
	the Unicode characters set, which is the basis of the java.lang.String.compareTo 
	method. 

17664: $filterfield and $filtervalue are no longer set by default
	By default, the $filterfield and $filtervalue substitutions are no longer set 
	when the user performs a drilldown from a table object with a row filter defined 
	on its valueTable data attachment, and the row name column in the table no longer 
	includes the filterfield:filtervalue strings for each row. (The row name is 
	visible only if the value of the rowLabelMode property on obj_table02 is > 0). 
	
	Those features were rarely used and for performance reasons are now deprecated. 
	However, if those features are required for existing displays, they can be 
	enabled by specifying the option -rowfiltersubs when starting the builder, 
	viewer, or display server. The option can also be specified as follows in 
	OPTIONS.ini: 
	
	rowfiltersubs true

17745: Convert Columns function no longer fails if string cell is null
	The Convert Columns (TCVT) function no longer throws a NPE when converting a 
	string column to a number (double, float, int, or long) if a cell in the column 
	is null. Instead the null string is converted to a zero. 

GmsTabularData

17635: GmsTabularData.newColumnSubset exception fixed
	The GmsTabularData.newColumnSubset() method no longer throws an
	array bounds exception.

Local Variables

17639: Global var in main window can now be set if set earlier in popup
	The following problem with global variables has been fixed:
	
	If a mapped global variable named $x was set via drilldown in a popup window, 
	then $x could not be set by a drilldown in the main window until the popup window 
	was closed. This occurred because the panel in the popup window immediately set 
	$x back to its previous value. 

Logging

17640: New display server option to truncate long subs in -verbose
	The display server supports a new option -substracelim:N to limit the total 
	number of characters of substitution name:values that the verbose output includes 
	when tracing requests from the thin client. If no value is specified, the default 
	is 1000. This prevents requests with very long substitution strings from quickly 
	filling up the display server log. A value of 0 means that no limit will be 
	applied to the subs listed by -verbose, as in previous releases. 

Object Library

17607: Error handling for scales improved
	The error handling on all of the objects on the scales tab has been enhanced as 
	follows: 
	
	1. The valueHighAlarm and valueHighWarning are now allowed to 
	equal the valueMin or valueMax. Previously, they had to be greater than 
	valueMin and less than valueMax.
	
	2. If the valueHighAlarm is greater than valueMax or less than valueMin, 
	the valueHighAlarm will be disabled and the scale will draw without that 
	threshold. An error will print to the console. Previously, this case caused 
	the scale not to draw.
	
	3. If the valueHighWarning is greater than valueMax or less than 
	valueMin, or if valueHighWarning is greater than or equal to 
	valueHighAlarm, the valueHighWarning will be disabled and the scale 
	will draw without that threshold. An error will print to the console. 
	Previously, this case caused the scale not to draw.
	
	4. On the bullet scale, the compValue1 and compValue2 are now 
	allowed to equal the valueMin or valueMax. Previously, they had to be 
	greater than valueMin and less than valueMax.
	
	5. On the bullet scale, if the compValue1 or compValue2 is greater than 
	valueMax or less than valueMin, that threshold will be disabled and the 
	scale will draw without that threshold. An error will print to the console. 
	Previously, this case caused the scale not to draw.

17665: Thresholds on bar scale now draw correctly when valueMin != 0
	In previous releases, the bar scale did not calculate the threshold ranges 
	correctly when valueMin did not equal 0. This has been fixed.

Charts (General)

17574: New outlineColor property for 1-pixel black outline
	A new property named outlineColor has been added to most objects on the Graphs 
	palette. The property sets the color of the 1 pixel outline rectangle drawn 
	around the legend area and each color swatch in the legend. 
	
	The property appears in the Legend category and was added to the following 
	objects: obj_bargraph, obj_legend, obj_pie, obj_radar, obj_trendgraph02, 
	obj_stockchart, obj_xygraph. 
	
	On obj_bargraph, obj_trendgraph02, obj_stockchart, and obj_xygraph it sets the 
	color of the 1 pixel outline rectangle drawn around the plot area. On 
	obj_bargraph it also sets the color of the 1 pixel outline drawn around each bar. 
	
	The default value is black (color 7). In prior releases the color was black and 
	was not configurable. 
	
	The property was not added to obj_statushistory since the existing gridColor 
	property fulfills the the same purpose. The objects on the Fx Graphs palette were 
	not affected by this change. 

Control Objects

17652: New  initialExpandDepth property added to tree control
	A property named initialExpandDepth has been added to the tree control 
	(obj_c1tree). This property specifies the depth to which nodes should be 
	automatically expanded (opened) when the tree is populated. All non-leaf nodes at 
	a depth that is less than or equal to initialExpandDepth are expanded 
	automatically. 
	
	When calculating node depth, the root node has a depth of zero. (All trees have a 
	root node but it is visible only if the rootNodeLabel property is set). The 
	default value of initialExpandDepth is zero, which means that only the root node 
	is expanded automatically. 
	
	Use this property with caution on large trees, since the automatic expansion of a 
	large number of nodes can cause slow performance. 
	
	Changing the value of initialExpandDepth from a larger value to a smaller value 
	will have no effect until the display containing the tree is reopened. 

Tables

17658: Fixed table column resize problems with Firefox 12.0
	A problem has been fixed that affected table objects in the thin client in 
	Firefox 12. When resizing a table column by dragging its edge, the resize 
	behavior would sometimes continue even after the mouse button was released. 

Viewer - Multi-Panel Frameworks

17654: Main panel refresh after drilldown in other panel (thin client)
	In a multi-panel configuration, the thin client will now refresh the display in 
	the panel named "main" panel after a drilldown is performed in any other panel. 
	This is useful in cases where a drilldown or control action in another panel sets 
	a global variable that affects the display in the main panel. Prior to this 
	enhancement, the display in the main panel was not updated until the next 
	scheduled refresh of the thin client. 
	
	The panel must be named "main" in the PANELS.ini file for this enhancement to be 
	effective. Panels by any other name will not be refreshed until the next 
	scheduled refresh of the thin client. 

Version 6.0.1 Release Notes

Alerts

17433: Editing enabled for Warning/Alarm Levels in Tabular Alert Admin
	In the previous release of the Self Service Alerts demo, the Warning Level 
	and Alarm Level fields in the Tabular Alert Administration page were not 
	enabled in the thin client. This has been fixed.

17445: TIME_STAMP column in audit tables now timestamp type
	The Alert Action Audit Table and the Self Service Audit Table have been 
	enhanced to use a Timestamp type instead of a String type for the 
	TIME_STAMP column. 
	
	Users upgrading from a previous release of RTView that use either of these 
	tables will need to modify their table schemas so that the TIME_STAMP 
	column uses the correct timestamp type for their database. For example, in 
	MySQL the following SQL statement will modify the TIME_STAMP column:
	
	ALTER TABLE AUDIT_TABLE ALTER TIME_STAMP DATETIME
	

17447: Option to update sev on acknowledged alerts
	RTView Alerts have been enhanced to support an option to update the 
	severity of acknowledged alerts. Three of the alert types support 
	changing the severity of an existing alert:
	
	Limits - If the skipDuplicateAlertsFlag is selected, the severity of an alert 
	will update (e.g. valueHighWarning to valueHighAlert) without multiple 
	alerts being activated. That is, only the highest (or lowest) alert will be 
	activated when the input value exceeds both high (or low) thresholds. 
	
	Multi-State - If the skipDuplicateAlertsFlag is selected, the severity of an 
	alert will update without multiple alerts being activated. That is, only the 
	highest severity alert will be activated when the input meets multiple 
	conditions. 
	
	Event - If the valueTableMap contains a mapping to the Severity, the 
	severity of an alert will update whenever the mapped column changes.
	
	In previous releases, once an alert was acknowledged, the severity of 
	that alert would no longer update.  A new option, Update Severity on 
	Acknowledged Alerts, has been added to the Alerts tab of the Application 
	Options dialog. By default, this option is turned off so the behavior of 
	existing applications will not change. If this option is selected, the 
	severity of acknowledged alerts will update if the severity changes.

17448: Option to renotify when alerts change severity
	RTView alerts have been enhanced with 2 new options for what happens 
	to an alert the first time it's severity changes:
	
	1. In the Alerts tab of the Application Options dialog, the Unacknowledge 
	Alerts on First Severity Change option has been added. By default it is off. 
	When selected, when an acknowledged alert's severity changes the first 
	time, the alert will be unacknowledged. This means that the alert will 
	start renotifying again if the reNotificationMode is configured to do so. It 
	also means that if the reNofifyOnFirstSevChangeFlag is selected for the 
	alert, it will renotify once regardless of the reNoficationMode. This 
	unacknowledge action is not tracked in the Alert Action Audit Table since 
	it is not a user action.
	
	2. The limits, multi-state and event alerts have a new property, 
	reNotifyOnFirstSevChangeFlag. By default, it is off. If selected, the alert 
	will execute the reNotificationCommand if configured or the 
	alertCommand when the severity of the alert changes the first time if the 
	alert has not been acknowledged or if the Unacknowledge Alerts on First 
	Severity Change application option is enabled.
	
	Note that the severity is only updated on acknowledged alerts if the 
	Update Severity on Acknowledged Alerts application option is selected.

17467: Duplicate updates on Alert Table New Data Only attachments
	In previous releases, duplicate updates were sometimes sent to New Data 
	Only listeners for the AlertTable for multi-state and limits alerts with the 
	skipDuplicateAlertsFlag turned on. This has been fixed.

17481: index override alert enabled flag no longer incorrect on Add
	In the previous release, the Add button on the Tabular Alert Administration 
	sometimes saved an incorrect value for Alert Enabled. This has been fixed.

17506: SSA Alert Settings table connection status now stable
	In RTView 6.0.0, the Connected status of the Self Service Alert Settings table 
	sometimes incorrectly toggled between true and false. This has been fixed.

17519: New option for accessing Action Audit db through Data Server
	The Alert data source Alert Action Audit feature has been enhanced to 
	support using a data server for access to the action audit database table. To 
	use this feature, specify the name of a named data server connection in the 
	Alert Action Audit Data Server field on the Alerts tab of the Application 
	Options dialog. If specified, this named data server connection will be used 
	for reading and writing to the specified Alert Action Audit Database Table.

17521: SSA now correctly handle enabledFlag=false on tabular alerts
	In previous releases, there was an error in the processing of the 
	enabledFlag for tabular alerts in Self Service Alerts. If the enabledFlag for an 
	alert was false, the alert was disabled regardless of the enabled value in 
	the Alert Settings Table. This has been fixed.

17534: Historian removed from alert persistence
	The alert persistence feature has been enhanced for easier 
	configuration. In previous releases, alerts were persisted via the 
	Historian and required an RtvAgent to send the alerts from the alert 
	engine to the Historian. Now, the alert engine persists the alerts to the 
	database directly or via a data server. The Historian and RtvAgent are no 
	longer required. The following options have been removed from the Alert 
	Persistence Application Options and are no longer supported:
	
	Agent Name
	Agent Connection
	
	The Alert Persistence options have also been removed from the 
	Historian and are no longer supported.
	
	The following options have been added to the Alert Persistence 
	Application Options:
	
	Alert Engine Name - 	Unique identifier for this alert engine. Multiple alert 
	engines can persist their alerts to the same database, so this value 
	allows the alert engine to restore only alerts for this alert engine in the 
	case of fail over.
	
	Data Server - The name of a Named Data Server connection to use for 
	reading and writing alerts to/from the database. This is optional.
	
	SQL Response Time Out (seconds) - The timeout for querying alerts 
	from the database. This is the amount of time RTView will wait for a 
	response from the database query to get the persisted alerts. If your 
	database connection is slow, or if you are using a data server to get your 
	persisted alerts and its connection is slow, you should increase this 
	value. Note that RTView blocks while waiting for this query to return.
	
	Create Database Table If Not Found - If true, RTView will attempt to create 
	the alert persistence database table if it isn't in the database.
	
	In order to support this change, the persistence database table schema 
	has changed as follows:
	
	The AgentName column has been renamed to AlertEngineName.
	
	Customers upgrading from a version previous to 6.0.1 must do the 
	following:
	
	1. Either delete the persistence table in the database and allow RTView 
	to recreate it for you or rename the AlertEngineName column to 
	AgentName.
	2. In Application Options->Alert->Alert Persistence, fill in the Alert Engine 
	Name to be the same value as you previously used for Agent Name
	3. If you are not using the HISTORIAN for anything other than to persist 
	alerts, you no longer need to run the Historian.
	

17548: Alert name and index added to action audit table
	The Alert Action Audit feature has been enhanced to store more data to 
	the database. For actions of type Event Management, the Alert Name and 
	Alert Index will be stored to the database. The database table schema 
	has changed to include the following columns immediately following the 
	VALUE column:
	
	ALERT_NAME (String)
	ALERT_INDEX (String)
	
	The ALERT_INDEX will be empty if the alert is scalar. Both the 
	ALERT_NAME and ALERT_INDEX will be empty for actions of type 
	Configuration Management.
	
	Users upgrading from a version of RTView previous to 6.0.1 must update 
	their database to contain the new ALERT_NAME and ALERT_INDEX 
	columns as described above.
	

17549: Persistence no longer fails with Self Service Alerts
	In previous releases, alert persistence sometimes failed when used in 
	conjunction with self service alerts. This has been fixed.

17556: RTV\dbconfig\alert_persist extraneous file removed
	In previous releases, the RTV\dbconfig\alert_persist directory contained an 
	extraneous file named '. This file has been removed.

17561: New Data Only listeners are no longer updated twice
	In previous releases, Alert data attachments with the New Data Only flag 
	selected would get duplicate updates. This has been fixed.

17562: Synchronization problems in alert evaluation fixed
	In previous releases, the alerts had a synchronization problem such that if 
	one thread was updating the rowEnabledTable or threshold table at the 
	same time another thread was evaluating alerts, an alert could be cleared 
	incorrectly. This has been fixed.

17565: When alert persist db unavailable alerts no longer initialize
	The initialization error handling for alert persistence has been enhanced. 
	Previously, if the alert persistence database table was not immediately 
	available on start up, alert initialization continued without loading in 
	persisted alerts. Now, the alert data source will wait until the persistence 
	Connection Time Out has expired before continuing with alert initialization. 
	By default, the Connection Time Out is 60 seconds. You can override this on 
	the Alert Persistence tab of the Application Options dialog.

17572: Time value is now persisted correctly
	In previous releases, the Time value for persisted alerts was not applied 
	correctly. Instead, the time the alert was restored was used. This has been 
	fixed.

Builder

17376: Concatenate Columns function is now alphabetized
	In previous releases, the Concatenate Columns function was listed out of 
	alphabetical order in the Edit Function dialog. This has been fixed.

17377: Custom functions not found no longer causes bad rtv file saves
	In previous releases, custom functions were not saved correctly if the 
	custom function descriptor was not loaded. This has been fixed.

Builder - Options Dialogs

17378: Subsitutions list sorted in General Options
	In previous releases, substitutions in the Application Options dialog were 
	not presented in alphabetical order. This has been fixed.

17403: customds stored in OPTIONS.ini retained on resave
	In previous releases, if a custom data source was store in the OPTIONS.ini, 
	it would be lost when the OPTIONS.ini was re-saved. This has been fixed.

Commands

17504: Multiple Command dialog label fixed
	In previous releases, the Define Multiple Command dialog showed the 
	wrong label for the alert commands. This has been fixed.

Data Historian

17415: -rebuildtables can now take table names
	It is now possible to specify specific database tables be rebuilt at Historian 
	run time. e.g. -rebuildtables:Table1,Table2,Table3
	
	Table names are case-sensitive and may not contain space characters.

17487: Historian now sets autocommit = false in batch mode
	The performance of the Historian's batch mode has been improved. 
	
	Batch mode is enabled by the "Cache Data" checkbox. See the 
	documentation for more information.

17590: Redundant Historian crashes if agent datasource disabled
	A bug has been fixed which causes the historian to crashes at startup if the 
	historian was in a redundant historian group and the agent data source was 
	not enabled.

Data Server

17335: Multi-Server commands and attachments now supported
	A list of data server names can now be specified in the "Data Server" field 
	of all data attachment dialogs and data source command dialogs. This 
	makes it possible to configure a single data attachment or command 
	that is directed to multiple data servers. This capability is referred to as a 
	"multi-server attachment" or a "multi-server command".
	
	The list entered in the Data Server field should contain two or more data 
	server names separated by semicolons, for example:
	
	   Data Server: ds101;ds102
	
	Each name in the list should match a data server specified in the Named 
	Data Servers dialog (opened from the Data Server tab of the Application 
	Options dialog) or __default for the default data server if any, or __none 
	for the local RTView application itself (e.g. Builder,Viewer). Note that 
	__default and __none begin with two underscore characters.  
	
	Alternatively, a single asterisk can be entered in the Data Server field to 
	specify all data servers, including the default data server and local 
	application, if applicable. One or more substitution strings can also be 
	entered in the Data Server field.
	
	If a list of data server is specified for a data source command, the 
	command will be executed on each data server in the list.
	
	If a list of data servers is specified for a data attachment, the attachment 
	will be directed to each data server in the list. For tabular data 
	attachments, a column named "DataServerName" will be added as the 
	first column of the table and will contain the name of the server from 
	which the data was received.
	
	A multi-server attachment will receive data independently from each of 
	the servers it specifies. So in most cases, it will be necessary to 
	combine the tables received from a multi-server attachment into a single 
	table. This can be accomplished in two ways:
	
	1) The multi-server attachment can be applied to a local cache which has 
	the DataServerName column specified as an index column. The current 
	table of that cache will contain the combination of the tables received 
	from all servers. (It may also be necessary to configure the cache row 
	expiration features to remove defunct rows).
	
	2) The multi-server attachment can be applied to the Table argument of 
	an instance of the RTView function named "Combine Multi-Server 
	Tables". This is a new function in this release, and has the following 
	description: 
	
	   "Combine tables from a multi-server data attachment into a single 
	table, using the DataServerName column as the index column. (A multi-
	server data attachment is one in which the Data Server field is set to * or 
	a semicolon-separated list of Named Data Server names). The function 
	takes the following argument:
	
	   Table - The table to be combined with any previous result. It is 
	assumed that the value of this argument will be supplied by a multi-
	server data attachment. A column named "DataServerName" will be 
	inserted as column zero of the table. The column will be populated with 
	the name of each data server from which a table has been received. 
	When a data table is received from server named X, it is combined with 
	the previous result table, replacing any existing rows from server X. The 
	combined table is returned by the function, and is stored internally for 
	use on the next update from any server specified in the attachment.

17357: Support recycling client connection numbers if limit met
	The RTViewDataServer JMX MBean supports two new integer attributes:
	
	ConnectionRequestCount : the total number of socket connection 
	requests received from clients
	
	ConnectionRequestFaliedCount : the total number of socket connection 
	requests that failed, because of client/server version mismatch or 
	non-RTView client
	
	The data server will recycle unused client connection numbers if it 
	reaches its internal limit of 10,000. This can be an issue if client 
	applications from RTView versions prior to 5.9 attempt repeatedly to 
	connect to the data server.
	

17417: Better error reporting for port conflict
	When the data server or display server cannot create a server socket 
	because the port is already in use, the port number and the server's class 
	name will now be indicated in the error message.

17474: NPE thrown by dataserver if pre-5.9 client connects
	A bug has been fixed which could cause the data server to throw a null 
	pointer exception and refuse any new client connections after repeated 
	connection attempts from a client running an earlier and incompatible 
	version of RTView.

17546: Client listeners metadata table supported by Data Server
	The XML data source now supports attachments to a source named 
	RTViewDs.Server, which provides information about all listeners that a 
	data server is currently maintaining for all of its clients. 
	
	The RTViewDs.Server source supports the following Data Keys:
	
	1) listeners:  This will display a table with one row for each unique data 
	attachment for each client of the data server.
	
	 The "Client ID" column displays the numeric ID of the client. The 
	"Address" column shows the IP address of the client and the "Host" 
	column shows the hostname of the client, if available, or simply "http" if 
	the client is connected via the rtvdata servlet. The "Adapter" column 
	shows the name of the RTView data adapter or data sources used in the 
	client's attachment. The "Key" column displays the entire data attachment 
	string. The "Listeners" column shows the total number of listeners for the 
	attachment string. The "Pushed" column shows the time when data was 
	most recently pushed from the server to the client. The "Seq" column 
	shows the sequence number assigned to that data push.
	
	2) cacheListeners: This will display a table with one row for each unique 
	cache data attachment for each client of the data server. It contains most 
	of the same columns as in the "listeners" table described above, plus 
	additional columns for the most commonly used fields in a cache data 
	attachment (Cache name, table name, columns, filter columns, filter 
	values). The "Local" and "Adapter" columns are not specified since only 
	client attachments for the cache data adapter are shown.
	
	The data server updates the RTViewDs.Server tables listed above every 
	10 seconds.
	
	The RTViewDs.Server source will not appear in the dropdown list of XML 
	sources in the Attach to XML Data dialog, instead the RTViewDs.Server 
	name must be entered manually in the XML Source field.
	
	The information provided by the RTViewDs.Server xml source is similar 
	to the information provided by the RTViewDs xml source (The RTViewDs 
	source is described in the Release Note for 16934). But there is an 
	important distinction: The RTViewDs.Server source provides information 
	from a data server about all listeners from all of its clients. The 
	RTViewDs source only provides information about listeners that the 
	current client (builder, viewer) has redirected to data servers.

Data Sources

CMDB Data Source

17312: Relationships moved to a separate database table
	The CMDB data source has been enhanced to support a Relationship 
	Table. This table contains all relationship information for Containers and 
	Metric Sources. The name of the Relationship Table must be specified in 
	the CMDB Application Options tab.
	
	The Relationship Table must have the following columns with the 
	specified names and types in the order listed:
	
	ID1 (String) The name of the parent container.
	ID2  (String) The name of the child container or metric source.
	TYPE (String) The relationship type. Currently, only PC (parent-child) is supported.
	
	The Parent field has been removed from the Metric Source and Container 
	tables.
	
	Customers using the CMDB that are upgrading from a release previous 
	to 6.0 will need to do the following:
	1. Create a Relationship Table as specified above.
	2. For each row in their Container and Metric Source table where a parent 
	value is listed, add a row to the relationship table where ID1 is the value 
	in the Parent column and ID2 is the value in the Name column.
	3. Remove the Parent column from the Container and Metric Source tables.
	4. Specify the name of the Relationship Table created in step 1 in the 
	CMDB Application Options.

Cache Data Source

17363: New listener to history_combo table now receives current data
	A bug in the data server has been fixed which in some conditions caused 
	an attachment to a cache's history_combo table to receive stale initial data.

17423: Column names now shown in the attach to data dialog
	In the previous release, the Column Name dropdown list in the cache data 
	dialog was not always populated from the data server. This is fixed.
	
	Another symptom of this problem, also fixed, is that queries made to the 
	RTViewDs cache metadata tables via the rtvquery (REST) servlet would 
	show stale data.

17465: Exception if cache with no timestamp has row expiration
	In previous releases, if a cache was configured with a blank 
	timestampColumnName and rowExpirationMode was not set to "Off", an 
	ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException was thrown. This is fixed.

JMS Admin Data Source (for TIBCO EMS only)

17414: Connection ID added to routes table
	The Routes table in the EMS Administration Data Source has been 
	enhanced to include a connectionID column. This column contains the 
	connection ID of the route or 0 if the route is not connected.

JMX Data Source

17513: Allow 'security.SSL.trustedCAKeyStore' to be passed as jmx prop
	The JMX Data Adapter now supports 'weblogic.security.SSL.trustedCAKeyStore'
	to be passed as JMX connection property.

17536: Fixed NPE thrown when mBeans send nulls in columnNames
	A fix was made to the JMX Data Adapter for NullPointerExceptions in the 
	console that appear if mBeans send over nulls in the columnNames array 
	during processing.

SQL Data Source

17406: Lost connection to Sybase ASE now reported
	In previous releases, RTView could not detect a lost connection to a Sybase 
	ASE database server. This has been fixed.

17461: Check for lost connection when SQL command fails
	If an sql command fails, RTView will test the database connection to see if 
	the connection has been lost, and if so it will disconnect and reconnect and 
	retry the command. In prior releases, a lost connection was only detected 
	after an sql query failed.

17493: Corrected crash due to login to expired sybase account
	In prior releases, if RTView connected to a Sybase ASE database using a 
	valid username and password but the password had expired, a null pointer 
	exception was thrown. This is fixed.

17544: SQL command to disable/enable connections
	An SQL command can now be configured to disable or enable a 
	database. When a database is disabled, RTView will not attempt to 
	make any queries on that database or attempts to reconnect until the 
	database is enabled again.
	
	When a database server needs to be shutdown for maintenance, the 
	new command can be used to disable the database and avoid repeated 
	connection attempts/failures from RTView. It can also be used to disable 
	a database connection that has become unreliable, and then enabled 
	again to make a new connection.
	
	To define an SQL command to disable a database named X, enter the 
	following in the Define SQL Command dialog:
	
	  Database Name: X
	  SQL Command: rtvEnableDB=false
	  Queries: (N/A, value is ignored)
	
	Note the the SQL command string must be entered exactly as shown, 
	with no embedded spaces.
	
	To define an SQL command to enable a database named X, enter the 
	following in the Define SQL Command dialog:
	
	  Database Name: X
	  SQL Command: rtvEnableDB=true
	  Queries: (N/A, value is ignored)
	
	Note the the SQL command string must be entered exactly as shown, 
	with no embedded spaces.
	
	To define an SQL command to disable a database named X and then 
	immediately enable it again, enter the following in the Define SQL 
	Command dialog:
	
	  Database Name: X
	  SQL Command: rtvEnableDB=false;rtvEnableDB=true
	  Queries: (N/A, value is ignored)
	
	Executing a "rtvEnableDB=false" command has no effect if the database 
	is already disabled, likewise for the "rtvEnableDB=true" command on an 
	enabled database.
	
	The SQL RTViewDs.Connections table, which displays metadata about 
	RTView database connections, now includes a column labeled 
	"Enabled".  The value in the Enabled column will be checked (true) for all 
	database connections except for those on which the "rtvEnableDB=false" 
	has been executed.

17545: SQL property timeout applicable to all queries
	The SQL data source now supports a default timeout for all SQL queries. 
	The default timeout can be specified with the following command line 
	option:
	
	 -sqlquerytimeout:NN
	
	The timeout can also be specified in OPTIONS.ini as follows:
	
	  sqlquerytimeout NN
	
	In both cases, NN is the default timeout in seconds.
	
	If any query takes longer than NN seconds to complete, and the query 
	does not have its own timeout specified via the rtvTimeout parameter 
	(described in the Release Note for 15413), it will be aborted.  The next 
	execution of the query will be delayed for NN seconds or 2 minutes, 
	whichever is less. Messages similar to the following will appear in the 
	console window of the RTView application:
	
	  ERROR: SQL query timeout after NN seconds; db=MyDatabase; query=<select * from MyTable>;
	  *** done query, rows = -1, time = NN.nnn (NN.nnn), MyDatabase: select * from MyTable
	  delayed by timeout:select * from MyTable

17559: Skip query with empty database name
	If the database name specified in an SQL data attachment is an empty 
	string the query will be ignored. In prior releases, the following error 
	message was generated repeatedly:
	
	  Unable to connect to database <>

Display Server

17395: Date chooser now initializes time correctly
	When the date chooser (obj_c1datechooser) is activated with no selected 
	date, the current day and time should be selected. In previous releases, the 
	thin client version of the date chooser set the date to the current date, but set 
	the time to midnight. This has been fixed.

17431: Deselect on multiselect table no longer mishandles substitutions
	In previous releases, if a table object has multiSelectFlag=1 and the user 
	deselects the only selected row, in some cases the thin client will 
	mishandle the table's drilldown substitutions which can result in invalid 
	data attachment strings that use those subs. This has been fixed. In 
	addition, to be consistent with the Viewer behavior, deselection of the only 
	selected row in the table will not trigger a drilldown.

17444: Extra SL logo in thin client panel layout after restart fixed
	In previous releases, an extra SL logo would sometimes appear in the thin 
	client demos using a panel layout, if the display server was restarted and 
	the thin client page was not reloaded. This is fixed.

17463: Thin client no longer shows 
 for newline in column header
	In release 6.0, the thin client displayed "
" in a table column header 
	where a newline should have appeared. This is fixed.

17468: New option -pngcompress
	A new option has been added to the display server to specify the desired 
	compression level for png images. By default, png images are 
	compressed as much as possible, which can be a cpu-intensive 
	operation. On systems where the display server cpu usage is a 
	bottleneck, it may be advantageous to lower the png compression level. 
	This can be accomplished by the following command line option:
	
	   -pngcompress:N
	
	The png compression level can also be specified in 
	DISPLAYSERVER.ini as follows:
	
	  pngcompress N
	
	In both cases N is a value from 1 to 9. The default value is 9 (maximum 
	compression), which produces the smallest possible png image (in 
	bytes) in order to minimize the image data transmitted to the client. 
	Values less than 9 will require less cpu time to produce the png image, 
	but the image will be larger. A value of 3 is a good compromise between 
	speed and size. Note that the image creation time and size for each 
	display refresh is shown in the display server console output if the 
	-verbose option is specified at startup.
	
	As in prior releases, the display server will choose either png format or 
	jpg format for each display, depending on which format produces the 
	smallest image size in bytes. The size of jpg images is affected by the 
	-imagequality option which is a value between 1 and 100, with 100 being 
	the highest quality but lowest compression. The default imagequality is 
	75.

17542: Preserve table row selection in thin client across updates
	The thin client will now maintain the selected rows in a table object when a 
	data refresh occurs that changes the number of rows in the table. In prior 
	releases, the row selection was cleared in that case.
	
	If the table object has the indexColumns property defined, then the index 
	column values will be used to maintain the row selection, as described in 
	the Release Note for 12468. If indexColumns is not defined, then the row 
	selection is maintained by row number. This is also described in the 
	Release Note for 12468.

Distribution

17404: encode_string utility corrected to work on Linux
	The encode_string utility now works on Linux platforms.
	

17490: New jarsigning certificate (April 2015)
	The certificate used in the signed .jars (RTV_HOME\lib\signed_jars.zip) has 
	been updated and will be valid until April 2015.

17539: TSN requirement removed
	Users are no longer required to provide the TSN (Tape Serial Number)
	when installing RTView.  As such, the registration app (run_gmsregister)
	no longer includes a field for the TSN.

Functions

17372: EnsureColumns no longer creates NULL strings if no value
	The Ensure Columns function will now always fill a new string column with 
	empty strings, rather than null.

17373: Fixed performance issues with Delta Rows function
	The performance of the Delta Rows function and the Delta Rows And 
	Rate function has been improved to better handle data in which the set of 
	index values is not fixed. Also, an additional argument has been added to 
	both function to avoid continual growth of the internal table that is used to 
	store previous column values for each index value. The description of the 
	new argument is as follows:
	
	Row Expiration Time - To compute the delta values, an internal table
		containing the previous value for each index value is maintained. If a
		row in that table is not updated in the time interval specified, it is
		removed. Specify the interval in seconds or specify a value followed 
	        by m, h, d, for minutes, hours, or days. The default value is blank 
	        which means rows are never removed.

17374: GmsTabularData string columns now initialized with empty strings
	Cells in string columns in data tables will now be initialized to an empty 
	string rather than a null, to avoid null pointer exceptions in code that does 
	not expect null values in string cells.

17387: GroupBy max function exception if null string in column fixed
	A bug has been fixed in the GroupByTimeAndUniqueValues function which 
	caused an exception to be thrown if the "max" operation was applied to a 
	string column that contained one or more nulls.

17388: Evaluate Expression by Row now creates column if no data
	In previous releases, the Evaluate Expression By Row function would not 
	add the result column to its output table if the input table contained columns 
	but no rows. Now the function will add the result column in that case.

17389: Filter by Patt no longer returns null if input table has 0 rows
	In previous releases, if the input table to a Filter by Pattern function 
	contained columns but no rows, the function returned null. This was 
	incorrect. Now the function will return a table with the same columns as the 
	input table, and no rows.

17394: GroupBy type count now creates column when used with other types
	The functions "Group By Unique Values" and "Group By Time And Unique 
	Values" will now automatically add a column named Count to the result 
	table when the function is configured with multiple Group Type operations, 
	the last being "count", and the number of data columns in the given Table 
	argument is less than the number of operations.

17401: New Function ReplaceValuesRows
	A function named Replace Value in Rows has been added. The function 
	description is as follows:
	
	The Replace Value function replaces text in the input column with text 
	from Replacement Values.
	
	Table - The input table.
	
	Column Name - The column containing the values to be replaced with 
	associated text from the Replacement Values string and be output in the 
	NewColumnName column.
	
	Result Column Name - The name of the column to be created.
	
	Replacement Values - String that contains pairs of values and 
	replacement values separated by :'s. If any of the values or replacement 
	values specified in Replacement Values contains a space or a colon, it 
	must be enclosed in single quotes. 
	
	Return Value If No Match - Determines what value is stored in the result
	column for a row with no match. If > 0 the original value from the input 
	column will be used, otherwise the Default Value is used.
	
	Default Value - The string that is stored in the result column if there is no 
	match and Return Value If Not Match is <= 0.

17402: MarkTimeGaps now converts long columns to double
	The Mark Time Gaps function will now work properly with a column whose 
	data type is long. In prior releases, it worked for double, float, and int 
	columns but not long type columns.

17410: Result column name can be specified for GroupBy function
	The "Group By..." functions have been enhanced to allow the name of the 
	result column(s) to be specified. This is accomplished by adding a suffix of 
	":ColumnName" to each operation in the function's Group Type argument. 
	For example, if the Group Type argument's value is "avg:Average Value", the 
	average of the first data column in the function's input table will be stored in 
	a column named "Average Value" in the result table.  If there is more than 
	one data column in the input table, then the average value of the Nth data 
	column will be stored in a column named Average ValueN, starting with N=1 
	for the 2nd data column.

17412: Combine now returns empty table if both inputs contain no rows
	The Combine function has been modified  to return a table rather than a null 
	in the case where both input tables have no rows, and to use all columns 
	from both input tables even if one or both tables have no rows.

17488: Fixed exception in GroupBy function if index col missing
	In prior releases, if the "Index Column Name(s)" argument to the GroupBy 
	function included a mix of valid and invalid column names, an error 
	message identifying the column name was printed to the console, but in 
	some cases that was followed by an exception and stack trace.  This has 
	been fixed so that only the "Invalid column name" message appears.

17489: Function attached to undefined function will now update
	The following problem is fixed:
	
	If a function F1 has an argument X that is attached to function F2 but F2 is 
	no longer defined then F1 will never update. This can happen if F2 was 
	deleted at some point after F1 was defined, or if F2 is defined in an 
	include file that is no longer included by the display that defines F1.
	
	Prior to release 5.9.1, and now again in this release, F1 is evaluated with 
	argument X set to null.
	
	A related problem was also fixed that prevented the Get Substitution 
	function from updating if its Substitution String argument specified a 
	substitution whose value was '' (an empty string).

17515: Drilldown branch now correct if functions stored in wrong order
	The following problem has been fixed:
	
	A drilldown branch function may not return the expected value if the function 
	relies on the results of other functions and the functions are stored in the 
	wrong order in the rtv file. For example, say that F2 is used as a dd branch 
	function and F2 has an input argument that is attached to the result of F1, 
	but in the rtv file F2 appears before F1. In some cases, when the drilldown 
	is performed the result of F2 used in the dd branch may appear as though 
	F1 was never updated.

17516: Last Column Count added to function statistics table
	The RTView function statistics table is available via JMX. That table now 
	includes a columns that shows the number of columns contained in the 
	most recent result for each function. The name of the new column is "Last 
	Column Count". It appears just after the existing column named "Last Row 
	Count", which shows the number of rows in the most recent result. Both 
	columns will show zero for a function that returns a scalar result.
	

General

17393: Support for date and time string in ISO 8601 format
	RTView will now accept a date and time string in ISO 8601 format. The 
	format accepted by RTView is:
	
	YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss.sZ
	
	where:
	
	YYYY = four-digit year
	     MM   = two-digit month (01=January, etc.)
	     DD   = two-digit day of month (01 through 31)
	     T = the separator indicating that time-of-day follows
	     hh   = two digits of hour (00 through 23) (am/pm NOT allowed)
	     mm   = two digits of minute (00 through 59)
	     ss   = two digits of second (00 through 59)
	     s    = one or more digits representing a decimal fraction of a second
	     Z  = time zone designator (Z or +hh:mm or -hh:mm)
	
	The fractional second and the timezone are optional. All other fields are 
	required or RTView will not parse the string.
	
	For example, this string is acceptable:  2011-10-22T12:34:56
	
	This string is unacceptable because it omits seconds: 2011-11-22T12:34
	
	The ISO 8601 format is automatically recognized by RTView. It is not 
	necessary to add a format on the Date Formats tab of the options 
	dialog. 
	
	The format is formally described here: http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#dateTime
	
	ISO 8601 is described here: http://www.w3.org/TR/NOTE-datetime.

17418: Unique class names for each RTView server process
	In prior releases, the RTView server applications (Historian, Data Server, 
	Display Server, and Agent) all used the same java main class: 
	GmsJRtvHistorian or, for daemon mode, GmsJRtvHistorianDaemon. 
	This could be confusing when viewing a list of running java processes 
	via jps, or jconsole, etc.
	
	 In this release, each application has a unique main class, namely 
	RTViewHistorian, RTViewDataServer,  RTViewDisplayServer, and 
	RTViewAgent.  All of those new classes belong to the 
	com.sl.gmsjrtvhistorian package.
	
	The class name will not change if the -daemon option is specified, but 
	otherwise the -daemon option has the same affect as in prior releases.
	
	If it is desired to use the old class names for any reason, specify the 
	-oldclassnames option when using the run_historian, run_dataserver, or 
	run_displayserver scripts.
	
	Custom scripts that use the GmsJRtvHistorian or 
	GmsJRtvHistorianDaemon classes to start an RTView server do not 
	need to be altered. But, if desired, they can be altered to use the new 
	specific class names instead. Note that the new classes use daemon 
	mode by default, so if they are used in a custom script the -gui option 
	must be specified in order to open the Historian or Data Server GUI. If the 
	RTViewDataServer class is used in a custom script  to launch the Data 
	Server, it is not necessary to specify the -dataout or -socket option.  If the 
	RTViewDisplayServer class is used in a custom script  to launch the 
	Display Server, it is not necessary to specify the -display or -image 
	option.  If the RTViewAgent class is used in a custom script  to launch the 
	Agent, it is not necessary to specify the -dataout or -agent option.

17578: Improved NaN handling in obj_table02 and sorting
	The behavior of obj_table02 regarding NaN ("not-a-number") values in a 
	column containing floating-point values has been enhanced as 
	described below. 
	
	(Note that a column containing floating point values is either a column 
	whose data type is defined as double or float, or whose data type is 
	string but all of the strings in the column are either numbers or NaN).
	
	1. A row with a value of NaN in the sort column will sort to the bottom in 
	an ascending (increasing value) sort and to the top in a descending sort. 
	In prior releases, the position of a row with a NaN value was not affected 
	by the sort and rows adjacent to the NaN row could be sorted incorrectly.
	
	2. A property named textForNaN has been added to obj_table02. This 
	property can specify an optional string to be used to display NaN values 
	in the table, for example "unknown".  By default, the property value will be 
	blank and NaN will be shown as a 'box' character, as in prior releases. 
	Note that the textForNaN value only affects the text displayed in the table 
	cell for a NaN value, it does not affect the column sort or the value 
	assigned to a drilldown column substitution for the column.
	

GmsTabularData

17420: GmsTabularData.newColumnSubset exception fixed
	The GmsTabularData.newColumnSubset() method no longer throws an 
	array bounds exception.

Licensing

17567: KEYS file now created by run_gmsregister on LINUX
	In 6.0.0 the run_gmsregister unix shell script did not pass additional 
	arguments to the registration app, so the -writekey argument was not 
	applied. This has been fixed.

Logging

17097: Support RTView logging with Log4J
	Optional support for logging with Log4j was added.

17380: Error if designated log directory doesn't exist
	In previous releases, if the log file specified by the -logfile command line 
	option could not be created a stack trace was printed. This has been fixed 
	so that an error message is printed instead.

Object Library

17263: New Dynamic Tree Control
	Overview
	=========
	
	A tree object is now supported for use on RTView displays. In the Builder, 
	the tree object appears on the Controls tab of the Object Palette.
	
	The tree is populated from the contents of the data table attached to its 
	valueTable property. Two table formats are supported for the valueTable, 
	called the Row-Leaf format and Row-Node format. These are described 
	later in this note. 
	
	As with other controls, the tree control has an actionCommand property 
	which can be configured to open a drilldown display, set substitutions, or 
	execute a command in response to a user click on a tree node. As with 
	other table-driven objects, the drillDownColumnSubs property can be 
	configured to set substitutions to column values from the row in the 
	valueTable that corresponds to the selected tree node.
	
	Each tree node can optionally display two configurable icons, one 
	indicating the node's type and the other indicating its status. The type 
	icon for each node can be determined either by the value of a column in 
	the valueTable or by the node's position in the tree (e.g. a folder icon for a 
	non-leaf node, a document icon for a leaf node). The status icon for a 
	node is determined by the value of a specified column in the valueTable. 
	optionally, the status of a child node can be propagated up to its 
	ancestors.
	
	
	Row-Leaf Format for valueTable
	==============================
	
	The format of the valueTable is indicated by selecting either Row-Leaf or 
	Row-Node as the value of the tree's valueTableFormat property. The 
	default format is Row-Leaf. The Row-Leaf format is intended for use 
	when the valueTable property is attached to an indexed table, for example 
	the current table of an indexed cache.
	
	In the Row-Leaf format, a leaf node is added to the tree for each row in 
	the valueTable. The path to that leaf node (that is, the ancestor nodes of 
	the leaf) is determined by the values in each of the table columns 
	specified by the nodeIndexColumnNames property. If the valueTable is 
	attached to the current table of an RTView cache, then the tree's 
	nodeIndexColumnNames property would typically be set to the same 
	columns that are specified as the cache's index columns.
	
	For example, say that a cache named Processes has two index columns 
	named Server and PID, and the current table in that cache has the 
	following rows:
	
	Server; PID
	-----------
	A; 101
	A; 105
	A; 123
	B; 100
	B; 105
	
	If a tree control's valueTable property is attached to the table shown 
	above and the tree has valueTableFormat=Row-Leaf and 
	nodeIndexColumnNames=Server;PID then the tree would contain 2 top 
	level nodes, labeled A and B. Node A would have three child nodes 
	labeled 101, 105, 123. Node B would have two child nodes, labeled 100 
	and 105.  The structure of the tree is shown below. Note that there is one 
	leaf in the tree for each row in the table.
	
	+ A
	... 101
	... 105
	... 123
	
	+ B
	... 100
	... 105
	
	Now say another index column named Site was added to the Processes 
	cache and the current table now has the following rows:
	
	Site; Server; PID
	-----------------
	NYC; A; 101
	NYC; A; 105
	NYC; A; 123
	NYC; B; 100
	NYC; B; 105
	SF;  A; 101
	SF;  A; 133
	SF;  B; 100
	TYO; A; 107
	TYO; C; 123
	TYO; C; 278
	
	If the tree's nodeIndexColumnNames=Site;Server;PID then the tree 
	would contain 3 top level nodes labeled NYC, SF, and TYO. The NYC 
	node would have two children labeled A and B, and the NYC/A node 
	would contain three child nodes labeled 101, 105, 123. And so on, 
	resulting in the following tree structure:
	
	+ NYC
	...+ A
	...... 101
	...... 105
	...... 123
	...+ B
	...... 100
	...... 105
	
	+ SF
	...+ A
	...... 101
	...... 133
	...+ B
	...... 100
	
	+ TYO
	...+ A
	...... 107
	...+ C
	...... 123
	...... 278
	
	As shown in the examples above, the label string for a node at depth N is 
	taken from the Nth column in nodeIndexColumnNames. So the labels for 
	the top level nodes come from the first column in 
	nodeIndexColumnNames (Site), the second level node labels come 
	from the second column in nodeIndexColumnNames (Server), etc.
	
	If a different set of columns from valueTable should be used to provide 
	the node labels, the names of those columns can be specified in the 
	nodeLabelColumnNames property.
	
	Row-Node Format for valueTable
	==============================
	
	In the Row-Node table format, there is one row in the table for each node 
	in the tree, not just the leaf nodes. One column in the table contains an 
	ID string for the corresponding tree node. That column is identified by the 
	nodeIdColumnName property. Another column in the table contains the 
	ID of the node's parent node. That column is identified by the 
	parentIdColumnName property. Taking the first example tree shown 
	above:
	
	+ A
	... 101
	... 105
	... 123
	
	+ B
	... 100
	... 105
	
	Using the Row-Node format, a table representation of this tree would be 
	as follows:
	
	Node; Parent
	------------
	A; 
	101; A
	105; A
	123; A
	B; 
	100; B
	105; B
	
	The  entries represent an empty string, which indicates that 
	nodes A and B have no parent, making them top-level nodes in the tree. 
	Note that a node's ID string must be unique among all nodes with the 
	same parent. Or, if the uniqueNodeIdFlag property is checked, then each 
	node's ID string must be unique in the entire tree.
	
	By default, a node's ID string is used as the node label in the tree. If a 
	different column in the table should provide the label, the name of that 
	column can be specified in the nodeLabelColumnName property.
	
	Note that in the Row-Node format each branch of the tree can have a 
	different depth, while in the Row-Leaf format all branches typically have 
	the same depth (the number of columns specified in the 
	nodeIndexColumnNames property).
	
	Icons
	=====
	As mentioned above, each node can display a type icon and status icon. 
	
	The type icon for each node is determined by the value of 
	nodeTypeProperties. Clicking on nodeTypeProperties in the property 
	sheet will open a dialog containing a table with two columns labeled 
	"Node Type or Depth" and "Image".  By default, the first row in the table 
	has "non-leaf node" in the first column and a folder icon in the second 
	column, while the second row has "leaf node" in the first column and a 
	document icon in the second column. This means that, by default, all 
	non-leaf nodes in the tree will use a folder image and all leaf nodes will 
	use a document image as their type icon. The user can click in the Image 
	column to select a different image to be used for the corresponding node 
	type, or clear the Image column so that no icon is used for a particular 
	node type.
	
	By default, the next five  rows contain the numbers 0 - 4 in the first 
	column. These rows allow a different icon to be assigned to nodes that 
	appear at those depths in the tree, with zero being the root node. (Note: 
	The root node is invisible if the rootNodeLabel property is blank). If an 
	icon is assigned for a specific depth that icon assignment will override 
	any assigned to leaf or non-leaf nodes. By default, the Image column for 
	all of those rows is blank meaning that no specific icon is used for nodes 
	at each depth, and the non-leaf or lead node icons are used.
	
	In the dialog, a "New" button appears below the last row. Clicking the 
	New button allows the user to add a custom row to the table. If a column 
	name has been assigned to the nodeTypeColumnName property, a 
	dropdown list of the values from that column in the valueTable will appear 
	in the "Node Depth or Type" column. The user can select a value and 
	then in the Image column select the icon to use for all nodes that have 
	that value in the valueTable row that corresponds to the node. If there is 
	no nodeTypeColumnName, the user can type a string in the "Node Depth 
	or Type" column and any node whose label matches that string will use 
	the icon selected in the Image column.
	
	So, the type icon for node N is determined as follows:
	1) If nodeTypeColumnName specifies a column name C, and the value 
	of C in the valueTable row that corresponds to N is V, and there is a row in 
	nodeTypeProperties that assigns alue V to image I1, then I1 will be used 
	as the type icon for N.
	2) Otherwise if the label of node N is XYZ and there is a row in 
	nodeTypeProperties that assigns value XYZ to image I2, then I2 will be 
	used.
	3) Otherwise if the depth of node N is D and there is a row in 
	nodeTypeProperties that assigns depth D to image I3, then I2 will be 
	used.
	4) Otherwise if N is a leaf and the leaf node image is I4 then I4 is used. If 
	I4 is blank then no type icon appears.
	5) Otherwise if the non-leaf node image is I5 then I5 is used. If I5 is blank 
	then no type icon appears.
	
	The status icon for each node is determined by the value of 
	nodeStatusProperties. That property is visible only if the 
	nodeStatusColumnName property is non-blank. Clicking on 
	nodeStatusProperties in the property sheet will open a dialog containing 
	a table with three columns labeled "Status Value", "Image", and "Priority". 
	By default there are no rows in the table so by default no status icons 
	appear in the tree. If the user clicks "New" and then clicks in the Status 
	Value column, a dropdown list appears containing all values in the node 
	status column of the valueTable. The user can select a value and then an 
	image that should appear as the status icon for each node which has 
	that value in the status column. It is assumed that the status column 
	values will be discrete values, so they are compared for equality.
	
	The value of the priority column is used to propagate a node's status 
	information up to its ancestors so that the status icon shown for an 
	ancestor node will correspond to the current highest status priority of all 
	of its descendants. A priority value of zero is not propagated, all positive 
	priority values are propagated.
	
	If a node has a type icon, it will appear to the left of the node's label. If a 
	node has a status icon, it will appear either to the left or right of the 
	node's label, according to the value of the tree's nodeStatusIconPos 
	property. (The default value of that property is "Left").  If a node has both a 
	type icon and a status icon, the type icon will always appear to the left of 
	the status icon.
	
	For convenience, the nodeTypeProperties and nodeStatusProperties can 
	both be attached to data. The nodeTypeProperties should be attached to 
	a 2 column table and nodeStatusProperties should be attached to a 3 
	column table. Typically, an attachment to a static XML file that contained 
	the appropriate tables would be used. The column names are not 
	important. For nodeTypeProperties the first column should contain string 
	values of "_node" (for non-leaf nodes), "_leaf" (for leaf nodes), or numeric 
	values for depth, or string values that match the node labels or the values 
	from the column in valueTable specified by nodeTypeColumnName. The 
	second column should be the path to the png, gif, or jpg image. The 
	default assignments are:
	
	_node, rtvTreeNode16.png
	_leaf, rtvTreeLeaf16.png
	
	For nodeStatusProperties the first column should contain string values 
	that match values from the column in valueTable specified by 
	nodeStatusColumnName. The second column should be the path to the 
	png, gif, or jpg image. The third column should contain the non-negative 
	integer priority value.
	
	
	Other Properties (with behavior unique to the tree control)
	================
	
	valueColumnName : This specifies the name of the column whose value 
	should be assigned to the variable named $value when a node in the 
	tree is clicked. If not specified, the label string of the selected node will 
	be assigned to $value. Note the $value is the only substitution that can 
	be used in the Display Name field of a drilldown command.
	
	mouseOverFlag: If checked, a tooltip will appear when the cursor is 
	positioned over a node. The tooltip will contain the node's path (its label 
	preceded by the labels of all of its ancestors), the node's status (if 
	nodeStatusColumnName is specified), and its value (if 
	valueColumnName is specified).
	
	execOnLeafOnlyFlag: If this property is checked, then the tree's 
	actionCommand will be executed only when a leaf node is clicked. A click 
	on a non-leaf node will just expand the node. Also, the mouseover tooltip 
	will only appear for leaf nodes.
	
	rootNodeLabel: The label for the tree's one and only root node. If this is 
	blank (the default), the root node is not visible.
	
	
	Limitations
	===========
	
	In the Viewer:
	
	- Mouseover text is displayed only if the tree has focus. 
	
	In the thin client:
	
	- The tree nodes' appearance, spacing, fonts, etc in the thin client may 
	vary slightly as compared to the Viewer, and also may vary slightly 
	between different browsers.
	
	- Cannot expand/collapse a tree node by double-clicking it, must click on 
	+/- icon.
	
	- In IE, nodes can be expanded/collapsed even if the tree's enabledFlag 
	property is unchecked. (But the tree's command cannot be invoked).
	
	- In Firefox, the horizontal scrollbar may appear and disappear after each 
	mouse click in the tree.
	
	- In iOS Safari (iPad), if a tree's mouseOverFlag property is checked, the 
	user must touch tree a node twice to invoke the tree's command. The first 
	touch only displays the node's mouseover text.
	
	- In iOS Safari, a touch on the +/- icon will expand/collapse the node as 
	expected but will also perform the tree's command, if the 
	execOnLeafOnlyFlag property is unchecked.
	
	- In iOS Safari,  scrollbars will not appear in a tree control. If the tree contains more nodes than are visible, use  a two finger drag gesture inside the tree area to scroll the tree.

17491: New option for GTE and LTE added to obj_ind_(limits/multi)
	The limits indicator (obj_ind_limits) and multi-state indicator 
	(obj_ind_multi) have been enhanced. 
	
	The limits indicator has been enhanced with a new property, 
	valueEqualTriggersThresholdFlag, in the Data category. When this flag is 
	off, the indicator changes color\image when the value is greater than the 
	high thresholds (valueHighAlarm or valueHighWarning) or less than the 
	low thresholds (valueLowAlarm or valueLowWarning). This was the 
	previous behavior. When this flag is on, the indicator changes 
	color\image when the value is greater or equal to the high thresholds or 
	less than or equal to the low thresholds. This property is turned on by 
	default in the Object Palette. This property will be off for displays created 
	in previous releases so that the behavior of existing displays will not 
	change.
	
	The multi-state indicator has been enhanced with 2 new options for the 
	alertStateNCondition property:
	
	Greater Than or Equal To - The value must be greater than or equal to 
	alertStateN for alertStateN properties to be applied.
	
	LessThan or Equal To - The value must be less than or equal to 
	alertStateN for alertStateN properties to be applied.

Composite Object

17438: Global var now applied as sub inside composite display
	The following problem is fixed in this release: If a display is used in
	obj_composite and the display contains data attachments that use a sub 
	$x, and $x is a global variable that is defined in a global definition file but $x 
	does not also appear as a sub in OPTIONS.ini, then $x is not substituted 
	when the display is loaded. This results in RTView adding an invalid 
	listener which does not get removed when the display is closed.

Control Objects

17517: Combo box list now always updates when listValues changed
	A problem in obj_c1combobox has been fixed which caused it to ignore 
	changes to the listValues property in some cases.

Heatmap

17371: Improved handling of null and empty string index column values
	In previous releases, the heatmap did not handle null or empty string values 
	in index column properly.
	
	If an index column contained a null value, the heatmap threw a 
	NullPointerException. This has been fixed.
	
	If an index column contained an empty string value, the heatmap displayed 
	the wrong value for that field in the mouse over string. This has been fixed.

17407: Heatmap now applies new indexColumnNames immediately
	In previous releases, changes to the nodeIndexColumnNames property of 
	the heatmap were not applied until the next data update. This has been 
	fixed.

17408: New property to specify if labels are shown for empty nodes
	The heatmap (obj_heatmap) has been enhanced with a new property, 
	nodeLabelVisIfEmtpyFlag. If selected  the background for empty node labels 
	will be drawn, otherwise they will not. By default, this property is selected, so 
	existing displays will not change.

17413: New highlight mode for double thick highlight lines
	The heatmap (obj_heatmap) has been enhanced to support a thicker 
	node group highlight. The nodeBgBorderHightlightFlag property has 
	been renamed to nodeBgBorderHighlightMode. This new property 
	supports 3 values:
	
	None - no highlight will be drawn (this is equivalent to the old 
	nodeBgBorderHighlightFlag property turned off)
	
	Thin - a single pixel highlight will be drawn (this is equivalent to the old 
	nodeBgBorderHighlightFlag property turned on) 
	
	Thick - a two pixel thick highlight will be drawn with the inner pixel a 
	shade lighter than the outer pixel (new option)
	
	Existing displays will automatically be converted to use the value of the 
	old nodeBgBorderHighlightFlag property in the 
	nodeBgBorderHighlightMode so that the look of the display will not be 
	changed. 
	
	Because of this, displays containing a heatmap that are saved using 
	version 6.0.1+ will use the default value for the 
	nodeBgBorderHighlightFlag property when loaded into an older version 
	of RTView.

17429: Rounding problems with borders and highlight fixed
	In previous releases, the borders between the items in the heatmap were
	not always consistent. The border highlight thickness was also 
	inconsistent. This has been fixed.

17430: Corrected $celldata and $colname drill down subs
	In previous releases, the $celldata and $colName drill down substitutions 
	in the heatmap were incorrect. The $celldata was always the label from the 
	top level grouping and the $colName was always the first column in the 
	valueTable. This has been fixed so that the $celldata is the value of the 
	selected node and the $colName is the name of the last index column.

Trend Charts

17573: Fixed infinite loop drawing inner y axis labels on trend
	A problem has been fixed which could cause the Builder/viewer to enter an 
	infinite loop while drawing the Y axis labels on obj_trendgraph02 configured 
	with yAxisPosition = Inner Right/Left/Mixed, or with yAxisMultiRangeMode = 
	Classic. The problem occurred when the computed vertical distance 
	between the labels was less than one pixel.

Viewer

17529: Slow data server connection no longer stalls client
	In prior releases, a data server connection that was live but slow to respond 
	could cause a Builder or Viewer client to stall when opening or closing 
	displays or executing commands. This has been fixed, by performing all 
	data server requests asynchronously.

Version 6.0.0 Release Notes

Alerts

16981: Alert State properties now correct for a new Multi-State Alert
	In previous releases, the visibility of the Alert State properties for a newly 
	instanced Multi-State Alert were incorrect. This has been fixed.

17025: Multiple index columns supported for tabular alerts
	The Alert Engine has been enhanced to support alerts with multiple 
	index columns. In previous releases, alerts only supported a single index 
	column. 
	
	Enter a semi-colon (;) delimited list of values in the indexColumnNames 
	property to specify multiple index columns for your alert (ex. 
	Region;Service;Timer). If specified, the valueTable must contain all of 
	those columns before the column that contains the data. The combined 
	value of all index columns must uniquely identify a row in the valueTable. 
	The Alert Index for that row is created by concatenating all of the index 
	column values into a single string delimited by a tilde (~).  To change the 
	delimiter from tilde (~) to another character, enter it in the Multiple Index 
	Delimiter field on the Alert Definitions tab of the Application Options 
	dialog or specify it using the -multipleindexdelim: command line 
	argument.
	
	All alerts also support a new indexType property which allows you to 
	specify map one or more of your index columns to an index type. This 
	index type can then be used in the threshold tables, alert text tables, alert 
	command text tables and rowEnabledTable to set a value on a group of 
	indexes instead of specifying each index individually. The syntax for the 
	indexType is indexType:indexCol;indexType1:indexCol,indexCol2 (ex. 
	PerRegion:Region;PerRegionalServer:Region,Service). There are 2 
	built-in index types: 
	
	- All - this means that the index value will be a combination of values for 
	each index column delimited by the Multiple Index Delimiter (~ by default).
	
	- Default - this value will be used for any indexes that are not specified in 
	the table
	
	The threshold tables, alert text tables alert command text tables and 
	rowEnabledTable all now support an additional 4 column table format 
	that takes the index type. See the documentation for information on how 
	to structure those tables.
	
	The AlertTable, Alert Variables Table, and per-tabular alert tables have 
	been enhanced with additional columns to support interacting with 
	multiple index alerts. A new table, Alert Index Types Table has also been 
	added.
	
	AlertTable - This table has one new column:
	-	Alert Index Values. For a single index alert, this column will contain 
	the same value as the Alert Index.  For a multiple index alert, this 
	contains the alert index values concatenated by ; (semi-colon). This 
	column was included to make it convenient to use this value to filter 
	against multiple columns in the Filter By Row function.  
	
	Alert Variables Table - This table has 4 new columns:
	-	Alert Type - The type of alert. Values are Limits, Discrete, Multi State and Event.
	-	Tabular Alert - This is true if the alert is tabular (ie. the 
	useTabularDataFlag property on the alert is on).
	-	Index Column Names - If the you have specified the 
	indexColumnNames property on the alert, this will contain that string. 
	Otherwise,  after the alert receives its first data update it will fill in the 
	value with the name of the index column in the valueTable. If the alert is 
	scalar or if it is an unindexed event alert, this will be empty.
	-	Index Types - A ; (semi-colon) delimited list of index types. If the alert 
	is scalar, this will be empty.  If a tabular alert does not have any index  
	types defined in the indexTypes property, this will be All.
	
	Per-tabular-alert Table - This table has new columns based on the 
	indexColumnNames and indexTypes specified on the alert:
	-	Index Columns - Each of the index columns for the alert is included in the table.
	-	Index Types - Each of the index types for the alert are included in the 
	table. The value for each row is the value for that index for that index type.
	
	Alert Index Types Table - This is a new table that contains information 
	about the available index types for your alert. It only contains rows for 
	alerts that have specified at least one index type in the indexTypes 
	property. It contains one row per index type. It contains 3 columns:
	
	-	Alert Name - The name of the alert.
	-	Index Type - The name of the index type.
	-	Column Names - A ; (semi-colon) delimited list of column names 
	that define the index type.
	
	Users who are using the Alert Persistence feature in 5.9.1 will must 
	modify their database table to include a String column named Alert Index 
	Values immediately following the Count column. The schemas in 
	RTV\dbconfig\alert_persist have been updated to include this column.
	
	The Self Service Alerts demo has been enhanced to support interacting 
	with multiple index alerts. See the release note for 17206 for more 
	information.
	
	

17026: Tabular thresholds supporte in ssa for one or more alert indexes
	The Self Service Alerts have been enhanced to support setting tabular 
	thresholds and enabled flags on your tabular alerts. Now, in addition to 
	setting thresholds and enabled values on a per-alert setting, you can 
	override the alert level settings for each index for tabular alerts.
	
	In order to better support discrete alerts, the Self Service Alerts 
	functionality has been modified so that discrete alerts that have an 
	enabled threshold with a string value are not hooked up to the Alert 
	Setting Table but the enabled state still is. This allows you to include 
	discrete alerts with String threshold values in the Self Service Alerts in 
	order to change the enabled state, but have the threshold values from the 
	file be used.
	
	The Self Service Alerts also have a new command line option: 
	
	-printssawarnings:true/false
	
	If set to false, the Self Service Alerts warnings about extra unmapped 
	thresholds will be suppressed.
	
	In order to support tabular alert thresholds, the database table schemas
	for Self Service Alerts have changed. Customers who are using Self 
	Service Alerts from a release previous to RTView 6.0 will need to do the 
	following:
	
	1. Modify the Alert Settings Table in your database to add 2 String 
	columns named INDEXTYPE and ALERTINDEX immediately following 
	ALERTNAME column. The value for all existing rows in your database 
	table for these 2 columns must be Default. Add a Boolean column 
	named USEINDEX after the ENABLED. The value for all existing rows in 
	your database table for this column must be true. Change the primary 
	key for this table from ALERTNAME to ALERTNAME and ALERTINDEX.
	
	2. Modify the Audit Table in your database to add a String columns named 
	INDEXTYPE immediately following ALERTNAME column. The value for all 
	existing rows in your database table for the INDEXTYPE and 
	ALERTINDEX columns must be Default. Add a Boolean column named 
	USEINDEX after the ENABLED. The value for all existing rows in your 
	database table for this column must be true.
	
	The Self Service Alerts demo has also been enhanced in several ways:
	1. General UI enhancements.
	2. More customization options.
	3. Support for tabular threshold and enabled values.
	4. Support for alerts with multiple indexes (task 17025).
	5. Addition of help pages.
	6. Login role checking for right to execute administrative functions.
	
	Customers who are using the Self Service Alerts Demo from a release 
	previous to RTView 6.0 either stand-alone or integrated into their 
	application will need to do the following when upgrading:
	1. Modify their database tables as listed above.
	2. If you are deploying in the Thin Client and you want to use the built-in 
	help files, you'll need to include the selfservicealerts\docs directory in the 
	.war file for your Thin Client application and you'll need to include 
	selfservicealerts\ssa_displays.html in your application directory. See the 
	Customization section in the Self Service Alerts Demo documentation for 
	more information on modifying and/or deploying the help files.
	3. If you want to customize the Options and/or Details displays on a 
	per-alert basis, you will need to add a Custom Alert Definition Property 
	named DrillDownSuffix.  See the Customization section in the Self 
	Service Alerts Demo documentation for more information on customizing 
	the Options and/or Details displays.
	4. The Alert Administration screen has been enhanced to show the 
	description of the selected alert. It is not required that you add 
	descriptions to your alerts when you upgrade, but if you do not, this field 
	will be blank. To add a description to an alert, fill in the description 
	property on the alert definition.
	5. The Alert Administration has been enhanced to check the role from the 
	RTView login. If the login is disabled, the admin role is used, otherwise 
	the logged in role is used. Administrative actions such as adding, 
	modifying and setting alert thresholds are disabled if you are not logged 
	in as admin. You may need to modify the roles for your users to include 
	admin if you need them to have access to these actions.
	
	

17124: Enhancements to removal of alerts from the Alert Table
	RTView Alerts have been enhanced to improve removal of alerts from the 
	AlertTable. There are 2 reasons that alerts are removed from the Alert 
	Table:
	
	1. Alert History Depth - This option limits the size of the AlertTable to the 
	number of rows specified. Previously, if the AlertTable went over this limit, 
	the oldest rows were removed from the alert table to get the table back 
	down to the size limit. When active (ie not-cleared) alerts were removed, 
	they were not cleared first, so the Alert State in the Alert Variables Table 
	and per-tabular-alert tables were not updated correctly. This has been 
	enhanced. Now, when the AlertTable goes over this limit, RTView first 
	removes cleared alerts from the table, starting with the alerts that have 
	the oldest Cleared Time. If all of the cleared alerts have been removed 
	and more alerts still need to be removed to get under the size limit, 
	RTView will remove active alerts starting with the alerts that have the 
	oldest Time value. In this case, the alerts are cleared before being 
	removed and the cleared reason is set to ALERT HISTORY DEPTH 
	EXCEEDED.
	
	2. Time (in seconds) to Keep Cleared Alerts - This used to be called 
	Rate to Remove Cleared Alerts. Previously, RTView would use this value 
	to remove all cleared alerts when the specified amount of time had 
	elapsed. For example, if this was set to an hour, once an hour RTView 
	would remove all cleared alerts from the system. This has been 
	enhanced. Now, RTView checks for cleared alerts to remove on each 
	update pass. If more than the specified amount of time has elapsed 
	since the time the alert was cleared, the alert will be removed. If the value 
	is 0, cleared alerts will not be removed until the Alert History Depth has 
	been exceeded.
	
	Both the Alert History Depth and the Time to Keep Cleared Alerts are 
	configurable in the Alerts tab in the Application Options dialog.

17272: Performance optimizations for Alert updating
	The RTView Alert update process has been made made more efficient in 
	the case where there are tabular alerts with large numbers of indexes.

17281: Alert action audit support
	RTView Alerts have been enhanced to support Alert Action Auditing. If 
	configured, RTView will write a record to a database every time an alert data 
	source command is executed. The record will contain the time the action 
	was executed, the user that executed the action, the action type, the action, 
	the target and the value.
	
	See the documentation for more information on configuring Alert Action 
	Auditing.
	
	The Self Service Alerts demo has been enhanced to support alert action 
	auditing and has a new display for viewing the audit table.

Builder

16980: Prop sheet no longer shows Object category for alerts or caches
	In previous releases, the Alerts and Caches showed objName, objX, objY, 
	objHeight and objWidth in the property sheet. These properties do not apply 
	to those objects and have been removed from the property sheet for them.

Builder - Options Dialogs

16984: Empty and default ini files no longer saved
	RTView has been enhanced so that data source options files are only 
	saved when the options for that data source need to be saved. In 
	previous releases, when you saved your options, all loaded data sources 
	saved their options files regardless of whether anything was in them or if 
	they contained only the default values. Now, they are only saved if they 
	contain non-default values.
	
	A new method has been added to the Custom Data Source API to 
	support this feature for custom data sources:
	
	public boolean setDefaultFieldValue(String fieldName, String defaultFieldValue)
	
	This method sets the default value for the data source option which is 
	used to determine whether or not it needs to be saved. By default, the 
	default value is set to an empty string. Use this method to set it to 
	another value.

Builder - Property Dialogs

17345: Builder exception when using Bar Properties dialog fixed
	In previous releases, when the Bar Properties dialog was used to configure 
	an obj_history instance, the Builder would throw a NullPointerException if 
	the bottom row in the table of properties was removed and then the user 
	clicked the "New" button to add a new row. This is fixed.

Data Historian

17323: Historian no longer exits if -persistCaches used w/o HISTORY.ini
	In the prior release, if the historian was run with the -persistCaches:true 
	option and no HISTORY.ini file was present, the historian exited 
	immediately. This has been fixed.
	
	Note: The -persistCaches option was added in release 5.9.1.

Data Sources

CMDB Data Source

17310: cmdb db table processing moved to separate thread
	The CMDB data source has been enhanced to move the database table 
	processing into a separate thread. This means that the main application 
	thread is no longer blocked while the database tables are processed, 
	speeding up startup.

Cache Data Source

17289: New "update always" option for history_combo attachments
	The cache data source has been enhanced to support a new update 
	mode for attachments to a cache history_combo table.
	
	(The history_combo table contains a combination of older condensed 
	data and newer raw data, and is maintained by the cache data source 
	only when the condenseRowsFlag property is checked on a cache 
	definition object. For details on the cache row condenser feature, please 
	see the release note for 16518).
	
	The Attach to Cache Data dialog has been changed as follows: When the 
	history_combo is selected in the Table field of the dialog, the checkbox 
	labeled "Update Once" will be replaced by an "Update" label and three 
	radio buttons labeled "Once", "On Condense", and "Always". By default, 
	the "On Condense" button will be selected. 
	
	The "On Condense" update mode was also the default in previous 
	releases. In this mode, an attachment to the history_combo table will be 
	updated at the interval specified by the cache's condenseRowsInterval 
	property. For example, if new data is applied to the cache every two 
	seconds but the cache's condenseRowsInterval is 60 seconds, then an 
	attachment to the cache's history_combo table will be updated every 60 
	seconds. This behavior is useful when the traceValueTable of a 
	trendgraph is attached to the history_combo table.
	
	The update mode of "Always" is new in this relase. When the Always 
	mode is selected, an attachment to the history_combo table will be 
	updated whenever new raw data is applied to the cache. So in the 
	previous example, if the Always mode is selected, the attachment would 
	be updated every 2 seconds rather than every 60 seconds. This behavior 
	is useful when the valueTable property of a table object is attached to 
	history_combo, for example.
	
	The "Once" mode was also available in previous releases. When this 
	mode is selected, the attachment is updated once when the display is 
	opened.
	
	Note that the 3 radio buttons described above will appear only when the 
	history_combo table is selected in the dialog. For all other tables, only 
	the "Update Once" checkbox will appear, as in all prior releases.

17319: Expired column now excluded from cache history table
	If the rowExpirationMode property of a cache is set to Mark or to 
	Mark+Delete, then an Expired column is added to the cache's current table 
	and to its history table. However, the column is only meaningful in the 
	current table so it should not be added to the cache's history table. In prior 
	releases the Expired column was added to the history table and its value 
	was always false. As of this release, the Expired column is not added to the 
	cache's history table.

Display Server

17221: Fixed error when column name contains double quote
	In previous releases, if a column name in a table contained a double-quote 
	character, the thin client threw a javascript error and the table was displayed 
	as blank. This is fixed.

17354: scrollToSelectionFlag behavior fix in thin client
	The following problem has been fixed:  If the scrollToSelectionFlag property 
	is checked on an obj_table02 instance,  the selected table row will scroll out 
	of view in the thin client when the table data is updated or the user selects a 
	sort column.
	

Functions

17271: Performance optimization for Delta rows function
	The DeltaRows function has been made more efficient at processing tables 
	with large numbers of columns.

17273: New tabular function Concatenate Columns
	The RTView Builder has been enhanced with a new function, Concatenate 
	Columns. This function creates a string concatenation of the values in the 
	given table columns separated by the given character(s) and returns the 
	results in a new table column.
	
	The column names are specified as a semicolon-separated string. The 
	separator can be a single character such as "." or "/" but it can also be a 
	string such as " and ".

Licensing

17088: New "-writekey:" option added to run_gmsregister -nogui
	A new command line option has been added to run_gmsregister. 
	Previously, the -nogui option allowed you to get your pin without opening the 
	registration dialog, but there was no way to enter your key. The new 
	-writekey: command line option allows you to enter a key on the command 
	line and have it written to your keys file. This option is only valid when used 
	in conjunction with the -nogui option. For example:
	
	run_gmsregister -nogui -writekey:01234567890123456789012345678901

Object Library

Control Objects

17241: Clipped strings in text controls now show beginning of string
	The following text controls have been enhanced so that when their value is 
	longer than the control can display, the beginning of the string is displayed 
	instead of the end:
	
	Text Entry Fields (obj_c1textedit, obj_c1textedit_i, obj_c1textedit_d)
	Text Area Object (obj_c1textarea)
	Password Field (obj_c1passfield)
	
	This change only effects the Display Builder, Display Viewer and Display 
	Viewer Applet. The controls in the thin client already showed the beginning 
	of the strings.

17244: listValues in combo and list now supports single cell with list
	The listValues property on the combo box (obj_c1combobox) and list 
	(obj_c1tlb) controls has been enhanced. It now supports an attachment to a 
	single cell table containing a ; delimited list of values.

17282: New flag for validating blank value in numeric text fields
	The numeric text entry controls, obj_c1textedit_i and obj_c1textedit_d, have 
	been enhanced to support a new validation option for blank entries. To 
	enable this feature, select the validateBlankValuesFlag. If selected and the 
	user enters a blank string, the actionCommand will not execute and the 
	invalidInputVarToSet and invalidInputMsgVarToSet will be updated to 
	indicate an invalid entry.

Fx Bar Chart

17303: fxreplace handling of barProperties & wedgeProperties fixed
	In previous releases, when replacing an obj_fxbar object with obj_bargraph, 
	the fxreplace feature mishandled the barProperties property so all the bars 
	in the replacement bargraph were white. The same problem affected 
	wedgeProperties when replacing obj_fxpie with obj_pie.   Both problems 
	are fixed.

Fx Trend Chart

17086: Trace line corrected when alarm limits & alarm status table used
	The trace lines on obj_trendgraph02 were misdrawn if the object was 
	configured with alarm limits and the alarm status table both. This is fixed.

Tables

17224: obj_table02 null pointer exception fixed
	In previous releases, obj_table02 sometimes threw a null pointer when 
	processing mouse events when the display was being closed. This has 
	been fixed.

17267: String column with all numbers now sorts numerically
	In releases 5.8 through 5.9.1, a table column of type string that contains only 
	numerical strings was sorted in alphabetic order rather than numerical 
	order. This is fixed.

Trend Charts

17268: historyOnlyFlag added to trendgraph
	A property named historyOnlyFlag has been added to obj_trendgraph02 and 
	obj_fxtrend. When checked, the graph will plot only data that is applied to the 
	traceNValueTable properties and will ignore the timeShift property and any 
	data that is applied to the traceNValue properties. This is useful in the 
	cases where the same graph instance is to be used to view historical data 
	or historical data + current data by setting subs on the display. By default the 
	property is unchecked.

Platform Support

17290: iPad support
	The RTView thin client is now supported on iPad, in the Safari browser. 
	
	In the iPad settings for Safari, "JavaScript" must be ON and "Block 
	Pop-ups" should be OFF. As of this writing, the thin client has been tested 
	only on iOS 4.3.5 in Safari.
	
	Because the iPad uses a touch interface there are differences in the thin 
	client appearance and behavior in iOS Safari as compared to the 
	conventional "desktop browsers" that use a cursor (mouse) interface, 
	such as Firefox and Internet Explorer. These are described below.
	
	1) Popup browser windows:
	
	  An RTView object's drilldown target can be configured to open a display 
	in a new window. In a desktop browser, when the RTView object is 
	clicked the drilldown display is opened in a popup browser window. But 
	in iOS Safari 4.3.5, only one page is visible at a time, so when the 
	RTView object is touched a new page containing the drilldown display 
	will open and fill the screen. The Safari navigation bar can be used to 
	toggle between the currently open pages or close them. 
	
	2) Mouseover text:
	
	 If mouseover text and drilldown are both enabled on an RTView object 
	(e.g. a bargraph), then in iOS Safari the first touch on an element (e.g. a 
	bar) in the object will display the mouseover text for that element and the 
	second touch on the same element will perform the drilldown.
	
	3) Resize Mode and Layout: 
	
	 By default, the display server runs with resizeMode set to "crop". In crop 
	mode, if a display is larger than the panel that contains it only a portion of 
	the display will be visible. In a desktop browser, scrollbars will appear to 
	allow the user to scroll to view the entire display. In iOS Safari, scrollbars 
	will not appear but the display can be scrolled by dragging with two 
	fingers inside the display. (Dragging with one finger will scroll the entire 
	page, not the display).
	
	If the display server is run with resizeMode set to scale or layout, the 
	display will be resized to fit into the panel that contains it. If a desktop 
	browser is resized after a display is opened, the display will be resized 
	accordingly. On the iPad, the Safari browser can only be resized by 
	reorienting the iPad itself, between portrait mode and landscape mode.
	
	The panel layout feature is supported in the thin client. However, unlike a 
	desktop browser which will resize to match the layout size, the size of 
	Safari is fixed. So if the display server is run with resizeMode set to crop 
	or scale mode, there may be unused space at the edges of the 
	display(s) or, in crop mode, the panels and displays may be cropped.
	
	This means that layout mode should be used for best results on the 
	iPad. For layout mode to be most effective, displays should to make use 
	of the anchor and dock object properties. Please see the RTView 
	documentation for more information.
	
	4) Scrolling:
	
	The thin client implements scrollbars for table objects and graph objects.
	 The scrollbars are activated by dragging with one finger.
	
	If an RTView display is viewed in crop mode and is too large to be 
	displayed entirely in Safari, scrollbars will not appear (as they would in a 
	desktop browser) but the display can be scrolled by dragging with two 
	fingers inside the display. 
	
	Scrollbars will never appear in a text area control. If the text area contains 
	more text than is visible, use the two finger drag in the text area to scroll 
	the text.
	
	Regardless of the size of a listbox control, it will only display a single item 
	(typically, the selected item). When the listbox is touched, the list of items 
	will appear in a popup list. In other words, on iOS Safari the listbox 
	control and the combobox control behave identically.
	
	On the default thin client page (opened as http://hostname/rtvdisplay), the 
	panels cannot be resized by dragging the border between the left and 
	right frame, as they can in a desktop browser. The list of displays in the 
	left hand panel can be scrolled by dragging with two fingers inside the 
	panel.
	
	5) Context menu: 
	
	 The thin client context menu is opened by a right mouse button click in a 
	desktop browser. It is opened in iOS Safari by touching any location on a 
	display and holding that touch for 2 seconds. The menu will appear in 
	the top left corner of the display, regardless of where the display is 
	touched. The items 'Export Table to Excel', 'Drill Down', and 'Execute 
	Command' are not included on the context menu in Safari. All other items 
	are available. The 'Export Table to HTML' item is enabled if a table object 
	is touched (unless the table object's drillDownTarget is configured to 
	open another display). After and Export to PDF/HTML has been 
	performed, the exported content will open on another page in Safari. 
	From there, the content can either be opened by another app (e.g. the 
	iBooks app will open PDF) and emailed, or it can be copied & pasted into 
	an email.
	
	Known Issues/Limitations:
	
	The iPad does not support Adobe Flash, so the Fx graph objects 
	(obj_fxtrend, obj_fxpie, obj_fxbar) are unavailable. The thin client will 
	automatically replace the Fx graph objects with the equivalent non-Fx 
	object (obj_trendgraph02, obj_pie, obj_bargraph). Note that the 
	replacement objects behave the same as the Fx objects in most cases 
	but not in all. In particular, obj_trendgraph02 does not support the sliding 
	cursor object nor the legendPosition property. Custom Fx objects are not 
	supported on the iPad.
	
	The thin client implements scrollbars for table objects and graph objects. 
	However, unlike the scrollbars used on desktop browsers, the scrollbars 
	used on the iPad do not have arrow buttons at each end. This can make 
	it difficult to scroll precisely (e.g. row by row) on objects with a large 
	scrolling range.
	
	At full size, users may find it difficult to touch the intended display object 
	without accidentally touching nearby objects and performing an 
	unwanted drilldown, sort, scroll, etc. This is particularly true of table 
	objects that support drilldown and also scrolling, and also in panel 
	layouts that the tree navigation control. In those cases, the user may want 
	to zoom the iPad screen before interacting with the thin client.
	
	If the iPad sleeps or auto-locks while a thin client display is open in 
	Safari, or if the Safari app is minimized by clicking on the iPad's home 
	button, the display will not update until the iPad is woken and Safari is 
	reopened. In some cases it may be necessary to refresh the page from 
	Safari's navigation bar.

Version 5.9.2 Release Notes

Alerts

17120: Changes in self service alerts now applied immediately
	In previous releases, changes to the Alert Settings Table in the Self Service 
	Alerts weren't applied until the following update. This has been fixed.

17176: Fixed crash when redoing alert definition copy
	In previous release, the Display Builder would throw an exception after an 
	alert was copied, then the copy was undone and redone. This has been 
	fixed.

17225: Alerts null pointer exception fixed
	In previous releases, the alert objects sometimes threw a null pointer 
	exception during command processing. This has been fixed.

17242: Clear reason now resets after cleared by command
	In the previous release, the Cleared Reason was incorrect for an alert that 
	had been cleared via command, then re-executed and cleared via data 
	update. This has been fixed.

17295: Cache listeners no longer wait for first alert
	In previous releases, caches attached to the Alert Data Source AlertTable 
	didn't receive an initial update until an alert had been generated. This has 
	been fixed.

Builder

17118: Builder no longer creates extra dateformat lines in OPTIONS.ini
	Date formats containing single quotes were not read in correctly from 
	OPTIONS.ini. This has been fixed.

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

17262: Improve performance of cache row condenser.
	The cpu time required to support the cache row condenser feature has been reduced.

17288: Cache attachment with "update once" no longer updates twice
	The following bug in the cache data source has been fixed: A bug in the 
	cache data source can cause data to be applied twice to a data attachment 
	that has the "Update Once" option checked, once when the attachment is 
	initialized (as expected) and then again the next time the cache table is 
	updated (not expected).  The problem does not occur on the first "update 
	once" attachment that is made to a specific cache table, but does occur on 
	the 2nd and all subsequent "update once" attachments to the same cache 
	table.

JMS Admin Data Source (for TIBCO EMS only)

17203: Patterns in data attachments now recognized for first server
	In previous releases, the EMS Administration data source had a bug where 
	data attachments to * Servers for the the Topics and Queues tables that 
	used a pattern wouldn't apply the pattern to the first server in the table. This 
	has been fixed.

17204: Run EMS queries in a separate thread
	The TIBCO EMS Administration data source has been enhanced to run EMS 
	Server queries in a separate thread. This prevents slow queries from 
	blocking the main application thread and improves application 
	responsiveness.

17210: Hawk unavailable error now only printed once
	In previous releases, when the TIBCO EMS Administration data source 
	was setup to discover servers using Hawk and the TIBCO Hawk data 
	source was not available, the following error was printed to the console 
	on each update pass:
	
	ERROR: cannot enable use of hawk!
	
	This error has been replaced with the following error which is only 
	printed to the console once at startup:
	
	ERROR: The TIBCO EMS Administration data source cannot Discover 
	Servers Using Hawk, because the TIBCO Hawk data source is not
	available.

Drill Down

17184: Drill down display doesn't scale to show all objects
	In previous releases, the composite object would sometimes size 
	incorrectly after the composite's display was changed via drill down in a 
	window that had been resized. This has been fixed.

Functions

17206: Avoid premature initial evaluation of function
	A problem has been fixed which could cause the initial evaluation of a 
	function to occur prematurely. The problem occurred when a function F2 
	depended on the result of F1, but F2 appeared in the rtv file before F1. Prior 
	to the fix, the initial evaluation of F2 would occur before F1 was evaluated, 
	generating a possibly bogus result.

17259: CreateSelectorList no longer throws npe
	In previous releases the CreateSelectorList function would throw a 
	NullPointerException when a list value was null. This has been fixed.

17266: Convert columns now works if no rows in table
	In the Display Builder, the Convert Columns function would return the 
	original table if there were no rows of data. It now returns an empty table but 
	with the column types changed as specified.

17296: outer join function now returns null if either table is null
	The Join Outer function has been reverted to its pre-17075 behavior so that 
	it returns null if either input table is null, to avoid regression bugs in cache 
	configurations.

GmsTabularData

17222: Exception when edit save is due to "do you want to save" dialog
	In previous releases, the following steps caused a class cast exception:
	
	1. Edit a table object (obj_table02) that is configured with the 
	editDataLocalVarName in the viewer.
	2. Exit the viewer without saving your edits.
	3. When prompted to save your edits, select yes.
	
	This has been fixed.

Object Library

Tables

17219: obj_table02 null pointer exception fixed
	In previous releases, the table object (obj_table02) occasionally threw a 
	NullPointerException if the valueTable was updated while the table was 
	being processed. This has been fixed.

17243: columnProperties fails if a column starts with name of another
	In previous releases, the columnProperties was not applied correctly to a 
	column where the column named started with the name of another 
	column's (ex. Index and IndexTypes). This has been fixed.

17255: Apply table filterProperties if sortColumnName is bogus
	The following problem has been fixed: The filterProperties of an obj_table02 
	is ignored if the sortColumnname property is set to a non-blank string that 
	does not match any of the column names.

Reporting

17213: Excel/HTML report no longer truncates data with '<' character
	In prior releases, the 'Export Table to Html/Excel' feature in the thin client 
	would fail if a < or a > character appeared in the table. This is fixed

Version 5.9.1 Release Notes

Alerts

12513: Alerts may be generated for data that is not yet available
	When data for a numeric data attachment is not available, it gets initialized 
	to a value of 0. If an alert definition was setup such that an alert will get 
	generated if the input value is 0, this would cause an alert to be generated. 
	This has been fixed. 
	
	There is still a related problem for alerts where the value property is directly 
	or indirectly attached to a function that outputs a non-table result (Text or 
	Number). See the PAL for 17154 for more information and a workaround for 
	that problem.

17027: Support added for custom alert definition properties
	RTView alerts have been enhanced to support Custom Alert Definition 
	Properties. This feature allow you to define one or more custom 
	properties on your alert definitions which will show up in the Alert Table 
	when an alert is executed. 
	
	These properties are useful when you want to store additional 
	information about an alert definition and have it be accessible in the Alert 
	Table. For example, you might want to organize your alerts by Category. In 
	that case, you could add a Custom Alert Definition Field named Category. 
	When you define your alerts, you specify a value in the Category property 
	for each. When the alerts are executed, there will be a Category field in 
	the Alert Table that you can use for sorting and/or filtering. 
	
	These properties can also be mapped to a column in the valueTable 
	input for your alert if the useTabularDataFlag is on. 
	
	To add a Custom Alert Definition Property, go to 
	Tools->Options->Application Options->Alerts->Custom Alert Fields and 
	click on Add Custom Alert Definition Property. This will open a dialog 
	where you will fill in the following:
	
	Name - The name of the Custom Alert Definition Property. This will be 
	used as the property name in the alert definition and the column name in 
	the Alert Table. This field is required and the name must be unique within 
	both the Custom Alert Event Attributes and the Custom Alert Definition 
	Properties.
	
	Data Type - Select the type of data for this Custom Alert Definition 
	Property. The choices are String, Double, Integer or Boolean. 
	
	Default Value - This field is optional. Specify a default value for this 
	Custom Alert Definition Property. If specified, this value will be used for 
	new alert definitions. Note that this value must be of the data type 
	specified in the Data Type field.
	
	Click OK to add the Custom Alert Definition Property. 
	
	To edit a Custom Alert Definition Property, double-click on it in the list or 
	select it and click Add Custom Alert Definition Property.
	
	To delete a Custom Alert Definition Property, select it from the list and 
	click Remove Custom Alert Definition Property.
	
	All additions, modification and deletions of Custom Alert Definition 
	Properties are applied when you click OK, Apply or Save in the 
	Application Options dialog. Note that changes to the Custom Alert 
	Definition Properties will cause all of your alert definition files to be 
	reloaded.
	
	Once you have applied your Custom Alert Definition Property, you will see 
	a property for each in the Custom Properties section of the property sheet 
	for all of your alert definitions. These properties can be static or attached 
	to data. You will also see a column in the Alert Table for each Custom 
	Alert Definition Property. The value in that column will be the value 
	specified for the property in the corresponding alert definition.
	
	If you want to use the value from a column in your valueTable, use the 
	customPropertyMap property to specify which column from the valueTable 
	contains the value to use for the custom property using the following 
	syntax:
	
	customPropName:valueTableColumnName;customPropName2:valueTableColumnName2
	
	For example, if you have a custom property named My Custom Property 
	and you want to use the value from the My Data Column column in your 
	value table, you would specify the following:
	
	My Custom Property:My Data Column
	
	The alert will also create a substitution for each custom property by 
	collapsing the name into $alertXX where XX is the name of your custom 
	field in camel case with all spaces removed. For example, if your custom 
	property name is "my property", the corresponding substitution will be 
	$alertMyProperty. You can use this substitution to show the value of your 
	custom property in the alertCommand, reNotificationCommand, 
	clearedCommand or in the alert text. Note that the renotification 
	commands will update with the new value of the property if it changes, 
	but the alert text in the table will not update after the alert is generated.
	
	The following describes what happens when the custom properties are 
	misconfigured:
	-- The data attachment to a custom property returns the wrong data type 
	(ex. the custom property is an int and the data attachment returns a 
	string). In this case, you will see an error in the console (where XX is the 
	name of the custom property):
	
	ERROR: setGmsVarFromString, value passed in for XX must be an integer.
	
	The property won't be updated. If no updates have been successful, the 
	value for the column will be the Default Value specified in Application 
	Options.
	
	-- The column that you specified in customPropertyMap doesn't exist in 
	valueTable. In this case, you will see an error in the console (where XX is 
	the name of the missing column):
	
	ERROR: valueTable on alert <alertName> doesn't contain this column 
	specified in customPropertyMap <XX>.
	
	In this case, the value specified in the custom property on the alert will be 
	used.
	
	-- The type of the column that you specified in customPropertyMap 
	doesn't match the type for the custom property. For example, your custom 
	property is an int and the column you specified in the valueTable is a 
	String. In this case, we will try to convert the String to an int. If the String 
	cannot be converted to a number, the value will be 0.

17034: Custom alert event attributes supported
	RTView alerts have been enhanced to support Custom Alert Event 
	Attribute. This feature allow you to define one or more settable alert event 
	attributes which show up as columns in the Alert Table and can be set via 
	a command. 
	
	This feature is useful when you want to add table information on a 
	per-alert instance basis. For example, you might want to add a Status 
	attribute to the alert, so that the user can indicate whether the problem is 
	under investigation, being tested, or resolved.
	
	To add a Custom Alert Event Attribute, go to Tools->Options->Application 
	Options->Alerts->Custom Alert Fields and click on Add Custom Alert 
	Event Attribute. This will open a dialog where you will fill in the following:
	
	Name - The name of the Custom Alert Event Attribute. This will be used 
	as the column name for this attribute in the Alert Table and will also be 
	the name you will use to reference this attribute in the Set Custom Alert 
	Event Attribute command. This field is required and the name must be 
	unique within both the Custom Alert Event Attributes and the Custom 
	Alert Definition Properties.
	
	Data Type - Select the type of data for this Custom Alert Event Attribute. 
	The choices are String, Double, Integer or Boolean. 
	
	Default Value - This field is optional. Specify a default value for this 
	Custom Alert Event Attribute. If specified, this value will be used for new 
	alerts. Note that this value must be of the data type specified in the Data 
	Type field.
	
	Click OK to add the Custom Alert Event Attribute. 
	
	To edit a Custom Alert Event Attribute, double-click on it in the list or 
	select it and click Add Custom Alert Event Attribute.
	
	To delete a Custom Alert Event Attribute, select it from the list and click 
	Remove Custom Alert Event Attribute.
	
	All additions, modification and deletions of Custom Alert Event Attributes 
	are applied when you click OK, Apply or Save in the Application Options 
	dialog. Note that changes to the Custom Alert Event Attributes will cause 
	all of your alert definition files to be reloaded.
	
	Once you have applied your Custom Alert Event Attributes, you will see a 
	column for each in the Alert Table. To set the value of the Custom Alert 
	Event Attribute for an alert, use the new Alert Data Source command, Set 
	Custom Alert Event Attribute. This command takes 3 arguments:
	
	ID - The id of the alert for which you want to set the attribute value.
	
	Attribute Name - The name of the Custom Alert Event Attribute you want to set.
	
	Attribute Value - The value you want to set on the Custom Alert Event 
	Attribute. Note that this value must be of the type specified for the Data 
	Type on the Custom Alert Event Attribute.

17035: Support alert failover by reading initial values from Historian
	RTView alerts have been enhanced to support the persistence of alerts 
	during fail over of an alert engine. With this feature enabled, alerts will be 
	persisted as follows:
	
	- If you are running the alerts in a Data Server or in a locally client 
	application (Display Builder, Display Server, Display Viewer),  all active 
	and cleared alerts that had not previously been removed from the system 
	will be restored when the application is restarted and all new alerts will 
	be generated using ids that are unique from the previous session.
	
	- If you are running the alerts in a Data Server that is configured for 
	High Availability, you should run the backup server in warm standby mode. 
	All active and cleared alerts that had not previously been removed from 
	the system will be restored to the standby server when it becomes the 
	active server. It is not recommended that you run the standby server in 
	hot standby mode when using alert persistence as in that case both 
	Data Servers will persist the same alerts to the database.
	
	The alert persistence feature stores the all fields and current state of all 
	active alerts and all cleared alerts that have not been removed from the 
	system in a database using the Historian. Alerts are sent from the 
	application running the alert engine to the Historian via the RTVAgent. 
	More than one alert engine can persist its alerts to the same database 
	table via the same Historian as long as each alert engine specifies a 
	unique Agent Name (see the Alert Engine configuration below). The 
	Historian must be configured to run the RTVAgent data source locally 
	(not via Data Server) to receive alert table updates. Other data sources in 
	the same Historian can still use the Data Server.
	
	When the alert engine starts up, it will query the database table 
	containing the persisted alerts and will recreate them at startup in the 
	new alert engine. The persisted alerts will show up in the alert engine 
	after the Initial Delay time specified in the Alert Definitions tab of the 
	Application Options has expired.  All alerts that are configured to renotify 
	on a timer will immediately renotify, then continue to renotify on the 
	specified renotification time.
	
	To clear the alerts for an alert engine from the database on startup, 
	specify the following command line option:
		-purgepersistedalerts
	
	This will clear all alerts for the alert engine from the database table on 
	startup and no persisted alerts will be loaded. If you are persisting alerts 
	for more than one alert engine in the same database table, alerts for 
	other alert engines will not be removed.
	
	For optimization, by default the alert engine does not store updates to the 
	Last Update Time column of the Alert Table unless there has also been 
	another change for that alert. If you want to restore the alerts with 
	accurate values in the Last Update Time column, enable saving out 
	updates for that column with the following command line option:
	          -lutupdatesnewdata
	
	Requirements
	1.	Alert definitions and options must be the same before and after 
	failover. For example, if you are running a primary and standby Data 
	Server in 2 different locations, you must confirm that both are configured 
	with the same alert definitions and option. If your alert options have 
	changed, persisted alerts might be incorrect after failover.
	2.	If any of the following properties on your alerts are attached to data, 
	those data attachments must be available after fail over and you must 
	specify an Initial Delay in the Alert Definitions tab of the Application 
	Options dialog. This will allow the alert engine restoring the persisted 
	alerts to resolve those data attachments before finishing the processing 
	of the persisted alerts. The Initial Delay time only needs to be long 
	enough for your data attachments to resolve. Any of these properties that 
	use a ; delimited list or a tabular data attachment must include index 
	values.
	
	- rowEnabledTable
	- value*Alert (valueHighAlert, valueLowAlert, valueMediumAlert)
	- value*Warning (valueHighWarning, valueLowWarning)
	- value*Text (valueHighAlertText, valueHighAlertCommandText, 
	valueMediumAlertText, valueMediumAlertCommandText, 
	valueLowAlertText, valueLowAlertCommandText, valueHighWarningText, 
	valueHighWarningCommandText, valueLowWarningText, 
	valueLowWarningCommandText)
	- alertState*AlertText
	- alertState*AlertCommandText
	- alertState*Comparison
	- alertState*UpperRangeLimit
	- alertState*LowerRangeLimit
	
	3.	The database table where the alerts are persisted must contain a 
	column for each column in the Alert Table, along with a couple of 
	additional columns. Therefore, if you add, edit or remove Custom Alert 
	Definition Properties or Custom Alert Event Attributes, the database table 
	will need to be modified.
	
	4.	If you have multiple alert engines persisting alerts to the same 
	database table, they must have the same Custom Alert Definition 
	Properties and Custom Alert Event Attributes.
	
	Limitations
	1.	Alerts that attach directly or indirectly to a function that outputs a 
	non-table value (Text or Number) may be incorrectly cleared after fail over. 
	See PAL for task #17154 for more information and a workaround.
	2.	The nonRepititionTime for an alert restarts after failover.
	3.	Depending on the frequency of your data that drives the alert, it is 
	possible that an update to an alert might be missed during failover. The 
	likelihood of missing an update increases the longer the time is between 
	the exit of the first engine and the startup of the second.
	
	Database Configuration
	The Historian will store the alerts to a database table. You can either let 
	the Historian create the database table or you can create the table. If you 
	want to the Historian to create the table, there is nothing you need to do - 
	the table will be created the first time the Historian stores an alert. 
	
	If you want to create the table yourself, we have included table schemas 
	for several databases in RTV\dbconfig\alert_persist. The README.txt file 
	in that directory will assist you in using the schemas to create your table. 
	If you want to create it manually, create a table with the following column 
	names and types in the order listed:
	
	AgentName (String)
	Time (Timestamp)
	Alert Name (String)
	Alert Index (String)
	Severity (Integer)
	Alert Text (String)
	Cleared (Boolean)
	Acknowledged (Boolean)
	ID (Long)
	Last Update Time (Timestamp)
	Comments (String)
	Owner (String)
	
	current (String)
	level (Integer)
	
	The AgentName and ID fields are primary keys. If you have defined 
	Custom Alert Definition Properties and/or Custom Event Attributes, you 
	will need to insert columns of the correct type in the order they appear in 
	the alert table before the current column.
	
	Historian Configuration
	This section assumes a working knowledge of the Historian and that you 
	have configured the Historian database.
	1.	In the Application Options dialog in the Display Builder or 
	Configuration Utility, go to RTVAgent->RTVAgent Options and select 
	Enabled. In the Port field, specify  the port number on which you would 
	like to receive alerts. Save you options file.
	2.	Copy the RTVAGENTOPTIONS.ini file that you created in step 1 to the 
	directory where you will be running the Historian.
	3.	In the directory where you will be running the Historian, run the 
	Historian so you can configure it.  
	4.	In the Alert Persistence Section, select Alert Persistence Enabled 
	and specify the name of the table to use for alert persistence in Alert 
	Persistence Table Name.
	5.	Save your configuration and Exit the Historian.
	6.	Note that the Historian must run the RTVAgent data source locally 
	(not via a Data Server) to persist the alerts. If you are running the 
	Historian against a Data Server you can run the RTVAgent data source 
	locally with the following command line arguement:
	       -dsenable:RTVAGENT
	
	If you want to persist alerts using a Historian server group instead of a 
	single Historian, you must use a different RTV Agent port for each 
	Historian in the server group. Specify a comma delimited list of the 
	RTV Agent connections in the Agent Connection field 
	(ex. localhost:5665,localhost:5666).
	
	Alert Engine Configuration
	1.	In the Application Options dialog in the Display Builder or 
	Configuration Utility, go to Alerts->Alert Persistence:
	2.	Select Enabled Persistence to enable alert persistence and fill in the 
	following fields:
	
	- Database Name - The name of a database connection that is 
	defined in the SQL tab of the Application Options dialog. This connection 
	must be to the same database that the Historian will be using to persist 
	the alerts.
	
	- Table Name - The name of the table where the alerts will be 
	persisted. This must be the same table name specified in the Alert 
	Persistence Table Name  of the Historian.
	
	- Agent Name - This must be a unique identifier for this alert engine. 
	Multiple alert engines can persist their alerts to the same Historian, so 
	this value allows the alert engine to restore only alerts for this alert 
	engine in the case of fail over.
	
	- Agent Connection - The host and port of the RTVAgent connection 
	you are using in the Historian to receive alert table updates. The host will 
	be the host where you are running the Historian the port will be the value 
	you entered in Step 1 of configuring the Historian above.
	
	3.	Save your options and exit. When you run the alert engine with these 
	options, your alerts will be persisted. 
	
	Note that if the Agent Connection specified here is not available, the alert 
	engine will store up alerts to persist until it becomes available. 
	Therefore, you should not run the alert engine with the persistence 
	enabled and the Agent Connection unavailable for a long time as this will 
	result in memory growth. Once the Agent Connection is made, all of the 
	stored alerts will be persisted and the memory growth will no longer be a 
	problem.
	

17036: New Owner column added to alert table
	The Alert Table has been enhanced to include an Owner column to allow 
	users to assign an owner to an alert event. When an alert is generated, the 
	value of the Owner column is blank. You can set the Owner for an alert using 
	the new Set Owner command. This command takes 2 arguments:
	
	ID - The id of the alert on which to set the owner.
	Owner - A string value to set in the owner field for the specified alert.
	
	The Self Service Alerts demo has been enhanced to display the Owner field 
	in the Alert Detail Table and to allow you to set the Owner for an alert in the 
	Manage Alert display.

17085: Support multiple ids for setOwner, add/clearComment and setEvent
	The Set Owner, Add Comment, Clear Comment and Set Alert Event Attribute 
	commands have all been enhanced to accept a semi-colon (;) delimited list 
	of ids for the Alert ID argument.

17119: New event alert as wrapper for external alert engine events
	RTView has been enhanced with a new event alert type.
	
	The event alert is meant to be used as a wrapper around an external 
	event source such as Netcool. For this alert, RTView does not do a 
	threshold comparison to determine when to execute or clear an alert or 
	determine the severity of the alert. When the valueTable comes in, the 
	columns in the valueTable are mapped to the columns in the RTView 
	Alert Table using the valueTableMap and customPropertyMap properties. 
	
	Event alerts behave like the other alerts in terms of notifications 
	(alertCommand, reNotificationCommand, commentAddedCommand, 
	alertClearedCommand are all supported as with the other alerts). They 
	also show up in the Alert Table like the other alerts. These alerts do not 
	have a corresponding per-tabular-alert-table like the limits and discrete 
	alerts. If indexed, the indexes for these alerts are only stored until the 
	alert is cleared, then removed.
	
	The valueTable for this alert does not have to be indexed. In order to 
	indicate that you have an index, map the Alert Index property to the index 
	column in your valueTable using the valueTableMap property described 
	below.
	
	If there is no Alert Index specified in the valueTableMap, this indicates that 
	the valueTable is not indexed. In this case, an alert will be generated for 
	each row of each table that comes in. No check for duplicates and no 
	support for status change is supported.  This means that the only way for 
	an alert to be cleared is via the alertExpireTime property (which will clear 
	the alert after it has been active for the specified amount of time).
	
	If there is an Alert Index specified in the valueTableMap, this indicates that 
	the valueTable is indexed. In this case, an alert will be generated for each 
	row where there is not already an active alert for that index. Indexed alerts 
	can be cleared via the valueTable if the Cleared column is also specified 
	in the valueTableMap and the value in the Cleared column equals the 
	alertClearedValue property. Indexed alerts can also be cleared via the 
	alertExpireTime. Indexed alerts support updates to the Severity, Cleared, 
	and Custom Property columns.
	
	The following are the properties that will be supported on the Event Alert. 
	Most properties are already implemented for the other alerts, so they 
	don't include descriptions here (see the RTView documentation for more 
	information on those properties):
	
	Alert Category
	- alertClearedCommand
	- alertCommand
	- alertExpireTime - New Property. If specified, an alert older than this 
	value (in seconds) will be cleared. This will happen regardless of 
	whether the alert is acknowledged or not.
	- alertName
	- commentAddedCommand
	- reNotificationCommand
	- reNotificationMode - This works the same as the other alerts with 
	one exception. When the reNotificationMode is set to Data Changed, the 
	alert will renotify when the severity changes for alerts that have not been 
	acknowledged or cleared. 
	- reNotificationTime
	- alertClearedValue - New property.  If the valueTableMap property contains 
	a mapping for both Alert Index and Cleared, the value specified here will 
	be compared to the value in the Cleared column from the valueTableMap. 
	If they match, the alert will be cleared.
	
	Data Category
	- valueTable - this table is required, but all columns are optional - see 
	valueTableMap and customPropertyMap for mapping columns from this 
	table to the columns in the Alert Table
	- valueTableMap - New property. This allows you to map items in the 
	valueTable to standard columns in our Alert Table. The syntax is 
	AlertProp:valueTableCol;AlertProp2:vlaueTableCol2. The following Alert 
	props are supported, but none of these are required:
	-- Alert Index -  If specified, this is used as the index column and will be 
	used in the Alert Index column of the Alert Table. The Cleared column 
	map and valueCleared properties will be supported, if not specified, this 
	is an un-indexed table and any new rows coming in to the valueTable will 
	just be forwarded to the alert table (with no way to update an existing row).
	-- Time - If specified, this time will be used in the Last Update Time 
	column of the alert table. This  column must be a long or date.  If not 
	specified, RTView will set the Last Update Time to the time the alert 
	received the last update.
	-- Severity - If specified, this column must contain integers > 0. If a 
	value less than 1 is specified, a value of 1 will be used. This will set the 
	value in the Severity column of the Alert Table. If not specified, RTView will 
	assign all alerts as severity 1.
	-- Alert Text - If specified, the value in this column will be used in the 
	Alert Text field of the Alert Table. If not specified, the Alert Text value in the 
	Alert Table will be "Event Received".
	-- Cleared - This is only supported if the Alert Index was specified. If so, 
	the value in this column will be matched against the value in the 
	valueCleared property. If there is a match, the alert will be cleared, 
	otherwise not.
	
	Interaction Category
	- enabledFlag
	- rowEnabledTable - Existing property. This is only supported if the 
	valueTableMap contains a mapping for the Alert Index.
	
	Custom Property Category (see the release note for 17027 for a 
	description of these properties)
	- customPropertyMap 
	- 
	
	For all command properties above, the same alert substitutions are 
	supported (with a few exceptions) as the other alerts:
	- $alertName - supported/same as other alerts
	- $alertText - supported/same as other alerts
	- $alertID - supported/same as other alerts
	- $alertSeverity - supported/same as other alerts
	- $alertEmailSubject - supported/same as other alerts
	- $alertEmailBody - supported/same as other alerts
	- $alertIndex - supported/same as other alerts
	- $alertLabel - supported/same as other alerts ("Event Alert")
	- $alertCurValue - supported - this is set to the severity value
	- $alertCompValue - not supported
	- $alertTime - supported/same as other alerts
	- $alertCommandText - not supported
	- $alertComment - supported/same as other alerts (in 
	commandAddedCommand only same as other alerts)
	- $alertLastComment - supported/same as other alerts (in 
	commandAddedCommand only same as other alerts)
	
	This alert can be used with the Self Service Alerts, but only the Enabled 
	field can be set. The WarningLevel, AlarmLevel, and Duration aren't 
	supported for this alert.

17121: New description field
	The RTView Alerts have been enhanced to include a Description property in 
	the Alert category. This field can be used to supply a description of the alert. 
	The value of this property is displayed in the Alert dialog in the Display 
	Builder and in the new Description column of the Alert Variables Table.
	

17122: New command to clear alerts
	The RTView Alerts have been enhanced to support a Clear Alert 
	command. In addition to the new command, the Alert Table has been 
	enhanced with 2 new columns:
	
	Cleared Reason - This column will list one of 4 values:
	
	- DATA UPDATE - This means that the alert was cleared because it 
	received a value that did not meet the alert condition.
	
	- EXPIRED - This means that the alert was cleared because it expired 
	due to the value in the alertExpireTime property on the alert. This property 
	is only supported for Event alerts.
	
	- DISABLED - This means that the alert was cleared because the alert 
	definition was disabled. An alert can be disabled by the enabledFlag 
	property, the rowEnabledFlag property or the Enable/Disable alert 
	command.
	
	MANUAL - This means that the alert was cleared by the Clear Alert 
	command. 
	
	The Cleared Time column contains the time that the alert was cleared.
	
	The new Clear Alert command is available in the Define Alert Command 
	dialog and takes a single id or a ; delimited list of ids for the argument.
	
	2 new substitutions are available for use in the alertClearedCommand:
	
	$alertClearedReason - This contains the reason the alert was cleared. It 
	is same value that is in Cleared Reason column in the Alert Table
	
	$alertClearedTime - This contains the time the alert was cleared. It is the 
	same value that is in the Cleared Time column in the Alert Table.

17123: New Count column in the Alert Table
	The Alert Table has been enhanced to include a new Count column. 
	When an alert is generated, this column contains a value of 1. The value 
	is then incremented each time the alert receives a data update until the 
	alert is cleared.
	
	The Alerts tab in the Application Options dialog has been enhanced to 
	include a new option Update Count on Acknowledged Alerts. Deselect 
	this option to prevent updates to the Count column on Acknowledged 
	alerts.
	
	By default, if the New Data Only option is selected on a data attachment 
	to the Alert Table, it will not update if the Last Update Time and Count 
	columns contain the only change for that row. This is also true for alert 
	persistence. In order to enable this update for the Alert Table when the 
	New Data Only  flag is selected and to enable this for alert persistence, 
	use the following command line option:
	
	-lutupdatesnewdata:true/false

17178: -lutupdatesnewdata command fixed
	In previous releases, the -lutupdatesnewdata command line option failed. 
	This has been fixed.

Builder - Property Dialogs

17179: Display Data feature fixed to work with named data server
	In prior releases, the Display Data dialog in the Builder did not show data 
	for an attachment directed to a named data server. This has been fixed.

Commands

17023: onOpen/CloseCommand now works if background image is used
	The onOpenCommand and onCloseCommand properties are now 
	available in the Model Properties dialog when the "Use Background Image" 
	option is checked in the Background Properties dialog.

Customization

17162: Support $value in command from fx objects
	A custom flex object can now specify a string to be substituted for $value 
	in commands configured on instances of the object, in the same manner 
	as is supported for RTView control objects (obj_c1combobox, etc).
	
	The custom flex code should make the following method call to specify 
	the string to be used for $value:
	
	     gmsExt.setControlValue(value);
	
	where gmsExt is an instance of the com.sl.gmsext.GmsExt class and 
	value is a String object. If the custom flex code calls the 
	GmsExt.tableCellSelected method, then it must call the 
	GmsExt.setControlValue() first, since the GmsExt.tableCellSelected will 
	trigger the object's command.
	
	As mentioned above , this feature allows you to use $value in the custom 
	flex object's command. For example, if a drilldown command is 
	configured, you can specify $value in the Drill Down Display Name field 
	of the command's drilldown properties.  However, this feature is not 
	supported in the drillDownTarget property of custom flex objects. Since 
	this discrepancy might confuse users, you can hide the custom flex 
	object's drillDownTarget property so that only its command property will 
	appear in the proerty sheet, by adding the following item to the object's 
	gmsVarInfo array declaration:
	      
	      ['__noddtarget', GmsVarDef.G_INTEGER,],   // this hides the drillDownTarget property
	
	If the drillDownTarget property is hidden, then the user will need to use 
	the command property to specify all drilldowns from instances of the 
	custom flex object, and so $value can always be used.
	

Data Historian

16962: Historian optimization for storing cache data
	The cache persistence feature was introduced in RTView 5.3  (task 
	15215). It allows a cache definition file to be used as an Historian data 
	configuration file, so that no additional rtv files need to be configured to 
	store and load cache history from a database. 
	
	But in some configurations this design results in duplication of effort 
	between the cache data source and the historian:  The cache data 
	source (managed by the data server, typically) and the Historian both 
	process the raw data (with RTView functions, perhaps) and both perform 
	the primary data compaction, as configured in the cache definition file. 
	
	The Historian now supports an optional feature that avoids that 
	inefficiency. When that feature is enabled, rather than receiving and 
	processing raw data the Historian instead receives the rows of cache 
	data to be stored from the cache data source (via the data server, if in 
	use) after the processing and primary compaction has already been 
	performed.  In addition, the Historian will query the cache data source 
	(via the data server, if in use) for the caches which should be persisted.  
	This avoids the need for the Historian to load the cache definition files as 
	historian data configuration files. If the Historian is used only to persist 
	cache data, it can be run without specifying any data configuration files, if 
	the new feature is enabled.
	
	To enable the new feature, specify the following command-line option 
	when starting the historian:
	
	    -persistCaches:true
	
	Or, add the following line to the HISTORY.ini file:
	
	    persistCaches true
	
	Currently the feature can not be enabled from the historian GUI.
	
	If the -persistCaches:true option is specified, the Historian will get all of  
	the cache definitions from the local cache data source and any 
	connected data servers. For each cache it finds that is configured for 
	persistence (i.e. has a non-blank value for either the historyTableName 
	or currentTableName property), the historian will create the 
	corresponding database table if necessary and begin inserting rows into 
	those tables.  
	
	Even if the  -persistCaches:true option is specified, the Historian will still 
	load any files that appear in the Data Configuration Files list (in the GUI) 
	or are listed as history_config lines in HISTORY.ini, even if those files 
	contain cache definitions. So if the  -persistCaches:true is used in an 
	existing configuration, it will be necessary to remove those files from the 
	list of Data Configuration Files or from HISTORY.ini. Otherwise data for 
	caches defined in those files will get stored twice.

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

17089: Cache dropdown list correct when DataServer field uses subs
	A bug has been fixed which prevented the Builder from populating the list of 
	available caches in the "Attach to Cache Data" dialog, in cases where the 
	value entered in the Data Server field of that dialog contained a substitution 
	string.

17156: RTViewDs meta-table added to show all cache properties
	The cache data source supports a new meta-table named 
	RTViewDs.CacheObjectProperties that contains all of the scalar property 
	values for each tabular cache. The table can be viewed by making a 
	cache data attachment with Cache = RTViewDs and 
	Table = CacheObjectProperties.
	
	The CacheObjectProperties table contains a row for each tabular cache, 
	with the cache name in the first column followed by a column for each 
	obj_cache_table scalar property, in alphabetic order by property name. 
	Tabular properties, like initialTable and valueTable, are not included.  
	Non-tabular caches defined by obj_cache_double instances are not 
	listed in the table.

JMX Data Source

17158: New option Auto-Discover Filter to limit JMX autodiscovery
	The JMX Data Source has been enhanced to support a new option: 
	Auto-Discover Filter. If specified, this limits the auto-discovered 
	connections to the ones where the connection's Display Name starts 
	with the specified string. This filter can be specified in the JMX 
	Administration tab in Application Options or via the command line:
	
	-jmxautodiscover:XXX 
	
	Where XXX is the filter. The filter can either be a single value or a ; 
	delimited list of values. For example, the following filter would limit the 
	auto-discovered connections to classes that start with com.sl:
	
	com.sl
	
	The following would limit the auto-discovered connections to classes 
	that start with com.sl or org.apache
	
	com.sl;org.apache

17159: Connection column added to TabularData
	The JMX data source has been enhanced to include a Connections column 
	in the TabularData returns. This column shows the name of the JMX 
	Connection for the data.

Display Server

17079: Tooltip in trend graph no longer missing timestamp
	In the thin client, the tooltip for each trace point on an obj_trendgraph02 now 
	includes the time that corresponds to the point. The time string format is 
	determined by the graph's legendTimeFormat property or, if that property is 
	not set, the timeFormat property.
	
	In the thin client, note that the tooltips are shown on the trace points only if 
	the graph's cursorFlag property is checked.

17112: FireFox scrollbar no longer moves on update of RTView displays.
	A problem has been fixed in the thin client in which Firefox would scroll the 
	entire page in order to keep the selected table row in focus, each time a 
	value in that row was updated.

17134: Adding columns to table no longer triggers drilldowns
	The following problem has been fixed:
	
	In the thin client, if a table has multiSelectFlag = 1 and has a drilldown 
	target, and if columns are added to the table after the display is initially 
	opened, this may trigger multiple extraneous drilldown requests from the 
	thin client, possibly with bogus substitution values. This may make the 
	display unusable. This is a regression bug in RTView 5.9 due to the 
	changes for task 16919.

17135: Display server exception if dd cmd attachment result is empty
	The following display server bug is fixed:
	
	If an object has a command with type = "Drill Down or Set Substitution" and 
	the command's Drill Down Display Name is attached to data but the 
	attachment returns an empty string (e.g a tabular attachment with a filter that 
	matches no rows) then when the display is opened in the thin client, the 
	message "error generating image" is displayed and a "String index out of 
	range" exception is thrown by the display server.

17148: navtree.xml in PANELS.ini can now be loaded from jar
	The display server can now read the navigation xml file referenced in a 
	PANELS.ini file (e.g. navtree.xml) from a jar file. Previously the display server 
	could only read it as an actual file from the working directory.

17164: New option to treat substitutions like in Display Viewer
	The Display Server supports a new option that will preserve the values of 
	local variables for which the "Use as Substitution " option is selected 
	when navigating to different displays in the same panel. This is 
	consistent with the behavior of the viewer. 
	
	The option can be specified on the command line as follows:
	
	   run_displayserver -clearsubs:false
	
	or in DISPLAYSERVER.ini as follows:
	
	   clearsubs false
	
	or in a properties file as follows:
	
	sl.rtview.displayserver.clearsubs=false
	
	If the option is not specified, then the display server will set all local 
	variables to their initial values when navigating to a new display 
	regardless of the variable's value in the current display, as in all previous 
	versions of the display server.
	
	Global variables are not affected by this option.

17196: Fixed crash of table with strings containing ascii null chars
	The following thin client problem has been fixed:  An "unterminated string 
	constant" javscript error occurs in IE when drilling down to a display that 
	contains a table with a string column in which any strings contain 
	embedded ascii null characters.

17208: Thin client now applies columnHeaderTextSize=0 to obj_table02
	The following problem in the thin client has been fixed:  In the builder/viewer, 
	setting columnHeaderTextSize=0 on obj_table02 makes the column header 
	invisible. However, in the thin client the column header is still visible.

17209: gridHorizontal/VerticalVisFlag on obj_table02 now applied
	The following problem has been fixed: In the thin client, the horizontal and 
	vertical grid lines are always drawn, even if the value of the 
	gridHorizontalVisFlag or gridVerticalVisFlag property is false.

Distribution

17142: New "simple" package option
	A new streamlined package of RTView has been added for users who 
	only require application files. This .zip file is compatible with all 
	operating systems that RTView supports.
	
	The RTView_X.X.X.X_simple.zip file excludes the following directories 
	and files:
	
	demos
	custom
	docs 
	servers
	lib/signed_jars.zip

17177: Alert Demo Data Server shortcut fixed
	Previously the Alert Demo Data Server shortcut under the Windows start 
	menu incorrectly started the Historian. It has been fixed to run the Data
	Server.

Functions

17075: Join Outer function now allows null input
	The behavior of the Join Outer function when one of its input tables is null 
	has been improved.  Previously the function would return null in all cases 
	if either input table was null.  This behavior has been changed as follows:
	
	- In case of a full join or right join, if the first (left) input table is null the 
	result will be the second (right) input table.
	- In case of a full join or left join, if the second (right) input table is null the 
	result will be the first (left) input table.
	
	In all other cases result will be null as previously. Note: the behavior of 
	the Join function has not changed.

17077: Performance optimization for Join
	The Join and Join Outer functions will now perform significantly faster, 
	especially with large tables.

17136: Sort function exception fixed
	The Sort Table function no longer throws a null pointer exception if the table 
	to be sorted is non-null but has zero columns.

Layouts

17188: URL using panels.jsp now can include initial substitution values
	To define initial substitution values in a panels layout, the thin client will 
	now accept a "subs" parameter in URLs that specify panels.jsp. For 
	example:
	
	   http://SomeHost/rtvdisplay/panels.jsp?subs=$table:production_table
	
	The panels file must use the <rtvLayout> tag as described in the RN 
	for 15795. Panels files using older formats will still ignore the "subs" 
	parameter, in the thin client.
	
	The substitutions will be applied to the initial display(s) opened in the 
	panel layout. If it is desired that those substitutions be applied to 
	displays that are subsequently opened then either 
	 
	  (1) the substitutions should be mapped to global variables, or
	  (2) the -clearsubs:fals option should be specified when starting the 
	display server (see 17164 for details)

Local Variables

17150: Corrected scope conflict local vars and global vars of same name
	A problem has been fixed which in some cases caused RTView to use the 
	value of a global variable even though a local variable with the same name 
	but a different value was defined in the current display.

Object Library

17074: Improve mouse over performance on composites
	Improvements have been made to reduce CPU usage in the Builder and 
	Viewer for the case where display contains many composite objects and an 
	object's mouseover text (tooltip) is visible in the display.

17144: Mouse over no longer in wrong place after window resize
	In previous releases, the mouse over was drawn in the wrong location on 
	displays that had been resized. This has been fixed.

17163: Corrected mouseover clipping on right side of display
	In previous releases, the tooltips that displayed next to the right side of the 
	display were sometimes clipped in the following situations:
	
	1. In the Display Viewer, tooltips were sometimes clipped on the right side 
	of displays there were using the Multiple Display Panels layouts and there 
	was another panel such as a navigation panel to the left of the display.
	
	2. In the Thin Client, tooltips were sometimes clipped on the right side of the 
	display if the tooltip text contained mostly upper case letters.
	
	Both of these have been fixed.

Composite Object

17080: Opening/closing/scrolling display w. many composites optimized
	Improvements have been made that reduce the time required to open, 
	scroll, and dismiss a display containing many composite objects.

Fx Trend Chart

17140: Current table update no longer clears history on fxtrend
	A problem has been fixed in obj_fxtrend in which historical data that had 
	recently been plotted via the traceNValueTable property would be cleared by 
	the first update to the traceNValue property.

Pie Charts

17132: obj_pie exception in thin client fixed
	The display server no longer throws an array bounds exception when 
	rendering an obj_pie instance that has both the mouseOverFlag and
	rowSeriesFlag properties set.

Version 5.9.0 Release Notes

Alerts

16909: New Self Service Alert demo
	The Self Service Alerts demo has been added to the RTView installation in 
	demos\selfservicealerts. This demo works with the new Self Service Alerts 
	feature and contains displays to view and interact with your active alerts and 
	to configure your alerts. Alert settings are automatically persisted to a 
	database. An audit table is also provided which tracks changes to the 
	settings.

16936: Text in alert table updated when threshold changes
	The Alert Table has been enhanced so that the Alert Text updates if the 
	threshold for an active (ie uncleared) alert changes.

16954: New option to add comments to alerts
	The RTView alerts have been enhanced to support 
	comments. The Alert Table now contains a Comments column. This 
	column is initially blank, but is updated by the Add Comment and Clear 
	Comments commands. Comments can be added or cleared for any 
	active, cleared or acknowledged alert unless that alert has been purged 
	from the system.
	
	The Add Comment command takes 2 arguments: the alert id and the 
	comment to add. The specified comment is timestamped and added to 
	the alert's comments. The Add Comment command does not replace 
	existing comments on the alert - the new comment is added after the 
	previous comment.
	
	The Clear Comments command takes 1 argument: the alert id. This 
	command clears all of the comments from the alert.
	
	A new property, commentAddedCommand has been added to all alerts. 
	If specified, this command will be executed after a comment is added to 
	the alert by the Add Comment command. All of the substitutions that are 
	supported for the alertCommand are also supported for this command. 
	Two additional substitutions are also supported for the 
	commentAddedCommand:
	
	- $alertComment - This is set to the value of the Comments field for the 
	command after the new comment has been added.
	- $alertLastComment - This is set to the value of the last comment added 
	to the Comments field.
	
	The Self Service Alerts demo has been updated to include support for 
	alert comments. In the Alert Table, click on an alert to open the manage 
	alerts dialog. In this dialog, you can view existing comments, add new 
	comments or clear the comments for the alert. To add a comment, enter 
	your comment text in the Enter Comments field, then click Add Comment. 
	To clear the comments for an alert, click the Clear Comment button. If 
	you have enabled the RTView login for the Self Service Alerts demo, the 
	user name is added to the beginning of the comment.
	

16955: New Data Only option has been added
	The following Alert tables have been enhanced to work better with the 
	cache and Historian:
	
	Alert Table
	Alert Variable Table
	Tabular Alert Tables
	
	For these tables, when any row in the table changes, the listeners for that 
	table receive updates containing all rows in the table. This is inefficient 
	for the caches and Historian. A New Data Only option has been added to 
	the Attach to Data dialog for these tables. When selected, the listener is 
	only updated with the rows that change for those tables.
	
	By default, if the New Data Only option is selected, the Alert Table will not 
	update if the Last Update Time column contains the only change for that 
	row. In most cases, this update is not needed by the cache or Historian. 
	In order to enable this update for the Alert Table when the New Data Only 
	flag is selected,  use the following command line option:
	
	-lutupdatesnewdata:true/false

16994: Discrete Alert no longer throws a NullPointerException
	In previous releases, the Discrete Alert would throw a NullPointerException 
	if the input value was null. This has been fixed.

Builder

16361: Edit Function and Function Description dialogs positioning issue
	In the Display Builder Function Dialog, the Edit Function Dialog when 
	opened for the first time was sometimes positioned too far toward the 
	bottom of the screen, so that its buttons and its help dialog could end up 
	off-screen. The initial position of this dialog has been corrected. Note the 
	position of this dialog is not maintained across invocations of the Builder.

16957: Get Data Server Connection Status now populates initially
	The following problem existed in the previous release and is now fixed:
	If an instance of the "Get Data Server Connection Status" function is created 
	in the builder and a table object is attached to the function, the table is 
	empty until the display is opened in the preview window.

Builder - Options Dialogs

17061: Popup menu now opens on correct monitor in dual monitor setup
	If the Builder or Viewer is run on a system with multiple monitors, popup 
	menus and command confirm dialogs will now always open on the same 
	monitor as the window in which the user clicked. In prior releases, the 
	menus and confirm dialog would sometimes appear on the wrong monitor.

Builder - Palette Handling

16690: NPE while dragging an object corrected
	In previous releases, the Display Builder occasionally printed a stack trace 
	when an object was dragged when being instanced from the palette. This 
	has been fixed.

Data Historian

16853: Historian's "Store Last Value Only" improved
	The historian's "Store Last Value Only" feature has been improved to store 
	the last set of rows applied to each object that specifies a given database 
	table name in its historyTableName property, including the case where 
	multiple objects have identical attachment strings. This is useful in a 
	historian configuration where multiple objects, loaded from unique history 
	config files, are attached to functions with the same name and all specify 
	the same database table name. 
	
	Previously only the rows for the last such object to be updated were stored.

17020: Enable substitutions for Historian Compaction properties
	The "compactionRules" item in the Data Compaction: Secondary (Historian) 
	category may now be edited directly and use directly typed rules, directly 
	typed Substitution variable names and variable names attached via the 
	Attach to Data menu.

Data Server

16729: Server upward compatibility now supported
	Future compatibility between clients and servers of different RTView 
	versions is now possible because of changes to avoid serialVersionUID 
	mismatch exceptions and ClassNotFound exceptions due to changes 
	made between RTView versions to serializable classes and obfuscation of 
	fields in those classes.

16751: Utility app for cleanly stopping the Data Server
	A new utility, kill_dataserver, has been added for stopping the Data 
	Server cleanly.  Both a Windows .bat and Unix shell script version have 
	been provided
	
	By default kill_dataserver will kill the Data Server running on port 9020.  
	
	The following arguments are available. These can be hard-coded in the 
	script by uncommenting the line provided and changing the value, or they 
	can be entered at the command line.
	
	-host:
	-name:
	-operation:
	-port:
	-user:
	-password:
	-url:
	-silent/verbose
	
	Example (defaults):
	-host:localhost 
	-name:RTViewHistorian:name=Manager
	-operation:killHistorian
	-port:9020
	
	Example of optional arguments (not set by default):
	-user:myuser
	-password:mypass
	-url:service:jmx:rmi:///jndi/rmi://localhost:9995/jmxrmi

16950: Config column added to data server conn status table
	The table returned by the function "Get Data Server Connection Status" now 
	contains an additional column labeled "Config". This column contains the 
	RTView configuration string that identifies the RTView version of the data 
	server.

16968: Timeout added for http client connections to rtvdata servlet
	An RTView client application that is connected to the data server via the 
	rtvdata servlet will now retry sending an http request if no reply is received 
	from the rtvdata servlet in 2 minutes. Previously the client would wait forever, 
	which resulted in lost contact with the data server if an http request stalled 
	or was lost.

16969: Stale http clients in rtvdata servlet now removed
	In prior releases, if a client was connected to the data server via the rtvdata 
	servlet and the client terminated abruptly or the connection was lost, the 
	client would remain in the data server's list of client indefinitely. Now, "stale" 
	http clients are removed after 10 minutes of inactivity.

Data Sources

16996: rtvagent servlet no longer leaks session IDs
	In prior releases, rtvagent would use the initial session ID assigned by the 
	app server (tomcat) even if that session had timed out because of inactivity. 
	This would cause the app server to assign a new session for each 
	subsequent request from the agent.
	
	This has been fixed.

CMDB Data Source

16656: New CMDB data adapter
	A Configuration Management Data Base (CMDB) data source has been 
	added to RTView. The CMDB data source allows the users to describe a set 
	of configuration items (CIs) and their hierarchical relationships and store 
	that information into one or more databases. Configuration items can by of 
	two types, one is a Container and the other is a Metric Source. This solution 
	allows you to define the configuration information necessary to enable the 
	Metric Source in one (or more) central databases (CMDB). It also allows 
	application builders to construct displays from the RTView Builder with a 
	visual representation of the hierarchical tree based on the relationships of 
	Container and Metric Source configuration items placed in the CMDB.
	
	

Cache Data Source

16970: "Mark & Delete" value added to rowExpirationMode cache property
	The cache property rowExpirationMode now supports an additional mode 
	named "Mark & Delete", in addition to the other modes named  Off, Mark, 
	and Delete. (Those modes are described in task 16725).
	
	When Mark & Delete mode is selected, an additional property named 
	rowExpirationTimeForDelete will appear in the property sheet, The Mark 
	& Delete mode is useful in cases where a row in the cache's current 
	table should be marked as expired after the time period indicated by the 
	rowExpirationTime has passed and the row has not been updated, and 
	then later the row should be deleted after the time indicated by 
	rowExpirationTimeForDelete  has passed.
	
	For example, say a cache has the following property settings:
	
	  rowExpirationMode: Mark & Delete
	  rowExpirationTime: 30m
	  rowExpirationTimeForDelete: 4h
	  rowExpiredColumnName: Expired
	
	If a row in the cache's current table is not updated for 30 minutes, the 
	value of the Expired column for that row will be set to true. If a row is not 
	updated for 4 hours, it will be deleted from the current table.

16971: rowsToDeleteTable now works for any subset of cache columns
	The cache rowsToDeleteTable property is intended to be attached to a table 
	that specifies the rows to be deleted from the cache's current table. In prior 
	releases, the rowsToDeleteTable was required to contain all of the columns 
	specified in the cache's indexColumnNames properties. Now the 
	rowsToDeleteTable can contain any subset of the columns in the cache and 
	all the rows in the current cache whose values in those columns match the 
	values a row in the rowsToDeleteTable will be deleted.

16988: Fixed NPE caused by loading history_condensed table
	The following bug has been fixed in this release:  
	
	The cache data source threw a NullPointerException when a listener was 
	added to a cache's history_combo table if the cache's history_condensed 
	table already contained data (restored via database query) but the cache's 
	raw history table did not yet contain any live data.

17004: valueTableCount change no longer hides compaction props
	Changing the valueTableCount property on obj_cache_table no longer 
	changes the visibility of the cache compaction properties in the Builder's 
	property sheet.

17039: SQL extend plus multi-column filter with empty values fixed
	The following problem is fixed:
	
	If a cache attachment has the Extend with SQL option checked and the Filter 
	Column field specifies multiple columns but the Filter Value field specifies 
	multiple empty values then an array bounds exception is thrown.

IBMMQ - IBM WebSphere MQ

16756: More robust handling of errors in manually edited rtv files
	Under certain circumstances incorrectly manually edited rtv files would 
	cause issues with the rtview runtime. More robust error handling has been 
	added which will help identify the element at fault:
	
	e.g.
	Error: Unable to URL Decode:  xxxx

16768: New IBM MQ data adapter
	The IBMMQ  Datasource has been added to RTView that replaces the 
	deprecated IBMADM Datasource.
	
	The new IBMMQ data adapter allows access to IBM WebSphere® MQ 
	servers and the ability to query metrics from key MQ entities such as 
	Queue Managers, Queues and Channels. 
	
	Metrics may be obtained from named objects of a variety of types.
	Names may be single, multiple and/or wildcarded to restrict the subset 
	of Objects queried, if required.
	
	The IBMMQ  Data Source  is built in and requires no additional command 
	line arguments. However it does need the required jars 
	(com.ibm.mq.pcf-6.0.jar;com.ibm.mq.jar;connector.jar) on the RTV 
	userpath as described in the Setup section of the System Requirements 
	documentation for the Data Source.
	
	For full details see the IBMMQ Data Source section in the User Guide 
	Documentation.

16776: Reduced connection resources in RTView IBMMQ data source
	The Connection resources (number of connections) used by  the RTView  
	IBMMQ data source has been reduced when connecting to an IBM MQ 
	server. The Connection used is released if connection fails due to a 
	MQRC_NOT_AUTHORIZED error.

16777: MQRC_NOT_AUTHORIZED at connection now marks connection INVALID
	If a MQRC_NOT_AUTHORIZED  exception (reason code 2035) occurs at 
	connection time, the offending connection is now marked as INVALID. This 
	means that no subsequent connect attempts will made using this 
	connection.

16905: Channel Status Values Returned for active channels
	Active channels now return channel status values in the Status column.
	(inactive channels cannot be queried, so return no data)
	
	Status Values can be one of the following
	
	BINDING
	Channel is negotiating with the partner.
	STARTING
	Channel is waiting to become active.
	RUNNING
	Channel is transferring or waiting for messages.
	PAUSED
	Channel is paused.
	STOPPING
	Channel is in process of stopping.
	RETRYING
	Channel is reattempting to establish connection.
	STOPPED
	Channel is stopped.
	REQUESTING
	Requester channel is requesting connection.
	INITIALIZING
	Channel is initializing.

16913: conn=* is now supported for the IBMMQ Data source.
	You can now use * to specify ALL connections in IBMMQ data 
	attachments.
	
	Thus you can use conn=* to show the state of all connections without 
	having to know an individual connection name. The data is queried 
	across the connected connections, and is updated as it is returned from 
	the individual connections. The conn column in returned data is 
	populated with the actual connection used to query the data.
	
	Since the data is updated as it is returned from the individual 
	connections, you may need to use the buffer rows function to batch the 
	asynchronous data for display.
	
	You may also need to use caches to aggregate the data returned from 
	multiple connections.
	
	Limitation: The Join function may not function as you expect when fed 
	with data  from multiple connections that arrives asynchronously.

16914: Queues now include Open input count and Open output count
	Queue Data now contains Open input count  and Open output count  Columns
	
	Queue Data returned from IBMMQ Data Attachments of Object (Type) 
	Queues or Queues (PCF) now contain Open input count  and Open 
	output count  Columns.
	
	Open Input Count 
	Shows the number of open input handles, that is the total handles open 
	for input on this queue. This gives you an idea of the number of 
	applications that are currently connected to the queue to put messages 
	on the queue .
	
	Open output count 
	Shows the number of open output handles, that is the total handles open 
	for output on this Queue. This gives you an idea of the number of 
	applications that are currently connected to the queue to get messages 
	from the queue

16941: Prevent creation of additional Dynamic Queues for Model Queues
	Queries of the form Object=Queues obtain their information my using the 
	accessQueue()  method on the QueueManager for a named queue.
	If the named Queue is a Model Queue, then as per the API, a dynamic 
	queue is created on the server. This is not desired behavior for a 
	monitoring tool - so we detect this condition, issue an error message 
	that identifies the cause, disconnect the connection, and mark the 
	connection invalid to prevent further re-occurrences.
	
	The Error message is of the form:
	
	IBM MQ Data Source: 2011-03-07T16:37:47.0484 : ERROR: connection: 
	vmrh5-3: Accessing model queue: SYSTEM.DEFAULT.MODEL.QUEUE 
	created dynamic local queue: AMQ.4D5C8E6423C42331 from query 
	:ibmmq {conn=* object=Queues names=TEST*%3BSYSTEM* __fmt=av1 
	__daum=1}
	
	IBM MQ Data Source: 2011-03-07T16:37:47.0484 : Marking connection 
	vmrh5-3 as invalid to prevent creation of additional queues 
	
	If this occurs, the user should investigate the Queues data attachment, 
	and modify it so that model queues are not referenced by the Queues 
	Query , or use the Queues (PCF) query instead.

16942: Connection attempt counter reset after successful connection
	Previously  the attempt counter was not reset after a successful Connection 
	attempt, leading to an absolute Max Retry Attempts.
	
	Now the Connection Attempt Counter is Reset after a successful 
	Connection attempt, leading to unique Max Retry Attempts between 
	successful connection attempts.

16951: Unlimited connection attempts now allowed for a connection
	Unlimited connection attempts are now allowed for a Connection, when an 
	-ive value is specified for Max Retries. It is suggested the value of -1 is used 
	to signify this.
	
	In this case,  unlimited connection attempts will be made until a connection 
	is established.  This may be useful when MQ servers are cycled for 
	maintenance, or the servers are expected to be down for a period and a 
	connection is wanted when the servers come back up.

JMS Admin Data Source (for TIBCO EMS only)

16871: Attachments to Topics and Queues now support compound urls
	In previous releases, data attachments to the Topics and Queues metrics
	in the EMS Administration Data Source  did not support compound urls for 
	fault tolerant servers. This has been fixed.

16873: Durables query to standby servers no longer throws exception
	In previous releases, if the EMS Administration data source was monitoring 
	a fault-tolerant pair of servers and you attached to the Durables table, the 
	following error would print to the console on each update:
	
	ERROR: com.tibco.tibjms.admin.TibjmsAdminException: In fault tolerant 
	standby, list of durables not known. (status=1)
	
	This has been fixed.

Pipe Data Source

16717: New Pipe Data Source
	The RTVPipe data adapter supports data attachments which will launch 
	an external process, read the text output of that process, and convert it 
	into a string or a data table for use within RTView. 
	
	The external process can be any executable program or script that writes 
	lines of text to its standard output stream. The connection between 
	RTView and the output stream of the process is referred to as a "pipe". 
	The RTVPipe data adapter uses a Java class known as a "pipe handler" 
	to parse the output it reads from the process. The pipe adapter has two 
	simple built-in handlers -- one that converts the process output into a 
	multi-line text string and another that converts it into a single-column 
	table with one row per line of  output. For more sophisticated 
	conversions a custom PipeHandler subclass can be written and used. 
	See the RTView javadocs for more details. There are examples of 
	custom handlers in the custom/rtvpipe directory of the RTView 
	installation. Custom handlers are specified in the RTVPipe tab of the 
	Application Options dialog of the Builder. 
	
	The "Attach to RTVPipe Data" dialog contains the following fields:
	
	 - Command String: A text field used to specify the command string to be 
	executed by the pipe adapter. The pipe adapter will connect to the output 
	stream of the process that is created by executing the command string, 
	and send the lines of text from that stream to the handler. The command 
	string can contain substitutions. After the substitutions have been 
	applied, the command string must be executable on the host on which 
	the pipe adapter is running. On Windows, this means that the command 
	string must specify a .exe file (which could be "cmd.exe /c x.bat" to run the 
	x.bat script file). On Unix/Linux, the means that the command string must 
	specify an executable program or shell script. In all cases the launched 
	process must write lines of text to its output stream.
	
	 - Handler: A dropdown list for selecting the name of the handler to be 
	used to process the lines of text input as they are read from the pipe. The 
	names that appear in the list are the two simple built-in handlers 
	(Generic text, Generic Table) plus any custom handlers defined on the 
	RTVPipe tab of the Builder's Application Options dialog. A unique
	 instance of the handler class will be created for each unique pipe (each 
	unqiue data attachment).
	
	 - Handler Hints: A text filed for specifying string of "hints" to be passed to 
	the handler. If the selected handler does not support hints (the built-in 
	Generic handlers do not) this field is not visible. The expected format of 
	this string is determined by the selected handler.
	
	 -Run Mode: A dropdown list with choices of Once, Periodic, or 
	Continuous. The run mode specifies what action the pipe adapter should 
	take when the pipe's process terminates (completes). If Run Mode = 
	Once, the adapter will not re-execute the command string after the 
	process terminates. This mode is useful for an on-demand reading of a 
	complete error log file, for example. If Run Mode = Periodic, then after the 
	process terminates the adapter will re-execute the command string 
	again after waiting for the number of seconds specified in the Interval 
	field. This mode is useful for periodic reading of an updating file via a 
	command such as "cat" or "tail" (without the -f/-F option). If Run Mode = 
	Continuous, then after the process terminates the adapter will re-execute 
	the command string immediately, since the assumption in this case is 
	that the process should never terminate unless an error is encountered. 
	This mode is useful for reading an updating log via a continuous 
	command such as "tail -F".
	
	 - Interval: A text field for entering the number of seconds in each run 
	interval. This field is visible only when Run Mode = Periodic.
	
	 - Timeout: A text field for entering the timeout in seconds for a 
	continuous process. This field is visible only when Run Mode = 
	Continuous. If no output is read from the process in the timeout period, 
	the process will be restarted. The default value is zero indicating no 
	timeout.
	
	The following fields are applicable if the selected handler indicates that it 
	returns a data table from its parseLines method. If instead it returns a 
	string, these fields are not visible. These fields appear in most other 
	RTView data attachment dialogs (such as the "Attach to Cache Data" 
	dialog) and are used to specify a filter on a table:
	
	 - Column(s): A combo box for specifying the names of the table columns 
	to include in the result, or * (the default) for all columns.
	 - Filter Rows: A checkbox to enable the following 2 fields:
	 - Filter Column: The name(s) of the columns(s) to which the Filter Value 
	should be applied.
	 - Filter Value: The filter value(s) to be applied to the filter columns.
	
	See the RTView documentation for details on the format to be used for 
	specifying filter values. Note tha wild cards and regular expressions are 
	not supported in the Filter Value field. For that type of filtering, various 
	standard RTView functions are available.
	
	As mentioned above, users can create custom handler classes if 
	necessary to parse the output of specific programs or scripts. In the 
	RTVPipe tab of the Builder's Application Options dialog, a Handler Name 
	and a Java Class Name are assigned to each custom handler that will 
	be used. The Handler Name is used in RTVPipe data attachments, as 
	described above. The Java Class name is the fully-qualified name (java 
	package name + class name) for the class that implements the handler. 
	This class must be in the class path at run time.

16998: Corrected NPE when process exits
	A problem has been fixed which caused the pipe data source to 
	occasionally throw a null pointer exception when the pipe process 
	terminated.  An exception message and stack trace were printed but the 
	exception had no other side-effects.

SNMP Data Source

16796: Trap receivers now started for all connections
	If the SNMP Data Adapter was configured for two or more connections on 
	different ports, and display contained a data attachment to receive traps 
	from "*", only the trap receiver for the default connection would be started. 
	This has been fixed; at the first occurrence of a data attachment to 
	connection "*", trap receivers will be started for all connections.

16848: SNMP debug tracing updated with additional print statements
	The SNMP Data Adapter tracing feature has been enhanced with new levels 
	of detail, enabled with snmptrace values of 11 or higher.

16925: New SNMP metadata table
	The SNMP Data adapter now provides access to internal metrics tables 
	via the connection name RTViewDs.  There are two tables, Data and 
	Traps, which will appear in the Object ID dropdown when a data 
	attachment is being made to RTViewDs.  
	
	The Data table presents information about SNMP Get requests 
	per-connection and per-OID. The information includes: Total Requests 
	(count), Failed Requests (count), Last Time (msec), Average Time 
	(msec), Last Error (string).  
	
	The Traps table presents information about SNMP traps received, 
	per-connection and per-OID. The information includes: Traps Received 
	(count), Last Timestamp (date).

16958: New SNMP Data Source
	The RTView SNMP Data Adapter has been added to the standard data 
	adapter set. For those who have been using it as a supplemental data 
	adapter it will no longer be necessary to identify it as a "custom" data source 
	(via command line or option file) when running or to add its jars to the 
	RTV_USERPATH environment variable.

SQL Data Source

16705: Quotes around column names respected when queries combined
	The following problem in the SQL data source is fixed: 
	
	If two separate SQL data attachments on the same display specify the 
	same database table but different columns, and neither attachment has the 
	"Enter SQL Query" box checked, the combined SQL query string will not 
	contain any quotes that the user placed around the column names, causing 
	the query to fail on some databases.

16746: Reduced excessive garbage collection calls
	The SQL data source no longer forces a garbage collection after each query 
	is completed. This may provide a small performance improvement in some 
	configurations.

Splunk

16681: Splunk Datasource now supports Version 4
	The Splunk Data Adapter is now compatible with Version 4 releases of 
	Splunk. This version may still be compatible with version 3 releases of 
	Splunk, but has not been tested with it.

16771: New command line options added to splunk data source.
	New command line options have been added to the Splunk data source  
	to provide additional logging information.
	
	-splunklog4jlevel:
	
	This option enables using log4j logging in the Splunk API library using 
	the standard log4j levels of FATAL, ERROR, WARN, INFO and DEBUG.
	
	For example, the following:
	
	-splunklog4jlevel:DEBUG 
	
	will create output files containing the raw json data returned for a search.
	
	(NOTE: Use with caution as this may lead to the creation of a large 
	number of large files) 
	
	Additional command line options allow testing for ragged data with 
	-splunkTestCols (for output) and -splunkUseCols (to add cols to tabular 
	data).

WMI Data Source

16786: Convert WMI DateTime values to Date values
	Previously the WMI Data Adapter did not correctly convert WMI DateTime 
	values to Date values. The WMI Data Adapter now converts WMI DateTime 
	values to Date values in GmsTablularData. The conversion handles both 
	Date Values of DateTime and Interval values of DateTime.
	
	Intervals are stored as milliseconds  (offset from the epoch start).
	Converting an Interval Date column to a Long column will extract  and 
	convert the offset and thus display the offset in milliseconds as a Long

Demos

16718: New RTVMonitor Demo
	The RTVMonitor is a set of displays that will enable users to view the status 
	of all RTView Data Servers, Display Servers, Historian and Tomcat 
	applications in a system.
	
	The RTVMonitor, using the the RTView JMX Data Adapter, displays 
	connectivity information available via JMX, as well as all detailed operational 
	and management features currently available via JMX.
	
	The displays are viewable on a central browser-based RTView dashboard,
	as well as an application.

17048: Tomcat App page bug fixed
	In the RTVMonitor, a bug had prevented the Tomcat server APP page from 
	displaying data (in most cases). This has been fixed.

Display Server

16477: Removed 1px dark border around checkbox & radio button in IE
	In the previous release, an extraneous 1 pixel dark border was drawn 
	around radio button and checkbox controls when a display was viewed in 
	the thin client in Internet Explorer. This problem is fixed.

16766: Localization support added for browser messages
	The text displayed by the thin client in its popup menu, login window, 
	status window, and in various error messages is now specified in the file 
	named rtvdisplay_strings.properties. That file is found in the 
	WEB-INF/classes/gmsjsp directory of the rtvdisplay.war file. 
	
	For localization, the file can be extracted from the war file, copied to a new 
	file with the desired locale suffix (e.g. rtvdisplay_strings_ja.properties for 
	Japanese), and the new file can be packed into rtvdisplay.war, in 
	WEB-INF/classes/gmsjsp. The locale setting of the app server (e.g. 
	tomcat) will be used to determine which properties file to load.  If the app 
	server does not have the desired locale setting for the thin client, then 
	edit the original file (rtvdisplay_strings.properties) instead.

16767: Disabled button no longer looks enabled in some browsers
	In prior releases, disabled buttons had the same appearance as enabled 
	buttons, in the thin client in Firefox or Safari. Now, the text will be 
	"grayed-out" on disabled buttons.

16861: Display sharing in display server and rtvdisplay servlet
	The Display Server and the rtvdisplay servlet have been enhanced to 
	improve performance by sharing specified displays among all clients.  
	This is intended to improve performance in configurations where many 
	clients will typically  be viewing the same display simultaneously.
	
	The display server will load a single copy of each shared display, rather 
	than loading a separate copy for each client. In addition the rtvdisplay 
	servlet will temporarily store the web page content (html, image, 
	javascript) generated for a shared display and will then reuse that 
	content to satisfy requests for the display from any client, rather than 
	regenerating it for each client request.
	
	There are limitations on the features that can be used on a shared 
	display, so displays to be shared should be selected carefully.  These 
	limitations are described later in this note.
	
	Each display to be shared is identified in DISPLAYSERVER.ini as follows:
	
	  shared_display <filename> [substitutions]
	
	where <filename> is the name of an rtv file and [substitutions] is an 
	optional list of substitution string:value pairs, separated by spaces. If a 
	substitution value contains spaces it must be enclosed in single quotes. 
	For example:
	 
	   shared_display  navtop.rtv
	   shared_display  summary.rtv $region:East
	   shared_display  summary.rtv $region:West 
	   shared_display  summary.rtv $region:'East and West'
	
	The display server will "preload" all of the shared displays at startup, 
	rather than waiting for a client to request the display. Subsequently, any 
	client request for a display (plus substitutions) that exactly matches one 
	of the shared display entries in DISPLAYSERVER.ini will be processed 
	using the corresponding preloaded, shared display. 
	
	The rtvdisplay servlet is also involved in display sharing. As mentioned 
	earlier, it will keep the web page content that it generates for each shared 
	display and use that same content to respond to all client requests for 
	the shared display that it receives within the "shared display refresh 
	interval". By default the interval is 15 seconds and can be changed by 
	specifying a property named SharedDisplayRefreshInterval in 
	rtvdisplay.properties. If the servlet receives a client request for the shared 
	display after the interval has expired, the servlet will check with the 
	display server to see if the stored content is "stale" (that is, if any data 
	has been applied to the display since the content was generated). If it is 
	not stale the servlet will store the content for another interval. If it is stale, 
	the servlet will get the updated display state from the display server and 
	then regenerate the content. The servlet will periodically purge the stored 
	content for shared displays if it has not been accessed within one 
	shared display refresh interval plus one minute.
	
	The JMX Mbean operation named 
	RTViewDisplayServer.Manager.clearDisplayCache can be used to clear 
	and reload all shared displays in the display server and clear all page 
	content for shared displays currently stored in the rtvdisplay servlet 
	
	Note that the performance benefit of display sharing is obtained only if 
	multiple clients request the same shared display within a single shared 
	display retention interval. So only displays that are frequently requested 
	should be considered for sharing.
	
	The maximum number of shared displays for which the servlet will store 
	the content is determined by the MaxSharedDisplays property, which has 
	a default of 10. This property should be set to a value at least as large as 
	the number of shared_display entries in DISPLAYSERVER.ini.  Tracing of 
	display sharing in the servlet can be enabled by adding the following line 
	to rtvdisplay.properties:
	
	   SharedDisplayTrace=true
	
	Any client request that specifies a display name and substitutions that 
	does not match a shared_display entry will be processed in the normal 
	"unshared" manner. That is,the server loads a unique copy of the display 
	into its own panel, and closes the panel when the client dismisses the 
	display, and the servlet discards the page content that it generates for the 
	request after returning the content to the client.
	
	In the thin client, a user can determine if a shared display is being 
	viewed by right clicking in the display and picking Status from the popup 
	menu, and then checking the Panel ID string shown in the Thin Client 
	Status window. For a shared display the Panel ID string begins with 
	"preload".
	
	Metrics about requests for shared displays can be viewed by opening the 
	page named servletstatus.jsp in a browser, for example: 
	http://localhost:8068/rtvdisplay/servletstatus.jsp. The page contains the 
	following info:
	  
	request count: the total number of client display requests received
	
	connection: the current connection from the servlet to the display server
	
	started: servlet's start time
	
	shared display refresh: the value of the SharedDisplayRefreshInterval  
	property, in seconds
	
	shared display hits/tries: the number of client requests satisfied by 
	stored content for shared display / total display requests. A high % 
	indicates that display sharing is effective, a low % indicates that it is not 
	effective for the requests being received.
	
	shared display updates: the number of times the servlet has stored or 
	updated shared display content 
	
	shared displays: number of shared displays stored / MaxSharedDisplays. 
	
	This is followed by a list of the shared display content which is currently 
	stored in the servlet. 
	
	
	
	Limitations. 
	
	The following features should not be used on shared displays, since 
	these features can change the state of a display for each user.
	
	- A resizeMode of Layout or Scale.
	
	- Scrolling on obj_trendgraph02, obj_bargraph, obj_objectgrid.
	
	- Paging mode on obj_table02.
	
	- User-specific or role-specific substitutions ($rtvuser, $rtvrole, etc).
	
	The resizeMode is forced to Crop on all shared displays, user-specific 
	substitutions are not applied to shared displays, and the thin client will 
	never display scrollbars on the objects mentioned above in shared 
	displays.
	
	In addition:
	
	- The substitutions in a client request for a shared display must exactly 
	match those specified in the entry in DISPLAYSERVER.ini, including the 
	order of the substitutions, otherwise the request will be treated as for a 
	non-shared display.
	
	- All shared displays share the same set of global variables and 
	function.  On all other (non-shared) displays, the display server uses a 
	separate set of globals that it maintains for each browser session.  So, if 
	a any user changes the value of a global variable X from a shared 
	display, all users viewing any shared display will see that same value of 
	X, even users on separate machines.  However, the value of X on any 
	non-shared displays will not be affected by that change.
	
	- A drilldown to a shared display always behaves as though the "Remove 
	Existing Substitutions" box was checked in the Drill Down Properties 
	dialog. This is necessary so that substitutions in the source display 
	aren't included in the drilldown substitutions, which might prevent them 
	from matching the shared display's substitutions.

16919: Table row selection problem fixed
	A problem has been fixed in the thin client in which the row selection in a 
	table object was not properly cleared when the columns in the data table 
	changed, and if the user then selected the same row in the table as was 
	previously selected, the row was not highlighted.

16949: Images with backslash in path in table's filterProp now load
	In prior releases, the thin client would fail to load images for table cells if the 
	path to the image (as specified in the table object's filterProperties) 
	contained backslashes. This is fixed.

16960: Immediate refresh of main display after dd or setvar in dialog
	In the thin client, setting a global variable by a drilldown or control click in a 
	dialog window will now trigger an update in the main display within a few 
	seconds, so that the main display reflects the change. 
	
	Previously the main display did not update until the next scheduled refresh 
	interval.

16985: Concurrency problems  in heavily loaded display server fixed
	Several conditions that caused null pointer exceptions and deadlock in a 
	heavily loaded display server have been fixed.

17007: Export to PDF window now resizeable
	The browser window opened by the "Export to PDF " menu item in the thin 
	client is now resizable in all supported browsers.

17030: Corrected occasional stale shared display content
	The thin client would sometimes show stale content for a shared display, 
	for extended time periods. This has been fixed.

17057: Long URL in IE8 supported in drilldown to new window
	The following problem that affected the thin client in Internet Explorer 8 has 
	been fixed:
	
	In the thin client in IE8, a drilldown to a new window fails with the error 
	"Internet Explorer cannot display the webpage" if the URL is longer than 
	2083 characters. Typically this occurs if the parent display contains many 
	substitution/value since those are included in the URL, unless the "Remove 
	Existing Substitutions" box was checked when the drilldown target was 
	configured.

Distribution

17060: RTView renamed in Windows installer
	The  Windows Start Menu shortcut directory and installation directory have 
	been changed from:
	
	RTView <version>
	ERTV_<version>
	
	to:
	
	RTView <version>
	RTV_<version>

Drill Down

16745: Fixed JS error on custom flex object with slow initialization
	A problem in the thin client has been fixed which caused a javascript 
	exception to be thrown if a custom flex object was slow to initialize. The 
	exception was "Error: div.player.setGmsVar is not a function".

16887: $colName and $celldata now correctly passed to drilldown
	In prior releases, the $colName and $celldata substitutions were not 
	always set to the correct values for the selected bar, when performing a 
	drilldown from a bargraph whose drillDownSelectMode property was set to 
	"Anywhere" and whose mouseOverFlag and mouseOverHighlightFlag 
	properties were both unchecked. This is fixed.

16967: Navtree drilldown now sent to correct panel
	A bug has been fixed that affected PANELS.ini files using the tree and 
	accordion navigation controls with the rtvlayout tag. This bug sometimes 
	caused the display selected from the tree/accordion control to be opened in 
	the RTView panel that last received a mouse event (a popup window, for 
	example) rather than in the main RTView panel. This bug only affected the 
	Viewer, not the thin client.

Functions

16533: Format Table Columns function now supports date/time formatting
	The Format Table Columns function has been enhanced to accept 
	date/time patterns for formatting columns of type Date. For example 
	consider a column 'Timestamp' with the value 'Sep 06, 2008 7:27:36 AM'. 
	If it was formatted with 'Timestamp':'MM/dd/yyyy' the result would be '09/06
	/2008'. If it was formatted with 'Timestamp':'hh:mm:ss'  the result would 
	be '07:27:36, etc.
	
	The full list of formatting codes comes from the Java documentation for 
	the class SimpleDateFormat:
	
	Letter  Component  Presentation  Examples  
	
	G  Era designator  Text  AD  
	y  Year  Year  1996; 96  
	M  Month in year  Month  July; Jul; 07  
	w  Week in year  Number  27  
	W  Week in month  Number  2  
	D  Day in year  Number  189  
	d  Day in month  Number  10  
	F  Day of week in month  Number  2  
	E  Day in week  Text  Tuesday; Tue  
	a  Am/pm marker  Text  PM  
	H  Hour in day (0-23)  Number  0  
	k  Hour in day (1-24)  Number  24  
	K  Hour in am/pm (0-11)  Number  0  
	h  Hour in am/pm (1-12)  Number  12  
	m  Minute in hour  Number  30  
	s  Second in minute  Number  55  
	S  Millisecond  Number  978  
	z  Time zone  General time zone  Pacific Standard Time; PST; GMT-08:00  
	Z  Time zone  RFC 822 time zone  -0800

16703: GroupBy funcs now allow mult group if Use Column Names" 0
	The GroupBy... functions now allow "Use Column Names" to be set to zero 
	when multiple grouping types are specified.

16860: Group by Time function no longer fails with non-english locale
	All Group by Time functions will no longer fail with non-English locale 
	settings or on machines running non-English versions of Windows.

16910: New Table Contains Values function
	RTView has been enhanced with a new Table Contains 
	Values function. This function returns a copy of the specified Table with a 
	new boolean column containing a value of true for each row where the 
	value in the Comparison Column is in the Comparison Table.
	
	Table - A table containing a column in which to search for values from the 
	Comparison Table.
	
	Comparison Column Name - The name of the column in the Table in 
	which to search for the values in the Comparison Table.
	
	Result Column Name - The name of the boolean result column to add to 
	the Table. If no name is specified, the column will be named Result.
	
	Comparison Table - A one column table containing the values to look for 
	in the Comparison Column of the Table.

17042: Distinct function no longer crashes if data includes nulls
	In prior releases, if the table input to Distinct Values function contained null 
	strings in the specified column, a null pointer exception was thrown. This is 
	fixed. Now a null string is treated as an empty string.

General

16874: New java option to include timestamp in console output
	RTView applications have been enhanced to include 
	timestamps in the console and log file output. By default, all output will 
	include timestamps. To disable timestamps, include the following jvm 
	option in your RTV_JAVAOPTS:
	
	-Dcom.sl.rtview.logTime=false

17049: rtv_init.ksh no longer adds ":" to the beginning of PATH
	Previously the rtv_init.ksh script would pre-pend an unnecessary ":" to the 
	start of the PATH variable. This has been fixed.

Object Library

16931: labelMinTabWidth removed from obj_ind_panel indicator
	In previous release, the obj_ind_panel object had the labelMinTabWidth 
	property. This property was not used and has been removed.

Composite Object

16961: mouseOverText within composite no longer disables drilldown
	In previous releases of the thin client, a click on object with mouseOverText 
	(but no drilldown or command set) in a composite did not trigger the 
	drilldown or command defined on the composite object itself. This is fixed.

Control Objects

16911: Double text entry control now accepts NaN
	In previous releases, the double text entry control (obj_c1textedit_d) did not 
	accept NaN. This has been fixed.

Heatmap

16760: One-node heatmap now drawn when colorValueAutoScaleMode=on
	In previous release, the heatmap node would not paint if the 
	colorAutoScaleMode was set to On and there was only one node. This has 
	been fixed.

17024: Heatmap exception with multiple index columns fixed
	In previous releases, the heatmap object would sometimes throw an 
	exception when there were multiple indexColumnNames specified. It 
	happened in cases where either the colorValueGroupType and 
	sizeValueGroupType were different or when the valueQualityColumnName 
	property was specified.
	
	This has been fixed.

Pie Charts

16965: Mouse hover on on pie chart exception corrected
	In previous release, the pie would throw an exception during mouse over of 
	a wedge if the wedge had a 0 value. This only happened if the 0 value 
	wedge was the last one in the pie. This has been fixed.

Status History

16713: Sort Column Name feature added to Status History Object
	A Sort by Column Name feature was added to the Status History Object 
	(obj_statushistory).
	
	There are two new properties under Sort named "sortColumnName" and 
	"sortByLabelsFlag".  The new behavior is as follows:
	
	1) sortByLabelsFlag = true :  The sortColumnName property is hidden, 
	and the bars are sorted by their labels. This is the default behavior.
	
	2) sortByLabelsFlag = false, sortColumnName =  : The bars 
	are sorted by the value in the  column in the last (most recent) 
	row.
	
	3) sortByLabelsFlag = false, sortColumnName = "" : The bars are drawn 
	in unsorted (natural) order.  
	
	For (3), the unsorted order of the bars is the order in which the 1st row for 
	each bar was encountered in the data table attached to valueHistoryTable 
	or valueTable. Also in (3) the sortAscendingFlag property has no effect.

Trend Charts

16915: yAxisFlag now consistently makes Y axis invisible
	In prior releases, yAxisFlag was ignored for some yAxisMultiRangeMode 
	settings.
	
	Unchecking the yAxisFlag property of obj_trendgraph02 will now hide the Y 
	axis labels and tick marks regardless of the yAxisMultiRangeMode setting.

17056: Builder freeze fixed
	A bug has been fixed which caused the Builder to enter an infinite loop if an 
	obj_trendgraph02 instance was configured so that   yValueMin = 0 , 
	yValueMax = 0, traceCount = 1, "demodata" was cleared from the 
	trace1ValueTable property, and yAxisPosition was Inner Left or Inner Right.

Reporting

16724: Exported PDF headers/footers may now be customized and localized
	Exported PDF Headers and footers can be customized by use of 
	properties defined in the rtvreport.properties file (in the custom/rtvreport 
	directory)
	
	Default headers and footers will be overridden if two conditions are met
	
	1) The appropriate property is defined in the rtvreport.properties file
	2) The rtvreport.properties file is on the classpath of the application 
	exporting the PDF File
	
	
	The rtvreport.properties file gives details about defining property values
	
	Since "." (the current directory) is on the default classpath for RTView 
	applications, one of the simplest means of using the rtvreport.properties 
	file is to copy it into the directory where the application is started. 
	(Typically, this will be where the initial .rtv files reside)
	
	If you wish to use a single rtvreport.properties file for multiple 
	applications in different directories, then you can use the 
	RTV_USERPATH environment variiable to definee a classpath that 
	includes a reference to where the rtvreport.properties file resides.
	
	NOTE: The rtvreport.properties file is treated as a resource bundle, and 
	thus follows the java convention for localizing resource bundles (rtvreport 
	is followed by an underscore and a two-letter language code (ISO 639-2 
	code) that specifies the language that the resource bundle deals with. )
	
	e.g for spanish and french create rtvreport_es.properties and rtvreport_fr.properties

16903: PDF output no longer fails for tables with filter properties
	Previously, producing PDF output ( Display or Report) for a display that 
	contains a table with filterProperties would produce an NPE ( Null pointer 
	exception) and incomplete PDF output. This is no longer the case.

Security

16306: Enhanced isAllowed method to include user id
	The following method has been added to the custom role manager class:
	
	public boolean isAllowed (String displayName, String role, String user);
	
	This method is only invoked by the display server. Subclasses can 
	optionally override this method to return the appropriate value based on 
	the displayName, role, and user. The default implementation of this 
	method is simply:
	
	         return isAllowed(displayName, role);
	
	The display server may call this method simultaneously on different 
	threads. The arguments are:
	
	displayName: the name of the display the user wants to open
	role: the role of the user trying to open the display
	user: the name of the user trying to open the display
	
	Returns: true if display is allowed, else false.

Substitution

17005: Problem setting global var via setsub in composite fixed
	A bug has been fixed in obj_composite which caused extra data listeners to 
	be added if a Set Substitution function in the composite display changed the 
	value of a global variable.

Transaction Message Monitor

17006: Transaction Monitor script error corrected
	Previously the run_tm.bat script for the Transaction Monitor failed to execute.
	This has been fixed.

Version 5.8f1 Release Notes

Data Sources

TIBCO Rendezvous Data Source

16812: RTViewDs.HostStatusCurrent now calculating deltas
	In previous releases, the idl, odl, irrs and orrs columns in the 
	RTViewDs.HostStatusCurrent table showed current values instead of 
	deltas. This has been fixed.
	

16881: New Disable Data Cache option
	A Disable Data Cache option has been added to the new TIBCO 
	Rendezvous Cache tab in the Application Options dialog. This option 
	allows you to disable the caching of data in the TIBCO Rendezvous Data 
	Source. When selected, the initial update on data attachments to multiple 
	subjects (ex. orders.STATUS.*) will return a table with a row for each 
	message, but subsequent updates include only the rows that have 
	changed. This option is useful when using TIBCO Rendezvous data 
	attachments as input to the Cache data source or the Historian. 
	
	This flag also applies to the following RTViewDs tables:
	RTViewDs.HostStatusCurrent
	RTViewDs.HostStatusTotal
	
	It does not apply to the following tables as they store history and should 
	not be used with the cache:
	RTViewDs.HostStatusHistory
	RTViewDs.HostStatusHistory2
	
	It does not apply to the following tables since they are not cached 
	regardless of the value of the Disable Data Cache:
	RTViewDs.MulticastPacketsDest
	RTViewDs.MulticastPacketsSource
	RTViewDs.MulticastPacketsTotal
	RTViewDs.MulticastSubjectsDest
	RTViewDs.MulticastSubjectsSource
	RTViewDs.MulticastSubjectsTotal
	RTViewDs.ConfigServices
	RTViewDs.ConfigClientTransports
	
	

16889: TIBRV_HOME requirement now prompts an error message
	The TIBRV_HOME environment variable is required for the 
	RTViewDs.Config* data attachments with the current version of TIBCO 
	Rendezvous. In previous release, if this was not set, the tables failed 
	silently. This has been fixed so that the error is reported.
	

16899: RTViewDs.Config* now updates multiple tables correctly
	In previous releases, if you had 2 tables attached to 
	RTViewDs.ConfigServices or RTViewDs.ConfigClientTransports for different 
	urls, the first table would update incorrectly when the second table updated. 
	This has been fixed.
	

16900: The TIBCO Rendezvous RTViewDs.Config* tables now update
	The TIBCO Rendezvous RTViewDs.Config* tables now update. 
	Previously, they were only queried once. To specify how often these 
	tables update, specify a value in seconds in the Tibrvconfig Update 
	Period field of the TIBCO Rendezvous Monitoring tab of the Application 
	Options dialog. This value will be rounded to the closest multiple of the 
	update period specified in the General tab of the Application Options 
	dialog. For example, if the update period is 10 and the Tibrvconfig Update 
	Period is 15, the updates will occur every 20 seconds.
	
	You can also set this value on the command line as follows:
	
	-rvds:rvconfig.period:XX
	
	Where XX if a numeric value greater than 0. The default is to update every 
	15 minutes.
	

Version 5.8e1 Release Notes

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

16929: Improved handling of old property names in cache files
	The following bug existed in 5.8d. It is fixed.
	
	For task 16725, several properties of obj_cache_table were renamed. 
	When an existing cache file containing the old property names is loaded, 
	the old property names should be automatically converted to the new 
	property names. This is done correctly if the property values are 
	constants, but if the old property is attached to data, the conversion is not 
	done and the data attachment is ignored. The property assumes the 
	default value (typically zero or an empty string) instead. The old property 
	names affected by this bug are as follows:
	
	   maxNumberOfRows (renamed to maxNumberOfHistoryRows)
	   timeSpan (renamed to historyTimeSpan)
	   deleteTable (renamed to rowsToDeleteTable)
	   indexColumnNamesForDelete (renamed to rowExpiredIndexColumns)
	

JMS Admin Data Source (for TIBCO EMS only)

16898: New Server URL column to Routes table
	A new field called serverURL has been added to the Routes metrics table in 
	the JMSADM data source.  This field contains the URL of the EMS server 
	which defines the route.
	

XML Data Source

16934: RTView DS for the XML data source
	The XML data source now supports attachments to a source named 
	RTViewDs, which provides information about the listeners currently 
	active in the XML data source. This information can be useful when 
	troubleshooting data server clients, because it is the XML data source 
	that handles listeners for ALL RTView data attachments that are 
	redirected to a data server.
	
	The RTViewDs source supports the following Data Keys:
	
	1) listeners:  This will display a table with one row for each unique data 
	attachment to another xml source and a row for each unique data 
	attachment that has been redirected to a data server. The "Source" 
	column displays the name of the xml source (file) or the name of the data 
	server. The "Local" column is checked if the source is an xml Source, it is 
	unchecked if the source is a data server. The "Adapter" column shows 
	the name of the data adapter, which will be "xml" for local xml 
	attachments and "cache", "sql", etc for redirected listeners.  The "Key" 
	column displays the entire data attachment string. The "Listeners" 
	column shows the total number of listeners for the attachment string. 
	The "Updated" column shows the time when data was most recently 
	applied to the listener.
	
	2) cacheListeners: This will display a table with one row for each unique 
	cache data attachment that has been redirected to a data server. It 
	displays most of the same information as in the "listeners" table 
	described above, plus additional columns for the most commonly used 
	fields in a cache data attachment (Cache name, table name, columns, 
	filter columns, filter values). The "Local" and "Adapter" columns are not 
	specified since only remote listener for the cache data adapter are 
	shown. 
	
	Note that the cacheListeners table does NOT show local cache listeners, 
	it only shows cache listeners that have been redirected to a data server.
	
	The RTViewDs source will not appear in the dropdown list of XML 
	sources in the Attach to XML Data dialog, instead the RTViewDs name 
	must be entered manually in the XML Source field.
	
	

Display Server

16882: Export to Excel no longer fails with japanese characters
	Japanese text is now properly handled by the thin client's "Export Table to 
	Excel" feature.
	

16906: RTViewDisplayServer.Attributes.DisplayData again returns data
	The 5.8d display server always returned an empty table from the jmx MBean 
	RTViewDisplayServer.Attributes.DisplayData. This is fixed.
	

16907: Fixed JS error in thin client if button's valueToSet changed
	Previously, if the valueToSet property of a button control was changed by a 
	data  attachment, a javascript error "rtobj is null" was reported by the thin 
	client.
	
	This has been fixed.
	

16923: Fixed bad drawing behavior with multiple connection threads
	A display server problem has been fixed in which objects were sometimes 
	misdrawn or missing if displays containing composite objects with 
	bgOpaqueFlag = 0 were open, and multiple clients were connected and 
	requesting displays simultaneously.
	

Functions

16928: DeltaAndRateRows function NPE fixed
	In release 5.8d the function "Delta And Rate Rows" threw a 
	NullPointerException. This is fixed.
	

Object Library

Fx Bar Chart

16648: drillDownSelectMode = Element Only fixed for thin client
	In previous releases, setting drillDownSelectMode = Element Only had no 
	effect on obj_fxbar or on a custom fx object that supported the 
	drillDownSelectMode property, when the object was displayed in the thin 
	client. The object always behaved as though drillDownSelectMode = 
	Anywhere when displayed in the thin client. This problem has been fixed.
	

Tables

16926: Multiple Hide Rows action on a row no longer causes exception
	Previously if the filterProperties of an obj_table02 applied the Hide Rows 
	action more than once to the same table row, a NegativeArraySizeException 
	may have been thrown.
	

Version 5.8d1 Release Notes

Builder - Property Dialogs

16838: Dialog tables for viewing current data adjusted for consistency
	In the display builder, the alert, cache, function, and local variable dialogs 
	make use of a table to display information about the current set of 
	objects. The appearance and behavior of these tables has been 
	improved and made consistent among the four dialogs as follows:
	
	- the Name column is set as "row header" so it is displayed with a 
	shaded background and is not resizable. The dialog will control the width 
	of this column so the full length of each name is visible.
	
	- The remainder of the columns will be initialized by the dialog and may 
	be adjusted by the user without interference. They will be resized by the 
	dialog only when the dialog itself is resized (in width).
	
	Finally, in the Caches dialog, the column "MaxRows" has been renamed 
	to "HistoryRows" for clarity.

Data Server

16775: -logfile option incompatibility with Linux logrotate resolved
	The -logfile option will now create the RTView log file in a manner that is 
	compatible with the copytruncate directive of the Linux logrotate utility. In the 
	previous release, the log file could not be truncated to zero bytes by that 
	utility.

Data Sources

16804: Global var set in OPTIONS.ini no longer causes extra listeners
	The following problem has been fixed: If a global var $x is defined with an 
	initial value in a global definition file, and a value for $x is also assigned in 
	OPTIONS.ini or on the command line, and if $x is used in a data attachment, 
	and if the value of $x is later changed, the listener corresponding to the 
	initial value of $x is not removed.

Cache Data Source

16725: Support eviction of rows from Current Cache
	The cache data source has been enhanced as follows:
	
	- A new property named maxNumberOfCurrentRows has been added. Its 
	value specifies the maximum number of rows to be kept in a cache's 
	current table. The oldest rows in the current table will be removed if 
	necessary to maintain this limit. The default value of the property is blank, 
	indicating no limit on the number of rows. (In many cases it is not 
	necessary to place a numerical limit on the rows in the current table, 
	since the rows will be limited by the number of unique combinations of 
	index column values, or rows will be removed via other properties 
	described below. Or, in the case of a cache with no index columns, each 
	update replaces the entire current table). A value of zero can also be 
	used to specify no limit. The cache data source will check the 
	maxNumberOfCurrentRows limit at approximately 10 second intervals, 
	so the limit may be exceeded if new data is applied to the cache between 
	those intervals.
	
	- A new property named rowExpirationMode has been added. This 
	property gives users means for expiring rows in the current table. The 
	possible values for rowExpirationMode are Off, Mark, and Delete. The 
	default value is Off, indicating that row expiration is disabled. If set to 
	Delete, expired rows are deleted from the current table. If set to Mark, an 
	"Expired" column is added to to the current table and its value is set to 
	true in each expired row. If rowExpirationMode is set to either Mark or 
	Delete, the following additional properties appear in the property sheet:
	
	   rowExpirationTime - If a row in the current table is not update for the 
	time interval indicated by this property, then the row is considered to have 
	expired. The value should either be a number indicating seconds, or a 
	number followed by s, m, h, or d  indicating seconds, minutes, hours, or 
	days. The default value is blank, indicating no expiration time. (The cache 
	data source will check the expiration time limit at approximately 10 
	second intervals, so the limit may be exceeded by up to 10 seconds).
	
	   rowExpiredIndexColumns - The value of this property should be a 
	semicolon-separated list of column names, which must be some or all 
	of the names specified in the cache's indexColumnNamesProperty. On 
	each update to the cache, the set of values contained in the update for 
	the specified columns is recorded. After the update, any row in the 
	current table that has matching values for those columns, but was not 
	updated, is considered expired. In previous releases, this property was 
	named indexColumnNamesForDelete. See the release note for 15490 
	for more information and examples. The default value is blank.
	
	   rowExpiredColumnName - This appears in the property sheet only if 
	rowExpirationMode = Mark. Its value indicates the name of the Boolean 
	column that should be added to the cache's current table to indicate if a 
	row is expired. The default value is "Expired".
	 
	
	- To help clarify which properties affect the current table of a cache and 
	which affect the history table, two new categories have been added to the 
	Builder's property sheet for cache objects. These categories are named 
	"Cache Current Table" and "Cache History Table".  All of the new 
	properties described above are in the Cache Current Table category. As 
	indicated below, several existing cache properties have been moved to 
	one of the new categories, and some have also been renamed.
	
	Category: Cache Current Table
	Properties:
	    maxNumberOfCurrentRows  (new)
	    rowExpirationMode       (new)
	    rowExpirationTime       (new, hidden if rowExpirationMode = Off)
	    rowExpiredColumnName    (new, hidden unless rowExpirationMode = Mark)
	    rowExpiredIndexColumns  (existing, previously named indexColumnNamesForDelete, 
	           hidden if rowExpirationMode = Off)
	    rowsToDeleteTable       (existing, previously named deleteTable)
	
	Category: Cache History Table
	Properties:
	    allowDuplicatesInHistoryFlag (existing)
	    maxNumberOfHistoryRows  (existing, previously named maxNumberOfRows)
	    historyColumnNames      (existing)
	    historyTimeSpan         (existing, previously named timeSpan)
	    initialTable      (existing)

16728: New commands to load/reload/release caches
	Commands to add (load) and remove (unload) a cache definition file 
	have been added to the cache data source. The name of the cache 
	definition file and the substitutions, if any, to be applied when loading the 
	file are specified when the command is defined.  
	
	If an Add Cache Definition File command is executed and the file has 
	already been loaded with the same subs as specified in the command, 
	the file will be unloaded and then loaded again.
	
	If a * (asterisk) is specified as the cache definition file for a Remove 
	Cache Definition command, then the command will unload all cache 
	definition files. (The substitutions specified for the command, if any, are 
	ignored).
	
	If a * is specified as the cache definition file for an Add Cache Definition 
	command, then the command will unload and then reload all cache 
	definition files. (The substitutions specified for the command, if any, are 
	ignored).

16825: Show only hist columns in Compaction GroupBy Columns dialog
	When configuring a cache table, if columns have been specified in the 
	historyColumnNames property, then only those columns will appear in the 
	condenseRowsGroupBy dialog. Previously all column names from the 
	valueTable attachment appeared.

JMS Data Source

16795: JMS Resources now released when connection lost
	Previously, under some circumstances JMS connections would not release 
	external resources when a connection was lost. This is now no longer the 
	case.
	

JMX Data Source

16732: Optimizatings of MBeanInfoCache loading
	Two new options have been added to the JMX Data Source.
	
	1. jmx_optimize_mbics
	
	false (default) - mb info caches are updated every update cycle
	true - wait to update mb info caches until data objects are about to be 
	updated
	
	2. jmx_mbeans_change_dynamically
	
	true (default) - mb info caches are updated every update cycle
	false - mb info caches are NOT updated again after initial kick start. This 
	is useful for mBeans that stay the same all the time.
	
	

16827: Allow substitutions for the JMX Poll Interval
	Users my now enter a substitution for the Poll Interval in JMX data 
	attachment dialog.

Display Server

16755: Carriage return in text area no longer causes js exception
	The following problem is fixed:
	In the thin client, if a display has a text area control whose text string 
	contains a carriage return (\r) character , an "unterminated string constant" 
	javascript exception is thrown when the user drills down to the display.

16781: Concurrency issues when under load fixed
	As described in the RN for 16502, the display server now processes 
	requests from multiple clients concurrently. Under heavy load, the display 
	server may throw null pointer or array bounds exceptions because of 
	concurrency issues. These have been fixed.

16799: rtvdisplay servlet unresponsiveness fixed
	A bug which caused the rtvdisplay servlet to be unresponsive after several 
	clients opened pages using tab or accordion navigation controls has been 
	fixed.

16803: Fixed deadlock on Get Data Server Connection Status function
	A bug has been fixed which sometimes caused a deadlock in RTView while 
	loading a display file containing an instance of the function "Get Data Server 
	Connection Status".

16816: Fixed mem leak if objects in composite are attached to globals
	A memory leak in the display server, which involved objects in composite 
	displays attached to global variables or global functions, has been fixed.

Drill Down

16840: Drilldown/commands now executable from thin client tooltip
	In the thin client, an object's drill down or command can now be initiated 
	by clicking on the tooltip dot or bulls-eye. In prior releases, clicking on the 
	tooltip dot had no effect. 
	
	There are still some known issues:
	
	 - In IE, if a click on the tooltip dot triggers a drilldown in another window, 
	the pop-up browser window may open behind the main browser window.
	
	 - In some cases it may be necessary to click on the dot twice to trigger 
	the drilldown or command. Usually this happens if a display refresh 
	occurs just before or at the same time as the click.

Functions

16727: New function Mark Time Gaps
	A function named Mark Time Gaps has been added. Its description is as 
	follows:
	
	Prepare a table to be plotted on a trend graph so that a break or a 
	specific value will appear in the graph's trace line wherever the time gap 
	between 2 points is longer than expected, as follows: If the time interval 
	between any two rows in the table is greater than the expected interval, 
	then insert 2 new rows between those rows in which the value of each 
	column to be marked is set to NaN or other specified value. (NaN 
	indicates "not a number". A trend graph will break a trace line when a 
	NaN is encountered). The timestamp of the first new row is set to a value 
	of 1 msec more than the timestamp of the last row before the graph and 
	the timestamp of the second new row is set to a value of 1 msec less 
	than the timestamp of the next row after the gap. It is assumed that the 
	table is sorted by timestamp in ascending order. On the second and 
	subsequent updates of this function, the timestamp of the first row in the 
	table is compared to the timestamp of the last row from the previous 
	update.
	
	The function takes these arguments:
	
	Table - The table to be checked for time gaps. The table must have a 
	timestamp column and must be sorted by timestamp in ascending order.
	 
	Name of Timestamp Column - the name of the table's timestamp 
	column. 
	
	Expected Interval - The maximum time interval than should occur 
	between consecutive rows in the table. If this interval is exceeded, it is 
	considered a gap. Specify the interval in seconds or specify a value 
	followed by m, h, d, for minutes, hours, or days. 
	
	Names of Columns to Mark - the names of the columns to be marked 
	with the specified value when rows are added to mark a gap. Separate 
	multiple column names with semicolons. If no column names are 
	specified then all columns with floating point values will be marked.
	
	Mark Columns Width - The value to be assigned when marking columns 
	in the rows added to mark a gap. The default is NaN, but any numeric 
	value can be used.

16839: EnsureColumns enhanced to allow the definition of default values
	In the Display Builder, the Ensure Column function has been enhanced to 
	include a new argument, Value(s). This may be used to supply a list of 
	values which will be used to initialize columns that have been added to the 
	table (existing columns are not changed). The values are applied to the new 
	columns in the order they are created and converted to the corresponding 
	column type if possible; (otherwise the result is blank for string, 0 for 
	integer/long, NaN for double.)
	

Object Library

Fx Trend Chart

16845: Trace line on fxtrend no longer wobbles if timeShift > 0
	The following problem affecting obj_fxtrend has been fixed:
	
	If an obj_fxtrend has timeShift > 0 and a trace is attached to data from a data 
	server or a data source whose timestamps are offset from the time on the 
	local host by more than the timeShift value, then the trace line may jump 
	back and forth horizontally when a new data table is applied to the trace. 
	This occurs because the time axis will briefly be drawn with the newest data 
	timestamp at the right edge, and then immediately be redrawn with the local 
	time + timeShift at the right edge.

Version 5.8c1 Release Notes

16497: borderWidth property removed from obj_c1button
	In previous releases, the button control (obj_c1button) had an extraneous 
	property, borderWidth. This property has been removed.

Alerts

15764: New alertClearedCommand property
	The discrete, limits and multi state alerts have been enhanced to support 
	a new property, alertClearedCommand. If specified, this command is 
	executed when an alert is cleared. This command supports all of the 
	same alert substitutions as the alertCommand and 
	reNotificationCommand:
	
	$alertCommandText
	$alertCompValue
	$alertCurValue
	$alertEmailBody
	$alertEmailSubject
	$alertID
	$alertIndex
	$alertLabel
	$alertName
	$alertSeverity
	$alertText
	$alertTime

16474: Substitutions now correct when renotify command is multiple type
	In previous releases, if the reNotificationCommand was a multiple 
	command or if no reNotificationCommand was specified and the 
	alertCommand was a multiple command, the alert substitutions were not 
	applied correct to the renotification command. This has been fixed.

16483: AlertCommandText no longer chokes when receiving null data
	In previous releases, if a null value was found in a table attached to any 
	of the following properties, a NullPointerException was thrown:
	
	Discrete Alert:
	valueHighAlertCommandText
	valueMediumAlertCommandText
	valueLowAlertCommandText
	
	Limits Alert:
	valueHighAlertCommandText
	valueHighWarningCommandText
	valueLowAlertCommandText
	valueLowWarningCommandText
	
	Multi State Alert:
	alertStateNAlertCommandText 
	
	This has been fixed.

16486: Alert renotification now shows the current values of an alert.
	The alert renotification command has been enhanced to include current 
	values for the $alertCurValue, $alertEmailBody and $alertText properties. In 
	previous releases, this has been the value that triggered the alert, but it has 
	now been enhanced to show the current value.

16578: Alerting Engine enabled status now available for use in displays
	The enabled status of the alerting engine is now available for use in displays.
	
	The AlertingEnabled status is exposed as an  Alert Data Source data 
	attachment with the Alert Variable (table) name AlertingEnabled. This is a 
	table of one row, with one column of Type Boolean. The column name is 
	AlertingEnabled.

16637: Optimize alert performance
	The performance of the alert data source has been improved. Both the 
	processing and the listener updates have been optimized to increase 
	performance.

Builder

16321: TIBCO EMS 5.x jars now found
	RTView has been updated to find TIBCO EMS jars in either 
	TIBJMS_ROOT/lib, or in TIBJMS_ROOT/clients/java.

Commands

16318: Command parameters now support function and DS attachments
	Several fields in the drill down dialog and command dialogs have been 
	enhanced to support data attachments. To attach a field to data, 
	right-click and choose Attach to Data or double-click on the field. The 
	popup menu also supports Copy, Paste, Detach from Data and Display 
	Data which behave the same way the corresponding popup menu 
	options do in the Object Property Dialog. 
	
	All command properties support data attachments except for Heartbeat 
	Commands. 
	
	The following fields have been enhanced to support the new popup 
	menu:
	
	Drill Down Target Dialog:
	- Drill Down Display Name
	- Window Title
	- The Value column in the Drill Down Substitutions table
	
	System Command Dialog:
	- All fields in the main dialog except the Command Type field and the 
	Browser Window field.
	- In the Drill Down Target sub dialog: Drill Down Display Name, Window 
	Title and the Value column the in Drill Down Substitutions table
	- In the SNMP sub-dialog: Destination Address, Destination Port and 
	Community Name
	
	SQL Command Dialog:
	- Database Name
	- SQL Command
	
	JMX Command Dialog:
	- The method argument fields
	
	Alert Command Dialog:
	- All fields except Command and Data Server
	
	JMS Command Dialog:
	- Destination Type
	- Message Type
	- Topic Name
	- The Value column in the Fields & Properties table
	
	TIBCO Rendezvous Command Dialog:
	- Message Subject
	- The Value column in the Fields table
	
	TIBCO Hawk Command Dialog:
	- The method argument fields

16583: Custom SMTP port can now be specified for system email commands
	It is now possible to define a custom SMTP Port for sending email via a 
	System Command.

Customization

15780: Access provided to custom GmsRtViewDsAdapter from GmsRtViewDs
	The com.sl.gmsjrtviewds.GmsRtViewDs class now includes a field, 
	"dsAdapter", to access the GmsRtViewDsAdapter for the custom data 
	source.

Data Historian

15789: Column now compacted using "count" when it is the only column
	Previously, if a column was being compacted using the "count" 
	groupByTime, and it was the only column of data being compacted, the SQL
	statement would insert the compacted data incorrectly. The word "Count" 
	was substituted for the column name of the compacted column.
	
	This has been fixed.

16427: Historian now correctly resigns in redundant server group
	A bug has been fixed which under certain conditions allowed more than one 
	Historian to be the primary server in a redundant server group.

16449: Errors with column names and table creation fixed
	The quoteColumnNames property on a Historian table was being ignored 
	when:
	
	* quoteColumnNames is true
	* Compaction Rules have been specified that involve Multiple Output Tables
	* the default level of database table reset is used. i.e. no -rebuildtables and 
	no -noreset arguments, which implies resetting and purging the tables on 
	every use.

16616: "store last value" now stores table rows from all attachments
	The historian's "Store Last Value Only" feature has been improved to store 
	the last set of rows applied to each object that specifies a given database 
	table name in its historyTableName property. This is useful in a historian 
	configuration where multiple objects specify the same database table 
	name.  Previously only the rows for the last object to be updated were stored.

Compaction

16415: New data now collected when smoothing process is active
	New data is now stored while the smoothing process is active.

16595: Historian Displacement support improved
	The Historian displacement feature is now supported for DB2, MySQL, and 
	Sybase.

Data Server

16219: New rtvquery web app rtvquery added
	A new web app named rtvquery has been added to RTView. 
	
	The rtvquery servlet allows custom client applications to retrieve data 
	tables from the RTView Data Server via a REST interface. The client 
	sends an http GET to the servlet specifying the query parameters and the 
	servlet returns the query result in XML, JSON, or plain text format.
	
	For a complete description of the features and use of the rtvquery servlet, 
	see the README.txt file in the servlets/rtvquery subdirectory of RTView 
	installation directory. Also, several examples of client apps can be found 
	the subdirectory custom/rtvquery-samples. See the README.txt file in 
	that directory for details.

16451: Verbose mode syntax corrected
	The Data Server -verbose option was corrected to output "push N bytes to 
	client" rather than "push N xml chars to client", since the Data Server sends 
	data to client as binary data not xml text.
	
	Note that the byte count is an approximation and should only be used for 
	comparing the relative sizes of data sets pushed by the Data Server.

16519: Empty string for Data Server field in command correctly handled
	In prior releases, if a substitution was entered in the Data Server field of a 
	data source command the the substitution's value was an empty string, and 
	if a default data server was in use when the command was executed, an 
	error dialog with the message "Unable to execute command" would appear. 
	This has been fixed so that an empty string in the Data Server field will be 
	treated the same as . That is, the command will be executed on 
	the default data server, if any. If there is no default data server then the 
	command should be executed locally. This is consistent when an empty 
	string is specified for the Data Server field in a data attachment.

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

16425: Cache persistence bug for certain databases fixed
	In 5.7, the cache persistence feature did not work if a mixed-case or 
	lower-case table name was specified for the cache's currentTableName or 
	historyTableName property and a case-sensitive database, such as hsqldb, 
	was used. This is fixed.

16457: Additional metadata available in RTViewDs cache tables.
	The cache named RTViewDs cache contains tables with information 
	about each table maintained by the cache data source. In this release, 
	the RTViewDs table named Tables has been enhanced to include a 
	column named "%Full" and a new table with cache configuration 
	information, named CacheDefs, has been added.
	
	1. %Full column: RTViewDs.Tables contains runtime information about 
	the size of each cache table. In this release, a new column named 
	"%Full" has been added to the table. For history tables, this column 
	shows the table's actual row count divided by its maxNumberOfRows 
	limit or (if the cache's timeSpan limit is nonzero) the table's actual time 
	span divided by its timeSpan limit, whichever is larger. The value is 
	converted to a percentage between 0 and 100.  
	
	Note that if the history table's size is limited by the timeSpan property, the 
	%Full value may never quite reach 100%, because the actual time span 
	of the rows remaining in the table after old rows are removed may be 
	somewhat less than timeSpan.
	
	For non-history (current) tables, the value of the %Full column is always 
	NaN, since RTView does not impose a size limit on those tables.
	
	2. RTViewDs.cacheDefs table: This new table contains the following 
	columns, with one row for each table defined by the cache data source:
	
	      Tag - cache name + "." + table name
	      Cache - cache name
	      Table - table name
	      AllColumns  - all column names
	      IndexColumns - index column names
	      DataColumns - non-index column names
	      TimestampColumn - timestamp column name
	      AllColumnTypes - data types for all columns ("string","int","double","date",etc)
	      MaxRows - value of maxNumberOfRows property (history table only)
	      TimeSpan - value of timeSpan property (history table only)
	      Description - value of description property
	      File - name of rtv file from which cache definition object was loaded

16459: Exception in cache page filtering fixed
	The following problem affecting the advanced filter option in a cache data 
	source attachment has been fixed: 
	
	If an attachment was made to the current table of a cache and the value of 
	Rows Per Page was greater than zero and the value of Page Number times 
	Rows per Page was greater than the total number of rows in the cache's 
	current table, then an ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException was thrown.

16512: Filter on non-index column of current cache now allows updates
	The following problem with the cache data source has been fixed:
	
	If a cache has one or more index columns and an attachment is made to the 
	current table of that cache, and the attachment specifies a filter column 
	which is not also an index column, then the attachment will always behave 
	as though the "Update Once" option is checked, even if it is not. That is, the 
	current table will be applied to attachment once when the display is opened, 
	but any subsequent updates to the current table are ignored.

16517: Allow Time Ranged Cache queries to access historical database
	The cache data source has been enhanced to use SQL to extend the 
	time range of a cache's history table. 
	
	Background (cache history features supported in this release and prior 
	releases):
	
	A cache's history table is kept in memory. The size and time range of the 
	data in the history table is determined by the cache's 
	maxNumberOfRows property and (optionally) its timeSpan property. 
	
	The cache persistence feature (15215, introduced in RTView 5.3) allows 
	a cache definition file to be used as a data configuration file for the 
	Historian, so that the cache history data is stored in a database table. 
	The database and table names are specified by the cache object.
	
	When the cache data source is initialized, it will preload the history 
	table's of all cache's that use the cache persistence feature, by making 
	appropriate SQL queries. However, the number of rows that will be 
	loaded from the database into the cache's in-memory history table is 
	limited by the cache's maxNumberOfRows and (if specified) its timeSpan property values.
	
	When making a data attachment to a cache's history table, the Advanced 
	Filter options in the attachment dialog can be used to specify the time 
	period of interest, using the Time Range, Begin Time, and End Time 
	fields.
	
	Enhancement (cache history feature added in this release):
	
	Beginning with this release, a cache can be configured so that an SQL 
	query will be used to retrieve data from an external database if the time 
	period specified in a data attachment extends beyond the range available 
	in the cache's in-memory history table. This feature provides a 
	convenient way to retrieve cache data that was stored in a database by 
	the RTView Historian and use it on displays.
	
	To use this feature for a cache named "C1" :
	
	 - C1 must have a database table name assigned to its 
	historyTableName property
	 - C1 must have maxNumberOfRows > 0
	 - The rtv file that defines C1 must be loaded by the RTView Historian as 
	a Data Configuration file (so that the Historian will store the cache data in 
	the database table specified by C1's historyTableName property)
	 - There must be an SQL database connection defined for the database 
	specified in C1's databaseName property or, if C1's databaseName 
	property is blank, there must be an database connection to the default 
	RTVHISTORY database.
	
	When making a data attachment to C1's history table, the user can select 
	"Filter Rows = Advanced" and specify the time period of interest, and 
	check the new "Extend with SQL" option. If the time period extends 
	beyond the oldest row of data in the cache's history table, an SQL query 
	will be performed to fetch the data for the missing time period. The 
	database specified by cache C1's databaseName property will be used 
	for the query, or if databaseName is blank then the default 
	"RTVHISTORY" is used. The table name used in the query is the value 
	specified by C1's historyTableName property.
	
	The "Extend with SQL" checkbox will be enabled only if either the "Time 
	Range" or the "Begin Time" fields are non-blank, and the selected table 
	name in the Table dropdown list is not "current". See the release note for 
	task 15936 for a description of the usage of these fields. Note that a 
	substitution string (e.g. $beginTime) can be entered for any of these 
	fields.
	
	If the value in the "Maximum Rows" field (labeled "Rows per Page" in 
	previous releases) is nonzero, then it will be used to limit the row size of 
	any SQL query that is performed to satisfy the time period in the 
	attachment. When "Extend with SQL" is selected, a default value of 1000 
	is automatically entered but can be changed by the user. A value of zero 
	or blank means no limit.

16518: Compaction mechanism implemented for cache data source
	A data compaction feature has been added to the Cache Data Source. 
	This feature condenses the history table of a cache by periodically 
	applying a calculation (average,min, max,etc) to each column and storing 
	a single result row in another cache table.
	
	This new feature complements the Historian's data compaction feature, 
	available in prior releases, which can be configured to compact rows in 
	databases tables as the data "ages".  To distinguish between these 
	features, the Historian feature is referred to as "secondary compaction" 
	since it operates on database tables, and the new cache data source 
	feature is referred to as "primary compaction" since it operates on 
	in-memory cache tables. 
	
	When a tabular cache object is selected in the Builder, the property sheet 
	will show a category named "Data Compaction : Primary (in-memory)". 
	Initially this category contains a single property named 
	condenseRowsFlag, which is unchecked by default. If the 
	condenseRowsFlag property is checked, the primary compaction feature 
	is enabled for the cache and the cache will maintain four data tables, 
	instead of just "current" and "history". The tables are as follows:
	
	1. current: stores the most recent row of raw data for each unique index 
	column value combination
	
	2. history: stores raw data history, for the time span specified by the 
	cache's condenseRowsRawDataTimeSpan property (see below).
	
	3. current_condensed: stores the most recent row of condensed data for 
	each unique index column value combination.
	
	4. history_condensed: stores condensed data history, limited by the 
	cache's timeSpan and/or maxNumberOfRows properties.
	
	In addition, if the condenseRowsCombineHistoryFlag property is 
	checked (see below) a fifth table will be maintained by the cache:
	
	5. history_combo: stores rows of recent raw data followed by rows of 
	older condensed data. The raw data rows extend from the current time 
	back for the number of seconds specified by the 
	condenseRowsRawDataTimeSpan property. The condensed rows are 
	limited by the timeSpan and/or maxNumberOfRows properties.
	
	When condenseRowsFlag is checked, the following additional 
	properties will appear in the property sheet.
	
	condenseRowsInterval : The time interval at which the cache history 
	should be condensed. Enter a value in the format NNu where NN is a 
	number and u is a single character s,m,h,d,w for seconds, minutes, 
	hours, days, or weeks, indicating the time unit. If only a number is 
	entered, it is assumed to be seconds.
	
	condenseRowsGroupBy: A string that specifies the calculation to be 
	performed on each data column in the cache table. The format of the 
	string is name1:calc1;name2;calc2... where nameN is the name of data 
	column N and calcN is the calculation to be performed on the values in 
	the column for each time interval. The supported calculations are 
	average, min, max, and sum. The value for this property is configured 
	from a dialog which allows the user to pick a column name and then pick 
	the calculation for that column. If a calculation is not specified for a data 
	column, then "sum" is used. Calculations are not applied to the data 
	table's index columns or to the timestamp column.
	
	condenseRowsRawDataTimeSpan : The time span of raw data kept in 
	the cache's history table and, if enabled, its history_combo table.
	
	condenseRowsCombineHistoryFlag: If checked, the cache will keep the 
	history_combo table as described above.
	
	The condenseRowsFlag also affects the RTView behavior when 
	persisting a cache to or restoring it from a database. If 
	condenseRowsFlag is checked on cache C1 then:
	
	1) if the cache def file is used as an historian config file, the historian will 
	store only the condensed rows for C1, in the database table specified by 
	C1's historyTableName property
	
	2) when the cache def file is loaded by an RTView app (other than the 
	historian) the database table specified by C1's historyTableName is 
	queried to get the initial rows for C1.history_condensed and, if enabled, 
	C1.history_combo.
	
	This is useful in cases where the historian should only store data that 
	has already undergone primary compaction, rather than storing raw data 
	which arrives in high volumes.

16620: New historyColumnNames property for obj_cache_table
	By default, the current table and the history table of a cache store the 
	same columns. In many cases this is desirable. But data sources may 
	supply data tables containing columns whose values are static (e.g 
	units, version number, description, etc).While it can be useful to store 
	these values in the cache's current table, they will take up memory and 
	database space when storing repeatedly in the history tables at each 
	update.
	
	To address this issue, a property named historyColumnNames has 
	been added to the cache table object. The property can be used to 
	specify a semicolon-separated list of the names of the columns which 
	should be stored in the cache history. The default value is blank which 
	indicates that all columns from the current table should also be stored in 
	the history table. 
	
	The columns specified by historyColumnNames must be a subset of the 
	columns in the cache's current table. If a column specified in 
	historyColumnNames does not appear in the current table, it will be 
	ignored. If a column is not specified in historyColumnNames but the 
	column is specified in either indexColumnNames or 
	timestampColumnName, the column will still be included in the history 
	table. This is because the index columns and the timestamp column are 
	needed for use and maintenance of the history table. The order in which 
	the column names are specified in historyColumnNames does not affect 
	the order in which they will appear in the history table, they will appear in 
	the same order as they do in the current table.
	
	Changing the names specified in historyColumnNames could lead to 
	incompatibility with data previously stored by the historian. Note that this 
	is also an issue with changes made to the cache's schemaTable or the 
	cache's valueTable attachment.

16653: Cache data dialog no longer replaces sub in Table field
	A problem has been fixed in the Attach to Cache Data dialog that caused the 
	Table field to show the value with substitutions applied, rather than the 
	user-entered value.

16654: Cache Attach to data Dialog discovers caches on data servers
	If the Builder is connected to a data server, it will retrieve the names of 
	the caches deployed on the default or named data servers.  These 
	names will populate the Cache, Table, and Columns drop down lists 
	and will be available for selection in the Attach to Cache Data dialog.
	
	The names shown in the dropdown lists are determine by the value 
	selected in the Data Server field of the dialog, as follows:
	
	If Data Server = <default> then the names of the caches deployed on 
	the default data server are shown. If the Builder is not connected to a 
	default data server, the names of the caches loaded locally by the cache 
	data source are shown.
	
	If Data Server = <none> then the names of the caches loaded locally 
	by the cache data source are shown.
	
	Any other value for Data Server is assumed to be the name of a Named 
	Data Server, and the names  the caches deployed on that  data server 
	are shown. 
	
	If the Builder requests the cache names from a data server and gets no 
	response within 10 seconds, the dropdown lists will be empty.
	
	This enhancement does not affect the cache names shown in the 
	Caches window that is opened from the Builder's Tools menu. That 
	window only displays caches that are loaded locally by the cache data 
	source.

16657: Empty Filter Value for cache attachment again returns no rows
	If a cache data attachment specifies a valid Filter Column and the Filter 
	Value specifies a substitution whose value is an empty string, the 
	attachment will return a table with no rows. That was the behavior prior to 
	release 5.6. In 5.6 and 5.7, all rows were returned as though the data 
	attachment specified no filter, which was incorrect.

IBM WebSphere MQ Administration Data Source

16560: Option to allow user to specify PCF request wait interval
	A new command line argument to specify the PCF request wait interval 
	has been added.
	
	The syntax of the command is:
	
	-mqwaitinterval:: 
	
	e.g -mqwaitinterval:sltest:100 
	
	The additional argument -mqdstrace can be used to provide information 
	about the PCF request elapsed time.
	
	-mqdstrace:3 will return elapsed time
	
	-mqdstrace:5 will provide elapsed time and additional information about
	the content of the PCF request

16564: Added Capability to specify model queue name for connection
	A new command line argument, -mqmodelqueuename, has been 
	added. This argument is used to specify  a named model queue for a 
	named connection. It sets the name of the model queue used by the 
	agent to create its reply queue, which is a temporary dynamic queue.
	
	The syntax of the command is:
	
	-mqmodelqueuename::
	
	e.g. -mqmodelqueuename:myConn:MY.MODEL.QUEUE.NAME
	
	The additional argument -mqdstrace can be used to provide confirmation 
	about the value specified on the command line 
	
	e.g. ibmadm: Model Queue Name for connection: myConn : specified as 
	: MY.MODEL.QUEUE.NAME
	
	-mqdstrace:3  will show the use of the value when a connection is established
	
	e.g. ibmadm: ... Setting model queue name specified for MQ connection: 
	myConn : to : MY.MODEL.QUEUE.NAME

JMS Data Source

16577: Custom jms handler added for BytesMessages and ObjectMessages
	The JMS data source has been enhanced to support a custom JMS  
	handler to parse BytesMessage and ObjectMessage content. To get the 
	content from a BytesMessage or ObjectMessage, create a subclass of 
	com.sl.gmsjjmsds.GmsJRtViewCustomJmsHandler and add it to 
	RTV_USERPATH. By default, RTView looks for a class named 
	MyJmsHandler. To specify an alternate name, use the 
	-jms_customhandlername:className command line option. Include 
	gmsjrtview.jar and gmsjjmsds.jar (in the lib directory of your RTView 
	installation) and the jms.jar from your JMS vendor in the classpath when 
	building this subclass.
	
	The GmsJRtViewCustomCommandHandler has 3 methods you may 
	override in your subclass:
	
	public void initialize() - This method is called once after the class is 
	instanced in case the subclass needs to perform some initialization.
	
	public String getBytesMessageStringContent (BytesMessage bytesMsg) - 
	This method is called every time a BytesMessage is received. 
	Subclasses should override this method to return a String representation 
	of the byte[] from the message body.
	
	
	public GmsTabularData getObjectMessageTableContent 
	(ObjectMessage objectMsg) - This method is called every time an 
	ObjectMessage is received. Subclasses should override this method to 
	return a GmsTabularData representation of the Object in the message 
	body.
	
	
	For example:
	
	import com.sl.gmsjjmsds.*;
	import javax.jms.*;
	import javax.jms.*;
	import com.sl.gmsjrt.*;
	
	public class MyJmsHandler extends GmsRtViewCustomJmsHandler
	{
	
	public void initialize ()
	{
	}
	
	public String getBytesMessageStringContent (BytesMessage bytesMsg)
	{
	        try {
	        	byte[] bytes = new byte[(int)bytesMsg.getBodyLength()];
	        	bytesMsg.readBytes(bytes);
	        	return new String(bytes);
	
	        } catch (Exception e) {
	                System.out.println("ERROR: Can't parse BytesMessage < " +
	                        bytesMsg + ">. Caught exception: " + e);
	        }
	        return null;
	}
	
	public GmsTabularData getObjectMessageTableContent (ObjectMessage objMsg)
	{
		try {
			Object obj = objMsg.getObject();
	
			if (obj == null) 
				return null;
	
			if (obj instanceof Vector)
				return processVector((Vector)obj);
			
			else 
				return processString(String.valueOf(obj));
	
		} catch (Exception e) {
			System.out.println("ERROR: Can't parse Object < " + 
				objMsg + ">. Caught exception: " + e);
		}
	
		return null;
	}
	
	private GmsTabularData processVector (Vector<String[]> v)
	{
	
		GmsTabularData data = new GmsTabularData();
		data.addColumn("Plant", GmsTabularData.STRING);
		data.addColumn("Status", GmsTabularData.STRING);
		data.addColumn("Units Completed", GmsTabularData.STRING);
	
	
		String[] plants = v.elementAt(0);
		String[] statuses = v.elementAt(1);
		String[] units = v.elementAt(2);
		if (plants == null || statuses == null || units == null)
			return data;
	
		for (int i = 0; i < plants.length; i++) {
			data.addRow("");
			data.setCellValue(plants[i], i, 0);
			data.setCellValue(statuses[i], i, 1);
			data.setCellValue(units[i], i, 2);
		}
	
		return data;
	}
	
	private GmsTabularData processString (String s)
	{
		if (s == null)
			s = "";
		GmsTabularData data = new GmsTabularData();
		data.addColumn("Value", GmsTabularData.STRING);
	
		data.addRow("");
		data.setCellValue(s, 0, 0);
	
		return data;
	}
	
	}
	
	XML data embedded in both BytesMessage content and ObjectMessage 
	content can be used to define a JMS alias. To show all xml content of a 
	bytes message add the following to your JMSALIAS.ini file:
	
	OrderInfo myConnection orders.STATUS.* $xml:<TEXT>
	
	To show the data from a specific xml tag in the bytes message content, 
	add something like the following:
	
	$xml:<TEXT>::Orders::Order
	
	Where Orders::Order specifies the path to the xml element to display. 
	
	Since the ObjectMessage callback returns a GmsTabularData, use the 
	column name of the field containing the xml data:
	
	OrderInfo myConnection orders.STATUS.* Production::$xml:OrderData
	
	Where OrderData is the name of the column containing the xml data. 
	Note that only the value from the cell in the first row is used. To show the 
	data from a specific xml tag of an ObjectMessage table, add something 
	like the following:
	
	CustomerInfo myConnection orders.STATUS.* $xml:OrderData::Orders::Order::Customer
	
	Where Orders::Order::Customer defines the path to the xml element to 
	display.

JMX Data Source

16274: String arrays nested within TabularData now handled in JMX DS
	String arrays nested within TabularData are now handled in JMX Data Source.

16441: Connection information now always available
	All JMX Connection types, including single connection, * connection and 
	connections groups now show the Connection attribute by default.
	
	The command line argument to turn off surfacing the Connection argument 
	for non-multiple connections is
	
	-jmxdsShowConnectionOnlyOnMultiples
	
	and the JMXOptions.ini file keyword is 
	
	jmxdsShowConnectionOnlyOnMultiples true"

16455: Support Commands with JMX Connection Groups
	Support has been added for commands to work with defined JMX 
	Connection  Groups.

16624: JMX arguments now visible for two mBeans with same method name
	If same method existed in two JMX mBeans, the second one did not show 
	the argument in the RTView JMX Command dialog.

16625: A key and attribute of the same name no longer causes blank rows
	The following problem has been fixed:
	
	If a JMX mBean delivers both an Attribute and a Key Property with identical 
	names, the data returned would show two rows for each bean instead of 
	one.
	
	Additionally, the Attribute column would be missing.  Now the Attribute 
	column is shown with a "2" or a "_2" appended to ensure uniqueness.
	
	This code uses the RTView JMX DS convention that a Column name collision and use of one of the two colliding columns in column zero will force the column zero use to be assumed to be the Attribute and renamed.

16659: Host var no longer NULL when JMX connection is using a url
	The Host and Port values in the RTViewDs:type=Connection mBean could 
	be Null if the URL method of connection was used.  This could cause 
	Exceptions to be thrown in the Console under certain circumstances.

SQL Data Source

16317: Attach To SQL Data's Query interval now allows variables
	A substitution string can now be entered in the Query Interval field of the 
	Attach to SQL Data dialog. Previously only a numeric value was permitted.

16531: Cancel SQL query when last listener removed
	The SQL data source has been enhanced to abort a query if it is still 
	executing when the last data attachment to the query is removed, to improve 
	overall performance. In prior releases, the query was allowed to complete 
	even though the query result was then discarded.

StreamBase Data Source

15887: Corrected problems with stream filter interface.
	In the Display Builder Application Options for StreamBase, if you create a 
	physical stream with no logical stream, the SBOPTIONS.ini file was written 
	incorrectly, using the keyword "stream" instead of the correct keyword 
	"sbstream". This could also happen if you had read in and were converting 
	an options file from previous releases containing the keyword "streams", 
	which would result in an options file containing one or more instances of the 
	incorrect keyword "stream". This has been fixed.

TIBCO Hawk Data Source

16329: Loading order of TIBCO jars changed
	The library tibrvj.jar is now added to the classpath after tibrvjms.jar, to avoid 
	Hawk Agent errors.

Display Server

14651: Pagination supported added to tables in the Display Server.
	A new Display Server option improves the performance of displays 
	containing table objects (obj_table02) with many rows. The option 
	enables server-side table paging and sorting mode, or "paging mode" 
	for short. In paging mode, the display server sends only a portion (a 
	"page") of the the table's data rows to the thin client, rather than sending 
	all of the rows at once. This avoids the sluggish performance, timeouts, 
	and out-of-memory exceptions that might otherwise occur from 
	processing and transmitting all of the rows at once. 
	
	The page of rows sent from the display server to the thin client will 
	include all of the rows currently visible in the thin client plus additional 
	rows above and/or below the visible rows. If the user scrolls beyond the 
	rows contained in the current page or clicks on a column header to 
	change the sorting order, the display server will send another page of 
	rows in response.
	
	The new option can be specified on the command line as follows:
	
		> run_displayserver -cellsperpage:NNNN
	
	or in the DISPLAYSERVER.ini file as follows:
	
		cellsperpage NNNN
	
	where NNNN specifies the number of table cells that the server should 
	include per page. The number of cells in a table is the number of rows 
	times the number of columns. For example, say cellsperpage = 10000 
	and a display named D1 contains a table T1 with 5 columns. The display 
	server will use a page size of 2000 rows for table T1. This means that the 
	display server will send at most 2000 rows to the thin client at a time, for 
	table T1. If T1 contains, say, 40,000 rows then when a user opens D1 in 
	the thin client the display server will send rows 1 through 2000 to the thin 
	client. If the user then scrolls to the bottom of the table, the server will 
	send rows 38,001 through 40,000 to the thin client in response.  
	Similarly, if the user clicks on a column header to sort by that column, the 
	display server will sort the table and send the first 2000 sorted rows to 
	the thin client. After the user scrolls or sorts a table in paging mode, the 
	thin client will display '...' in each cell and an hourglass cursor will appear 
	over the table while it waits to receive the new page from the server. 
	
	A smaller value for cellsperpage reduces the memory requirements for 
	processing large tables in the Display Server, App Server, and browser. A 
	larger value makes for smoother scrolling in the thin client because it 
	increases the number of rows through which the thin client can scroll 
	before it needs to request another page from the server. 
	
	Typical values for cellsperpage are 10000 to 30000. 
	
	If the cellsperpage option is not specified or if a value < 1000 is specified 
	then paging mode is disabled and the display server will always send all 
	data rows to thin client for all tables regardless of the table size (as in all 
	prior releases). Also, if a table contains fewer cells than the cellsperpage 
	setting, the display server will send all rows for that table.
	
	Notes:
	
	- Paging mode only affects the behavior of obj_table02 objects, and only 
	in the thin client.
	
	- The maxNumberOfRows property on obj_table02 is still used to limit 
	the maximum number of rows that will be shown in the table, regardless 
	of the cellsperpage setting.
	
	Know Issues / Limitations:
	
	- After scrolling to a new page, if the user immediately drags the scrollbar 
	again, the table may not react. The user may need to nudge the scrollbar 
	knob or click on the scroll up/down arrows to force the table to react.
	
	- The "Export Table to Excel/HTML/PDF" feature of the thin client is not 
	affected by paging mode, so attempts to export a table with many rows 
	may result in timeouts or out-of-memory exceptions in the display server 
	or in the rtvdisplay servlet. To avoid those errors, see the description of 
	the Display Server options "cellsperexport" and "cellsperreport" in the 
	release note for 16438.
	
	- When displaying a table with more than 75,000 rows in Internet Explorer 
	version 8, the last row in the table may partially obscured even if the 
	scrollbar knob is dragged to the bottom position. The last row can be 
	made visible by using the mouse wheel but that may cause unused 
	space to appear at the bottom of the table.
	
	- After the user clicks a column to sort a table, the table's vertical scrollbar 
	is reset to the top position.
	
	- The thin client ignores the scrollToSelectionFlag property on a table that 
	is in paging mode.
	
	- A table's row selection is cleared when a different page of rows is 
	received from the display server. So if a table is in paging mode, then 
	only rows that are on the current page can be selected, even if the table's 
	multiSelectFlag property is checked.

16391: Displayserver now recognizes users/roles files in OPTIONS.ini
	In prior releases, the Display Server did not recognize the users or roles 
	path in OPTIONS.ini. This is fixed.

16438: Display server option to limit data export
	The Display Server supports to new options, -cellsperexport and 
	-cellsperreport. These options can be used to limit number of table cells 
	included in HTML/Excel exports and PDF exports, respectively, requested 
	by the thin client, to avoid memory exceptions and timeouts when 
	exporting tables with many rows.
	
	These new options would typically be used in conjunction with the 
	-cellsperpage option described in the RN for 14651.
	
	An export to PDF is more CPU and memory intensive than an export to 
	Html/Excel, so typically the value of the cellsperreport option would be 
	smaller than cellsperexport.
	
	For example, if an export to HTML/Excel was performed on a table had 5 
	columns and 100,000 rows, and the option -cellsperexport:30000 was 
	specified when the Display Server was launched, then 6000 rows 
	(30000/5) would be included in an exported HTML/Excel file for that table. 
	If the -cellsperreport:5000 option was specified, then an export to PDF 
	would include 1000 rows from the table.
	
	Note that the exported HTML/excel table will start with the same first row 
	(give or take a row) that is visible in the thin client. That is, if you scroll to 
	row 900 in the thin client and then do an HTML/excel export, the exported 
	table should start at about line 900. However, in an exported PDF file, the 
	scroll position of the thin client has no effect on the starting row in the 
	PDF.
	
	If the cellsperexport option is not specified or if a value < 1000 is 
	specified then the display server will always attempt to export all rows for 
	all tables regardless of the table size (as in all prior releases). Also, if a 
	table contains fewer cells than the cellsperexport setting, the display 
	server will export all rows for that table.
	
	If the cellsperreport option is not specified or if a value < 1000 is 
	specified then the display server will always attempt to include all rows 
	for all tables in a PDF report regardless of the table size. Also, if a table 
	contains fewer cells than the cellsperreport setting, the display server will 
	include all rows for that table in a PDF report.
	
	If the rows included in an export to Html/Excel are limited by the 
	cellsperexport option, then the first row in the exported file will be the 
	same as the first row currently visible in the thin client. In an exported 
	PDF file, however, the scroll position in the thin client has no effect on the 
	rows that are included in the PDF report.
	
	The options can be specified on the command line or in 
	DISPLAYSERVER.ini. For example, on the command line:
	
	> run_displayserver -cellsperpage:10000 -cellsperexport:30000 -cellsperreport:5000
	
	The equivalent in DISPLAYSERVER.ini:
	
	cellsperpage 10000
	cellsperexport 30000
	cellsperreport 5000
	
	Note that none of these options are recognized by the Builder or Viewer.

16502: Provide Multiple Connection Threads for Display Server
	To improve response times on multi-CPU systems, the rtvdisplay servlet 
	has been enhanced to use a pool of connections to the Display Server.  By 
	default, the servlet will open up to 10 simultaneous connections to the 
	Display Server, allowing it to process up to 10 display requests 
	simultaneously. The connection pool size is determined by the following 
	entry in rtvdisplay.properties:
	
	   DisplayServerConnectionPool=10

16525: Corrected memory leak with non-flex graph mouseover
	A display server memory leak has been fixed. The leak was triggered by 
	non-flex objects with mouseover enabled, and affected releases 5.6c1 and 
	5.7c1 only.

16528: Row header now always resizes correctly in thin client
	A problem in the thin client which sometimes caused the row header 
	column in a table to have the wrong width has been fixed.

16570: rtvuser change no longer delayed in thin client
	In a thin client URL the rtvuser and rtvpass parameters or the rtvsign 
	parameter can be used to specify the username and password, to bypass 
	the interactive login prompt. In this release a problem has been fixed which 
	delayed the effect of a change to these parameters until the first refresh of 
	the thin client. Until the first refresh, user-specific substitutions either had no 
	value or, if another user was previously logged in from the same browser 
	session, remained set to the values for the previous user.

16614: Newline in control's mouseover text no longer causes js error
	In previous releases, if the value of a control object's mouseOverText 
	property contained a newline the thin client would throw an "unterminated 
	string constant" javascript exception when the display was refreshed. This is 
	fixed.
	
	Even with this fix, only Internet Explorer will display multiple lines of text for 
	the mouseover on a control object. In all other browsers, the mouseover text 
	for a control object is always shown as a single line.

16702: Setting global var to value of a sub/var on dd now works
	The following problem which affected the Display Server in prior releases 
	has been fixed:
	
	A drilldown substitution configured to set $var = $sub, where $var is a global 
	variable,  would set $var = "$sub" rather than $var = value of $sub, in the 
	case where $var was a global variable.

Functions

16393: Selector list returns "All" option if Selector Table is empty
	In the Display Builder, the Create Selector List function would return a null 
	table if  the Selector Table had no rows. It will now return a single row 
	consisting of the All Selector Name.

16440: Join function now correctly copies NaN values
	In the Display Builder, the Join and Join Outer functions, when encountering 
	a NaN value in a Float or Double, would substitute zero. The NaN value will 
	now be copied into the output table by these functions.

16628: GroupBy now allows "count" in conjunction with other types
	The GroupBy functions have been enhanced so that a "count" type 
	encountered within a set of multiple types will force the returned column to 
	be of integer type so it works properly.

16629: New "Delta And Rate Rows" function
	In the Display Builder a new function Delta And Rate Rows has been 
	added. This is an extension of the Delta Rows function that returns a rate 
	of change as well as a delta values column for each selected data 
	column. The function help text follows.
	
	The Delta And Rate Rows function returns a table including, for the 
	specified columns, new values for the difference between this update 
	and the previous, along with the rate of change per second. The new 
	values may be appended to the input table in columns named by 
	prefixing "Delta" and "Rate" to the column name, or the delta columns 
	may replace the corresponding input columns (the rate columns will still 
	be appended to the table). 
	
	Table - The table of interest. 
	
	Delta Column Names - The names of one or more columns for which 
	deltas will be calculated. At least one name must be given. 
	
	Index Column Names - The names of one or more columns that 
	uniquely identify a row in the table.  If left blank, the default is to calculate 
	deltas for all rows as if they had the same value. The values contained in 
	each index column are concatenated to form a unique index used to 
	organize the resulting summary data. 
	
	Time Column Name - The name of a timestamp column that will be 
	used to calculate the rate of change. A name must be given. If the 
	specified column is not found in the data it will be added, and its values 
	will be taken from the current time on each update. 
	
	Replace Data With Deltas - If set to 1, the delta values replace the 
	original values in the same column in the returned table; otherwise they 
	are in new columns appended to the table. 
	
	Display Negative values - If set to 1, the delta values less than zero will 
	be displayed with a negative sign and the value; otherwise they will be 
	displayed as zero.

16661: Split Columns function now returns no row if blank input string
	In the Display Builder the Split function, if given a blank string, would return a 
	table with one (blank) row. It will now return a table with no rows.

16662: Validate Substitution function enhanced
	In the Display Builder the Validate Substitution function has been 
	enhanced as follows:
	
	The following new arguments may be specified:
	
	Clear If Invalid: If set to 1 this will cause the function to return an empty 
	string if the substitution is not found in the table.
	
	Allow Multiple Values: If set to 1 this will allow the substitution to be a 
	semicolon separated string of values; each value will be  tested for 
	validity and the final result will be assembled from all the valid values (if 
	any).

16664: Rename Columns now permits more renames than input columns
	In the Rename Columns function, the number of specified rename columns 
	had to exactly match the number of new names.  Sometimes the number of 
	input columns is unknown and yet you want to specify N new names,  
	egardless how many are specified.  
	
	This function has been changed so it gives an error only if the number of 
	entered columns is greater than the number of new names specified.

16665: New "Ensure Columns" function
	A new function has been added that can be used to ensure that columns of 
	a certain type exist prior to passing data to subsequent  functions for further 
	processing.
	
	The function accepts an input Table, and a list of column names and types.  
	The specified columns are guaranteed to exist in the order and with the 
	types specified.

16691: New "EnsureTimestampColumn" function
	The new function Ensure Timestamp Column has been added to the 
	Display Builder. The function's help text follows:
	
	The Ensure Timestamp Column function guarantees the given table will 
	include a timestamp column of the given name. If the column is found it 
	just returns the table; otherwise it returns a copy of the given table with 
	the specified added and filled with the current time.
	
	Table - The table of interest.
	
	Time Column Name - The name of the timestamp column that will be 
	ensured.
	
	Append Column -  If set to 1 the timestamp column will be appended to 
	the end of the table; else it will be inserted as the first column.

General

16381: Preceding and succeeding spaces now work in Combo/List Boxes
	In previous releases, the listValues property in the List Box and Combo 
	Box controls did not parse leading and following spaces correctly. This 
	has been fixed. To specify a space or an empty item as the first item in 
	the list, use single quotes:
	
	'';item2;item3 - adds an empty item to the beginning of the list
	' ';item2;item3 - adds a space to the beginning of the list
	
	To include a space preceding the first element or following the last 
	element, also use single quotes:
	
	' item1';item2;'item3 '

16407: run_exchange_simulator.bat fixed
	In the previous version the run_exchange_simulator.bat script was 
	broken. This has been fixed.

16409: run_tibjmsadmin.bat fixed
	In previous versions the run_tibjmsadmin.bat script was broken. This has 
	been fixed.

16410: Option -jmxdsCheckValidAttributeNames
	The command line option "-jmxdsCheckValidAttributeNames" and the 
	JMXOPTIONS.ini property "jmxdsCheckValidAttributeNames true/false" is 
	now accepted and preserved.
	
	Setting this option to true ensures that only column names that the MBean 
	recognizes are used.

16447: NPE when switching displays fixed
	In version 5.7c1, the mouseOverText feature threw an occasional null 
	pointer exception when switching displays. This has been fixed.

16478: New -bg and -logfile options to support redirection of output
	Three new command-line options are supported by all RTView applications:
	
	#1)   -bg  
	
	 Run the RTView application as a background process. When this option 
	is specified, the GmsLauncher process and run scripts will exit 
	immediately after the RTView app is started, rather than continuing to 
	run. This reduces the host system's process count, but note that :
	
	  (a) the RTView application's output and error messages will not appear 
	in the command/shell window from which it was launched.
	  (b) Ctrl-c cannot be used to terminate the application
	
	#2)   -logfile:  
	
	 Redirect output and error messages to . The RTView 
	application's output and error message streams will be redirected to the 
	indicated file. The file is created if it doesn't exist, otherwise its previous 
	contents are cleared.
	
	#3)  c:  
	
	Prepend  to the filename specified by the -logfile option. If the 
	-logfile option is not specified, then this option is ignored.
	
	
	-----
	
	Example:
	
	> run_dataserver  -socket  -bg  -logfile:DataServer.log
	
	-----
	Note that all of these options are only recognized on the command line. 
	They are not read from, or saved to, any RTView options files.

16491: New  -processName command arg
	A new command line option, -processName:, has been added to the 
	Display Builder, Display Viewer, Historian, Data Server and Display 
	Server. For example, 
	
	run_displayserver -processName:XX
	
	This adds the following jvm option to the java call:
	
	-DPROCESS_NAME=XX
	
	Where XX is the value you specified for the -processName: argument. 
	This is useful for identifying applications running as background 
	processes on Unix.
	
	If no process name is specified, the application name will be used as 
	the process name.
	
	Values with spaces cannot be used for the process name on Unix.

16551: New command line encoder utility
	A new utility, encode_string, has been added to RTView. This is useful in 
	cases where it is necessary to hand edit configuration files that include 
	encoded strings such as passwords. If you need to hand edit a 
	configuration file, contact Technical Support for information on supported 
	syntax. 
	
	To run encode_string, enter the following on the command line:
	
	encode_string type stringToEncode
	
	The type argument is optional. This only needs to be used if you are 
	encoding a string for a data source and should be the key for that data 
	source. 
	
	For example
	
	encode_string sql MyPassword
	
	This will encode MyPassword in the format that the sql data source 
	recognizes.
	
	When encoding a string for an application like the Historian, omit the type 
	string or use encoder1 for the type string. For example
	
	encode_string MyPassword
	
	will return the same result as
	
	encode_string encoder1 MyPassword

GmsTabularData

16571: Function crash on empty data sets fixed
	In previous versions some functions that manipulated GmsTabularData 
	with 0 rows may have raised the java.lang.ArrayStoreException. This is no 
	longer the case.

Licensing

16613: Include click-through licensing for configuration utility
	The configuration utility has been enhanced to show the click-through 
	license if it has not already been accepted. The tibco license agreement 
	has been updated.

16622: install_keys scripts removed from deliverable
	The install_keys utility has been removed, as system-independent keys can 
	now be  installed using the same registration utility that system-specific 
	keys use.

Object Library

15151: Indicator Palette enhanced
	All of the indicators previously on the Indicators tab of the Object Palette 
	have been replaced with the following 4 new indicators: 
	
	obj_ind_discrete - This indicator supports 3 discrete comparisons.
	
	obj_ind_limits - This indicator supports 2 high and 2 low thresholds.
	
	obj_ind_multi - This indicator supports an unlimited number of 
	comparison values. For each comparison, you can specify whether the 
	value property must be equal, not equal, greater than or less than the 
	comparison value. 
	
	obj_ind_panel - This is a panel of 3 indicator lights. Each indicator light 
	supports a discrete comparison.
	
	For all indicators, attach the value property to data, and setup your 
	comparisons using the properties in the Alert category. See the 
	documentation for more detailed information on the object properties.
	
	The indicators that were previously on the Indicators tab of the Object 
	Palette have been deprecated. They will continue to work as they did 
	before in existing displays, but are no longer available in the Object 
	Palette.

16374: New symbol library
	A library of symbols has been added to RTView. These images can be 
	used on any object that supports images. Users can also define their 
	own custom image library.
	
	To access the images, edit the image property on an object. Instead of 
	typing in an image name, click on the ... button. This will bring up a dialog 
	with a tree on the left. The tree will have up to 3 top level nodes:
	
	1. Current Directory - this lists the images in the current directory and one 
	level of subdirectories.
	
	2. Custom Image Library - if the user has specified a custom image 
	library, this node will list the images in that library
	
	3. Symbol Library - the symbol library containing a subdirectory for each 
	category of symbols
	
	Navigate in the tree to the image you would like to use and select it. A 
	preview of the image will draw in the pane to the right. Click OK or Apply 
	to set the image on your object. Note that you can still simply type your 
	image name into the image property field instead of using the dialog.
	
	You can access the same image editor dialog from the Image Name 
	field in the Background Properties dialog and also when editing images 
	in the filterProperties property on the table object.
	
	The custom image library allows you to add images to the tree in the 
	image dialog. To add an image library, place your images .jar file and 
	add it to the RTV_USERPATH environment variable. The images must be 
	in a directory (ie not in the top level of the jar). They may be organized into 
	sub-directories of one top level directory if desired. 
	
	In the Display Builder, select Tools->Builder Options and in the Custom 
	User Library Path set the path to directory containing your images in the 
	jar. This jar must be included in the RTV_USERPATH for your 
	deployments as well. For example, if you have a jar with this directory 
	structure:
	
	com/mycompany/Images
	com/mycompany/Images/Blue Images 
	com/mycompany/Images/Red Images
	com/mycompany/Images/Green Images
	
	In the Builder Options Custom User Library Path, add com/mycompany
	/Images. This will add a node named Images to the tree in the image 
	dialog. It will have 3 nodes under it: Blue Images, Red Images, Green 
	Images. Note that only directories that contain images will be added to 
	the tree in the dialog.

16378: value*BgGradientColor2 added to general object thresholds
	The obj_rect_ilvx_ra4, obj_circ2d_ilvx_ra4, obj_rect_ilvs_da3 and 
	obj_circ2d_ilvx_da3 General Objects have been enhanced to support a 
	second gradient color for the threshold properties. The following 
	properties have been added:
	
	obj_rect_ilvx_ra4 and obj_circ2d_ilvx_ra4:
	Alert Category:
		valueLowAlertGradientColor2 
		valueMediumAlertGradientColor2
		valueHighAlertGradientColor2
	Quality Category: 
		valueQualityNoDataGradientColor2
		valueQualityLostDataGradientColor2
	
	obj_rect_ilvx_da3 and obj_circ2d_ilvx_ra4:
	Alert Category:
		valueLowAlarmGradientColor2 
		valueLowWarningGradientColor2
		valueHighWarningGradientColor2
		valueHighAlarmGradientColor2
	Quality Category: 
		valueQualityNoDataGradientColor2
		valueQualityLostDataGradientColor2
	
	Each property sets the second gradient color when that condition is met. 
	
	In previous releases, the bgGradientColor2 property was used for the 
	second gradient color for all thresholds. Old displays will continue to use 
	the bgGradientColor2 until the new color properties are saved from the 
	Display Builder.

16490: Table object no longer crashes sorting columns with null strings
	Previously a table object referencing a dataset with string columns 
	containing null values would cause a crash when loaded into RTView.  This 
	problem has been fixed.

16526: obj_speed meter object now accepts double data
	The obj_speed meter object has been enhanced so that the following 
	properties now support double values:
	
	valueMin
	valueMax
	valueHighAlarm
	valueLowAlarm
	
	Existing displays that use integer values for these properties will 
	continue to work as they did before unless the value passed in for 
	valueMin and valueMax from a data attachment was a double. In that 
	case, the tick labels will change to show the double value. Previously 
	double values were displayed as ints.

Composite Object

14804: Link alignment to composite objects. corrected
	In previous releases, links did not work correctly with composite objects. 
	There was a gap between the end of the link and the composite object. This 
	has been fixed.

Control Objects

12107: New axisDirection property added to the slider control object
	A new property, axisDirection, has been added to the slider control 
	(obj_c1scale). This property allows you to set the axis direction of the scale 
	to the following:
	
	Bottom to Top - vertical orientation with min on the bottom and max on top
	Left to Right - horizontal orientation with min on the left and max on the right
	Top to Bottom - vertical orientation with min on the top and max on the bottom
	Right to Left - horizontal orientation with min on the right and max on the left

16536: Improved support of style sheets for Date Chooser
	The Date Chooser control has been enhanced to support 3 new properties:
	
	fgColor - The font color of the text entry area. Default is black.
	
	validColor - The font color to use while editing in the text entry area if the 
	entered value is using the correct format. Default is green.
	
	invalidColor - The font color used during and after editing in the text entry 
	area if the entered value is not using the correct format. Default is red.
	
	The validColor and invalidColor are not supported in the thin client 
	deployment.

16633: Tick Mark color added to sliders
	The obj_c1scale object has been enhanced to support the fgColor property. 
	This property sets the tick mark color. You can either select a color or select 
	the Default color to use the color for your look and feel. The fgColor is only 
	applied when the control is enabled, so tick marks on sliders in the main 
	builder window will not use the fgColor (preview your display to see the 
	fgColor applied).
	
	Note that this change does not apply to the Thin Client deployment as the 
	sliders in the Thin Client do not have tick marks.

16683: Thin client now respects bgColor of listbox control.
	The bgColor property of a listbox control is now respected in the thin client, 
	except in Internet Explorer version 6 or older.

Fx Trend Chart

16423: The -fxreplace option conversion improved
	The fxreplace option now properly converts the the following properties 
	when replacing an obj_fxtrend with an obj_trendgraph02:
	
	bgGradientFlag
	legendBgGradientFlag
	yAxisMultiRangeMode

16535: Corrections to FX trend problems with trace groups
	The following problems with trace groups on the Fx Trend Graph are fixed:
	
	1. Lower band is too dark even when traceFillStyle = transparent 
	2.The value trace is obscured by the upper band, if the trace values overlap.
	3. Autoscaling for some traces in group is incorrect if trace numbers in 
	group are not in ascending order.

Heatmap

16634: Heatmap now reflects property changes before  next data update
	In previous releases, the colorValueAutoScaleMode, colorValueMax and 
	colorValueMin properties on the heatmap were not always applied before 
	the next data update. Also, changes to the column list in the data attachment 
	were not applied until the next full update. This has been fixed.

Object Grid

16492: Drill down from objects in object grid fixed for thin client
	In the previous version, in the thin client, a click on an obj_trendgraph02 
	contained in an object grid did not initiate the drillown operation configured 
	on the grid object. This has been fixed.

Tables

16604: Hidden table columns no longer visible in thin client
	The following thin client problem has been fixed:
	
	Under certain conditions, the columns specified in the columnsToHide 
	property of a table object may become partially visible in the thin client. 
	
	This problem occurs if the data for the table is not available when the 
	display is opened, so the table is initially blank. If the data arrives on a 
	subsequent refresh of the thin client, the columns that should be hidden 
	may instead be partially visible. The problem is more likely to occur in 
	Firefox. It is also more likely to occur in a Display Server + Data Server 
	deployment since in that case there can be a delay before the Display 
	Server gets data from the Data Server. Also, after the problem occurs, 
	some columns may not be resizable in the thin client.

16615: Fix crash when rows removed from table with Date col during draw
	The following problem is fixed in this release:
	
	If an obj_table02 is attached to a data table containing a Date column and 
	rows are removed from the data table as the obj_table02 is being drawn, 
	then the following exception is sometimes thrown:
	
	Exception in thread "AWT-EventQueue-0" java.lang.ClassCastException: 
	java.lang.String cannot be cast to java.lang.Long

Trend Charts

16514: Trends now visibile when plots lie on the X Axis
	In prior releases, a thin trace line on obj_trendgraph02 was not visible 
	where its points had a value that corresponded to the minimum y value, 
	since it was obscured by the 1-pixel black border that is drawn around the 
	trace area. This is fixed except in cases where the trace color is black and 
	yAxisMultiRangeMode is not set to "Strip Chart."

16627: FX trend now shifts if timeShift > 0, even if no new data
	The Fx trend graph will now shift at the interval specified by its timeShift 
	property (if > 0) even if no new data points are plotted. This is consistent 
	with the behavior of the standard trend graph object (obj_trendgraph02). In 
	prior releases, the fx trend graph would only shift when new points were 
	plotted.
	
	Note that if the user  wants the trend graph to shift only when new points are 
	plotted and also wants the time axis boundaries to be rounded to N 
	seconds, the timeShift property should be set to -N. (This is not a new 
	feature, just mentioned here for completeness).

Security

16422: Fixed JS error when excluded display accessed in thin clnt
	A problem has been fixed which caused the thin client to encounter a 
	javascript error when a user attempted to open a display which was in the 
	list of excluded displays for the user's current role in roles.xml. Now a 
	message will appear on the page indicating that the user was denied 
	access to the display.

Substitution

16476: Setsub or validsub function now setting initial value correctly
	In prior releases, if a function (named F1, for example) has an input 
	argument with an attachment that is affected by a substitution, and the initial 
	value of that substitution is set by another function (named F2, for example) 
	which appears later in the rtv file, the input argument for F1 may end up with 
	two attachments, one using the correct substitution value and another using 
	the initial (incorrect) substitution value. This problem is fixed.

Version 5.7d1 Release Notes

Builder - Property Dialogs

16439: Function Result Scroll Columns broken
	In release 5.7c1, the checkboxes in the Display Data dialog did not work. 
	This has been fixed.
	

Demos

XML Data Simulator

16489: Fixed crash in XML Simulator
	In 5.7c1, the XML Simulator would crash on non-English operating
	systems. This has been fixed.
	

Version 5.7c1 Release Notes

16171: Option to alphabetize object properties fixed
	In the Display Builder Object Properties dialog, if the properties were 
	displayed alphabetically their order was not correct. This has been fixed.

Alerts

16299: Formatting of $alertCurValue, $alertCompValue in alertCommand
	A property named valueCommandFormat has been added to the limit and 
	multi-state alert objects. This property specifies the format to be used for 
	numeric values in the $alertCurValue and $alertCompValue substitutions in 
	the object's alertCommand.  The valueCommandFormat is initially blank, 
	which indicates that the default format should be used.

Builder

15827: Column and row numbers added to Display Data window
	In the Display Builder, the Display Data dialogs now show the the number of 
	columns and rows in the current table.

15960: Corrected bug with alert/function/cache tab after layout reset
	In the Display Builder, under certain circumstances if you used the Reset 
	Layout function and subsequently opened a tab in the tabbed pane, the 
	pane would close. This has been fixed.

16312: Column Types now always show in Show Content dialog
	In the Display Builder data display dialog, if the dialog was showing 
	multiple tabs (such as cache current and history tables) and one of the 
	checkboxes such as (Show Column Types) were checked or unchecked, 
	the change was applied to the current tab only. This has been fixed.

Builder - Applet

16238: Drilldown to new display in existing window no longer fails
	A problem affecting the Viewer applet after performing a drilldown to a new 
	display in the current window or a named window, in version 1.6.0_10 or 
	newer of the Java plugin, has been fixed.

Builder - Editing

16006: Pasting properties of cache/alert/function now excludes name
	In the Display Builder, when you would "Paste All Properties" or "Paste Static 
	Properties" from one cache, alert, or function to another, the properties that 
	were pasted included the cache, alert, or function name, and resulted in 
	either a dialog prompting for a new name, or a warning about duplicate 
	names. This has been fixed..

16013: Limitation removed from mouseOverText property
	The mouseOverText in the Display Builder, Display Viewer Application 
	and Display Viewer Applet have been enhanced. In previous releases, 
	there were several scenarios where the mouseOverText was obscured 
	by other objects in the display. The mouseOverText is now drawn above 
	all objects except the Flex Graphs which are still sometimes drawn on 
	top of the mouseOverText. This change impacts the following objects:
	
		- all non-Flex graph objects that support the mouseOverFlag property
		- all non-graph and non-control objects that support the mouseOverText property
	
	No change was made to the control objects as their mouseOverText was 
	not being obscured.
	
	In previous releases, if multiple non-control objects with mouseOverText 
	overlappped and the mouse was positioned on the overlapping area, the 
	mouseOverText would display for both. This has been fixed, so that only 
	the mouseOverText for the front object is displayed.
	
	As part of this change, the mouseOverText positioning behavior for the 
	graphs was modified. Previously, the mouseOverText location was 
	contstrained to stay within the graph object's extent. It is no longer 
	constrained to the graph object's extent.
	
	There is one known limitation for editing displays. If multiple non-control 
	objects overlap and the stacking order is changed in the Display Builder, 
	the mouseOverText may show up for the back object instead of the front 
	object when the mouse is position on the overlapping area. This 
	problem is resolved by saving and reloading the display.

Data Historian

16051: New option to store  less data than received
	An option has been added to the Data Historian that allows it to store 
	less data than it receives. This can be useful in a configuration where the 
	Data Historian receives data from the Data Server, but at a higher rate 
	than is needed for historical storage.
	
	The new option is labeled "Store Last Values Only" and appears in the 
	Data Cache Options section of the Configuration tab. This option is 
	available only if the Cache Data option is checked and the Cache 
	Duration value is greater than zero, in which case the Data Historian 
	does not store data records immediately but rather keeps them in a 
	cache to be stored later. If the "Store Last Values Only" option is 
	unchecked (the default), the Data Historian will store all of the records in 
	the cache each time the Cache Duration period expires. But if the option 
	is checked, the Data Historian will instead store only the last (most 
	recent) value in the cache for each unique data attachment the historian 
	is configured to store.
	
	For example, say the data server pushes tables from two SQL 
	attachments to the historian:
	
	  Query1: select * from table1
	  Query2: select * from table2
	
	Say the Data Server executes those queries every 10 seconds, and the 
	historian has cache duration = 60 seconds. In that case, every 60 
	seconds the Data Historian's data cache will contain 6 result tables from 
	Query1 and 6 result tables from Query2. If "Store Last Values" is 
	unchecked, the historian will store all 12 tables in the database. If the 
	option is checked, however, the Data Historian will only store the 6th 
	(most recent) result table for Query1 and the 6th table for Query2. It will 
	discard all the other result tables in the cache.
	
	The new option can be enabled on the command line with the -cachelast 
	option.

16288: Historian again performs retention if timestamp type is SQL
	The timestamp:sql mode of the Historian once again fully supports the 
	-retention:nn method of archive trimming.
	

16289: "quoteColumnNamesFlag" no longer ignored when accessing tables
	The Data Historian no longer ignores quoteColumnNamesFlag when 
	accessing SQL tables.
	

16295: Echo logging lines removed for .ini file settings
	Advanced Historian settings will no longer be printed to the console if they 
	are set in HISTORY.ini. They will continue to be present when set from
	the command line.

Compaction

16113: retentionMax implemented for frequency of cleanup
	The command line and HISTORY.ini file parameter retentionMax, which 
	already existed for old style historian archival has been implemented for 
	Historian Compaction.
	
	The parameter -retentionMax:5 or keyword retentionMax 5 specifies the 
	maximum number of minutes that each compaction rule may run before the 
	Data Retention logic is processed. If a rule has a shorter retention span 
	than the retentionMax then the rule's retention span is used.

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

16319: Cache data dialog no longer fails if attaching to boolean
	An exception is no longer thrown when attaching a boolean property 
	(visFlag, for example) to cache data.

JMS Admin Data Source (for TIBCO EMS only)

15230: Default passwords in servers.xml and JMSADMOPTION.ini now work
	In previous releases, if the password for a server in servers.xml was the 
	same as the Default Admin Password, connections to that server were 
	inconsistent. This has been fixed.

JMX Data Source

16114: RTViewDs:type=connection no longer throwing exception
	Choosing RTViewDs:type=connection as the mBean could cause an 
	exception and if a connection group was in use only the first connection 
	would appear in objects.

16232: Auto-detection of JMX MBean severs implemented
	A new option to auto-discover local MBean Server has been added to the 
	JMX data source. To enabled this feature, select the Automatically 
	Discover Local MBean Servers option on the JMX Administration tab in 
	the Application Options dialog. You can also enable it with the following 
	command line option:
	
	-jmxautodiscover
	
	When enabled, RTView will get the list of local MBean Servers once each 
	poll interval (note that the poll interval is set by either the Default Poll 
	Interval on the JMX Administration tab or by the Update Period on the 
	General tab). All new servers that are discovered will be added as 
	connections using the process id for the connection name. Connections 
	to auto-discovered servers that have exited are removed. Automatically 
	discovered connections are not saved to JMXOPTIONS.ini.
	
	All auto-discovered connections are also added to a JMX Connection 
	Group named RTViewDs-Auto. This group cannot be removed or edited, 
	and is not saved to JMXOPTIONS.ini.
	
	A new column, Display Name, has been added to the Connections table. 
	For auto-discovered connections, this will list the main class and 
	arguments passed into java.exe for the MBean Server process.
	
	The auto-discover features requires a 1.6 JDK installation. The tools.jar 
	from your JDK installation must be included in the RTV_USERPATH in 
	order for this feature to work.

SNMP Data Source

16123: MIB defintion file included in lib
	RTView's MIB definition file, SL-RTVIEW-MIB.txt, is now included in 
	%RTV_HOME%\lib.

SQL Data Source

16117: Data Server no longer gives exception for malformed ORACLE query
	Previously the data server , when using an ORACLE DB would generate 
	ORACLE SQL exceptions under certain circumstances involving 
	TIMESTAMPS in the WHERE clause of a SELECT statement . This is no 
	longer the case.
	

Display Server

15482: Tooltips in Display Server now consistent with application
	The look of the mouseOver in the Thin Client is now consistent with the look 
	of the mouseOver in the other deployments. Multi-line tooltips now display 
	correctly in all supported browsers.

Functions

15970: Multi-column join in Join and Join Outer functions supported
	In the Display Builder, the Join and Join Outer functions have been 
	enhanced so that multiple pairs of columns may be specified for the join.
	
	The  Column Name argument fields may now be used to specify lists of 
	columns by entering column names separated by semicolons (;) (note that ; 
	is not allowed in column names).
	
	The column name lists  must be the same length and the corresponding 
	columns in each list must have the same type.
	
	All pairs of values must match for a row to be included in the join.

16197: Better handling of commas in string args in Evaluate Expression
	In the Display Builder, there was a problem with the Evaluate Expression 
	functions when certain built-in string functions were used. String functions 
	which take multiple args (e.g. substring(string, start, end) would fail with the 
	error "Invalid use of quotes" if there was a comma in the string value 
	supplied. This has been fixed.

General

15952: RTView Run Scripts now use JAVA_HOME
	All RTView command-line scripts will now preferentially use JAVA_HOME/bin
	/java.exe. If it is not found, then the java.exe that is first in the PATH will be 
	used.
	
	NOTE: This does not apply to Windows Start Menu shortcuts.  If you wish 
	JAVA_HOME\bin\java.exe to be used, make sure it is first in PATH.
	

16072: DateChooser now accepts a yyyy-MM-dd date as its selectedValue
	In previous releases, the selectedValue on the date chooser control 
	sometimes did not set the initial date value. The date chooser control has 
	been enhanced to try parsing the selectedValue using the dateFormat if the 
	default date formats fail.

Java Version Dependencies

16191: Windows Service install now works with JRE
	In previous releases, running RTView applications as Windows services 
	required a jdk installation. It has been enhanced to work with either a jdk or 
	jre installation.

Layouts

15795: PANELS.ini enhancement for navigation controls
	A new format is supported for the PANELS.ini file. To simplify 
	deployment, this format is fully supported by both the Viewer and the 
	Display Server. The new format supports display navigation using tree, 
	accordion, or tab controls. The appearance of the controls can be set by 
	a stylesheet file.
	
	Several tags have been added for use with the new format, as follows:
	
	 <rtvTreePanel> : This tag creates a tree navigation panel.
	
	 <rtvAccordionPanel> : Creates an accordion navigation panel.
	
	 <rtvDisplayPanel> : Create an RTView display panel.
	
	 <rtvTabbedDisplayPanel> : Create a tabbed RTView display panel.
	
	 <rtvLayout> : This tag indicates that the new PANELS.ini format is to 
	be used. The new tags listed above can only be used within an 
	<rtvLayout> tag.
	
	The PANELS.ini formats and the associated tags that were supported in 
	previous releases are still supported. However, the new tags listed 
	above cannot be mixed in the same PANELS.ini file with any of the older 
	tags.
	
	
	==========================
	EXAMPLE 1. 
	The following PANELS.ini uses the new tags to create a title panel at the 
	top, an accordion panel on the left, and a main display panel in the enter, 
	with draggable dividers between all the panels:
	
	  <xml version="1.0" ?>
	  <panels xmlns="www.sl.com" version="1.0">
	
	  <rtvLayout title="Accordion Example" dividers="true">
	
	     <rtvDisplayPanel region="north" name="title_panel" display="title.rtv"/>
	
	     <rtvAccordionPanel region="west" width="200" navdata="navtree.xml"/>
	                
	     <rtvDisplayPanel region="center" name="main_panel" display="chart_main.rtv"/>
	
	  <rtvLayout>
	
	  <panels>
	
	==========================
	EXAMPLE 2.
	The following PANELS.ini uses the new tags to create a tabbed display 
	panel at the top, and a title panel at the bottom:
	   <xml version="1.0" ?>
	   <panels xmlns="www.sl.com" version="1.0">
	
	   <rtvLayout title="Tab Example">
	                
	      <rtvTabbedDisplayPanel region="center" tabs="navtabs.xml" display="stock_chart"/>
	
	      <rtvDisplayPanel region="south" name="title_panel" display="title.rtv"/>>
	
	   <rtvLayout>
	
	   <panels>
	
	
	==========================
	
	The attributes and use for each of the new tags are defined below.
	
	A. <rtvLayout> tag:
	
	- Can appear only once in PANELS.ini
	- Expects each child tag to specify region="x", where x is north, south, 
	east, west, or center. This determines the layout of the child panels.
	
	Attributes:
	
	1. title
	   default value: none
	   description: string to display in title bar of Viewer or browser
	
	2. dividers
	   default value: false
	   description: if dividers="true" then a draggable divider is drawn 
	between each child panel in the rtvLayout.
	
	-----------
	
	B. <rtvDisplayPanel> tag:
	
	- Creates a panel for an rtview display.
	
	Attributes:
	
	1. display
	   default value: none
	   description: the name of the rtview display file to be loaded into the panel
	   example: display="Disp101.rtv"
	
	2. subs
	   default value: none
	   description: the substitutions to be applied to the display
	   example: subs="$sub1:value1 $sub2:value2"
	
	3. name
	   default value: none
	   description: name for panel, can be specified as a drilldown target
	
	4. region
	   default value: center
	   description: the position of this panel in the rtvLayout: north, south, east, west, or center
	
	-----------
	
	C. <rtvAccordionPanel> tag:
	
	- Creates a panel containing an accordion control for display navigation.
	- The accordion control assumes there is an rtvDisplayPanel in the 
	center region, and send its navigation commands to that panel.
	-  In the thin client, the accordion contents cannot be more then 2 levels 
	deep. If deeper nesting is required, use rtvTreePanel instead.
	
	Attributes:
	
	1. navdata
	   default value: none
	   description: the name of xml file that specifies the contents of the accordion control
	    See the Navigation Data section below, for more info on the format of this file.
	   example: navdata="navtree.xml"
	
	2. width
	   default value: 125
	   description: pixel width of the panel
	
	3. region
	   default value: center
	   description: the position of this panel in the rtvLayout
	
	-----------
	
	D. <rtvTreePanel> tag:
	
	- Creates a panel containing a tree control for display navigation.
	- The tree control assumes there is an rtvDisplayPanel in the center 
	region, and send its navigation commands to that panel.
	
	Attributes: Same as rtvAccordionPanel above.
	
	-----------
	
	E. <rtvTabbedDisplayPanel> tag:
	
	- Creates a panel for an rtview display, with tabs for navigation.
	
	Attributes:
	
	1. tabs
	   default value: none
	   description: the name of xml file that specifies the tab contents
	    See the Navigation Data section below, for more info on the format of this file.
	   example: tabs="tabs.xml"
	
	2. display
	   default value: none
	   description: the name of the initial rtview display file to be loaded into the panel
	   example: display="Disp101.rtv"
	
	3. subs
	   default value: none
	   description: the substitutions to be applied to the display
	   example: subs="$sub1:value1 $sub2:value2"
	
	4. region
	   default value: center
	   description: the position of this panel in the rtvLayout
	
	5. placement
	   default value: top
	   description: determines placement of tabs, either "top" or "bottom"
	
	============================
	
	Intended Usage:
	
	Typically, an rtvLayout will contain one of the following combinations of 
	tags:
	
	1) a main rtvDisplayPanel with region="center", plus either an 
	rtvAccordionPanel or rtvTreePanel with region="west" or "east", and 
	possibly other secondary rtvDisplayPanels in other regions.
	
	2) a main rtvTabbedDisplayPanel with region="center", and possibly 
	other secondary rtvDisplayPanels in other regions.
	
	Other combinations have not been tested and may not function as 
	expected. 
	
	
	============================
	
	Navigation Data file formats:
	
	The content of an rtvAccordionPanel or rtvTreePanel is determined by the 
	file specified by its 'navdata' attribute. This is expected to be an XML file 
	with the format shown in the following example. 
	
	<xml version="1.0" ?>>
	<navtree version="1.0">
	<node label="Displays">
		<node label="Charts" display="chart_overview.rtv">
			<node label="Chart One" display="chart1.rtv" subs="$sub1:123"/>
			<node label="Chart Two" display="chart2.rtv"/>
		<node>
		<node label="Reports" display="report_overview.rtv">
			<node label="Report 1" display="rep1.rtv"/>
			<node label="Report 2" display="rep2.rtv"/>
		<node>
	<node>
	<navtree>
	
	In the accordion, note that the root node (the node labeled "Displays" in 
	the above example) will not be visible. Also, the accordion only supports 
	two levels of nodes, not counting the root node.
	
	The contents of the tabs in an rtvTabbedDisplayPanel are determined by 
	the file specified by its 'tabs' attribute. This is expected to be an XML file 
	with the format shown in the following example. 
	
	<xml version="1.0" ?>
	
	<navtree>
	
	  <node label="Bar Chart" display="disp1.rtv"/>
	  <node label="History Graph" display="disp2.rtv" subs="$v1:xyz"/>
	
	<navtree>
	
	============================
	
	Stylesheets:
	
	(The use of stylesheets in RTView is described in the release note for 
	E15734).
	
	When the rtvLayout tag is used in a panels configuration, stylesheet 
	entries can be used to specify the colors, fonts, and other properties of 
	the navigation panels and controls. The following property names are 
	supported:
	
	1.  bgColor, fgColor - the background and foreground (text) colors. The 
	value is either a color index from the RTView color palette, or an RGB 
	value in #rrggbb format where rr, gg, bb are the red, green, and blue 
	intensities in hexadecimal values between 00 and ff.
	
	2. font - the index of the font for navigation controls. The RTView font index 
	assignments are listed at the end of this section.
	
	3. fontIndex - the point size for fonts on all navigation controls.
	
	4. bgGradientFlag - if true (the default), the accordion controls and the tab 
	controls use a gradient fill, if false they use a solid fill.
	
	The properties listed above can be specified for any of the following 
	class names. If a property is specified for more than one class, the value 
	for the highest precedence class is applied. The classes are listed from 
	lower to higher precedence.
	
	1. rtnav: Properties specified for this class are applied to all navigation 
	panels and controls.
	
	2. rtnav-state-default: Properties for this class are applied to all 
	navigation controls that are in the default (unselected) state.
	
	3. rtnav-state-hover: Properties for this class are applied to the navigation 
	control that the mouse cursor is currently positioned over (affects tab and 
	accordion controls only, and only in the thin client)
	
	4. rtnav-state-selected: Properties for this class are applied to all 
	navigation controls that are in the selected state (for example, the 
	selected tab in a tabbed panel).
	
	
	Example: 
	
	  rtnav {bgColor: 7; fgColor: 12; }
	  rtnav-state-default {bgColor: 256; font: 1; }
	  rtnav-state-selected {bgColor: #4c5d65; font: 7;}
	  rtnav-state-hover {bgColor: #004157; }
	
	-----------
	
	The following properties of the accordion panel can be specified using 
	the rtnav-accordion class name:
	
	1. buttonWidth : the width in pixels of all buttons in the accordion, default 
	is 160
	2. spacing : the vertical space in pixels between buttons, default is 5
	3. indent : the left pixel indent of leaf buttons in the accordion, the default 
	is 10
	
	Example:
	
	  rtnav-accordion {buttonWidth: 200;}
	
	The following properties of the rtnav class control the appearance of the 
	borders drawn around the navigation panels
	
	1. bgBorderColor : color of draggable or non-draggable borders
	2. bgBorderWidth : pixel width of non-draggable borders
	
	A draggable border is drawn between all panels in a panel configuration 
	in which the "dividers" attribute of the rtvLayout tag is true; a 
	non-draggable border is drawn around navigation panels if "dividers" is 
	false.
	
	
	-----------
	
	Here are the RTView font index assignments:
	
	 1 sans-serif
	 2 monospaced bold
	 3 monospaced
	 4 serif
	 5 monospaced italic
	 6 serif bold
	 7 sans-serif bold
	 8 sans-serif italic
	 9 serif bold italic
	10 serif italic
	11 sans-serif bold italic
	12 monospaced bold italic
	

Licensing

16258: Copy/paste popup added menu to registration application
	A popup menu has been added to the Pin, Key and TSN fields of the 
	registration application. It allows you to copy the selected text in those fields 
	to the system clipboard or paste the system clipboard contents into the Key 
	or TSN fields.

Object Library

16212: Greyscale choices added to default color palette
	The Color palette has been enhanced to include 18 new shades of gray. 
	These have been added to the end of the color palette.

16226: Foreground color properties added to obj_meter20
	The following properties have been added to obj_meter20:
	
	fgGradientColor2 - set the second color in the foreground gradient
	fgEdgeColor - set the foreground main edge color
	fgEdgeColor2 - set the secondary foreground edge color
	
	Note that all of these properties only apply if the fgGradientFlag is selected.

Charts (General)

16118: Automated replacement of Fx graphs with standard graphs
	Fx graph objects in a display can now be automatically replaced by the 
	equivalent standard graph objects. This is useful when exporting a 
	display to a PDF file or generating PDF reports, or in situations where the 
	Flash player is unavailable.
	
	The replacements are:
	
		Trend Graph: obj_trendgraph02 replaces obj_fxtrend
		Bar Graph: obj_bargraph replaces obj_fxbar
		Pie Graph: obj_pie replaces obj_fxpie
	
	The replacements are made under any of the following conditions:
	
	1. In any deployment, when a PDF file is generated from a display using 
	the Export menu or the RTView reporting tool, the fx graph objects are 
	replaced before the PDF file is generated. (This is necessary because 
	the fx graphs do not support PDF generation). After the PDF file is 
	generated, the fx graph objects are restored to the display. So the PDf file 
	shows the replacement graph objects but the display will continue to 
	show the fx graphs (assuming none of the cases below apply).
	
	2. In the Display Builder, Dipslay Viewer, and Display Server, if the 
	-fxreplace option is specified on the command line or "fxreplace true" 
	appears on a line in the OPTIONS.ini file then the fx graph objects are 
	replaced immediately when each display is opened.
	
	3. In the viewer application and the builder preview window, if the Flash 
	player or wrapper is unavailable then the fx graph objects are replaced 
	immediately when each display is opened. 
	
	(This case does not apply to the thin client. If the Flash player is 
	unavailable in the thin client, the display will contain a link for 
	downloading the player. This case also does not apply to the main edit 
	panel in the builder, to avoid inadvertently saving the display after the fx 
	graphs have been replaced).
	
	4. In the Display Viewer Applet (which does not support the Flash 
	wrapper) the fx graph objects are replaced immediately when each 
	display is opened.
	
	Note: In case 2 above, if the display is saved from the builder it will be 
	saved with the replacement graphs. A confirmation dialog to that effect is 
	shown to the user before the save is performed.
	
	In a Display Viewer Applet deployment, the applet's ARCHIVE parameter 
	must include gmsjflash.jar otherwise a ClassNotFound exception will be 
	thrown for each fx graph on a display. For example:
	
	ARCHIVE="gmsjrtview.jar,gmsjmodels.jar,gmsjext.jar,gmsjrtvreport.jar,gmsjflash.jar,snmp.jar"
	
	
	Limitations:
	
	- Custom Fx objects are not replaced.
	
	- The replacement graphs do not exactly match the fx graphs in 
	appearance. There are minor but noticeable differences in colors, 
	gradients, fonts for legends and axis labels, tick marks, axis line style 
	and thickness, spacing and placement of graph components, etc.
	
	- The following properties of obj_fxtrend are not supported in 
	obj_trendgraph02: legendPosition, logAxisFlag, alarmGlow, 
	traceNShadowFlag. So an obj_trendgraph02 replacement will always 
	have a linear Y axis and its legend, if visible, will be on the right.
	
	- Interactive changes made by the user to an fx graph's scrollbar knob 
	position, legend size, or time range are not applied to the replacement 
	graph. Also, current data that has been applied to an fx trend graph is not 
	re-applied to the replacement graph. So, the trace data, legend position, 
	scrollbar position, and time range on the replacement graph will appear 
	as though the display was opened just before the replacement was 
	created.
	
	- The pie on an obj_fxpie object is always drawn as a circle but on 
	obj_pie it is drawn as an ellipse that fills the available rectangular area.

Control Objects

16129: Slider control range problems in thin client fixed
	In prior releases, there were two problems with the slider/scale control in 
	the thin client:
	
	1. If a slider control is configured so that (valueMax - valueMin) < 5 then in 
	the thin client the slider is always disabled.
	
	2. If a slider control has a minValue > 0, then in the thin client the control's 
	upper limit is incorrectly set to maxValue + minValue, instead of maxValue.
	
	Both problems are fixed in this release.

16256: Input validation implemented for text entry controls
	The text entry controls (obj_c1textedit, obj_c1textedit_i, obj_c1textedit_d) 
	have been enhanced to support input validation. 
	
	The following properties have been added to the text entry controls in the 
	Interaction category:
	
	inputValidVarToSet - Attach to a local variable. This variable will be 
	updated when the control executes with a value of 1 if the input is valid or 
	a value of 0 if the input is invalid.
	
	invalidInputMsgVarToSet - Attach to a local variable. This variable will be 
	updated when the control executes with an error message if the input is 
	invalid or an empty string if the input is valid.
	
	Furthermore, if the validation fails, the control's actionCommand is not 
	executed.
	
	The following properties have been added to the numeric text entry 
	controls:
	
	valueMin - The minimum valid value. If no value is specified, there will be 
	no minimum value validation.
	
	valueMax - The maximum valid value. If no value is specified, there will be 
	no maximum value validation.
	
	The non-numeric text entry control has 3 new properties in the Data category:
	
	characterCase - Select Mixed Case, Upper Case, or Lower Case. 
	
	minCharacters - The minimum number of characters allowed in the 
	field.  If no value is specified, there will be no validation done on the 
	minimum number of characters.
	
	maxCharacters - The maximum number of characters allowed in the 
	field.  If no value is specified, there will be no validation done on the 
	maximum number of characters.
	
	The validation occurs whenever the control executes. This happens 
	when the user presses enter on a text field. If the 
	executeOnFocusLostFlag is selected, the control also executes 
	whenever the object loses focus. If the executeOnKeyStrokeFlag is 
	selected, the controls also executes whenever a key is pressed while the 
	object has focus.
	
	If the validation fails, the control's actionCommand is not executed.
	
	This task also enhances the Thin Client to reject invalid characters if they 
	are typed in a numeric entry field. However, invalid characters can still be 
	copied & pasted into a numeric field.

16377: Edit box shows but won't parse 1000s separator
	In previous versions, the thin client would automatically insert a comma as 
	the thousands-separator in an integer- or double-type edit box 
	(obj_c1textedit_i and obj_c1textedit_d), but the display server would not 
	parse numeric values correctly if they contained commas. In this release, 
	the thin client will not automatically insert commas as the thousands-
	separator.

Fx Trend Chart

16284: Fixed autoscale problem when using multi-trace table
	A problem in the Fx trend graph has been fixed which caused the y-axis 
	range to be too large when the multiTraceHistoryValueTable property was 
	attached to a function result.

Object Grid

16061: Composite in object grid no longer drawn 1 pixel too small
	In version 5.5 and version 5.6, the composite object was rendered 1 pixel 
	too small if the resizeMode was Size to Display and the bgVisFlag and/or 
	bgBorderFlag were off. This problem has been fixed.

Pie Charts

16292: Fixed memory leak with gradient fill on obj_piescale
	A memory leak that affected obj_piescale when pieGradientMode was set to 
	any value other than None has been fixed. A minor leak that occurred on a 
	drilldown to the current window has also been fixed.

Radar Charts

16228: New properties to set axis and grid colors on Radar Graph
	Three new properties have been added to the Radar Graph (obj_radar):
	
	gridColor - set the color of the grid lines
	valueAxisColor - set the color of the value axis and value axis labels
	radialAxisColor - set the color of the radial axis and radial axis label

Tables

16225: Cell properties added to rotated table (obj_table03)
	The following properties have been added to the rotated table (obj_table03):
	
	            cellBgColor - set the cell background color
	            cellBgStripeContrast - set the contrast level for the stripes if cellBgStripedFlag is on
	            cellBgStripedFlag - select to set alternating striped rows
	            cellTextColor - set the cell text color
	            cellTextFont - set the cell text font
	            cellTextSize - set the size of the cell text (in pixels) or set to -1 to use the default size

RTView Display Panel

15734: RTView has been enhanced to support style sheets
	RTView has been enhanced to support style sheets. Style sheets 
	allow you to set the values for graphical object properties in your displays 
	from one or more external style sheet files. See the documentation for 
	information on how to use style sheets.
	
	

16254: A minimum size for a display can now be specified
	A minimum size for a display can now be specified. If the Resize Mode 
	for the display is "Layout" and the user resizes a panel containing a 
	display, the display will not be made any smaller than its minimum size. 
	This can be useful to prevent objects from overlapping in Layout mode. 
	
	In the Viewer, a panel cannot be resized  smaller than the minimum size 
	of the current display in the panel. In the thin client, a panel can be made 
	smaller than the minimum size of the display, but in that situation 
	scrollbars will appear in the panel.
	
	A display's minimum size is defined by two properties named 
	resizeWidthMin and resizeHeightMin, which appear in the Interaction 
	category of the display's Model Properties. (To configure a display's 
	Model Properties in the Builder, select File/Background Properties then 
	click the Model Properties button). The default value for each property is 
	zero, which means the display has no minimum size.
	
	The resizeWidthMin and resizeHeightMin properties can be specified in a 
	stylesheet file, as shown below:
	
	   m_basemodel {resizeWidthMin:600; resizeHeightMin:400}
	
	This can be useful for setting the minimum size for multiple displays.
	
	If resizeWidthMin or resizeHeightMin are set to values that are larger than 
	the display's full width and height, they are ignored and no minimum size 
	will be enforced on the display. The full width and height for a display are 
	defined in the Background Properties dialog, using the Model Width and 
	Model Height fields.

TIBCO EMS Manager

16264: Purging of multiple destinations at once now possible
	The TIBCO EMS Manager has been enhanced to allow the purging and 
	deleting of multiple topics or queues in a single operation. In the Manage 
	Topics page, you can select multiple topics from the table at the bottom of 
	the page by holding the shift or control key while either clicking multiple rows 
	or using the arrow keys to highlight multiple rows. The same can be done to 
	select multiple queues from the table at the bottom of the Manage Queues 
	page. The selected topics or queues will be presented as a semi-colon 
	delimited list.

TIBCO EMS Manager - Administration

16263: New Manage Connections administration page
	The TIBCO EMS Manager has been enhanced to include a new Manage 
	Connections administration page. On this page, you can select a server 
	at the top of the page to see a list of connections for that server at the 
	bottom of the page. To delete a connection, select it from the 
	Connections table and click Delete Connection. Note that this will 
	disconnect the client using the connection from the server, so this feature 
	should be used with caution.
	
	A new command has been added to the TIBCO EMS Administration data 
	source: delete_connection. The arguments are as follows:
	
	delete_connection serverUrl connectionID
	
	For example:
	tcp://emsserver1:7222 delete_connection 555

Viewer - Applet

16260: Error message when applet is refreshed has been removed
	A bug has been fixed which caused the Viewer applet to throw an 
	InstanceAlreadyExistsException if the applet was reloaded.
	
	The applet no longer prints the message "ERROR: cannot create RTView 
	MBeans" at startup.

Version 5.6c1 Release Notes

Alerts

15701: Support for custom alert text as part of alert command added
	The discrete, limits and multi state alerts have been enhanced to support custom 
	command text. The following properties have been added to the alerts:
	
	Discrete Alert:
	valueHighAlertCommandText
	valueMediumAlertCommandText
	valueLowAlertCommandText
	
	Limits Alert:
	valueHighAlertCommandText
	valueHighWarningCommandText
	valueLowAlertCommandText
	valueLowWarningCommandText
	
	Multi State Alert:
	alertStateNAlertCommandText
	
	The values of these properties are used in the $alertCommandText substitution 
	which can only be used in the alertCommand property.
	
	These properties take either a string or a tabular data. The scalar value is 
	supported whether the useTabularDataFlag is selected or not. If a scalar value is 
	specified, this will be used for the $alertCommandText substitution.
	
	The tabular value is only supported if the useTabularDataFlag is selected. When 
	specifying a tabular alert text value, the input table must contain two columns. The 
	first column must contain indexes and the second column must contain alert 
	command text values. The index value for each row in the input table attached to 
	valueTable will be used to lookup the corresponding alert command text value. If 
	the index is not found in the specified alert text table, the $alertCommandText 
	substitution will be set to an empty string. If the useTabularDataFlag is off, the 
	$alertCommandText substitution will be set to an empty string if the alert text value 
	is tabular.
	
	If value is entered, the $alertCommandText substitution will be an empty string.

15740: New option renotifyCommand aded to all alerts
	The discrete, limits and multi state alerts have been enhanced to support the 
	reNotificationCommand property. If specified, this command will be used instead of 
	the alertCommand for renotifications. If not specified, the alertCommand will be used 
	as before.
	

15848: Tabular data allowed for  value*AlertText property
	The alert text properties in the discrete, limits and multi state alerts have been 
	enhanced to support tabular data. This includes the following properties:
	
	Discrete Alert:
	valueHighAlertText
	valueMediumAlertText
	valueLowAlertText
	
	Limits Alert:
	valueHighAlertText
	valueHighWarningText
	valueLowAlertText
	valueLowWarningText
	
	Multi State Alert:
	alertStateNAlertText
	
	When specifying a tabular alert text value, the input table must contain two 
	columns. The first column must contain indexes and the second column must 
	contain alert text values. The index value for each row in the input table attached 
	to valueTable will be used to lookup the corresponding alert text value. If the index 
	is not found in the specified alert text table, the default alert text is used. If the 
	useTabularDataFlag is off, the default alert text will be used if the alert text value 
	is tabular. 
	
	If a string value or no value are entered, the previous behavior is used.
	
	Whether a tabular, scalar or no value are entered, the $alertText and 
	$alertEmailBody substitutions will contain the same string shown in the Alert Text 
	field of the alert table. The same substitutions that are supported for the string 
	value are also supported for tabular values.

15889: Link objects no longer fail to change color
	In 5.4c1 a bug was introduced to the link object so that the link color did not change 
	based on the link's value*Alert properties. This has been fixed.

15895: Alert state now correct if input table changes concurrently
	In previous releases, an incorrect alert state could be generated for tabular alerts if 
	the input to the alert was updated while the alert was being evaluated. Similarly, the 
	"Evaluate Expression By Row" function could produce invalid results if its input table 
	changed while the function was updating. Both problems have been fixed.

Builder - Editing

15859: Label obj_label11s no longer changes coordinates after saving
	In versions 5.2c1 through 5.5c1, the obj_label11 and obj_label11s objects were 
	shifted 8 pixels to the left every time the .rtv file containing the object was saved. 
	This has been fixed.

15900: Builder Options->File List Size can now be set to 0
	In the Display Builder's Builder Options Dialog, the field for "Recently Used File List 
	Size" should accept a value of 0, but it did not. This has been fixed.

Builder - Options Dialogs

15748: Substitutions column has been added to the Caches tab
	A column labeled Substitutions has been added to the Caches tab in the Options 
	dialog.
	
	This column has the same functionality as on on the Alerts and Globals tab, 
	where it has always been available. 
	
	The substitutions defined in the column will be applied to the corresponding Cache 
	Definition File when it is loaded. This allows the same cache definition file to be 
	specified multiple times with different sets of substitutions. In that case, each 
	cache that is defined in the file should contain a substitution in the cacheName 
	property, since cache names must be unique.
	
	As usual, substitutions are specfied as name:value pairs, with pairs separated by 
	spaces. If a value contains a space, the entire value should be enclosed in single 
	quotes. Substitution names may not contain spaces or colons.
	
	

Builder - Property Dialogs

15945: Property Dialog Categories again alphabetical
	In the Display Builder Object Properties dialog, the property categories where 
	themselves not alphabetized. This has been fixed.

Commands

14453: SNMP Trap command can now send alert notifications
	The RTView System Command "Send SNMP Trap" has been enhanced in 
	conjunction with RTView Alerts. Now, when you select SNMP Trap for the Alert 
	Command, you will have in the Define SNMP Command window a Specific Trap 
	named "Alert". This trap is sent with the name "rtviewAlert" and includes the alert 
	notification data (see MIB defintion below).
	
	In addition, traps sent by RTView now use enterprise OID "private.enterprises.sl" (.1.3.6.1.4.1.34605).
	
	
	MIB defintion of the rtviewAlert type:
	
	rtview		OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { sl 1 }
	rtviewNotifications	OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { rtview 1 }
	
	rtviewAlert NOTIFICATION-TYPE
		OBJECTS {
			rtviewAlertName,
			rtviewAlertIndex,
			rtviewAlertTime,
			rtviewAlertLastUpdateTime,
			rtviewAlertSeverity,
			rtviewAlertText,
			rtviewAlertID,
			rtviewAlertLabel,
			rtviewAlertCommandText,
			rtviewAlertCurrentValue,
			rtviewAlertComparisonValue
		}
		::=  { rtviewNotifications 2 }
	
	

15245: Commands no longer trigger after window is closed
	In previous releases, the text entry and password controls executed an extra 
	command if the executeOnFocusLostFlag was on and the 
	commandCloseWindowOnSuccessFlag was also on. In this case the extra command 
	was executed after the window closed and did not use the correct substitution 
	values. This has been fixed so that the extra command after the window closes is 
	no longer executed.

Data Historian

15472: Historian no longer ignores dataserver settings in OPTIONS.ini
	In prior releases, the Historian ignored the dataserver and xmlredirect options 
	specified in OPTIONS.ini. This is fixed.

15967: -compactionVerbose option fixed
	In the previous version, the option to set -compactionVerbose:n on the command line 
	was broken. This has been fixed.

Data Server

15904: Supported added for "As Needed" Data Server connections
	In prior releases, all connections to Data Servers are opened when the RTView 
	client application starts and are closed only when the client exits. In this release, 
	each Data Server connection has an Activate option, with a choice of  "At 
	Startup", for the traditional behavior just described, and  "As Needed". An "As 
	Needed" connection is not activated (opened) until the client application loads a 
	display that contains attachments directed to that server. Later, the connection 
	will be deactivated (closed) if all such attachments are removed and a 
	configurable idle time period (default is 15 seconds) has elapsed. 
	
	To support this feature, a combo box labeled "Activate"  with the choices "At 
	Startup" or "As Needed" has been added to the data server option tab and to the 
	Named Data Servers dialog. The default choice will be "At Startup" and it can be 
	set independently for the default data server connection and each named data 
	server connection. Each dialog also allows for the definition of an idle period for 
	deactivation if "As Needed" is selected. 
	
	These options can also be specified from the command line. For example, to set 
	the default data server connection to activate as needed with an idle time of 30 
	seconds:
	
		run_viewer -dataserver:remote:MyHost:3278;activate=AsNeeded;idle=30
	
	To set the connection to the data server named "Blue" to activate as needed with 
	an idle time of 60 seconds, and with a primary and a backup connection:
	
		run_viewer -dataserver:name=Blue;connect=PrimaryHost:3456,BackupHost:3456;activate=AsNeeded;idle=60
	
	This feature affects the Get Data Server Connection Status function. If an As 
	Needed data server connection is not active because it is not needed, then the 
	Status column of the table returned by the Get Data Server Connection Status 
	function will contain the string "inactive". (The other possible values for the Status 
	column are 'OK', 'no connection', and 'no service' as described in the release note 
	for 15126)
	

16050: Extraneous add/remove listener calls on client discarded
	The Builder and Viewer have been enhanced to avoid sending extraneous add and 
	remove listener requests when a display is opened that contains a grid object with 
	composite displays.
	

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

15749: The cacheName property now supports substitutions
	The cacheName property of a cache definition object may now contain a substitution. 
	
	The substitutions to be applied to a cache definition file can be specified in the 
	Caches tab of the Options dialog, as described in the release note for 15748.
	
	

15876: New "Send Table" function
	A new function has named "Send Table" has been added.
	
	The function can be used to send a table to a remote instance of the Data Server, 
	over a socket or an http connection. The RTVAgent data adapter is used to 
	receive the table in the Data Server. 
	
	Typically, the function will be used to create an RTVAgent at each site that has 
	data tables to send, as follows:
	
	1. One or more instances of the Send Table function are configured to send the 
	data tables of interest. Typically, the function's "Table to Send" argument is 
	attached to the data table using one of the RTView data adapters.
	
	2. The function instances from (1) are saved in an rtv file, named SendTables.rtv 
	for example.
	
	3. A new script, run_agent, is used to start the agent and load the rtv file from 
	step (2). For example:
	
		> run_agent SendTables.rtv
	
	The Data Server to which the data tables are sent is configured to receive the 
	data. Typically the data tables from all of the agents in the same agent class are 
	stored in a cache table. This is done by attaching the valueTable property of a 
	cache object to RTVAgent data.
	
	The arguments of the Send Table function are:
	
	Connection - the connection string for the remote RTVAgent adapter. This should 
	either be a hostname:port string, for example localhost:5665, or a URL for the 
	rtvagent servlet, for example http://SomeServer/rtvagent
	
	Agent Name - a string that identifies this agent (sender) to the RTVAgent data 
	adapter. This should be unique among all agents in the same Agent Class. 
	Example: District 5 Agent
	
	Agent Class - a string that uniquely identifies the class (type) of agents to which 
	this agent belongs. Example: MyCompany.DistrictAgent
	
	Table Name - a string to identify the table when its received by the RTVAgent 
	data adapter. Example: Sales Table
	
	Table to Send - the table to be sent to the remote RTVAgent data adapter. This is 
	the only argument that should change on each update
	
	Insert Column For Agent Name - an integer. If 1, then a column named AgentName 
	will be inserted into the table before it is sent. The column is filled with the value 
	of the Agent Name argument. This column is useful for identifying which rows 
	were received from which agents, if multiple agents in the same class send 
	tables with the same Table Name.
	
	Insert Column For Agent Time: - an integer. If 1, then a column named AgentTime 
	will be inserted into the table before it is sent, and the column is filled with the 
	current time.
	
	

15936: Enhance Cache Data Attachment Dialog
	The data attachment dialog for the Cache Data Source has been enhanced to 
	provide additional filtering options.  Clicking on the radio button labeled "Filter 
	Rows = Advanced" will make 5 new filter fields appear in the dialog, as described 
	below. Typically this will be used in attachments to the cache history table.
	
	Time Range: This specifies the time range of rows to be returned. The units are 
	seconds by default, but a suffix of m,h,d,M can be specified for minutes, hours, 
	days, Months etc. If Time Range is left blank or is zero or less, then the rows are 
	not filtered by time range. If Time Range is specified but neither Begin Time nor 
	End Time (see below) is specified, then the most recent rows of data within the 
	specified time range are returned. If both Begin Time and End Time are specified, 
	then Time Range is ignored.
	
	BeginTime The minimum timestamp of data to be returned, specified as a date 
	string or as a long timestamp. If Time Range is also specified but End Time is not, 
	then the time of the data returned will span from Begin Time to Begin Time + Time 
	Range. 
	
	End Time The maximum timestamp of data to be returned, specified as a date 
	string or as a long timestamp. If Time Range is also specified, then the time of the 
	data returned will span from End Time - Time Range to End Time. 
	
	Rows per Page: The maximum number of rows to be returned from the 
	attachment. The default is blank (or zero) which means return all rows.
	
	Page Number: This is used to determine the offset of the rows to be returned. For 
	example if Rows per Page  = 10 and Page Number = 2, then the the attachment 
	will return rows 11 to 19. For historical data, page 1 contains the most recent 
	data.
	
	

15998: Multiple cache data inputs support
	The tabular cache definition object (obj_cache_table) has been enhanced to support 
	multiple input attachments.  A new property named valueTableCount has been added. 
	The default value is 1, which results in the cache object having a single property 
	named valueTable which can be attached to tabular input data. If valueTableCount is 
	assigned to 2, then another property named valueTable02 will appear in the property 
	sheet and it can be attached to a different tabular input., and so on up to 
	valueTableCount  = 99.
	

16004: Filtered cache attachment no longer throw array bounds exception
	The following problem has been fixed: In prior releases, if a cache table has multiple 
	index columns and an attachment to it  has a row filter involving two or more of the 
	index columns, and if a data table is applied to the cache and the data table contains 
	a row in which an index column contains an empty string, an array bounds exception 
	is thrown by cache data source.

JMS Admin Data Source (for TIBCO EMS only)

15860: URL Metadata included in column
	A new column, URL, has been added to the following EMS Administration data 
	source metrics tables:
	
		Users
		ListenPorts
		Producers
		Durables
		Queues
		Topics
	
	A new column, serverURL, has been added to the Connections table.
	
	The URL and serverURL columns contain the URL of the server returning the 
	data. All of the server tables and the rest of the metrics tables already had a URL 
	column, and have not been modified.
	
	Existing displays with data attachments to these tables, and * selected for the 
	Field(s) will now show the new URL column.
	

15861: Wildcard support added to Server field in data attachments
	All of the TIBCO EMS Administration data source metrics tables have been enhanced 
	to support * in the Server field of the data attachment. Note that the server tables 
	already supported * in the Server field.
	
	When * is used in the Server field of the data attachment, the table returned will 
	contain rows for all active servers.
	

JMX Data Source

14697: Wildcarding allowed for JMX connection field
	The ability to add a wildcarded connection name like "Sample*" has been added as a 
	member of a JMX Connection Group. Wilcarded names may contain one or more * 
	characters in them.
	
	

15828: Bug in composite data display if first record null is fixed
	In version 4.6c1 a bug was introduced to the JMX data source that caused it to 
	process composite data incorrectly if the first element in the data was null. This has 
	been fixed.

15923: JMX queries now multi-threaded
	The JMX data source has been enhanced to run MBean queries in a separate thread. 
	This prevents slow queries from blocking the main application thread and improves 
	application responsiveness.
	

15971: JMX Connection Groups have been implemented
	JMX Connection Groups have been implemented allowing the user to select a subset 
	of the available connections as a group. That group name may be then used 
	wherever a connection name was previously valid.
	
	

16009: Jmx Notifications performance enhancement
	Attachments to JMX notifications have been optimized.

16015: JMX attachments to Operations no longer return null table
	In previous versions, if a client mBean offered no attributes RTView would show a 
	null table as a result of an operation.  This has been fixed.

Demos

RV Monitor Demo

15888: Function Errors in summary totals fixed
	In previous releases, the rvmonitor demo generated errors about missing functions. 
	This has been fixed.

Display Server

15857: Data Server setting in OPTIONS now has effect on Display Server
	In prior releases, the Display Server ignored the dataserver and xmlredirect options 
	specified in OPTIONS.ini. This is fixed.

15935: Fix for incorrect drawing routine in server jvm
	Sun bug #6876276 has caused a problem in the drawing routine when using the 
	server jvm in java version 1.6.0_14-1.6.0_17. Sun fixed the bug in version 1.6.0_18. 
	The problem has been fixed in RTView with a work around, but it is not 
	recommended that these versions of java be used for applications running on the 
	server jvm.

Functions

15823: EEAS function no longer fails if parameter contains a comma
	In the Display Editor, when defining a function of type Evaluate Expression and using 
	the condExpr evaluator function, the result would be incorrect if a string argument to 
	condExpr contained a comma. This has been fixed.

15863: A new function named Store Table in Cache has been added.
	A new function named Store Table in Cache has been added.
	
	The cache is specified by name. A value of zero is returned if the named cache is 
	not defined otherwise 1 is returned. The arguments for the function are as follows:
	
	Table - the table to be stored.
	
	Cache Name - the name of the cache in which the table should be stored. The cache 
	must already be defined.
	

15898: Function GetDataServerConnectionStatus no longer null if no data
	In previous releases, the GetDataServerConnectionStatus returned an empty table 
	(no columns or rows) if no data server connections were defined. Now it returns a 
	table with no rows but with all of the expected columns.

Object Library

15481: Tooltips for all non-flex graphs now are the same as flex graphs
	The look of the mouseOver in the non-flex graphs has been improved. They are now 
	consistent with the flex graphs and the non-graph objects. This change does not 
	apply to the thin client.

Charts (General)

15921: New Status History Chart
	A new graphical object named status history chart has been added. It appears on 
	the Graphs palette in the Builder. It shows discrete status values as horizontal 
	bars drawn against a horizontal time axis. The chart is intended to be attached to 
	a data table that contains a status column and one or more index columns. One 
	horizontal bar is drawn for each unique combination of index column values. The 
	value of the status column is used to determine the fill color and fill style of the bar 
	segment or cell at the corresponding time interval. A label appears at the right 
	edge of each bar, containing the unique name that corresponds to the bar. A 
	circular indicator also appears next to the label indicating the most recent status 
	value for that bar.
	
	For example, consider a data table that holds time-based status information for 
	nodes on a network. It has three columns:
	
	    time_stamp,    node_name,   status
	
	The time_stamp column contains the timestamp for the row. The node_name 
	string is unique for each node so it is used as the index column for the table. The 
	status column contains either "up", "down", or "unknown".  Here is an example of 
	the contents for a network with 2 nodes:
	
	12:00,   Node01,   up  
	12:00,   Node02,   up
	12:01,   Node01,   up
	12:01,   Node02,   down
	12:02,   Node01,   up
	12:02,   Node02,   up
	
	... and so on ...
	
	This table could be attached to the valueHistoryTable property of the status 
	history chart. The barProperties property would be configured to assign a fill 
	color and style that corresponds to status=up (solid green, say) and another for 
	status=down (crosshatch red, say) The chart would draw 2 horizontal bars, one 
	for Node01 and another for Node02. Each bar would contain a segment or cell for 
	each time interval the table for that node. Given the example table above, if the 
	chart was observed at 12:03, each bar would contain 2 cells, one for the 12:00 
	to 12:01 interval and another for the 12:01 to 12:02 interval. The fill color and style 
	of the cell would correspond to the status at the start of that interval, as 
	determined by the barProperties property. Note that no cells would be drawn for 
	the interval starting at 12:02, since there is no end point for that interval in the 
	data table. Instead, the status value for the last data value is always used to 
	control the fill color and style of the circular indicator that appears at the right end 
	of each bar, next to the bar's label.
	
	The important properties of the status history chart are as follows.
	
	A. properties in the Data category:
	
	    timestampColumnName: The name of the table column that contains the 
	timestamp for each row. If blank, the chart will look for a column named 
	"time_stamp" in the table and use that if found, otherwise if the first column in the 
	table contains timestamp data, then it will be used. If still no timestamp column is 
	found, then the current time will be used.
	
	    indexColumnNames:  The name of a column or multiple columns which can be 
	used to uniquely identify which rows in the table should be plotted on the same 
	horizontal bar. In the example above, node_name would be assigned to this 
	property. If indexColumnNames is blank, the chart will assume that the table's 
	second column is the index column.
	
	    valueColumnName: The name of the column containing the status value used to 
	determine the fill color and style of each bar cell. This column can contain a string, 
	a number, or a boolean value. Its value will be compared to the barProperties 
	property to find the appropriate fill color and style. If valueColumnName is blank, 
	the third column in the table will be used.
	
	    labelColumnName: The name of the column containing the string to show on the 
	label for each bar. If blank, the label string will be composed by from the index 
	column values for the bar.
	
	    descriptionColumnName: The name of the column containing addition 
	information for each row. This information will be included in the mouseover 
	(tooltip) text shown when the mouse is over a bar cell (if the mouseOverFlag 
	property is checked). If descriptionColumnName is blank, then no additional 
	information is not included in the tooltips.
	
	    valueHistoryTable: This property should be attached to a data table containing 
	the historical data for the chart, if any. It should contain a timestamp column, index 
	columns, and a value column as described above. When a data table is applied to 
	this property, any previously plotted data is removed and the entire chart is 
	replotted. Typically this property will be attached to the history table of a cache.
	
	    valueCurrentTable: This property can be attached to a data table containing 
	rows of current data for the chart. It should contain index columns, and a value 
	column as described above. If it does not contain a timestamp column, then the 
	current time will be assumed for each for in the table. When a data table is applied 
	to this property, the data is assumed to be newer than any other previously 
	plotted data is removed and is appended to it. Typically this property will be 
	attached to the current table of a cache.
	
	    maxNumberOfRows: The maximum number of rows of historical plus current 
	data that the chart will maintain. Older rows will be discarded as necessary, 
	which may cause bar cells to be removed from the left edge of the chart.
	
	B. properties in the Bar category:
	
	    barHeightSpacing: The vertical distance, in pixels, between the bottom of each 
	bar and the top of the bar below it. This must be an even number >= 2.
	
	    barHeightFitFlag, barHeightMin, barLabelTextHeight: These properties are used 
	together to determine the height of each bar. The minimum height of each bar, in 
	pixels, is the larger of the barHeightMin property and the pixel height of the bar's 
	label, which is approximately 1.9 * barLabelTextHeight. If the chart's plot area is 
	not tall enough to display each bar at its minimum height, then a vertical scrollbar 
	will appear to show the remaining bars. One the other hand,  if the chart's plot 
	area is taller than needed and if the barFitFlag property is checked, then each bar 
	will be stretched vertically to fill the additional space.
	
	    barCellBorderFlag: If checked, a vertical line is drawn between each cell of 
	each bar. These lines correspond to the location of the data points that mark the 
	start and end of each cell. Note that the lines may be evenly spaced, or not, 
	depending on whether or not the data is updated at regular intervals. The color of 
	the lines is determined by the gridColor property.
	
	    barLabelBgColor: The background color of the label for the first (topmost) bar 
	and every other bar below it.
	
	    barLabelBgColor2: The background color of the label for the second bar from 
	the top and every other bar below it.
	
	    barLabelMaxLength: The maximum length, in pixels, for each bar label. If the 
	label is longer it will be clipped. A value of zero indicates no maximum length.
	
	    barOutlineFlag: If checked, each bar will be outlined in the grid color.
	
	    barGradientStyle: Indicates whether a gradient should be applied when filling a 
	bar cell. Note that this property is ignored for cells that have a fill pattern specified 
	by the barProperties property.
	
	    barProperties: This property is used to map each possible status value to a 
	corresponding fill color and style. The property is configured from the Bar 
	Properties dialog. A fill style can be solid or one of several patterns. A value of * 
	can be configured to specify the fill color and style for any values that are not 
	explicitly specified.
	   
	C. Other properties.
	
	    mouseOverFlag: If checked, a mouseover tooltip will appear when the mouse is 
	over a bar cell or a bar label. Over a cell is, the tooltip will show information about 
	the data row that corresponds to the left edge of the cell. Over a bar label, the 
	tooltip will show information about the last (most recent) data row for that bar.
	
	    drilldownColumnSubs: A drilldown can be performed by clicking on a bar cell or 
	a bar label. If a cell is clicked, the drilldown substitutions will be set to match the 
	data row that corresponds to the left edge of the cell. If a bar label is clicked, the 
	drilldown substitutions will be set to match the last (most recent) data row for that 
	bar.
	
	    sortAscendingFlag: If checked, the bars are sorted alphabetically by their 
	labels. If unchecked, the sort is in reverse alphabetical order.
	
	
	The chart defines a number of other properties that are common to the other 
	graph objects. These have the same purpose as on the other graphs.
	

15942: Object selection no longer required for graph mouseover
	The trend, spark, bar, pie, radar, stock and xy graphs have all been enhanced so 
	that you no longer have to select the object in order to see the mouse over or cursor.

Fx Bar Chart

15976: drillDownColumnSubs and drillDownSelectMode properties added
	The Interaction properties drillDownColumnSubs and drillDownSelectMode are now 
	available in the Fx Bar Chart. Functionality is identical to the respective properties of 
	the standard Bar Chart.
	
	

Heatmap

15922: Heatmap no longer requires object selection for mouseover
	The heatmap has been enhanced so that you no longer have to select the object in 
	order to see the mouse over text.

Trend Charts

15984: Drilldown/mouseover in thin client if resizeMode=scale now works
	In the previous release, the drilldown and mouseover feature did not work on a 
	trendgraph in the thin client if the display resize mode was "scale".

Security

15893: Display Server now calls getSubstitutions for each login
	The Display Server will now call the custom user manager's getSubstitutions(String 
	userName) method once for each login session. Previously, the method was only 
	called once for each unique username, even if the same user logged out and back in 
	from a different browser session.  The new behavior allows the custom user 
	manager to return a different set of substitutions for each user session.
	

Viewer

15772: New option to set default window title
	The Display Builder, Display Viewer and Display Viewer Applet have been 
	enhanced to support a new window title option. By default, window titles contain 
	the name of the application followed by the display name. For example:
	
	RTView mydisplay.rtv
	
	The new Custom Window Title option on the General Tab of the Application 
	Options dialog now controls the window titles. If specified, the Custom Window 
	Title will be used, if not, the default window title will be used. This window title 
	takes precedence over the title specified in your panel configuration file. The 
	Window Title option in the Drill Down Properties dialog takes precedence over the 
	Custom Window Title. To specify an empty window title, enter a single space in 
	the Custom Window Title field.
	
	If this option is modified in the Display Builder, the new setting will only be applied 
	to new windows. The titles of windows that are already open will not be 
	changed.
	
	The custom window title can also be specified from the command line or applet 
	parameter:
	
	command line: -customWindowTitle:myTitle
	applet: param=customWindowtitle value=myTitle
	

Viewer - Multi-Panel Frameworks

15906: Option to disable preload of tabbed panels added
	The tabbed panel configuration file for the Viewer now supports an option to 
	control the loading and unloading of displays in tabs. By default, the displays for 
	all tabs are loaded at startup and are never unloaded. A new attribute named 
	"preload" can be set to false on the TabbedPanel tag to change this behavior so 
	that only the display for the first tab is loaded at startup and the display for a tab 
	is unloaded when the user selects another tab. In other words, if preload=false 
	then only one display at a time is loaded in a tabbed panel.
	
	Example:
	
	<?xml version="1.0" ?>
	<panels xmlns="www.sl.com" version="1.0">
	
	<TabbedPanel title="Test of Tabbed Panel" placement="top" preload="false">
	  <RtViewPanel title="Table Overview" display="overview"/>
	  <RtViewPanel title="Production Table" display="production_table"/>
	  <RtViewPanel title="System Table" display="system_table"/>
	</TabbedPanel>
	
	</panels>
	

Version 5.5c1 Release Notes

Alerts

15157: $alertTime added to the list of alert variables
	A new substitution, $alertTime, has been added to the Discrete Alert, Limits Alert and 
	Multi State Alert. This substitution can be used in the actionCommand on the alert. The 
	value of this substitution is the time that the alert was generated. This is the same 
	value that is shown in the Time column of the Alert Table.

15833: Alerts now show a timestamp of the last data update
	A new column, Last Update Time, has been added to the AlertTable. This column 
	shows the date/time that the alert last received a data update. This column is 
	updated whenever new data is received for active (ie. not cleared) alert.
	
	A new property, timeColumnName, has been added to the Discrete, Limits and 
	Multi State alerts. If specified, the value in that column of the valueTable will be 
	used for the Last Update Time instead of the time the alert last received data. The 
	column specified in the timeColumnName property must be of type date or long. If 
	the timeColumnName is not specified, is not found, or is not of type long or date, 
	the time the alert received the data will be used instead of the column value.
	
	The timeColumnName property is only supported if the useTabularData flag is 
	turned on. It is not supported for scalar alerts. For scalar alerts, the time the alert 
	last received the data is always used.
	

15841: reNotificationMode added to alerts
	A new property, reNotificationMode, has been added to the Alert category for 
	Discrete, Limits and Multi State alerts. This property allows you to configure how 
	your alert will renotify. The reNotificationMode property supports the following 
	options:
	
	None - Do not renotify. The alertCommand is executed once when the alert is 
	activated, then never again.
	
	Renotify on Timer - Renotify based on the value in the reNotificationTime property. 
	The alertCommand is executed once when the alert is activated and then it is 
	re-executed every reNotificationTime seconds until the alert is cleared or 
	acknowledged. If the reNotificationTime is 0, the alert will not renotify.
	
	Renotify on Data Changed - Renotify when the input value changes. The 
	alertCommand is executed once when the alert is activated and again when a 
	different value is received until the alert is cleared or acknowledged. The new 
	value must be different than the previous value for the alert to renotify.
	
	Renotify on Data Updates - Renotify when the input value is updated. The 
	alertCommand is executed once when the alert is activated and again whenever 
	a value is received until the alert is cleared or acknowledged. The new data value 
	may be the same or different than the previous value for the alert to renotify.
	
	The default value is Renotify on Timer. Note that the reNotificationTime property is 
	ignored unless the reNotificationMode property is set to Renotify on Timer.
	

Builder

15689: Jide components updated to correct crash with jdk 1.6
	When running the Display Builder builder under JDK 1.6, the following exception might 
	appear:
	
	Exception in thread "AWT-EventQueue-0" java.lang.ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException:
	 No such child: 2
	        at java.awt.Container.getComponent(Unknown Source)
	        at com.jidesoft.swing.JideSplitPane.setDividersVisible(Unknown Source)
	        ...
	
	This problem has been fixed by updating the Jide components to version 2.7.2.
	

Builder - Options Dialogs

15814: Cache Display Data tabs fixed to show correct content
	In the Display Builder Caches dialog, if a given cache has both current and history 
	tables, the Display Content dialog will have two tabs, one for each. However the tab 
	labels were reversed from the actual contents of the tabs; this has been fixed.
	

Data Sources

15834: RTView Agent Data Adapter
	An RTVAgent data adapter has been added to RTView. It accepts connections 
	from remote agent applications. Once connected, agents can send data tables to 
	the RTVAgent data adapter and objects can be configured with data attachments 
	to those tables. 
	
	Agents are written using the com.sl.gmsjagent package, also new in this release. 
	The package is documented in the Customization section of the RTView Users 
	Guide. An example agent can be found in the custom/rtvagent directory of the 
	RTView installation.
	
	An agent can make either a direct socket connection to the RTVAgent data 
	adapter, or it can make an http connection via the rtvagent servlet. The rtvagent 
	servlet is also new in this release, and can be found in the servlets/rtvagent 
	directory of the RTView installation.
	
	When it connects to the RTVAgent data adapter, an agent identifies itself by two 
	strings: its Agent Class and Agent Name. The Agent Class should be globally 
	unique (e.g. "MyCompany.AgentType1") while the Agent Name should be unique 
	among agents with a given class (e.g. "Site 01", "Site 02", etc). When an agent 
	sends a data table to the RTVAgent data adapter, it specifies a Table Name string. 
	The table name should be unique among all tables that that agent sends (e.g. 
	"ProductionTable", "SalesTable").
	
	To attach an object property to a table received from an agent,  the Agent Class 
	and the Table Name (described above) must be specified in the RTVAgent data 
	dialog. The object property will receive all tables from all agents with the matching 
	Table Name and Agent Class.  The Agent Name will appear as a column in the 
	table.  Typically,  the valueTable property of a cache object will be attached to 
	RTVAgent data, and the AgentName column will be specified as an index column 
	for the cache. See the rtvagent example described above for a complete example.
	
	There is a predefined Agent Class named RTViewDs that supports one table 
	named Agents. The Agents table contains a row for each agent that is currently 
	connected. The columns in the table are: AgentName, AgentClass, Last Receive 
	Time (the time at which a table was most recently received from the agent), Total 
	Rows Received (cumulative count of table rows received from the agent), and 
	Client ID (a unique number assigned to the agent connection, which is < 10000 for 
	agents using a socket connection and > 10000 for agents using an http 
	connection).
	
	The Options dialog in the Builder now has an RTVAgent tab. The options on that 
	tab are as follows:
	
	 - Enabled : This option enables the RTVAgent data adapter. If the option is 
	unchecked, connections from agents will not be accepted. It is unchecked by 
	default. 
	
	-  Port : The port on which the RTVAgent data adapter will accept agent 
	connections. Note that only one application at a time can accept connections on a 
	given port. The default port is 5665. Valid port numbers are greater than 1024.
	
	-  Use SSL : If checked, a secure socket will be used for each agent that makes a 
	direct socket connection to the RTVAgent data adapter. Data is encrypted before 
	transmission over a secure socket. Note that this option does not apply to agents 
	that connect indirectly via HTTP and the rtvagent servlet. For secure connections 
	in that case, an HTTPS connection should be used from the agent to the rtvagent 
	servlet. (It may be necessary to configure your webserver to support HTTPS 
	connections, but that configuration is outside the scope of RTView).
	
	Changes made to the RTVAgent Options tab do not take affect until the options 
	have been saved and the RTView application is restarted. The options are saved 
	to the file named RTVAGENTOPTIONS.ini.
	
	The options can also be specified on the command line, as follows:
	
	   -rtvagentoption:enabled=[false|true]
	   -rtvagentoption:port=[port_number]
	   -rtvagentoption:ssl=[false|true]
	
	If the port number is changed from its default value then the rtvagent servlet, if 
	used, should also be reconfigured. The servlet.properties file, found in the 
	servlets/rtvagent directory of the RTView installation, should be edited and the 
	following line changed to specify the appropriate port:
	
	ServicePort=5665
	
	Then the make_war script should be run and the rtvagent.war file should be 
	redeployed.
	
	

JMS Data Source

15824: Crashes caused by data type changes fixed
	In previous releases, the JMS data source would crash under 2 scenarios:
	
	1. data for a message field or property initially came in with one data type, then came 
	in later with a different data type
	2. data for a message initially came in as a number or boolean type, then came in 
	with a null value.
	
	This has been fixed.
	

15840: Duplicate JMS data in history cache removed
	In prior releases, if the valueTable property of a cache had an attachment to JMS 
	data with a row filter, duplicate rows might appear in the cache history table. This is 
	fixed.

TIBCO Hawk Data Source

15612: Rounding of Hawk double types to 2 decimal places eliminated
	In previous releases, Hawk MicroAgent return columns with the type double were 
	rounded to 2 decimal places by the data source. This has been changed so that no 
	rounding occurs. Most objects have a valueFormat property that can be used to 
	round the displayed value. To revert to the previous behavior and round doubles in 
	the data source, use the -hawkrounddoubles command line parameter.

Display Server

15800: Display Server now executes system commands if via Data Server
	A bug which prevented the Display Server from executing system commands when 
	it was connected to the Data Server has been fixed.

15868: thin client support for panel resize
	The release note for 15784 describes the resize mode and anchor/docking 
	features that were added to the Display Builder and Display Viewer in this 
	release. These features are also supported in the thin client. The behavior in the 
	thin client differs from the Display Builder/Viewer in the following cases:
	
	- When the initial display is opened in the thin client, the browser frame is not 
	resized to match the display size as it is in the Display Viewer.  Instead, in crop 
	mode, the display will appear in its full size, and if the browser frame is larger 
	than the display, unused space will appear below and to the right of the display, 
	and if the browser frame is smaller than the display, scrollbars will appear. In 
	layout and scale modes, the display will briefly appear in its default size, and will 
	then resize to fit the browser frame size. This may also occur if another tab is 
	opened in the browser and the browser is resized, and then the browser tab that 
	contains the thin client is re-opened.
	
	- In layout and scale modes, after resizing the browser frame, table objects and 
	Fx charts will revert to their original states. For example if the user has clicked on 
	a column header in a table to sort the column, then after a resize the table will 
	revert to its default sort. Likewise, if the use has scrolled in a table or an Fx chart, 
	or resized the legend or zoomed in an Fx chart, then after a resize the scrollbars 
	and legends will revert to their initial position and size.
	
	- When resizeMode = scale, there will be unused space in the browser frame. 
	This is because in scale mode the display will only use the largest 4x3 
	rectangular area of the frame, to ensure equal scaling in both dimensions. The 
	unused area will have the same color as the display background, but will not 
	have a gradient fill.
	

Functions

15767: Extra reference appearing for function w/ empty include file
	In the Display Builder Function dialog, the reference count for a function could 
	become incorrect if: (1) the function is used more than once in data attachments to a 
	given object, and (2) an include file is added or removed. This has been fixed.
	

Object Library

Composite Object

15843: Composites with labels are no longer drawn at wrong position
	In previous releases, composite objects with labels were drawn in the wrong y 
	position. This has been fixed.
	
	This fix will not break existing displays. The y position of composites in existing 
	displays will be adjusted so the objects are drawn in the same location when opened 
	in the new version of RTView.

15844: Composite borderPixels are no longer off by 1
	In previous releases, the borderPixels property was not applied correctly to the 
	composite object. The number of pixels drawn was one less than the number 
	specified in the borderPixels property. This has been fixed. 
	
	When a display with a composite created with a previous version of RTView is 
	loaded into the new version of RTView, the number of borderPixels will be reduced 
	by one so that the object will be drawn the same as it was in the previous version.

15845: Support for resizing composite objects added
	A new property, resizeMode, has been added to the Composite category of the 
	composite object. When set to Size to Display (default), the size of the composite 
	is determined by the size of the display it contains, and the composite cannot be 
	resized. If set to Layout, the composite can be resized and the objects in the 
	composite display will be laid out according to their anchor and dock properties.
	
	If the resizeMode is set to Layout, the dock and anchor properties may be set on 
	the composite so that it will resize during a window resize if the window resize 
	mode is also set to Layout. If the window resize mode for the display containing 
	the composite is set to Scale, the composite object will do a scale instead of a 
	layout.
	
	Note that the dock and anchor properties should not be setup to stretch the 
	composite object if the resizeMode is Size to Display. This will cause the object to 
	toggle back and forth between stretched and not stretched when the window is 
	resized in Layout mode.
	

Control Objects

11275: Text wrapping added to rectangular general objects
	A new property, labelWordWrapMode, has been added to all of the rectangular 
	objects on the General palette. If set to a value other than None, the text specified 
	for the label property will be wrapped to fit the width of the object. The 
	obj_rect_ilvs has a new valueWordWrapMode property that does the same for 
	the valueString text.
	
	The labelWordWrapMode and valueWordWrapMode properties support the 
	following values:
	
	None - don't auto wrap text
	
	Space - Whenever possible, only add line breaks at whitespaces. If a single word 
	is longer than the object is wide, the line break will be added to the word so that 
	the text fits within the width of the object.
	
	Space and Punctuation - Whenever possible, only add line breaks at whitespaces 
	and punctuation characters. Supported punctuation characters are comma(,), 
	period(.), semi-colon(;), colon (:), hyphen(-), question mark(?), asterisk(*), 
	ampersand(&), greater than(<), less than(>), backslash(\), forward slash(/), 
	pipe(|), plus(+), exclamation point(!), and at(@). If a single word is longer than the 
	object is wide and none of these characters is in the word, the line break will be 
	added to the word so that the text fits within the width of the object.
	
	The labelWordWrapMode is ignored in the following cases:
	
	labelTextPosX = Outside Right
	labelTextPosX = Outside Left
	labelTextPosY = Tab
	labelTextPosY = Title
	
	The valueWordWrapMode is ignored in the following cases:
	
	valueTextPosX = Outside Right
	valueTextPosX = Outside Left
	
	In those cases, the text will not be wrapped.

Fx Bar Chart

15603: barFitFlag property now supported
	The Fx Bar Graph now supports the barFitFlag property found on the 
	standard bar graph. 
	
	The default for barFitFlag is ON  (checked).

15826: Fx Bar labels now draw correctly
	Value labels on bars that were scrolled off screen would still appear  usually over 
	the axis or margin areas.   This has been fixed so that labels first check the scrolled 
	status of their associated bars, and only draw themselves if those bars are visible.
	

Fx Trend Chart

15798: FX trend autoscale inconsistency corrected
	The Fx trend graph will now use the yValueMin and yValueMax properties to 
	determine the y axis range in the case where all of the y data values are zero, which 
	is consistent with the behavior of obj_trendgraph02. In previous releases, the Fx 
	trend graph would use a range of 0 to 100 in that case.

15799: Fx Trend chart label size in stripchart mode made consistent
	In prior releases, the y axis labels on the Fx trend graph would sometimes be too 
	small, when yAxisMultiRangeMode = Strip Chart and the y axis range changed 
	dynamically. This is fixed.

15813: Log axis no longer stuck at 1 to 100 if any y values <= 0
	A problem with the Fx trend graph, in which the log axis range would always be 1 to 
	100 regardless of the data values if any y values were <= 0, has been fixed. Note 
	that y values that are <= are still not plotted, since the log of such values is not 
	defined.

Object Grid

15591: Object grid bug for empty valueTable fixed
	In previous releases, the object grid would not display the icons correctly if the 
	valueTable was initially null then came in with only one column. This has been fixed.

RTView Display Panel

15784: Options to move/resize objects when panel is resized
	RTView has been enhanced to support display layout options for 
	window resize in the Display Builder and Display Viewer. Three window resize 
	modes are now supported:
	
	1. Layout. When the window is resized, the display is resized to fit the available 
	space. The objects in the display are laid out according to their anchor and dock 
	properties (see below). The window is not forced to maintain its aspect ratio. 
	Objects that are not docked or anchored will move relative to their offset from the 
	top left corner of the display. For example, if the object is centered on the display, 
	the object will move 50% of the resize amount. If the object is centered at 3/4 of 
	the display, it will move 75% of the resize amount.
	
	2. Scale. This is the default for the Display Builder, Display Viewer and Display 
	Viewer Applet. When the window is resized, the display and all of the objects in it 
	are scaled to fit the available space. The window is forced to maintain its aspect 
	ratio.
	
	3. Crop. This is the default for the Thin Client. When the window is resized, the 
	display stays the same size. If the window is bigger than the display, empty 
	space will show around the display. If the window is smaller than the display, 
	scrollbars will show up. The window is not forced to maintain its aspect ratio.
	
	All 3 of the above modes support zooming the display (right-click -> zoom). In both 
	Layout and Scale modes, if the window is resized while the display is zoomed, 
	the resize will further zoom the display.
	
	If Default is selected, the default window resize mode will be used. The default is 
	Crop for the Thin Client, and Scale for everything else.
	
	In the Display Builder, the window resize modes are only applied to drill down 
	windows. The main window of the Display Builder is always in crop mode.
	
	The application level window resize mode can be set in the General tab of the 
	Application Options dialog or on the command line:
		-resizeMode:XXX
	
	Where XXX is layout, scale or crop. It can also be set in the applet parameter:
		parameter=resizeMode
		valid values = layout, scale and crop
	
	If the window resize mode is changed in the Application Options dialog in the 
	Display Builder, the new value will only be applied to new windows that are 
	opened. Windows that are already open will not change modes.
	
	The window resize mode can also be set on each display in the Background 
	Properties dialog. If set to Default, the application level resize mode is used. 
	Otherwise, the specified resize mode will be used for that display.
	
	Two new properties have been added to the objects in order to support Layout 
	mode. 
	
	1. dock - Select one of the following options:
		None (default)
		Top
		Left
		Bottom
		Right
		Fill
	
	When the dock property on an object is set to one of the sides (Top, Bottom, Left, 
	Right), it is moved to the specified side of the display and stretched to fill that side 
	of the display. If the size of the display changes, the docked objects will stretch 
	to fill the available space. For example, if the dock property is set to Top, the 
	object will be moved to the top of the display and the width of the object will be 
	changed to fill the width of the display. If the display is then made wider, either by
	changing the Background Properties on the display or by resizing the window in 
	Layout mode, the width of the object will change to match the new width of the 
	display.
	
	Multiple objects can be docked to the same side of the display. In this case, the 
	first object is docked against the side of the display, the next object is docked 
	against the edge of the first object and so on.
	
	When a display has multiple side docked objects, the object order controls how 
	the dock layout is applied. The layout is applied to the object list from back to front. 
	For example, if the first object in a display is docked to the top, and the second 
	object is docked to the left, the first object will fill the entire width of the display, 
	and the second object will fill the left side of the display from the bottom of the 
	first object to the bottom of the display. 
	
	When the dock property on an object is set to Fill, it fills the available space left in 
	the display after all of the side docked objects have been positioned. When 
	multiple objects in a display have the dock property set to Fill, those objects are 
	laid out in a grid in the available space. By default, the grid has one row and as 
	many columns as objects. You can change the grid rows and columns in the 
	Background Properties dialog. If both are set to 0, the default will be used. If both 
	the rows and columns are specified, the row value is used and the number of 
	columns is calculated based on the number of objects. If the row value is 0 and 
	the column value is specified, the number of rows will be calculated based on the 
	number of objects. The objects are laid out left to right, top to bottom according to 
	the order of the objects in the display. The objects with the dock property set to 
	Fill are always laid out after all of the other docked objects.
	
	Once an object is docked, there are some limitations on how you can modify that 
	object in the Display Builder. You can no longer move it by dragging or changing 
	objX and objY in the property sheet. Side docked objects can only be resized 
	toward the center of the display (ex. if the object is docked to the top of the 
	display, it can only be resided to be taller). Fill docked objects cannot be resized 
	at all. You cannot resize any docked objects using the objWidth or objHeight 
	properties in the property sheet. You must drag on the valid resize handle to 
	resize it. It will not be moved by Align or Distribute. Objects can be aligned against 
	a docked object, but the docked object will not be moved to align against another 
	object. Docked objects are ignored by Distribute. 
	
	Note that when an object is docked, the objX and objY along with objWidth or 
	objHeight on object is changed. For example, you instance a General object from 
	the palette. The properties of the object are as follows:
		objX:250
		objY:250
		objWidth:64
		objHeight:48
	
	When you set the dock property to Top, the properties are modified as follows:
		objX:368
		objY:520
		objWidth:736
		objHeight:48 (no change)
	
	If you then change the dock property to Left, the objWidth isn't changed, but the 
	objHeight stays the same, so the object fills the entire height and width of the 
	display. When you change the dock setting to None, these properties stay the 
	same.
	
	Only objects that support the objWidth and objHeight properties have the dock 
	property.
	
	2. anchor - Select none, one or more of the following options:
		Top
		Left
		Bottom
		Right
	
	The anchor property is only applied when the display is resized either by 
	changing the Background Properties on the display or by resizing the window in 
	Layout mode. The anchor property anchors the specified side of the object to the 
	same side of the display. When the display resizes, the number of pixels between 
	the specified side of the object and that side of the display remain constant. If an 
	object is anchored on opposite sides (ie. Top and Bottom or Left and Right), the 
	object will be stretched to fill the available space.
	
	Only objects that support the objWidth and objHeight properties support anchoring 
	on opposite sides. If an object has the dock property set, the anchor property is 
	ignored.
	
	The composite object supports both dock and opposing anchor sides, but does 
	not behave like other objects if the resizeMode is set to Size to Display. In this 
	case, the composite size is controlled by the size of the display that it contains, 
	so any changes to the width or height of the object result in the composite 
	moving, not resizing. The composite object should not be docked if the 
	resizeMode is set to Size to Display.
	

Version 5.4c1 Release Notes

Alerts

15425: Discrete alert now supports non-string input values
	In previous releases, the discrete alert would not work if the input value was 
	not a string. This has been fixed.

15590: Add Alert dialog upgraded
	In the Display Builder, the Alerts dialog has been improved so that the Add 
	button invokes a popup dialog with fields for the new object name and a 
	drop-down list for its type, and the Copy button invokes a popup dialog with 
	a field for the new object name. Both these dialogs verify that the new name 
	is unique and warn if it is not.

Builder

15627: Data attachment string in Data Display dialog now scrollable
	In the Display Builder, the Data Display dialog shows the data attachment 
	string in a field above the data table. This field has been made scrollable 
	horizontally to accommodate long strings.

15690: Dock to Bottom now default for Non-graphic dialogs
	In the Display Builder the dockable dialogs Alerts, Caches, Functions, and 
	Local Vars have been given a default initial state of "docked" instead of 
	"floating". This means that if you reset the window layout (via the Tools 
	menu) then the first time you invoke one of those dialogs it will be docked in 
	the bottom dock site, where previously it would have been floating.

15723: Data display dialog now processes subs correctly
	In the Display Builder, when using the Data Display dialog to view a data 
	attachment, the dialog will now properly display data attachments 
	containing substitution variables.

Builder - Editing

13726: Support for copying alerts, caches, and functions added
	In the Display Builder, there are three dialogs that manage non-display 
	objects: Alerts, Caches, and Functions; some improvements have been 
	made to the way these dialogs operate:
	
	1.  When the selection is moved to an Alert or Cache in its corresponding 
	dialog, the previous selection (e.g. in the display area) is cleared. This is 
	now true of Functions as well. Also, changes of selection among the 
	three dialogs and the display area are now recorded in History and 
	Undo/Redo can be applied to them. Note that when the selection is 
	moved to one of the dialogs it will be invoked as needed.
	
	2.  The Delete operation (via menu, toolbar, or keyboard key) now works 
	with functions.
	
	3.  The Copy (Ctrl-C) and Paste (Ctrl-V) operations can now be used with 
	Alerts, Caches, and Functions as well as display objects. Note the 
	following:
	
	(a) Alerts, Caches, and Functions cannot be pasted into the same 
	display from which they were copied; this operation has no effect. 
	  
	(b) To create a copy in the same display, use the Copy button on the 
	respective dialog; note this does not copy to the clipboard.
	  
	(c) If one of these objects is pasted into another display that already 
	contains a corresponding object of the same name, the user will be 
	prompted for a new name (and must enter one).
	  
	(d) A copied-and-pasted object will have the same data attachments as 
	its original.

Builder - Property Dialogs

15696: Select Columns Dialog now resizeable
	The Select Columns Dialog is now resizeable, allowing wider column 
	names to be displayed without the need for scrolling. Longer lists of column 
	names can be displayed.

15774: editing issues with obj_rect_ilvs +obj_circ2d_ilvs valueVisFlag
	In previous releases, the valueVisFlag property of obj_rect_ilvs and 
	obj_circ2d_ilvs toggled the visibility of the label properties instead of the 
	value properties. If the valueVisFlag and labelVisFlag were not the same, it 
	was difficult to enter property values for any objects in the same display. 
	These problems have been fixed.

Commands

14454: SNMP command dialog now supports substitutions
	In the Display Builder, the Define SNMP Command dialog (invoked from the 
	Define System Command dialog) has been enhanced to allow substitution 
	variables for the following fields: Destination Address, Destination Port, 
	Community Name, Enterprise OID, and if enabled, Specific Trap. Note that 
	now the variable values are not checked for correctness at command 
	definition time, but rather at command execution time, after substituting the 
	values of any variables.

Data Historian

14803: Can now set substitutions in Historian and Data Server GUIs
	It is now possible to add and edit substitutions directly in the Historian and 
	Data Server GUIs.

14943: Data compaction options implemented for aged historical data
	RTView has been enhanced with a new historian compaction 
	feature.
	
	The Historian allows archival data to be compacted in three ways:
	
	1.	Retention: Data may be maintained up to a certain age and then 
	removed once the data is older than a specified length of time.  This is 
	similar to the older retention feature.
	
	2.	Aggregation: Data may be compacted so that as the rows of data in 
	the archive age they are aggregated. The user may define how the 
	aggregation should occur and on what.  E.g. a user could choose to 
	compact the data rows older than one week to be combined into a single 
	row and held for a further month before being aggregated further.
	
	3.	Displacement: Data may be displaced so that all data in the table is 
	moved to a separate table based upon a time period. E.g. every 24 hours 
	the data is moved to a renamed table and the main table is flushed to 
	refill again.
	
	Various options are available to aggregate the data so that it can derive 
	totals, averages, minimums, maximums or counts on a column by 
	column basis.  The data may be compacted in place or compacted into 
	separate tables based on age.
	
	The compaction rules are defined using the compactionType
	property of a cache object that is being used to configure the historian.
	If you are licensed to use compaction you will have the choice of "none",
	"aggregate", or "displace".  Depending on which you choose, other
	properties with associated dialogs for defining rules are available.
	
	Limitations:
	
	GroupByType "count" is only supported for columns of data type integer, and 
	groupByType "average" is only supported for columns of data type double.
	
	Alternate tables for Historian compaction do not support -smoothcompaction.
	
	Compaction of boolean data columns is not supported for PostgreSQL, as 
	compaction output does not support "true"/"false" for booleans.

15765: NPE in attachHistObjToCacheNode
	In the previous release, the Data Historian would throw a 
	NullPointerException when loading a configuration file containing a cache 
	object whose historyTableName property was non-blank and whose 
	indexColumnNames property was blank. This is fixed.

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

14486: Cache Data source GUI
	In the Display Builder, the way Cache Data Source objects are added 
	and configured has changed. Instead of seeing cache objects as visible 
	rectangles in the display, they will be shown in a new Caches dialog. 
	When a cache object is selected in the table its properties may be edited 
	in the Object Properties dialog as before. Cache objects may be added, 
	removed, and copied by means of the buttons at the bottom of the 
	display. 
	
	By default the table of cache objects will include only those found in the 
	display currently being edited. But if  "List All Caches" is checked, the 
	table will include cache objects found in cache definition files and 
	include files. Note that cache objects not in the current file will not be 
	editable.
	
	If the Display Content button is clicked and the selected cache has a data 
	attachment, a popup dialog is invoked to display the contents of the 
	cache tables. If there is no history table (maxNumberOfRows = 0) then 
	only the current table is displayed; else both the current and history 
	tables are displayed in a tabbed dialog.
	
	Note the following: a cache object's data tables are only created when the 
	file containing the cache object is registered as a cache definition file 
	via the Application Options dialog, and changes to those tables (such as 
	enabling the history table) only take effect when the cache definition file 
	is refreshed. This has the following implications for displaying the content 
	of a cache object:
	
	- if the file being edited is not a cache definition file there will be 
	no content to display, and the Display Content button will be disabled.
	
	- if the file being edited contains a cache of a given name and another 
	file registered as a cache definition file contains a cache object of the 
	same name, Display Content will display the data tables of the second object 
	even though the first object is selected.
	
	Note that having two cache objects of the same name in different files 
	may lead to unpredictable results and should be avoided.

15727: Adding cache with missing name causes builder crash
	In the Display Builder, if you have a cache definition file containing a Cache 
	DS object that does not have a cache name, you will get a warning 
	message saying the cache object will not be loaded. In the previous release 
	you would also get a Java exception message and would not be able to 
	open other files; this has been fixed.

15760: ConcurrentModificationException from the cache datasource
	In prior releases, a ConcurrentModificationException could occasionally be 
	thrown by the cache data source. This is fixed.

JMX Data Source

15337: Connection properties now configurable per connection
	It is now possible to add properties to each JMX connection individually.

15732: Trailing space no longer causes error in Attach to Data dialog
	An issue was fixed in the JMX Attach to Data Dialog that could result in 
	erroneous red field names.

SQL Data Source

15413: Query timeout & ID supported
	Several features have been added to the SQL data adapter:
	
	1. A column named "Last Query Status" has been added to the Keys 
	table of the built-in RTViewDs database.
	
	2. A column named "Query ID" has been added to the Keys table.
	
	3. A timeout can be specified for each SQL query.
	
	4. An ID string can be specified for each SQL query.
	
	5. The "Columns" field and "..." button in the "Attach to SQL Data" dialog 
	are now functional when the RTViewDs database is selected.
	
	Details are provided below.
	
	
	1. The Keys table in the RTViewDs database provides detailed timing 
	and count information about each unique data attachment. The new 
	"Last Query Status" column contains a string indicating the status of the 
	most recently completed execution of the query. The possible values of 
	this column are:
	
		<blank>  : The query has not yet been executed.
		OK   : The query executed successfully.
		no query  : The query string is blank.
		error  : An error occurred while executing the query
		connection failed  : The connection to the database was lost.
		no connection : The database connection is undefined or invalid.
		timeout  : The query timed out.
	
	2. The Keys table now contains a Query ID column. By default this 
	column is blank. A query ID string can be specified for each SQL query 
	(see #4 below). The column will contain that string, if any.
	
	3. A timeout for an SQL query can be specified by checking the "Enter 
	SQL Query" checkbox in the "Attach to SQL Data" dialog, and prepending 
	the following text to the beginning the SQL query:
	
		rtvTimeout=NN;
	
	Where NN specifies the timeout interval in seconds, for example:
	
		rtvTimeout=20; select * from MyTable
	
	A substitution string can also be specified:
	
		rtvTimeout=$timeout; select * from MyTable
	
	Note that a semicolon must immediately follow the timeout value.
	
	When a query with a timeout is invoked by the SQL data adapter, then on 
	each subsequent update cycle (2 seconds, by default) the data adapter 
	will check if the query has completed and if not, it will check if the timeout 
	has expired. If it has, the query will be canceled and an error message 
	will be printed to the RTView console, for example:
	
	  ERROR: SQL query timeout after 20 seconds; db=MyDatabase; query=<select * from MyTable>
	
	The status of the query will be set to "timeout" and an empty table will be 
	applied to the objects that are attached to the query result. In addition, the 
	query will not be executed again for at least the length of the timeout 
	interval. For example, if the query is configured to run every 60 seconds 
	and the timeout is 120 seconds, then after a timeout the next query will 
	occur in 120 seconds, not 60.
	
	4. An ID for an SQL query can be specified by checking the "Enter SQL 
	Query" checkbox in the "Attach to SQL Data" dialog, and prepending the 
	following text to the beginning the SQL query:
	
		rtvID=S;
	
	Where S specifies the timeout interval in seconds, for example:
	
		rtvID=MyTable Query 1; select * from MyTable
	
	A substitution string can also be specified:
	
		rtvID=$table Query; select * from $table
	
	The ID string has no effect on the execution of the query. The ID string 
	appears as the value of the Query ID column in the Keys table of the 
	RTViewDs database, as described in #2 above. The ID string will also 
	appear in any error messages issued by the SQL data adapter that 
	involve the query.
	
	The ID string must be terminated with a semicolon. The ID string cannot 
	contain a semicolon (;) or equals (=) character.
	
	Both a timeout and a query ID can be specified for a query, using the 
	syntax described above. For example:
	
		rtvTimeout=120;rtvID=MyTable Query 1; select * from MyTable
	
	The timeout and ID parameters can be specified in either order. But the 
	semicolon is required after each parameter.

StreamBase Data Source

15461: New option to filter at the subscription level
	The RTView StreamBase Data Adapter has been enhanced to 
	implement the StreamBase feature called "Filtered Subscribe". This 
	feature allows subscriptions to an output stream to include a "logical 
	stream name" and filter expression that will be applied on the server to 
	each tuple before it is sent to the client. Only tuples that pass the filter will 
	be sent on that logical stream, thus reducing the amount of data sent to 
	the client. 
	
	The StreamBase Data Adapter implements this feature by enhancing its 
	"stream list" to include logical streams and filter expressions. When the 
	Adapter connects to a StreamBase server, it gets the list of available 
	streams, and then uses its stream list to control which subscriptions it 
	makes, as follows:
	
	 - If there is no stream list at all, then the Adapter subscribes to all 
	streams.
	 
	 - If there is a stream list, then the Adapter only subscribes to streams on 
	the list.
	 
	 - With the current enhancement, the stream list may include one or more 
	logical streams for any given physical stream; in which case the Adapter 
	does not subscribe to the physical stream, but rather subscribes to the 
	logical streams with the filter expressions as specified. 
	
	Note: if it is necessary to subscribe to the physical stream as well as 
	having one or more filtered streams available, then use row filtering in 
	the RTView data attachments.
	
	In the Display Builder, the StreamBase section of the Application Options 
	dialog has been enhanced to include logical streams and filtered 
	subscriptions as follows:
	
	 - The "StreamBase Streams" tab is now used to configure physical 
	streams, logical streams, and filter expressions. The History Streams 
	and Simulated Streams lists have been moved to a new tab, called 
	"StreamBase History Streams".
	 
	 - The Streams tab presents a tree view of the stream list and a text area 
	for editing filter expressions. Physical streams may be added at the first 
	level of the tree, and logical streams may be added as branches to a 
	physical stream.
	 
	 - To add a physical stream click the Add Stream button. A text field will 
	appear for entry of the stream name. When you press Enter in the text 
	field the stream will be added to the list.
	 
	 - To add a logical stream, select a physical stream and click the Add 
	Logical Stream button. A text field will appear for entry of the stream 
	name. When you press Enter in the text field the stream will be added to 
	the list.
	 
	 - To add a filter expression select a logical stream and edit the filter 
	expression in the text area.
	 
	 - To remove a physical or logical stream celedt it and click the Remove 
	button.
	
	Note that when you apply changes in this dialog, the StreamBase Data 
	Adapter will close and reopen all its connections and reinitialize its data 
	structures, so that the changes will be immediately applied. Previously 
	some StreamBase settings would only be applied when the Display 
	Builder was restarted. 
	
	For a complete description of the filter expression syntax please consult 
	the StreamBase documentation. As an example, consider a stream 
	named "order_output" containing stock purchase information that has a 
	field "symbol" containing stock symbols. To create a logical stream 
	"order_output_ibm" that includes only purchases of IBM stock, use the 
	filter expression "symbol == 'IBM'". (Note string values are enclosed in 
	single quotes).
	 
	Note that RTView substitutions configured via the Substititions tab of the 
	Application Options dialog may be used in filter expressions.

TIBCO Hawk Data Source

15378: Name of failed hawk transport now in console messages
	The hawk connection name is now included in the 
	ConsoleInitializationException error messages.

15585: Invoke Methods Before Subscribe option added
	The Invoke Methods Before Subscribe option has been added to the 
	TIBCO Hawk Methods and Alerts tab in the Application Options dialog. By 
	default, this option is selected. When selected, RTView will invoke 
	synchronous microagent methods before subscribing to them for data 
	attachments. This will make the data for these data attachments 
	available immediately after the data attachment is made instead of 
	waiting for the first update from the subscription. 
	
	This option can be disabled either from the TIBCO Hawk Methods and 
	Alerts tab in the Application Options dialog, or by using the following 
	command line or applet parameter:
	
	command line: -hawknoinvoke
	applet: param = hawknoinvoke value = true
	
	See the TIBCO Hawk documentation for your microagent method to 
	determine whether or not it is synchronous. Data attachments to 
	asynchronous methods are not affected by this option.

15588: Hawk Group information included in RTViewDS
	A new table, getGroupData, has been added to the Hawk RTViewDs 
	simulated microagent. This table contains group information for each 
	agent. This table contains the following columns:
	
	Agent - the name of the agent
	GroupName - the name of the group containing the agent
	ConnectionName - the name of the connection for this agent
	DSName - the name of the agent including the connection name if it is 
	not on the default connection
	
	Since an agent may be in multiple groups, a single agent may show up 
	multiple times in this table, once for each group that contains it.
	
	The group information is useful when caches are used to store Hawk 
	agent information for applications that organize or aggregate their Hawk 
	agent information using groups.

Display Server

15743: thin client crash on dd if table cell ends in \
	In prior releases, a javascript exception would occur in the thin client if a 
	drill down was performed to a display containing a table with a string cell 
	that ended in a backslash. This is fixed.

15816: Scrollbar no longer visible when graph is invisible
	Prior to release 5.4c1 in the thin client, if a trend graph or bar graph with a scrollbar 
	is made invisible the scrollbar remains visible. This is fixed.

Functions

15088: Apply button added to Edit function Dialog
	In the Display Builder, the Edit Function dialog now has an Apply button. 
	which will apply the values currently in the dialog without closing it.

15427: replace value function fails if extra space is in the token
	The Replace Value function takes a Replacement Values argument which 
	is a string that contains pairs of values and replacement values separated 
	by ":". Each pair of value and replacement value is separated by a space. 
	Previously this was required to be exactly one space, but now multiple 
	spaces are allowed.

15533: New Join Outer function
	The Join Outer function performs an outer  join of the Left Table  and the 
	Right Table on the columns specified in the Left Column Name and the 
	Right Column Name fields.
	
	The joined table will contain all columns from the Left Table followed by 
	all columns from the Right Table, and will contain all rows where the 
	value in the Left Column exactly matches the value in the Right Column, 
	plus additional rows according to the Outer Join Type, which may be 
	"left", "right", or "full".
	
	In a left outer join, the result table will include all the rows from the left 
	table; in a right outer join it will include all the rows from the right table, 
	and in a full outer join it will include all the rows from both tables. In any 
	row where there is no match for the join column value, the cells from the 
	other table will contain null values. (Null values will be represented as 
	blank for strings, 0 for integers and longs, NaN for floats and doubles, 
	and NULL_DATE for dates.)
	
	Left Table - The first table to be joined.
	
	Right Table - The second table to be joined.
	
	Left Column Name - (Optional) The column in the left table to be joined 
	with the column specified in the Right Column Name field. If this field is 
	left blank, the row name, up to the first : if it contains a :, will be used 
	instead of a column value.
	
	Right Column Name - (Optional) The column in the right table to be 
	joined with the column specified in the Left Column Name field. If this 
	field is left blank, the row name, up to the first : if it contains a :, will be 
	used instead of a column value.
	
	Outer Join Type - Specified as "left", "right", or "full", which may be 
	abbreviated to their first letters. If this field is left blank a full outer join will 
	be performed. 
	
	This function returns a table.

15619: Function usage count is now correct for functions with filters
	In the Display Builder, if a display object were attached to a function and a 
	row filter were added to the data attachment, the Uses value in the function 
	dialog would be incorrect: it would show twice the number of actual uses of 
	the function. This has been corrected.

15624: Convert Columns function now handles the DATE type
	The Convert Columns function, when given an input column of type Date to 
	convert to a valid output column type, would fail to perform the conversion 
	and would not issue an error message. This has been fixed; the conversion 
	will now be performed correctly. Output columns of type String will show the 
	string representation of the input date value, and all other output types will 
	show the result of converting the date value first to Long and then to the 
	specified output type.

15625: Delta Rows Function now supports the DATE type
	The Delta Rows function will now compute delta for columns of type Date. 
	The resulting delta column will be of type Long and contain time deltas in 
	milliseconds.

15658: Group By Time and Unique Value Bug fixed
	The Group By Time And Unique Values function could show an extra row 
	under some circumstances.  This has been fixed.

15666: Display Result button added to Functions dialog
	The Display Builder Function dialog has been enhanced with a "Display 
	Result" button that will bring up a dialog showing the result of executing the 
	function.

15667: References button added to the Function dialog
	The Display Builder Function dialog has been enhanced with a 
	"References" button that will bring up a dialog listing all the objects that 
	directly reference the selected function. You may choose an object in that list 
	and it will be selected according to its type. Selecting a display object will 
	highlight the object in the drawing area.  Selecting a function, alert or a 
	cache will bring up those dialogs with the designated object selected.

15668: Edit Referenced Functions from Edit Function Dialog
	In the the Edit Function dialog, when you are editing a function whose 
	argument refers to another function, you can now go edit that function 
	without leaving the dialog. 
	
	When you right-click an argument that contains a reference to a function, 
	an additional item "Edit Function" will appear in the popup menu. If you 
	select it, the Edit Function dialog for that function will replace the current 
	Edit Function dialog. If you have unsaved changes you will be prompted 
	to save or discard them, or cancel the operation. In addition a button "Back" 
	will appear in the Edit Function dialog that will take you back to the function 
	you were previously editing.

15669: obj_function moved from gmsjmodels to gmsjrtview package
	The obj_function class has been moved from the com.sl.gmsjmodels 
	package to the com.sl.gmsjrtview package. Users with custom classes 
	referencing this object will need to modify their code accordingly. Users 
	without any custom code do not need to make any changes - the functions 
	in their displays will continue to work as they did before.

15722: Lay out of buttons on dockable tabular dialogs more intuitive
	In the Display Builder, the Functions, Caches and Alerts dialogs have been 
	enhanced so they will organize their buttons appropriately depending on 
	how they are docked. For example if they are docked vertically they will lay 
	out their buttons on multiple rows.

15724: Warn about missing function descriptors
	In the Display Builder when working with custom functions it is possible 
	to open a display which uses a custom function but not have the 
	function's definition available. This can happen for example if the Java 
	class file containing the function definitions (e.g. 
	MyFunctionHandler.class) is missing. In this situation the Display Builder 
	has no information about the number or type of the custom function's 
	arguments, and if the display is saved, the function will be saved with no 
	arguments, and any previous argument information will be lost. In 
	addition the function is not editable; in the Edit Function dialog it would 
	be shown with an incorrect function type and no arguments.
	
	In this situation, the Display Viewer and Builder will now warn with a 
	message to the console, and the Display Builder will warn with a 
	message dialog. And in the Function dialog, the only buttons enabled 
	when the function in question is selected are Add and Remove.

15775: Empty String Sub again being passed from controls
	In releases 5.1 through 5.3, if the value property of a control object was an empty 
	string and $value was used as the value of a substitution in the control's drilldown 
	command, the substitution was not set by the drilldown. This has been fixed.

General

15766: Current table now clears when attached table is empty
	If a data table with no rows is applied to the valueTable property of a cache 
	with no index columns defined, the contents of the current table should be 
	cleared. However, in release 5.3, the current table was unchanged. This is 
	fixed. (Note that a cache which does have index columns defined will 
	continue to ignore an empty table, which is the correct behavior).

GmsTabularData

15709: Sorting of tabular data by row names has been optimized
	The CPU time required to add or update rows in a large table of 
	Rendezvous or Hawk data has been reduced.

Object Library

15000: mouseOverText property now provided on all objects.
	The new mouseOverText property in the Interaction category allows you 
	to specify a tooltip to show when the mouse passes over an object. The 
	mouseOverText property has been added to all of the objects except 
	obj_text01 and obj_datechooser on the following tabs of the Object 
	Palette: 
	
	General
	Labels
	Meters
	Scales
	Indicators
	Controls
	Links
	
	Text with multiple lines should use \n to delimit the lines. Objects must 
	have the visFlag on (and for links the iconVisFlag on) in order for the 
	tooltip to draw.
	
	In the Display Builder, Display Viewer and Display Viewer Applet, for 
	non-control objects, the tooltip is positioned relative to the center of the 
	object, and will draw in black text with a white background. For control 
	objects, the tooltip is drawn in the standard swing JToolTip, so it will 
	follow the look and feel for the system where it is run.
	
	In the Thin Client, the tooltip is drawn by the browser, and will use the 
	browser specific look and feel. 
	
	Limitations in the Display Builder, Display Viewer and Display Viewer 
	Applet:
	
	1. For all non-control objects, if multiple objects with mouseOverText 
	overlap and the mouse is positioned on the overlapping area, the 
	mouseOverText will display for both.
	
	2. For all non-control objects, the tooltip is drawn as part of the object. 
	Therefore, if another object is on top of it, the mouse over will be drawn 
	behind that object. To change the position of an object in the stacking 
	order, right-click on it and select Order->Move to Front or Order->Move to 
	Back.
	
	3. In the main Display Builder window, the tooltip may be clipped if it is 
	too close to the top-right edge of the display or if it is in a composite and 
	too close to the edge of the composite. 
	
	4. The tooltip on an object in an object grid may be partially obscured by 
	the scrollbar of the object grid if it is too close to the right edge.
	
	Limitations in the Thin Client:
	
	1. Multi-line mouseOverText is not support for radio button controls.
	
	2. Non-static mouseOverText is not supported for radio button controls.
	
	3. Since Firefox does not support multi-line tooltips, it will replace any 
	returns in the mouseOverText with spaces.

Control Objects

15618: Edit box shows but won't parse 1000s separator
	In release 5.1 and 5.2, the thin client would automatically insert a comma as 
	the thousands-separator in an integer- or double-type edit box 
	(obj_c1textedit_i and obj_c1textedit_d), but the display server would not 
	parse numeric values correctly if they contained commas. In this release, 
	the thin client will not automatically insert commas as the thousands-
	separator.

Fx Bar Chart

15502: Fx Bar Chart Data Label Properties added
	Three new properties have been added to the Fx Bar chart. These are:
	
	labelColumnName
	rowLabelVisFlag
	rowNameVisFlag
	
	These properties work exactly the same as those of the standard bar graph.

15561: Data now displays when no row names found
	Previously the Fx Bar Chart would not display data if row names were not 
	available. This has been fixed.

15562: FX Bar Chart column clumping bug fixed
	A bug was fixed that caused columns to appears clumped to one side when 
	data was changed.

15600: Fx Bar Chart Bars Draw order switched
	When in horizontal mode, the bars will now draw from top to bottom, rather 
	than from bottom to top.

Fx Trend Chart

15367: yAxisMultiRangeMode now supported
	The Fx trend graph (obj_fxtrend) now supports the yAxisMultiRangeMode 
	property. The supported modes are: Off, Multiple Axis, Strip Chart, and 
	Stacked. These modes have the same behavior as in the standard trend 
	graph (obj_trendgraph02).
	
	The yAxisMultiRangeMode property supersedes the yAxisMultiRangeFlag 
	property. For Fx trend graphs on existing displays, a yAxisMultiRangeFlag 
	value of zero (unchecked) will be converted to yAxisMultiRangeMode = Off,
	and a yAxisMultiRangeFlag value of one (checked) will be converted to 
	yAxisMultiRangeMode = Multiple Axis.
	
	In Strip Chart and Multiple Axis mode, a separate vertical axis is drawn for 
	each trace. The axis for traceN is drawn using the color assigned to the 
	traceNColor property. If the yAxisShowTraceLabelsFlag property is 
	checked, each axis will display the label assigned to the trace in the 
	traceNLabel property. The yAxisThickness property is ignored in these 
	modes, the width of each axis is 2 pixels. For better performance when 
	scrolling in a graph with many points, yAxisShowTraceLabelsFlag and 
	traceNLineShadowFlag should be unchecked. 
	
	There are a few differences in the yAxisMultiRangeFlag behavior between 
	the standard trend graph and the fx trend graph:
	
	1) The standard trend graph supports an additional 
	yAxisMultiRangeMode named Classic, but this mode is not supported in 
	the Fx trend graph. If Classic mode is selected in the fx trend graph's 
	property sheet, Multiple Axis mode will be used instead.
	
	2) Both graphs support the yAxisPosition property, but in the standard 
	trend graph the 'inner' settings cause the axis labels to be drawn inside 
	the trace area, while in the fx trend graph the inner settings only change 
	the location of the tick marks relative to the vertical axis. 
	
	3) In strip chart mode in the fx trend graph, some labels on the vertical 
	axes may be dropped if the strips are not tall enough to display the labels 
	without overlapping. To avoid this, choose a smaller value for 
	yAxisMajorDivisions.

15571: Paste All Properties from Trend Graph to Fx Trend now works
	A problem in the Display Builder has been fixed which prevented alarm 
	properties from being pasted to an Fx trend graph during a Paste All 
	Properties operation.

15576: Fx Trend Graph Multi-trace Tabular data support
	The Fx trend graph has been enhanced so that multiple traces can be 
	plotted from a single data table. This can be convenient cases where a 
	data source provides a data table with a single timestamp column and 
	multiple Y data and label columns.
	
	A new property named multiTraceTableFlag has been added to the Trace 
	category. It is unchecked by default. When checked two new properties 
	named multiTraceCurrentValueTable and multiTraceHistoryValueTable 
	are shown in the Trace category. Each of these properties can be 
	attached to a data table. The first column in the data table must be a 
	timestamp column. The remaining columns are expected to either be 
	numeric data values to be plotted, or string values to be used as data 
	labels (data labels are described in 15648). The Nth numeric column is 
	used for trace N's data and the column name is used for traceNLabel (if 
	not already assigned). Similarly, the Nth string column is used for 
	traceN's data labels. 
	
	If the multiTraceTableFlag is checked, then the number of traces whose 
	properties are shown in the Builder's property sheet is determined by the the 
	number of data columns in the data table attachments or by the traceCount 
	property, whichever is larger. However, the number of traces that will be plotted 
	on the graph is determined by he number of data columns in the data table 
	attachments.
	
	Typically, the data attachment for multiTraceHistoryValueTable provides 
	the initial data points to be plotted (e.g. from a SQL attachment with 
	Update Mode = On Demand, or a Cache attachment with Update Once 
	checked) while multiTraceCurrentValueTable provides the new data 
	points to be plotted while the display is viewed. If a trace plots only 
	historical or only current data, then only one of the properties needs to be 
	attached to data. However if both properties are attached to data, be sure 
	that the tables applied to both have the same number and type of 
	columns.
	
	When multiTraceTableFlag is checked, the properties named 
	traceNValueTable and traceNValue (for N = 1 to 8) are not shown in the 
	property sheet, since all trace data is expected to be provided via 
	multiTraceCurrentValueTable or multiTraceCurrentValueTable.

15602: New alarmGlowFlag  property added to Fx Trend Chart
	A new property named alarmGlowFlag has been added to the Fx trend 
	graph. The property is unchecked by default.  If it is checked, then a glow 
	effect will appear around the border of the graph if an alarm or warning 
	limit has been exceeded. The border will glow the in color of the activated 
	alarm color, as described below.
	
	The visibility and the color of the glow is based on trace points which are 
	currently visible.
	
	If multiple visible points have exceeded an alarm or warning limit,   
	whether they are on the same trace or multiple traces, the glow color will 
	be chosen in this order of priority: HighAlarm, LowAlarm, HighWarning, 
	LowWarning.  If no visible points have exceeded any limit,  the glow is 
	invisible.
	
	For strip charts, each chart will have its own glow.

15648: Data labels now supported
	The Fx trend graph has been enhanced to allow a string to be associated 
	with each point on a trace. These strings are known as data labels.
	
	If the traceNValueTable or traceNValue property is attached to a table and 
	the table contains a string column (in addition to the required timestamp 
	and Y data columns), then the string from that column will be used as the 
	data label for the corresponding data point. This feature is also 
	supported in the multi-trace table feature (15576), where the Nth string 
	column in multiTraceHistoryValueTable or multiTraceCurrentValueTable 
	will be used for the data labels for trace N. 
	
	The data label for a point is shown in the popup data tip which appears 
	when the mouse is positioned over a trace point.  The data label appears 
	after the point's value, and is enclosed in parentheses. 
	
	Note that this feature is not supported for scalar attachments to 
	traceNValue.

15649: Fx trend graph supports event and bar  traces
	The Fx trend graph has been enhanced to support event and bar traces, 
	in addition to the traditional line traces.
	
	A property named traceNType has been added the Trace N category (for 
	N = 1 to 8). The valid values for traceNType are Line (the default), Bar, 
	and Event.
	
	A Bar type trace draws a vertical bar for each data point, from zero to the 
	point's Y value. The bar is simply a vertical line whose width is 
	determined by traceNLineThickness. The traceNLineColor and 
	traceNLineStyle also control the appearance of the bar. If the point 
	exceeds an alarm limit specified on the graph, the alarm color is used for 
	the bar color. If traceNMarkStyle is set to any value other than None, the 
	mark is drawn at the end of the bar.
	
	For an Event type trace, no line is drawn. Instead, a small rectangle 
	containing a single text character is drawn for each data point. The 
	character is the first character of the corresponding data label (see 
	E15648) if any, otherwise it is the first character of the trace label. The 
	traceNColor property determines the color of edges of the box and the 
	text character, unless the point exceeds an alarm limit specified on the 
	graph, in which case the corresponding alarm color is used. The box's fill 
	color is set to traceNMarkColor or the appropriate alarm mark color, if 
	any. However, if the mark color is the same as the color used for the box 
	edge and text, then traceBgColor is used as the box fill color instead.
	
	Each event box is positioned vertically according to the Y data value for 
	the corresponding data point. However, if traceN is attached to a data 
	table that provides data labels but no Y data values, then an Event trace 
	is plotted regardless of the traceNType setting. The event boxes will all 
	be drawn near the bottom of the trace area.

15652: Fx trend support for trace point drill down added
	The Fx trend graph has been enhanced to support drill down from a trace 
	point.
	
	If the graph's drillDownTarget is set, then the following predefined 
	substitutions will be set on drill down from a trace point:
	
	$traceNumber : number of the trace (1 to 8) that contains the selected point
	$traceLabel : label of selected trace
	$pointValue : y value of point
	$pointTimestamp : timestamp of point
	$pointLabel : data label (if any) of point
	$pointIndex : position of point in trace data (0 to maxPointsPerTrace)
	
	Mouse clicks on the graph that are not near a trace point are ignored.

15653: Fx trend graph Trace Groups
	The Fx Trend Graph has been enhanced to support trace groups. A trace
	group is a collection of 2 or more traces, and is useful for:
	
	- identifying multiple traces that should share one vertical axis, in strip
	chart or multi-axis modes.
	
	- identifying 3 traces to be combined as a banded trace.
	
	A new category named Trace Groups has been added to the Fx trend
	graph's property sheet. By default, the category contains a single property
	named traceGroupCount with a default value of zero. Legal values are 0
	- 5. If nonzero, then the following properties appear in the Trace Groups
	category, for each groupN, where N is 1-5:
	
	traceGroupNTraceNumbers: A comma-separated list of the traces that
	belong to the group. If the trend graph is in strip chart mode or multi-axis
	mode, all the traces in the group will share the same axis/strip.
	
	traceGroupNBandedFlag: If this property is checked, the group is
	expected to have 3 traces. The plot area beneath the 1st trace in the
	group (the low band trace) will be filled, the 2nd trace in the group (the
	value trace) will not be filled, and the area above the 3rd trace (the high
	band trace) will be filled.
	
	The color of the axis for a group is determined by traceNLineColor of the 
	first trace in the group. The label for the axis is also determined by 
	traceNLabel of the first trace in the group.
	
	In Mutli Axis mode it may not be visually obvious which traces belong to
	which groups, unless you assign a similar line color or style, or mark
	color or style, to all the traces in a group.

15700: yAxisColor now sets color of all Y axis labels
	On the Fx Trend Graph, the yAxisColor property now sets the color of all Y 
	axis labels, regardless of the yAxisMultiRangeMode setting. 
	
	Note that if yAxisColor is set to Default, then the axis label color is 
	determined by the labelTextColor property. This behavior is unchanged from 
	prior releases.

15710: Most recent y value shown in legend if cursor not active
	On the Fx Trend Graph, the legend entry for each trace will show the most 
	recent Y value for the trace when the cursor is not displayed on the graph.

15716: legendTimeFormat implemented  for Flex trend chart
	The property legendTimeFormat has been added to the Fx trend graph. This 
	property controls the formatting of time strings that appear in the data tips 
	that pop up when the mouse is over a data point. If legendTimeFormat is 
	blank (the default) then the timeFormat property is used instead.

15718: Scroll bar arrows now work
	In previous releases, the arrows on the time scroll bar on the Fx trend graph 
	had no effect when clicked. This is fixed.

15720: add "Strip Monoscale" mode to fx trend
	On the Fx trend graph, the yAxisMultiRangeMode property can now be set 
	to "Strip Monoscale". This mode behaves the same as Strip Chart mode 
	except that all strips will use the same Y axis range, rather than each 
	strip having a (possibly) different Y range.
	
	Specifically, if yAxisMultiRangeMode = "Strip Chart - Monoscale" then:
	
	1) If yAxisAutoScaleMode = "Off" then the y range for all strips is 
	determined by the yValueMin/Max properties.
	
	2) If yAxisAutoScaleMode = "On" then the y range for all strips is 
	determined by applying the autoscaling to the y values from all the traces.
	
	3) If yAxisAutoScaleMode = "On-Include min/max"  is determined by 
	applying the autoscaling to the y values from all the traces and the values 
	of the yValueMin/Max properties.
	
	For (1),  the behavior of Strip Chart and Strip Monoscale modes is the 
	same.
	
	If the yAxisMultiRangeMode property is attached to a local variable, the 
	following numeric values should be used: Off = 0, Multiple Axis = 2, Strip 
	Chart = 3, Stacked = 4, Strip Monoscale = 5.

15725: yAxisAutoScaleMode setting now respected if  yAxisLogFlag = ON
	On the Fx Trend, the yAxisAutoScaleMode setting is now respected if 
	yAxisLogFlag is checked. In prior releases, it was ignored if yAxisLogFlag 
	was checked.
	
	Note that the logarithm of a value <= 0 is undefined. So if 
	yAxisAutoScaleMode  = "On - Include Min/Max" and if yValueMin or yValueMax 
	is assigned a value <= 0, it will be ignored and will not affect the autoscale 
	result.

Heatmap

15610: Border level property added
	A new property, nodeBgBorderNestDepth, has been added to the Heatmap 
	graph. This property allows you to set the number of levels to display node 
	borders. If set to 0, then no borders are displayed. If set to -1, borders are 
	displayed on all levels.

Links

15402: Link icon can now be formatted
	The link object has been enhanced to support format options for the link 
	icon. You can now format and position both the value and label text with the 
	same options available in the object on the General palette. You can also 
	set the color, size, shape, gradient, and edge properties for the icon.

15691: Support added for link arrow colors
	The link object has been enhanced with 2 new properties in the Arrow 
	category of the property sheet: arrow1Color and arrow2Color. The 
	arrow1Color property sets the color of the source arrow and the 
	arrow2Color property sets the color of the target arrow. The default color for 
	both arrows is black.

Tables

15731: cellBgStripeContrast property added to obj_table02
	A new property, cellBgStripeContrast, has been added to obj_table02 in 
	the Cell category. This property allows you to set the contrast between 
	the cellBgColor and the stripe color when the cellBgStripedFlag is on. 
	Select High, Medium, Low or Lowest. The default is Medium, which is the 
	contrast used in previous releases. Existing displays will not change.
	
	The cellBgStripeContrast will not be applied if the cellBgColor is white. In 
	this case, light gray is always used as the stripe color.
	
	In the Display Server, the cellBgStripeContrast is only applied when the 
	display is loaded. Changes to this property (for example, by a data 
	attachment) after the display is loaded will be ignored.

Trend Charts

15575: Trend Graph Multi-trace Tabular data support
	The trend graph has been enhanced so that multiple traces can be 
	plotted from a single data table.  This can be convenient cases where a 
	data source provides a data table with a single timestamp column and 
	multiple Y data columns. 
	
	A new property named multiTraceTableFlag has been added to the Trace 
	category. It is unchecked by default. When checked two new properties 
	named multiTraceCurrentValueTable and multiTraceHistoryValueTable 
	are shown in the Trace category. Each of these properties can be 
	attached to a data table. The first column in the data table must be a 
	timestamp column. The remaining columns are expected to be Y data 
	values to be plotted. The Nth data column is used for trace N's data, and 
	the column name is used for traceNLabel (if not already assigned). 
	
	If the multiTraceTableFlag is checked, then the number of traces whose 
	properties are shown in the Builder's property sheet is determined by the the 
	number of data columns in the data table attachments or by the traceCount 
	property, whichever is larger. However, the number of traces that will be plotted 
	on the graph is determined by he number of data columns in the data table 
	attachments.
	
	Typically, the data attachment for multiTraceHistoryValueTable provides  
	the initial data points to be plotted (e.g. from a SQL attachment with 
	Update Mode = On Demand, or a Cache attachment with Update Once 
	checked) while multiTraceCurrentValueTable provides the new data 
	points to be plotted while the display is viewed.  If a trace plots only 
	historical or only current data, then only one of the properties needs to be 
	attached to data. However if both properties are attached to data, be sure 
	that the tables applied to both have the same number and type of 
	columns.
	
	When multiTraceTableFlag is checked, the properties named 
	traceNValueTable and traceNValue (for N = 1 to 10) are not shown in the 
	property sheet, since all trace data is expected to be provided via 
	multiTraceCurrentValueTable or multiTraceHistoryValueTable.

15638: Support for trend graph data labels
	The trend graph has been enhanced to allow a string to be associated 
	with each point on a trace. These strings are known as data labels. 
	
	If the traceNValueTable or traceNValue property is attached to a table and 
	the table contains a string column (in addition to the required timestamp 
	and Y data columns), then the string from that column will be used as the 
	data label for the corresponding data point. This feature is also 
	supported in the multi-trace table feature (15575), where the Nth string 
	column in multiTraceHistoryValueTable or multiTraceCurrentValueTable 
	will be used for the data labels for trace N. The data label for a point is 
	shown in the fixed legend and in the popup legend, between the trace 
	value and the trace label, and is enclosed in parentheses. If the 
	cursorFlag property is checked, the data label shown in the legend is for 
	the data point that is directly under or to the left of the cursor.
	
	Note that this feature is not supported for scalar attachments to 
	traceNValue.

15644: The trend graph enhanced to support event and bar traces
	The trend graph has been enhanced to support event and bar traces, in 
	addition to the traditional line traces.
	
	A property named traceNType has been added the Trace N category (for 
	N = 1 to 10). The valid values for traceNType are Line (the default), Bar, 
	and Event.
	
	A Bar type trace draws a vertical bar for each data point, from zero to the 
	point's Y value. The bar is just a vertical line whose width is determined 
	by traceNLineThickness. The traceNLineColor and traceNLineStyle also 
	control the appearance of the bar. If  the point exceeds an alarm limit 
	specified on the graph, the alarm color is used for the bar color. If 
	traceNMarkStyle is set to any value other than None, the mark is drawn at 
	the end of the bar.
	
	For an Event type trace, no line is drawn. Instead, a small rectangle 
	containing a single text character is drawn for each data point. The 
	character is the first character of the corresponding data label (see 
	E15638) if any, otherwise it is the first character of the trace label. The 
	traceNColor property determines the color of edges of the box and the 
	text character, unless the point exceeds an alarm limit specified on the 
	graph, in which case the corresponding alarm color is used. The box's fill
	color is set to traceNMarkColor or the appropriate alarm mark color, if any.
	However, if the mark color is the same as the color used for the box edge
	and text, then traceBgColor is used as the box fill color instead.
	
	Each event box is positioned vertically according to the Y data value for 
	the corresponding data point. However, if traceN is attached to a data 
	table that provides data labels but no Y data values, then an Event trace 
	is plotted regardless of the traceNType setting. The event boxes will all 
	be drawn near the bottom of the trace area.

15645: Support for drill down from trendgraph trace points
	The trend graph has been enhanced to support drill down from a trace 
	point. 
	
	If the graph's drillDownTarget is set, then the following predefined 
	substitutions will be set on drill down from a trace point:
	
	  $traceNumber : number of the trace (1 to 10) that contains the selected point
	  $traceLabel : label of selected trace
	  $pointValue : y value of point
	  $pointTimestamp : timestamp of point
	  $pointLabel : data label (if any) of point 
	  $pointIndex : position of point in trace data (0 to maxPointsPerTrace)
	
	If the drillDownSelectMode property is set to Element Only, then clicks on 
	the graph that are not near a trace point are ignored. If 
	drillDownSelectMode is set to Anywhere, then a click anywhere on the 
	graph will trigger a drill down but if the click is not near a trace point then 
	the substitutions listed above will not be set.

15646: Support for drill down and mouseover text for  trace points
	The thin client has been extended to support mouseover text and drill 
	down from data points on traces on the trend graph.
	
	If the trend graph's cursorFlag property is checked, this enables 
	mouseover on the trace points. If the mouse is over a trace point, a 
	browser tooltip box will appear displaying the legend values that 
	correspond to that point.
	
	If the trend graph has a drillDownTarget specified, clicking on a trace 
	point will set the following predefined substitutions:
	
		$traceNumber : number of the trace (1 to 10) that contains the selected point
		$traceLabel : label of selected trace
		$pointValue : y value of point
		$pointTimestamp : timestamp of point
		$pointLabel : data label (if any) of point
		$pointIndex : position of point in trace data (0 to maxPointsPerTrace)
	
	Limitations:
	
	1) If this feature is used on a graph with many trace points, the 
	performance of the browser may be sluggish when the display is loading 
	or refreshing. To avoid this, set the timeRange property so that only a 
	portion of the trace points are visible at a time.
	
	2) If a thin client display refresh occurs while positioning the mouse over 
	a point, the browser tooltip may not appear or it may appear in the wrong 
	location. 
	
	3) When maxPointsPerTrace is exceeded on a trace (1000 by default), an 
	old trace point will be shifted out of the trace for each new point that is 
	added. If this occurs between the time that the thin client display was last 
	refreshed and the time that the user clicks on a point, the drilldown 
	substitutions will reflect the new set of data points. For example, if 2 
	points were shifted out of the trace, the drilldown subs will be set as 
	though the selected point was 2 positions to the right of the point the 
	user actually clicked.

15647: Trend Graph Trace Groups
	The trend graph has been enhanced to support trace groups. A trace 
	group is a collection of 2 or more traces, and is useful for:
	
	   - identifying multiple traces that should share one vertical axis, in strip 
	chart or multi-axis modes.
	
	   - identifying 3 traces to be combined as a banded trace.
	
	A new category named Trace Groups has been added to the trend 
	graph's property sheet. By default, the category contains a single property 
	named traceGroupCount  with a default value of zero. Legal values are 0 
	- 5. If nonzero, then the following properties appear in the Trace Groups 
	category, for each groupN, where N is 1-5:
	
	traceGroupNTraceNumbers:  A comma-separated list of the traces that 
	belong to the group. If the trend graph is in strip chart mode or multi-axis 
	mode, all the traces in the group will share the same axis/strip.
	 
	traceGroupNBandedFlag: If this property is checked, the group is 
	expected to have 3 traces.  The plot area beneath the 1st trace in the 
	group (the low band trace) will be filled, the 2nd trace in the group (the 
	value trace) will not be filled, and the area above the 3rd trace (the high 
	band trace) will be filled.
	
	Example: 
	
	 Set traceCount = 3
	 Set traceGroupCount = 1  (this makes the next 2 properties appear)
	 Set traceGroup1TraceNumberss = 1, 2, 3
	 Set traceGroup1BandedFlag = true (checked)
	 Attach trace 1, 2, and 3 to data.
	
	Additional notes:
	
	For each trace that is in a group, note that the y axis for the group is 
	visible unless traceNYAxisVisFlag or traceVisFlag is false (unchecked) 
	for all traces in the group. Similarly, the group's y axis grid is visible 
	unless the traceNYAxisGridVisFlag property is false for all traces in the 
	group.
	
	If  traceN is in a group, note that these properties are hidden: 
	traceNYAxisAutoScaleMode, traceNYAxisValueMax, traceNYAxisValueMin. 
	The graph's yAXisAutoScaleMode, yValueMax, and yValueMin properties 
	are used to scale each group's y axis range.
	
	If yAxisMultiRangeMode = Multiple Axis, the color of the axis for a group is 
	determined by traceNLineColor of the first visible trace in the group. In 
	Mutli Axis mode it may not be visually obvious which traces belong to 
	which groups, unless you assign a similar line color or style, or mark 
	color or style, to all the traces in a group.

15730: Sparkline now correctly uses assigned color rather than default
	In the previous release, if a bgColor was assigned to a sparkline object in 
	the Display Builder, after saving and reloading the file the sparkline would 
	always use the default bgColor instead of the assigned color. This is fixed.

Oracle Coherence Monitor

14781: Admin Node and Admin Cache page corrections
	Some interaction errors in the Node and Cache administration pages have 
	been corrected.  The selected Location is now shown instead of the node 
	id. A value entered in an edit field will remain during the confirm process 
	rather than disappear as in previous versions.

15495: Applet Throws "Unable to load MyRtvAppManager" but Still Runs
	When running in an applet, the Oracle Coherence Monitor no longer 
	throws the following error:
	
	ERROR: cannot create RTView MBeans: access denied 
	javax.management.MBeanServerPermission createMBeanServer)
	ERROR: Unable to load MyRtvAppManager. Pack it into one of your applet 
	jars and restart the browser.

15530: Size of history caches now configurable
	The size of the history caches used by  the ocmonitor can now be 
	configured by the user, by setting the value of the $rtvCacheHistorySize 
	global substitution.  This can be done in the Application Options 
	General->Substitutions Tab.
	

15593: Connection Status indicator now shows JMX and Data Server status
	Connection Status indicator on the Grid Overview page now shows both the 
	JMX status and the state of a Data Server connection if the monitor is 
	connected to a Data Server. 
	
	The indicator will be changed to a grey color if the Data Server is being used 
	but is not connected. Otherwise a red color indicates that the JMX 
	connection to the Coherence cluster is not established properly.  Green 
	indicates a successful connection.

Platform Support

15581: More than nine arguments now allowed for shell script launchers
	In previous versions you could only enter up to 9 arguments when
	running RTView application shell script launchers. The scripts have
	been modified to accept an unlimited number of arguments.

TIBCO EMS Manager - Configuration

15344: Passwords saved to servers.xml now encrypted
	In previous releases, the password for servers added or modified during 
	the current Dislplay Builder or Configuration Utility were not encrypted in the 
	saved servers.xml file. This has been fixed.

Viewer - Java Web Start

15454: RTV files with spaces in their names now work with JWS
	In previous versions, the Java Web Start deployment failed to load files with 
	spaces in the name from the server. This has been fixed.

Version 5.3d1 Release Notes

Data Server

15697: Data Server memory leak for filtered cache data fixed
	In release 5.3c1, the data server memory usage would grow if a client 
	display contained a data attachment to a cache and the attachment 
	specified a row filter or a column subset.  This has been fixed.

Data Sources

SQL Data Source

15661: Queries no longer being run sequentially & synchronously
	In release 5.3c1, the SQL data source ran all queries on all connections 
	sequentially, instead of running queries that use different connections in 
	parallel as in earlier releases, and it ignored the "Run Queries 
	Concurrently" option. Also, when a display that contains an SQL query was 
	opened in the standalone Display Builder or Display Viewer, it would not 
	paint or respond to user input until the query completed.
	
	This problem is fixed.

StreamBase Data Source

15671: SB re-connect behavior and RTViewDS connection info fixed
	In the StreamBase Data Adapter, two problems have been fixed:
	
	(1) If a connection was lost and reconnected (which the DataAdapter will do 
	automatically) new subscriptions were not made for the output streams(s) 
	and so they did not start receiving data.
	 
	(2) When a connection was lost or reconnected the "Connected" column of 
	the internal Streams table was not updated correctly.

Functions

15643: ConcurrentModificationException fixed
	In release 5.3c1, under certain conditions a 
	ConcurrentModificationException could be thrown from the function data 
	source. This is fixed.

15672: Last Table Rows bug fixed
	Previously, The Last Table Rows function would not return the correct data 
	under certain circumstances. This is now no longer the case

General

15657: Command line option added to specify global files
	A new command line option has been added to the Display Builder, Display 
	Viewer, Display Server and Data Server to specify a Global Definition file:
	
	-global:fileName
	
	The command line option does not support specifying substitutions for the 
	Global Definition file. If this is needed, add the Global Definition file using 
	the Globals tab in the Application Options dialog instead.

Object Library

15616: Upwards-compatability of old objects repaired
	In version 5.1c1, obj_text03, obj_label09, obj_label09s and obj_label12 
	were replaced with newer objects and removed from the palette. The 
	conversion routine that made old displays upward compatible did not take 
	data attachments into account. This has been fixed.

Version 5.3c1 Release Notes

Alerts

15397: Alert Dialog Enhanced
	In the Display Builder the following changes have been made to the Alert 
	Dialog:
	
	The Filters panel has been relocated below the Alerts table and by 
	default is hidden. A new checkbox labeled "Show Filters" will show or 
	hide it.
	
	A usage note has been added to the dialog to remind the user that while 
	alerts are selected in the table, they are edited in the Object Properties 
	dialog.
	
	When filtering the alert table with a name filter, unnamed alerts will 
	always be included in the filter results.

Commands

15352: Command confirm dialog now appears on correct linux dual screen
	Command Confirmation Dialog now appears on correct screen for Multi-
	headed X11 displays.
	
	Previously Command Confirmation Dialogs may have appeared centered 
	on the wrong screen for Multi-headed X11 displays. This is now no longer 
	the case.

Customization

15345: Poll Once (Static Data)  data no longer updated by preview
	Previously data obtained by a data attachment, with an update mode of  Poll 
	Once (Static Data) , may have been updated more than once when a similar 
	data attachment with a periodic update mode existed. This is no longer the 
	case, and data will only be updated once for a data attachment with an 
	update mode of Update Mode: Poll Once (Static Data)

Data Server

15382: Improved support for setting data server via a substitution
	In a data attachment, if Data Server is set to a substitution (say, $server), it 
	is now possible to set $server = __none, which is equivalent to setting Data 
	Server = <none>. It is also possible to set $server to an empty string, which 
	is equivalent to setting Data Server = <default>. Those values were not 
	supported via substitution in previous releases.

Data Sources

15453: Data Source row filtering enhanced to support multiple columns
	In the Display Builder, the Data Adapters that support row filtering have 
	been enhanced to allow multiple columns to be indicated for the filter 
	and multiple values to compare against for each column. The following 
	data adapters are affected: Caches, IBM Websphere, RRD, XML, Log4J, 
	Splunk.
	
	As of this release there is no specific user interface for entering multiple 
	filter columns and sets of filter values; the lists must be typed into the 
	corresponding dialog field.
	
	Multiple columns will be specified as a semicolon-separated list. Filter 
	values will be specified as a nested list where values for a given column 
	are comma-separated, and each group of comma-separated values is 
	separated by a semicolon. For example:
	
	Column names: col1;col2;col3
	Filter values: val1,val2;val3,val4;val5,val6
	
	The resulting table returned would be those rows where the values of 
	val1 OR val2 are in col1 AND the values of val3 OR val4 are in col2 AND 
	the values of val5 OR val6 are in col3. 
	
	Spaces around separators are not allowed. If a column name contains a 
	semicolon it should be enclosed in single quotes ('). Likewise if a filter 
	value contains a comma it should be enclosed in single quotes.
	
	The list of column names will be validated against the names found in 
	the data table and if any is invalid the dialog will indicate this. Likewise 
	the filter values will be validated to insure there is the correct number of 
	values or values sets to correspond to the number of column names, 
	and that the filter values are correct for the data type of the corresponding 
	column.
	
	For backwards compatibility, if there is only one column name and a list 
	of filter values then the values may be separated by semicolons.

15468: Available columns now in order of occurrence in SPLUNK and Log4j
	Available Columns in Select Columns Dialog now displayed in correct order 
	for Log4j and Splunk Attach to data dialogs
	
	Previously the Available Columns in the Select Columns Dialog for Log4j 
	and Splunk Attach to data dialogs were not displayed in their order of 
	occurrence in the returned data table.They are now displayed in their order 
	of occurrence in the table.

Cache Data Source

15215: Enhance cache object to allow easier setting of history info
	Support for cache persistence has been improved.  A cache object can 
	now be configured so that its history table and current table
	contents will be saved to a database by the RTView Historian, and those 
	contents can now be restored automatically when an RTView application 
	is started. Once a cache object is so configured and saved to a display 
	(rtv) file, that file can be used as both a cache definition file and an 
	historian data configuration file.
	
	The following cache object properties are involved in cache persistence.
	
	1) historyTableName - As in the previous version, this is the name of the 
	database table in which the cache's history table should be saved. The 
	value assigned to this property may contain substitutions.
	
	The historian will create this table, if it does not already exist. When rows 
	are appended to the cache's history table, the historian will append those 
	rows to the database table. If the cache's timestampColumName 
	property is set, the historian will assume that column will be used for 
	sorting and purging rows in time order and will not append its own 
	timestamp columns to the table. Before the data is stored in the 
	database, the cache's schemaTable, if any, is applied. With these latest 
	changes, an RTView application will now automatically query the 
	database table for the initial rows to be loaded into the cache's history 
	table, provided that:
	
	    * the initialTable property is not attached to data (indicating that the 
	user has configured an explicit query to load the cache history)
	    * the timestampColumName property is set, so that it can be used to 
	sort the SQL query result by time.
	
	The number of rows loaded by the query is limited by the cache object's 
	maxNumberOfRowsProperty.
	
	2) currentTableName -  The name of the database table in which the 
	cache's current table should be saved. The value assigned to this 
	property may contain substitutions.
	
	The historian will create this table, if it does not exist. On each update to 
	the cache's current table, the historian will either create or update the 
	corresponding rows in the database table, using the cache's 
	indexColumns to locate the rows. If no indexColumns are defined the 
	historian will replace the entire table on each update. If the deleteTable 
	property is used to delete rows from the cache's current table, the 
	historian will also delete those rows from the database table.
	
	At startup of an RTView application, the database table will be queried for 
	the initial rows to be loaded into the cache's current table.
	
	This property is not supported for the type double cache. This property is 
	not supported in combination with the Historian -kdbformat option.
	
	3) databaseName - The name of the database that contains the 
	history and/or current tables for this cache. If left blank, the name 
	"RTVHISTORY" is assumed. Substitutions can be used in this property.
	
	4) quoteColumnNamesFlag - If checked (the default) then column names 
	will be quoted in all SQL queries and commands for this cache. This is 
	important for databases that do not preserve the case of column names 
	unless they are quoted. However, in prior RTView releases, column 
	names were not quoted when database tables were created, so this flag 
	can be unchecked for backward compatibility.
	
	For these properties to work as described above, the cache definition file 
	must also specified as an Historian data configuration file. See the 
	RTView Historian documentation for details.
	
	The -nohistory option can be specified on the command line to prevent 
	RTView from loading initial cache data from the database as described 
	above.

15385: Data from initialTable no longer in wrong order in cache history
	In the previous release, it was possible for data loaded via the initialTable 
	property to appear out of sequence in the cache's history table. This has 
	been fixed.

15401: deleteTable handling of multi-row tables improved
	In prior releases, if a table with 2 or more rows was attached to the 
	deleteTable property of an obj_cache_table, under some conditions the 
	wrong rows were deleted from the cache's current table. This problem is 
	fixed.

15433: add timeSpan property to cache objects.
	A property named timeSpan has been added to obj_cache_table and 
	obj_cache_double. The property specifies the time span for which rows 
	will be kept in the cache history table.  The property can specify a number 
	of seconds, or it can specify a number followed by a single character 
	indicating the time interval, where the valid characters are:
	
	y for years (365 days)
	M for months  (31 days)
	w for weeks (7 days)
	d for days
	h for hours
	m for minutes
	s for seconds
	
	By default, timeSpan is blank, which means that rows are not removed 
	from the history table according to their timestamp. 
	
	As in prior releases, the maxNumberOfRows property limits the total 
	number of rows in the history table, regardless of their timestamps.
	
	The timeSpan property only determines the time span for row kept in the 
	cache history table by the cache data source. It does not affect the 
	database storage, if any, associated with the cache.

15434: New property allowDuplicatesInHistoryFlag
	A property named allowDuplicatesInHistoryFlag has been added to the 
	cache table object. By default, this property is checked. If it is unchecked, 
	then before the cache data source adds a new row to the history table, it will 
	first check if an existing row has the identical timestamp and index column 
	values and if so the existing row will be replaced with the new row. This 
	feature requires additional overhead, so if duplicate history rows are 
	acceptable or are unlikely to occur, the allowDuplicatesInHistoryFlag  
	property should remain checked.

15486: Data Server now pushes cache table changes in all cases
	In prior releases, if a data server client opens a display with an attachment 
	to a cache table and the Column(s) field in the attachment is blank, and a 
	second client opens a display with an attachment to the same cache table 
	but where the Column(s) field = *, then the data server would only send 
	updates to the first client when the contents of the cache table changed. 
	This problem is fixed.

15490: New indexColumnNamesForDelete property
	A property named indexColumnNamesForDelete has been added to the 
	cache table object. This property can be used to remove defunct rows 
	from the cache's current table, after each update to the table. A subset of 
	the index column names should be specified as the value of the property. 
	On each update to the cache, the set of values contained in the update 
	for the specified columns is recorded. After the update, any row in the 
	current table that has matching values for those columns, but was not 
	updated, is considered defunct and is removed from the current table.
	
	For example, say the cache table has columns named Host, PID 
	(process id) and CPU, and indexColumnNames = Host;PID. The 
	valueTable property receives updates from agents running on multiple 
	hosts. The data table applied to valueTable from each agent contains all 
	the processes for the corresponding host. Say the cache.current table 
	contents are as follows:
	
		Host, PID, CPU
		h1, 1234, 22.2
		h1, 3456, 33.3
		h1, 8765, 44.4
		h2, 6464, 12.3
		h2, 4579, 55.3
	
	When an update for a host is applied to valueTable, if there are any rows
	in the current table for that host where the PID does not appear in 
	valueTable, (because the process has terminated) the row should be 
	deleted from the current table. Accordingly, the 
	indexColumnNamesForDelete property is set to "Host". Then if the 
	following table is applied to valueTable by the agent for host h1:
	
		Host, PID, CPU
		h1, 1234, 88.8
		h1, 8765, 77.7
	
	the resulting cache.current table contents will be this:
	
		Host, PID, CPU
		h1, 1234, 88.8
		h1, 8765, 77.7
		h2, 6464, 12.3
		h2, 4579, 55.3
	
	Note that the row for PID 3456 on host h1 was deleted (since it did not 
	appear in valueTable) and the other rows for h1 were updated. The rows 
	for host h2 were not changed, since valueTable contained no rows for 
	host h2.

15504: Float data type not processed properly by Cache
	If historical data is loaded from a database into a cache history table and 
	then live data is appended to the history table, values of zero may incorrectly 
	appear in a column if the data type is float in the live data and double in the 
	database, or vice versa.
	
	This has been fixed.

JMX Data Source

15496: Now able to invoke getThreadInfo(long p1) on a ThreadMXBean
	Previously it was not possible to successfully invoke the overloaded 
	getThreadInfo operation on a ThreadMXBean in the JMX Adapter.
	It is now possible to invoke the overload of the getThreadInfo operation with 
	a single long argument (p0 = threadID)  that returns the thread info for a 
	thread of the specified id with no stack trace.

SQL Data Source

15416: Crash when two ds threads use a db connection simultaneously
	In the prior release, if the Historian was configured to use an ODBC 
	connection to Microsoft SQL Server, then under some conditions the 
	following exception could occur:
	
	SQLException: [Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver]Connection is busy with 
	results for another hstmt
	
	This problem is fixed.

StreamBase Data Source

15311: Support added for multiple connections
	The RTView Data Adapter for StreamBase receives data via 
	streams from one or more connections. In previous releases that data 
	was identified internally only by the name of the stream; so if the same 
	stream was received from two connections simultaneously, the data 
	adapter did not distinguish the source, which could lead to confusing or 
	erroneous results. In the current release the data is now identified by 
	both connection and stream. A column named "conn" is now added to 
	each incoming "tuple"; it will contain the name of the connection as 
	defined in the Application Options dialog. Data attachments may be 
	made to a stream from a specific connection, in which case they will 
	receive only tuples from that connection, or to "*", in which case they will 
	receive tuples from any connection delivering that stream (the previous 
	behavior).
	
	If a stream is written out to a history file it will now contain the connection 
	name, and if it is read back in that information will be used to identify the 
	source. If a history file from a previous release without connection 
	information is read in, its tuples will be applied to all attachments for that 
	stream.

TIBCO Hawk Data Source

15346: Hawk alerts now cleared in RTView if agent expires
	In previous releases, alerts on an expired agent were not cleared in RTView 
	unless the display showing the alerts was closed and reopened.  This has 
	been fixed.

15457: Rerequest retransmitted alerts for agents that expire
	In previous releases, Hawk alerts were not always handled correctly if an 
	agent expired and came back up. When the agent expired, the alerts  
	currently showing in RTView were cleared, but when it came back up, 
	RTView was not requesting retransmission of those alerts, so their status 
	was not updated to the current alert status. This has been fixed.
	
	Note that retransmission of existing alerts only requested if the Rate to 
	Request Existing Alerts is greater than 0.

15491: Include Index Columns option has been added
	A new Include Index Columns option has been added to the TIBCO Hawk 
	data source. If enabled, 3 new columns will be available for all TIBCO Hawk 
	data attachments, except those to the RTViewDs microagent:
	
	AgentName - the name of the agent
	MicroAgentName - the name of the microagent
	MicroAgentInstance - the instance of the microagent
	
	These columns will show up as available Return Fields in the Attach to 
	TIBCO Hawk Data Dialog. If * is used for the Return Field, they will be 
	appended to the subscription data.

15492: Disable Data Cache option has been added
	A Disable Data Cache option has been added to the TIBCO Hawk Methods 
	and Alerts tab in the Application Options dialog. This option allows the user 
	to disable the caching of data in the Hawk Data Source. When selected, the 
	initial update on data attachments to multiple agents will return a table with 
	a row for each agent, but subsequent updates include only the rows that 
	have changed. This option is useful when using Hawk data attachments as 
	input to the Cache data source or the Historian. 
	
	This option was already supported with the -hawknocache command line 
	option, but it is now available from the options dialog as well.

15513: Attach to Hawk Data dialog now retains window size
	The Attach to Hawk Data dialog has been modified so that window size 
	information is retained after the user resizes the window and 
	closes/reopens the dialog.

WMI Data Source

14944: Microsoft WMI Data Adapter added
	The WMI  (Windows Management Instrumentation) Data adapter is now 
	available. The WMI Data adapter allows you to obtain Management 
	Information from local and remote computers running the Windows 
	operating System. WMI data is obtained via WQL (WMI Query Language) 
	statements. WMI is a windows specific Technology. The WMI Data adapter 
	requires the .NET Version 2.0 (or above) RunTime installed on the machine 
	it will run on.  An Example of local WMI data is shown in the Data Sources 
	demo.

Demos

JMX Monitor

15500: The JMX Monitor Demo has been enhanced to use client side caches
	The JMX Monitor demo has been enhanced to use client side caches for the 
	JVM Summary and JVM Memory Screens.

Display Server

15392: Initial data delay in thin client when using data server reduced
	If the display server requests data via the data server, then there can be a  
	delay between the time when the user opens a display in the thin client and 
	when data appears in the display. This delay time has been reduced.

15560: Fix for MBean error in Display Server
	In the previous release, accessing the Display Server's JMX Manager 
	MBean could cause the Display Server to throw an OpenDataException.  
	This has been fixed.

Distribution

14860: Add/Remove Programs listing no longer includes duplicate version
	Previous versions of RTView included the version twice in the list of currently 
	installed programs in the Add/Remove Programs applet. This has been 
	fixed.

Drill Down

15384: Link object now drills down to correct display in thin client
	A problem in the thin client in which a drill down from a link object did not 
	open the correct display has been fixed.

Functions

14660: Filter by Row supports multi-column, multi-value filtering
	In the Display Builder, the Filter By Rows function has been enhanced to 
	allow multiple columns to be indicated for the filter and multiple values to 
	compare against for each column. 
	
	Multiple columns will be specified as a semicolon-separated list. Filter 
	values will be specified as a nested list where values for a given column 
	are comma-separated, and each group of comma-separated values is 
	separated by a semicolon. For example:
	
	Column names: col1;col2;col3
	Filter values: val1,val2;val3,val4;val5,val6
	
	The resulting table returned would be those rows where the values of 
	val1 OR val2 are in col1 AND the values of val3 OR val4 are in col2 AND 
	the values of val5 OR val6 are in col3. 
	
	Spaces around separators are not allowed. If a column name contains a 
	semicolon it should be enclosed in single quotes (' '). Likewise if a filter 
	value contains a comma it should be enclosed in single quotes.
	
	
	Note also the following:
	
	1. If there are more column names than filter values (or value lists) or 
	vice-versa, the extra names or values/value lists will be ignored. 
	
	2. If there is an error in designating a column name, that name and its 
	associated filter values/value lists will be skipped. In the above example, 
	if col2 were not found in the input, val3,val4 will be ignored and col3 will 
	still be filtered on val5,val6.
	
	3. For backwards compatibility, if there is only one column name and a 
	list of filter values then the values may be separated by semicolons.

15275: GroupByTimeAndUniqueValues handles text columns differently now
	The GroupByTimeAndUniqueValues function treats text columns more 
	cleanly.
	
	Before the changes to GroupByTimeAndUniqueValues all numerical 
	algorithms involving text values would result in a value of "" on output.
	
	Now all text calculations show the contents of the last row to be compacted 
	in any text field.

15276: GroupByTimeAndUniqueValues handles bool columns differently now
	The GroupByTimeAndUniqueValues function treats boolean columns more 
	reasonably.
	
	Before the changes to GroupByTimeAndUniqueValues all numerical 
	algorithms involving boolean values would result in a value of  false on 
	output.
	
	Now all boolean calculations show the contents of the last row to be 
	compacted in any boolean field instead of a false.

15277: GroupByTimeAndUniqueValues handles date columns differently now
	Before the changes to GroupByTimeAndUniqueValues all numerical 
	algorithms involving date values would result in a value of "" on output.
	
	Now all date calculations that result in a compacted row show the contents 
	of the last row to be compacted in any date field instead of a blank.

15278: GroupByTimeAndUniqueValues handles NaN better
	The GroupByTimeAndUniqueValues fucnction was optimized for better NaN 
	handling.
	
	Before the changes to GroupByTimeAndUniqueValues all numerical 
	algorithms involving NaN values would result in a value of NaN on output.
	
	Now all calculations that see NaN substitute zero so that all other non-NaN 
	values are at least considered.

15290: Restrict to Data Combinations now in GroupByTimeAndUniqueValues
	The Group By Time And Unique Values function has been given an 
	additional argument, "Restrict To Data Combinations". As in the Group By 
	Unique Values function, if this argument is set to 0 then the returned data 
	will contain all possible combinations of unique values found in the 
	specified Index Columns, but if it is set to 1 then the returned data will be 
	restricted to only those combinations that occur in the data.

15371: Deadlock if SETSUB function triggered by NOW function fixed
	In prior releases, a deadlock can occur in the Display Builder or Display
	Viewer if a display contains a setsub function that is triggered by a now or a 
	getsub function. This problem is fixed.

15377: Help dialog for Evaluate Expression functions updated
	The help text for the Evaluate Expression By ___ functions has been 
	updated to warn users that variable names may not begin with a number.

15469: New Distinct Values function
	In the Display Builder a new function Distinct Values has been added. 
	The Distinct Values function takes as its arguments a table and the 
	name of a column in the table, and returns the unique values from the 
	given column. Arguments are as follows:
	
	Table - The table of interest.
		
	Column Name - the column of interest.
		
	Sort Values - if set to 1, the resulting values will be sorted.
		
	Sort Descending - if set to 1, the resulting values will be sorted in 
	descending order.
		
	Use Column Name - if set to 1, the original column name will be used for 
	the result column; else a generic name will be used. This behavior is 
	useful if a display needs to be independent of the column names in the 
	data.

15470: New Create Selector List function
	The Create Selector List function takes as input a table containing a list 
	of values to be presented in a dropdown list and returns a two-column 
	table where the first column contains selector names and the second 
	column contains their values. If the input table has only one column its 
	contents will be used for both the selector names and values; if it has 
	two columns the selector values will be taken from the second column.
	
	The function has the option to prepend an "All Selector" to the output list. 
	If a name is given via the argument "All Selector Name" then the first row 
	in the output will contain that name in the first column and "*" in the 
	second.
	
	Selector Table - the table of valid values.
	All Selector Name - name for the "all" selector.
	Sort Values - if set to 1, the resulting values will be sorted.
	Sort Descending - if set to 1, the resulting values will be sorted in 
	descending order.

15471: New Validate Substitution function
	The Validate Substitution function validates the given substitution against 
	the given table of valid values. The first argument is the name of a 
	substitution variable and the second argument is a table of valid values. 
	(Only the first column of this table is used.) If the substitution value is found 
	in the table it is returned; else the given substitution is set to the first value in 
	the table.

15474: New checkbox to scroll columns added to Data Display Dialog
	In the Display Builder's Data Display Dialog, a new checkbox named "Scroll 
	Columns" has been added. By default all columns are displayed in the 
	available dialog width, and in a wide table the column labels may not be 
	readable.If this box is checked then the columns will be sized so the labels 
	are readable and a horizontal scrollbar will be added if necessary to see all 
	the columns.

15498: Split String Function added to tabular functions
	The Split String function splits the given string, using  the separator regular 
	expression, to return a table with the named results column.
	
	The String argument is the input string to be split
	 
	The Separator argument is the regular expression used to split the input 
	string argument
	
	The Results Column Name argument is used to name the column 
	containing the split results, one per row, in the returned results table.

15525: optimize to Restrict to Data Combinations for Group By functions
	The performance of the Group By Unique Values and Group By Time and 
	Unique Values functions has been optimized when the Restrict To Data 
	Combinations is enabled.

15558: setsub function may not initialize value of sub in listeners
	In prior releases, if a function has an input argument with an attachment that 
	is affected by a substitution, and the initial value of that substitution is set by 
	another function which appears later in the rtv file, the attachment may not 
	be initialized with the correct substitution value. This problem is fixed.

General

14893: Third party .jar files repackaged into single .jar
	In previous versions we required that the following libraries be added to 
	applet parameters.
	
	Reporting support:
	J2PrinterWorks.jar
	iText.jar
	iTextAsian.jar
	
	Email command support:
	mail.jar
	activation.jar
	
	Expression evaluation function support:
	jeval.jar
	
	Browser support:
	BrowserLauncher2.jar
	
	It is no longer necessary to include all of the above libraries, as the 
	contents of these libraries have been re-packaged into a single
	library:
	
	gmsjext.jar
	
	If you are currently using an applet deployment and you do not wish to 
	upgrade your HTML file's applet parameters to reference gmsjext.jar 
	instead of the full list above, you can find a copy of the old libraries in 
	lib/ext_jars.zip.  The signed versions of these are in signed_jars.zip.

15497: Java option optionsFileDir now also checks startup directory
	The behavior of the RTV_JAVAOPTS option  -Dcom.sl.rtview.optionsFileDir=
	(directory) has been modified.
	
	Previously, if a directory was specified, RTView would attempt to read 
	configuration files from that directory. If not found, RTView would look for the 
	configuration files in lib. 
	
	This has been modified as follows: If a directory is specified, RTView will 
	attempt to read configuration files from that directory. If not found, it will look 
	for them in the directory where you started your application. If not found 
	there, it will look for them in lib.

Object Library

11694: Scale palette enhancements
	All of the scales previously on the Scales tab of the Object Palette have 
	been replaced with the following 5 new scales:
	
	obj_barscale - This is a scale which displays the value using the fill 
	percent of the bar. 
	obj_piescale - This is a scale which displays the value using the fill 
	percent of the pie.
	obj_vuscale - This is a scale which displays the value using the fill 
	percent of the bar. The bar is drawn striped instead of solid.
	obj_indscale - This is a scale which displays the value using the position
	of the indicator against an axis.
	obj_bulletscale - This is a scale which displays the value using the fill 
	percent of the bar. The bar look and funcationality are based on Steven 
	Few's bullet graph.
	
	All of the scales allow you to set the range of the value using valueMin 
	and valueMax. All of the scales except the pie scale support a variety of 
	axis styles and can be oriented vertically or horizontally. 
	
	The scales that were previously on the Scales tab of the Object Palette 
	have been deprecated. They will continue to work as they did before in 
	existing displays, but are no longer available in the Object Palette.

Charts (General)

15320: New Spark Chart object
	A sparkline object has been added to the Graphs palette. The sparkline 
	object is very similar to the trend graph and has many of the same 
	properties. However, the sparkline has only a single trace and no X or Y 
	axis. A marker is drawn only for the last data point. By default the 
	sparkline also has no background or legend, but there are properties to 
	enable those features.
	
	The sparkline will plot the data that is attached to its value and/or its 
	valueTable properties. These are equivalent to the trace1Value and 
	trace1ValueTable properties of the trend graph.  By default, the sparkline 
	will plot all of the data, up to the maxPointsPerTrace limit. The Y data 
	range will be autoscaled. Although the X and Y axis are not displayed, 
	several properties are available for controlling the X and X ranges of the 
	plot, namely timeRange, timeRangeBegin, timeRangeEnd, 
	yAxisAutoScaleMode, yValueMin, and yValueMax. See the trend graph 
	documentation for a description of these properties.
	
	The sparkline supports the same alarm properties as the trendgraph.

Control Objects

15315: Scale Control now supports changes to valueMin and valueMax
	In previous releases, the valueMin and valueMax properties on the Scale 
	Object (obj_c1scale) were static and did not support updates. This has 
	been fixed.

15373: Date Picker bug fixes
	In the previous release of RTView, the Date Chooser control 
	had the following bugs:
	
	1) If timeEntryEnabledFlag is unchecked, when you click on the calendar 
	button, the control's varToSet variable is set and its command (if any) is 
	executed immediately, before you pick the desired date from the popup 
	calendar. This does not occur in the thin client. 
	
	2) If timeEntryEnabledFlag is checked and the control has a command, 
	the command gets executed twice when you click OK in the popup 
	calendar.
	
	3) If timeEntryEnabledFlag is unchecked and the control does a drilldown 
	to a new display in the current window, it crashes.
	
	All of these bugs have been fixed.

Fx Bar Chart

15335: Fx Bar Chart Spacing and Scroll Bars support
	Two inter-related properties have been added to the Fx Bar Graph: 
	scrollbarMode and minSpacePerBar. These properties act similarly to 
	the same properties of the standard RTView Bar Graph.
	
	scrollbarMode:
	Select Never, As Needed, or Always from the scrollbarMode property to 
	set the behavior of the x-axis scroll bar in the graph. NOTE: If 
	drawHorizontalFlag is selected, the x-axis is vertical. Never is the default 
	setting. If set to Never, some bars may get clipped. Select Always to 
	display a scroll bar at all times. Set to As Needed to display the scroll bar 
	when there is not enough space to display all of the bars in the plot area. 
	Each bar uses at least minSpacePerBar pixels along the x-axis.
	
	minSpacePerBar:
	Sets the minimum width for each bar, in pixels.  
	If drawHorizontalFlag is deselected, set the minimum width for each bar, 
	in pixels. If drawHorizontalFlag is selected, set the minimum height for 
	each bar, in pixels. The default is set to 1.

15390: Initial value 'Once' for entranceTrigger now behaves correctly
	The FxBar graph's transition code has been improved from the prior to 
	release to ensure that setting a transition to "Once" sticks. Also, the very first 
	Entrance transition will display without the undesirable data flash that may 
	have preceded the unfolding of the effect.

15391: all transition types except Interpolate act like Slide Right
	The FxBar graph's transition code has been improved from the prior to 
	release to ensure that the all settings stick.

15406: Bar spacing added to FxBar
	The FxBar graph now supports the minSpaceBetweenGroups property. As 
	with the standard bar graph, minSpaceBetweenGroups appears in the 
	Layout section of the Object Properties grid.
	
	The default, as with the standard bar graph, is:
	minSpaceBetweenGroups = 8

15462: MinSpaceBetweenBars property added to Fx Bar
	The FxBar graph now supports the minSpaceBetweenBars property. As with 
	the standard bar graph, minSpaceBetweenBars appears in the Layout 
	section of the Object Properties grid.
	
	The default, as with the standard bar graph, is:
	minSpaceBetweenBars = 0

15483: Alert Indicators implemented in Fx Bar Chart
	Alert indicators are now supported in the Fx Bar graph. The Alert 
	properties added are:
	
	valueHighAlarmLineVisFlag
	valueHighAlarmMarkColor
	valueHighWarningLineVisFlag
	valueHighWarningMarkColor
	valueLowAlarmLineVisFlag
	valueLowAlarmMarkColor
	valueLowWarningLineVisFlag
	valueLowWarningMarkColor
	
	By default, all of the VisFlag properties are set to OFF and all of the 
	MarkColor properties are set to the same color values as their respective 
	Alarm or Warning colors.

15484: Properties added for X and Y Axes color and thickness
	The Fx Bar graph now supports changing the color and thickness of the X 
	and Y axis. Four new properties have been added. They are listed below 
	with their default values:
	
	X-Axis category:
	xAxisColor = 0xBBCCDD   (light-gray)
	xAxisThickness = 8
	
	Y-Axis category:
	yAxisColor = 0xBBCCDD (light-gray)
	yAxisThickness = 8

15485: Properties added for  X and Y Axes color and thickness
	The Fx Trend graph now supports changing the color and thickness of 
	the X and Y axis. Four new properties have been added. They are listed 
	below with their default values:
	
	X-Axis category:
	xAxisColor = 0xBBCCDD (light-gray)
	xAxisThickness = 1
	
	Y-Axis category:
	yAxisColor = 0xBBCCDD (light-gray)
	yAxisThickness = 8
	
	Note that the yAxisColor and yAxisThickness property values will be 
	ignored when the yAxisMultiRangeFlag property is TRUE.

Fx Trend Chart

15365: Fx Trend Enhancements
	The following properties have been added to the Fx Trend Graph. These 
	properties have the same behavior as on the standard trend graph 
	(obj_trendgraph02), except as noted below.
	
	timeRangeBegin
	timeRangeEnd
	gridColor
	xAxisGridVisFlag
	yAxisGridVisFlag
	xAxisLabelTextSize  (see note 1)
	yAxisLabelTextSize  (see note 1)
	yAxisMultiRangeFlag  (see note 2)
	yAxisPosition  (see note 3)
	yAxisAutoScaleVisTracesOnlyFlag
	trace1VisFlag, trace2VisFlag, etc
	
	Note 1. These are equivalent to x/yAxisLabelTextHeight on obj_trendgraph02.
	
	Note 2. The yAxisMultiRangeFlag property on Fx Trend is similar to 
	yAxisMultiRangeMode on obj_trendgraph02, where yAxisMultiRangeFlag 
	= unchecked is equivalent to yAxisMultiRangeMode = Off, and 
	yAxisMultiRangeFlag = unchecked is equivalent to yAxisMultiRangeMode 
	= MultipleAxis. There is no equivalent to the Classic or Strip Chart 
	modes, those are not supported on the Fx Trend. 
	
	Note 3. The yAxisPosition property supports the same settings on the Fx 
	Trend and obj_trendgraph02. However, the 'inner' position settings work 
	differently: on obj_trendgraph02, the axis labels are drawn inside the 
	trace area, while on Fx Trend the inner setting merely changes the 
	location of the tick marks relative to the y axis.

15429: Flex trend with a lot of data no longer hangs browser after zoom
	In prior releases, the Fx Trend would sometimes become sluggish or 
	unresponsive after performing a zoom. This is fixed.

15511: yValuePrecision has been added to the Fx trend graph
	A property named yValuePrecision has been added to the Fx trend graph. It 
	specifies the number of decimal digits shown for Y data values in the 
	legend and the mouseover text. The default value is 2.

Heatmap

15430: Heat Map Object added
	A new object, obj_heatmap, has been added to the Graphs tab in the 
	Object Palette. The heatmap displays indexed hierarchical data as a set 
	of nested rectangles. A rectangle is drawn for each index, and is then 
	filled with smaller rectangles representing sub-indexes. The size and 
	color of a node's rectangle shows its value relative to the total of all 
	values for that index.
	
	Heatmaps are useful because the color and size of the nodes allow you 
	to see patterns that would be difficult to spot in other ways. They also 
	make efficient use of space and can legibly display a large amount of 
	data.
	
	Attach your tabular data to the valueTable property. This table must 
	contain one or more index columns and at least one data column. The 
	heatmap will display one level of nodes for each index column specified. 
	Index column names should be specified in the 
	nodeIndexColumnNames property. The first non-index numeric column 
	will be used to control the size of the node. The second non-index 
	numeric column will be used to control the color of the node. If only one 
	data column is specified, it will control both the size and the color of the 
	nodes.
	
	The data in the valueTable is aggregated by unique index value. By 
	default, the both size and color data is subtotaled. You can specify 
	alternative aggregation types in the colorValueGroupType or 
	sizeValueGroupType properties.
	
	Since the data in the heatmap is aggregated, the value shown in a 
	heatmap node might not be the same as the value passed down to a 
	drill down display. For example, if you have your heatmap attached to a 
	table where the index column is Plant and the size column is Units 
	Completed, if you have 2 rows where the Plant is San Francisco, then the 
	node size will be based on the total of the Units Completed values for 
	both rows. However, when you drill down, the drill down value for Units 
	Completed will be the value in the first row in the table where the Plant is 
	San Francisco.
	
	Negative aggregated values will be treated as 0.
	
	The following layout options are supported:
	Squarified - Nodes are more square in shape and ordered according to 
	the size of the value from the top-left to the bottom-right.
	
	Strip - Nodes are more square in shape and ordered according to the 
	order of the rows in the valueTable.
	
	Slice Horizontal - Nodes are short and wide and ordered according to the 
	order of the rows in the valueTable.
	
	Slice Vertical - Nodes are tall and narrow and ordered according to the 
	order of the rows in the valueTable.
	
	Slice Best - Nodes are laid out either like Slice Horizontal or Slice Vertical 
	based on what fits best in the available space.
	
	Slice Alternate Horizontal - The layout alternates between Slice Horizontal 
	and Slice Vertical based on the node depth. The top level nodes use 
	Slice Horizontal.
	
	Slice Alternate Vertical - The layout alternates between Slice Horizontal 
	and Slice Vertical based on the node depth. The top level nodes use 
	Slice Vertical.
	
	Note that heatmaps containing large data sets may run slowly on the 
	Display Server if either the drill down target or the mouseOverFlag is 
	enabled.

15512: The heatmap now supports value divisors and data quality
	Two new properties, sizeValueDivisor and colorValueDivisor, have been 
	added to control the size and color values plotted in the heatmap. Note 
	that the colorValueDivisor, if specified, is also applied to colorValueMin 
	and colorValueMax. For columns specified in the 
	mouseOverAdditionalColumns property, you can optionally specify a 
	value divisor for each numeric column included in the tooltip.
	
	Several new properties have been added to support data quality:
	valueQuality: Specify a value to compare to valueQualityLostData and 
	valueQualityNoData. If it matches one of these, all nodes in the heatmap 
	will draw in the corresponding valueDataQuality color. This property is 
	ignored if the valueQualityEnabledFlag is off.
	
	valueQualityEnabledFlag: If selected, enable coloring cells based on 
	data quality. 
	
	valueQualityColumnName: Use the specified column in the valueTable 
	data for a per-row data quality flag. For each node, if the value in the 
	quality column matches valueQualityNoData, draw the node 
	valueQualityNoDataColor and if the quality column matches 
	valueQualityLostData, draw the node valueQualityLostDataColor. If the 
	valueTable contains multiple rows for a single index, the highest data 
	quality value is used. This property is ignored if the 
	valueQualityEnabledFlag is off.
	
	valueQualityLostData: The lost data value.
	valueQualityLostDataColor: The color to paint the node if the quality is 
	valueQualityLostData.
	
	valueQualityNoData: The no data value.
	valueQualityNoDataColor: The color to paint the node if the quality is 
	valueQualityNoData.

15566: linearColorMappingFlag property added to Heatmap
	The linearColorMappingFlag has been added to the heatmap in the Data 
	Format category. This property adjusts the way the color calculations are 
	done for the nodes. If selected, the color of the node ranges directly from 
	minColor to maxColor, similar to the way a gradient's colors are calculated. 
	If deselected, the color of the node ranges between minColor and maxColor 
	by going around the color wheel.

Pie Charts

15418: Initial value "Once" for entranceTrigger now acts as expected
	It was noted that some of the entrance and exit transition effects didn't work 
	as expected. The problems were found and corrected.

Tables

12228: Support added for multiple column sort
	In the Display Builder, the Sort Table function has been enhanced to take 
	multiple column names, separated by ";". The resulting table will be sorted 
	on the first column, then the second column, etc. If an invalid column name 
	is entered the original table will be returned.

15442: Crashes caused by valueTable changes while drawing objects fixed
	In prior releases, an array bounds exception or class cast exception would 
	sometimes occur if rows were removed from a data table by an 
	asynchronous data source while an object attached to the same table was 
	being drawn. This is fixed.

Trend Charts

15411: "Stacked" option added to yAxisMultiRangeMode
	The trend graph now supports yAxisMultiRangeMode = Stacked. In this 
	mode, the y value plotted for a trace for time=T is the sum of all of the y 
	values of the lower numbered traces at  time = T. For example, for trace 3 
	and the plotted y values will be the sum of the y data values for traces 1, 
	2, and 3.
	
	The actual (unstacked)  y values are shown in the trace legend for all 
	traces.
	
	The y value for a lower-numbered trace is not included in the sum if that 
	trace is invisible, or has no data, or all of its data points are older or 
	newer than T, or the y value at T is NaN (not a number). If the lower-
	numbered has no value at T, but has values before and after T, the y 
	value to be included for the sum in that trace will be interpolated.

Oracle Coherence Monitor

14776: Alert provided for Departed Nodes
	The "DepartedNode" alert has been added to the Oracle Coherence 
	Monitor.  This alert is triggered whenever a node leaves the cluster for more 
	than the specified delay time (default = 60 seconds).  When a departed 
	node rejoins the cluster, the alert is cleared.
	
	This alert may be disabled/ enabled from the Alert Admininstration page.

15440: Node Location now shown in Departed Nodes display
	The Location identifier is now shown in the Cluster Stability Departed 
	Nodes table, along with the ip address and port.

Platform Support

15038: rtv_init.bat now writes temporary file to Application Data
	In previous versions, the rtv_init.bat script would write a temporary file to 
	%RTV_HOME%. This would cause the script to fail on some Windows
	systems due to permissions. This temporary file is now written to 
	%APPDATA%\.sl instead.

Version 5.2c1 Release Notes

Alerts

13682: Enhanced Alert Editing
	In the Display Builder, the way Alert objects are added and
	configured has changed. Instead of seeing alert objects as visible
	rectangles in the display, they will be shown in a new Alert dialog.
	When an alert objects is selected in the table its properties may be
	edited in the Object Properties dialog as before. A new alert object
	may be added by selecting its type from the dropdown list to the left
	of the Add button and clicking that button. 
	
	The tabular display of alert objects may be filtered by means of the
	dropdown lists at the top of the dialog. The filters are additive; to
	remove a given filter select "*" from the list. The Name filter accepts
	a regular expression string.

15206: Multi-state Alert added
	A multi state alert has been added to RTView. This alert allows you 
	to define the number of states for your alert. For each state, you can 
	set the condition that the input value must meet to trigger the alert. 
	The following conditions are supported:
	        Greater Than 
	        Greater Than or Equal To
	        Less Than
	        Less Than or Equal To
	        Equal
	        Not Equal
	        Increase
	        Increase Percent
	        Decrease
	        Decrease Percent
	        Net Change
	        Net Change Percent
	        In Range
	        Out of Range
	
	When your input value has met the condition for a defined alert state, 
	an alert will be generated using the alert state number as the 
	severity (ex, the severity for Alert State 1 will be 1, the severity for Alert 
	State 2 will be 2, etc).

15207: Alert Text can now be customized
	The alerts have been enhanced to allow you to customize the alert text. 
	The alert text is displayed in the Alert Text column of the alert 
	table and is used in the $alertText substitution available for alert 
	commands. You can specify a different alert text string for each alert 
	level. If no alert text is specified, RTView will output default text, 
	which is the same text that was used in previous releases.
	
	The following new properties have been added to the limits alert to 
	allow you to specify alert text:
	
	valueHighAlertText
	valueHighWarningText
	valueLowAlertText
	valueLowWarningText
	
	The following new properties have been added to the discrete alert 
	to allow you to specify alert text:
	
	valueHighAlertText
	valueLowAlertText
	valueMediumAlertText
	
	All of the alert substitutions that are available on the alertCommand 
	can also be used in the value*AlertText string except for $alertText 
	and $alertEmailBody. The following new alert substitutions have 
	been added for use in both the value*AlertText and the 
	alertCommand:
	
	
	   $alertLabel - A label indicating the alert type (discrete: High Alert, 
	Medium Alert, Low Alert limits: High Alert, High Warning, Low Alert, 
	Low Warning)
	   $alertCurValue - The current input value.
	   $alertCompValue - The value the current input value is being 
	compared to.

15213: File Browser Added to Alert Options Dialog
	In the Alert Definitions tab of the Display Builder Application Options
	dialog, when you click the Add button to add a new Alert Definition
	file, you will now be presented with a file selection dialog which you
	may use to browse to the file of your choice.

Builder

15142: Model height limit removed
	In previous releases of RTView, the background model size has been 
	limited to less than 2049x1537. This limitation has been removed.

15235: New live data display option for data attachments
	The Display Builder has been enhanced with an addtion to 
	the "attach/detach" popup menu. This menu is shown when you 
	right-click on a property in the Object Property dialog, or on a function 
	argument in the Edit Function dialog. If the property or function 
	argument is attached to data, you will be able to choose a new 
	menu item "Display Data" and invoke a free-standing dialog 
	containing a table displaying the data available from this attachment.
	
	You may invoke such a data display dialog for any data attachment; 
	only one dialog will be opened for each individual attachment. If you 
	close one of the dialogs it will be re-opened if you re-invoke a 
	display dialog for the same data attachment. All the dialogs will be 
	closed when you change displays.
	
	The dialogs display the text of the data attachment above the data 
	table, and an abbreviated form of it in their title bar, to help locating a 
	particular dialog if you have several open. They include two 
	checkboxes below the table: "Show Column Types" will display the 
	data type of each column below its name in the column header, 
	and "Insert New Rows" will set that flag on the data table.

Builder - Editing

15211: Function Dialog resizing constrained
	In the Display Builder, the Edit Function dialog could be resized so 
	small that the dialog's contents became unusable and the function 
	help text could become truncated. The dialog is now constrained not 
	to resize below a minimum size.

15218: Argument values properly retained when changing function type
	In the Display Builder Edit Function dialog, if you were editing a 
	function and changed its type to one with similar argument names, 
	the corresponding argument values were not correctly retained. For 
	most functions, literal argument values would be lost although data 
	attachments would be retained. For the Evaluate Expression As 
	Double/String functions, data attachments would be converted to 
	literal values when switching between those two types.
	
	To clarify the expected behavior when changing the type of a function: 
	if the new function type has the same argument names as the 
	previous one then all argument values (literal and attachment) will 
	be retained. The only exception is changing between Evaluate 
	Expression As Double/String and Evaluate Expression By Rows: in 
	this case only the expression will be retained.

15305: Support for sending multiple values from a multi-select listbox
	The list control object (obj_c1tlb) now supports selection of multiple list 
	items. To enable multiple selection, check the multiSelectFlag property in 
	the property sheet.
	
	If multiple list items are selected and if a variable is attached to the 
	control's varToSet property, the variable will be set to a string containing 
	the selected item values, separated by semicolons. For example, if the 
	selected item values in the list are Red and Blue, the variable value will 
	be set to Red;Blue. Likewise,  the control's selectedValue property can 
	be used to select multiple items by specifying a string with the values to 
	be selected separated by semicolons.
	
	LIMITATION: Since the semicolon character is used as a separator 
	between multiple values in the selectedValue property, and in the string 
	assigned to the varToSet variable, the list values themselves may not 
	contain semicolons in a list control whose multiSelectFlag property is 
	checked.

Builder - Options Dialogs

14877: Last global file entry can now be removed from list
	In the Globals tab of the Display Builder's Application Options
	dialog, if you had a single global file in the dialog's table and
	removed it, it would reappear when you pressed Apply. This has
	been fixed.

Common Server Support

15055: Notification provided of user login/out
	Two methods have been added to the GmsCustomUserManager
	class, named clientLogin and clientLogout.
	
	
	public void clientLogin(String userName,
	                        String role,
	                        String sessionID)
	
	In the display server and data server applications, this method is
	invoked when a client user logs in. There is a unique sessionID for
	each client login session.
	
	
	public void clientLogout(String userName,
	                         String role,
	                         String sessionID)
	
	In the display server and data server applications, this method is
	invoked when a client user logs out. There is a unique sessionID for
	each client login session.

15095: Data/Display Server & Historian available as Windows Services
	The Data Server, Display Server and Historian have been enhanced to 
	support running as Windows services. To install and start one of these 
	applications as a service, type the following in an initalized command 
	prompt:
	
	install_service appName -service:service_name -dir:startup_directory
	
	The following arguments are supported for install_service 
		appName - Required. Must be displayserver, dataserver or displayserver
		-service: - Required. Specify the name to use for the service. This 
			will show up as the name of the service in the Windows 
	               Services dialog. If the service name contains spaces, enclose 
	               the entire argument in quotes. For example, "-service:my service".
		-dir: - Required. Specify the full path to the directory where the 
			application should run. This should be the project directory 
			that contains all of the .rtv and configuration files for your 
			RTView application. If the directory contains spaces, enclose 
	               the entire argument in quotes. For example, "-dir:c:\my dir".
		-serviceout: - Optional. Specify the full path and file name for the 
			out log file. If not specified, the out log will be written
			to the directory specified with -dir and named appNamed_out.log.
		-serviceerr: - Optional. Specify the full path and file name for the 
			err log file. If not specified, the err log will be written
			to the directory specified with -dir and named appNamed_err.log.
		-overwritelogs - Optional. Overwrite the err and out logs each time the
			service restarts. If not specified, new data is appended to 
			the existing log files.
		-manualStart - Optional. Set the service startup type to manual. The
			service will still start when it is installed, but will not 
			automatically start on system startup. If not specified, the 
			service startup type will be auto.
	
	For example:
		install_service displayserver -service:MyService -dir:c:\myproject -serviceout:c:\logs\ds_out.log -serviceerr:c:\logs\ds_err.log
		
	Any other command line options will be passed into the application.
	
	Note that the service is run as a local system service. If you will be 
	using ODBC connections for the Historian or SQL data source, you 
	will need to set these as system data sources, not user data 
	sources.
	
	Note also that you cannot successfully install a service application if 
	RTView is being run off a networked drive. It must be installed on your 
	local system.
	
	To stop and uninstall one of these service applications, type the following 
	in an initialized command prompt:
	
	uninstall_service appName -service:service_name
	
	Once a service is installed, you can start, stop and configure it in the 
	Windows Services dialog.
	
	These application are available as windows services on Windows XP, 
	Windows 2003 Server and Windows Vista only. They are not supported on 64-bit systems.
	
	These services run using JavaService version 2.0.10, which is licensed 
	under the Lesser GPL and is available for download from 
	http://forge.objectweb.org/projects/javaservice/.

15170: High Availability and Load Balancing support for RTView servlet
	Improvements were made to better support High Availability and 
	Load Balancing for RTView servlets. 
	
	RTView provides two servlets for use in web deployments. The 
	rtvdata servlet provides a Viewer client access to the Data Server. 
	The rtvdisplay servlet provides the Thin Client with access to the 
	Display Server. In this release, the servlets have been enhanced to 
	support high availability.
	
	High availability is achieved by deploying multiple redundant copies 
	of the servlet in a web server/app server environment that supports 
	clustering and load-balancing/failover between redundant servlets. 
	Servlet clustering allows multiple copies of a servlet, each running 
	in a separate app server, to replicate their internal state information. 
	Most app servers, such as Tomcat 6.0, support clustering. Load-
	balancing/failover maps a URL from a client request to one of the 
	redundant servlets. A servlet is chosen so that the client requests 
	are distributed evenly among the currently available servlets. In the 
	event of a servlet failure, a client is switched from a failed servlet to a 
	healthy servlet. There are several types of load balancers, including 
	software or hardware devices, or specialized DNS configurations. 
	See the High Availability Section under Deployment in the 
	documentation for more details about how to configure these 
	systems. The documentation provides general examples of several 
	HA deployments and specific examples of HA servlet deployments 
	using Tomcat 6.0 as the app server and Apache httpd 2.2.9 as the 
	web server and load-balancer.

Customization

15171: Flex Custom Example with Tabular Data added
	Another example of a custom fx object has been added to the 
	custom/fxsimple directory. It accepts tabular data from RTView and 
	displays it in a grid. The source file for the example is fxgrid.mxml.

15250: Resource Bundle shared by all Custom Data Adapters
	Previously only a single custom data adapter could be used in a
	RTView application because localization resources were not shared
	between custom data adapters.  This has been corrected.

15281: New custom data adapter option to set update interval
	Previously we allowed only "Once Only" and update on every RTView update 
	interval for custom data sources.  Support has been added for polling on 
	every ds-specific interval or data-attachment interval.

15282: Custom data adapters cannot set options before initialization
	This task adds support for command-line argument processing and 
	applet parameter processing to the custom data adapter API.  
	Command-line arguments and applet parameters are processed the 
	same way as options read from the Ds Options file, through the method 
	GmsRtViewDsAdapter.applyDsOption(), with only minor exceptions as 
	described below.
	
	In addition, the initialization of custom data adapter properties has been 
	split into two parts, so that an adapter can use information passed-in 
	from command-line options, applet parameters, or entries in the Ds 
	Option file when setting most of the custom data adapter properties.
	
	Option Processing
	
	All valid options, whether passed from the command-line, specified as 
	applet parameters, or read from the Ds Options file, are passed to the 
	method GmsRtViewDsAdapter.applyDsOption(String name, String value) 
	during application initialization.  The option name and value are provided 
	to the adapter as strings.
	
	For more details about processing options, please refer to the 
	description in the Customization / Custom Data Adapter / Data Source 
	Options / Accessing DS Options section of the RTView User 
	Guide.
	
	Command-Line Options
	
	Command-line options should be specified using the following format:
	
		-<dskey>option:<name>=<value>
	
	where <dskey> is the dskey for the custom data adapter, 
	<name> is the option name, and <value> is the option value.
	
	The following example shows how to pass a command-line argument to 
	a custom data adapter.  In this example, the dskey for the custom data 
	adapter is ds1, the option name is option1, and the option value is 
	value1.
	
		run_viewer customds:Ds1 ds1option:option1=value1
	
	Command-line options are processed after options read from the Ds 
	Options file, so a custom data adapter can use command-line options to 
	override options previously read from the DS Options file.
	
	Unlike Ds Options, options passed from the command-line do not need 
	to be defined as fields in the Ds Options exemplar in order to be passed 
	to the applyDsOption method.  All options which match the format shown 
	above will be passed to the applyDsOption method during initialization.
	
	This allows a custom data adapter to accept options which control 
	program execution, yet which are not saved in the Ds Options file or 
	displayed in the Ds Options dialog in the builder.  For example, a custom 
	data adapter may define an option which specifies the name of the 
	resource bundle to use for localization, so that different localization files 
	can be tested without any code changes.
	
	
	Applet Parameters
	
	Options may be passed to applets as applet parameters.  When passed 
	using the HTML <param> element, applet parameter options should be 
	specified using the following format:
	
		<param NAME=<dskey>option:<name> VALUE=<value>
	
	When passed inside the HTML <embed> tag, applet parameter options 
	should be specified using the following format:
	
		<embed & <dskey>option:<name>=<value> & >
	
	where <dskey> is the dskey for the custom data adapter, 
	<name> is the option name, and <value> is the option value.
	
	The following example shows the HTML to pass an applet parameter to 
	a custom data adapter.  In this example, the dskey for the custom data 
	adapter is ds1, the option name is option1, and the option value is 
	value1.  To pass an option in the <param> element:
	
		<param NAME=ds1option:option1 VALUE=value1>
	
	and if the parameter is passed in the <embed> tag, the HTML would look
	like this:
	
		<embed type=& code=& ARCHIVE=& ds1option:option1=value1>
	
	Applet parameter options are processed after options read from the Ds 
	Options file, so a custom data adapter can use applet parameter options 
	to override options previously read from the DS Options file.
	
	Applet parameter option names must match the names of fields in the 
	Ds Options object.  Unlike command-line options, applet parameter 
	options cannot be arbitrary.  If the name of an applet parameter option is 
	not recognized, the parameter is ignored.
	
	
	Data Adapter Properties
	
	To support the use of command-line options and applet parameters in 
	the setup and configuration of a custom data adapter, the procedure for 
	initializing the data adapter properties has been changed.
	
	The method GmsRtViewDs.initDsProperties(GmsRtViewDsProperties) 
	has been replaced by two methods, one to initialize the base properties 
	for the adapter, and the other to initialize the control properties for the 
	adapter.
	
	NOTE: This change requires existing custom data adapters to be 
	modified to use the new property initialization methods in the 
	GmsRtViewDs class.  Data adapters that are not modified will generate 
	run-time exceptions when used with the new com.sl.gmsjrtviewds library.
	
	
	The adapter base properties are initialized in the GmsRtViewDs 
	constructor, before any option processing is performed.  Because of this, 
	command-line options, applet parameter options, and Ds Option file 
	options are not available when the base properties are initialized.
	
	The method GmsRtViewDs.initDsBaseProperties(GmsRtViewDsBaseProperties) is 
	used to initialize the adapter base properties.  The base properties 
	include the dskey, the adapter class name, the adapter description, and 
	the option file name.
	
	The adapter control properties are initialized after all option processing 
	has been performed.  The method GmsRtViewDs.initDsControlProperties(GmsRtViewDsControlProperties) 
	is used to initialize the adapter control properties.  The control properties 
	include all properties that were not specified as base properties above.
	
	For examples of the new property initialization methods, please refer to 
	the following custom data adapter examples: myeventds, mypolledds, 
	and mypolledds2.

15339: Custom Data Source named field attributes no longer collide
	In previous versions, custom data source  named user defined fields added 
	by the addField method may have their attributes ( UIState 
	(DialogFieldState), validity (DataFieldValidity)) modified by other custom 
	data sources that define fields with the same name. This is no longer the 
	case.

Data Historian

15148: High Availability support added for Historian
	For higher availability, multiple Historians can be assigned to a 
	server group to support failover between the servers. At any time, 
	one historian in the group can be the primary and the other group 
	members are standbys. Only the primary member writes to the 
	database. 
	
	Please note that this feature is intended to be used with a database 
	system that also supports redundancy (through mirroring, 
	clustering, or other techniques) so that any historian in the group 
	can update the same virtual database.
	
	Each group member is assigned a port number and a priority. Each 
	member monitors the status of the others in the group, using a 
	socket connection on the assigned ports. The member with the 
	highest priority is elected as the primary. If the primary member fails, 
	is shut down, or loses its connection to the database, the standby 
	member with the highest priority becomes the new primary. In the 
	event of a tie in priorities, the member which was started first 
	becomes the primary. Each historian in the group should be 
	configured with the same set of data configuration files, retention 
	options, data source options, etc.
	
	There is a new tab labeled Server Group for configuring the 
	Historian's group options. By default, no server group is defined. To 
	define a server group:
	
	1. Select a port number on which this historian will accept 
	connections from other historians in the group. The default is 3380.
	
	2. Choose a priority for this historian. The default is 1. The online 
	historian with the highest priority will become the primary historian, 
	and will update the database.
	
	3. For each other historian in the group, enter the hostname and port 
	in the 'Member' text field. 
	
	4. Save the configuration.
	
	5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 for the other historians in the group.
	
	The group options can also be specified on the command line as 
	follows:
	
		-group_priority:N
		-group_port:N
		-group_member:host:port
	
	For example, with the following options the historian will have a 
	priority of 2, will listen on port 3399, and will join a group that 
	contains a historian on the host named kiwi using port 5566:
	
		run_historian -group_priority:2 -group_port:3399 -group_member:kiwi:5566
	
	The following options start the historian with a priority of 2 and the 
	group also contains the historian on kiwi. Both historians use the 
	default port of 3380:
	
		run_historian -group_priority:2 -group_member:kiwi
	
	Note that a group priority >= 0 must be specified or the historian will 
	not join the group.
	
	Note that replication of internal historian state between redundant 
	servers is not yet supported.
	
	If the historian belongs to a group, the group status is shown in a 
	table on the Server Group tab. The table has one row for the local 
	historian plus one row for each other member in the group. The 
	table has the following columns:
	
	1) Member: The name of the member, which is "local" for the current 
	copy of the historian, and the host:port configured for each of the 
	other group members.
	
	2) Status: One of the following values:
	  primary - member is currently the primary historian server
	  standby - member is running and has a database connection, but 
	is lower priority than the primary
	  no service - member is running but has no database connection 
	(so it can't become the primary)
	  no connection - the local historian can't establish a connection to 
	this member
	
	3) Priority: The priority configured for the member.
	
	4) Start Time: The time that the member was started. This is used to 
	resolve ties: if there is a tie among the standby members with the 
	highest priority, the member with the earliest start time is selected 
	as primary.
	
	For JMX monitoring, two boolean attributes have been added to the 
	historian's MBean:
	
	PrimaryServer : true if the historian is the primary server in its group, 
	or if it does not belong to a group.
	
	ConnectedToDatabase: true if the historian is connected to its 
	historical databse.

Data Sources

15244: Unparseable Date Exception in Splunk Datasource (Linux/Japanese)
	When connecting to Splunk, an unparseable date exception was
	thrown on Japanese Linux machines in the Tokyo time zone.  This
	error has been fixed.

15331: Typo in launcher prevented Splunk jars being correctly added
	In 5.1c1 the Splunk Data Adapter was not loaded automatically when you 
	started RTView from the command line, but required that you add jaxen-
	core.jar to the RTV_USERPATH. This has been fixed, so that Splunk now 
	automatically is included if you are licensed to use Splunk.

Cache Data Source

14992: New mechanism to initialize table schema
	In the Cache Data Source, the Table Cache object (obj_cache_table) has 
	been enhanced with a new property, "schemaTable". This property may 
	be used to provide information about the structure of the data that will be 
	stored in the cache before that data is actually available. This property 
	may be attached to any data source that will provide the structure of a 
	table, such as an SQL query or an XML file. (Only the table structure will 
	be used from this attachment; if there is any row data it will be ignored.)
	
	Before the data becomes available, the cache Current and History tables
	will be initialized from the schema table and the Attach To Cache Data 
	dialog will show the columns found there. After the data is available, the 
	cache tables will contain the columns found in the schema table plus 
	any additional columns found in the data. 
	
	In addition, if there is a difference between the data types of the columns 
	defined in the schema and the types found in the actual data, the 
	schema types will be used, and the incoming data will be converted.
	
	Note that if the "timestampColumnName" property is also specified, a 
	timestamp column will be added to the schema table (if it is not already 
	there) as well as to the data.

15214: Cache objects can now be used in history config files
	It is now possible to use Cache objects in history configuration files. 
	Previously it was not possible to set the historyTableName property on a 
	cache object.  Now you can do this, making it  possible to use a single .rtv 
	file for both cache configuration and historian configuration.
	
	Limitation: Although you must enter a name in historyTableName for the 
	object's data attachment to be used in the history definition, this name will 
	be ignored for scalar cache objects (obj_cache_double.rtv).  Data from a 
	scalar cache defintion will be safed to the HISTORY table.

15248: Table with filtered cache no longer has incorrect data
	In previous versions, a reference to an RTView cache that included a filter 
	would sometimes transfer all data rows instead of the rows specific to the 
	filter. The result would be additional points being plotted in a trend chart or 
	shown in a table. This problem has been fixed and filtered references to 
	cached data work as expected.

15253: Data not used by filtered attachment won't cause update
	Filtering of RTView Cache data has been optimized so that a reference to a 
	cache using a filter only transfers the specific rows that have been recently 
	added to the cache.  Previously rows would be transferred whenever any 
	row in the cache changed.

SQL Data Source

14400: Built-in database RTViewDs provides SQL connection information
	The SQL Data Adapter has been enhanced to provide a built-in database 
	name, "RTViewDs", with two tables: Connections and Keys.  The 
	Connections table provides detailed information about each database 
	connection and its status. The Keys table provides detailed timing and 
	count information about each unique data attachment.

15263: LONG datatype for DB2 supported in SQL Datasource
	The RTView Historian when used with DB2 will now correctly create
	tables with "long" values as BIGINT values for table columns that
	are defined as a LONG type. Previous versions incorrectly limited
	the precision to INTEGER type.

15318: Blank SQL queries no longer report -1 rows to console
	The SQL Data Adapter now recognizes query strings of zero 
	length and does not try to execute them or report query times.
	Previously, a report of -1 rows returned would be continuously 
	printed. This problem has been fixed.

TIBCO Hawk Data Source

15239: New option to disable cache/merge of Hawk data rows
	The TIBCO Hawk data source has been enhanced to support a new 
	command line option, -hawknocache. This option controls the way that 
	data updates are handled. By default, data attachments to multiple 
	agents return an entire table with a row for each agent on each data 
	update, even if only one row changed. With the -hawknocache option, the 
	initial update contains all of the rows, but each subsequent update only 
	includes the rows that have changed. This is useful when using Hawk 
	data attachments as input to the cache data source or to the Historian.
	
	When this option is specified on the command line for the Display 
	Builder or Configuration Utility, it will be included in HAWKOPTIONS.ini if 
	the application options are saved.

Development and Build

15294: Upgrade to Tomcat 6.0
	The Tomcat server that is packaged with RTView has been upgraded to
	version 6.0.18.

Display Server

15228: List box and combo box inside composite objects no longer empty
	In release 5.0 and 5.1, list and combo boxes contained in a 
	composite object and configured with a fixed set of list items (not 
	attached to data) were shown as empty in the thin client. This is 
	fixed.

15233: Multi-command on object in composite no longer causes exception
	The Display Server will no longer throw a class cast exception if a 
	multi-command is executed from an object within a composite 
	object.

15264: executeOnLostFocusFlag errors in thin client fixed
	The executeOnLostFocusFlag feature of the text edit control caused
	the following problems in the thin client, in the previous release.
	Both problems are fixed in this release.
	
	1. If a text field with executeOnLostFocusFlag has focus, and the
	user clicks on another object in the display (a button, say), only the
	text field's action is executed. The other object's action is not
	executed unless the user clicks on it again.
	
	2. In Firefox 2.0 only, if a text field with executeOnLostFocusFlag has
	focus and the user clicks on a link to open another display (in the
	left-hand frame of the default thin client page) the page displays the
	message "ERROR: no response from .../xmlreq.jsp".  Afterwards,
	Firefox is sometimes unresponsive and must be closed. Firefox 3
	and IE are not affected by this problem.

15265: Export to EXCEL failure in IE for long url has been fixed
	In prior releases, the thin client "Export Table to Excel/Html" feature would 
	sometimes fail in Internet Explorer if many substitutions were set on the 
	display, resulting in a long URL for the export request. This is fixed.

15266: Incorrect drilll down behavior from control objects fixed
	In release 5.0 and 5.1, if a control object is configured to set a 
	variable and also to perform a drill down, then in the thin client only 
	the set variable action is performed when the control is activated, the 
	drill down is not. This problem is fixed.

15360: Runtime changes to table filterProperties no longer delayed
	In the previous release, if substitutions or local variables were used in a 
	table's filterProperties, changes made to the substitution or variable value 
	sometimes did not take effect until the next refresh in the thin client. This 
	problem has been fixed.

Drill Down

15347: Current Window drill down lags in performance in display server
	The performance of the thin client when performing a drilldown in the 
	current window to a display containing a table with many cells has been 
	improved.
	
	Performance of large tables may still be sluggish with older browser 
	versions. For best performance, use Firefox version 3 or Internet 
	Explorer version 7.

Functions

15208: Functions within expressions now get new argument values
	There was a problem with the Evaluate Expression functions such 
	that if the expression used functions, its result would not be updated 
	after the first time values were given to its variables, but would 
	continue to return the result calculated from the first set of variables it 
	received. (New values would be given to the variables either as 
	incoming data changed, or as the same expression was applied to 
	successive rows of a table.) This has been fixed.

15234: Conditional expression function added to expression evaluator
	In the Display Builder, the Evaluate Expression family of functions
	have been enhanced with a new built-in function, condExpr, which
	evaluates conditional expressions. The function takes three
	arguments, an expression and two values. It evaluates the
	expression and if it is true it returns the first of the two values, else it
	returns the second. The expression is true if it evaluates to "1", "1.0",
	or "true" (case independent).
	
	As an example, consider the expression condExpr(%x > %y, "greater", "less"). 
	If the value given to variable x is greater than the value given to
	variable y, the function will return the string "greater", else it will
	return the string "less".

15236: Better error handling for expression with no data available
	Previously, if the Evaluate Expression As Double or Evaluate 
	Expression As String functions had an argument attached to data, the 
	expression was expecting a numeric argument, and the data 
	was not available from the data source, the function would would 
	sometimes display the misleading message "Expression is 
	invalid". The functions now distinguish between missing data and 
	an actual invalid expression by attempting to evaluate the 
	expression with numeric zero values substituted for the missing 
	data, and should only display that message when the expression is 
	in fact invalid.

15293: New "Buff Table Rows" function
	A function named 'Buffer Table Rows' has been added.  It takes a table 
	as an argument, and on each update it appends all the rows from the 
	input table to the result table, which it returns. Another argument 
	specifies the maximum number of rows that should be kept in the result 
	table. Rows are removed from the top of the result table, if necessary, to 
	maintain that limit.
	
	The 'Buffer Table Rows'  function can also be useful in the following 
	situation: RTView does not update a function immediately when one of 
	its arguments is set. Instead, the update is briefly deferred to allow time 
	for the other arguments to be set also. This improves performance but 
	can result in lost (overwritten) argument values if the arguments are 
	updated asynchronously and rapidly (from a high speed event data 
	source, for example). In most cases this is not important since only the 
	last (most recent) argument value is required. But if a function F needs 
	all argument values the Buffer Table Rows function can be used to store 
	all the rows received from a table argument until function F is updated. 
	So F would be attached to the result of a Buffer Table Rows function, 
	which would in turn be attached to the data source that updates the table. 
	Once F has been updated, he function data source will clear all rows in 
	the buffer table kept by the Buffer Table Rows function.
	
	At most one function should be attached to the result of any given 
	Buffer Table Rows function. As described above, the buffer will be 
	cleared when the function that is attached to the Buffer Table Rows 
	result is updated. So if multiple functions need to buffer the same 
	input data, a Buffer Table Rows function should be created for each.

15301: Expressions no longer fail if one %var is a substring of another
	In the Display Builder, when creating an Evaluate Expression As 
	Double/String function, if the variable names are chosen such that 
	one name is a substring of another, the function would not evaluate 
	correctly. This has been fixed.

15309: Exception if Replacement Values argument badly formed fixed
	Previously, a badly formed Replacement Values argument in a Replace 
	Value function would cause an exception. This is no longer the case.
	
	To be well formed, the  Replacement Values argument should be a string 
	that contains pairs of values and replacement values separated by :'s. If any 
	of the values or replacement values specified in Replacement Values 
	contains a space or a colon, it must be enclosed in single quotes.   For 
	example if Replacement Values contains 'Windows 2000':win2k 'Windows 
	NT':winnt and Value is Windows NT, winnt will be returned.

15329: Function loops created at runtime by parameter changes detected
	The function data source has been improved to detect function loops 
	created at runtime by changing substitutions that affect function arguments.

General

15310: Menu bar when EMS Manager run from cmd prompt removed
	In previous releases, the TIBCO EMS Manager came up with a menu bar 
	when started from the command line, but without a menu bar when started 
	from the Windows start menu. This has been fixed so that the menu bars 
	are not showing when the TIBCO EMS Manager is started from the 
	command line.

15316: New JMX MBeans for RTView status and function statistics
	A set of JMX Mbeans has been added to RTView to provide run-time 
	information about RTView status.  
	
	The MBean RTView:name=Manager provides the application name, 
	along with other useful information.
	
	The MBean RTView:name=DataServerConnections provides a table 
	containing one row for each named Data Server connection showing the 
	status of that connection.
	
	The MBean RTView:name=FunctionStatistics contains one row for each 
	defined function, showing the panel in which it is defined and detailed 
	timing and usage statistics
	
	NOTE: If an RTView client application is connected to a Data Server, 
	starting the application with -dsenable:jmx will provide a way to access 
	the local MBeans in the client, by making a data attachment to these 
	MBeans with the Data Server set to <none>.

GmsTabularData

15308: Fix for crash while serializing GmsTabularData
	A problem has been fixed which sometimes caused the data server to throw 
	an array bounds exception or null pointer exception while it was serializing a 
	GmsTabularData object to send to a client.

Licensing

15274: Vista licensing update
	PINs generated on Vista are now accurate.

Object Library

11693: Label palette enhanced
	The label palette has been enhanced. The following objects have 
	been replaced by general objects:
		obj_text03
		obj_label09
		obj_label09s
		obj_label12
	
	Existing displays that use these objects will automatically be 
	converted to use the corresponding general object instead. There 
	may be a small shift in the location of the text in these objects when 
	they are converted to the general objects. Object grids using these 
	objects will also automatically be converted to use the 
	corresponding general objects and may show a small shift in the 
	object layout.
	
	The following objects have been enhanced:
		obj_label05
		obj_label05s
		obj_label11
		obj_label11s
	
	These objects have been enhanced to support several new 
	properties, such as gradients, rounded corners, and drop shadows. 
	They have also been enhanced to support objWidth and objHeight, 
	which allows better scaling of these objects. The fieldWidth property 
	has been converted to objWidth. Existing displays will automatically 
	be converted to use the new property. The text position and 
	bgEdgeWidth will adjust slightly on existing displays that use these 
	objects.
	
	The labelWidth property on obj_label11 and obj_label11s must now 
	be less than 75% of the objWidth. If it is larger, the label portion of 
	the object will be drawn as 75% of the objWidth.
	
	The following new properties are available on these objects:
	
		valueHighAlarmEnabledFlag * obj_label05 only
		valueHighWarningEnabledFlag  * obj_label05 only
		bgBorderFlag
		bgColor
		bgEdgeWidth
		bgGradientColor2
		bgGradientMode
		bgRaisedFlag
		bgRoundness
		bgShadowFlag
		bgStyle
		valueTextAlignX
		valueTextPosY
		labelBgColor
		labelTextAlignX
		labelTextPosY
		labelBgGradientMode
		labelBgGradientColor2
	
	
	
	The following new objects have been added to the label palette:
	
		obj_vulabel01 
		obj_vulabel02
	
	These objects are meant to replace obj_label06 and obj_label14 
	which were deprecated. They do not replace the old labels in 
	displays. The old labels are still available for existing displays, but 
	are not on the palette. These objects support all of the properties 
	listed above for obj_label05 and obj_labell11, except for 
	valueHighAlarmEnabledFlag and vlaueHighWarningFlag. In addition,
	they support the vuMeterMinWidth property which allows you to 
	specify the minimum width for the vumeter. By default, the vumeter is 
	1/3 of the width of the value area. If a value larger than 1/3 of the 
	width of the value area is specified for vuMeterMinWidth, the vumeter 
	will use that width instead. The vumeter will not be drawn larger and 
	2/3 the width of the value area. The valueTextAlignX property for these 
	objects aligns the text in the space between the vumeter and the 
	edge of the object.
	
	The following objects have been deprecated. They are still available 
	for existing displays, but have been removed from the palette:
	
	
		obj_label08
		obj_label06
		obj_label14
		obj_digital_2_med
		obj_digital_3_smll
		obj_pricebox
		obj_label01
		obj_label02
		obj_label03
		obj_label04
		obj_drumlabel01
		obj_drumlabel02	
		
	Note that the object grid previously used obj_label01 if nothing was 
	specified for the iconProperties string. Since that object has been 
	deprecated, the object grid now uses obj_circ2d_ilvx_ra4 as its 
	default object.

15191: visFlag property now respects 0.0 as dbl or string
	In the Display Builder, if the visFlag property of an object is attached 
	to a data source (e.g. a function) which supplies a double value of 
	0.0 or a string value of "0.0", the object remained visible. This has 
	been corrected.

15221: General objects that support a label and a valueString added
	Two new objects have been added to the general palette,
	obj_rect_ilvs and obj_circ2d_ilvs, that support a label and a value
	string. These objects behave just like obj_rect_ilv and
	obj_circ2d_ilv, except that they have valueString instead of value.
	The valueFormat and valueDivisor properties are not supported on
	this object as the valueString property takes a string.

15267: Add bgBorderColor to general objects, tables, graphs + composite
	A new property bgBorderColor has been added to all of the objects on
	the Tables, Graphs, Labels and Composite tabs of the Object
	Palette. It has also been added to the m_basemodel background
	model and to the rectangular objects in the General tab of the Object
	Palette. The circular objects on the General tab already supported
	this feature with a property named bgEdgeColor which has been renamed to bgBorderColor. 
	
	This property sets the color of the edge of the object. Objects in
	existing displays will have a dark grey (color 16) bgBorderColor.

Bar Charts

15333: New scrollbarStartAtMaxFlag  property for starting knob position
	The bar graph has a new property named scrollbarStartAtMaxFlag. This 
	property can be used to control the initial position of the graph's scrollbar 
	knob. 
	
	If scrollbarStartAtMaxFlag is checked, the scrollbar knob will initially be 
	positioned so that the bar corresponding to the last row in valueTable is 
	visible. On a bar graph with vertical bars, this means that the knob will be 
	in its rightmost position, while on a bar graph with horizontal bars the 
	knob will be in its bottommost position.  If scrollbarStartAtMaxFlag is 
	unchecked (the default) the knob will be in its leftmost (topmost) position, 
	so that the bar for the first row in valueTable is visible.
	
	Regardless of the value of the scrollbarStartAtMaxFlag property, if the 
	scrollbar knob is dragged to the left or right (or top or bottom) edge, it will 
	'stick' in that position if the number of rows in valueTable changes, and 
	accordingly show either the bar for the first or last row in valueTable.

Composite Object

15196: Button control in composite no longer needs to be pressed twice
	In previous releases, if a control outside of a composite object had 
	focus, it would take 2 mouse clicks to activate a control inside a 
	composite. This has been fixed.

15210: Composite obj keeps properties if rtvName is a local variable.
	In previous releases, if the rtvName property of a composite was 
	attached to data, the standard composite properties would use their 
	default values even if they had been set to other values. This has been fixed.

15224: List boxes do not execute action command
	In release 5.0 and 5.1 the command for a list box contained in a 
	composite object was not executed. This is fixed.

15241: Composite object enhanced with option to be non-opaque
	The composite object has been enhanced with a new property, 
	bgOpaqueFlag. This property allows you to set the both the background 
	rectangle and the background model in the composite display to be opaque 
	or transparent. When deselected, neither the composite background nor the 
	model background will be drawn. The model background is only affected if 
	the default background model is used. Otherwise, the bgOpaqueFlag will 
	only affect the background rectangle.
	
	Double-buffering is disabled in the composite display when the 
	bgOpaqueFlag is off, so some displays may flicker when updating.

Control Objects

11907: Calendar widgets added
	A new date chooser control (obj_c1datechooser) has been added to
	the Controls tab of the Object Palette to allow users to specify dates
	and times and set these either in an action command or to a local 
	variable. The date chooser is on the controls palette. You can either 
	enter a date by typing into the text field, or you can click the calendar 
	button to popup the calendar to select a date.
	
	Like the other controls, the date chooser is disabled in the main
	window of the Display Builder to enable editing.
	
	Similar to the text edit controls, the date chooser has a
	selectedValue field to specify the initial date value and a varToSet
	field to specify a local var to set. The local var gets set and the
	actionCommand gets executed when either a date is typed in, then
	the user presses enter or clicks out of the field, or if the user selects
	a date from the popup calendar. 
	
	If a date is specified in the date field, it will be used to set the initial
	date (and time if specified) in the calendar. If no date is specified in
	the date field, the popup calendar will use the current date and time.
	
	The date chooser has a dateFormat field to specify the format to be
	used. If no dateFormat is specified, a locale dependant format is
	used. This format controls 2 things. First, it controls the format in
	which you must enter a date if you type it into the field. Second, it
	controls the format of the output to a local var or action command.
	You can see the dateFormat in the tooltip if you hover the mouse 
	over the text field. The dateFormat should be specified using the
	format specifiers from the SimpleDateFormat class. The following
	format specifiers are not supported for the Display Server:
	
		G, w, W, D, F, E, k, K, S, z, Z
	
	In the java version, the text entry field validates the date string as you
	enter it. It is very strict about allowing only dates in the format
	specified. In the Display Server version, the parsing is more flexible,
	but not guaranteed unless the date entered is in the same format as
	the dateFormat. No validation is done in the text entry field in the
	Display Server. 
	
	Backslashes (\) are not supported in dateFormats.
	
	Since the dateFormat controls both the input and the output of the
	date chooser, information not included in the dateFormat will be
	lost. For example, if the date format is MMMM dd, yyyy (ex January 01,
	2000), and the timeEntryEnabledFlag is on, even if you enter a time,
	it will not be stored since it is not included in the dateFormat. If you
	specify a dateFormat including the time such as MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm,
	the seconds you enter will be lost and if you specified a date in the
	PM, it will be stored in the AM since that is the default and am/pm
	was not included in the dateFormat.
	
	The timeEntryEnabledFlag toggles the visibility of the Time field in
	the popup calendar. Times entered into this field must be in the
	following format: hh:mm:ss a. When the timeEntryEnabledFlag is
	on, an OK and Cancel button are added to the calendar, so you can
	select a date and enter a time before closing the popup. If the 
	timeEntryEnabledFlag is off, the popup calendar closes when you
	select a date.
	
	The maximumDate and minimumDate properties control the
	selectable dates in the popup calendar. Dates before the
	minimumDate will be disabled and dates after the maximumDate
	will be disabled. It is recommended that you enter an initial date in
	the value range when using these properties so the user will not
	have to navigate to a valid date.
	
	The date chooser object is localized as follows:
	1. The Time field, and OK and Cancel buttons are localized by SL.
	Currently, only English and Japanese are available.
	2. In the Display Builder, Display Viewer and Display Viewer Applet,
	the month and day names will use the language settings on the
	client system.
	3. In the Display Server, the month and day names can be localized
	by replacing the date.js file in the Display Servlet with a localized
	version. To do this, go to servlets\rtvdisplay in your RTView
	installation. Extract the appropriate date*.js file from datejs_loc.zip
	for your language. Rename this file to date.js in the rtvdisplay
	directory and rebuild the Display Servlet war file. The default date.js
	is a copy of date-en-US.js from the datejs_loc.zip file.
	
	The java version of the date chooser control uses JCalendar 1.3.2
	which is distributed under Lesser GPL and can be downloaded
	from www.toedter.com/en/jcalendar. 
	
	The Display Server version of the date chooser control uses the
	Datejs date library for parsing and formatting dates and times. The
	Datejs library subclasses the standard javascript Date object. If you
	embed a display with the date chooser control inside your javascript
	application, it may pickup the Datejs date class instead of the
	standard date class. The Datejs library is distributed under the MIT
	License and can be downloaded at http://www.datejs.com.

15034: Added executeOnKeystrokeFlag to text edit & text area controls
	A property named executeOnKeystrokeFlag has been added to the text edit 
	and text area controls. If checked, each keystroke that modifies the text in the 
	control will set the control's varToSet variable and execute its 
	actionCommand, if any, using the modified text string.
	
	This feature is supported in all deployments. In a thin client deployment, 
	there may be a delays between the keystroke and the response, depending 
	on the speed of the network and server.

15304: Password Control has been added to the Controls palette
	A password field has been added to the Controls tab of the object palette. 
	This object works just like a text field, except that instead of displaying the 
	entered text, it displays asterisks (*). The properties on this object are the 
	same as the properties on the Text Edit control.

Fx Bar Chart

15079: New barShape "3D Rectangle" added
	A new bar shape has been added to the Fx Bar graph. Named 3D 
	Rectangle and found under barShape on the Object Properties grid, 
	this shapes depth can be set using the draw3dDepth setting under 
	Layouts. 
	
	Note that the Layouts draw3dFlag setting is ignored when using the 
	3D Rectangle bar shape.

15101: Fx Bar Animation added
	Transition effects have now been added to the Fx Bar graph to 
	animate the display of data as it both appears and disappears from 
	the chart. Various settings have been added to help in the control of 
	these animations.
	
	Where to find them:
	On the Object Properties grid under the "Transitions" heading on the 
	Object Properties 
	
	barEntranceDuration: The length of time in milliseconds that the 
	transition animation takes to display incoming data.
	
	barExitDuration: The length of time in milliseconds that the transition 
	animation takes to hide data prior to new data being displayed.
	
	barEntranceTrigger: Determines whether the animation will be 
	displayed with each data update, or only when the chart is initially 
	displayed.
	
	barExitTrigger: Determines whether the animation will be displayed 
	with each data update, or only when the chart is initially displayed.
	
	barEntranceType: The type of animation in effect when data is being 
	displayed: 
	None, Interpolate, Zoom Series, Zoom Chart, Slide Left, Slide Right, 
	Slide Up, Slide Down, Wipe Left, Wipe Right, Wipe Up, Wipe Down.
	
	barExitType: The type of animation in effect when data is being 
	hidden: 
	None, Zoom Series, Zoom Chart, Slide Left, Slide Right, Slide Up, 
	Slide Down, Wipe Left, Wipe Right, Wipe Up, Wipe Down.

Fx Trend Chart

14890: Line style, mark color/style, and alarm properties support added
	The Fx trend graph now supports the same alarm properties as 
	supported in obj_trendgraph02. 
	
	Also, the following trace properties have been added to the Fx trend 
	graph:
	
		traceNLineStyle
		traceNMarkStyle
		traceNMarkColor
		markDefaultSize
	
	where N is a trace number.
	
	For each of the new properties, the property values and 
	corresponding behavior is the same as in obj_trendgraph02, with 
	the following additions: If an alarm mark color is set to 'Default', the 
	marks will be drawn in the correpsonding alarm trace color. If an 
	alarm trace color is set to 'Default', the trace color for the 
	corresponding trace will be used.

14938: y-Axis values now at end points when yValueMin does not equal 0
	Previously, if the yValueMin of the FX Trend Graph was any value other than 
	0, the numbers displayed on the y-axis would not begin at the lowest value 
	(yValueMin) and end at the highest value (yValueMax). The axis range would 
	be accurate, but the numbers printed along it were not at the end points.
	
	This has been fixed.

Pie Charts

14765: Flex Pie Chart Added
	A new Fx Pie Graph object has been added. It supports much of the 
	functionality of the standard Pie Graph and adds some additional 
	functionality.
	
	Features Added:
	
	Transitions - various entrance and exit transition effects can be set. They 
	are as follows:
	
	exitType offers various animation effects which alter how older data is 
	removed from view. These include, "Zoom Series", "Zoom Chart",  "Slide 
	Left", "Slide Right", "Slide Up", "Slide Down", "Wipe Left", "Wipe Right", 
	"Wipe Up", "Wipe Down".  The default is "None".
	
	entranceType  same as above, but with the addition of the "Interpolate" 
	effect. This property determines how new data is displayed on the chart.
	
	exitDuration - this sets the duration of the Exit animation in milliseconds.
	
	entranceType - this sets the duration of the Entrance animation in 
	milliseconds.
	
	entranceTrigger -> (Once, On Update) Default Once - this sets whether 
	the Entrance animation happens only on initial display or at every data 
	update
	
	exitTrigger -> (Once, On Update) Default Once - this sets whether the Exit 
	animation happens only when leaving the current data set being viewed 
	(Once) or every time the current data set is updated (On Update)
	
	Any combination of the available effects can be set for each FxPie Graph. 
	It is important to note that the duration values play a significant role in the 
	overall effect of the transitions. The appropriate value ultimately depends 
	upon the particular transition type(s) and the number of bars and series 
	displayed. Take time to experiment to find the best results.
	
	Wedge Properties:
	The FxPie Graph adds additional wedge properties not available in the 
	standard Pie Graph. They are:
	
	wedgeExplodeRadiusPercent - A number from 0 to 100, specifying the 
	desired percentage of the total radius that the wedges of the pie series 
	will appear exploded from the center.
	
	Wedge Data Labels:
	The FxPie Graph supports data labels that display information about 
	each data point. Labels are different from ToolTips in that they are always 
	visible and do not react to mouse movements. 
	
	To add labels to your FxPie Graph, set the wedgeLabelPosition property 
	on the series to a value other than none. To remove labels from your 
	FxPie Graph, set the wedgeLabelPosition  property to none. The default 
	value is none. The other values, "callout", "inside", "insideWithCallout" 
	and "outside" are described here:
	
	callout:
	Draws labels in two vertical stacks on either side of the pie. Shrinks the 
	pie area if necessary to make room for the labels. Draws key lines from 
	each label to the associated wedge. Shrinks labels as necessary to fit 
	the space provided.
	
	inside:
	Draws labels inside the pie. Shrinks labels to ensure that they do not 
	overlap each other. Any label that cannot fit as drawn using the 
	wedgeLabelTextSize, is hidden from view.
	
	insideWithCallout:
	Draws labels inside the pie, but if labels are shrunk below a legible size, 
	they are converted to callout labels. 
	
	outside:
	Draws labels around the boundary of the pie.
	
	wedgeLabelTextColor - this property sets the text color for the wedgeLabels. The default is black.
	wedgeLabelTextFont - this property sets the font type for the wedgeLabels. The default is SansSerif
	wedgeLabelTextSize - this property sets the fonts size for the wedgeLabels. The default is 10.
	
	An additional feature of the FxPie Graph is that clicking on any wedge will 
	explode that wedge. Clicking the wedge a second time will unexplode it.
	
	The above properties are specific to the Fx Pie Graph. The properties 
	listed below are the full set of properties supported in this release. 
	Where applicable, their behavior and default values are identical to those 
	in the standard Pie Graph. Any exceptions, including the newer 
	properties described above, are noted.
	
	Background:
	** bg3dFlag - same as FxBar and FxTrend
	bgColor
	** bgGradientFlag - same as FxBar and FxTrend
	
	Data:
	rowSeriesFlag
	valueTable
	
	DataFormat:
	labelColumnFormat
	valueFormat
	
	Data Label:
	columnDisplayNames
	labelColumnName
	rowLabelVisFlag
	rowNameVisFlag
	
	Historian:
	HistoryTableName
	historyTableRowNameFlag
	
	Interaction:
	command
	commandCloseWindowOnSuccess
	commandConfirm
	commandConfirmText
	drillDownColumnsSubs
	drillDownSelectMode
	drillDownTarget
	mouseOverFlag
	
	Label:
	label
	labelTextAlignX
	labelTextColor
	labelTextFont
	** labelTextSize - same as FxBar and FxTrend
	
	Legend:
	legendBgColor
	** legendBgGradientFlag - same as FxBar and FxTrend
	legendPercentVisFlag
	** legendPosition  - same as FxBar and FxTrend
	** legendTextColor - same as FxBar and FxTrend
	** legendTextFont - same as FxBar and FxTrend
	** legendTextSize - same as FxBar and FxTrend
	legendValueVisFlag
	legendVisFlag
	legendWidthPercent
	
	Object:
	objHeight
	objName
	objWidth
	objX
	objY
	visFlag
	
	Transitions:
	*entranceDuration - NEW
	*entranceTrigger - NEW
	*entranceType - NEW
	*exitDuration - NEW
	*exitTrigger - NEW
	*exitType - NEW
	
	Wedge:
	* wedgeExplodeRadiusPercent - NEW
	* wedgeLabelPosition - NEW
	* wedgeLabelTextColor - NEW
	* wedgeLabelTextFont - NEW
	* wedgeLabelTextSize - NEW
	wedgeProperties

Stock Chart

15229: Double.NaN no longer problematic in overlay traces
	In the stock chart object, overlay traces now handle NaN data values 
	correctly. In prior releases, if the initial data value(s) applied to an 
	overlay trace were NaN, the trace and its y-axis were sometimes 
	drawn incorrectly.

Trend Charts

15269: Trendgraph no longer plots spurious data if alarm props change
	If a trendgraph's alarm properties (e.g. valueHighAlarm) are
	attached to data, this no longer causes the trendgraph to replot old,
	invalid data points, as was occasionally the case in prior releases.

Oracle Coherence Monitor

15257: Provide option to show all caches from all services on one page
	It is now possible in the OCM to select all Services and see
	the activity and capacity for all caches across all services
	on a single page.  Simply select "All Services" wherever the 
	Service: selector is available to see all the caches on all
	services.

15258: Improve Cache Service page to show more useful information
	The Cache Services display has been enhanced to provide more
	useful information.

15259: Added ability to shorten long cache names
	Long cache names can now be shortened for display in the RTView
	OC Monitor.  By default, cache names longer than 28 chars will
	show only the first 14 characters followed by a ".." and the last 14
	characters.
	
	This format can be controlled by a substitution variable
	$cacheNameFormat contained in the OPTIONS.ini file.
	By default it is set to 14*14. Users may change this to N*M where N
	represents the number of initial characters to display, and M
	represents the number of ending characters to display.  This format
	substitution may also be set to override what is in the OPTIONS.ini
	by using the command line option: -sub:$cacheNameFormat:N*M

15260: Option to use process name as the location name
	A new command line option -processnames has been added
	to indicate that the Process Name is to be used as the Location
	Name for all nodes.

15261: Boolean updating of Enabled properly supported in Alert Admin
	The Alert Administration page now supports all databases without
	change to the rtv files. Previously there was an issue working with
	databases that do not support a boolean type, but this has been
	corrected.

15287: Excessive data no longer sent by Data Server to OCM
	When the OCM is used in conjunction with the Data Server, excessive 
	amounts of data were being transferred to the OCM and it would continually 
	increase.  This problem has been corrected.

15297: Log4J messages available from each node
	A feature has been added to the Oracle Coherence Monitor to permit users 
	to see the Log4J messages coming from the Coherence nodes. If a 
	Coherence node is outputting log4j messages, and its "Application" name 
	is assigned to be the same as its Location (member.machine.rack.site), 
	then the messages will appear in a drilldown window that can be 
	selected from the Node Summary page.  Note that the LOG4JOPTIONS.ini 
	file must be configured to make a connection to the appropriate Log4J 
	SocketHubAppender.

Security

15181: Security enhanced to provide server side login
	The following method has been added to the
	GmsCustomUserManager class, to allow the custom user manager
	to request validation from the default data server:
	
	
	public int validateLoginOnDefaultDataServer(java.lang.String userName,
	                                            java.lang.String password,
	                                            java.util.Vector<java.lang.String> rolesReturn)
	
	

	
Call this method to validate login credentials on the default data server. 
	

	

	
Parameters:
userName - the name of the user to validate
password - the password to validate
	
Returns:
zero if valid, -1 if login fails, -2 if the default data server is undefined or unavailable.
	
	
	

15357: Digital Signature has been updated to be good until 12/2011
	The digital signature of the jars in lib\signed_jars.zip has been updated.
	It now expires in December of 2011.

Substitution

15243: Drill down behavior of tables and graphs enhanced.
	The drill down behavior of tables and graphs has been enhanced. 
	Previously, if a table or graph had the drillDownSelectMode set to Anywhere, 
	drilling down on an element would set the drill down subs, but the subs 
	would not be cleared when drilling down on a non-element part of the table 
	or graph. The new behavior clears the subs when the drill down occurs on a 
	non-element part of the table or graph.
	
	Additionally, when the table has the multiSelectFlag turned on, if the user 
	deselects all of the rows in the table, the drill down substitutions are cleared.

Viewer - Java Web Start

15219: File handling now resolves relative paths against server
	In previous releases, the Java Web Start deploiyment resolved 
	relative paths against the client system. This has been changed so 
	that relative file paths are resolved against the JWS codebase on the 
	server. Files with absolute paths are still resolved against the client 
	machine. This change applies to all files read by RTView including 
	.rtv files, include files, configuration files and images.

Version 5.1c1 Release Notes

15056: Composite object data synchronization problem fixed
	In the prior release, if the "substitutions" property on a 
	composite object was changed by a drilldown on the display 
	containing the composite, in some situations the objects in the 
	composite would continue to use data attachments that 
	corresponded to the previous value of the substitutions property. 
	This is fixed.

Alerts

15021: Crash if ; delimited list has been fixed
	In previous releases, RTView would crash if a ; delimited list of 
	threshold values was entered into any threshold beside 
	valueHighAlert. This has been fixed.

Commands

14878: JMX command in multiple commands no longer throws exception
	In the Display Builder, if multiple commands were defined for an object, and 
	the command set included a JMX command, an IllegalComponentState 
	exception would be printed to the console when the Define Command dialog 
	was closed. This has been fixed.

15116: <None> data server option now works for commands
	In the prior release, if a command was configured with Data 
	Server = , the command was directed to the default 
	data server, rather than being executed locally. This is fixed.

Customization

10558: New Custom Data Adapter API
	The Custom Data Adapter API has been released for use in developing data 
	adapters to external data sources.  For more details, please refer to the 
	Customization section of the RTView User Guide.

12256: Customized color palette now supported in Display Builder
	RTView has been enhanced to allow users to define custom 
	colors to use in their displays. To define a custom color, go to 
	the Custom Colors tab in the Application Options dialog. Click 
	Add to add a new color or Delete to delete a color. To modify a 
	color, edit the corresponding row in the table. Color index 
	values must be a number greater than or equal to 5000. 
	Mouseover the color in the custom color table to see the rgb 
	value for that color. Custom colors are saved to COLORS.ini 
	when you click Save in the Application Options dialog. This 
	COLORS.ini file must be deployed with your RTView 
	application.
	
	A Custom Color tab has been added to the standard RTView 
	color chooser so that you can select a custom color in the same 
	way you would select a standard color.
	
	Note that RTView stores color indexes for the object properties, 
	not rgb values. Therefore, if you have an object in a display 
	that uses a custom color and you delete that color, or change 
	the index of that color, the object property that uses the original 
	color index will display white.
	
	Limitations 
	===========
	
	1. Some objects cache their colors and therefore do not update 
	when a custom color definition changes. Some examples: bar 
	graph legend, pie wedges and legend, some control object 
	properties. For these objects, you will either have to restart 
	RTView or reload the display to see the color change.
	
	2. Flex object store rgb values for all colors (even if you 
	selected a color index). This causes 2 problems:
	
		1. If you assign a custom color to a flex object, then 
	change the custom color definition, the flex object will not 
	update (since it stored the rgb value of the custom color instead 
	of the index). The only way to update it is to manually pick the 
	new color in the builder. 
	
		2. If you have a custom color with the same rgb value as 
	a standard color, and you apply the custom color to the flex 
	object, if you close and re-open the color picker on the flex 
	object, the standard color will be selected, not the custom 
	color. This is again because the flex object stores the rgb value. 
	The color chooser for the flex objects uses the rgb value to look 
	up the index, so it will find the one in the standard color list 
	first. 
	
	3. The custom color table is static. Therefore, multiple applets 
	running in the same VM must share a single custom color table.

Data Historian

10387: Record Retention options now apply to user defined tables
	The Record Retention options now apply to user-specified 
	history tables, named using the historyTableName property.
	These history tables can now be purged on startup of the
	historian, and can be limited to the specified retention time 
	period.
	
	If a user has created the timestamp column(s) manually,
	they must follow the same naming convention as the history
	tables created automatically, i.e. they must be named 
	TIME_STAMP and/or TIME_STAMP_LS depending on the 
	Timestamp Type.

10455: Auto-creation of user-defined history tables and columns
	The RTView Historian will now automatically create the 
	necessary history tables in the database if they have not been 
	created by the user.  An SQL data type appropriate for the 
	specified database is selected for each of the RTView data 
	types. Using the -verbose option, the specific "create table" 
	SQL command used to create the table can be viewed.

13814: Retention options no longer ignored when Data Caching is enabled
	Retention options are no longer ignored when Data Caching is 
	enabled.

13827: Database name can now be set for for ODBC connections
	The Database name for the Historian can now be set in the GUI 
	interface to the Historian.  If the name is changed and the 
	configuration saved, the name will be remembered when the 
	Historian is restarted.  The command line argument -dbname:NAME  
	can also be used to set the name of the database.
	
	NOTE: This name is only used for ODBC references.

14393: Improved DATE column type support
	The RTView Historian now properly handles columns of type
	DATE, writing the data to the database using a format that
	is appropriate for the specific database being used. A DATE
	column is created in the database in an appropriate type, and
	the date itself is inserted using the format appropriate for each
	database.

15029: Historian will now attempt to reconnect to database
	The Historian will now attempt to reconnect to the database
	if the connection is broken.

15030: Numeric data no longer incorrectly inserted due to quotes
	Previously, the insert statement used by the RTView Historian
	to put table rows into the database would generate an error
	for some databases, due to incorrect use of apostrophe around
	numeric data types.  This problem has been corrected. The 
	insert statement should be correct for all RTView data types 
	across all supported SQL databases.

15031: Historian support added for KDB time series database
	The KDB time series database is now supported in the 
	historian. Use the -kdbformat command line argument to output 
	insert statements in the KDB format. Automatic creation of 
	tables is NOT supported, nor is purging on startup. The tables 
	must be created ahead of time and purged by the user.

15046: Option to store Historian-supplied timestamp as true date type
	In previous versions, the historian would write two timestamp 
	columns with each record, stored as strings:
	
	TIMESTAMP and TIMESTAMP_LS.
	
	Now, the -timestamp: command line option is provided to 
	offer more control over how the timestamp is written to 
	the database.
	
	The options are:
	    -timestamp:none        - do not store timestamp
	    -timestamp:sql            - add single SQL timestamp
	    -timestamp:str             - add 2 string form, for compatibility
	
	When the -timestamp:sql form is used, only a single 
	TIME_STAMP column is written using a standard SQL 
	TIMESTAMP data type.
	
	The Timestamp Type can also be configured in the Historian 
	GUI interface and saved in the HISTORY.ini configuration
	file so it is not needed on the command line.

15051: Improved BOOLEAN column support
	The RTView Historian now properly handles the BOOLEAN
	data type properly across all supported databases.

15052: New option to rebuild history tables on startup
	The -rebuildtables option is now available to force all of the
	historian-specified tables to rebuild, even if they already exist in
	the database. 
	
	The HISTORY and HISTORY_S tables are rebuilt on startup of 
	the historian. User-specified history tables are rebuilt on-
	demand when data rows are first received for each table.
	
	Limitation: The -rebuildtables option does not support the 
	historyTableRowNameFlag.  If you have enabled this property in your 
	configuration file, you will need to create the table manually.

15057: New option to include column names in the insert statement
	The -insertcolumnnames command line option is now
	available to force the Historian to include column names
	in the database insert statements for user-specified history 
	tables.  This is useful when the Historian is adding data to
	existing tables and the column order  is not an exact match or
	the insert statement contains a subset of the existing table
	columns.
	
	Note: this option does not apply to the HISTORY and 
	HISTORY_S tables, only to user-specified tables.

15067: Historian retention mechanism refined
	Previously, the Historian would check for records that exceeded 
	the retention period at the half-way point of the retention 
	period, ie. every 12 hours if the retention period was 24 hours.
	The maximum duration between checks has been set to be 60 
	minutes.
	
	Additionally, a new command line argument has been added 
	to indicate how frequently you would like the Historian to check 
	for old records that need to be removed.  
	
	 -retentionMax:nn
	
	where nn is in minutes.

15117: Better handling of spaces in column names
	If the name of a column in a table being saved to the database contains a 
	space, the column name is now wrapped in quotes.

Data Server

14338: High Availability added to Display Server and Data Server
	1. Background
	
	To increase server availability in deployments using the Data Server or 
	Display Server, RTView client applications can now specify a primary and a 
	backup server. If the primary server is unavailable, the client will failover to 
	the backup server.
	
	In the Display Builder and Display Viewer, a primary and a backup server 
	can be specified for the default Data Server and also for each named Data 
	Server. The primary server and backup server are each specified as a 
	connection string, using either a hostname and port, or a URL that 
	corresponds to an instance of the rtvdata servlet. These are specified in the 
	Data Server tab of the Options dialog in the Builder, or on the command line 
	when launching the Builder or Viewer. In the rtvdata and rtvdisplay servlets, 
	the primary and backup servers are specified in the servlet's properties file.
	
	At startup, the client will connect to the primary server if available, otherwise 
	it will connect to the backup server. If neither is available, the client will 
	periodically retry connecting to both. If the client connects to either the 
	primary or the backup, and later the connection is lost, it will then try to 
	connect to the other server. If a client connects to a backup server and later 
	the primary server becomes available, the client will not switch to the primary 
	unless the connection to the backup server is lost.
	
	When a set of Data Servers are used as a primary and backup(s), all the 
	servers should use the same RTView configuration files (*OPTIONS.ini) and 
	should have access to the same external data sources, so that displays in 
	the client will appear the same regardless of which server is connected.
	
	2. Display Builder and Display Viewer usage:
	
	For example, if the primary default Data Server is run on a host named Kiwi 
	and the backup is run on a host named Dodo, both using the default Data 
	Server port (3278), then on the Data Server tab of the Options dialog, the 
	following would be specified:
	
		Data Server Mode:  Read Data from Server
		Primary Server:  Kiwi:3278
		Backup Server:   Dodo:3278
	
	Or, if the client is using the rtvdata servlet to connect to the Data Server via 
	http, the following URLs might be specified:
	
		Primary Server:  http://Kiwi:8080/rtvdata
		Backup Server:   http://Dodo:8080/rtvdata
	
	Each URL corresponds to an instance of the rtvdata servlet, which is in turn 
	configured to connect to an instance of the Data Server.
	
	The  primary & backup servers can also be specified on the command line. 
	For the default dataserver, the syntax is:
	
		-dataserver:remote:<primary>,<backup1>,<backup2>...
	
	For example:
	
		run_builder -dataserver:remote:XBC:3278,Dodo:3278
	or
		run_builder -dataserver:remote:http://Kiwi:8080/rtvdata,http://Dodo:8080/rtvdata_backup
	
	For a Named Data Server, the syntax is:
	
		-dataserver:name=<name>;connect=<primary>,<backup1>,<backup2>...
	
	For example:
	
		run_builder -dataserver:name=Baltimore;connect=http://balt1/rtvdata,http://balt2/rtvdata
	
	3. Servlet usage:
	
	The rtvdata servlet can be configured to have a primary and a backup Data 
	Server, by editing its servlet.properties file, then rebuilding and redeploying 
	the servlet. For example, these entries correspond to the primary and backup 
	servers in the previous example:
	
		# primary data server host & port
		ServiceHost=Kiwi
		ServicePort=3278
		# backup data server host & port
		ServiceBackup=Dodo:3278
	
	Above, note that the primary server and port are specified in 2 separate 
	properties, as in prior releases, while the backup server is specified by a 
	single property. If necessary, multiple backup servers can be specified, 
	separated by commaers, for example:
		
		ServiceBackup=Dodo:3278,Stork:3553
	
	The rtvdisplay servlet, used in a Display Server deployment, also allows a 
	primary and a backup server to be specified by editing the 
	rtvdisplay.properties file, then rebuilding and redeploying the servlet. For 
	example:
	
		# primary display server host & port
		DisplayServerHost=Kiwi
		DisplayServerPort=3279
		# backup display server & port
		DisplayServerBackup=Dodo:5678
	
	4. Standby mode:
	
	To avoid the overhead of maintaining the alert and cache data sources in a 
	backup server, the server can be started in "warm standby mode" by 
	specifying the -standby:warm option on the command line. In this case, the 
	server delats the following actions until the first client connects:
	
	    1) loading global definition files.
	    2) loading alert definition files.
	    3) loading cache definition files.
	    4) preloading display files specified on command line or ini file.
	
	Note that, although this reduces overhead, the alert and cache data sources 
	will not start collecting data until the first client connects, so they may be 
	"empty" at that time.
	
	
	Limitation:
	
	The primary and backup servers do not synchronize their internal states as 
	they run. So even if the servers use the same configuration files at startup, 
	after a failover occurs a client display may change because of differences 
	between the cache data source and alert data source states in the servers, 
	such as:
	 - alerts that were acknowledged on one server would still be 
	unacknowledged on the other
	 - if alert definition files were loaded or unloaded on one server but not 
	others, the alert configuration would differ
	 - backup server was started in standby mode, so tables in cache and alert 
	data source are empty when first client connects

15126: Get Data Server Connection Status function added
	A function named Get Data Server Connection Status has been added. This
	function returns a table with status information about the connections from 
	the Display Builder/Viewer to the default Data Server and any Named Data 
	Servers. The table contains one row for each connection, with the following 
	columns:
	
	Name. Contains either "__default" for the default Data Server, or the name of 
	a Named Data Server.
	
	Connected. Contains a boolean value: true if the server connection is 
	operational, otherwise false.
	
	Status. Contains one of the following strings: 'OK' if connection is 
	operational, 'no connection' if there is no connection to the server, or 'no 
	service' if there is an http connection to the rtvdata servlet but the servlet 
	has no connection to its Data Server.
	
	ConnectionString. Contains either the URL for an http connection to the 
	rtvdata servlet, or a hostname:port for a direct socket connection to a Data 
	Server.
	
	ReceiveCount. The number of data transmissions (pushes) received from the 
	server.
	
	ReceiveTime. The time of the most recent data transmission from the server.

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

14913: Cache no longer empty on startup for asynchronous data
	In previous versions, objects attached to cache data could be
	empty on start up if the cache was listening to an update-once 
	data attachment that had not yet returned data. This has
	been fixed.

SQL Data Source

15028: SQL Data Attach Dialog now retains size and position
	The SQL attach data dialog now remembers its size throughout 
	a Display Builder session if resized.

15064: Added option to interpret SMALLINT type as BOOLEAN
	The -smallintbooleans option has been added to the 
	SQL Data Adapter. This option forces RTView to 
	interpret the SQL SMALLINT data type as a BOOLEAN,
	so that RTView tables displaying the data show a checkbox
	for columns of this type.

15081: Improved logic for detection of lost connection
	The logic for detection of lost connections in SQL Ds has been improved.

StreamBase Data Source

14945: Support added for high availability Streambase configurations
	The RTView Data Adapter for StreamBase has been enhanced to 
	support High-Availability StreamBase applications as follows:
	
	(1) Support for URI lists
	
	When defining a StreamBase connection in the Application Options dialog 
	you may now specify a list of StreamBase URIs. This allows your RTView 
	application to connect to a StreamBase application running on multiple 
	servers.The URIs should be entered in the text area one per line.
	
	(2) Support for custom Dequeue Result Interceptors
	
	A Dequeue Result Interceptor is a Java class whose processResult() 
	method is called by the StreamBase application in the course of dequeuing 
	each tuple. In this method you may make decisions about the dequeue 
	process based for example on the status of the servers used by your 
	application. For example, in an application where two servers are both 
	dequeueing tuples but only one is designated the "leader", you may choose 
	to suppress the tuples from the "non-leader" server.
	
	You specify a Dequeue Result Interceptor for a given connection by 
	supplying the name of a Java class which will be instantiated by the 
	StreamBase Data Adapter. The class must be found on the RTV_USERPATH.
	
	For more information on StreamBase High-Availability features, see
	http://streambase.com/developers/docs/latest/admin/highavail.html.

TIBCO Hawk Data Source

14947: BusinessWorks Displays in the Hawk Monitor
	The hawkmonitor demo has been enhanced to include displays 
	that allow you to monitor your TIBCO BusinessWorks 
	applications.

TIBCO Rendezvous Data Source

15124: Statistics data now output as type Long
	The data type for all metric columns stored in tables generated from
	rvtrace are now LONG instead of INTEGER

XML Data Source

15140: <none> removed from Data Server options for xml attachments
	The xml data adapter does not support the DataServer=<none> option, since 
	it is overridden by the xmlredirect option. Until this problem is resolved, the 
	<none> item has been removed from the Data Server dropdown list in 
	the XML Attach-to-Data dialog.

Display Server

15060: Display Server status information now available
	The thin client now supports a status window that shows the name of the 
	current RTView display, the time that the display was last refreshed, the 
	URL and connection status for the rtvdisplay servlet, and the hostname and 
	port used by the servlet to connect to the Display Server. This status
	window is opened by selecting a new item labeled 'Status' on the thin client's
	popup (context) menu.
	
	Also, error handling has been improved in the thin client. In prior releases, an 
	error message was shown in the display page if the servlet could not 
	connect to the Display Server, but no error message appeared if the client 
	could not connect to the web server, the app server, or the rtvdisplay 
	servlet. As of this release, an appropriate error message will be displayed 
	for each of those conditions too.

15143: Horizontal grid lines fixed for Firefox 3.0
	In Firefox 3.0, the thin client did not draw horizontal grid lines in the table 
	object. This is fixed.

15144: Sliders and scrollbars fixed for Firefox 3.0
	In Firefox 3.0, the scale (slider) control and scrollbars on graph 
	objects did not work in the thin client. These problems are fixed.

15145: Table cell contents no longer overflow in Firefox 3.0
	In Firefox 3.0, the thin client did not clip text properly in a table cell, 
	allowing the text to spill over into the adjacent column. This is fixed.

15193: web.xml updated for single-signon for Tomcat compatability
	The file servlets/rtvdisplayweb.xml.auth_example has been updated 
	for compatibility with Tomcat 5.5.15 or newer. This file is an example 
	of how web.xml should be modified to support servlet authentication. 
	The previous version of the file used * as a wildcard in the
	<role-name> element but that is no longer supported by Tomcat.

Functions

14688: Replace Value enhanced to return a user-specified default value
	The Replace Value function has been enhanced to accept an 
	additional argument, the Default Value.  If there is no match 
	found in the Replacement Values, the Default Value will be 
	returned, unless the Return Value If No Match is set to 1, in 
	which case the original Value will be returned.

14766: New Expression Evaluator Functions
	The following functions have been added to RTView.
	
	Evaluate Expression As Double
	Evaluate Expression As String
	Evaluate Expression By Row
	
	The Evaluate Expression As Double function substitutes the given
	arguments into the given expression and evaluates it, returning the
	result as a double.
	
	The Evaluate Expression As String function substitutes the given
	arguments into the given expression and evaluates it, returning the
	result as a string.
	
	(Note that Boolean true or false values will be returned as 1.0 and
	0.0 respectively.)
	
	The expression is written using variables, whose names must be
	specified in the expression py prefixing them with "%",  and may use
	standard arithmetic and logical operators as well as a variety of
	mathematical and string functions. It may also include numeric and
	string constants (string constants must be enclosed in double-quotes
	(")). An example of such an expression is "%var1 + %var2".
	
	When the expression is modified and the text field activated (by
	pressing Enter in the field or navigating to another field) the
	dialog will display a text field for each variable into which values
	may be entered. Values whose form is numeric are substituted into
	the expression as numbers; otherwise they are substituted into the
	expression as strings. If a value whose form is numeric needs to be
	treated as a string, perhaps to serve as an argument to a string
	function, surround the variable in the expression with double-
	quotes, and its value will always be used as a string. An example of
	such an expression is "length("%var1") + %var2".
	
	The Evaluate Expression By Row function evaluates the given
	expression for all rows of the given table, using values from the
	columns specified, and returns the results in a new table column.
	
	The expression is written using variables, whose names must be
	specified in the expression py prefixing them with "%",  and may use
	standard arithmetic and logical operators as well as a variety of
	mathematical and string functions. It may also include numeric and
	string constants (string constants must be enclosed in double quotes
	("). An example of such an expression is "%col1 + %col2".
	
	When the expression is modified and the text field activated (by
	pressing Enter in the field or navigating to another field) the
	dialog will display a text field for each variable. Entries are
	taken as names of columns in the given table from which values will
	be substituted for the corresponding variables in the expression.
	The types of the values are taken from the types of the columns.
	Numeric and Boolean values are converted to double. Date columns are
	not supported.
	
	If a value whose column is numeric needs to be treated as a string,
	perhaps to serve as an argument to a string function, surround the
	variable in the expression with double- quotes, and its value will
	always be used as a string. An example of such an expression is
	"length("%col1") + %col2".
	
	The Result Column Name argument specifies a column that will be
	added to the table. The Result Column Type argument specifies the
	type of that column, and may be either "double" ("d") or "string" ("s").

14906: Rename Column Function added
	A new function Rename Columns has been added that allows the 
	user to rename the columns in a table. The user can rename a 
	single column or a list of columns.

15087: Edit Function Dialog now remembers size and position
	In the Display Builder, the Edit Function dialog now remembers its size and 
	position after the first time it is opened in a given invocation of the Display 
	Builder. The first time it is opened it will have a default size and position as previously.

General

15137: NPE in stockchart when cursorFlag on and trace visFlag off fixed
	In prior releases, an exception was thrown by the stock chart if the 
	cursorFlag was on, the visFlag for the priceTrace was off, and the mouse 
	was moved over the chart. This is fixed.

GmsTabularData

15120: Row filter with greater than 256 entries supported
	In previous releases an array bounds exception was thrown if a data 
	attachment had a row filter with more than 256 entries. This is fixed.

Local Variables

14658: Selection behavior in Variables dialog improved
	In previous versions, it was difficult to select the previously 
	edited item in the Variables dialog. This problem has been 
	fixed.

14665: User can no longer deselect Use as Sub inadvertently
	In previous releases, the Use As Substitution checkbox in the 
	Variables dialog would not work correctly if that was the first 
	field selected after a new variable name was entered. This has 
	been fixed.

Localization

15085: Double Text Entry field supports locale-specific separators
	The Double Text Entry field now displays and supports entry of 
	locale specific decimal separators in the Display Viewer. The 
	Display Server supports the display of locale specific decimal 
	separators, but not the entry of them.

Object Library

14773: Generic Flex object supported
	A "Custom Fx Object" has been added to the Fx Graphs palette 
	in the Display Builder. This allows the user to specify the name 
	of a Flash SWF file to be displayed by the object. The SWF can 
	be a compiled Flex application. The Flex application can be 
	coded to expose properties to RTView, using the Flex library 
	package named com.sl.gmsext, which is now included with 
	RTView. These properties will appear in the Display Builder's 
	property sheet, and can be assigned constant values or 
	attached to data sources. See the example for more 
	information.

15005: Some objects enhanced to support rounded corners and shadows
	The objects on the General, Graphs, Tables and Composite tabs of the 
	palette have been enhanced to support rounded corners and shadows (the 
	circles on the General tab were only enhanced to support shadows). The 
	bg3dFlag property has been renamed on these objects to bgStyle. The 
	bgStyle property supports 3 options:
	
	1. Rectangle - Use a flat rectangle for the background. This is the same as 
	the old behavior when the bg3dFlag was off.
	
	2. Rectangle - Use a 3D rectangle for the background. This is the same as 
	the old behavior when the bg3DFlag was on. If this option is selected, use 
	the bgEdgeWidth to set the 3D depth.
	
	3. Round Rectangle - Use a flat rounded rectangle for the background. When 
	this option is selected, use the new bgRoundness property to set the 
	arcLength of the rounded corners. NOTE: If the bgRoundness property is set 
	to a value greater than half of the objWidth or objHeight property, half of the 
	smaller value of objWidth and objHeight will be used instead. For example, if 
	the objWidth is 100 and the objHeight is 50, if you enter a value greater than 
	25 for the bgRoundness, 25 will be used instead (half the value of objHeight).

15007: Some objects enhanced to support tab and title labels
	All of the objects on the Graphs, Tables and Composite tabs of the palette  
	and the rectangular objects on the General tab have been enhanced to 
	support tab and title labels. The objects on the General tab already supported 
	a labelTextPosY property, so 2 new options, Tab Top and Title Top have 
	been added to the list of options for this property:
	
	1. Title Top - The label is positioned on the top line of the background 
	rectangle.
	2. Tab Top - The label is drawn in a tab above the top of the background 
	rectangle. The height of the tab is dependent on the height of the text. The 
	width of the tab is dependent on the length of the text, but a minimum width 
	can be specified in the the new labelMinTabWidth property.
	
	On General objects, the labelTextPosX Outside Right and Outside Left 
	options are not supported if the labelTextPosY is Title Top or Tab Top.
	
	The objects on the Tables, Graphs and Composite tabs did not previously 
	support a Y position for the labels. A new property named labelTextAlignY 
	has been added to these objects with the following properties in addition to 
	the Title Top and Tab Top described above:
	
	1. Outside Top - the label is positioned well above the background rectangle.
	2. Top - The label is positioned just above the background rectangle.
	3. Inside Top - The label is positioned inside the top of the background 
	rectangle. This is consistent with the previous position of the label.
	
	The Tables, Graphs and Composite objects were also enhanced with a 
	bgBorderFlag property. If selected, a border is drawn around the 
	background rectangle, otherwise the border is not drawn.

15069: Gradient fill supports direction
	The objects on the General, Graphs, Tables and Composite tabs of the 
	palette as well as the display background have been enhanced to support 
	gradient direction. The gradient direction has been applied to the background 
	(bgGradientMode) of these objects. 
	
	For the object grid, the gradient direction has also been applied to the grid 
	background (fgGradientMode). 
	
	On the graph objects, the gradient direction has also been applied to the 
	legend background (legendBgGradientMode) and the plot area background 
	(grid/plot/traceBgGradientMode). The following properties on these objects 
	have been renamed to support the gradient directions:
	
	bgGradientFlag -> bgGradientMode
	fgGradientFlag -> fgGradientMode
	legendBgGradientFlag -> legendBgGradientMode
	plotBgGradientFlag -> plotBgGradientMode
	traceBgGradientFlag -> traceBgGradientMode
	gridBgGradientFlag -> gridBgGradientMode
	
	
	The *GradientMode properties supports the following options:
	
	1. None - no gradient.
	2. Diagonal Edge - The gradient is drawn at a 45 degree angle from the top 
	left to the bottom right corner of the object. This is the same as the gradient 
	previously used if the bgGradientFlag was selected.
	3. Diagonal Center - The gradient is drawn at a 45 degree angle from the 
	center to the top left and the bottom right corners of the object. 
	4. Horizontal Edge - The gradient is drawn horizontally from the top to the 
	bottom of the object.
	5. Horizontal Top - The gradient is drawn horizontally from the center to the 
	top and bottom of the object.
	6. Vertical Edge - The gradient is drawn vertically from the left to the right of 
	the object.
	7. Vertical Center - The gradient is drawn vertically from the center to the left 
	and right of the object.
	
	Additionally, the objects on the Graphs, Tables and Composite tabs of the 
	palette have been enhanced to support the bgRaisedFlag. 
	
	This property reverses the direction of the gradient and of the 3D edge if 
	bgStyle is 3D Rectangle.

15070: Gradient fill supports second color
	The objects on the General, Graphs, Tables and Composite tabs of the 
	palette as well as the display background have been enhanced to support a 
	second gradient color. Previously, the gradient would use the bgColor and 
	white. The new bgGradientColor2 property allows you to set a color other 
	than white for the 2nd color in the gradient applied to the object background. 
	The object grid also support fgGradientColor2 which applies the 2nd gradient 
	color to the grid area. The graph objects also support 
	legendBgGradientColor2 which applies the 2nd gradient color to the legend 
	background and grid/plot/traceBgGradientColor2 which applies the 2nd 
	gradient color to the plot area.

15074: Some initial object defaults changed
	The initial values of colors and fonts have been modified for some objects to 
	make them more consistent with the other objects.

Control Objects

11620: Commands can now contain string '$value'
	A control object can now use '$value' in its command string. In 
	prior releases, it was necessary to surround the string with 
	backslashes, i.e. /'$value/'

12255: Multi-line support added to Button and Radio control objects
	The buttons and radio button groups have been enhanced to support multi-
	line labels. Use \n to specify a new line in your label.

14899: Delay removed for setting valueToSetProperty on button control
	If a button control's valueToSetProperty is attached to data, it 
	will now be updated immediately when data is applied to the 
	attachment. In prior releases, the property was not updated 
	until the next repaint of the display.

15075: Alignment property added for text input controls
	The text entry controls have been enhanced to support a new 
	valueTextAlignX property. Select Left, Center or Right to set the text 
	alignment of the field. This alignment is only applied if the length of the text is 
	less than the length of the text entry field.

15107: Thin client support for multi-line in radio and push buttons
	The thin client now supports multiline labels in push buttons and radio buttons.
	
	Limitation: In a radio button group, the labels are left aligned horizontally, and 
	top aligned vertically. This differs from the Viewer/Builder where the labels 
	are center aligned in both directions.

15108: Thin client support for valueTextAlignX property on edit ctrls
	The valueTextAlignX property on edit controls is supported in the thin client.
	
	Limitation: Runtime changes to valueTextAlignX are ignored by the thin client.

Object Grid

15039: Boolean table var passed to icon property shows incorrect value
	The Object Grid previously passed the value of a boolean
	column incorrectly to the property on the icon in the grid.
	This problem has been corrected.

Stock Chart

15136: New option to show all data from all traces on stockchart
	The stock chart designates the first trace with data as the primary trace. 
	Typically, this is the priceTrace.  In all prior releases, if the 
	timeRangeBegin/End properties had values <= 0, then the chart would only 
	plot data whose timestamps are >= the oldest timestamp or <= the newest 
	timestamp from the primary trace's data. That is, data points for all other 
	traces outside of the time range of the primary trace's data were discarded, 
	by design. But in some applications, the data for all traces should be plotted, 
	even if it is outside of the primary trace's time range.
	
	The following behavior has been added in this release:
	
	If timeRangeBegin = -1, don't discard datapoints from traces whose 
	timestamps are older than the oldest timestamp of the primary trace. 
	
	If timeRangeEnd = -1, don't discard datapoints from traces whose 
	timestamps are newer than the newest timestamp of the primary trace. 
	
	The old behavior is maintained as follows:
	
	If timeRangeBegin = 0 or blank (the default) discard datapoints from traces 
	whose timestamps are older than the oldest timestamp of the primary trace. 
	
	If timeRangeEnd = 0 or blank (the default) discard datapoints from traces 
	whose timestamps are newer than the newest timestamp of the primary 
	trace.
	
	Limitation: Regardless of the timeRangeBegin/End settings, if the cursorFlag 
	property is checked, the time shown in the chart legend for the vertical 
	cursor's position will correspond to the nearest data point of the first visible 
	trace on the chart,  even though a data point from another trace may be 
	nearer to the cursor.

Tables

15020: filterProperties crashes for date column comparison
	Previously, attempting to use a column with a date type as the 
	value for a condition in a filter (via the filterProperties object 
	property) could cause a class cast exception. This has been 
	fixed.

Trend Charts

15037: Trace range corrected for invisible first trace w/ autoscale
	In prior releases, if a trendgraph had the following qualities:
	
	- yAxisAutoScaleMode ON
	- yAxisMultiRangeMode OFF
	- trace1 had no data points or if trace1VisFlag OFF and 
	yAxisAutoScaleVisTracesOnlyFlag ON
	
	then the y axis range would be 0 to 100 irregardless of the 
	values. This has been fixed.

Oracle Coherence Monitor

15061: Displays and Historian updated to use new SQL timestamp mode
	The default OCM displays and configuration files have been 
	enhanced to take advantage of the new Historian timestamp 
	mode that stores timestamps as SQL TIMESTAMPs, rather than 
	as VARCHAR.  This permits the creation of database scripts
	to manipulate or purge the historical data using the 
	TIME_STAMP column.

15062: HISTORY.ini and ts_alertdefs.rtv in ocmdemo for customization
	The demos/ocmdemo directory now contains a default
	Historian configuration file (HISTORY.ini). It is configured to
	use the built-in HSQLDB database.  This directory also 
	contains a default Alerts configuration display (ts_alertdefs.rtv).
	The default action on any alert is to issue a beep.  This can be
	changed by editing the ts_alertdefs file using the RTView Builder.

15063: Sample RTV_JAVAOPTS and RTV_USERPATH added to myocm_setup
	The myocm_setup scripts now contain commented-out sample 
	settings of RTV_USERPATH and RTV_JAVAOPTS for users
	to modify as needed.

Viewer

15071: Included file now found in jar if display loaded via File->Open
	In prior releases, the Display Builder/Viewer could load an 
	included file from a jar file only if the display that included the 
	file was also contained in the jar file or was specified on the 
	command-line. If the display was loaded using the File/Open 
	dialog, the included file could not be loaded from a jar. This is 
	fixed.

Viewer - Java Web Start

15084: Include files now always found in Web Start deployments
	In previous versions, include files were sometimes not found in Java Web 
	Start deployments. This has been fixed.

Version 5.0c1 Release Notes

Alerts

14790: Error message for adding alert twice should include alert name
	The error message for adding the same alert definition file twice has 
	been enhanced to include the file name. The error messages for 
	duplicate alerts and alerts with no names have been localized.

14792: Per-row enabling mechanism added added to tabular alert
	The limits and discrete alerts now support a new property, 
	rowEnabledTable, in the interaction category. This property controls 
	the enabled state per row in the valueTable, so you can enable/
	disable each index in a tabular alert. 
	
	If enabledFlag on the object is disabled, each row index is disabled 
	regardless of the rowEnabledTable vlaue. The Alert Variables Table 
	shows the enabled state of each alert object (ie the enabledFlag), 
	but the table variable created for each tabular alert will show the row 
	enabled flag (unless the enabledFlag is disabled, then all rows will 
	show disabled). The alert state for disabled indexes is -1. The 
	rowEnabledTable property is only applied if the useTabularFlag is 
	on.
	
	NOTE: The enabled state of each row is re-evaluated against the 
	latest rowEnabledTable values if either the enabledFlag or the 
	rowEnabledTable changes. 
	
	This property can be set to one of the following:
	
	1. scalar value 
	All rows (indexes) in the table will be enabled if "true" or disabled if 
	"false".
	
	2. tabular value 
	This table can either contain one or two columns: 
	
	If the table has one column: The column must contain boolean 
	values. It should have the same number of rows as the alert 
	valueTable. If so, the enabled state of each row in the alert 
	valueTable is set to the value in the same row of the 
	rowEnabledTable. If the valueTable is longer, the extra rows are set 
	to the first row of the rowEnabledTable. 
	
	If the table has 2 columns: The first column must contain indexes 
	and the second column must contain boolean values. The index 
	value for each row in the valueTable is used to lookup the 
	corresponding enabled value from the rowEnabledTable. If the index 
	is not found in the rowEnabledTable table, false is used. 
	
	3. ; delimited list of values 
	This is a ; delimited list of either index/enabled value pairs, or just 
	enabled values. 
	
	If the ; delimited list only contains boolean values (true;false;true): 
	This should be a ; delimited list of boolean values with the same 
	number of values as rows in the alert value table. The enabled state 
	for row in the valueTable will be set to the value in the corresponding 
	position in this list. If the valueTable has more rows than values in 
	the list, the first value in the list will be used. 
	
	If the ; delimited list contains both index and enabled values 
	(Chicago,true;Dallas:false;Detroit:true): This should be a ; delimited
	list of comma (,) separated index/enabled pairs. The index value for 
	each row in the valueTable is used to lookup the corresponding 
	enabled value from the rowEnabledTable list of values. If the index is 
	not found in the enabled list, the enabled state is set to false.

14830: New column in alert table to show enabled status of alerts
	The Alerts have been enhanced to show their enabled state. The 
	enabledFlag for an alert can be set 3 ways:
	
	1. in the property sheet for the alert, you can either select or deselect 
	the enabledFlag property
	2. in the property sheet for the alert, you can attach the enabledFlag 
	property to data
	3. you can use the Enable Alert Definition command
	
	It is recommended that you do not use both option 2 and option 3 for 
	the same alert.
	
	The Alert Variables Table now contains an Enabled column which 
	shows the enabled status for each alert. The Alert State for each 
	alert will show as -1 if the alert is disabled. For tabular alerts, if the 
	alert is disabled, the Alert State for each index is -1. 
	
	If there is an active alert when the alert is disabled, it will be cleared. 
	This is a change from the previous behavior.

14861: Null pointer exception no longer thrown for alerts without names
	In previous releases, if an alert did not have a name, it would 
	sometimes crash. This has been fixed.

14866: Crash at startup if "Rate to Remove Cleared Alerts" > 0 fixed
	In previous versions, if the "Rate to Remove Cleared Alerts" option 
	on the Alerts option tab is set to a nonzero value, and any global files 
	are defined with listeners to async data, the RTView 
	could crash. This has been fixed.

Builder - Options Dialogs

14895: Options Dialog size reduction
	In release 4.9, the Options Dalog was taller than necessary, 
	causing some of the tabs in the dialog to look stretched. This has 
	been corrected.

Commands

14659: New mechanism to execute commands on open/close of display
	Two new properties, onOpenCommand and onCloseCommand, 
	were added to Model Properties.
	
	These properties allow you to specify a command to be executed 
	when the display is opened/loaded (onOpenCommand ) and a 
	command to be executed when the display is closed/replaced 
	(onCloseCommand).
	
	Additionally, the Model Properties for a display can now be accessed 
	more directly via Edit->Model Properties.  The old method of File-
	>Background Properties ...-> Model Properties is still viable.
	
	The commands are edited using the same mechanism as existing 
	commands, so they can be cut/copied/pasted from and to other 
	commands.
	
	The onOpen/onCloseCommands can be single or multiple 
	commands, system, data source, or custom commands. The 
	restrictions that apply to interaction commands (based on 
	deployment)  also apply to onOpen and onClose commands.
	
	NOTE: A run time check is applied to prevent recursive execution of 
	drill down commands - an error message will be displayed in the 
	console at the point the recursion would have occurred.
	
	LIMITATIONS:
	
	System Drill down commands are not supported in onOpen/
	onClose commands on the display sever as they would open new 
	windows on the display server, rather than the client

Data Historian

14855: Historian mbean crash fixed
	In release 4.9, the Historian would throw an OpenDataException if 
	the DataConfigurationFileInfo attribute of the Manager MBean was 
	queried. This is fixed.

Data Server

12067: New option to only send changed rows for custom data source
	For a custom data source, the data server can be configured to send 
	only the rows in a table which have been modified, inserted, or 
	deleted since the last client update. This can significantly reduce the 
	amount of data transmitted to clients, for a custom data source that 
	typically makes relatively small changes to large tables. To enable 
	this feature, the custom data source must identify one or more 
	columns which uniquely identify each row in a table, by calling the 
	addIndexColumn() method on a GmsTabularData instance.
	
	Notes:
	
	- If more than half of the table's rows are changed, the data server 
	will send the entire table to all the listening clients on the next data 
	push.
	
	- If a client removes all of the listeners for a table T1, the server will 
	stop recording T1's row changes for that client. The next time that 
	client C1 adds a listener for T1, the data server will send the entire 
	table to the client. So this improvement will mostly boost the 
	performance of periodic updates to displays containing large tables.
	
	- The data server will only track row changes. If a column is added or 
	removed, the data server will send the entire table.

14671: Multiple data server connections supported
	An RTView application can now be configured to connect to 
	multiple RTView Data Servers. This can be useful in 
	deployments where a single server cannot access all required 
	data sources.
		
		
	DISPLAY BUILDER SUPPORT:
		
	Two features have been added to the Display Builder to 
	support multiple Data Servers:
		
	1. The Data Server tab of the Options dialog allows 
	configuration of "Named Data Servers".
	
	As in all prior releases, the Data Server tab of the Options 
	dialog allows the user to define the default Data Server 
	connection, which can either be a file, a direct socket 
	connection, or an http or https connection via the rtvdata 
	servlet. In this release the Data Server tab also contains a 
	button labeled "Named Data Servers". This button opens the 
	Named Data Server dialog, used to configure connections to 
	additional data servers. For each, a name must be assigned. 
	This name is used in attachments and commands which should 
	be directed to that server. A hostname and port, or the URL of 
	an rtvdata servlet instance, must also be configured to specify 
	the connection for the named server. The configuration of the 
	default data server and all named data servers is saved to the 
	OPTIONS.ini file.
		
	2. The data attachment and data source command dialogs 
	allow selection of a data server name.
		
	The dialogs for configuring data attachments and data source 
	commands contain a combo box labeled "Data Server". This 
	combo box allows the user to select a data server name 
	configured in (1), or selection of the predefined entries 
	<default> or <none>, or the manual entry of substitution string.
		
	Note that attachments to variables and functions are always 
	handled locally, they cannot be directed to a data server.
		
		
	RUNTIME SUPPORT:
		
	At startup, an application will connect to the default data server 
	(if specified) and each named data server (if any) specified as 
	in (1) above. Then, for each attachment and data source 
	command:
		
	a) if a data server named was selected when the attachment/
	command was configured, it will be directed to that server;
		
	b) otherwise, if <default> was selected and a default data server 
	was specified, the attachment/command will be directed to the 
	default data server;
		
	c) otherwise, (either <none> was selected or no default data 
	server was specified) the attachment/command will be 
	processed locally.
		
	A substitution string can be assigned as the data server name 
	for an attachment or command. When the attachment/
	command is processed, the replacement string will be used and 
	if it corresponds to a named data server as configured in (1) 
	above, then the attachment/command will be directed to that 
	server. If the replacement string is an empty string, the default 
	data server (if any) will be used.
		
	Named data servers can also be specified by a command-line 
	argument, using this syntax:
		
	   -dataserver:name=<ServerName>;connect=<ConnectString>
		
	where <ServerName> is the name of the data server, to be used 
	in attachments and commands, and ConnectString is either (a) 
	the server's hostname and port number, separated by a colon, 
	for a socket connection or (b) the URL of an instance of the 
	rtvdata servlet. For example:
		
	   -dataserver:name=MyLocalServer;connect=localhost:56789
	   -dataserver:name=London;connect=https://londonServer:8080/rtvdata
		
	If the name or connection string contains a space, the 
	command-line argument may need to be enclosed in double 
	quotes, for example:
		
	  "-dataserver:name=Blue Server;connect=bubba:7777"
		
		
	DISPLAY VIEWER APPLET ISSUES:
		
	The Display Viewer applet can use the multiple data server 
	feature but, as with any connection from an applet, a security 
	exception will be thrown if the applet attempts to connect to 
	any host other than the webserver host from which it was 
	loaded. So, to use the multiple data server feature from the 
	viewer applet, it will probably be necessary to deploy multiple 
	instances of the rtvdata servlet on the applet's webserver host. 
	For example, if the Viewer applet is hosted on http://bubba:8080
	 and needs to connect to two data servers named Blue and 
	Red, then instances of the rtvdata servlet could be deployed at 
	http://bubba:8080/rtvdata_blue and http://bubba:8080/
	rtvdata_red, and the properties of servlet instance could be 
	configured to connect to the corresponding data server. See the 
	full documentation for details on configuring and deploying the 
	rtvdata servlet.
		
		
	OTHER OPTIONS:
	
	The -dsenable argument: 
	
	As described earlier, when choosing a data server name in an 
	attachment or command dialog, the <none> entry may be 
	selected to indicate that the attachment/command should be 
	processed locally (that is, not be directed to a data server) even 
	if a default data server has been specified. This can be useful 
	in deployments where most attachments should be directed to 
	the default data server but a few should not. However, when a 
	default data server is specified, all data sources are disabled 
	(except the XML, function, and variable data sources). So, the
	-dsenable command-line argument must be used to enable the 
	data source used by any attachment/command for which a data 
	server of <none> was selected. The format of this argument is:
	
	  -dsenable:<dskey>
	
	where <dskey> is the key string for the data source: (sql, rv, 
	hawk, etc). A -dsenable option can be specified for each data 
	source required.
	
	For an applet deployment, use the dsenable paremeter, for 
	example the following will enable the cache data source in the 
	applet:
	
	 <param NAME="dsenable" VALUE="cache">
	
	Currently the -dsenable option is only available as a command-
	line argument or an applet parameter. It cannot be configured 
	from the Options dialog nor is it read from or written to the 
	OPTIONS.ini file.
	
	The vieweronly option:
	
	The Data Server options tab and the new Named Data Servers 
	dialog both have a checkbox labeled "Viewer Only". When this 
	box is checked, the Builder ignores all data server connections 
	and all attachments and commands are processed locally. Note 
	that the configuration of data server options and assignments 
	can still be configured and saved, they just have no affect until 
	the display is opened in the Viewer.
	
	
	CUSTOM DATA SOURCES:
	
	The writer of a custom data source may decide not to expose 
	the multiple data server feature to users, by hiding the data 
	server combo in the custom attach-to-data and command 
	dialogs. This can be done by adding the following line of code 
	to the dialog's constructor:
	
		super.hideDataServerCombo = true;

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

14838: Caches now listed in data attach list even if data not available
	In the Display Builder, if you had one or more Cache objects defined 
	in a Cache Definition File and you tried to attach an object property to 
	a Cache, in the Attach To Cache Data dialog you would only see the 
	name of a cache if its own data attachment was actually receiving 
	data. This behavior has been changed so that you will see the cache 
	names and table names of all defined caches whether nor not they 
	are receiving data.

14845: Cache now stores un-indexed tables with 0 rows
	The cache data source will now store a table with zero rows, for a 
	cache object whose indexColumns property is not set. Previously, 
	data tables with no rows were ignored.

14898: Two cache table listeners with different filters now supported
	Using the Cache Data Source, if  two or more listeners were 
	attached to the same cache table, and each attachment has a 
	different row filter, only one of the attachments would be 
	updated. This has been fixed.

14903: Row Changed optimization added
	To improve performance in a Data Server deployment, the 
	Cache Data Source has been improved to reduce the amount 
	of data that is pushed to clients when the contents of a cache 
	table are changed.

14908: Timestamp value from column no longer overwritten
	Previously, if you specify a timestampColumnName for a table 
	cache, and the incoming data contained a column of type Date and 
	with that name, the current time was written into that column. This 
	behavior has been changed so that we never overwrite the contents 
	of a user-specified timestamp column.

14930: Can now enter table name if cache is unknown
	In the previous release, the Attach to Cache Data dialog did not 
	allow an entry in the Table field if the specified Cache name was 
	unrecognized. As a result, it was impossible to configure an 
	attachment to a cache that was not defined at build-time. This is 
	fixed.

JMS Data Source

14917: Crash when JMS server or jars unavailable has been fixed
	Previously RTView would fail to start when a JNDI JMS data source 
	was defined but either  the required class files were  not present on 
	the classpath or the JMS server was unavailable. RTView 
	will now start and provide error messages for the connections that 
	cannot be established due to the required classes not being on the 
	class path or the server being unavailable.

SQL Data Source

14847: Shared query result no longer re-applied to old listeners
	In prior releases, under certain conditions the latest result of an SQL 
	query was redundantly applied to existing listeners when a 
	display was opened. This could cause unnecessary updates to 
	functions attached to the query. This problem has been fixed.

14910: Crash if cache list cleared before caches exist has been fixed
	In previous versions, an exception could be thrown if the cache list 
	was cleared before any caches were generated. This has been 
	fixed.

Display Server

14885: Refresh requests no longer become backed up on slow server
	In release 4.9, the thin client might make overlapping refresh 
	requests to the Display Server, if the server reponse is delayed. 
	These requests can back up in the rtvdisplay servlet, eventually 
	causing the app server to run out of threads or memory. This is fixed.

14891: Data source commands now executed when using data server
	In prior releases, if the Display Server was run with the -dataserver 
	option, data source commands which should have been redirected 
	to the Data Server were not. This is fixed.

14892: Data now appears with refresh of 0 when using Data Server
	In previous versions, if the Display Server refresh rate was 0, 
	and it was used with the Data Server, data would not have been
	provided to the Display Server if there was no data until the first 
	refresh.
	
	This has been fixed.

Functions

14923: No longer update nested functions prematurely
	The function data source has been improved to further reduce unnecessary 
	updates to nested functions (functions which use other function results as 
	arguments).

General

14632: Deployment Wizard added
	A Deployment Wizard has been added to RTView to assist in 
	deploying RTView applications. The Deployment Wizard 
	allows you to define a project with one or more deployments. It 
	will package up the necessary file for each deployment along 
	with a readme that describes how to deploy it.
	
	To run the Deployment Wizard on windows, select Start-
	>Programs->RTView->Deployment Wizard.
	
	To run the Deployment Wizard on UNIX, in an initialized 
	terminal window type
	
	run_depwizard

14805: New color-picker for Macintosh
	A special color picker has been created for Macintosh with the Aqua 
	Look and Feel.

14854: New utility for scanning library versions
	A new command line utility for determining the version of all of the 
	RTView java libraries has been included with 
	RTView.
	
	To list the version of all Java libraries:
	
	        list_versions all
	
	
	To check for Java libraries that do not match a particular version:
	
	        list_versions VERSION
	
	where VERSION is the version string. The format of version strings
	in the Java libraries is "R99z9_999999", with no punctuation. 
	Wildcards are not supported, but incomplete strings are.  Versions
	with the suffix "_DT9999" are always included, so that patched
	versions can be identified.
	
	Example:
	
	list_versions 50c1
	
	        Lists all versions that are not general release 5.0c1. Output
	        would include 5.0c0 alpha versions.
	
	list_versions R50
	
	        lists all versions that are not 5.0x. Output would include
	        all versions that are not alpha, beta, or released libraries
	        of 5.0.
	
	LIMITATIONS
	
	On Windows it is recommended that you not search for version 
	based on number alone (e.g. 50 rather than R50 or 50c), as the 
	search results will sometimes return a false positive based on a 
	time stamp or file size.

14928: Support for deployment wizard added to data sources
	A new abstract method has been added to GmsRtViewDs:
	
	public Vector<String> getDsFileNames ()
	
	Custom data sources must implement this method in order to 
	compile and run against version 5.0b1+. This method is called by 
	the deployment wizard to get the list of files needed by a data 
	source. See the custom data source javadocs for more information.

Object Library

Fx Bar Chart

14827: Colors now available for more than 28 bars per group
	If there are more or bars (or columns) than colors, we now recycle 
	the colors. Example - if there are 50 bars and 25 colors, bars 26-60 
	will use the same colors as bars 1-25.

14828: If rowSeriesFlag is on, drawStackedFlag is ignored.
	You can now use the drawStackedFlag and RowSeriesFlag at the 
	same time.

14862: Fx Bar Graph now supports barProperties
	With this release, the FxBar chart now supports the 
	"barProperties"  available with the standard Bar Graph 
	(obj_bargraph). Additionally, new properties have been added 
	that can change the bar shapes and bar transparency.  
	
	BarProperties:
	We now offer a more robust selection of colors than those found 
	in the 256 color palette available with obj_bargraph, and have 
	added support for the same 16 fill patterns.
	
	Bar Transparency:
	The barTransparencyPercent property has been added to allow 
	for transparency of the charts bars. A value of 0, the default, 
	sets the bars to be completely opaque. A value of 100 will 
	render the bars completely transparent. Any integer between 0 
	and 100 can be set. Changing this property will change the 
	transparency of all of the charts bars. 
	
	Bar Shapes:
	The barShape property offers five additional bar shapes along 
	with the default Rectangle shape. The new shapes are 
	Rounded Rectangle,  Ellipse, Diamond, Triangle and Inverted 
	Triangle. Changing this property will change the shape of all of 
	the charts bars.

14902: Bars that surpass yValueMax are no longer invisible
	Prior to this fix, bars and columns whose values were greater than  
	yValueMax setting were not drawn at all. Now, they will appear, but 
	will be drawn clipped, so as not to extend beyond the yValueMax 
	setting.

Fx Trend Chart

14590: Support added for additional object properties
	Support has been added to the FX Trend Graph for yValueMin/Max 
	and yAxisAutoScaleMode. 
	
	When yAxisAutoScaleMode is set to Off, the yValueMin and 
	yValueMax properties control the range of the y-axis for this trace. 
	Select On to automatically calculate the range of the y-axis according 
	to data values being plotted.
	
	Limitations:
	
	As with the FX Bar Graph, the "On Including Min/Max" mode is not 
	supported.
	
	In cases where the yAxisLogFlag is ON, the yAxisAutoScaleMode 
	setting is ignored and internally seen as ON.  When the 
	yAxisLogFlag is turned OFF, the yAxisAutoScaleMode reverts to the 
	current user setting.

Tables

14829: Sorting can now be disabled in the Display Server
	In previous releases, setting a table object's showSortIconFlag 
	property to false did not disable sorting in the thin client. This is fixed.

Trend Charts

14810: Auto scale no longer factors in traces that have no value
	If a trendgraph is configured with multiple traces, 
	yAxisAutoScaleMode is On, and  yAxisMultiRangeMode is Off (so all 
	traces are plotted against a single, autoscaled y-axis), the autoscale 
	calculation now skips any traces which have no data points. In prior 
	releases, a value of zero was assumed for each empty trace, which 
	sometimes causes the computed y-axis range to be too large.

Oracle Coherence Monitor

14779: Failure rates and time range selection added to Comm. Issues
	Instead of showing absolute packets resent/repeated in the 
	Communication Issues view, failure rates are now shown. 
	
	Additionally, the time range selector has been enabled to show time
	range averages on cached data.

14797: Launcher arguments supported in any order
	In the previous release, if the -ocm and -ocmnode command line 
	arguments were used, they had to be the first argument specified. 
	This has been fixed so that the arguments can now be specified in 
	any order.

14820: Tier Selector added to All Caches Activity/Capacity Bar Charts
	The All Caches Activity and Capacity Chart displays have been 
	modified to provide a "Tier" selector.  This enables the user to 
	specify either Front or Back tier caches to be shown in these 
	displays.

14826: Cache browser does not work with simulator
	The Cache Browser view again displays data with the simulated
	cluster, as a DistributedCache service has been added to the 
	simulator.

14836: Corrected spiking in Cache Activity hit/miss history
	In previous versions, the Cache Activity trend chart would show 
	spikes in the historical data.  This has been fixed.

14852: Updated OCM help screens
	The popup Help windows for the Oracle Coherence Monitor
	have been revised and improved.

14897: SQL query to Oracle no longer fails due to using reserved word
	In previous versions, a SQL query to an Oracle Historian database
	failed due to using a reserved keyword. This was changed to a non-
	reserved name.

14951: Alert Summary view updated to indicate disabled alerts
	The  Alert Summary view has been updated to indicate that
	disabled alerts in gray. Unimplemented alerts have been removed.

14964: Removed unimplemented alerts
	Unimplemented Alerts are no longer visible.  These will be 
	added back to the views once they have been implemented.

Platform Support

14817: "Cancel" now prevents Display Builder from closing on Mac
	When a user tries to close the Display Builder without saving their 
	changes, they will be prompted to save their changes, exit without 
	saving, or cancel the exit.  In previous versions the the "Cancel" 
	option did not work correctly on Macintosh, and the program would 
	close rather than remain open. This has been corrected.

14835: Menu bar support added for Historian on Mac
	The Historian now correctly handles the Apple Menu and the About 
	button.

14886: Additional look and feel support on Macintosh
	To better support the Macintosh, there is a new command line 
	argument for the RTView applications.
	
	-laf:xxxx 
	
	where xxx is Aqua, Metal or Motif e.g. -laf:Aqua. This sets the 
	windowing style of the applicaiton. These arguments are not 
	supported in the OPTIONS.ini file.
	
	The default for Display Viewer is Aqua and for Display Builder 
	and Historian is Metal.  
	
	This argument has no effect under Windows or Linux.

Security

14837: Security login disabled by default
	By default, an OPTIONS.ini is now provided in the lib directory of the 
	RTView installation which disables the security login. If 
	you wish to enable the login mechanism,  you will need to start the
	Display Builder or Configuration Utility with the -login option,
	and then enable the security mechanism from the Security tab.

Substitution

14872: Setsub function triggered by var change again updates listeners
	Prior to 4.8, if a control object changed the value of a mapped 
	variable and that change triggered an update of a setsub function 
	that changed a second substitution, then any listeners that used the 
	second substitution were immediately updated to reflect the change. 
	This feature was broken in release 4.8 and 4.9, but is now fixed.

Version 4.9d1 Release Notes

Data Sources

Cache Data Source

14824: Crash after (un)setting timestampColumnName fixed
	In previous versions, if you removed or added the value of the 
	timestampColumnName property in a Double cache object that was 
	contained in a Cache Definition file, the Display Builder would crash 
	when you saved the Cache Definition file and opened a different 
	display. This has been fixed.
	
	As part of this fix, caches are now disabled while they are being 
	edited.  As a consequence, you can no longer attach to the data of a 
	cache object in the same display where you have defined it.

Functions

14839: Sort function no longer crashes for table filter with no results
	In the previous version, if the Sort function is applied to a table which
	has zero rows because of a row filter, RTView would 
	crash.

Version 4.9c1 Release Notes

Alerts

14433: New option to skip sending alert for intermediate alert status
	The Limits Alert has been enhanced to suppress duplicate alerts 
	with a new property, skipDuplicateAlertsFlag. If selected, only one 
	high or low event will be generated when the value exceeds both 
	high thresholds or goes below both low thresholds.
	
	For example, you have a limits alert where valueHighAlert equals 90. 
	valueHighWarning equals 80 and the value equals 100. If the 
	skipDuplicateAlertsFlag is selected, only one alert will be generated 
	with a severity of high alert. If the value then goes to 85, the severity 
	of the alert will change to high warning, and when the value goes to 
	75, the alert will clear. If the skipDuplicationAlertsFlag is off, 2 alerts 
	will be generated when the value goes to 100, one with a high 
	warning severity and the other with high alert severity. When the 
	value goes to 85, the high alert will clear, and when the value goes 
	to 75, the high warning alert will clear.
	
	Once an alert with the skipDuplicationAlertsFlag set is 
	acknowledged, the alert severity will no longer update.
	
	Several properties give finer control over when alerts are executed 
	and when the severity of alerts changes. If the 
	skipDuplicateAlertsFlag is on, these properties behave as follows:
	
	valueDeadband - This property is applied to both thresholds. For 
	example, the valueHighAlert equals 90, the valueHighWarning 
	equals 80 and the valueDeadband equals 5. When the value goes 
	to 91, an alert is executed with high alert severity. Now the value 
	must go below 85 for the severity to change to high warning, and the 
	value must go below 75 for the alert to clear.
	
	reNotificationTime - This property is applied to the alert as a whole, 
	not to each threshold. If the reNotificationTime is set, the alert 
	command will continue to re-execute until the alert is cleared or 
	acknowledged, regardless of whether or not the severity changes.
	
	alertDelayTime - This property is applied to both thresholds. For 
	example, the valueHighAlert equals 90, the valueHighWarning 
	equals 80 and the alertDelayTime equals 5. The value must stay 
	over 90 for 5 seconds before the high alert is issued. If the value 
	then goes to 85, it must stay below 90 for 5 seconds before the 
	severity is changed to high warning.
	
	nonRepetitionTime - This property is applied to the alert as a whole, 
	not to each threshold. Once an alert has been issued, the 
	nonRepetitionTime is not enforced when the severity changes from 
	high alert to high warning and vice-versa. It is only applied when the 
	alert clears. Once the alert clears, the nonRepetitionTime is the 
	minimum amount of time that must pass before a new alert will be 
	issued.

14689: Table-defined alert thresholds implemented
	The limits and discrete alerts have been enhanced to support 
	tabular thresholds. In previous releases, the threshold properties 
	only accepted scalar values. Each threshold property can be set to 
	one of the following:
	
	1. scalar value
	Both scalar and each row in tabular alerts is compared against this 
	value (this is the previous behavior).
	
	2. tabular value
	This table can either contain one or two columns:
	
	If the table has one column: The column must contain comparison 
	values. It should have the same number of rows as the alert 
	valueTable. If so, each row in the alert valueTable is compared 
	against the value in the same row of the value*Alert (threshold) 
	table. If the valueTable is longer, the extra rows are compared 
	against the first row of the value*Alert (threshold) table. If the alert 
	value is scalar, it will be compared to the first row.
	
	If the table has 2 columns: The first column must contain indexes 
	and the second column must contain comparison values. The index 
	value for each row in the valueTable is used to lookup the 
	corresponding comparison value from the value*Alert (threshold) 
	table. If the index is not found in the threshold table, no alert is 
	generated. If the alert value is scalar, no alert is generated.
	
	3. ; delimited list of values
	This is a ; delimited list of either index/comparison value pairs, or 
	just comparison values.
	
	If the ; delimited list only contains comparison values (80;90;100): 
	This should be a ; delimited list of comparison values with the same 
	number of values as rows in the alert value table. Each row in the 
	valueTable will be compared to the item in the corresponding 
	position in this list. If the valueTable has more rows than items in 
	the list, the first item in the list will be used. If the alert value is 
	scalar, the first item in the list is used.
	
	If the ; delimited list contains both index and comparison values 
	(Chicago,80;Dallas:90;Detroit:100): This should be a ; delimited list 
	of comma (,) separated index/comparison pairs. The index value for 
	each row in the valueTable is used to lookup the corresponding 
	comparison value from the value*Alert (threshold) list of values. If the 
	index is not found in the threshold list, no alert is generated. If the 
	alert value is scalar, no alert is generated.

14728: Alert Definition file can now be found inside .jar
	In the previous versions, an Alert Definition file could not be 
	reference from inside a .jar file. This has been fixed.

Builder

14745: Preview no longer disabled if you drill down to current window
	In the Display Builder, if you executed a drill down command of type 
	"current window", the Preview button button would be incorrectly 
	disabled. This has been fixed.

Data Sources

14794: Leak in xml and hawk data sources.
	In previous releases, a trend graph attached directly to XML or Hawk 
	data was not released when the display was closed, causing a 
	memory leak. This has been fixed.

Cache Data Source

14645: Cache Data Source implemented
	The new Cache Data Source stores real-time data from a data 
	attachment in in-memory tables which can themselves be used as 
	data sources. The Cache maintains current value and history tables 
	for scalar or tabular inputs. It has options for specifying index 
	columns for tabular data and adding timestamp columns to both 
	types of data. 
	
	In addition, a separate data attachment may be specified for pre-
	loading a Cache with initial value data. This data will also be 
	indexed and have a timestamp added according to the properties 
	set on the Cache.
	
	You create and configure a Cache in the Display Builder, by 
	dragging scalar or tabular Cache objects from the  Caches palette 
	tab onto a display and setting their properties, including name, data 
	attachment(s), index columns, number of rows of history to keep, 
	etc., in the Object Properties dialog. You then identify the display as 
	a Cache Definition file via the Application Options dialog. 
	
	When a Cache is loaded via a Cache Definition file and is receiving 
	data via its data attachment, it is available for use and will appear in 
	the Attach To Cache Data dialog. On that dialog you can also 
	configure row filtering and select columns.

14738: initialTable property pre-loads cache from Historian database
	The Cache Data Source has been enhanced with the ability to pre-
	load the history table of a scalar or tabular cache datasource by 
	specifying a data attachment for the new property initialTable. 
	
	The following should be noted:
	
	(1) If a timestampColumnName is specified for this property it will 
	follow the behavior of the valueTable property: a timestamp column 
	of that name will be inserted in the incoming data unless one is 
	found already present.
	
	(2) The data from this attachment is not copied before it is modified 
	by the addition of timestamp data; so the possibility exists that the 
	original source of the data would be modified.
	
	(3) If this attachment continues to update its data, that data will 
	continue to be added to the history table; so for best results the 
	attachment should be something like a one-time SQL query.

14743: Timestamp column options implemented
	The Cache Data Source has been enhanced with the ability to 
	specify that a timestamp column a) should be added to the 
	incoming data, or b) is already present in the incoming data. If the 
	property timestampColumnName is set to a column name, the data 
	source will look for a column by that name in the data. If it finds the 
	column and it is of type DATE, the timestamp data will be included in 
	the cache tables; if it is not of type DATE an error will be printed. If the 
	specified column is not found a DATE column of that name will be 
	added to the incoming data and each row will contain the time that 
	row was received.

JMS Admin Data Source (for TIBCO EMS only)

14373: Hang after fault-tolerant failover fixed
	In previous releases, displays that contained both TIBCO Hawk and 
	TIBCO EMS data sometimes stopped updating. This only happened 
	when the TIBCO Hawk data was from a subscription to an agent that 
	was running on an EMS transport with a fault tolerant EMS server 
	pair and the TIBCO EMS data was from the same pair of fault 
	tolerant servers. The display would sometimes stop updating after 
	the EMS severs failed over. This has been fixed.

JMS Data Source

14520: Re-Support Seebeyond  with JMS
	Previous changes to the JMS data source prevented it from being 
	used with SeeBeyond as a JMS data source.
	
	SeeBeyond can now be used again as a provider of JMS data. by 
	configuring a JMS connection where the Factory Class Name option 
	is set to 
	
	com.stc.jms.client.STCTopicConnectionFactory
	
	and using the SeeBeyond jars: 
	
	jms.jar
	com.stc.jmsis.jar
	jta.jar
	log4j.jar
	
	from the java api kit java directory
	(e.g. \ican50\repository\data\files\InstallManager\50Base\apikit\java )
	
	in the RTV_USERPATH.

JMX Data Source

14585: Domain attribute now appears in attributes list
	The Domain attribute now appears in the Attach to Data if the 
	Domain part of the mBean contains a *.

RRD Data Source

14684: Support executing rrdtool on a remote machine
	The RRD Datasource has been enhanced to support (limited)
	remote execution of rrdtool from an instance of RTView running on 
	Unix to a Windows machine with RRDTool installed and an rshd 
	running.
	
	You can use the -RRDds.rsh:HOSTNAME command line option to 
	specify a HOSTNAME on which to run the rrdtool remotely.  All 
	executions of rrdtool in this process will be done on that remote 
	Windows host.

StreamBase Data Source

14650: StreamBase 5.1 now supported
	We now support Streambase version 5.1.  Prior versions will no 
	longer be supported.

Demos

Data Source Tutorial Demo

14734: Data Source Tutorial uses .xsl navigation tree
	An .xsl navigation tree is used to navigate displays in the Thin Client 
	version of the Data Source Tutorial.

Display Server

14673: Display Server Performance enhancements
	The performance of display refreshes in the Display Server has 
	been improved.

14724: Method provided to auto-generate an HTML tree from navtree.xml
	It is now possible to automatically generate an HTML navigation tree 
	directly from the navtree.xml file used in many applications.  To do 
	this it is necessary to construct a custom index.html file that 
	references an iframe that references the navtree.xml and converts it 
	automatically to an HTML/Javascript tree. An example of this custom
	index.html file is contained in the demos/dstutorial and also in 
	servlets/ocmonitor.

Distribution

14700: HSQLDB included with RTView
	The library to support HSQLDB has been included with 
	RTView, as well as two scripts to run it.
	
	run_hsqldb -  runs the HSQL Database Engine.
	run_hsqldb_mgr - runs the HSQL Database Manager
	
	For more information about the HSQLDB, you can visit the website 
	here: http://hsqldb.org/

Functions

14388: Type Convert function can now convert to Date-Time
	The Convert Columns function has been enhanced to convert 
	numeric and string columns to Date-Time columns (type DATE). The 
	Convert To Type field should contain "t" ("time") and the Columns to 
	Convert list may contain String or any numeric type columns. 
	Numeric types other than LONG are first converted to Long data and 
	then to Date-Time data. If a String column entry cannot be parsed as 
	a date the resulting entry will be blank.

14740: Pending functions still sometimes executed multiple times
	In some cases, when a JOIN function was used to join data from 
	two separate data attachments, the function could be executed more 
	than once.  This problem has been fixed.

14795: Performance improvements for functions with large RV/Hawk tables
	The performance of the Display Builder/Viewer has been improved 
	in the case of a function using an RV or Hawk data table with many 
	rows (for example, RTViewDs.HostStatusHistory) as an input 
	argument.

14811: The SORT function can produce ArrayBoundsException sometimes
	In the previous release, an ArrayBoundsException was sometimes 
	thrown by the sort function, if its table argument was attached to a 
	table from the Cache data source and rows were added to the table 
	while the sort was performed. This is fixed.

General

14637: New RTV_JAVAOPTS option to specify directory of *OPTIONS.ini
	RTView has been enhanced to allow users to specify a 
	directory for their options files. If specified, options files will be read 
	from and saved to the specified directory. If not found, they will be 
	read from lib. If not specified, RTView will behave as it did 
	previously - the options files will be read from and saved to the 
	startup directory., and if not found there will be read from lib.
	
	To specify the directory for options files, add the following jvm option 
	to RTV_JAVAOPTS:
	
	-Dcom.sl.rtview.optionsFileDir=YourOptionsFileDir
	
	The following options files will use the specified directory:
	
	OPTIONS.ini  
	*OPTIONS.ini (for each data source)
	hawkmethodrepository.xml
	rvrepository.xml
	RVALIAS.ini
	TRANSPORTS.ini
	sqlrepository.xml
	JMSALIAS.ini
	HISTORY.ini 
	DATASERVER.ini
	DISPLAYSERVER.ini
	EMSMGR.ini 
	TRANSACTIONS.ini
	TMOPTIONS.ini

Licensing

14625: RRD DS license key not additive in all scenarios
	Previously the licencing mechanism did not treat new product keys 
	(e.g. RRD Data Source) as additive with existing licenses, unless 
	they were specified in a particular order, or combined with other 
	specific product (e.g. viewer or browser).
	
	New product keys are now additive, and can be appended to the end 
	of an existing KEYS file

Local Variables

14629: Data type support added for variables
	The variables have been updated to support 2 data types:  scalar 
	and tabular. The data type is used in 2 places. First, it is used in 
	the Attach to Variable Data dialog to allow the user to specify row 
	and column filtering for variables that are tabular. Second, it is used 
	in the composite object. Only variables that have the tabular data 
	type can be used to update table variables in the composite display.
	
	The Variables dialog has been updated as follows:
	
	1. A Data Type combo box has been added to allow the user to 
	select either Scalar or Tabular for their data type. This defaults to 
	Scalar for new variables.
	
	2. The table showing the list of variables has been updated to show 
	the data type for each variable.
	
	3. A check has been added so that the Use as Sub and Tabular data 
	type cannot be selected together. If they are, an error is issued when 
	the user clicks Add and the update is not applied.
	
	The Attach to Variables dialog has been updated as follows:
	
	1. Four new fields have been added to the dialog to support select 
	column and row filters. The user can specify column filters in the 
	Column(s) field for variables that have the tabular data type. The 
	user can either enter a single column name or click on the ... button 
	to select multiple column names. Enter * to select all columns. The 
	user can also select a row filter by selecting the Filter checkbox, then 
	filling in the Filter Column and Filter Value fields. Single or multiple 
	values may be listed in the Filter Value field. Enter * to display all 
	rows in the table. Enter "*" to use * as a literal comparative value. To 
	list multiple values, separate with a semicolon. For example: 
	value1;value2;value3. If your value contains a semicolon, enclose it 
	in single quotes. 
	
	2. The Attach to Variables dialog now validates data as follows. 
	The Variable Name field is not validated. The user can only select 
	from a list of valid options, so no validation is needed. 
	
	If the selected Variable Name refers to a scalar variable, the 
	Column(s), Filter Column and Filter Value fields are all colored dark 
	gray indicating that no entry is needed in these fields. The columns 
	in the Select Column dialog are also colored dark gray.
	
	If the selected Variable Name refers to a tabular variable, the 
	variable is checked to see if it has received a data update. If it has 
	not received a data update, the Column(s), Filer Column and Filter 
	Value fields are all colored light gray to indicate that values are 
	needed but cannot be validated. If it has received a data update, the 
	drop down menues for the Column(s) and Filter Value fields are 
	populated with the available column names. The Column(s) and 
	Filter Column fields are validated so that they turn red if they contain 
	and invalid value and white if they contain a valid value. The same is 
	true for the columns in the Select Columns dialog. In this case, the 
	Filter Value field is also validated. The validation on this field turns 
	red if the data entered does not match the data type for the column 
	specified in Filter Column, otherwise it turns white.
	
	The composite object has been updated as follows:
	
	In the previous release, only variables with names that ended in 
	Table could be used to update table properties in composite 
	displays. This has been fixed so that any variable with the tabular 
	data type can be used to update table properties, regardless of the 
	variable name.
	
	Old .rtv files are upward compatible as follows:
	
	Since old .rtv files do not contain data type information for the 
	variables, RTView must assign data types. The data type 
	for all variables is set to scalar unless the variable name ends in 
	Table or table and has no initial value. If you have a tabular variable 
	in an old .rtv file with a name that does not end in Table or table, it 
	will not stop working. However, you will not be able to take 
	advantage of the new Attach to Variable Data dialog changes or the 
	composite object changes.

14726: App-level sub now overrides initial value for global variable
	If an application-level substitution (defined in OPTIONS.ini or on the 
	command-line) exists with the same name as a global mapped 
	variable, the initial value of the substitution is used as the initial 
	value of the global mapped variable. In prior releases, the initial 
	value of the global variable defined in the global definition file was 
	used, which was not the correct behavior.

Object Library

Composite Object

14521: Expanded support for composite objects in Display Server
	The composite object is now more robustly supported in the thin 
	client, as a distinct object in a display or as an icon in an object grid.
	
	Limitations:
	Performance of the thin client  may suffer if a composite containing a 
	display with multiple table objects, controls, or graphs is displayed, 
	especially if multiple instances of the composite appear in an object 
	grid.

14737: Composite objects inside grid become blank after applet refresh
	In the previous release, the composite objects in the Display Viewer 
	Applet would go blank after a browser refresh. This has been fixed.

14744: Delay corrected in executing a function using a variable
	In previous versions, if a composite object contained a display with a 
	function that uses a variable as an argument, and the local 
	variable's value is changed from a control, the function result is not 
	updated until the following update. This most noticeable in the thin 
	client.

14748: Links now work inside composite objects
	In the previous release, links did not work in composite objects. This 
	has been fixed.

Fx Bar Chart

14489: New Fx Bar Graph object
	A new graph object named Fx Bar Graph has been added. Fx Bar 
	Graph and the existing Bar Graph graph object have many similar 
	features. Fx Bar Graph also has a few additional features
	unavailable in the bar graph. 
	
	In the Display Builder, Fx Bar Graph (obj_fxbar) is found on the 
	Fx Graphs palette. 
	
	FEATURE HIGHLIGHTS: 
	
	Data Tips:  text boxes that display detailed information about their 
	associated columnar data. 
	
	Legend: can be positioned above, below, right, or left of trace area. 
	The legend can be resized interactively.
	
	Background Colors:
	The graph background can have two alternating colors, with a 
	configurable grid color between them.
	
	COLOR PROPERTIES: 
	
	Color properties are treated similarly to the Fx Trend Graph, both of 
	which differ from that of other other objects. In the Builder, the color 
	chooser dialog has 4 tabs. The "RTView Colors" tab shows the 
	traditional palette of 252 indexed colors; the "Swatches" tab shows a 
	standard Java color palette; the "HSB" tab allows color selection by 
	hue, saturation, and brightness;  and the RGB tab allows color 
	selection by red, green, and blue intensity. The color chooser also 
	has a button for selecting a default color (described separately for 
	each color property below). 
	
	Internally, all color properties on Fx Bar Graph are stored as a 24 bit 
	integer RGB value in the range of zero (black) to 16,777,215 (white). 
	So if a color property on an Fx Bar Graph is attached to data, keep in 
	mind that it expects an integer value in that range, not a color index 
	between 0 and 252 as with other objects. A value of -1 indicates the 
	default property color. 
	
	Note that the Default color and colors selected from the Swatches, 
	HSB, and RGB tabs are only supported on Fx Bar Graph. If a color is 
	selected from one of those tabs and then copied and pasted to a 
	color property on any other object, white will be used instead. 
	
	PROPERTIES: 
	
	Like the bar graph, the Fx Bar Graph has many configurable 
	properties, some of which are unique. 
	
	The following properties apply to the overall object: 
	
	Alert:  (All are the same as the bar chart. Note that the Fx Bar Graph 
	doesnt support the associated LineVisFlag, MarkColor, and 
	markStyle properties. 
	
	- valueHighAlarm
	- valueHighAlarmColor
	- valueLowAlarmEnabledFlag
	- valueHighWarning
	- valueHighWarningColor
	- valueHighWarningEnabledFlag
	- valueLowAlarm
	- valueLowAlarmColor
	- valueHighAlarmEnabledFlag
	- valueLowWarning
	- valueLowWarningColor
	- valueLowWarningEnabledFlag
	
	Background:  (All same as Bar Chart)
	- bg3dFlag : if checked, a 3d border is drawn around the Fx Bar Graph. 
	-  bgColor: the background color of the Fx Bar Graph. The Default 
	color is steel gray. 
	- bgGradient: if checked, the background is gradient filled. 
	
	Bar:
	- barImage: The image to display in the bars. NOTE: If necessary, 
	the image will be stretched or otherwise modified to fit the bar size. 
	- barOutlineFlag: draws an outline around each bar. Default is On
	- barValueTextColor: when barValueVisFlag is On, the color of the 
	text inside the bars
	- barValueTextFont: when barValueVisFlag is On, the font style for 
	the text inside the bars
	- barValueTextSize:  when barValueVisFlag is On, the font size for 
	the text inside the bars
	- barValueVisFlag: when On, each bars data value is displayed 
	inside the bar
	
	Data: 
	- rowSeriesFlag: Same as Bar Chart
	- valueDivisor: Same as Bar Chart 
	- valueTable: Same as Bar Chart
	- yValueMax:
	- yValueMin:
	Controls the range of y-axis if the yAxisAutoScaleMode is set to Off. 
	Select On for the yAxisAutoScaleMode to calculate the y-axis range 
	according to data values being plotted. 
	
	DataFormat:
	- yValueFormat: Formats the numeric value shown on each bar, if 
	barValueVisFlag is checked. Also formats the numeric value that 
	appears in each tooltip is the mouseOverFlag is checked.
	
	Historian (same as Bar Chart)
	- historyTableName
	- historyTableRowNameFlag
	
	Interaction:  (same as Bar Chart)
	- command
	- commandCloseWindowOnSuccess
	- commandConfirm
	- commandConfirmText
	- drillDownTarget
	- mouseOverFlag  toggles Tooltips on/off
	
	Label: 
	- label: the Fx Bar Graph title text. Cannot contain newlines (\n). If 
	blank, the trace area increases to fill the title area. 
	- labelTextAlignX: alignment for the Fx Bar Graph title. 
	- labelTextColor: color for all text on the Fx BarGraph, default is black. 
	- labelTextFont: font for the Fx BarGraph title. 
	- labelTextSize: size for the Fx BarGraph  title. 
	
	Legend: 
	- legendBgColor: background color of legend area. If Default is 
	selected, the legend background is unfilled so the background of the 
	Fx Bar Graph is visible. 
	- legendBgGradientFlag: if checked and if legendBgColor is not 
	Default, the legend background is gradient filled. 
	- legendPosition: indicates if the legend is positioned above, below, 
	left, or right of the chart area. 
	- legendTextFont: font for legend text (Note that bold is NOT 
	supported here)
	- legendTextSize: font size for legend text
	- legendTextColor: font color for legend text
	- legendVisFlag: the legend is visible only if this property is checked. 
	- legendWidthPercent: the percentage of the objects width (or 
	height, if positioned at top or bottom) to be occupied by the legend. 
	
	Plot Area: 
	- gridAltBgColor: the Fx Bars chart background allows for 
	alternating rows of color. This is one of them. The default is 
	transparent.
	- gridBgColor:  this is the other alternating color row. The default is 
	transparent.
	- gridBgImage:  In place of color for the chart background, the user 
	can select an Image. 
	- gridColor:  this is the color of the grid lines. The default is white.
	
	X-Axis: 
	- xAxisFlag: the x-axis is visible only if this is checked. 
	
	Y-Axis: 
	- yAxisAutoScaleMode:
		Off: all min/max and division properties are used to 
	determine how to display the yAxis. Note that any bar whose data 
	exceeds the yValueMax will not be displayed.
	On: the Fx BarGraph determines the yAxis Maximum and divisions 
	as needed to display bars at whatever size is needed to represent 
	the data. The following properties are ignored: yAxisMajorDivisions, 
	yAxisMinorDivisions, yValueMax, yValueMin.
	On  Include Min Max: This is NOT SUPPORTED.  It functions as On 
	above.
	
	- yAxisFlag: the y-axis is visible only if this is checked. 
	- yAxisFormat: Formats the y-axis labels or, if drawHorizontalFlag is 
	checked, the x-axis labels. 
	- yAxisMajorDivisions: Number of major divisions along the yAxis. 
	Ignored when yAxisScaleMode is On
	- yAxisMinorDivisions: Number of minor divisions with each major 
	division. Ignored when yAxisScaleMode is On.
	
	
	REQUIREMENTS and LIMITATIONS: 
	
	The Fx Bar Graph requires version 9.0 or newer of the Adobe Flash 
	Player. 
	
	In the thin client, the Fx Bar Graph is supported in any supported 
	browser that has the Flash Player installed. If a display containing 
	an Fx Bar Graph is loaded into the thin client and the Flash Player is 
	not installed, a link to the Flash Player download page will appear 
	on the display. 
	
	In the Builder and Viewer applications, the Fx Bar Graph is 
	supported on Windows platforms only. If a display containing an Fx 
	Bar Graph is opened in the Display Builder/Viewer, and the correct 
	version of the Flash Player is not available or the local operating 
	system is not Windows, the Fx Bar Graph will be blank and an error 
	message will be issued. In the Display Builder, the Fx Graphs tab is visible. 
	
	The Fx Bar Graph is not supported in the Display Viewer Applet on any platform. 
	
	The Fx Bar Graph object can be resource intensive during display 
	loading and updating. This should be kept in mind when designing 
	displays -- for example, a display containing several Fx Bar Graph 
	objects may load slowly. 
	
	The Fx Bar Graph is drawn inside a Flash Player window. This 
	means thats the Fx Bar Graph will be drawn above all other objects 
	in a display (except other Fx Bar Graph objects) regardless of the 
	object order -- the "Move to Front/Back" operation has no affect on 
	the Fx Bar Graph. Also, in the Builder, if an Fx Bar Graph extends 
	beyond the edges of the display, it will obscure other panels in the 
	Builder, such as the object palette, property sheet, etc. When 
	zooming or scrolling in the Display Builder or Display Viewer, the Fx 
	Bar Graph will obscure any portion of the vertical and horizontal 
	scrollbars that it overlaps. 
	
	In the thin client, if the context menu is opened near an Fx Bar Graph 
	object, the menu will be partially hidden by the Fx Bar Graph. Also, a 
	right click inside an Fx Bar Graph will open the Flash Player menu, 
	not the thin client's context menu. 
	
	When moving an Fx Bar Graph object in the Builder, it is best to grab 
	and drag the graph by one of its edges, just inside the selection 
	hilite rectangle. The graph can't be dragged from within the trace 
	area, since that will initiate a zoom. It can be dragged by other 
	interior areas but it may not move smoothly. 
	
	The Fx Bar Graph is not included in reports. However, in the thin 
	client, the graph can be printed by right-clicking on the graph and 
	selecting Print from the menu. 
	
	The legendTextFont property does not support bold fonts, for 
	example Serif and SerifBold have the same appearance (unbold).
	
	The following are differences between the Fx Bar Graph and the pre-existing Bar Graph:
	
	   - If yAxisAutoScale is off, a bar with a y value greater than 
	yValueMax will be invisible.
	
	   - Bar colors cannot be set. The default colors are always used
	
	   - If there are more than 28 bars per group, bars 29 and above are 
	black.
	
	   - Scrolling is not supported
	
	   - barImage is not scaled to fir the bar width.
	
	   - If rowSeriesFlag is on, the drawStackedFlag property is ignored.
	
	   - If yAxisAutoScaleMode is on,  the yAxisMajor/MinorDivisions 
	property is ignored.

Fx Trend Chart

14642: Fx trend graph now showing static data in composite objects
	In the previous release, the Fx Trend did not plot data from a static 
	data attachment if the trend was contained in a composite object. 
	This is fixed.

14729: Data now plotted for a single numeric column
	In the previous release, if the traceNValue property of the Fx Trend 
	Graph was attached to a table with a single numeric column, no 
	points were plotted. This is fixed.

Trend Charts

14749: y-axis autoscale now correct when first y value is NaN
	Previously, the trendgraph's y-axis autoscale mode did not  compute 
	the correct y-axis range if the first value in the trace was NaN. This is 
	fixed.

Oracle Coherence Monitor

14622: Alert mechanism added to Oracle Coherence Monitor
	The ability to generate and customize Alerts has been added to the 
	Oracle Coherence Monitor application.
	
	Alerts may be managed by administrators, who set the threshold 
	values as desired within the GUI of the Oracle Coherence Monitor 
	application.
	
	An initial set of 7 alert types is available:
	
	Available Memory Low for Cluster
	Available Memory Low for Node
	Bad Communication by Cluster
	Bad Communication by Node
	Capacity Limit for All Caches
	Capacity Limit for Cache
	Endangered StatusHA for All Caches

14644: Restructuring of application directory and scripts
	The organization of the Oracle Coherence Monitor (OCM) has 
	changed, as have the scripts used to run it.  
	
	DIRECTORIES
	
	Oracle Coherence Monitor no longer in a single directory, but has 
	been integrated more closely into the RTView directory 
	structure.
	
	Main class files and displays - All of the files necessary to run the 
	Oracle Coherence Monitor are now included in lib/gmsjocm.jar, 
	which is included in the classpath when you pass in the -ocm 
	argument.  As a consequence, you are not required to run the OCM 
	from a specific location.
	
	Run scripts - The scripts are now located in the RTV_HOME/bin 
	directory, and are included in the users PATH in an initialized 
	command windows.
	
	Documentation - Expanded documentation can now be found in the 
	RTView Userguide, in the Monitoring Oracle Coherence 
	subsection.
	
	Simulated Cluster - The simulated cluster is now located in 
	demos/ocmdemodata.
	
	Customization - The demos/ocmdemo directory contains copies of 
	the configuration files that are included in lib/gmsjocm.jar, as well 
	as some new examples of customization.
	
	JMX CONNECTIONS
	
	The Oracle Coherence Monitor connection is controlled via the 
	$conn substitution. Previously $conn was set to "Development" by 
	default, and "Development2" was used to connect to a remote JMX 
	RMI.
	
	"Development" has been renamed to "LocalJmxNode", and 
	Development2 has been renamed to "RemoteJmxRMI".  
	"RemoteJmxRMI" is now the default value of $conn.
	
	SCRIPTS
	
	RTView applications now recognize two new 
	mutually-exclusive command line arguments, -ocm and -ocmnode. 
	They must be the first argument used.
	
	-ocm: Adds gmsjocm.jar to the classpath, and by default connects 
	RTView applications to Oracle Coherence via a remote 
	JMX RMI on port 9991. 
	
	-ocmnode: Adds gmsjocm.jar and COHERENCE_HOME/lib/
	coherence.jar to the classpath, runs the application as an Oracle 
	Coherence Node, and sets $conn to LocalJmxNode.  By default -
	Dtangosol.member.name will be set for you, but you can override 
	this default by setting -Dtangosol.member.name in the 
	RTV_JAVAOPTS variable.
	
	The scripts have been replaced as follows:
	
	run_monitor                          run_ocmonitor
	run_monitor_node              run_ocmonitor -ocmnode
	run_builder_node                run_builder -ocmnode
	run_historian_node             run_historian -ocmnode
	run_dataserver_node          run_dataserver -ocmnode
	run_displayserver_node     run_displayserver -ocmnode
	
	The old scripts will eventually be removed from the product.

14701: HSQLDB used for RTVHISTORY and ALERTDEFS database
	HSQLDB is now available for the new Oracle Coherence Monitor 
	application for persisting Alert definitions and saving data for the 
	Data Historian. 
	
	To start the database, you must run the following command line 
	script from the demos/ocmdemo directory:
	
	run_hsqldb
	
	The Oracle Coherence Monitor is configured to find and use this 
	database by default.

14712: New option to generate unique Node Names
	A new option, -idnames, can be used to start any of the Oracle
	Coherence Monitor applications.  If started with this option,
	node names will be forced to be unique, even if the Member Name
	is not uniquely assigned.

14714: Memory/Communication Trends by Node Display added
	Two new displays have been added, Memory Trends and 
	Communication Trends. These show the memory utilization and
	the communication failure rate for the worst ten nodes in a trend
	graph over a selectable time range.

14716: New Activity/Capacity Trend views for All Caches
	Two new displays have been added, the All Caches Activity and 
	Capacity Trends.  These show up to ten active Caches comparing 
	total activity or capacity against one another. The user can select 
	which metric to compare.

14718: Name changes in navigation tree
	The names of some of the displays in the navigation tree have been 
	changed to better reflect their purpose.

14725: Time range and cache name selectors now global
	The selection of Time Range or Cache is now retained across 
	a change of display.

14727: Admin pages now always visible, but buttons disabled
	The behavior of displays based on roles has been changed. Now, 
	the displays are always visible, but the buttons are disabled if user 
	does not have permissions.

14739: Mechanism added for including custom displays in navtree
	The Oracle Coherence Monitor application has been enhanced look 
	for, by default, a navigation panel configuration file called 
	"custom_navtree.xml".  If found it will read this file and add the 
	contents to the left hand navigation panel.  One sample display is 
	included by default in demos/ocmdemo.

14742: Eliminated need for substitution change to load historian data
	There is no longer any need to make changes to OPTIONS.ini 
	to select whether historical data comes from the database or in-
	memory tables. Historical data now always comes from in-memory 
	tables, and is pre-loaded from any HISTORY database available and 
	enabled.

14751: Show RTView Memory Utilization Information in Metrics Admin page
	The Metrics Administration display has been enhanced to show the 
	memory used by RTView to store the history of Cache 
	and Node statistics that are presented in trend charts.

14757: Service/Cache/Node dropdown lists auto-populate
	The dropdown lists for Service, Cache, and Node will now auto-
	populate based on the available selections. It is no longer 
	necessary to predefine selector variables with substitutions on 
	initialization. Also, when switching to a different service, the cache 
	selector is automatically set to the first cache in that service.

14758: All Caches Activity/Capacity Charts now scale better
	The Current Activity and Current Capacity charts now scale 
	graphically  to accomodate larger number of caches.

14759: Cache Statistics page now shows average object size
	The Cache Statistics page now shows average object size

14760: Storage Node Count on overview display is now correct
	On the Overview display, the Storage Node Count was sometimes 
	incorrect.  This problem has been corrected.

14764: Provide button to perform a Print PDF operation
	A new feature has been added to generate a PDF report consisting 
	of several of the key displays in the Oracle Coherence Monitor 
	application.  The button labelled "Generate Report" on the 
	Administration -> Admin Metrics display will cause the generation of 
	a PDF report from the configuration file ts_report.xml contained in 
	the gmsjocm.jar file.
	
	The generation of the PDF report requires a lot of memory, so it is 
	recommended that you add "-Xmx256m" to the RTV_JAVAOPTS 
	variable to increase the amount of memory available.

14818: The Invocation Service Detail page was incorrect
	The Invocation Service detail page was incorrectly showing the 
	same information as the Cache Service Detail page.  This has been 
	corrected.

Substitution

14755: 'Remove Existing Subs' no longer adds extra listener
	In previous releases, if an object's drilldown target was configured to 
	set a substitution in the current display and the 'Remove Existing 
	Substitutions' box was checked, in some cases this caused an extra
	listener to be added for any attachment on the display that used the 
	effected substitution. This caused the object to behave incorrectly, 
	for example a trend graph may plot spurious data points. This 
	problem is fixed.

Viewer

14641: Menus no longer obscured by Fx Trend graph in the Display Viewer
	The Fx Trend object no longer obscures the Display Viewer's 
	pulldown and context menus.

14681: Included files now can be found in .jar
	In prior releases, if an rtv file was loaded from a jar file and it 
	included another rtv file that was also contained in the jar, the 
	included file was not loaded. This is fixed.

Version 4.8d1 Release Notes

Builder

14605: Flash error when opening builder from shortcuts
	In the previous release, if the Display Builder was launched from the 
	Windows desktop shortcut and an instance of the Fx Trend was 
	created, on some installations the following error message would 
	appear
	
	     ERROR: can't load gmsflashwrap.dll
	
	This problem is fixed.

Display Server

14617: Corrections to servlet make_war scripts
	Typos were corrected in the following .war creation scripts:
	
	servlets/rtvdisplay/make_war.bat
	servlets/rtvdata/make_war.sh
	
	These should now run without error.

General

14606: Clicking background of display no longer throws exception
	In the 4.8c1 release, RTView would sometimes throw an 
	exception if you double-clicked in a blank area of a display. This has 
	been fixed.

Object Library

Composite Object

14560: Interactivity support for Display Builder and object grid
	In the previous release, the composite object had no support for 
	mouse interaction, drill down, commands and controls within 
	composite displays when running in the builder or when the 
	composite object was displayed in an object grid. The composite 
	object has been enhanced so that all of the features are now 
	supported, except in the main Display Builder window. These 
	features are suppressed in the main Display Builder window to 
	facilitate selecting and editing the composite object.

14607: Applets with composite objects fail without file access
	In the 4.8c1 release, the Display Viewer Applet would throw a 
	security exception if you display contained a composite object. This 
	has been fixed.

14609: Bug with composite object extent and data attachments fixed
	The 4.8 version of the composite object had the following issues:
	
	1. Data attachments for objX, objY, commandConfirmText and 
	transparency percent were not supported on objects in the 
	composite display.
	
	2. The extent used to layout out composite objects in an object grid 
	was off by one pixel, resulting in a one pixel shift of the object layout 
	in the object grid.
	
	Both of these issues have been fixed.

Version 4.8c1 Release Notes

Builder

14449: Corrupted .rtv file now reports error if it fails to load
	A corrupt RTView file that is read into the Builder or Viewer 
	will now report an error instead of silently failing.

14469: Fix for exception when no attributes exist for an mBean
	There is no longer an unexpected Java exception when editing a 
	JMX attachment where the mBean being accessed has no 
	attributes.

Commands

14477: Custom Data Source command dialog bug fixed
	Previously adding a new command to a multiple command, for a 
	custom data source with a non-all-lower case dsKey would bring up 
	the default  Define Command dialog, rather than the intended Define 
	Command dialog for the custom data source. This has been 
	corrected.

Data Server

14470: obj_text03 no longer shows long as float if using Data Server
	In the previous release, if the type of a data table column is long, and 
	if a cell in that column is displayed on a label object that supports a 
	string (rather than numeric) label, and if the table is accessed via the 
	data server, the value is displayed as a float (e.g. 123.0) rather than 
	a long (123). This is fixed.

Data Sources

IBM WebSphere MQ Administration Data Source

14395: Columns now validate for IBMADM if there are > 1
	Previously the attach to data  dialog for the IBMADM data source 
	would only correctly validate the Column(s): field for a single column. 
	The field will now correctly validate both single and multiple columns.

JMS Admin Data Source (for TIBCO EMS only)

14552: Additional EMS Server metrics incorporated
	The following metrics are now available for the ServerInfo table:
	
	diskReadRate
	diskWriteRate
	getProcessId
	maxMessageMemory
	messageMemory
	messageMemoryPooled
	processId
	syncDBSize

JMS Data Source

13936: Use JNDI to lookup JMS Destination names.
	Support for BEA Weblogic via JNDI (Java Naming Directory Interface) 
	has been added to RTView. At this time we do not 
	support the use of JNDI with other  JMS providers.
	
	This functionality requires that the BEA WebLogic specific jar(s) be 
	included in the RTV_USERPATH environment variable. 
	
	The Builder requires the use of of the Standard Weblogic jar in order 
	to extract and display JNDI administered destinations (Topics and 
	Queues) in the JMS Attatch to data dialog, and JMS Command 
	dialog.
	
	The viewer can be used with the Standard Weblogic jar or the thin 
	client jars.
	
	The user has the choice of using the Standard Weblogic jar
	
	example:
	set RTV_USERPATH=c:\BEA\server\weblogic92\lib\weblogic.jar
	
	or the thin client jars
	
	example:
	set RTV_USERPATH=c:\BEA\server\weblogic92\lib\wljmsclient.jar;
	c:\BEA\server\weblogic92\lib\wlclient.jar
	
	More information on the thin client jars can be found here:
	
	http://edocs.bea.com/wls/docs92/client/jms_thin_client.html 
	
	
	Creating a JNDI JMS Connection to BEA
	=====================================
	
	
	JMS JNDI Connections for BEA Weblogic destinations are looked up 
	in a naming directory
	
	e.g.	exampleQueue
		exmapleQueueViaJNDI
	
	
	To set up a JNDI connection, go to the JMS JNDI Connections tab 
	and click the Add JNDI button.
	
	Set the following fields:
	
	Connection Name: Define the name you would like for your 
	connection. (must be unique for all JMS Connections)
		
	Inititial Context Factory: Select the Weblogic Inititial Context Factory
	weblogic.jndi.WLInitialContextFactory from the Inititial Context 
	Factory drop down
		
	Provider URL:	The provider url is of the form: protocol://server:port
	The default protocol is t3, and the default port is 7001
	
	example:
	t3://weblogicServer:7001
		
	You can enter the entire URL by hand, or select the initial weblogic 
	URL from the Provider URL dropdown, and edit the parts that need 
	to be changed.
		
	Connection Factory: Enter or Select the JNDI Connection Factory name.
	
	For BEA Weblogic Select either of the default JNDI Connection 
	Factory names from the Connection Factory drop down. Both default 
	JNDI Connection Factory names can be used for both Topics and 
	Queues
		
	Security Principal: Security Principal and Security Credentials may 
	be left empty - in which case the default values will be used.
	
	Security Credentials:	See Notes for Security Principal.
	
	Attaching to JMS Data
	=================
	
	Connection: Choose the connection name you defined in Application
	Options
	
	Destination Type: Topic or Queue Browser
	
	Topic Name/Queue Name: For jndi connections, you can specify the 
	jndi name, by entering it, selecting it from the drop down list, or 
	selecting from the JNDI Destination name hierachical tree dialog 
	invoked using the "..." button.
		
	Select the desired destination name in the tree then click OK.
	
	Note that the full path of the selected name is used and is selected 
	in the drop down. If a valid Destination name is used, it will be 
	selected and visible in the hierachical tree dialog when it is invoked.
		
	example:
	JNDI-Topic-1
	
	Data Mode: Choose whether you wish to see fields, fields and 
	properties, or only properties
	
	Message Field: This dialog will currently not populate with the 
	message fields for BEA. You can select * to see all possible fields/
	properties, or type the message fields by name, separated by 
	semi-colons
	
	example:
	var1;var3
	
	
	Defining JMS Commands
	====================
	
	Connection: Choose the connection name you defined in Application 
	Options
	
	Destination Type: Only topics can be sent at this time.
	
	Message Type: Either Text or Map Message types are possible.
	
	Topic Name: For jndi connections, you can specify the jndi name in 
	the same way as the attatch to data dialog.
	
	example:
	JNDI-Topic-1
	
	Fields & Properties: Define as many fields/properties as are 
	needed. See the documentation for more information.

14458: JMS Queue Browser retrieves properties for all messages in group
	Previously, the JMS Queue Browser only retrieved message 
	properties for the first message in a group.  This has been fixed.

JMX Data Source

14389: Wildcard supported in the mBean name to the left of the colon
	it is now possible to use a * in the mBean name to the left of the 
	colon as well as the right. This should be in the form 
	SampleJmxHawk_*:*
	
	Methods and attributes may now be addressed in this way to 
	conveniently affect the behavior of similar beans on multiple 
	connections.

14396: Warning message given when read-only rights prevent access
	In the RTView 4.7 release, if the JMX connection did not 
	have permission to invoke operations, data attachments against 
	operations would fail silently. Now, an error message is printed.

14401: JMX Notifications expand composite attributes
	Support for expanding composite attributes was added to the 
	notified JMX data object.

14408: Command status returned for JMX commands
	The command status of an mBean operation invocation is now 
	returned as a message dialog, if an Exception is thrown in the 
	mBean.  This appears as an Error Dialog that shows the error as 
	ERROR: Exception name, COMMAND: the RTView Command string 
	and DETAIL: the details of the exception, if any.

14429: JMX notifications now support arrays of simple data types
	The JMX datasource now correctly handles notifications involving 
	arrays of simple types such as int[].

14509: JMX Command and Attach to Data dialogs retain window size
	The JMX Attach to Data and Command dialogs have been
	modified so that window size information is retained after
	the user resizes the window and closes/reopens the dialog.

14514: All beans queried to populate the list in attach to data dialog
	All beans on all connections are now queried to populate the list in 
	attach to data dialog.
	
	Additional work was done to ensure that all connections were 
	correctly polled to ensure that valid mbean name:wildcard 
	combinations are seen as valid.
	
	Extra corrupted rows of data are no longer returned if the connection 
	is *.

14518: *:* is supported in the mBean entry field of the mBean name
	Use of *:* in the mBean entry field of the mBean name is now 
	supported.  For Polled Data Objects ALL beans will be returned.  For 
	Notified Data Objects only beans that send notifications will be 
	returned.

14531: Column validation improved
	The column validation for JMX Notified Data Objects was improved. 
	Previously the Select Columns dialog would indicate that some 
	columns where invalid (pink) when they were available.  This has 
	been corrected.

RRD Data Source

14368: Support added for RRD Data Source
	Support has been added for the RRD (Round Robin Database) data source.
	
	The RRD Data Source does not support Solaris at this time.

SQL Data Source

14532: Improved handling of NaN values by storing as NULL in SQL
	The SQL Data Source now handles NULL values found in double 
	data, by converting them to NaN.  Additionally, the Historian will 
	convert NaN to NULL before writing the data. This permits tables 
	containing NaN values to be archived using the Historian.

StreamBase Data Source

12596: Performance improvements to StreamBase tuple processing
	The performance of StreamBase tuple processing in 
	RTView has been significantly improved. Previously, processing 
	could get behind, and even result in an infinite loop if there were 
	many tuples to process.  This problem has been fixed.

14472: Boolean data type supported in tuples
	Previously RTView did not support boolean types in 
	StreamBase tuples. Now it does.

14540: Table no longer shows blank row if no data received
	Previously, a table attached to a StreamBase stream would 
	show one blank row of data even though no tuples had been
	received.  This problem has been fixed.

14550: CSV history files enhanced to handle embedded NEWLINEs
	Streams containing embedded NEWLINES in string fields can now 
	be stored and loaded from CSV history files.

TIBCO Rendezvous Data Source

14414: Define TIBCO Rendezvous Command dialog supports multiple fields
	The Define TIBCO Rendezvous Command dialog has been 
	enhanced to allow you to specify multiple fields for your TIBCO 
	Rendezvous message. You can set the name, value and data type 
	for each field. The data types are converted to TibrvMsg data types 
	as follows:
	
	string - TibrvMsg.STRING
	integer - TibrvMsg.I32
	long - TibrvMsg.I64
	float - TibrvMsg.F32
	double - TibrvMsg.F64
	boolean - TibrvMsg.BOOL

XML Data Source

14442: RTView file now loads if XML ds has null sourcename (sub='')
	A display file previously would fail to load properly if there was an 
	attachment to an XML data source that used a substitution for the 
	XML source name and that substitution was defined to be "" or null. 
	This problem has been fixed.

Demos

JMX Monitor

14459: SampleJmxApp enhanced to send additional notifications
	The SampleJmxApp has been enhanced in several ways:
	
	1. It now sends the same set of Attributes as notifications.
	2. It now accepts a new command line argument of -notifyMovements:nnnn.
	3. It now sends a new list of Hawk indexes as HawkList.
	
	The -notifyMovements:nnnn argument will turn on sending of hawk 
	movements. The nnnn is the number of milliseconds delay before 
	each new set is resent.
	
		run_samplejmxapp -notifyMovements:2000
	
		This will show a trace in the console like:
	
	SampleJmxAgent is running...
	SampleJmxHawk_hawk_1:Hawk=hawk_1,Type=Foo,Random=4.6292412407998675 was added...
	Notifications sent at: 11:09:48 AM
	Notifications sent at: 11:09:50 AM
	Notifications sent at: 11:09:52 AM

Display Server

14375: Exit Display/Data Server if port is in use
	The Display Server task will exit if the configured port is already in 
	use.  The task will display an error message prior to exiting. In prior 
	releases, the error message was displayed but the task continued 
	to run.
	
	The Data Server task will exit if the configured port is already in use 
	and if the Data Server was run with either the -nogui or -daemon 
	option. This change only affects socket mode.

14564: Display Server no longer runs unsupported multiple commands
	In previous versions, multiple commands in the Display Server 
	would try to execute commands that were not supported by the 
	Display Server, even though they warned the user that they were not 
	supported. This has been corrected so that unsupported 
	commands are no longer executed.

14583: Radio buttons no longer crash the headless Display Server
	In the previous release, if the Display Server was run on a headless 
	system it would crash if a client opened a display containing a radio 
	button control. This problem is fixed.

Functions

14376: New Delta Rows function
	A new function, Delta Rows, has been added to the Display Builder.
	The Delta Rows function returns a table that includes, for the 
	specified columns, new values for the difference between this 
	update and the previous. The new values may be appended to the 
	input table in columns named by prefixing "Delta" to the column 
	name, or they may replace the values in the input columns. 
	
	The arguments to this function are as follows:
	
	Table - The table of interest. 
	
	Delta Column Names - The names of one or more columns for 
	which deltas will be calculated. At least one name must be given. 
	
	Index Column Names - The names of one or more columns that 
	uniquely identify a row in the table.  If left blank, the default is to 
	calculate deltas for all rows as if they had the same value. 
	The values contained in each index column are concatenated to 
	form a unique index used to organize the resulting summary data. 
	
	Replace Data With Deltas - If set to 1, the delta values replace the 
	original values in the same column in the returned table; otherwise 
	they are in new columns appended to the table. 
	
	Display Negative values - If set to 1, the delta values less than zero 
	will be displayed with a negative sign and the value; otherwise they 
	will be displayed as zero.

14427: Tabular Arithmetic Functions added
	The Display Builder has been enhanced with the addition of the 
	following functions:
	
	Add Columns
	Subtract Columns
	Multiply Columns
	Divide Columns
	Average Columns
	Min Columns
	Max Columns
	Percent Columns
	Modulo Columns
	
	These function operate upon the values in each row of the two input 
	columns and store the results in a new column. 
	
	If a specified column is not found in the input table, the functions 
	attempt to convert the string argument to a numeric value. If this 
	succeeds, the value is used as a constant in each row-wise 
	operation. If it fails, an error is printed and the input table is returned 
	unchanged.
	
	If a specified column is found but is not of a numeric type, an error is 
	printed and the input table is returned unchanged.
	
	Add, Subtract, Multiply, Average, Min, and Max Columns give a 
	Double result if either operand column is Float or Double; otherwise 
	the result is Long. Divide, Percent, and Modulo Columns always give 
	a Double result. If a divisor cell is zero the result is NaN.
	
	The Display Builder has also been enhanced with the addition of the 
	following function:
	
	Convert Columns
	
	This function converts the specified columns to the specified type 
	and stores the result in the original columns. 
	
	If a specified input column is not found it is ignored. If no input 
	columns are found an error is printed and the input table is returned 
	unchanged. 
	
	The type is specified as a string representing a valid type name, 
	which may be abbreviated to its first letter, Valid type names are: 
	Boolean, Integer, Long, Float, Double, and String. If an invalid value 
	is given, an error is printed and the input table is returned 
	unchanged. 
	
	If converting from Boolean the result will be 0 or 1 in the specified 
	type. If converting from String to Boolean the result will be True if the 
	input string is "1"or "true"(case insensitive), otherwise will be 
	False. Otherwise if converting from String the result will be zero if the 
	conversion fails.

14432: New functions added for comparison of scalars
	The Display Builder has been enhanced with the addition of the 
	following functions: Min, Max, Average. These functions operate on 
	two numeric arguments and return a numeric result.
	
	The Average function returns the average of the two arguments.
	The Min function returns the smaller of the two arguments.
	The Max function returns the larger of the two arguments.
	
	Note that the Display Builder previously included functions with the 
	names Min, Max, and Average that operated on all the rows or 
	columns of a table. These functions have been renamed to Min All 
	Rows Or Columns, Max All Rows Or Columns, and Average All 
	Rows Or Columns respectively. In addition the function previously 
	named Sum has been renamed to Add All Rows or Columns.

14439: "Public" column added to Display Builder Function dialog
	The Display Builder Function dialog now displays a column "Public" 
	indicating whether a function is defined to be public or not.

14457: Double quotes supported in function description field
	In the Display Builder Edit Function dialog, if the Description field 
	included double-quote characters, the function definition would not 
	be saved and restored correctly. This has been fixed.

14475: Corrected deadlock when Data Server applies data to listeners
	In the previous release, under certain conditions a deadlock can 
	occur in the function data source when data is received from the 
	Data Server. This has been fixed.

14495: Function dialog list now shows more than 100 functions
	In the Display Builder Functions dialog, if more than 100 functions 
	were defined in a display, only the first 100 would be listed in the 
	function table. This has been fixed.

14533: Enhanced support for NaN in functions
	Improvements have been made in the way RTView 
	functions handle values of type Double which are not valid numeric 
	values, such as the result of division by zero. These values are 
	represented in Java by the value "NaN" (Not a Number). Numeric 
	displays of this value will show "NaN" and string displays will show 
	a small square.
	
	There are three types of functions that can return NaN values: those 
	that operate on scalars, those that operate on pairs of table columns 
	("columnar"), and those that operate on all rows or or columns of a 
	table ("tabular"). In general additive functions will ignore an NaN 
	input and return a valid value and multiplicative functions will return a 
	
	NaN result given a NaN input. Detailed behaviors follow.
	
	Scalar functions given a NaN value: Add, Subtract, Average, Min, and 
	Max will return the other value; Multiply, Divide, Percent, Modulo, and 
	Delta will return NaN.
	
	Columnar functions given a NaN value in a pair of cells for a given 
	input row: Add Columns and Subtract Columns will return the other 
	cell's value for that row; Multiply Columns and Divide Columns will 
	return NaN for that row.
	
	Tabular functions include Add All Rows Or Columns, Average All 
	Rows Or Columns, Min All Rows Or Columns, and Max All Rows Or 
	Columns and operate across columns or rows. These functions all 
	ignore a NaN cell in their input.
	
	Please note that the above description represents a change in 
	behavior for the following functions:
	
	Scalar Add, Subtract, Average, Min, and Max would have returned 
	NaN if either input value was NaN; they now return the other value.
	
	Scalar Percent and Delta would have returned 0 if either input value 
	was NaN; they now return NaN.
	
	Scalar Divide and Modulo on an attempt to divide by 0 would have 
	returned 0; they now return NaN.
	
	Add Columns and Subtract Columns would have returned NaN if 
	either of a pair of input cell values was NaN; they now return the 
	other cell value.
	
	Add All Rows Or Columns and Average All Rows Or Columns would 
	have returned NaN for a row or column if there were any NaN cells in 
	the row or column; they now ignore the NaN cells.

General

14476: Warning message for duplicate included displays removed
	In prior releases, if a display includes the same file multiple times, 
	the Display Builder and Display Viewer would issue a warning 
	message. This warning message has been removed.

Object Library

Composite Object

14367: New Composite Object added to palette
	A composite object has been added to the palette. This object 
	displays an rtv file, allowing you to create object group templates for 
	use in your displays. The composite objects can also be used in 
	object grids.
	
	Public variables that are not mapped to substitutions in the 
	composite display are exposed as properties on the composite 
	object. Substitutions from the panel containing the composite object 
	are inherited by the composite object. Additional substitutions can 
	be specified using the substitutuions property.
	
	The composite object has limited support for mouse events, drill 
	down, command and controls within the composite display. These 
	items are supported only in the Display Viewer and Display Viewer 
	Applet, and only if the composite object is instanced directly in the 
	display. They are not supported at all for composite objects 
	instanced in object grids. In the Display Viewer and Display Viewer 
	Applet, if an object within the composite display has a drill down or 
	command assigned, this will be used instead of the drill down or 
	command on the composite object when the user selects it. The drill 
	down or command on the composite object will be used if the user 
	clicks on an empty area in the composite display or on an object in 
	the composite display that does not have a drill down or command 
	associated with it.

Fx Trend Chart

12722: New Fx Trend Graph object
	OVERVIEW:
	
	A new graph object named Fx Trend has been added. Fx Trend and 
	the existing trend graph object have similar features. However, the 
	interactive features of Fx Trend (scrolling, zooming, sliding cursor) 
	are fully supported in the thin client. Fx Trend also has a few 
	additional features unavailable in the trend graph.
	
	In the Builder, Fx Trend (obj_fxtrend)is found on a new tab in the 
	palette named Fx Graphs.
	
	FEATURE HIGHLIGHTS:
	
	Traces: supports 1 to 8 traces as determined by the traceCount 
	property.
	
	Zoom: zoom-in by dragging in trace area, zoom-out by Shift+Click.
	
	Scrolling: live scrolling through time range
	
	Cursor: slide horizontally to see interpolated data values in legend
	
	Data Tips: text boxes with data info popup when mouse is over a 
	data point
	
	Legend: can be positioned above, below, right, or left of trace area. 
	The legend can be resized interactively, and clicking on a trace's 
	legend entry toggles the visibility of the trace.
	
	Log Axis: logarithmic y-axis supported
	
	COLOR PROPERTIES:
	
	Color properties are treated differently on Fx Trend than on other 
	objects. In the Builder, the color chooser dialog has 4 tabs. The 
	"RTView Colors" tab shows the traditional palette of 252 indexed 
	colors; the "Swatches" tab shows a standard Java color palette; the 
	"HSB" tab allows color selection by hue, saturation, and brightness; 
	and the RGB tab allows color selection by red, green, and blue 
	intensity. The color chooser also has a button for selecting a 
	properties Default color (described separately for each color 
	property below).
	
	Internally, all color properties on Fx Trend are stored as a 24 bit 
	integer RGB value in the range of zero (black) to 16,777,215 (white). 
	So if a color property on an Fx Trend is attached to data, keep in 
	mind that it expects an integer value in that range, not a color index 
	between 0 and 252 as with other objects. A value of -1 indicates the 
	default property color.
	
	
	Note that the Default color and colors selected from the Swatches, 
	HSB, and RGB tabs are only supported on Fx Trend. If a color is 
	selected from one of those tabs and then copied and pasted to a 
	color property on any other object, white will be used instead.
	
	PROPERTIES:
	
	Like the trend graph, the Fx Trend has many configurable properties, 
	some of which apply to the overall object and some which apply to 
	each trace. The Fx Trend supports 1 to 8 traces as determined by 
	the traceCount property, which has a default value of 1. 
	
	
	The following properties apply to the overall object:
	
	Background:
	- bg3dFlag : if checked, a 3d border is drawn around the trend.
	- bgColor: the background color of the trend. The Default color is 
	steel gray.
	- bgGradient: if checked, the background is gradient filled.
	
	Data:
	- maxPointsPerTrace: if more data points than this are applied to a 
	trace, the oldest data points are discarded so that only this many are 
	plotted.
	
	Interaction:
	- cursorColor: color for the vertical cursor that slides across the 
	trace area.
	- cursorFlag: if checked, the vertical cursor is visible when the 
	mouse is in the trace area.
	
	Label:
	- label: the trend title text. Cannot contain newlines (\n). If blank, the 
	trace area increases to fill the title area.
	- labelTextAlignX: alignment for the trend title.
	- labelTextColor: color for all text on the trend, default is black.
	- labelTextFont: font for the trend title.
	- labelTextSize: size for the trend title.
	
	Legend:
	- legendBgColor: background color of legend area. If Default is selected, 
	the legend background is unfilled so the background of the 
	trend is visible.
	- legendBgGradientFlag: if checked and if legendBgColor is not 
	Default, the legend background is gradient filled.
	- legendPosition: indicates if the legend is positioned above, below, 
	left, or right of the trace area.
	- legendTextFont: font for legend text, note that bold fonts are not 
	supported.
	- legendVisFlag: the legend is visible only if this property is checked.
	- legendWidthPercent: the percentage of the trend width (or height, if 
	positioned at top or bottom) to be occupied by the legend.
	
	Plot Area:
	- traceBgColor: background color of trace (plot) area. If Default is 
	selected, the plot area backround is unfilled so the background of the 
	trend is visible.
	- legendBgGradientFlag: if checked and if traceBgColor is not Default, the 
	plot are background is gradient filled.
	
	X-Axis:
	- timeFormat: see the documentation for this property in 
	obj_trendgraph02. If blank, HH:mm:ss is used. (Some formats are 
	not supported, see below for details).
	- timeRange: the visible time range, in seconds. If the actual time 
	range of the plotted data exceeds timeRange, a horizontal scrollbar 
	will appear.
	- timeShift: the number of seconds by which the oldest timestamp in 
	the plotted data should be rounded down, and the newset 
	timestamp in the plotted data should be rounded up. If zero, no 
	rounding is performed.
	- xAxisFlag: the x-axis is visible only if this is checked.
	- xAxisMajorDivisions: the x-axis will have this many divisions, with a 
	tick mark and axis label at each division boundary. For example, if 
	xAxisMajorDivisions = 2, a tick mark and label will appear at the left 
	end, center, and right end of the x-axis. If zero, the number of 
	divisions is determined automatically.
	
	Y-Axis:
	- yAxisFlag: the y-axis is visible only if this is checked.
	- yAxisLabel: a text label for the y-axis (drawn vertically)
	- yAxisLogFlag: if checked, the y-axis is logarithmic (base 10). Note 
	that negative data points will not be plotted.
	
	The following properties apply to each trace 1 - 8:
	
	- trace1Label: label show for this trace in the legend and the popup 
	data tips.
	- trace1LineColor: color for trace line, each trace has a unique 
	default color.
	- trace1LineShadowFlag: if checked, a shadow is drawn below the 
	trace. Uncheck this for better performance on a trace with many 
	points. 
	- trace1LineThickness: thin, medium, or thick. Use thin lines for 
	better performance on a trace with many points.
	- trace1Value: can be attached to a scalar numeric data value, in 
	which case a new point will be plotted on each data update, using 
	the current time, or can be attached to a 2 column data table, where 
	the first column contains a timestamp and the 2nd column contains 
	the corresponding y value to be plotted.
	- trace1ValueDivisor: if nonzero, each y-value is divided by this 
	property before plotting.
	- trace1ValueTable: can be attached to a 2 column data table, where 
	the first column contains a timestamp and the 2nd column contains 
	the corresponding y value to be plotted. Typically this would be static 
	or update-once data attachment that did not update while the trend 
	was displayed.
	
	
	REQUIREMENTS and LIMITATIONS:
	
	The Fx Trend requires version 9.0 or newer of the Adobe Flash 
	Player.
	
	In the thin client, the Fx Trend is supported in any supported browser 
	that has the Flash Player installed. If a display containing an Fx 
	Trend is loaded into the thin client and the Flash Player is not 
	installed, a link to the Flash Player download page will appear on 
	the display. 
	
	In the Builder and Viewer applications, the Fx Trend is supported on 
	Windows platforms only. If a display containing an Fx Trend is 
	opened in the Builder/Viewer, and the correct version of the Flash 
	Player is not available or the local operating system is not Windows, 
	the Fx Trend will be blank and an error message will be issued. In 
	the Builder, the Fx Graphs tab is visible.
	
	The Fx Trend is not supported in the Viewer applet on any platform.
	
	The Fx Trend object can be resource intensive during display 
	loading and updating. This should be kept in mind when designing 
	displays -- for example, a display containing several Fx Trend 
	objects may load slowly.
	
	The Fx Trend is drawn inside a Flash Player window. This means 
	thats the Fx Trend will be drawn above all other objects in a display 
	(except other Fx Trend objects) regardless of the object order -- the 
	"Move to Front/Back" operation has no affect on the Fx Trend. Also, in 
	the Builder, if an Fx Trend extends beyond the edges of the display, it 
	will obscure other panels in the Builder, such as the object palette, 
	property sheet, etc. When zooming or scrolling in the Display Builder 
	or Display Viewer, the Fx Trend will obscure any portion of the 
	vertical and horizontal scrollbars that it overlaps.
	
	In the thin client, if the context menu is opened near an Fx Trend 
	object, the menu will be partially hidden by the Fx Trend. Also, a right 
	click inside an Fx Trend will open the Flash Player menu, not the thin 
	client's context menu.
	
	When moving an Fx Trend object in the Builder, it is best to grab and 
	drag the trend by one of its edges, just inside the selection hilite 
	rectangle. The trend can't be dragged from within the trace area, 
	since that will initiate a zoom. It can be dragged by other interior 
	areas but it may not move smoothly.
	
	The Fx Trend is not included in reports. However, in the thin client, 
	the trend can be printed by right-clicking on the trend and selecting 
	Print from the menu.
	
	The zoom-out feature (Shift+Click) is not available in the Display 
	Builder's main editing panel. So it is possible to zoom-in on the Fx 
	Trend but not to zoom-out. Both features are available in the 
	Display Builder's preview panel.
	
	Unlike the trend graph, the Fx Trend does not support properties for 
	yAxisMin/Max, yAxisAutoScaleMode, or timeRangeBegin/End. There 
	is a single y-axis and its range is always autoscaled. The range of 
	the time axis is always autoscaled.  Line styles, mark colors and styles,
	and alarm properties are not supported.
	
	If the yAxisLogFlag property is checked, data points with negative 
	values are not plotted since the base 10 log of a negative value is 
	undefined.
	
	The legendTextFont property does not support bold fonts, for 
	example Serif and SerifBold have the same appearance (unbold).
	
	The Fx Trend timeFormat property supports a subset of the time 
	formats available in the trend graph object (obj_trendgraph02). 
	These format characters are supported: y (year), M (month), d (day of 
	month), E (weekday), a (am/pm marker), H (hour 0-23 in day), K 
	(hour 0-11 in am/pm), m (minute), s (second). Also \n can be used 
	for a newline. These characters are NOT supported by Fx Trend: G, 
	w, W, D, S, z, Z.

Object Grid

14484: Performance improvements for obj_objectgrid
	The performance of the object grid has been improved. In previous 
	releases, the object grid's update could be slow if it was attached to 
	a table with a large number of rows, especially if the number of rows 
	was changing. This has been improved.

RTView Display Panel

14548: Default bg3dFlag changed to false for background model
	The default for the bg3dFlag model property has been changed to 
	false. Existing displays will not change, this change only impacts 
	new displays.

Transaction Message Monitor

12594: Single destination supported for all messages in transactions
	The Transaction Monitor has been enhanced to allow better support 
	of re-used destinations. In previous releases, the Transaction 
	Monitor had only limited support for re-using a single destination in 
	multiple transaction definitions. This enhancement allows you to 
	use the same destination as the first message in multiple 
	transaction definitions, and also allows you to use the same 
	destination multiple times within the same transaction definition.
	
	For each message that will be used as the first message in multiple 
	transactions, you must specify a transDefField at the beginning of 
	the TRANSACTIONS.ini. It must contain the destination name and 
	the corresponding field in that destination that will contain the value 
	that indicates which transaction the message is part of. All 
	transDefField definitions must all come before the first transaction 
	definition. For example:
	transDefField msgName fieldname
	
	Then, at the beginning of each transaction definition that contains a 
	message specified in the transDefField, you must add a 
	transDefValue. This must come before the first message line in the 
	transaction definition. The transDefValue must be the value that the 
	transDefField will contain if it is to be used to for this transaction:
	
	startBusTransaction myTrans
	transDefValue myTransaction
	msg msgA
	&
	
	For each message that will be used multiple times within a single 
	transaction definition, you must specify a msgOrderField at the 
	beginning of the TRANSACTIONS.ini. It must contain the destination 
	name and the corresponding field in that destination that will contain 
	the value that indicates which transaction the message is part of. All 
	msgOrderField definitions must come before the first transaction 
	definition. For example:
	
	msgOrderField msgA orderA
	
	Then, on each msg line that contains a message specified in the 
	msgOrderField, you must add a msgOrderValue. The 
	msgOrderValue must be the value that the msgOrderField will 
	contain if it is to be used to for this transaction:
	
	startBusTransaction myTrans
	msg msgA ID msgOrderValue:1
	msg msgA ID msgOrderValue:2
	
	This enhancement has also added improved error checking for 
	transaction definitions in the TRANSACTIONS.ini.

12705: Better debugging info for Transaction Monitor (TM)
	The Transaction Monitor has been enhanced to enable and disable 
	the display of debug data on an as needed basis through its JMX 
	MBean. Whereas in the past it was necessary to launch the 
	Transaction Monitor with the -debug command line parameter to 
	enable debug output, it is now possible to instead start and stop the 
	display of debug information directly through its MBean.

Version 4.7d1 Release Notes

Object Library

Control Objects

14415: Control object varToSet object property bug fix
	In the 4.7c1 release, the Attach to Data menu for the varToSet 
	property showed FUNCTION instead of VARIABLE. This has been 
	fixed.

Version 4.7c1 Release Notes

Alerts

13673: Tabular alert objects with only one column no longer crash
	In previous releases, tabular alert objects crashed if their data
	attachment only had one column. This has been fixed so that it does
	not crash, but prints an error instead.

Builder

12480: Drill down on a maximized window no longer causes window resize
	In the Display Viewer, under certain conditions, invoking
	a drilldown command whose target was the current display could
	result in the Viewer window being resized; specifically, it would be
	restored to normal if it was maximized.  This would happen only on
	Windows, and only if the Viewer were originally invoked with a
	pathname containing one or more forward slashes (e.g. "path/
	file.rtv"). This problem has been fixed.

14332: Local function deletion when namespace conflicts can be undone
	The Display Builder now supports undo/redo of deletion of a local 
	function when a global function with the same name exists.

Builder - Property Dialogs

14308: Attach to Data dialogs for included objects now all uneditable
	In the Display Builder, when invoking an Attach to Data dialog for an
	included object (an object from an included file), the fields in the
	dialog should be disabled, so that you can examine but not change
	the data attachment. There was a problem such that certain fields in
	some of the Attach to Data dialogs would not be disabled - in
	particular, those fields which invoked a subsidiary dialog via a '...'
	button. (An example is the Columns field in the Attach to XML Data
	dialog).  This problem has been fixed.

Commands

12367: Support added for multiple commands per action
	Multiple commands can now be defined, edited and executed.
	
	Everywhere where a single command could be defined and 
	executed, a sequence of commands can be executed by means of 
	the "MULTIPLE" command definition.
	
	The Define Multiple Commands dialog is presented when selecting 
	the Define Commmand->MULTIPLE to define a command.
	
	The Define Multiple Commands dialog allows for the creation, 
	editing, removal, duplication and reordering of single commands 
	within a multiple command.
	
	Existing single commands can be converted to a multiple 
	command, with the existing single command as the initial command
	in the command list, by selecting Define Command->MULTIPLE to 
	edit the existing command.
	
	Multiple commands consisting of a single command will be saved 
	as a single command.
	
	Multiple commands are executed as a sequence of individual 
	commands. The individual commands are launched in sequence. 
	There is no guarantee that any individual command will have 
	completed before the execution of the next command due to their 
	potentially asynchronous nature.
	
	If confirmation is required for a multiple command, a single 
	confirmation dialog is presented to the user prior to the execution of 
	the individual commands. If the user confirms the execution, all 
	individual commands are executed in sequence with no further 
	confirmation. If the user cancels the multiple command, none of the 
	commands in the sequence are executed.

14359: Multiple Commands supported on Display Server
	The multiple command feature is supported by the Display Server.
	For more information see the release note for E12367.

14363: System command no longer creates invalid drill down string
	In previous versions, it was possible to create an incorrect Drill 
	Down Command string if you left all dialogs blank, but still clicked 
	"OK".  This has been fixed so that no string will be created if you do 
	not enter any information in the Drill Down dialog.

14377: Non-interactive commands no longer ask for confirmation.
	Previously, non interactive commands(Heartbeart, Threshold and 
	Alert)  would ask for user confirmation before being executed if the 
	Confirm Commands property, in the General tab of the Applications 
	Options Dialog, was set to the  "Confirm all." value.
	
	This is no longer the case. Non Interactive commands now no 
	longer ask for confirmation.

Configuration Application

12716: Configuration Utility now discovers EMS Servers using routes
	In an environment including multiple TIBCO EMS servers with routes
	configured between them, the TIBCO EMS Servers tab of the 
	Application Options dialog will list the servers discovered via routes 
	(assuming "Discover Servers Using Routes" on the EMS 
	Administration tab is checked). While this worked correctly when the 
	Application Options dialog was invoked from the Display Builder, in 
	the Configuration Utility it did not work correctly; servers that should 
	have been discovered via routes were not listed. This has been fixed.

Customization

14357: Custom Data Source can reuse GmsTabularData in Data Server
	The Data Server has been enhanced to better support custom data 
	sources. Some custom data sources reuse instances of the 
	GmsTabularData object. For example, a data source may append a 
	new row of data to an existing data table, rather than creating a new 
	table with all of the rows. However in the previous release, the data 
	server did not always push a modified table to its clients. This has 
	been fixed.
	
	No changes are required to custom data source code to take 
	advantage of this improvement, provided all the modifications the 
	data source makes to an existing GmsTabularData object involve at 
	least one of the following methods: setCellValue, setDateCellValue, 
	addRow, removeRowAt, insertRowAt, addColumn, 
	removeColumnAt, appendData, sortRows.
	
	If a custom data source modifies a GmsTabularData object without 
	using one of those methods, it should call the bumpModCount 
	method afterwards. It is harmless to call bumpModCount more than 
	once per modification to the table.

Data Sources

12564: Missing data source jar warnings removed
	In previous releases, an error was printed to the console if the jar for
	any of the standard licensed data sources was not found. These
	errors are now only printed if you use the -dsfailtrace command line
	argument.

IBM WebSphere MQ Administration Data Source

12737: Additional columns added to Channel table for IBMADM data source
	The following columns have been added to the Channel table:
	
	Buffers received, Buffers sent, Bytes received, Bytes sent, Batches completed
	
	These values use the following internal attributes
	MQIACH_BUFFERS_RECEIVED, MQIACH_BUFFERS_SENT, 
	MQIACH_BYTES_RECEIVED, MQIACH_BYTES_SENT, 
	MQIACH_BATCHES

JMS Admin Data Source (for TIBCO EMS only)

13968: RTView no longer crashes if TIBJMS_ROOT is unset
	In previous releases, RTView crashed if the TIBCO EMS
	Administration data source was licensed, but the TIBJMS_ROOT
	environment variable was not set. This has been fixed.

JMX Data Source

12639: Support added for arguments in JMX data attachments
	Support has been added for arguments in JMX data attachments. 
	
	When using the Attach to JMX Data dialog, if an attribute or operation 
	is selected which requires arguments, the necessary dialog fields 
	are displayed in the dialog to allow for their input.  
	
	RTView passes the data to the MBean with no additional data 
	validation.
	
	This functionality is limited to 20 arguments.

12715: Wildcard support in Connection and mBean Name with notifications
	Wildcards are now supported in Connection and mBean name
	fields of a JMX Data Attachment.
	
	1. Star (*) in Connection
	
	Using a * in the Connection field allows the data object to ask for 
	data from all mBeans of the given type from all visible connections.
	
	2. Star (*) in mBean name (Key/Properties in mBean name)
	
	Using a * in the mBean name allows mBeans of the same type but 
	offering different data to share a connection.  Only a single * is 
	allowed in the RTView mBeanName for a given data object and it 
	must occur after the final colon.
	
	E.g. the mBean names offered by a Connection could be 
	"myBean:type=1" and "myBean:type=2".  By using a star, references 
	to data from both mBeans may be specified as: "myBean:*". All 
	key/property pairs from the colon will be used.
	
	3. Fetch Initial Data for Notified Data objects
	
	The previous implementation of JMX notifications did not poll for 
	initial data values.
	
	4. Star (*) or semi-colon delimited list of attributes for Notified Data 
	objects
	
	The previous implementation of JMX notifications did not allow for * 
	or a list of ttributes to be used.

12747: Can now define a local MBeanServer connection
	The RTView JMX Datasource can now make a connection to a local 
	MBeanServer.  This avoids the remote RMI connection.  SImply put 
	the word "local" into the URL field when defining a new JMX 
	Connection.  This will indicate that the connection will find an in-
	process MBeanServer and use it for the connection.

14329: JMX security credentials passthrough supported
	User login credentials can now be passed into the JMX connections.
	To specify that a connection should use the user credentials, select 
	the Use Client Credentials checkbox in the Add JMX Connection 
	dialog. If this is selected, the user credentials from the 
	RTView login will be passed into the JMX connection. The User 
	Name and Password from the Add JMX Connection dialog will not 
	be used. If Use Client Credentials is selected, the connection will 
	only be made if the application is running with the login enabled.
	
	When using this feature with the Data Server, you must use the 
	-passclientlogin command line option or select the Use Client 
	Credentials for Database Login option in the Data Server interface in 
	addition to running the Display Viewer or Display Viewer Applet with 
	the login enabled. 
		
	When using this feature with the Display Server, you must use the 
	-passclientlogin command line option in addition to setting the 
	LoginEnabled flag in the servlet.

14398: Argument fields now show for solitary operation
	In previous versions, when an operation was selected from a JMX 
	Application that had only1 operation, the argument fields would fail 
	to display in the Attach to Data Dialog. This has been fixed.

OSISoft PI Data Source

14340: Long point names in PI Data Source no longer cause crash
	Previously, point names longer than 80 characters would cause 
	RTView applications to crash.  Although 
	RTView still cannot retrieve data for points with tagnames longer 
	than 80 characters, applications will continue to run.  In the builder, a
	warning label is displayed if a point name longer than 80 characters 
	is selected or entered when attaching to the PI Data Source.

14341: Historical data retrieval algorithms in PI Data Source improved
	When retrieving historical data using the GetArcValuesX method, 
	time intervals with missing data were not handled properly.  The 
	retrieval algorithm has been modified to return interpolated values if 
	no archived data is available for the specified time interval.

StreamBase Data Source

14360: Streambase version 3.7.7 now supported
	We now support Streambase version 3.7.7.  Prior versions will no 
	longer be supported.

Drill Down

14317: Drill Down location, title and modality in Display Server
	The title, position, and modality of browser popup windows opened 
	from the thin client can be configured using the new features 
	described in the release note for E10785.
	
	The following limitations apply to this feature in the thin client:
	
	- Setting the Window Mode to Topmost has no effect; it is equivalent 
	to setting Window Mode to Normal.
	
	- A modal popup will not prevent the user from closing the main 
	browser window.
	
	- If the specified position for a popup would cause it to be completely 
	off-screen, the position will be adjusted so that the popup is at least 
	partially on-screen.
	
	- When a modal popup is open, if the user clicks outside of the 
	display from which the popup was opened, but still within the same 
	browser instance (for example, in another frame or iframe), the 
	modal dialog may be obscured. When the mouse is moved across 
	or clicked in the parent display, the modal dialog will be raised to the 
	top.
	
	- In Firefox, after closing a modal popup the next mouse click in the 
	parent window is sometimes ignored.
	
	- A popup window configured to open in the center of the screen or 
	the center of its parent may open slightly lower than expected.

Functions

12631: Function no longer fails when time column is not first column
	In the previous release, the Group by Time (and Unique Value) 
	functions failed if the filter column specified was not the first column 
	returned by the data attachment.  This has been corrected.

12720: User prompted to confirm before deleting an active function
	The Display Builder Functions dialog has been enhanced so that if
	you try to remove a function that is being used in the current display,
	you will receive a dialog warning you that the function is in use and
	asking you to confirm its removal.

12724: Additional information about functions available
	The Display Builder has been enhanced to give you more
	information about functions as you create and edit them within a
	display.  
	
	Global functions are now included. Previously functions defined in
	global files were available for use in the Attach to Function Data
	dialog but were not included in the Function dialog.
	
	Functions can now have a description. When editing a function you
	may include a textual description of any length. This information will
	be saved with the display.
	
	Functions are displayed in tabular form with additional information.
	The function table will display, in addition to the function name:
	
	Description
	
	Local - true (checked) if the function is defined in the current
	display
	
	Source - if a function is defined in a global or an include file, the
	name of that file
	
	Uses - the number of times the function is used in the current 
	display.
	
	The function table may be sorted on any of these columns by
	clicking the column header.
	
	Note that unless a function is defined in the current display (i.e. if it is
	global or included) it cannot be removed or edited; the Edit Function
	dialog may be invoked for the function but it will display information
	only. 
	
	Note also that an Edit button has been added to the Function dialog;
	the Edit Function dialog may also be invoked by double-clicking a
	function as before.
	
	Finally, note what happens if you have a global function of the same
	name as a local function. You will see only the local function in the
	dialog, and you will get a warning to the console like "Warning:
	function 'X' from file 'xxx.rtv' already found; second definition ignored".
	You will see this also if you open for editing a display containing
	functions that is also defined as a global file.
	
	The Edit Function dialog has been enhanced to include a text area
	for entering a description and to display the global file for a global
	function, as well as the include file for an included function. It will
	also display a reminder message about why the function is not
	editable if it is global or included.
	
	The Attach to Function dialog has been enhanced to display the
	description, if any, for the function selected.

12732: Global functions now supported in alerts
	In the prior release, global functions did not work if referenced in an 
	alert definition file. For example, if the value property of 
	obj_alert_limits was attached to a global function, the value 
	remained set at its initial value of zero, regardless of the global 
	function result. This problem is fixed.

12734: Data attachments in included functions are now uneditable
	In the Display Builder Edit Function dialog, when editing a function 
	that is not defined in the current display, the editable field in the 
	dialog are presented as read-only. However if a function argument 
	field was attached to data and was double-clicked, the Attach To 
	Data dialog would come up and would not be read-only. This 
	behavior has been changed as follows: if the argument is not 
	attached to data then double-clicking it will have no effect; 
	if it is attached to data, double-clicking it will bring up the Attach To 
	Data dialog, but the dialog will be read-only.

12740: Historian handling of function results has been optimized
	The Historian has been enhanced to avoid computing and storing a
	function result too frequently. For example, say an ADD function is
	used on a history display to add numeric fields from two
	Rendezvous messages. In prior releases, the ADD function result
	would be computed and stored whenever either message was
	received, even if both messages arrived at nearly the same time. In
	this release, if both messages are received at nearly the same time
	the function result will be computed and stored only once, using the
	values from the newly received messages.
	
	Displays that show historical function results in a table or graph
	should no longer show extra results for each argument update. If a
	function's arguments and its results are all stored by the historian, a
	slight difference may be seen between the timestamps of the
	arguments and the result. The difference should be less than a half-
	second.

14343: Private functions of global file no longer accessible
	In the previous release, it was possible for an object to be attached 
	to a private function from a global file. This is fixed.

14344: Function attachment attaches to global if local deleted
	The following enhancement has been made to the Display Builder. If
	a function defined in the current display is deleted, and objects in the 
	display are attached the function result, and there is a global 
	function with the same name, then if the local function is deleted the 
	attached object(s) will update to show the result of the global 
	function, since that is the function to which they are now attached.

14358: Changing references of filtered function attachments now works
	In the previous release, if a function was renamed in the builder and 
	the user opted to update existing attachments to use the new name, 
	and all of those attachments applied a filter to the function result, the 
	attachments were not updated but still referenced the old function 
	name. This is fixed.

14374: REFERENCE and COPY functions update immediately
	The REFERENCE and COPY function will update immediately when 
	the table argument is set, rather than waiting until the next expiration 
	of the redraw_rate timer.

Licensing

11820: Headless run_gmsregister available for getting PIN
	A new option, -nogui, has been added to the run_gmsregister script. 
	This option will bypass the registration dialog, and instead print the 
	PIN to the console. This is useful for licensing on headless systems.

Local Variables

11220: Global variables implemented
	Support has been added for global variables. Global variables are
	similar in many respects to global functions.
	
	In prior releases, an object's property could be attached to a variable
	either (a) defined in the current display, or (b) defined in another
	display file that is included by the current display.
	
	Note that (a) works best for a variable that is only used on one
	display, while (b) works best for a variable used on multiple
	displays, but where the variable's value can be different on each
	display. If a variable should have the same value on every display
	where it is used, then a global variable is appropriate. A global
	variable is also useful when used as an argument of a global
	function.
	
	As with global functions, a global variable is defined in a Global
	Definition file. Objects on any display can attach to a global variable,
	and any control object can set its value. A Global Definition file, or
	global file for short, is simply a .rtv file that has been selected on the
	Globals tab of the Options dialog. Each global file is loaded when an
	RTView application starts, and each variable or function
	in the display that is marked as public becomes a global variable or
	function. (See the release note on global functions for more
	information).
	
	The variable namespace is flat. If the same public variable name
	occurs in multiple global definition files, only the first one
	encountered will be used. If a local variable defined in the current
	display has the same name as a global variable, the local variable
	will be used.
	
	If an existing configuration uses global functions and any of the
	global definition files contain local variables, they will become global
	variables when using this release.  If the user does not want an
	existing variable to be global, it will be necessary to edit the display
	and uncheck the Public  checkbox for the variable.
	
	This feature is supported in all deployments. However, if this feature
	is used in combination with alerts, the behavior may vary by
	deployment. In a standalone Display Viewer deployment, the data 
	sources for alerts, variables, and functions are all contained within 
	the Viewer application. In the Display Server and Data Server
	deployments, however, the alert data source resides in the server, 
	and is not affected by changes to variables made in the viewer client.
	
	In the Thin Client, the scope of global variables and functions is
	intentionally limited to a browser session. In other words, if multiple
	displays are opened in the same browser instance (in multiple tabs
	or popup windows, for example) those displays will all share the
	same set of global variables and functions. However, displays
	opened in a different browser instance (a browser running on a
	different client, say) will use a separate set of global variables and
	functions. This is done so that any runtime changes a user makes
	to the value of a global variable (by clicking on a control object, for
	example) will not affect the displays on other clients. The Display
	Server will discard the set of global variables and functions for a
	client session if it receives no requests from the client for 10 display
	timeout periods (the default display timeout is 1 minute), or 5
	minutes, whichever is longer.

12725: Additional information about variables displayed
	The Display Builder has been enhanced to give you more 
	information about variables as you create and edit them within a 
	display. 
	 
	- Global variables are included. Previously variables defined in 
	global files were available for use in the Attach to Variable Data 
	dialog but were not included in the Variables dialog.
	
	- Variables are displayed in tabular form with additional information. 
	The variable table will display, in addition to the variable name:
	
		Scope  either Local, Included, or Global
		Source  if a variable is defined in a global or an include file, 
	the name of that file
	
	The variable table may be sorted on any of these columns by 
	clicking the column header.
	
	Fields in the dialog used to edit the properties of a variable will be 
	selectively disabled depending on the variables scope:
	
	- Included and Global variables: cannot remove or change Public 
	state
	- Global variables: cannot change initial value.

14351: Global definition files can now have spaces in name
	In the previous release, a filename that contained spaces could not 
	be specified as a global definition file. This problem is fixed.

Object Library

Control Objects

12630: Empty string supported in control object *listValues
	The listValues property of the combo box and list box control objects
	can now specify an empty string for an item's label or value. This
	also applies to the radioListValues property of the radio control.
	
	For example, if the following string is assigned to the listValues
	property of a list box, the list box will display 3 items where the 2nd
	item is an empty string:
	
	item1;;item3

12723: Keyboard traversal of control objects improved
	To improve keyboard traversal of control objects in a display, an
	integer property named tabIndex has been added to the following
	control objects: 
	
		all text controls (obj_c1text*)
		button (obj_c1button)
		combo (obj_c1combobox)
		checkbox (obj_c1btn_chk)
		radio button (obj_c1radio)
		list box (obj_c1tlb)
		table (obj_table02)
	
	The default value of tabIndex is zero.
	
	When a display is opened, keyboard focus will be given to the
	control object on the display with the smallest positive tabIndex, if
	any. Objects which are disabled, invisible, or have a tabIndex of zero
	or less will not be considered. If the smallest positive tabIndex is
	assigned to several objects on a display, the one nearest to the
	beginning of the display's object list will receive the initial focus.
	
	Focus can be transferred from one control to the next by pressing
	Tab, or to the previous control by pressing Shift+Tab. (In some
	controls, such as obj_c1textarea, the Ctrl key must also be pressed
	to transfer focus). In this release, the tabIndex property determines
	tab order. Controls with a tabIndex <= 0 are last in the tab order,
	otherwise the tab order follows increasing tabIndex values.  If
	several controls have the same tabIndex, the tab order among them
	is determined by their order in the display's object list.
	
	For example, say a display has 4 text controls named N1, N2, N3,
	and N4, and they appear in the display's object list in the following
	order with these tabIndex values:
	
	N1	10
	N2	20
	N3	20
	N4	0
	
	Assume all 4 text controls are visible and enabled. When the display
	is opened, focus will be assigned to N1, since it has the smallest
	tabIndex greater than zero. Pressing Tab will transfer focus first to
	N2, since it has the next larger tabIndex (note that N3 has the same
	tabIndex but appears after N2 in the object list), then to N3, and
	finally to N4.
	
	A property named defaultButtonFlag has been added to the button
	control object (obj_c1button). If a display contains a button whose
	defaultButtonFlag property is true, the button can be activated
	(clicked) by pressing the Enter key when the display has keyboard
	focus. The button must also be visible and enabled. If several
	buttons on a display have defaultButtonFlag checked, it will be
	ignored on all but the first. The default button is higlighted with an
	extra border.
	
	Limitations:
	
	In the Viewer, the following objects give no indication when they have
	keyboard focus: checkbox, radio button, and listbox (if the selected
	list item is not visible).
	
	Focus traversal of radio buttons differs between the Viewer and the
	thin client. In the Viewer, Tab transfers focus within a radio group
	and spacebar selects the focused radio button. In the thin client, the
	arrow keys transfer focus between buttons within a radio group, and
	transferring focus from one button in a radio group to another
	selects the newly focused button.
	
	In the thin client, the tabIndex property has no effect on the table
	object, so a table object cannot be given the initial focus nor can it 
	be given focus via the tab key.
	
	In the thin client in Firefox, the default button is activated via the Enter
	key only if another control object has focus when the Enter key is
	pressed. If no control on the display has focus, nothing occurs when
	the Enter key is pressed.

Stock Chart

12739: yAxisFormat and yValueFormat properties added to stock chart
	Properties named yAxisFormat and yValueFormat have been added
	to the stock chart.  These properties have been available on other
	graph objects, such as the trend graph and xy graph, in prior
	releases.
	
	The format of the y-axis labels is determined by yAxisFormat.  The
	format of the y values shown on the legend is determined by
	yValueFormat. Both properties are blank by default, indicating that
	a format with 2 decimal places (0.00) should be used.

RTView Display Panel

10875: Allow user to specify location, title and modality for dd window
	The Drill Down Properties dialog has been enhanced to allow the
	user to specify Window Position, Window Title and Window mode for
	newly created Drill Down windows.
	
	Window Position
	===============
	Window position can be used to specify the position of newly 
	created Drill Down windows.
	
	Window position can be set to one of five modes using Set Window
	Position combo box.
	
	The five position modes are:
		Default
		Center of Screen
		Center of Parent
		Relative to Screen
		Relative to Parent
		
	Default: 
	This is the previous positioning behavior for new Drill Down 
	windows. The client OS window manager will position the newly 
	created Drill Down window.
	
	Center of Screen: 
	The newly created Drill Down window will be centered on the screen
	the parent window occupies. The parent window is the window the
	newly created Drill Down window was launched from.
	
	Center of Parent: 
	The newly created Drill Down window will be centered on the 
	window from which the newly created Drill Down window was 
	launched.
	
	Relative to screen:
	The newly created Drill Down window will be positioned relative to 
	the screen the parent window occupies. The position of the newly 
	created Drill Down Window is specified in the pixel offset (Pixels 
	from left: and Pixels from top:) of the top left corner of the newly 
	created Drill Down Window from the top left corner of the screen the 
	parent window occupies. The parent window is the window from 
	which the newly created Drill Down window was launched. The user 
	must enter the Pixels from left: and Pixels from top: as integer values.
	
	Relative to Parent:
	The newly created Drill Down window will be positioned relative to 
	the parent window. The position of the newly created Drill Down 
	Window is specified in the pixel offset  (Pixels from left: and Pixels 
	from top:) of the top left corner of the newly created Drill Down 
	Window from the top left corner of the parent window. The parent 
	window is the window from which the newly created Drill Down 
	window was launched. The user must enter the Pixels from left: and 
	Pixels from top: as integer values.
	
	Window Title:
	=============
	Window Title can be used to specify the Title (text in the title bar) of 
	newly created Drill Down windows.
	
	The user can set the title by entering the literal title text in the Window
	Title: text field.
	
	If the title is not set, or is empty, then the existing title mechanism 
	will be used (This is the application name followed by the drill down 
	display file name)
	
	
	Window Mode
	===========
	Window Mode can be used to specify the stacking order and 
	behavior of newly created Drill Down windows.
	
	Window Mode can be set to one of the three modes using the 
	Window Mode radio buttons.
	
	The three window modes are:
		Normal
		Modal 
		Always on top
		
	Normal: 
	This is the previous behavior for newly created drill down windows.
	The newly created Drill Down window will be modeless, that is it 
	allows user input in the newly created  Drill Down Window, and any 
	other window created by the application. The stacking order of the 
	newly created window is determined by the setting of the "Drill Down
	Windows Always on Top" global option.
	
	
	Modal: 
	The newly created Drill Down window will be an application modal 
	dialog, that is it allows user input in only the newly created Drill 
	Down Window, and user input will be ignored in any other window 
	created by the application. The stacking order of the newly created 
	modal window is on top of all the other application windows to 
	prevent it being obscured by them. It does this by using the 
	setAlwaysOnTop property
	
	
	Topmost: 
	The newly created Drill Down window will be a modeless window 
	that has the setAlwaysOnTop property set to true. The newly created 
	Drill Down window will be modeless, that is it allows user input in 
	the newly created Drill Down Window, and any other window created 
	by the application.
	
	The stacking order of the newly created Drill Down window is on top 
	of all the other non "topmost windows". This applies independent of 
	the setting of the "Drill Down Windows Always on Top" global option.
	
	
	setAlwaysOnTop property
	
	setAlwaysOnTop
	
	Note on setAlwaysOnTop from 
	http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.5.0/docs/api/java/awt/window.html#setAlwaysOnTop(boolean)
	
	Changes the always-on-top window state. An always-on-top window 
	is a window that stays above all other windows except maybe other 
	always-on-top windows. If there are several always-on-top windows 
	the order in which they stay relative to each other is not specified and 
	is platform dependent.
	
	If some other window already is always-on-top then the relative 
	order between these windows is unspecified (depends on platform).
	No window can be brought to be over always-on-top window except 
	maybe another always-on-top window.
	
	All owned windows of an always-on-top window automatically 
	become always-on-top windows. If a window ceases to be always-
	on-top its owned windows cease to be always-on-top.
	
	When an always-on-top window is sent toBack its always-on-top 
	state is set to false.
	
	This method makes the window always-on-top if alwaysOnTop is 
	true. If the window is visible, this includes bringing window toFront, 
	then "sticking" it to the top-most position. If the window is not visible 
	it does nothing other than setting the always-on-top property. If later 
	the window is shown, it will be always-on-top. If the Window is 
	already always-on-top, this call does nothing.
	
	If alwaysOnTop is false this method changes the state from always-
	on-top to normal. The window remains top-most but its z-order can 
	be changed in the normal way as for any other window. Does 
	nothing if this Window is not always-on-top. Has no effect on relative 
	z-order of windows if there are no other always-on-top windows.
	
	Note: some platforms might not support always-on-top windows. 
	There is no public API to detect if the platform supports always-on-
	top at runtime.
	
	If a SecurityManager is installed, the calling thread must be granted 
	the AWTPermission "setWindowAlwaysOnTop" in order to set the 
	value of this property. If this permission is not granted, this method 
	will throw a SecurityException, and the current value of the property 
	will be left unchanged. 
	
	The AWTPermission is set using the PolicyTool as described here 
	http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.5.0/docs/tooldocs/windows/policytool.html

Transaction Message Monitor

12593: Supported added for queues and temporary destinations
	The Transaction Monitor has been enhanced to support standard 
	queues and temporary destinations (both topics and queues) for 
	transactions that use TIBCO EMS. The queue messages are not 
	consumed. For both queues and temporary destinations, the TIBCO 
	system monitor messages are used to get the message, so in 
	order to use these in your transactions, you must use a connection 
	that has permission to receive system monitor messages. The 
	system monitor messages generate additional overhead on your 
	EMS server, see your TIBCO documentation for more information. 
	Note that TIBCO does not guarantee system monitor messages, so 
	we may not receive system monitor messages for some queue or 
	temporary destination messages. This means that the Transaction 
	Monitor may report that a transaction is stalled, when it actually 
	completed. The system monitor messages may also not be sent at 
	the same time as the original message, so the latency values my 
	not be accurate. There is no workaround for this. However, in most 
	cases, they will be sent at about the same time the original 
	message was sent.
	
	Queue Support:
	On the msg line of your transaction definition in TRANSACTIONS.ini, 
	preface your destination with QUEUE: in order to specify a queue. 
	For example:
	
		msg QUEUE:status.queue.current $prop:ID
	
	Instead of subscribing directly to the queue, the Transaction Monitor 
	will subscribe to the system monitor message for that queue. For 
	example
		$sys.monitor.Q.r.status.queue.current
	
	When this message is received by the Transaction Monitor, the 
	original message is retrieved from the message_bytes field of the 
	system monitor message and processed. Only the header and 
	property information for the original message can be retrieved from 
	the message_bytes field, so the id field for all queue messages 
	must be a property or header. IDs in message fields are not 
	supported for queue messages.
	
	The connection for this message must have permission to receive 
	system monitor messages and must be to the sending server (ie 
	the queues home server), since this system monitor message is 
	generated when the queue message is sent by the producer.
	
	Temporary Destination Support:
	Temporary destinations are supported on any message in your 
	transaction definition, except the first message. The first message 
	must be a standard (non-temporary) topic or queue. On the msg line 
	of your transaction definition in TRANSACTIONS.ini, use 
	TEMP_DEST in order to specify a temporary destination. For 
	example:
		startBusTransaction myTransaction
		msg status.topic.current ID
		msg TEMP_DEST $prop:ID
		interface myInterface
		endBusTransaction
	
	Since the Transaction Monitor does not know in advance which 
	destination a temporary destination will resolve to, it will subscribe 
	to the system monitor messages for all temporary destinations on 
	the each connection in your transaction definition that contains a 
	temporary destination. When the message previous to the 
	temporary destination message in the transaction definition is 
	received (staus.topic.current in the example above), the Transaction 
	Monitor will get the destination from the JMSReplyTo property to 
	determine which temporary destination will be used for the next 
	message in the transaction. This destination is always on the same 
	server that sent the message, so the connection for temporary 
	destination, as well as the previous message containing the 
	JMSReplyTo value, must be to the server that sent the message (ie 
	the home server for the topic or queue). This connection must have 
	permission to receive system monitor messages.
	
	By default, if a transaction definition contains a temporary 
	destination the Transaction Monitor will subscribe to these system 
	monitor messages:
		$sys.monitor.Q.r.$TMP$.>
		$sys.monitor.T.r.$TMP$.>
	
	You can narrow down the number of system monitor messages that 
	will be sent to the Transaction Monitor in 2 ways. First, you can 
	specify that you are only using temporary topics or temporary 
	queues by using the tempdestmode: command line property or the 
	tempdestmode parameter in TMOPTIONS.ini. For example, on the 
	command line:
		-tempdestmode:TOPIC_ONLY 
		-tempdestmode:QUEUE_ONLY 
	For example in TMOPTIONS.ini:
		tempdestmode TOPIC_ONLY
		tempdestmode QUEUE_ONLY
	
	If the TOPIC_ONLY option is specified, the Transaction monitor will 
	not subscribe to $sys.monitor.Q.r.$TMP$.>. If the QUEUE_ONLY 
	option is specified, the Transaction Monitor will not subscribe to 
	$sys.monitor.T.r.$TMP$.>.
	
	
	The second way to narrow down the number of system monitor 
	messages that will be sent to the Transaction Monitor is to use the 
	tempdest: command line argument or tempdest parameter in 
	TMOPTIONS.ini to specify a more specific topic for the system 
	monitor messages. For example, on the command line:
		-tempdest:$TMP$.MyEmsServer.>
	
	For example in TMOPTIONS.ini:
		tempdest $TMP$.MyEmsServer.>
	
	This will be used instead of $TMP$.> in the system monitor 
	message subscriptions.
	
	Since TIBCO does not guarantee that the system monitor temporary 
	destination message will arrive after the previous message in the 
	transaction, the Transaction Monitor will store all temporary 
	destination messages that it receives that do not already have a 
	listener. In order to prevent a memory problem, temporary 
	destination messages that have been stored for 5 minutes without 
	any listeners registering for them are removed. This time limit can 
	be changed by using the tempdestexpire: command line option or 
	the tempdestexpire TMOPTIONS.ini parameter. These options take 
	a time argument in milliseconds. For example, on the command line:
	
		-tempdestexpire:10000
	
	For example, in TMOPTIONS.ini:
		tempdestexpire 10000
	
	The above example will delete temporary destination messages that 
	have been stored for more than 10 seconds without a listener. 
	
	The Transaction Monitor assumes that it will not have multiple 
	transaction instances using the same temporary destination at the 
	same time. For example, the JMSReplyTo value for the message 
	before the temporary destination resolves to a destination 
	$TMP$.12345. If the Transaction Monitor has received a message 
	from that destination that has not expired, it is assumed to be the 
	correct message for the transaction. If the Transaction Monitor has 
	not yet received a message from $TMP$.12345, it will assume that 
	the next message that comes in from that destination is the correct 
	message for the transaction.
	
	When a temporary destination message is received, the original 
	message is retrieved from the message_bytes field of the system 
	monitor message and stored until a listener requests it, or until the 
	specified expire time passes. Only the header and property 
	information for the original message can be retrieved from the 
	message_bytes field, so the id field for all temporary destination 
	messages must be a property or header. IDs in temporary 
	destination message fields are not supported.

Version 4.6c1 Release Notes

Alerts

12524: Alert demo added
	The Alert Demo has been added to the distribution to illustrate the basic 
	features of the RTView Alert Engine.

12671: Acknowledging multiple alerts now supported
	The Acknowledge Alert command has been enhanced to take multiple
	alert id's.  Specify a ; (semicolon) delimited list of alert id's for
	the ID argument to acknowledge multiple alerts from a single command.

Builder - Options Dialogs

12602: All Application Options settings now restored by Reset button
	In the Display Builder Application Options dialog, certain settings were 
	not restored to their previous values if you changed them and then clicked 
	Cancel. These settings included:
	
	Tab				Setting
	----				---------
	General			Drilldown Windows Always On Top
	Data Server			(All settings)
	TIBCO EMS Admininstration		(All settings)
	
	 
	This problem has been fixed.

Commands

12519: Heartbeat feature implemented
	A heartbeat feature has been added that allows the user to configure any of 
	the system or data source commands to be executed with a specified 
	periodicity.
	
	In addition to the commands, application level substitutions are supported, 
	together with the built-in $appName and $appVersion substitutions.
	
	The heartbeat option is configured using the Display Builder, and the
	heartbeat options are stored in the OPTIONS.ini file.
	
	To configure the heartbeat options:
	
	Run the Display Builder 
	
	Select the Tools->Options... Menu Item
	Select the General List item on the left of the Applications Options dialog.
	Select the Heartbeat Configuration tab at the right of the Applications Options
	dialog.
	
	You can enable/disable heartbeat using the check box.
	You can enter the heartbeat period (in milliseconds).
	You can configure the heartbeat command by selecting the type of command using
	the drop down list.
	This will bring up a define command dialog of the selected type.
	
	Configure the command using the command dialog.
	
	Use "Apply" or "OK" from the heartbeat configuration tab to use the configured 
	heartbeat in the current instance of RTView Builder. Use "Save" to 
	save the configured heartbeat for use by other servers.
	
	The heartbeat options are saved in the OPTIONS.ini file.

12538: Send SNMP Trap command implemented
	A new Command Type has been added to the RTView System Command: 
	Send SNMP Trap. This enables a display to send an SNMP Trap
	message such as would be sent from an SNMP Agent to a SNMP
	Management Station. 
	
	To configure an object in a display to execute a Send SNMP Trap
	command, right-click command in the objects properties and select
	System from the Define Command list. In the Define System
	Command dialog select Send SNMP Trap from the Command Type
	drop-down list. Click Define SNMP Trap Message to get to the
	Define SNMP Command dialog. Here you will see the following:
	
	Trap Type: The SNMP version of the trap.
	
	Destination Address: The system name or IP address of the
	receiving system.  The default value is 127.0.0.1 (localhost).
	
	Destination Port: The UDP port on the receiving system.  The default
	value is 162.  The value must be an integer greater than 0.
	
	Community Name: The SNMPv2 Community Name string.  The
	default value is 'public'.
	
	Enterprise OID: The SNMP Object ID to be used as the sender's
	Enterprise.  The default value is 'snmpTrap' (1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5).
	
	Generic Trap: Select one of the generic traps. 
	
	Specific Trap:  If the generic trap is 'EnterpriseSpecific' enter an
	integer value here.
	
	The Help button in the dialog will display the above information. The
	Reset button will reset all fields to the default values.
	
	When the command is executed (e.g. by double-clicking the object 
	in the Display Builder) the trap message will be sent.
	
	Use of the SNMP Trap command requires outgoing access to UDP
	port 162 (or a different port if specified in the command) from your
	installed Java Runtime Environment (if the display is running in an
	application) or your Web browser (if the display is running in the
	applet).

Configuration Application

11531: Stand-alone configuration utility added
	The Display Builder Application Options dialog is now available in a
	stand-alone Configuration Utility that may be run independent of the Display
	Builder to set options for applications and data sources. The Configuration
	Utility may be run with the command run_configutil and may be given the same
	command-line arguments as the Display Viewer.
	
	The introduction of the stand-alone Configuration Utility imposes new coding
	requirements on custom option tabs that will be added to the Application
	Options dialog, because the dialog's parent may now be either a JDialog or a
	JFrame. Custom option tab classes must be prepared to handle either scenario.
	The following examples illustrate how this should be done.
	
	1. Declare the dialog parent as a Window (superclass of both JDialog and
	JFrame) and provide overloaded class constructors for both cases.
	
	Previously:
	
		// XXX Option Tab class
		public class XXXOptionTab implements GmsRtViewOptionTabInt, . . .
	         {
	               private JDialog dialogParent;
	         . . .
	         }
	
	         // XXX Option Tab class constructor
	         public XXXOptionTab (JDialog dialogParent, . . .)
	         {
	               this.dialogParent = dialogParent;
	         . . .
	         }
	
	Now:
	
	         // XXX Option Tab class
	         public class XXXOptionTab implements GmsRtViewOptionTabInt, . . .
	         {
	               private Window dialogParent;
	         . . .
	         }
	
	         // XXX Option Tab class constructor for JFrame
	         public XXXOptionTab (JFrame dialogParent, . . .)
	         {
	               this((Window)dialogParent, . . .);
	         }
	
	         // XXX Option Tab class constructor for JDialog
	         public XXXOptionTab (JDialog dialogParent, . . .)
	         {
	               this((Window)dialogParent, . . .);
	         }
	
	         // XXX Option Tab class constructor common code
	
	         public XXXOptionTab (Window dialogParent, . . .)
	         {
	               this.dialogParent = dialogParent;
	         . . .
	         }
	
	2. If the option tab brings up subordinate dialogs, provide overloaded class
	constructors for those classes as well, and construct them according to the
	actual runtime class of the dialog parent.
	
	         // XXX Option Tab Sub Dialog class
	         private class XXXSubDialog extends JDialog . . .
	         {
	         . . .
	         }
	
	Previously:
	
	         // XXX Option Tab Sub Dialog class constructor
	         private XXXSubDialog (JDialog parent)
	         {
	               super(parent, ...);
	         setTitle(...);
	         . . .
	         }
	
	         // Invoking the XXX Option Tab Sub Dialog
	         XXXSubDialog subDialog = new XXXSubDialog(dialogParent);
	               subDialog.setVisible(true);
	
	Now:
	
	         // XXX Option Tab Sub Dialog class constructor for JFrame
	         private XXXSubDialog (JDialog parent)
	         {
	               super(parent, ...);
	               makeXXXSubDialog(parent);
	         }
	
	         // XXX Option Tab Sub Dialog class constructor for JDialog
	         private XXXSubDialog (JFrame parent)
	         {
	               super(parent, ...);
	               makeXXXSubDialog(parent);
	         }
	
	         // XXX Option Tab Sub Dialog class constructor, common code
	         private void makeXXXSubDialog (Window parent)
	         {
	         setTitle(...);
	         . . .
	         }
	
	         // Invoking the XXX Option Tab Sub Dialog
	         XXXSubDialog subDialog = null;
	               if (dialogParent instanceof JFrame)
	                     subDialog = new XXXSubDialog((JFrame)dialogParent);
	               else if (dialogParent instanceof JDialog)
	                     subDialog = new XXXSubDialog((JDialog)dialogParent);
	               subDialog.setVisible(true);

12567: User warned to save when changes made to Application Options
	In the Display Builder Application Options dialog, if you changed
	values on any tab and then closed the dialog without saving the
	options you were not warned that you had unsaved changes. Now 
	you will receive a warning dialog if you try to close the dialog or exit 
	the program with unsaved application options. From the warning 
	dialog you can choose to go ahead and close the dialog or the 
	program, or you can decide not to close or exit and return to 
	the options dialog. Note that if you choose Cancel from the options 
	dialog you will not receive the warning. Note also that if you have 
	applied changes and declined to save them (by choosing OK from 
	the warning dialog) you will not be warned again if you reopen and 
	close the dialog.
	
	Information for developers of custom data sources: The interface
	which is implemented by the data sources Application Options 
	dialog tab now includes the following two new members:
	
	/** This method is called to update the option tab's local copy of its
	data. */
	
	public void updateCurrentData ();
	
	/** This method is called to check whether data in the option tab has 
	been  changed since the last time it was applied. */
	
	public boolean isDataChanged ();
	
	
	These members must be implemented in your dialog tab class.

Data Historian

12665: SQL datasource no longer included in gmsjrtvhistorian.jar
	The com.sl.gmsjsqlds package is no longer included in
	gmsjrtvhistorian.jar, since that package is distributed in
	gmsjsqlds.jar.  This change has no impact on users that use the
	standard scripts to launch the Data Server, Display Server, and
	Historian.  Custom scripts, however, may need to be changed to
	include gmsjsqlds.jar in the classpath.

Data Sources

12565: Data source options file processing has changed
	A change has been made in how options files are processed for data sources and 
	the RTView AppManager. Previously, all options in all options files 
	that were not processed by the AppManager were applied to all data sources. 
	The new behavior is as follows:
	
	1. OPTIONS.ini is read and processed by the AppManager. Any options not 
	processed there are saved for data sources (step 3).
	
	2. Each available data source is asked if it has an options file. If so, that 
	file is read and the options are applied to that data source only. If any 
	option in that file is not processed by the data source, an error message will 
	be printed to the console.
	
	3. Any options remaining from OPTIONS.ini are applied in turn to each data 
	source that does not have its own options file. If any of those options are 
	not processed by any data source, an error message will be printed to the 
	console.

IBM WebSphere MQ Administration Data Source

12620: Connection parameters in TMOPTIONS.ini are now properly parsed
	Connection parameters for IBM WebSphere MQ are now parsed correctly for the 
	Transaction monitoring utility.  The connection parameters are described in the 
	RTView User Guide documentation.
	
	Connection parameters can be defined on the command line, or in the 
	TMOPTIONS.INI File. Command line parameters are defined in Appendix C: 
	Transaction Monitor Command Line.  Options for TMOPTIONS.INI are described in
	Transaction Monitor Options in the User Guide.
	  
	Examples of a command line options to use IBM Websphere MQ as a JMS message 
	source would be   
	   -jmsfactory:com.ibm.mq.jms.MQTopicConnectionFactory
	   -jmsclient:null
	   -jmsuser:MyUser
	   -jmspassword:MyPassword
	   -jmshostname:MyHost
	   -jmsport:1420
	   -jmsqueuemanager:PUB_SUB_QM
	  
	Examples of entries in the TMOPTIONS.INI file would be
	  
	   jmsfactory com.ibm.mq.jms.MQTopicConnectionFactory
	   jmsclient null
	   jmsuser MyUser
	   jmspassword MyPassword
	   jmshostname MyHost
	   jmsport 1420
	   jmsqueuemanager PUB_SUB_QM

12625: Mechanism for retrieving IBM MQ Server metrics optimized
	Previously the the IBMADM (IBM WebSphere MQ Administration) Data source 
	queried for all metrics every update.  The IBMADM data source now keeps 
	track of displays that view specific MQ server metric tables (Channels, 
	Queue Managers and Queues).
	
	Requests for data to update those (MQ Server metric) tables (at the rate 
	specified by the IBM WebSphere MQ Connections Metrics Update Period) are now 
	only made when displays containing tables attatched to MQ server metric 
	tables are open.
	
	The mechanism for requesting Channel metrics has also been further optimized.
	
	Some examples:
	
	No displays with MQ server metric tables are open.
	No MQ server metrics are requested at the next IBMADM data source update.
	
	A display with only a Queue Manager metrics table is open
	Only Queue Manager metrics are requested at the next IBMADM data source update.
	
	Several displays with Queue Manager and Queue metrics tables are open.
	Only Queue Manager and Queue metrics are requested at the next IBMADM data 
	source update.
	
	A Display with Channel, Queue Manager and Queue metrics tables is open.
	Channel, Queue Manager and Queue metrics are requested at the next IBMADM data 
	source update.

12626: Metrics Update Period implemented for IBM WebSphere MQ
	The IBM WebSphere MQ Connections Options Dialog Tab has been enhanced to
	include a way to specify the metrics update period.  This value
	is also saved in the IBMADMOPTIONS.ini file when options are saved.
	 
	Metrics Update Period
	  
	Enter the time in milliseconds to control how often IBM WebSphere MQ metrics 
	will be queried.  Default is 0, which queries according to the update period 
	specified on the Application Options General tab.
	  
	OTE: Because the Metrics Update Period is superceded by the General Update 
	Period, the amount of time elapsed between queries may be longer than the value
	entered.
	
	For example, if the General Update Period is 2000 milliseconds and the
	Metrics Update Period is 5000 milliseconds, EMS Server metrics and IBM 
	WebSphere MQ metrics will be queried every six seconds (6000 milliseconds).

JMX Data Source

12634: Date column type now supported in JMX tabular data
	Date type columns are now supported in JMX tabular data.

12637: JMX Notifications now supported
	Support for JMX notifications has been added.
	
	There is an additional choice in the the JMX data attachment dialog. 
	It shows up under the Data Mode: combobox.
	
	The choices are "Poll for Values" or "Listen for Notifications".
	
	The default "Poll for Values" is the same as the older choice and 
	tells the JMX data source to get all mbean updates by polling the 
	attributes or executing the exposed methods as before.
	
	The new choice "Listen for Notifications" changes the title of the 
	Attribute(s)/Operation(s): choice that follows to Attribute(s):.
	
	Older .rtv files will default to "Poll for Values" and should function as 
	before where the update happens as the timer specified in Tools | 
	Options | JMX.
	
	Newer data attachments that use "Listen for Notifications" do not 
	pay attention to the timer and are registered with the connection to 
	receive notifications, which may be sent by the mbean server at any 
	time.
	
	It is the responsibility of the mBean server to send notifications.  
	RTView will only display data received via notifications, if 
	the data attachment is set up that way. The user can see what 
	Notifications are available by creating a data attachment and 
	changing the default Data Mode to "Listen for Notifications". The 
	Attributes and Fields available will then be offered in the
	comboboxes of the same name, if any.
	
	The mBean server must implement the getNotificationInfo() method 
	of javax.management.NotificationBroadcaster to specify what 
	Attribute Change Notifications are sent.
	
	See
	http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.5.0/docs/api/javax/management/NotificationBroadcaster.html
	
	The method to be implemented is described as follows in the Java 
	Documentation:
	
	public MBeanNotificationInfo[] getNotificationInfo ()
	
	    Returns an array indicating, for each notification this MBean may 
	send, the name of the Java class of the notification and the 
	notification type.
	
	    It is not illegal for the MBean to send notifications not described in 
	this array. However, some clients of the MBean server may depend 
	on the array being complete for their correct functioning.
	
	    Returns:
	        the array of possible notifications.

12638: Enhanced support of MBean names that include wildcard
	The processing of MBean names that include the "*" wildcard has
	been enhanced.  Previously, only a single additional column would be
	appended to the table providing the first MBean "key" that was found
	when resolving the "*" in the MBean name.  Now, if the "*" resolves
	to multiple MBean keys, a column will be added for each key that is
	found.  This provides for better identification of the source of the
	data that is returned when using the MBean "*" syntax.

12640: URL can be used for JMX Connection in place of host and port
	This release adds support for the user to enter a URL instead of host and port
	in the JMX Connection dialog.
	
	There are now two new controls in the Tools -> Options -> JMX Add or Edit
	Connection dialog. These are Enter URL: and URL:. If the Enter URL checkbox is
	selected, the host and port fields are ignored and the user may enter a JMX URL
	in the URL: text field.
	
	Previously RTView constructed the URL using the given and port. This
	method is still available.
	
	If the entered URL is valid and a connection is established, RTView
	works with that connection in the same way that a Host/Port connection works.

12647: Performance improvement to JMX data source
	The performance of the JMX data source has been enhanced.

12649: JMX Polling Interval implemented
	The JMX data source can now specify four different options for the updating of 
	an object's data. Rather than having a JMX data object update using the
	display's update period, you can select an alternate method in which each 
	object polls for its data, thereby optimizing the performance of the display. 
	
	The available options are:
	
	1) Poll Once - 
		RTView will retrieve the object's data only once, for its 
		initial display. Use this setting for data that will not need updating.
		
	2) Poll Every Default Poll Interval - 
		Data will be updated using the display's predefined update interval. 
		This is the default setting and mirrors the functionality found in  
		previous releases.
		
	3) Poll Every Poll Interval - 
		Data will be updated at a user-defined interval. You can specify, in
		seconds, how often the object should be updated.
		
	4) Poll on Demand - 
		Updates only when a display that uses this data is opened, and when 
		data from any substitution string in use has changed.  
	
	The Polling Interval options can be found in the JMX Attach to Data dialog. 
	
	Note:
	The polling options will be disabled when "Listen for Notifications" is chosen 
	for the Data Mode setting. In this case, data will be updated with each 
	notification.

12701: Missing label in Attach to JMX Data dialog fixed
	In the prior release, the "Filter:" label was missing from the
	Attach to JMX Data Dialog. This has been fixed

12713: Improve performance for large number of MBeans
	Performance of the JMX datasource when there are large numbers
	of MBeans accessed has been improved.

SQL Data Source

12607: RTView no longer leaves open cursors in Oracle
	In prior releases, if the SQL data source was configured to use a
	JDBC connection to Oracle and if SQL queries using that connection
	failed repeatedly, an Oracle error "maximum open cursors exceeded"
	could eventually occur.  This error could also occur if SQL commands
	using the connection were executed repeatedly.  Both of these problems
	are fixed.

TIBCO Hawk Data Source

12653: TIBCO Hawk notification events now supported
	The TIBCO Hawk Datasource for RTView has been enhanced to
	support the display of TIBCO Hawk notification events.  By default,
	this feature is turned off.  To enable the receipt of TIBCO Hawk
	notification events, run the RTView builder and access the
	TIBCO Hawk section of the Tools/Options menu.  On the
	"TIBCO Hawk Methods and Alerts" tab, select the checkbox
	labeled "Enable Hawk Notifications", then Apply and Save the
	options.  TIBCO Hawk notifications will have an AlertString of
	"NO_ALERT".
	
	Note that you can also enable TIBCO Hawk notifications by starting
	the builder or viewer with the "enablenotifications" command-line
	option.  For example,
	
	    run_builder -enablenotifications:true

12654: Hawk data source supports wildcard character in microagent name
	The Hawk data source has been enhanced to support a wildcard
	character in the microagent name for data attachments and commands.
	The supported syntax for wildcards in microagent names is as follows
	(where name is the name of the microagent):
	- name* - Data attachments and commands will use the first instance
	found for all microagents that start with name on the agent(s)
	specified.  If multiple microagents are found for a data attachment,
	the data for each will be returned.  If multiple microagents are found
	for a command, the command will execute on each microagent.
	- name*:X - Data attachments and commands will use the X instance for
	all microagents that start with name on the agent(s) specified.  If
	multiple microagents are found for a data attachment, the data for
	each will be returned.  If multiple microagents are found for a command,
	the command will execute on each microagent.
	- name*:* - Data attachments and commands will use all active instances
	for all microagents that start with name on the agent(s) specified.  If
	multiple microagents are found for a data attachment, the data for each
	will be returned.  If multiple microagents are found for a command, the
	command will execute on each microagent.

TIBCO Rendezvous Data Source

11461: Improved parsing of RV messages with same field names
	The Rendezvous data source has been improved to better handle messages
	containing containing multiple fields with the same name, and to
	expand nested message fields within messages which have an alias 
	specified in RVALIAS.ini. 
	
	For example, say a message with a subject of x.y.z has two fields 
	named F, one containing an integer value of 123 and the other 
	containing a value of 456. In prior releases, if a table object had
	its valueTable property attached to RV message subject=x.y.z and
	message field=*, then the table would have two columns named F but
	both columns would contain the value 123. In this release, the table 
	will have two columns named F, the first containing 123 and the second 
	containing 456, as expected.
	
	As another example, say a message with a subject of ORDERS.CUSTOMERS.NEW
	has several fields all of which are named Order, and the value of each Order 
	field is an RV message which itself contains two fields named CustomerId 
	and OrderNumber. In this release, the following entry could be added to
	RVALIAS.ini:
	
		NewOrders ORDERS.CUSTOMERS.NEW Order
	
	Then, if a table object is attached to NewOrders, the table will have
	two columns, named CustomerId and OrderNumber, corresponding to
	the columns in the nested Order message, and it will contain N rows,
	where N is the number of Order fields appearing in the 
	ORDERS.CUSTOMERS.NEW message.
	
	Limitation: If a message contains multiple fields with the same name,
	then any data attachment that specifies that field name will always
	get the value of the first field with that name. So, using the message
	in the first example above, if an RV data attachment is made with 
	message subject=x.y.z and message field=F, the attachment will always
	get the value of the first F column in the message. There is no way to
	make an RV data attachment to the second F column.

12704: User can now specify the Network Interface to use with rvtrace
	A new option has been added to the TIBCO Rendezvous data source to
	allow the specification of the Network Interface to use when rvtrace 
	is started.
	
	The interface can be set from the TIBCO Rendezvous Monitoring tab of
	the TIBCO Rendezvous options dialog, or from the command-line using
	the "-rvds:rvtrace.interface" switch.  For example,
	
		run_viewer -rvds:rvtrace.interface:\Device\NPF_{12345}
	
	where \Device\NPF_{12345} is the network interface on which rvtrace
	should be started.  Note that this is equivalent to running rvtrace
	from the command-line using the -i switch as follows:
	
		rvtrace -i \Device\NPF_{12345}
		
	Additional information about determining the Network Interface can 
	be found in the TIBCO Rendezvous Administration manual.  Please refer 
	to Chapter 11, "Protocol Monitor (rvtrace)" and in particular, to the 
	document titled "Selecting the Network Interface".

XML Data Source

12655: XML data source time zone parsing problem fixed
	In previous releases of RTView, there was a problem
	with parsing time zone data in the XML data source.  It has been
	fixed.

Display Server

12399: Thin Client performance improvements
	This release includes two performance improvements to the Display
	Server and Thin Client:
	
	1) During a display refresh or drill down, the Thin Client will 
	wait until the new image has finished downloading before using it
	to replace the old image. This eliminates the screen flash and
	image banding or striping that occurred in Internet Explorer.
	
	2) For each display, the Display Server will automatically choose
	the format (png or jpg) that produces the smaller image, in order
	to reduce the download time for the client.
	
	These improvements are discussed in more detail below.
	
	1) This improvement is most noticeable on clients using a slower WAN
	connection where the image download duration is longer. On a LAN the
	screen flash and banding were less noticeable.
	
	2) In prior releases, the Display Server used jpg (jpeg) format for
	all the images it generated. Now, it can also use png format. The
	Display Server will automatically chose the format that results in
	the smaller (fewer bytes) image for each display. This means that 
	jpg may be chosen for some displays and png for others.
	
	The imagequality option can affect the server's format choice. A 
	higher imagequality value will increase the size of generated jpg 
	images, but will not affect the size of png images (png quality
	is always 100%). So increasing the value of the imagequality may
	cause the server to choose png format for more displays.
	
	The Display Server is likely to choose jpg format for displays which:
	
	  - use a jpg file as the display background image
	  - use jpg files as background images on RTView graphs or labels
	  - have many gradients using different colors (especially at lower
	    imagequality values).
	
	For all other displays, the server will usually choose png format.
	
	The output from the Display Server's -verbose option now indicates
	which format is used for a display and the size of the generated
	image.
	
	By default the Display Server will automatically choose an image 
	format for each display, as described above. If desired, the Server
	can be forced to use the same format for all displays via a 
	command-line option, as follows:
	
	 Use jpg for all displays:  run_displayserver -imageformat:jpg
	 Use png for all displays:  run_displayserver -imageformat:png
	
	These is currently no way to specify the format for individual 
	displays.
	
	*****************************
	(DEVNOTE: The -imageformat option has existed since 4.2 but may
	not have been previously documented).
	*****************************

12618: rtvRefreshInterval can now be set for displays with bg image
	In prior releases, the model property named rtvRefreshInterval
	could not be set in the Display Builder on a display that used a
	background image.  This has been fixed.

12678: Main display now refreshes after executing ds command in popup
	In the Thin Client, the display is refreshed after the user
	clicks on an object that executes a data source command, in
	order to show the effects of the command, if any, on the
	display objects. For example, executing an alert acknowledege
	command may cause changes in a table that displays the current
	alerts.
	
	In prior releases, only the display containing the object
	that executed the command was refreshed. In this release,
	if the command object is in a popup window, the main window
	will also be refreshed.

12681: Browser window resize fixed
	In the 4.5c1 release, a browser window is not resized to fit a Thin
	Client display loaded from panels.jsp or or panels.html, as it was in
	releases prior to 4.5c1.  This problem is fixed.

12683: Combo box values with double quotes now supported
	In prior releases, the Thin Client did not support combo box
	controls or list box controls if their list items contained
	the double quote character. This is fixed.

12684: Thin Client display refresh performance improved
	The performance of the Thin Client display refresh feature has
	been improved.
	
	The Thin Client refreshes a display periodically. As in prior
	releases, the refresh interval is determined by the 
	DefaultRefreshInterval property of the rtvdisplay servlet or,
	if set, by each display's rtvRefreshInterval property. An 
	interval value of zero indicates that a display should not
	be refreshed.
	
	In this release, before refreshing a display the Thin Client
	will first ask the Display Server if any data source has 
	applied data to the display since its last refresh. If not,
	then there is no need to refresh the display so the refresh is 
	skipped. This is repeated on each refresh cycle. If needless 
	refreshes can be skipped, the performance of the Thin Client
	and the Display Server is improved.
	
	The actual performance gains will vary according to the 
	characteristics of individual displays and the data they
	display.
	
	In general, the displays that will benefit the most are those
	which (1) show data from asynchronous data sources (RV, Hawk,
	Alerts), if new data typically arrives at longer intervals 
	than the display's refresh interval, or (2) show data from a
	polled data source query (SQL, JMX), if the query is static,
	on-demand, or has a longer poll interval than the display's
	refresh interval. For example, if a display has a refresh
	interval of 10 seconds and it contains one table object that
	shows the current alert data, and typically the alert data
	only changes once per minute, then the display will typically
	only refresh once per minute. In prior releases, the display
	would refresh every 10 seconds whether or not the alert data
	had changed.
	
	Displays that will not benefit from this improvement are those
	showing data from sources which apply new data at shorter
	intervals than the display's refresh interval. For example, if
	a display has a refresh interval of 15 seconds and it shows 
	data from a non-static XML data source which the Display Server
	polls every 2 seconds, then the display will always be refreshed
	every 15 seconds, since new XML data is applied every 2 seconds.
	
	If a display contains a trend graph object configured with
	timeShift >= 0, then the display will be refreshed on each 
	interval, even if no new data has been applied since the last
	refresh. This is necessary in order to shift the graph's time axis.
	Similarly, if a custom object requires a refresh on each interval,
	it must define a GMS variable named __dispSrvRefreshRequired (the
	name begins with 2 underscore characters) of type GMS.G_INTEGER
	with a value of 1.
	
	To support this improvement, the rtvdisplay servlet makes a 
	second connection to the Display Server. If the -verbose option
	is specified when starting the Display Server, the following
	output will appear in the Display Server console:
	
		connect client 1
		connect client 2
	
	This is normal.

Distribution

12383: JMX support added to the Historian
	JMX support has been added to the Historian. There are now
	commands to start and stop data storage, to purge stored data, and to
	terminate the Historian, as well as properties to examine the status
	of the Historian and the data configuration files in use by
	the Historian.

12627: Missing make_war.sh scripts added
	Missing scripts servlets/rtvreport/make_war.sh and
	servlets/rtvportlet/make_war.sh have been added.

Functions

12563: New argument Restrict to Data Combinations for GROUPBYU
	The Group By Unique Values function now has an additional argument
	Restrict to Data Combinations (that defaults to 0).  When this argument
	is 0 the returned data will contain all possible combinations of
	unique values found in the specified Index Columns (as previously).
	When this argument is 1, the returned data will be restricted to only
	those combinations that occur in the data.

12572: Baseline Over Time no longer throws exception for string data
	Previously the Baseline Over Time (BASETR) function would throw an
	exception if the data column was of type String.  This is now no longer
	the case.

12628: FILTERTR no longer throws exception for column type string
	Previously the FILTERTR function would throw an exception if the
	data column was of type String.  This is now no longer the case.

12677: Support added for global functions
	Support has been added for global functions.
	
	In prior releases, an object's property can be attached to a function either
	(a) defined in the current display, or 
	(b) defined in another display file that is included by the current display.
	
	Note that (a) works best for a function that is only used on one display or
	is simple and so can easily be redefined on each display that uses it, 
	while (b) works best for a function (or a set of functions) that is used on
	multiple displays. But (b) can be inefficient in some cases. For example,
	say there is a display file named Inc1.rtv that defines a function named f1.
	If two displays are opened in the Viewer and both displays include Inc1.rtv,
	then two copies of F1 are created and the result is computed for each. If 
	the user closes both displays, both copies of F1 are discarded. If the user
	then opens another display that includes Inc1.rtv, a new copy of F1 will be
	created and the result computed again. This can be inefficient if computing
	the result of F1 requires significant CPU time or memory (for example, a
	complex operation on a large data table). In that case it may be more
	efficient to specify F1 as a global function. 
	
	A global function is defined in a Global Definition file and its result is 
	available to objects on any display. A Global Definition file, or global
	file for short, is simply a .rtv file that has been selected on the Globals
	tab of the Options dialog. Each global file is loaded when an 
	RTView application starts. Only one instance of each global function is
	created and its result can be used by objects on multiple displays.
	Global functions are supported in all deployments.
	
	As with any function, a global function is updated whenever its input
	(argument) values change. A global function will be updated even if none of
	the currently open displays use the result. Because of this, the current
	result is immediately available when a display that does use the result is
	opened. However, avoid defining a function as global if its result is not 
	often needed and computing the result is expensive, otherwise performance
	may suffer.
	
	In the Display Builder, use the Globals tab in the Options Dialog to designate 
	a global file. Click on the Add button to select an rtv file. The selected
	file will be added to the table of global files. Each row in the table shows
	the name of the global file and a list of substitutions, if any, which should
	be applied to the global file when it is loaded. Click in the appropriate
	column to edit the file name or the substitutions. Click OK, Apply, or Save
	in the options dialog and the global files will be loaded. To reload a global
	file that was already loaded, select the corresponding row in the table and
	click Refresh Selection. This is useful after you've used the Display Builder 
	to make and save changes to a global file and you wish to see the effect on 
	other displays, without restarting the Builder.
	
	In some cases, it may be useful for a global function to use substitutions
	in its inputs and in the function name. The values for those substitutions 
	are specified in the Substitutions column of the table in the Globals tab.
	This allows the same file to be specified multiple times in the Globals table
	with different substitutions to create multiple global functions. For example,
	say you're creating displays that show data from the RTView XML simulator,
	and you want a  global function that sorts the production_table by the 
	Units Completed column, another global function that sorts it by the 
	Units in Production column, and a third global function that sorts by the 
	plant name. This could be accomplished by either of the procedures below.
	
	Procedure A. Create three global functions:
	
	- Create a new display. 
	
	- Add a function named Sort.completed that calls the Sort Table function, 
	attach its Table argument to production_table from update.xml, and set its
	Sort Column Name to 'Units Completed'.
	 
	- Add a function named Sort.inProd that calls the Sort Table function,
	attach its Table argument to production_table from update.xml, and set its
	Sort Column Name to 'Units in Production'. 
	
	- Add a function named Sort.plant that calls the Sort Table function,
	attach its Table argument to production_table from update.xml, and set its
	Sort Column Name to Plant. 
	
	- For all 3 functions, make sure the Public checkbox in the Edit Function 
	dialog is checked.
	
	- Save the display as SortFunc.rtv.
	
	- In the Globals tab, add SortFunc.rtv to the list of global files.
	
	
	Procedure B. Create a single global function that uses substitutions:
	
	- Create a new display.
	
	- Add a function named getSortCol that calls the Get Substitution function
	on $sortColumn. Uncheck the Public checkbox (more on this later).
	
	- Add a function named Sort.$fname that calls the Sort Table function,
	attach its Table argument to production_table from update.xml, and attach 
	its Sort Column Name to the getSortCol function. Check the Public checkbox.
	
	- Save this display as SortFunc.rtv
	
	- In the Globals tab, add SortFunc.rtv to the list of global files
	and specify the following substitutions:
		$fname:completed $sortColumn:'Units Completed'
	
	- Repeat the previous step and specify the following substitutions:
		$fname:inProd $sortColumn:'Units in Production'
	
	- Repeat the previous step and specify the following substitutions:
		$fname:plant $sortColumn:Plant
	
	Both procedures produce 3 global functions named Sort.completed, Sort.inProd,
	and Sort.plant. Procedure B may look more complicated but it uses fewer 
	functions so it might be easier to maintain. (In this example, the functions 
	are simple so this is not a significant benefit, but a real application might 
	find B useful). 
	
	Note that procedure B also defines a function named getSortCol. It is intended 
	to be used only as an input to the Sort.$fname function and should not become a
	global function. The Public option is unchecked when the getSortCol was created,
	which prevents the function from appearing in the function attachment list, 
	even though it is defined in a global file.
	
	Limitation
	
	Global functions are not currently supported with alerts.

12682: Set sub function no longer adds invalid listeners
	In prior releases, the following problems could occur if the SETSUB function
	was used to change a substitution string that appeared in a data attachment:
	
	- On display callup, the substitution string could sometimes be assigned a
	blank value, causing syntax errors in the data attachment string.
	
	- The initial data attachment was sometimes registered twice, causing the
	attachment to remain even after the display was dismissed. 
	
	- The effects of changes to the substitution string were delayed until the
	next periodic update.
	
	These problems are fixed.

12731: Public flag supported by Include File functionality
	The Include File functionality now takes advantage of the "public"
	flag added for global functions. Non-public functions in included
	files will not be visible to other displays. This is consistent with
	the behavior of non-public functions in Global Definition files.

GmsTabularData

12603: Improved support for date/time parsing
	Support for date/time parsing has been improved, and a mechanism to enter 
	custom date/time formats has been added to the Application Options.  The 
	formats entered in the Date Formats tab follow the syntax of the date and 
	time pattern strings documented in the java.text.SimpleDateFormat class.

Java Version Dependencies

12523: Java 1.6 Runtime Environment is now supported
	Java 1.6 Runtime Environment is now supported by 
	RTView.  In previous versions the Display Builder would crash when
	run under the Java 1.6 Runtime Environment.  This has been fixed.

Local Variables

12621: Display Builder no longer crashes with undefined local var
	In the previous release, the Display Builder would throw an
	exception if the user attempted to asign a value to a local variable
	that was used in a data attachment but had not been previously
	defined.  This could occur only if an rtv file was modified outside
	of the Builder, in a text editor for example.  This problem is fixed.

Object Library

12688: Antialiasing of text is now the default
	Antialiasing of text is now done by default. In the General tab
	of the Options dialog, you can turn off antialiasing.

Bar Charts

12585: New property yAxisGridMode for greater control of grid lines
	A new property has been added to the bar graph to allow additional control overi
	the alignment of grid lines with the y-axes drawn to the left and right of the 
	bargraph.  The property, yAxisGridMode, can have the following values:
	
	Bar Axis ( 0 ) - Align grid lines with the left (bar) y-axis.  This is the 
	default.
	Trace Axis ( 1 ) - Align grid lines with the right (trace) y-axis.
	Bar and Trace Axis ( 2 ) - Draw two sets of grid lines, one aligned with the 
	left y-axis and the other with the right y-axis.
	
	Two new properties have been added to the bar graph to allow additional control
	of the placement and spacing of tick marks on the trace y-axis, which is drawn 
	to the right of the bar graph when the traceYAxisFlag is set.  The properties, 
	traceYAxisMajorDivisions, and traceYAxisMinorDivisions specify the number of 
	major tickmarks on the axis and the number of minor tickmarks between each pair
	of major tickmarks, respectively.

12616: traceYAxisFlag no longer cleared when drawHorizontalFlag set
	In the bar graph, the value of the traceYAxisFlag was cleared
	whenever the drawHorizontalFlag was set.  This has been corrected.

Control Objects

12670: Double-clicking *Values properties no longer causes crash
	In the Display Builder Object Properties dialog, certain properties have 
	specific dialogs for editing their values, which are invoked by double-clicking
	the property name, or clicking the property value field to enable the v button 
	and clicking that. These properties include:
	
	
	barProperties
	 
	columnAlignment
	 
	columnDisplayNames
	 
	columnFormat
	 
	columnsToHide
	 
	columnProperties
	 
	commandConfirmText
	 
	drillDownColumnSubs
	 
	drillDownTarget
	 
	filterProperties
	 
	iconProperties
	 
	indexColumns
	 
	listValues
	 
	radioListValues
	 
	traceProperties
	 
	wedgeProperties
	 
	If these properties are attached to data, double-clicking the property name 
	should bring up an Attach To Data dialog. However there was a problem in the 
	Display Builder such that for listValues or radioListValues, double-clicking 
	an attached property would cause a crash, and for the remainder of the above 
	list, double-clicking an attached property would bring up the value editor 
	dialog rather than an Attach To Data dialog. This problem has been fixed.

Tables

12636: columnResizeEnabledFlag added to table object
	A property named columnResizeEnabledFlag has been added to the table object. 
	If the property is checked, the table's columns can be resized by dragging the 
	vertical separators between the column headers. If the property is unchecked, 
	the column widths cannot be resized interactively. The property is checked by 
	default and is located in the Interaction category.
	
	The columnResizeEnabledFlag property is supported in Display Builder, Display 
	Viewer, and Thin Client.  In the Thin Client, however, runtime changes to the 
	property value are ignored.

12686: The Table Object now displays milliseconds properly
	The Table Object will now display times with a precision of
	milliseconds. A columnFormat ending in "ss.S" can be used to display
	the time in milliseconds.

12718: Row selection now behaves properly if table row is deleted
	The indexColumns property of the table object (obj_table02) can be
	configured to maintain the row selection across updates to the data
	table. (See the release note for E12468 for details). In the prior
	release, the property did not work as expected if any of the
	selected rows was removed during an update but the total number of
	rows in the table did not change. This problem is fixed. Note that
	the indexColumns property is not supported in the thin client.

Trend Charts

12644: Outer Y axis color now follows labelTextColor in Strip Charts
	In previous releases, the y axis was drawn in the color of the
	trace if the yAxisMultiRangeMode was set to Strip Chart and the
	yAxisPosition was one of the Outer positions. It now draws in the
	labelTextColor instead.

TIBCO EMS Manager

12579: TIBCO EMS Manager look and feel upgrade
	The TIBCO EMS Manager look and feel has been upgraded. All features
	work exactly as before.

Transaction Message Monitor

12520: Enhancement to maintain summary values between sessions
	This release adds the ability to maintain previous summary values 
	when restarting the Transaction Monitor. By adding either the new 
	"-maintainstate" argument to the command line, or "maintainstate" in 
	the TMOPTIONS.INI file, the Transaction Monitor will, when restarted, 
	pick up from where it left off, populating the tranasction and interface 
	summary values as they had been before the shutdown event. 
	
	Note that only summary values are maintained. No detail information is 
	maintained. The transaction and interface detail data are reset to zero
	values.
	
	Omitting the "maintainstate" argument will retain the previous behavior 
	of clearing all values on restart.
	
	How we weight the values for Rate, Latency and Size rolling averages:
	
	The manner in which we set up the initial values is based on an average 
	of the last x number of completed interfaces and transactions. This 
	number (x) is determined by taking the last rate value, found in 
	tm_summary.xml, and dividing it by a time unit value. (And this time unit 
	value is calculated by dividing the TM's rateUnit by its calcInterval. 
	ex: the unit of time / the time interval). Once we determine how many past 
	transactions to use to repopulate the TM's initial data tables, we then 
	init each of the table rows with the last found latency, size and rate 
	values. As new transaction messages are received, the rolling averages 
	recommence with the older summary data values expiring, replaced by the 
	new message data.

12613: TM Generator now properly generates table attachments
	In the previous release, tables on some of the standard Transaction
	Monitor displays were always empty.  This is fixed.

12646: Transaction Monitor now supports remoting via JMX
	The Transaction Monitor now supports remoting via JMX. This allows for remotely
	pausing and resuming the monitor, checking whether it's in its paused state, 
	resetting all values, and retrieving a table of the transaction and interface 
	names. The JMX Monitor demo has been enhanced to offer support for this
	functionalty. As well, access is available through the standard java JConsole
	application.
	
	run_tm.bat has been modified to accept a command line argument specifying the
	port to use. The command line syntax is:
		-jmxport:9994
	  
	Port 9994 is recommended for the Transaction Monitor (and is preset for the JMX 
	Monitor demo).

Version 4.5c1 Release Notes

Alerts

12360: Alerts can now be generated on Japanese OS
	In RTView 4.4c1, alerts were not generated on systems
	using the JST time zone. This has been fixed.

12498: Time constraint removed from alert data source
	In RTView 4.4c1, alerts that were more than 24 hours
	old were removed from the system. This has been fixed, so that these
	alerts are not removed.

Builder - Editing

12609: Bug with drillDownTarget field fixed
	In prior releases, if the bgVisFlag and valueVisFlag properties of
	an obj_meter06 or obj_meter21 object were assigned different values
	(that is, if one of those properties was checked and the other was
	unchecked), then it was not possible to configure the drillDownTarget
	property on any object in the display.  Also, properties associated
	with bgVisFlag, such as bg3dFlag, bgGradientFlag etc., were hidden
	when valueVisFlag was unchecked, rather than being hidden when
	bgVisFlag was checked.  This has been fixed.

Data Server

12499: Data Server improved to handle larger data sets
	The Data Server performance has been improved. In previous releases,
	the server sent data formatted as XML text to its Display Viewer
	clients. Now it sends serialized data objects, allowing the server
	to handle larger data sets and improving the overall efficiency of
	the server and client.
	
	The Display Viewer will still accept XML data received from custom
	servers.

Data Sources

IBM WebSphere MQ Administration Data Source

12492: IBM WebSphere MQ Administration data source added
	Display Builder
	
	You can use IBM Websphere MQ Administration as an IBM Websphere MQ
	Administration Connection. An  IBM Websphere MQ Administration Connection
	is a named connection to a  specified QueueManager. In addition 
	you will also need to specify the Host Name, Port (Number) and QueueManager 
	used by IBM Websphere MQ Administration.
	
	You will need to specify the IBM Websphere MQ Administration Connection as
	follows:
	
	Connection Name: The name to use when referencing this IBM Websphere MQ
	Administration connection in your data attachments.
	Host Name: The name of the host the IBM Websphere MQ Administration Queue
	Manager resides on, e.g MyServer.
	Port (Number): The listener port of the QueueManager you wish to connect to,
	e.g. 1414.
	Channel: Client Channel to use for this connection, e.g. SYSTEM.DEF.SVRCONN.
	
	These parameters are IBM Websphere MQ Administration specific.
	
	Display Builder + Display Viewer
	
	At run time you will need to place the IBM Websphere MQ Administration 
	client jars (com.ibm.mq.jar, connector.jar) + PCF jar (com.ibm.mq.pcf-6.0.jar) 
	on the class path to use this functionality. This is normally done by setting  
	the RTV_USERPATH environment variable.
	
	The IBM Websphere MQ Administration client jars can be found in the 
	Java\lib directory where you installed the IBM Websphere MQ Administration 
	server, e.g: "C:\Program Files\IBM\WebSphere MQ\Java\lib"
	
	The PCF jar can be obtained from the "MS0B: WebSphere MQ Java classes 
	for PCF" support pack as described here:
	
	http://www-1.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=203&uid=swg24000668&loc=en_US&cs=utf-8&lang=en

JMS Data Source

11445: Support for IBM WebSphere MQ in JMS and Transaction Monitor
	Websphere MQ may now be used as JMS Data source.
	
	
	*Builder*
	
	
	You can use IBM Websphere MQ as a JMS Connection. The JMS connection can 
	be either a Topic connection, or a Queue connection.
	For a Topic connection you will need to select 
	com.ibm.mq.jms.MQQueueConnectionFactory
	as the Factory class name.
	For a Queue connection you will need to select 
	com.ibm.mq.jms.MQTopicConnectionFactory
	as the Factory class name.
	In addition you will also need to specify the Host Name, Port (Number) 
	and QueueManager used by WebSphere
	
	Host Name: The name of the host the Websphere MQ Queue Manager resides 
	on. e.g MyServer
	Port (Number): The listener port of the QueueManager you wish to connect 
	to. e.g. 1414
	QueueManager: The name of the Queue manager you wish to connect to. e.g. 
	MyQueueManager
	These parameters are WebSphere MQ specific.
	
	You should only use a Topic connection for topic related activities and
	a queue connection for Queue related activities, otherwise Websphere MQ 
	may give the following message:
	javax.jms.IllegalStateException: MQJMS1112: JMS1.1 Invalid operation for 
	domain specific object
	
	
	*Builder + Viewer*
	At run time you will need to place the Websphere MQ JMS client jars
	(jms.jar, com.ibm.mq.jar, com.ibm.mqjms.jar, connector.jar, dhbcore.jar)
	on the class path to use this functionality
	
	
	These Jars can be found in the Java\lib directory where you installed 
	the Websphere MQ server
	e.g. "C:\Program Files\IBM\WebSphere MQ\Java\lib"
	
	
	
	*JmsSimulator*
	
	
	The Jms Simulator can be used with websphere.
	New command line arguments are available for configuring hostname, port 
	and queue manager.
	Note : you may need to explicitly set the client ID to NULL - as it has 
	a non null default.
	You will need to set the class path as described above.
	e.g.
	-jmsfactory:com.ibm.mq.jms.MQTopicConnectionFactory -jmsclient:null 
	-jmsuser:myUser -jmspassword:myPassword -jmshostname:myServer 
	-jmsport:1414 -jmsqueuemanager:myQueueManager
	
	
	*Jms Transaction Simulator *
	
	
	The Jms Transaction Simulator can be used with websphere.
	New command line arguments are available for configuring hostname, port 
	and queue manager.
	Note : you may need to explicitly set the client ID to NULL - as it has 
	a non null default.
	You will need to set the class path as described above.
	e.g.
	-jmsfactory:com.ibm.mq.jms.MQTopicConnectionFactory -jmsclient:null 
	-jmsuser:myUser -jmspassword:myPassword -jmshostname:myServer 
	-jmsport:1414 -jmsqueuemanager:myQueueManager
	
	
	*Jms Transaction Monitor Utility  *
	
	
	The Transaction Monitor Utility can be used with websphere.
	New command line arguments are available for configuring hostname, port 
	and queue manager..
	Note : you may need to explicitly set the client ID to NULL - as it has 
	a non null default.
	You will need to set the class path as described above.
	e.g.
	-jmsfactory:com.ibm.mq.jms.MQTopicConnectionFactory -jmsclient:null 
	-jmsuser:myUser -jmspassword:myPassword -jmshostname:myServer 
	-jmsport:1414 -jmsqueuemanager:myQueueManager
	
	
	Websphere MQ Specific notes
	
	
	JMS Message properties must be valid Java Identifiers (e.g. no spaces in 
	property name).
	Websphere MQ Topic syntax does not support spaces in names.

12461: Validation of subs now handled properly by JMS Command dialog
	Previously the JMS Command dialog did not process substitutions
	when validating field values.  This has been fixed.

OSISoft PI Data Source

11181: OSIsoft PI data source added
	The OSIsoft PI data source provides historical and current data 
	for named data points.  Data attachments include a connection to a OSIsoft 
	PI Server, with an optional user name and password, a OSIsoft PI point name, 
	a query mode, start and end dates, and a retrieval mode.
	
	Currently no validation is performed on the dsstring, so care must be taken 
	to ensure that the connection, point name, dates, and modes are valid.
	
	The Point Name list is populated by querying the list of points from the 
	OSIsoft PI Server specified in the Connection combo box.  A filter is 
	provided to narrow down the list of points displayed.  The pattern for the 
	filter is defined by the OSIsoft PI WildCard Search function.
	
	The query mode identifies the type of data to be retrieved from the OSIsoft 
	PI Server.  There are three supported query modes:
	
	1. Historical Data - Only historical data is returned, from the start date to
	the end date.
	2. Historical and Current Data - Historical data from the start date to the
	present is returned, and then new data is returned as it is added 
	to the OSIsoft PI database.  The end date is ignored for this query mode.
	3. Current Data - The most current value for the point is returned from the 
	OSIsoft PI database.  New values are returned as data is added to the OSIsoft 
	PI database.  Both the start and end dates are ignored for this query mode.
	
	In all query modes, if a date is left blank the current date is used.  So for
	example, if the end date is left blank in a Historical Data query, data will
	be returned from the start date to the present.  Because the query is for
	historical data only, the data will only be retrieved once.  To cause the data
	to update as new values are added, specify a Historical and Current Data query
	mode instead.
	
	The retrieval mode specifies the method used to return data from the OSIsoft PI
	database.  This mode applies to both the Historical Data and to the Historical
	and Current Data query modes, but is ignored for the Current Data query mode.
	There are two supported retrieval modes:
	
	1. GetArcValueSX - This mode returns all data for the specified interval.  If
	more than the maximum number of points are available, the returned data is
	truncated so that the final values are not included.
	2. PlotValues - This mode divides the specified interval into equal time
	slices and returns the values of the data at the start and end of each
	interval, as well as the minimum and maximum values of the data during the
	interval.  In addition, an exception code is returned for each interval.  The
	exception code is a OSIsoft PI error code that indicates whether a problem 
	occurred with the data during the interval.  For example, an exception 
	might occur if a piece of equipment were taken off-line for maintenance, or 
	if a network failure prevented the transfer of data to the OSIsoft PI Server.
	
	The OSIsoft PI data source also includes an Options dialog that allows the 
	definition of Connections to OSIsoft PI Servers as well as the following data 
	source variables, which are defined in the OSIsoft PI Administration tab.
	
	Default Tag Mask - This mask will appear in the Attach to Data dialog when it
	is first displayed.
	Maximum Number of Point Names - This option limits the maximum 
	number of point names displayed in the Attach to Data dialog.
	Maximum Number of Point Values - This option limits the maximum number of
	points to return in a single data query.  For the PlotValues retrieval mode,
	this option also defines the number of time slices into which the interval is
	divided.

StreamBase Data Source

12444: StreamBase data source added to RTView
	A StreamBase data source has been added to RTView. This
	data source allows you to view stream data and stream metrics data
	in RTView and also to send tuples.

12488: StreamBase Application Options dialog implemented
	In the Display Builder Application Options dialog and in the standalone
	Configuration Utility, the StreamBase category now includes three tabs which
	implement the full set of StreamBase data source options. The tabs and their
	options are as follows:
	
	StreamBase Connections URI - this displays a single connection URI
	
	StreamBase Streams - displays the following lists with the ability to add and 
	remove entries:
	Streams
	History Streams
	Simulated Streams
	
	StreamBase Administration - displays the following options:
	Enable Monitor Metrics
	Write History
	History Depth
	
	Note the following, which appears on the Administration tab: The options 
	"Enable Monitor Metrics" and "History Depth" will not be applied to the 
	current session of RTView. To apply these options, save the 
	initialization file and restart.

12489: Connection definitions implemented for StreamBase
	The Display Builder Application Options dialog for the StreamBase Data Source
	has been enhanced so that connections to StreamBase servers, specified by URI, 
	may be named, and a default connection may be specified.  On the Connections 
	tab you will find a list of connections with buttons to add and remove 
	them, and a selector for the default connection.  When you add a connection 
	you're given a dialog which allows you to enter the name and the URI of the 
	connection.

12493: StreamBase data source available streams list fixed
	In the Display Builder, dialogs for the StreamBase Data Source are fixed. 
	The list of streams available from a given connection previously showed in 
	the dialog even if the server was not sending data to the stream. This 
	pertained to the Application Options dialog, the Attach To Data dialog, and 
	the StreamBase Commands dialog.

12527: Field alignment in StreamBase command dialog fixed
	In the Display Builder, the Define StreamBase Command dialog
	has been improved in appearance, so that the fields line up correctly.

12569: StreamBase displays added to dstutorial
	Sample screens illustrating use of the StreamBase data source 
	have been added to the Data Sources Demo.

XML Data Source

12506: XML Data Source memory usage optimized
	The amount of memory used by the XML data source when loading a
	data set containing many duplicate string values has been reduced.

Demos

RV Monitor Demo

12606: Bug in Current Traffic Trends display fixed
	In RTView 4.4c1, the Current Traffic Trends display in
	the rvmonitor demo did not work correctly. This has been fixed.

Display Server

12438: Display Server display preload functionality enhanced
	The Display Server can be configured to preload display files.
	In prior releases this feature was of limited use since a 
	preloaded display was unloaded after a client requested
	it but then no other client requested it again before the
	display timeout interval (default 60 seconds) expired.
	As of this release, a preloaded display will never be unloaded
	unless the Display Server is restarted or the display cache
	is cleared from the JMX console.

12465: Errors in Firefox JavaScript console fixed
	In prior releases, the Thin Client Browser sometimes
	caused error messages in the Firefox JavaScript console
	when changing the foreground and background colors of table
	cells. The error messages were similar to the following:
	
		Error: Expected color but found 'undefined'.
	
	This problem is fixed.

12475: Support for -notablecontrols removed
	The Display Server notablecontrols option is obsolete and is no
	longer supported.  If the option is specified a warning message will be
	printed in the Display Server console and will otherwise be ignored.

12573: Graph scrollbar bug fixed
	In the previous version of RTView, graph scrollbars
	would not work in the Thin Client Browser if the display contained
	one or more functions.  This has been fixed.

12580: Incorrect drilldown behavior with Thin Client Browser fixed
	In the prior release, the Thin Client Browser treated all drilldowns
	as though the Open In Named Window option was set, even if
	the Open In New Window option was actually selected. Also,
	if the Open In New Window option was selected and the named
	window was already open, a drilldown to that window would not
	raise the window, often leaving it obscured by the main browser
	window. These problems are fixed.

Distribution

12600: Can't stop sims in custom demos if started from SM Launcher
	In the previous version of RTView, the EMS Manager option 
	"Edit Display" did not work if the EMS Manager was started from the Start 
	Menu.  This has been fixed.

12601: EMS Manager "Edit Display" option fixed
	In the previous version of RTView, the "Stop Simulator" button in 
	the Trader Exchange Demo of EMS Manager Example did not work if the EMS 
	Manager was started from the Start Menu.  This has been fixed.

Drill Down

12494: Reload of display on initial drill down fixed
	In prior releases, if an object's drill down target was
	set to the current display and current window, the
	display would be reloaded unnecessarily the first
	time that the drill down was performed, resetting any
	local variables, scroll bars, and trace data on the
	display. This is fixed.

12599: Drill down in graphs and stock chart fixed
	In the previous beta release, it was not possible to drill down
	by a left click on the trend graph, xy graph, or stock chart if
	its zoomEnableFlag property was checked. This is fixed.

Functions

10382: New include display functionality added
	A feature has been added to allow a display to include the contents of another 
	display file. The functions, local variables, and graphical objects from the 
	included file are added to the display. This feature is useful if several 
	displays use a common set of functions and local variables, or require a common 
	set of graphical objects (a set of navigation controls at the top of each 
	display, for example). Previously, it would have been necessary to duplicate 
	those common objects in each display. Now the common objects can be defined and 
	maintained in a separate file, and that file can be included by each display 
	that needs them.
	
	The files to be included by a display are specified using the Include Files 
	dialog, opened from the Tools menu in the Display Builder. A display can specify
	multiple include files. Nesting is supported, that is, an included file can 
	include other files. When a file is removed from Include Files list, all 
	objects, functions, and local variables that were loaded from that file are 
	removed from the current display.
	
	When a display includes a file, graphical objects from the included file will 
	appear in the display, and local variables and functions from the included file 
	can be used in data attachments by other objects in the display. In the Display 
	Viewer, objects that are loaded from an included file are treated exactly as 
	objects that are loaded from the display's own file.
	
	However, to ensure that all displays that include a file use the same object 
	definitions, the Display Builder does not allow included objects to be modified,
	nor does it save the included objects to the display's rtv file. That is, the 
	definitions of the included objects do not become a permanent part of the 
	current display. (An exception to this is the initial value of a local variable 
	from an included file, described below).
	
	When a graphical object from an included file is selected in the Display 
	Builder, the object is highlighted but no resize handles are drawn. The object 
	can't be moved, scaled, deleted, or re-ordered. It cannot be the target of a 
	Paste Attachments or Paste Properties. The object's properties are shown in the 
	Object Properties window but they can't be changed. The name of the include 
	file, in parentheses, is appended to the object's objName property. An included 
	object can be copied and pasted. The pasted object becomes a part of the 
	current display, not a part of the included file.
	
	Functions from an included file are listed in the Functions dialog but cannot 
	be removed or modified. An included function's result can, of course, be used 
	in data attachments. If an included function is copied, it becomes part of the 
	current display. When an included function is displayed in the Edit Function 
	dialog, an extra field labeled "Include File" shows the name of the function's 
	file.
	
	Local variables from an included file are listed in the Local Variables dialog 
	but cannot be removed. However, the initial value of an included local variable 
	can be changed in the Local Variables dialog, and the value will be saved in 
	the display's rtv file. This can be useful in  cases such as the following: 
	Assume several displays include a file named Header.rtv, which defines a label 
	object to appear at the top of each display, showing the title of the display. 
	The label property of the title object is attached to a local variable named 
	headerTitle, defined in Header.rtv, with its initial value set to "Your Title 
	Goes Here".  If a display is configured to include Header.rtv, the title object 
	will appear in the display, showing the text "Your Title Goes Here", and the 
	variable named headerTitle will appear in the Local Variables dialog. If 
	headerTitle is selected, the Remove button will be disabled (since it was 
	loaded from Header.rtv, not the current display) and the initial value can be 
	changed to read "My Display Title". This value will be saved with the current 
	display when it is saved from the Display Builder.
	
	The background properties (image, model properties) in an included file are 
	ignored. That is, they are not added to the display that includes the file.
	
	The Display Builder will print an error message if a display includes the same 
	file more than once or if the included files are circular (e.g. file A.rtv 
	includes B.rtv which includes A.rtv). If an included file is in the same 
	directory the file that includes it, or a subdirectory, a relative path to the 
	included file is saved in the display's rtv file. Otherwise, an absolute path 
	to the included file is saved.
	
	Objects from an included file may have the same name (that is, the same value 
	for the objName property) as objects from other include files or from the 
	display file. This may cause links to attach to the wrong object, since a 
	link's starting and ending nodes are found by name. This can be avoided by 
	assigning a unique value to the objName property of objects in an include file. 
	For example, you might append "_Header" to the name of each object when 
	building an include file named Header.rtv.

11979: Custom function API has been improved
	It is possible to perform calculations on your data before it displayed in
	RTView. A number of built-in functions are available to be used.
	
	This new feature allows the user to create custom functions that can be used
	just as the built-in ones are.
	
	For example, you can create a custom function that will take the floating point
	value of a number and return the rounded integer value. To display the results,
	attach your functions to objects using the Attach to Function Data dialog.
	
	Functions can be given input data as arguments and can return data in four
	different types: integer, double, string or table.
	
	B:  IMPLEMENTATION
	
	This is an example of how to use the API.
	
	Here are the steps to create a Round function that will take the floating point
	value of a number and return the rounded integer value.
	
	You will be creating a java class called MyFunctionHandler that subclasses
	GmsRtViewCustomFunctionHandler. This will contain all of your custom functions
	in a single file. You must use the exact name MyFunctionHandler as your class
	name and filename.
	
	1. Add a GmsRtViewFunctionDescriptor in the getFunctionDescriptors()
	method. The name of the function to be created in this example is "Round".
	
	public Vector getFunctionDescriptors ()
	{
	                                // vector of function descriptors
		Vector<GmsRtViewFunctionDescriptor> v =
					new Vector<GmsRtViewFunctionDescriptor>
	
	                                // Round
	        GmsRtViewFunctionArgument roundArgs[] = new
	        GmsRtViewFunctionArgument[1];
	        roundArgs[0] = new GmsRtViewFunctionArgument("Value", GMS.G_DOUBLE);
	        v.addElement(new GmsRtViewFunctionDescriptor("Round",
	                        roundArgs,
	                        GMS.G_INTEGER, null,
	                        "This function rounds the value to the nearest
	                        integer.\n",
	                        "This is the extended Help description.\n",
	                        false));
	
	                                // return the vector full of functions
	        return v;
	}
	
	Notice that the function is added to a Vector of function descriptors.  The
	creation of the GmsRtViewFunctionDescriptors is done by creating an array of
	argument objects as GmsRtViewFunctionArgument.
	
	In this case only one argument is created called "Value" of type double. The
	four choices are: GMS.G_INTEGER, GMS.G_DOUBLE, GMS.G_STRING or GMS.G_TABLE.
	
	The function is given a return type of GMS.G_INTEGER.
	
	If the return type is GMS.G_TABLE an array of return columns is given next,
	otherwise use null.
	
	Finally the descriptor is given the two strings that will appear, when the new
	Round function is chosen in the Edit Function dialog in the Display Builder.
	The first string is the brief help sentence or two that shows in the dialog.
	The Extended Help is the help that is shown if the Help button in the dialog
	is pressed.
	
	2.      Next you need to implement the function logic and attach that logic to
	the correct place to return the new value.
	
	In this example the result is an integer so the implementation is done via the
	getIntResult() method.  Similar methods exist for the other return types:
	getDoubleResult(), getStringResult() and getTabularResult().
	
	See the RTView User guide for more details.
	
	//----------------------------------------------------
	// Method for functions that return an integer result
	//---------------------------------------------------
	public int getIntResult (String functionName,
	                        GmsRtViewFunctionDescriptor functionDesc,
	                        GmsModelVariables functionIcon)
	{
	        int ret = 0;
	
	        //--------------------------------------------
	        // Add an element for each custom function
	        //--------------------------------------------
	        if (functionName.equals("Round")) {
	                ret = getRoundedValue(functionIcon, functionDesc);
	        }
	
	        return ret;
	}
	
	Notice that this method actually calls getRoundedValue, which is a private
	method that has been chosen by the implementer. You are free to implement
	private methods as you choose in MyFunctionHandler.java.
	
	The getRoundedValue() method works as follows:
	
	//---------------------------------------------------
	// Define a custom function which rounds the value
	//---------------------------------------------------
	private int getRoundedValue (GmsModelVariables functionIcon,
	                                GmsRtViewFunctionDescriptor functionDesc)
	{
	        double num = Double.NaN;
	
	        try {
	                                // get the argument value via the descriptor
	                num = functionDesc.getArgDoubleValue("Value", functionIcon);
	        } catch (Exception e) {
	
	                                // show error message, if argument not found
	                System.out.println(e.getMessage());
	        }
	
	                                // round to the nearest integer
	        int retval = (int) Math.rint(num);
	
	                                // return the result to the caller
	        return retval;
	}
	
	
	C:  INTEGRATION
	
	Compile and link your file to the gmsjrtview.jar and any other libraries that
	you may need. Create a new jar file containing your class or classes.
	
	D:  DEPLOYMENT
	
	Make sure that the jar file containing your new class is added to
	RTV_USERPATH and is available at run time.

12485: Function execution enhanced
	The function data source has been improved to avoid unnecessary
	updates to functions, improving performance. No changes are
	required to custom function handlers.

12597: Functions exception fixed
	In the previous release, the functions Filter By Pattern and
	Filter and Extract Matches would throw an exception if the input table
	contained a string column that contained nulls.  This error has been
	fixed.

Object Library

Bar Charts

11795: Mouseover for bar graphs fixed
	In prior releases, the mouseover tooltips for a bargraph would
	sometimes be displayed when the mouse was moved over objects in other
	panels, such as a drilldown window.  This has been fixed.

12401: Bug with *AxisMinLabelWidth fixed
	Previously you could not set vertAxisMinLabelWidth or
	yAxisMinLabelWidth to a value less than 10. This has been fixed.

Charts (General)

12487: Grid lines now being drawn correctily
	Previously the xy graph, stock chart, and trend graph would
	occasionally display grid lines outside of the graph area.  This has
	been fixed.

Control Objects

12307: listValues and radioValues properties now support text editor
	In the Display Builder property sheet, the listValues and
	radioValues properties for the radio button, list box, and combo box
	controls has been enhanced with the option to bring up a text edit
	dialog by clicking on the "..." button at the end of the property field.

12467: hotkey keyboard activation for buttons added
	The button control object (obj_c1button) now supports keyboard
	activation. An alphanumeric key (A-Z or 0-9) can be assigned to
	a button's hotKey property. If the user holds the Alt key and
	presses the corresponding key when the panel containing the
	button has focus, the button will be activated.
	
	If the character that corresponds to a button's hotKey appears
	in the button label, in upper or lower case, it will be
	underlined.
	
	If multiple buttons in the same display have the same hotKey
	assignment, only one will be activated when the user presses
	Alt+hotKey. The same is true if multiple panels are displayed
	in the Display Viewer and multiple buttons with the same hotKey
	appear in the panels.

Tables

12466: Support for multiple row selection added
	The table object (obj_table02) now supports selection of
	multiple rows. This is enabled by a new property named
	multiSelectFlag. By default this property is unchecked.
	
	When multiSelectFlag is checked, all selected rows will be
	highlighted regardless of the value of the rowHighlightEnabledFlag
	property.
	
	When multiSelectFlag is checked, multiple rows can be
	selected in the table in several ways, for example:
	
	- Ctrl+LeftClick on an unselected row to select it,
	or Ctrl+LeftClick on a selected row to deselect it,
	without deselecting any other currently selected rows.
	
	- Shift+LeftClick on a row to select all rows between
	it and the nearest selected row.
	
	- Press the left mouse button on the first row to be
	selected, then drag over adjacent rows to select
	them, then release the mouse.
	
	- Click on the first row to be selected, and then hold
	the Shift key down while pressing the up or down arrow
	keys to select additional adjacent rows.
	
	(Note: In the main window of the Display Builder, the
	last two actions will move the table).
	
	If a drill down target is defined for the table, and if
	single-click mode is enabled, then any of the above
	actions will trigger a drill down if the table is
	displayed in the Display Viewer. If single-click mode is
	disabled, or if the table is displayed in the Display Builder
	then to trigger a drill down with multiple rows selected
	in the table, you must right-click on a selected row and
	and then pick Drill Down from the popup menu.
	
	When a drill down is performed from a table in which
	multiple rows are selected, each substitution defined
	in the table's drillDownColumnSubs is assigned a string
	containing the values from the appropriate column in each
	of the selected rows. If multiple rows are selected, the
	column values are separated by semicolons. For example,
	assume a table contains 2 columns named Airport and Code
	as follows:
	
	   Airport     Code
	   -------     -----
	   Baltimore    BWI
	   Dallas       DFW
	   Denver       DEN
	
	Also assume the table's drillDownColumnSubs property has
	these assignments:
	
	  Airport : $air
	  Code : $code
	
	Then, if a drill down is performed from the table with the
	rows for Dallas and Denver selected, the drill down subs
	will contain the following values:
	
	  $air = Dallas;Denver
	  $code = DFW;DEN
	
	If instead the table's drillDownColumnSubs property is empty,
	then on drill down the predefined table substitution named $col1
	would contain the value "Dallas;Denver".
	
	None of the other predefined table substitutions ($1rowName,
	$celldata, $colName, etc) or row name subs are affected by
	selection of multiple rows. These substitutions will contain
	values from the appropriate columns in the first row that is
	currently selected in the table.
	
	A selected row can be deselected by a Ctrl+LeftClick action.
	Continuing with the previous example, if you deselect the
	Denver row but left Dallas selected, then the table's
	drillDownColumnSubs would be assigned these values:
	
	  $air = Dallas
	  $code = DFW
	
	Limitations:
	
	Deslecting all rows in the table will not clear the value of
	the table's drill down substitutions, they will keep the values
	from the last row that was selected. Continuing with the
	previous example where only the row for Dallas was selected in
	the table, if you then deselected that row, leaving no rows
	selected, the values for the subs $air and $code would still
	be Dallas and DFW, respectively.
	
	The Thin Client Browser has the following limitations:
	
	- Multiple rows can only be selected by a Ctrl+LeftClick on
	each row. No other actions will select multiple rows.
	
	- The selected column is determined only by a mouse click,
	it cannot be changed by using the arrows keys.
	
	- In a table that has the multiSelectFlag property checked,
	a right click will not select the row under the mouse
	pointer.
	
	- After a table is displayed in the Thin Client Browser, changes to the
	value of its multiSelectFlag property are ignored.
	
	- In Firefox, the popup menu does not open in response to a
	right-click on a table that has the multiSelectFlag property
	checked. Instead, a double right-click must be used to open
	the popup menu.

12468: Ability to keep row selection after updates added
	The table object (obj_table02) has been enhanced to
	restore the row selection after a data update is
	received that changes the number of rows or the
	order of rows in the table. A new property named
	indexColumns has been added to support this feature,
	as described below. Another new property named
	scrollToSelectionFlag has been added. If this
	property is checked, the table will scroll if necessary
	to keep the first (topmost) selected row visible
	after a sort or a data update.
	
	If indexColumns is left blank (the default) the row
	selection is maintained using the data row index of the
	selected rows. For example, assume the user selects rows
	in the table that correspond to rows 3 and 5 in the
	valueTable attachment (note that data rows 3 and 5 may
	be shown in table rows other than 3 and 5 if a sort
	column has been selected). If the valueTable is then
	updated by the data source, the table rows that
	correspond to rows 3 and 5 in the new valueTable
	will be selected in the table (these rows may appear in
	different positions than they did before the update, if
	a sort column is defined).  This is sufficient for
	maintaining the row selection if:
	
	- the number of rows in the valueTable data attachment
	either does not change or new rows are always appended.
	
	- the order of the rows in the valueTable data
	attachment does not change.
	
	If either of the above is false, and the row selection
	needs to be maintained across data updates, then the
	indexColumns property should be configured.
	
	If there is a single column in the valueTable attachment
	that uniquely identifies each row, then select that column
	in the Index Columns configuration dialog. To uniquely
	identify a row, the row's value in the selected column can
	not be duplicated in any other row, and it must remain
	unchanged across data updates. (It is okay if rows are added
	and removed).
	
	To select the row label column of the valueTable as an index
	column, type "empty" in the edit box at the bottom of the
	Index Columns dialog, then click Add Column, then click the
	checkbox for the "empty" column.
	
	If no single index column exists, select a combination of
	columns in the Index Columns dialog that will uniquely
	identify each row in the valueTable. The combined value of
	the index columns for a row must be unique. For example,
	if the valueTable contents are as follows ...
	
	    City          State   Temperature
	    ----          -----   -----------
	    Boston         MA        35
	    Springfield    PA        37
	    Springfield    IL        22
	
	... then City and State can be used for indexColumns.
	But if the contents are as follows ..
	
	    City          State   Temperature
	    ----          -----   -----------
	    Boston         MA        35
	    Springfield    PA        37
	    Springfield    IL        22
	    Springfield    PA        40
	
	... then City and State are not sufficient to use for
	indexColumns (maybe a County column needs to be added to
	the data table!).
	
	If there is no combination of columns that uniquely
	identifies a row, then the indexColumns property should
	not be assigned.
	
	It is not necessary for the index columns to be visible in
	the table, they can be hidden using the columnsToHide property.
	
	Limitations:
	
	The indexColumns property is ignored by the Thin Client Browser. In
	addition, the Thin Client Browser will clear the selection in a table if the
	number of rows in the table is changed by a data update.

12497: Right-click actions on multiple rows in table fixed
	In prior releases, the editing feature of obj_table02
	only allowed one row or column to be removed at a time,
	since a right mouse click in a table in edit mode would
	deselect all cells except the cell under the mouse pointer.
	This is fixed.

12590: Filter string crash for scalar object fixed
	In the prior release, an array bounds exception would be thrown if
	the valueTable property of an object had an XML attachment with a 
	filter that returned a table with one or more columns but no rows.  
	This is fixed.
	
	    obj_btlabel01
	    obj_tilabel03
	    obj_drumcount01
	    obj_drumcount02

Trend Charts

12525: Trend graph problem with scalar values fixed
	In the previous release, in some conditions if a Display Viewer
	client requested a scalar value for the traceNValue property of
	a trend graph object, the Data Server would never send the value
	and the trend graph would plot no data. This is fixed.
	
	Note that this fix does not address the issue in which the trend
	graph only plots changed scalar values when used with the Data
	Server. As before, this issue is addressed by unchecking the
	"Send Changed Data Only" option in the Data Server options dialog.
	See the Data Server documentation for details.

12617: Data table not sorted by ascending timestamps can be plotted
	In the prior release, the trend graph would not plot a data table if
	its rows were not sorted by ascending timestamps. This is fixed.

XY Charts

12574: XY graph problem with displaying -0 on x axis fixed
	In prior releases, the xy graph would sometimes show -0 on an
	x axis label rather than 0. This is fixed.

TIBCO EMS Manager - Administration

11680: Bridge administration screens added to TIBCO EMS Manager
	There is now an separate Manage Bridges screen under EMS
	Administration and a table of Bridges is included on the Connections,
	Etc screen under the server under EMS Monitoring.
	
	It is possible to add and delete bridges for a chosen server.
	
	Two new commands were added to the GmsRtViewJmsAdmDs data source
	to create_bridge and delete_bridge.
	
	These changes require the use of TIBCO EMS 4.2+.

11862: User able to set more EMS Manager Queues and Topics properties
	The EMS Manager now allows the user to set the following properties on Queues
	and Topics.
	
	Topics: flowControlMaxBytes, secure, MaxMsgs and overflowPolicy
	Queues: flowControlMaxBytes, secure, exclusive, maxRedelivery, MaxMsgs and
	overflowPolicy
	
	(The property flowControlMaxBytes like maxMB is set in units of MB or 
	megabytes.)
	
	Which properties are fully supported depends on which version of TIBCO EMS is
	running on both the management computer and the targeted EMS server.

Transaction Message Monitor

12507: RV and JMS Transaction Monitors now a single application
	This release combines both the TIBCO Rendezvous and JMS Transaction
	Monitors into a single application. Users can now, within the one application,
	configure messages to come from either TIBCO Rendezvous or any flavor of
	JMS, and the two types can be used within a transaction definition.
	
	To support this enhancement, a new file - run_tm.bat - combines the
	functionality of the current run_jmstm.bat and run_rvtm.bat files.
	Additionally, two new parameters were added that allow for specifying data
	sources - defaultds and ds. The defaultds parameter specifies a default data
	source at the application level, and the ds parameter can be used to override
	the default data source at the transaction level, the message level, or both.
	
	defaultds:
	
	The defaultds parameter can be used in the TMOPTIONS.ini file and as a
	command argument. In both cases, it must be followed by either JMS or
	TIBCO Rendezvous, depending on the desired default data source. If anything
	other than JMS or TIBCO Rendezvous is found, the Transaction Monitor will
	inform the user of the error and set JMS as the default data source.
	
	         e.g. defaultds jms      # used as a parameter in TMOPTIONS.ini
	              -defaultds:jms     # used as a command line argument
	
	ds:  parameter
	
	This parameter allows for specifying the data source at the transaction
	level and/or the message level of the TRANSACTIONS.ini file. This can be
	accomplished by adding the ds: parameter to the desired message or
	transaction entry. To specify a TIBCO Rendezvous data source, use ds:rv.
	For JMS, use ds:jms.
	
	e.g. To specify that the transaction "My Transaction" uses a TIBCO Rendezvous
	data source:
	
	startBusTransaction 'My Transaction' ds:rv # sets default to rv
	msg msgA ID ds:jms                         # this message uses JMS
	msg MsgB ID                                # this defaults back to rv
	
	Adding this parameter to any message definition line will override the current
	transaction-level ds for (only) that message. Adding the parameter to any
	transaction definition will override the current application level defaultds for
	(only) that transaction, including all messages within the transaction that
	do not contain their own ds: overrides.
	
	======================================================
	
	Though the Transaction Monitor now supports both TIBCO Rendezvous and JMS,
	you are not required to have both types installed. the Transaction Monitor 
	will check for only the message service(s) specified in the TRANSACTION.ini 
	file. If a required service is not found, the Transaction Monitor will exit 
	gracefully leaving an error message explaining the problem.

12575: Transaction Monitor can now send data over a socket conection
	With this release, the Transaction Monitor can now send its data over a socket 
	connection. 
	
	You can enable this functionalty in the Transaction Monitor by adding either a 
	command line argument, or an entry in TMOPTIONS.ini.
	
		For the command line, add: -socket
		This will default to port 4068
		If an alternate port is desired, add: -port:xxxx where xxxx is any 
	        number above 1024
		ex: -socket -port:1234
	
		For TMOPTIONS.ini add: socket
		This will default to port 4068
		If an alternate port is desired, add: port xxxx where xxxx is any 
	        number above 1024
		ex: socket port 1234
	
	
	In your corresponding display(s), you'll need to configure the XML sources to 
	read data from the server. To do this, select Tools/Options from the Display
	Builder menu, then click on the XML tab. In the XML Sources list, double click 
	on the tm_summary.xml entry. This will open the "Edit XML Source" dialog. 
	Change the "XML Source Path" to the following:
	
		remote://localhost:4068/tm_summary.xml
	
	Repeat this for the tm_detailactive.xml and/or tm_detaildone.xml source entries.
	
	If the server is run on a different host than the Display Builder, specifiy the 
	server's host name in place of localhost above.
	
	The tm_xxxxxxx.xml files will not be written to when set up to use this socket 
	connection.

Version 4.4c1 Release Notes

Alerts

12232: Alert engine added to RTView
	Support for alerts has been added to RTView. Alert
	definitions are configured in the Display Builder. These alert
	definitions are then used by the Alert data source to generate
	alerts and if specified execute commands such as sending email
	when the alert is generated. Users can view alert data by attaching
	the objects in their display to tables in the Alert data source.
	The Alert data source is active in the Display Server and Data Server
	regardless of whether any clients are connected, so alerts will be
	generated even if no one is viewing the system.

Builder

12174: Dialogs defaulting to docked status after -resetlayout
	In the Display Builder, certain dialogs which are dockable are
	intended to appear floating the first time they are invoked after the
	"Reset Layout" command is used. These dialogs include Local Vars,
	Functions, and Object List. There was a problem such that if a Reset
	Layout was done and the application closed before any of these dialogs
	was invoked, then that dialog was invoked on a subsequent run, it
	would not appear floating but rather would be docked in a default
	position. This problem has been fixed.

12362: Missing SL Logo fixed
	If the Display Builder was invoked from the command line with
	the name of a display that could not be found, the resulting
	error dialog did not display the SL icon. This has been fixed.

12435: Incorrect selection with background model properties fixed
	In the Display Builder when displaying the Model Properties via the
	Background Properties dialog, it was possible to see a very small
	selected object just below and to the left of the editing area.
	Furthermore clicking on this object would cause a crash. These
	problems have been fixed.

Builder - Editing

10027: Option added to specify grid properties
	The Display Builder has been enhanced with a new dialog, Builder Options, 
	which manages settings for the Display Builder. It is invoked from the 
	Builder Options menu item on the Tools menu. The values set in this dialog 
	are automatically restored on application startup and saved on application 
	exit.
	 
	The dialog consists of a button panel and two tabbed panels. The button panel 
	includes the buttons Ok, Apply, Default, and Cancel. The Default button will 
	write to default values to the current tab; these values may then be applied.
	
	The second panel is titled Grid and includes the following items:
	
	Grid Visible:
	This controls whether the grid is visible.
	
	Snap To Grid:
	This controls whether move or resize operations will be "snapped" to the 
	nearest grid intersection.  This setting is independent of the grid visibility. 
	
	Color
	This is the color in which the grid lines will be drawn.  A sample of 
	the current color is displayed; clicking the sample will bring up a Color 
	Chooser box.
	
	Style
	This is the style of the grid lines; two choices are available in of the 
	drop-down list: Lines and Dots. Default value is Dots.
	
	Spacing (Horizontal and Vertical)
	This is the number of pixels between major divisions in the grid.  Valid 
	values are positive numbers. Default value is 64.0.
	
	Subdivisions (Horizontal and Vertical)
	This is the number of subdivisions between each major division.  Valid 
	values are positive integers. Default value is 8.
	
	Offset (Horizontal and Vertical)
	This is an offset in pixels that will be applied to the grid lines.  Values 
	may be negative. Default value is 0.0.

10907: Escape key has been mapped to cancel mode
	In the Display Builder the Escape key will now cancel any current
	zoom or editing mode.

11412: Option added to show grid lines on screen
	The Display Builder has been enhanced with a visible grid that
	may be used to position and size objects.  The grid may be made
	visible and invisible by means of a new toggle button on the toolbar.
	The snap-to-grid function is independent of the visibility of the grid
	and may be turned on and off by means of a second toggle button.

11521: Order and Delete menu items disabled in drill down windows
	In the Display Builder, when invoking a popup menu from the
	Preview window or a drill down window, the following menu items
	were not always disabled: Delete, Order, Align, Distribute.
	This has been fixed.

11522: Paste Properties now applies to all selected objects
	In the Display Builder, if multiple objects were selected, the
	Paste Properties commands would apply properties to only the first
	selected object.  This has been corrected so that the properties will
	be applied to all of the selected objects.

11867: Builder options dialog added
	The Display Builder has been enhanced with a new dialog, Builder Options,
	which manages settings for the Display Builder. It is invoked from the
	"Builder Options" menu item on the Tools menu. The values set in this dialog
	are automatically restored on application startup and saved on application
	exit.
	
	The dialog consists of a button panel and a panel titled General. The button
	panel includes the buttons Ok, Apply, Default, and Cancel. The Default
	button will write to default values to the current tab; these values may
	then be applied.
	
	The General panel includes the following items:
	
	History List Size
	This is the number of items that will be kept in the History Undo and Redo
	lists.  Valid values are integers in the range 0 - 1000. The default value
	is 20.
	
	Recently Used File List Size
	This is the number of items that will be listed in the recently-used file
	list on the File menu. Valid values are integers in the range zero 0 - 9.
	The default value is 4.
	
	Console Window Buffer Size
	This is the number of lines of text that will be saved in the Console
	window. Valid values are integers in the range 0 - 5000. The default value
	is 1500. 
	
	Keyboard Arrow Movement Amount
	This is the number of pixels that an object will be moved when the keyboard
	arrow keys are used. Valid values are numbers in the range 1.0 - 100.0 The
	default value is 1.0.

12207: Select by Extent button added
	In the Display Builder you can select several objects by clicking
	on the background and drawing a rectangle around the objects you want 
	to select.  However if your display is crowded with objects that may be 
	difficult to find a clear space to click on to start your selection.  
	To work around this problem the Display Builder has been enhanced with a 
	select-by-extent mode.  
	
	This mode is initiated by clicking the toolbar Select By Extent toggle
	button. When the mode is enabled, clicking on an object will start a
	select-by-extent operation just as clicking on the display background does
	normally.  The object you clicked on to start the selection will not be
	included among the selected objects. Otherwise this operation behaves just
	like a normal select-by-extent operation: any object which is not entirely
	within the selection extent will also not be included, and the new selection
	will replace any current selection unless you hold the Control or Shift keys
	while performing the operation, in which case the new selection will be
	added to the current selection.
	
	The select-by-extent mode remains in effect (as indicated by the state of
	the toolbar toggle button) until one of the following occurs:
	1.  You make a selection
	2.  You click or right-click on the background or any object
	3.  You press Escape.

12221: Menu item syntax made consistent
	In the Display Viewer and the Display Builder menus, items that
	invoke a dialog should end with "...". This was not always the case,
	but it has been made consistent.

12370: Support added for .png files are now supported
	In the Display Builder, image files in the Portable Network
	Graphics (PNG) format are now supported in addition to JPG and GIF
	formats. PNG-format images may be used as display backgrounds, as
	labels for objects that support image labels, and with a "Display
	Image" Filter action.

12378: Cursor changes to "+" when in select by extent mode
	In the Display Builder when the select-by-extent mode is enabled
	(using the Select By Extent toolbar button) or when an extent
	selection operation is initiated by pressing the mouse button
	while over the display background, cursor will change to a crosshair
	indicating a select-by-extent operation is in progress.

Builder - Options Dialogs

12299: Tab list added to left side of Options dialog
	The Display Builder Application Options dialog has been reorganized
	into categories; each category represents a related group of tabs.  A
	category may be selected from the list on the left of the dialog and
	the corresponding tab or tabs will be displayed on the right.

Builder - Property Dialogs

12355: visFlag property fixed
	In the previous release, if the user unchecked the visFlag
	property in the Display Builder property sheet, the selected object
	would become invisible as expected, but for some objects the visFlag
	checkbox would remain checked.  Clicking on the checkbox again had no
	effect so the object remained invisible.  Objects on the Controls,
	Graphs, and Tables palettes were not affected by this problem; all
	other objects were affected.  This problem is fixed.

Commands

12301: Email command added to system commands
	An email command has been added to the available System commands.
	
	In order to use this command from an Applet, it is necessary to add the
	following to the Java Policy file.  (Change the first two to suit the SMTP
	server being used. The second two are only needed if attachments are to be
	sent.)
	
	--
	
	grant {
	  permission java.net.SocketPermission "sl631", "resolve";
	};
	
	grant {
	  permission java.net.SocketPermission "192.9.200.208:25", "accept, connect,
	  listen, resolve";
	};
	
	grant {
	  permission java.util.PropertyPermission "user.name", "read";
	};
	
	grant {
	  permission java.io.FilePermission "<<ALL FILES>>", "read";
	};

12382: Open Browser command now supported in application
	In previous releases, the Open Browser command only worked the
	Display Viewer Applet and the Display Server. It has been enhanced
	to work in the Display Builder and Display Viewer as well.

12404: Email system command supported in Display Server
	The Display Server now supports the email system command.
	
	When an email command is executed from a thin client display,
	the email message is transmitted from the Display Server, so
	the SMTP host specified in the email command must be accessible
	from the Display Server host.
	
	The path to an attached file, if not absolute, is relative to
	the working directory of the Display Server.
	
	Limitations:
	
	If the email command fails, an error message is printed in the
	Display Server console but the message is not shown on the thin
	client. Similarly, the commandWindowCloseOnSuccess property is 
	not supported in the thin client. Threshold commands are not
	supported. (These limitations apply to all commands executed 
	from the thin client).

Data Historian

12412: Historian support for PostgreSQL8.x improved
	The Historian supports PostgreSQL 8.x, using the JDBC3
	driver included with Postgres. 
	
	A typical Historian setup for Postgres is as follows:
	
	  JDBC Driver Class Name: org.postgresql.Driver
	  JDBC Database URL: jdbc:postgresql://localhost/RTVHISTORY
	
	The jar file containing the Postgres JDBC3 driver class must
	be included in the classpath, for example:
	
	  set RTV_USERPATH=C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\8.1\jdbc\postgresql-8.1-405.jdbc3.jar
	
	As with other datatabase systems, before using the Historian
	with Postgres and empty database named RTVHISTORY must be created.
	This can be done with the pgAdminIII application included with
	Postgres. The Historian will automatically create the tables it
	needs in the RTVHISTORY database. But if its preferrable to create
	those tables manually, the following SQL commands should be used.
	Note that all table and column names are lowercase and are unquoted.
	
	CREATE TABLE history
	(
	  var_name varchar(100),
	  time_stamp varchar(30),
	  time_stamp_ls varchar(14),
	  var_value float8
	) 
	WITHOUT OIDS;
	ALTER TABLE history OWNER TO postgres;
	
	CREATE TABLE history_s
	(
	  var_name varchar(100),
	  time_stamp varchar(30),
	  time_stamp_ls varchar(14),
	  var_svalue varchar(40)
	) 
	WITHOUT OIDS;
	ALTER TABLE history_s OWNER TO postgres;

Data Sources

JMS Admin Data Source (for TIBCO EMS only)

12380: Attach to EMS Administration dialog no longer crashes
	In previous versions, the Attach to EMS Administration dialog
	would sometimes crash if it was opened very quickly after starting
	the Display Builder. This has been fixed.

JMS Data Source

12442: EMS Servers tab in Options dialog fixed
	The EMS Servers tab in the Display Builder Application Options is
	no longer initially blank when a custom servers.xml file is used and
	server discovery is disabled.

JMX Data Source

12377: The JMX data source now supports the java.util.Date type
	The JMX data source now supports the java.util.Date type.

SQL Data Source

12387: The BIGINT SQL type is now supported.
	The BIGINT SQL type is now supported. A column of this type
	results in a LONG column in the resulting GmsTabularData.

12388: Memory usage has been reduced when processing text columns
	Enhancements have been made to the SQL data source to
	reduce memory usage when processing strings.

12451: SQL query no longer fails in Data Server with -xmlredirect
	In prior releases, if the Display Builder or Viewer redirected SQL queries
	to the Data Server and the xmlredirect option was specified, then
	SQL queries containing single quotes would fail. This is fixed.

TIBCO Hawk Data Source

12392: Double values > 2E10^7 in a table no longer display incorrectly
	In previous releases, double values greater than 21,000,000
	from a TIBCO Hawk Microagent were displayed incorrectly. This has
	been fixed.

TIBCO Rendezvous Data Source

12297: RV Monitor metrics now include % Retrans and % Pkts Missd
	The tables and bar graphs in the RV Monitor application have been
	updated to show the percentages of missed packets to packets received
	and retransmitted packets to packets sent.

12302: Support added for multiple transports for RV Monitor
	The tables and graphs in the Tibco Rendezvous Monitor have been
	modified to support multiple transports on a single host.

12381: RV monitor now shows hostnames in addition to IP Address
	Tables in the RV Monitor now show the host names in addition to the
	IP addresses.

Demos

GI Demo

12434: GI demo added to the deliverable
	The GI demo has been added to the standard release.  The GI demo 
	illustrates the integration of RTView with TIBCO GI.
	The TIBCO GI framework provides the web application frames, with 
	frame content provided by the RTView Display Server
	(thin-client deployment).  Refer to demos\gi\JSXAPPS\SLHawkMonitor\README.txt
	for details on how to integrate TIBCO GI with RTView.

Display Server

12223: Property added to specify display's refresh rate in Thin Client
	In a Display Server deployment, a display is refreshed in the client
	browser at regular intervals. The interval (15 seconds, by default)
	is defined in rtvdisplay.properties and can be changed, but it applies
	to all  displays. In this release, a refresh interval can be assigned
	to each display using a new background model property named
	rtvRefreshInterval.
	
	To assign a Display Server refresh interval to a display, open the
	display in the Display Builder and click File/Background Properties and
	in the dialog click Model Properties. In the property sheet, enter a
	value for rtvRefreshInterval. If the value of rtvRefreshInterval is 
	an empty string (the default) or is a number less than zero, or is not 
	a number, the default refresh interval (defined in rtvdisplay.properties)
	will be used. If the value of rtvRefreshInterval is zero, the display
	will not be periodically refreshed. (The user can still request a refresh
	from the Thin Client popup menu). A positive number specifies the 
	Display Server refresh rate, in seconds. The minimum interval is 5 seconds.
	
	A substitute string may be entered as the value of rtvRefreshInterval,
	for example $myRefreshInterval. The value for the substitute string
	could be assigned in a drill down to the display. It is also possible
	to attach rtvRefreshInterval to data.
	
	If the 'refresh' parameter is specified in the URL used to open the display,
	this value overrides any value specified in the display's rtvRefreshInterval
	property.

12318: New portlet added for viewing displays in a portlet container
	This release includes a portlet which can be used to view 
	RTView displays in a JSR 168 compliant portlet
	container.
	
	The portlet has been tested in Liferay/Tomcat but should 
	also work in other JSR 168 compliant portlet containers.
	The release includes additional configuration files specific
	to Liferay. For other portlet containers, additional setup
	may be required.

12373: Display server improved to eliminate blink between page loads
	The Thin Client has been improved to eliminate the flash or blink
	that sometimes occurred when loading a new display. This
	occurred as the browser cleared the previous page before loading
	the page for the new display and was most noticeable on large
	display or in cases where the server response was slow to arrive.
	In this release, navigating to a new display does not cause the
	browser to load a new page. As part of this improvement, Back and
	Next items have been added to the thin client's popup menu. These
	can be used to recall up to 10 previous displays.

12384: Timestamp provided for -verbose output for Display/Data Server
	A timestamp is now included in the diagnostic output from the Data
	Server and Display Server enabled by the -verbose option.

12390: Bug with logo in headless mode fixed
	In the previous release, if the Display Server was run in headless
	mode and a client viewed panels.html or panels.jsp, the logo panel at
	the bottom of the page would display an error message. In some cases
	this would cause subsequent problems loading other displays. This
	problem is fixed.

12397: Firefox cpu performance improved when connecting to Thin Client
	In the previous release,  browser CPU usage would increase if a
	display was left open and refreshing for an extended period in the
	Thin Client.  The problem was more noticeable if multiple panels were
	used and if the refresh interval was short. This problem is fixed.

12423: obj_table03 no longer crashes display server in -daemon mode
	In prior releases, if the Display Server was run with the -daemon
	option and a client opened a display containing a rotated table object
	(obj_table03), the server would throw an exception. This is fixed.

12432: Table scrollbars no longer paint outside table in FireFox
	In the previous release, when using the Thin Client in Firefox,
	a table with a width of less than 150 pixels was not drawn
	correctly. In particular, the table's vertical scrollbar was drawn
	outside of the table. This is fixed.

12459: Bar graph colors no longer incorrect for multiple bar groups
	In the previous release, if a display with a background image also
	contained a bar graph whose barProperties specified a color index > 32,
	the Display Server would draw the corresponding bars in white instead
	of the specified color. This is fixed.

Distribution

12391: Data sources are now found if a final backslash in env variable
	In RTView 4.3, the data sources did not load correctly
	if the supporting environment variables ended with \. This has been
	fixed.

Functions

10497: Edit Function dialog layout reworked
	In the Display Builder, the Edit Function dialog has been given
	an improved layout that will work better when the dialog is resized.

11539: More help information added to the Edit Function dialog
	A Help button has been added to the Edit Function dialog,
	to bring up a dialog containing a detailed description of
	the selected function.

12338: The Subtotal By Time function now returns time column as DATE
	The Subtotal By Time function previously returned the "Value"
	column as a STRING even if the first column was of DATE type.
	The new version of this function now sets the type of the resulting
	table to be the same type as the original data, as long as the
	Date Format argument is left blank.  If the Date Format argument
	is specified, the function will return a String in the first column
	as it did before.  NOTE: In previous versions, a null Date Format
	field would result in a default format used in returning the String
	column.  This behavior is now changed and could result in a visual
	difference is some displays.

12347: New Filter By Wildcard and Extract Data functions using Regex
	Two functions have been added for filtering tables:
	Filter By Pattern, Filter And Extract Matches.
	
	The Filter By Pattern function returns a table containing all
	rows from the input table where the value of a column matches
	a pattern. This function takes the following arguments:
	
	 Table: The input table.
	
	 Filter Column Name: A string that specifies the name of the column
	in the input table to which the pattern is applied. If this 
	argument is blank, then the pattern is applied to the row name. 
	
	 Pattern: A string that specifies a pattern. For each row in the
	input table, if the value in the specified column matches the 
	pattern then the row is included in the result table.
	
	 Pattern Is Reg Expr: An integer. If zero (the default), then Pattern 
	should contain a string where * is a wildcard that represents any
	character, including none. If nonzero then Pattern must contain a 
	regular expression as described at
	http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.5/docs/api/java/util/regex/Pattern.html
	
	
	The Filter And Extract Matches function also returns a table
	containing all rows from the input table in which the value of a 
	column matches a pattern. The result table includes additional 
	columns that contain each token that matches a group in the pattern.
	This function takes all of the arguments described above for the
	Filter By Pattern function, plus the following additional arguments:
	
	 Number of New Columns: An integer specifying the number of new columns 
	that should be added to the result table, to contain the matching groups
	extracted from the filter column in the input table. In the result
	table, the new columns appear to the right of the columns copied from
	the input table.
	
	 New Column Names: A string specifying the names for each of the new columns,
	separated by semicolon. This argument is optional. If Number of Columns
	is larger than the number of names in Column Names, "Group N" will be
	used for each additional column, where N = 1,2,.
	
	For example, if Filter And Extract Matches is configured as follows:
	
	   Table: trade_table from update.xml (from XML simulator)
	   Filter Column Name: Customer
	   Pattern: * *
	   Pattern Is Reg Expr: 0
	   Number of New Columns: 2
	   New Column Names: FirstName;LastName
	
	then the result table will contain 2 additional columns named FirstName
	and LastName, after all the columns from the trade_table, as follows:
	
	 Customer      Symbol  Shares  Purchase Current  High  Low   FirstName  LastName
	 Alice Chen    ABC       xx     x.x      x.x     x.x   x.x   Alice      Chen
	 Betty Jones   XYZ       xx     x.x      x.x     x.x   x.x   Betty      Jones
	
	and so on. Note that the token that matches each wildcard in the pattern (in
	this case the customer's first name and last name) is extracted to a new
	column. The same result table could be obtained with a regular expression:
	
	   Pattern: (.+) (.+)
	   PatternIsRegExpr: 0
	
	Note that parentheses are placed around each capturing group in the expression. 
	(These are included implicitly around each * in a wildcard string).
	
	For more information on Patterns and capturing groups, see the Java documentation
	for java.util.regex.Pattern at
	http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.5/docs/api/java/util/regex/Pattern.html

12351: The Subtotal/Count Unique Values function has been optimized
	The Subtotal/Count Unique Value functions previously performed
	poorly when there was a large number of rows in the table, or if
	the first column of data was of DATE type.  These function has been
	optimized to perform well in both cases

12352: The Pivot On Unique Values function has been optimized
	The Pivot On Unique Values function previously performed poorly
	when the "Key" column was of DATE type.  This function has been
	optimized to perform well with all data types.

12353: The Pivot On Unique Values function now performs subtotaling
	The Pivot On Unique Values function previously replaced the data
	in the pivot columns when consecutive rows were encountered
	containing identical pivot name values.  This function has been
	enhanced to now subtotal the data when consecutive pivot names
	are encountered.

12354: The Subtotal functions now have option to retain columns names
	The Subtotal By Time and Unique Value functions now provide
	an argument that permits the retention of the original columns names.
	Previously, the subtotal columns were names "Subtotal1..." or
	"Total1".  The new argument "Use Column Names" when set to 1 retains
	the original column names.  A value of 0 maintains existing behavior,
	useful when a display is built that needs to be independent of the
	column names in the data.

12356: Count By Bands function added
	A new function Count By Bands has been added.  This function
	accepts as arguments a Min Value, Max Value and Number of Bands.
	It divides the range given by the min and max into bands and counts
	the number of rows in the Table argument that contain a value that
	lies within each band.  This function returns a table containing
	one column that holds the midpoint values of each band (one row
	for each band), and N additional columns, one for each column
	that was contained in the given Table argument.  These columns
	contain the total counts of values that fall within the calculated
	bands. If the Return Cumulative Percents argument is set to true (1)
	then the returned columns will contain the cumulative percentage
	of the total count in each cell, rather than the individual counts.

12415: New First(n) and Last(n) functions added
	Two new functions, First Table Rows and Last Table Rows, have
	been added.  These functions provide the ability to select a given
	number of rows at the beginning or at the end of a given table.
	Additionally, it is possible to a specify a set of Index Columns
	which may be used to group the selected rows by the unique values
	in the index columns. If Index Columns are specified then the
	given number of rows will be returned each combination
	of unique values in the index columns.

12416: Provide Baseline Over Time function added
	A new function has been added to provide the ability to calculate
	a baseline average over time given a time-series data set.  The
	Baseline Over Time function calculates a baseline average of the
	values in the specified Table over the number of Date Part Intervals
	and offsets the timestamp to a Reference Time.  It can be used to
	generate a baseline trace which may be plotted in the same chart
	against a set of current data for comparison purposes.

12420: Count and Subtotal By Time no longer incorrectly rounds days
	In previous versions, the Count and Subtotal By Time functions
	would round the date if multiple date parts were specified. This
	has been fixed.

12424: New Group By Unique Values Function added
	A new function has been added, the Group By Unique Values function.
	This function is similar to the existing Subtotal By Unique Values
	function, but is more general.  It provides the ability to specify a
	set of Index Columns along with a predefined Value List.
	All data in the given table are aggregated and grouped by the given
	index columns.  A Group Type parameter may be set to "SUM", "COUNT",
	"AVERAGE", "MIN", or "MAX" to indicate the type of aggregation that
	is desired.

12425: New Group By Time Function added
	A new function has been added, the Group By Time function.
	This function is similar to the existing Subtotal By Time function,
	but is more general.  It provides the ability to specify a
	Date Column, a Time Range, and an aggregation Interval.
	All data within the specified range are aggregated by the given
	time interval.  A Group Type parameter may be set to "SUM", "COUNT",
	"AVERAGE", "MIN", or "MAX" to indicate the type of aggregation that
	is desired.

12426: New Group By Time and Unique Values Function added
	A new function has been added, the Group By Time And Unique Values
	function.  This function is a combination of the Group By Time and
	the Group By Unique Values, permitting the aggregation of data by
	both time and index columns.  This is the most general of the
	aggregation functions provided in RTView.

12427: New Filter By Time Range function added
	A new function, Filter by Time Range, has been added.
	This function provides a way to filter a table based on a given
	Start and End Time.  It returns a copy of the given table containing
	only the rows in which the value in the Time Column falls within
	the specified Range.

12462: New Reference Function added
	A new Reference function has been added. This function makes a
	reference to a specified table without copying the contents.

Local Variables

12422: Initial value now saved correctly if it contains quotes
	In prior releases, the initial value of a local variable could
	not contain the double quote character.  This is fixed.

Object Library

11695: tableStringValues changed to valueTable for all objects
	The tableStringValues property has been renamed valueTable.
	This affects the following objects: obj_aggalertlava, obj_bargraph,
	obj_objectgrid, obj_pie, obj_radar, obj_table02, obj_table03,
	obj_xygraph.

12240: Bug in Object Properties for combo boxes has been fixed
	A minor bug that was appearing in some of the Object Properties
	combo boxes has been repaired.  When clicking on some combo boxes,
	the bug caused an incorrect value to be initially selected in
	a few circumstances.  This bug did not impact the user's ability
	to correctly choose values from the combo box.

12458: Default bgEdgeWidth changed for all rectangle general objects
	In the Display Builder, the rectangle objects on the General tab
	of the Object Palette have been modified to have a bgEdgeWidth value
	of 1.

Bar Charts

12298: Bar graph no longer fails to show very small values
	The obj_bargraph graph would sometimes fail to show any bar when
	the values were very small (compared to the graph scale) whereas a zero
	value bar would show as a very small bar.  This behavior has been
	modified so that very small values and zero values will both show a
	very small bar.

12337: More space added between labels
	The calculation used to decide whether to rotate axis labels in
	the bar graph has been improved.  In previous versions of RTView,
	the labels had to be within 1 pixel of each other before the
	rotation code was activated.  A larger gap is now maintained
	between horizontal labels.

Charts (General)

12324: Trace marker appearance has been improved
	In previous version, markers on traces were often but not always
	drawn symmetrically. This bug was fixed and now the markers are drawn
	more symmetrically in most cases.

Control Objects

12229: valueToSet* properties added to check box control object
	The checkbox control object (obj_c1btn_chk) has been enhanced to
	include two new properties, valueToSetChecked and valueToSetUnchecked.
	The default values are 1 and 0, respectively.
	
	A checkbox can be used to set a local variable, by attaching the
	variable to the varToSet property of the checkbox. If the new
	valueToSetChecked and valueToSetUnchecked properties are set to their
	default values (1 and 0), the checkbox will continue to work as in
	previous versions, setting the local variable to 1 when checked and
	to 0 when unchecked.
	
	To have values other than 1 and 0 placed into the varToSet local
	variable when the checkbox is checked and unchecked, assign the
	desired values to valueToSetChecked and valueToSetUnchecked
	properties. A string or number can be entered for either property,
	including an empty (zero-length) string.
	
	The value property of the checkbox can also be attached to data.
	Typically it is attached to the same local variable as the varToSet
	property. For compatibility with previous versions, if 
	valueToSetChecked is 1 and valueToSetUnchecked is 0, then the
	the checkbox will be checked when its value property can be converted
	to a nonzero integer value and will be unchecked otherwise. If 
	valueToSetChecked is not 1 or valueToSetUnchecked is not 0, then 
	the checkbox will be checked when its value property equals the
	the valueToSetChecked property and will be unchecked otherwise.

12262: Text entry and area control Display objects now lose focus
	In prior releases, in the Display Builder's preview window and
	drill down windows, a lost focus event was not delivered to a text
	control object unless the user clicked on another control object or
	outside of the window.  Clicking on blank space in the window or on
	a non-control object should also generate a lost focus event.  This
	is fixed.

12311: Color and font support enhanced for controls
	Control objects have been enhanced.
	
	The fgColor property is now supported on the button, combo box,
	and list box controls.
	
	The labelTextFont and labelTextSize properties are now supported
	on the button control.
	
	The Display Builder allows a value of "Default" to be assigned to
	the bgColor and fgColor properties of most control objects,
	indicating that the default color should be used for that property.
	For example, if Default is assigned to the bgColor and fgColor of
	a push button, then in the Display Viewer the push button will have
	the standard Java push button look (black text on a blue/white gradient).
	In a browser using the RTView thin client, the push button
	will have the browser's default push button look. This feature is
	supported on the push button, combo box, and list box controls, and on
	all text edit controls. "Default" is the initial value for bgColor
	and fgColor when an instance of any of those controls is made from
	the Controls palette. To assign Default to bgColor or fgColor through
	a data attachment, use a value of -1.

12456: Combo box no longer crashes if all entries in listValues are
	If the listValues property of a combo box was attached to a table
	and a nonexistent column name was specified, an array bounds exception
	was thrown.  This is fixed.

Legends

12341: Color thumbnail in legend has been enlarged
	The color swatch in the Legend now shows slightly larger and is positioned
	vertically to be approximately centered.  With a legend text font size of 16
	points or more, the position is given a slight adjustment to look better in the
	larger vertical space available.

Links

12406: Links now supported between very small nodes
	In versions 4.3c1 and 4.3d1, it was very difficult to create a
	link between very small nodes. This has been fixed.

12407: Link creation line no longer left in a display
	In previous versions, if the user cancelled in the middle of adding
	a link, the link creation line was left in the display. This has been
	fixed.

12408: Cloning multiple links now properly shows all links
	In previous releases, when multiple links between the same two
	nodes were copied and pasted, the pasted links drew on top of each
	other until the display was reloaded. This has been fixed.

Object Grid

12364: Boolean data can now be mapped to integer fields
	The object grid has been enhanced so that columns of boolean data
	can be mapped to integer fields in the Icon Properties dialog.

Tables

11942: Row selection is lost after sorting a table
	In the table object (obj_table02) if you selected a row and then
	resorted the table by clicking on one of the column headers, the
	selection would stay on the same row number instead of following the
	data for the originally selected row.  This has been fixed.

12165: Column headers now display when a row filter returns no rows
	In previous versions, if a row filter resulted in no rows, the
	object did not display the column headers. This has been fixed.

12176: Drill down no longer occurs when you left-click in edit mode
	This bug has been fixed and now drill down does NOT occur when a cell in a
	obj_table02 is left-clicked, while the table is being edited and drill-down is
	active.

12212: Support null value for date field
	Support for null timestamps has been improved in the SQL 
	and XML data sources. In prior releases, these data sources
	converted null timestamp to a value of zero, which was displayed
	as a time near Jan 1 1970 (The actual displayed time depended
	on the local timezone). In this release, a null timestamp will
	be displayed as an empty string.

12457: bgBorderFlag added to default background model
	In the Display Builder, the default background model has been
	given an additional property, bgBorderFlag. You will see this
	property when you open the Background Properties dialog and click
	Model Properties. Unchecking bgBorderFlag will remove the 1-pixel
	black line around the outside edges of the background.

Trend Charts

10675: Autoscale on Trend Graph includes all traces
	This bug was fixed by adding the yAxisAutoScaleVisTracesOnlyFlag property to the
	Trend Graph in the Y-Axis category.
	
	yAxisAutoScaleVisTracesOnlyFlag is false by default and controls whether
	invisible traces contribute to the autoscaling of the Y axis.  True means
	include only visible traces and false means include all (even invisible) traces.

12261: Zoom-out of trend graph no longer interrupted by multi-select
	In the previous release, the zoom-out feature of the trend graph
	was erratic in the main editing window of the Display Builder, since a
	Shift+Click event is also used to deselect an object. Now, if the
	user performs a zoom-in on a trend graph in the main window,
	a subsequent Shift+Click on the graph area will perform a
	zoom-out, as in the Display Viewer.

12330: Option added to round start and end times
	The trend graph has been enhanced to allow the time axis
	endpoints to be rounded for historical traces. In prior
	versions, if a positive value is specified for the timeShift
	property, the time axis endpoints are rounded to the nearest
	multiple of that value in seconds. But a positive timeShift
	value also causes the time axis to shift at the timeShift
	interval to include the current time, which is unsuitable
	for historical traces. In this release, if a negative
	timeShift value is specified the time axis endpoints will be
	rounded to the nearest positive multiple of that value in
	seconds, but the time axis will not shift unless the trace
	data changes.
	
	For example if timeShift = 15 (the default), the time axis
	endpoints are rounded to the nearest 15 second interval,
	and the time axis will shift left every 15 seconds to include
	the current time. In this release, if timeShift = -15, the
	time axis endpoints are rounded as before but the time axis
	will only shift if new data is received. So, a graph with
	historical traces should use a negative timeShift value.

12334: Trace line no longer covered by scrollbar
	In prior releases, if a trend graph trace line was drawn at the
	very bottom of the trace area it was obscured by the graph's
	horizontal scrollbar. This is fixed.

12441: Support added to plot multiple points at same time
	The trend graph can now plot multiple y values with the same
	x (time) value, as it could in releases prior to 4.3

12445: traceNValue saved to HISTORY_S table
	In release 4.3, if a display contained a trend graph with
	traceNValue (N=1,2,3...) attached to a scalar data value (not a table),
	and the display was used as a data configuration file in the Historian,
	the Historian would not store the data in the history table as
	expected and would be unavailable to the Display Builder and Display
	Viewer. This problem is fixed.

RTView Display Panel

10052: Add recently opened file list to the File menu
	The Display Viewer and Display Builder have been enhanced to
	display lists of recently-opened files on their respective File
	menus.  You may use these lists to re-open files you have recently
	opened.

Reporting

12186: Report generated for All EMS Servers include all data
	In previous versions, reports generated for the "All EMS Servers"
	display were missing data.  The previously missing data now appears in
	the generated report.

12285: Display name is no longer the same for all displays
	Previously reports generated by the report generator using a
	report config file containing multiple sections would have all the
	pages with the name of the first display as their header. Now the
	header for each page is the name of the display used for the section
	(unless the report title option is used, in which case the title of
	the report will be used as the header for all pages in the report).

12346: Rotated table now supported in expanded report
	In previous versions, expanded rotated tables (obj-table03) were
	not included in reports.  Rotated tables now appear expanded in
	reports.

12374: Dotted lines now appear in generated reports
	Previously dotted lines did not appear in PDF output.  Dotted lines
	now appear in PDF output.

12375: Size of generated tables and object grids reduced
	In previous versions, expanded tables and object grids were too
	large in generated reports. Generated reports are now scaled such that
	expanded tables and object grids are the same size in the printed
	report, as they appear on a 19 inch 1280x1024 display.

12398: Indication added when report is generating
	The Display Builder and Display Viewer now display a transient
	dialog to give an indication that PDF is being generated.  The dialog
	is automatically dismissed when the PDF generation is complete.

12411: Asian characters now appear in pdf output
	Previously Asian characters used in objects were not included
	in pdf output.  PDF output will now contain Japanese characters when
	generated in a Japanese locale.  Chinese characters in a Chinese
	locale, and Korean Characters in a Korean locale are also supported.

12428: Slider object no longer crashes headless report generation
	Previously displays containing slider objects would cause
	errors when attempting to create reports using the Report Generator in
	headless mode. This has been fixed.

12429: Option added to use only date for generated report
	The attribute append_timestamp  in the output element of the report 
	configuration file has been enhanced to allow just the date to be used 
	as the timestamp part of the report file name.
	
	The values and the effect on the output filename are as follows. Value is 
	the value of the append_timestamp attribute. e.g. append_timestamp = "value" 
	timestamp is the format of the timestamp part of the generated report file 
	name
	
	Value		Timestamp
	none 		<none>
	false 		<none>
	true 		_yyyyMMdd_HHmmss
	date_time	_yyyyMMdd_HHmmss
	date_only	_yyyyMMdd

12430: Date format in generated reports changed
	Previously when reports were generated with the attribute
	append_timestamp = "true" in the output element of the report
	configuration file, a long, field separated timestamp was generated.
	(of the form  yyyy_MM_dd_hh_mm_ss ). A more compact timestamp (of the
	form  yyyyMMdd_hhmmss) is now used.

12431: New title attribute supported for report generation
	The report configuration file for the report generator now has a
	new, optional, attribute for the report element - title.  When set, the
	the title value will appear as the title for all pages in the report.
	e.g.
	<report name = "report1" title = "My Report" >

12443: Error message displays when trying to overwrite open pdf
	Previously, no error message was given when attempting to export a
	PDF to an output file that was already open by another application
	(e.g. exporting to a previously generated PDF file, when that file was
	currently open in acrobat).  This error is now reported.  The report
	generator will issue an error on (standard) output.  The Display
	Builder and Display Viewer will raise an error dialog.

Substitution

11977: '\' character in a dd sub no longer saved as '/' character
	In prior releases, substitution values in the drill down target
	property of a non-control object could not contain backslashes.  This
	is fixed.

12455: Spaces in command line arguments no longer break on Windows
	In version 4.3d1, command line arguments with spaces were
	not processed correctly. This has been fixed for Windows. To specify a
	command line argument with spaces, enclose the entire argument
	in quotes. For example:
	run_builder "-sub:mysub:sub value"

TIBCO EMS Manager

12290: Monitor Messages no longer required to browse topics and queues
	Previously, in order to browse topics or queues it was necessary
	to start the EMS Manager with the Monitor Messages option enabled.
	This limitation has been removed.  The EMS Manager will now attempt
	to make an administrative connection to a server whenever a topic or
	queue browser is requested.  Once an administrative connection has
	been made, it will remain active so that subsequent topic or queue
	browsing for the same server will use the existing connection.

Transaction Message Monitor

12231: Support added for header & property fields in JMS TM
	The JMS Transaction Monitor now supports getting the transaction
	id from property and header fields in a JMS message. To specify that
	the id field is a header, prefix the header field name with $header.
	For example:
	msg msgA $header:JMSCorrelationID
	To specify that the id field is a property, prefix the property field
	name with $prop. For example:
	msg msgA $prop:senderID
	Both the header and property fields can be used in conjunction with
	other fields when concatenating a transaction id. For example,
	msg msgA $header:JMSCorrelationID $prop:senderID fieldA
	The JMS Transaction Monitor does not support XML in either the header
	or property fields.

12286: Transaction Monitor no longer outputs bad data
	In previous releases, there were 2 cases where the Transaction
	Monitor would output bad data. The first case is when the first
	message in any transaction definition is used in any other transaction
	definition. This has been fixed by only allowing one transaction
	with a given ID to process at a time. There is still one limitation
	for this. The first message in a transaction definition cannot be used
	as the first message in any other transaction definition.
	#
	The second case where bad data was produced is if one or more messages
	were skipped in a transaction. For example, if a transaction definition
	contained 5 messages and the first message then the last message was
	received without the messages in between, the transaction was completed.
	This has been fixed. Now if a message in the transaction is skipped,
	an error message will print to the console that a message was received
	out of order and the transaction will not be updated.

B12345: Rotated table no longer causes crash when exporting report

	In RTView version 4.3c1, exporting a report for a 
	display that contained a rotated table (obj_table03) caused an 
	exception to be thrown and the application to hang. This problem has 
	been fixed.

B12348: Report Save As dialog now shows directories

	In RTView version 4.3c1, the Save As dialog for 
	exporting reports did not show directories. This made it difficult to 
	save reports in a directory other than the one containing the display. 
	This has been fixed.

B12349: Preview now works for displays with file names containing spaces

	In RTView version 4.3c1, the preview window did not 
	work for displays with file names containing spaces. This has been 
	fixed.

B12342: All Windows shortcuts now work without RTV_HOME\bin in PATH

	In RTView version 4.3c1, many of the Microsoft Windows 
	shortcuts in <install_directory>\shortcuts did not work. This 
	has been fixed.

B12344: Run scripts now work when run as UNIX background processes

	In RTView version 4.3c1, some of the run scripts did 
	not work when run as UNIX background processes. This has been fixed.

B12193: Undo stack correct if select an item in a drill down window

	In previous RTView releases, if selecting an object in a
	drill down window deselected an object in the main window, the undo
	event did not get recorded. This caused the history stack to get
	corrupted. This problem has been fixed.

B12195: Copy from drill down window fixed

	In the Display Builder, if an attempt was made to copy an object 
	from a drill down window to the main display it would fail.  This has 
	been fixed. 

E11400: PDF report generation now supported 

	PDF reports can now be exported from, or generated using, 
	RTView. The 'export' functionality is available from all interactive deployment
	options of RTView.
	
	For interactive versions of the Display Viewer or Display Builder:
	The user can choose which RTView display for which they want a
	report generated.
	The user can select the kind of report to be exported ('Display' or 'Report')
	The user can select page layout options (orientation, margins) for the
	generated report.
	The user can select where the exported report is to be saved.
	Instructions for interactive applications
	
	Select the type of report you wish to export from the main menu, or
	from the popup menu on a display.
	
	Select the desired output (orientation, margin) options from the Page Setup
	Dialog.
	
	For non-applet applications you can then choose the name of the file you 
	wish the generated report to be saved as using the Save Dialog.
	
	The report is then generated and saved.
	
	For browser based interaction (applets + Display Server based), once the Page
	Setup has been set, the generated PDF will be opened in a new browser window.
	
	NOTE: Some popup blockers may prevent the creation of this new browser window.
	Please configure your popup blockers to allow the creation of these new windows
	if you wish to view and save the generated PDF.
	
	If Adobe Acrobat has been configured as the application to view PDF files from
	within a browser, then the "Save a copy" toolbar button can be used to save the
	generated PDF file to the local file system from within the browser.
	
	Reports can also be generated from the "Report Generator" by means of a
	configuration file that controls the contents of the generated report(s).
	
	Report Generator
	
	This is designed to allow the generation of specified reports from
	the command line by means of a(n XML) report configuration file.
	
	It is run by running the run_reportgen script in the directory where the
	RTView .rtv files reside.  It takes the following arguments:
	
	-report:<<>report config file name<>> // name of 
	configuration file to be used
	-verbose // output verbose status information during report generation
	-silent // supress vebose xml parsing
	
	        e.g.
	           cd %RTV_HOME%/demos/features
	           run_simdata
	           run_reportgen -report:report.xml
	
	A report generator configuration file is an XML file.
	An example report.xml file is given below.
	
	        <?xml version="1.0" ?>
	        <rtvreport xmlns="www.sl.com" version="1.0">
	
	
	                <report name = "report1">
	                <section display = "object_variety.rtv"
	                subs = ""
	                timeout = "0">
	                <page_setup orientation = "landscape"
	                   margin_left = "1.0"
	                   margin_right = "1.0"
	                   margin_top = "1.0"
	                   margin_bottom = "1.0">
	               </page_setup>
	           </section>
	           <section display = "object_variety2.rtv"
	               subs = ""
	               timeout = "0">
	               <page_setup orientation = "landscape"
	                   margin_left = "1.0"
	                   margin_right = "1.0"
	                   margin_top = "1.0"
	                   margin_bottom = "1.0">
	               </page_setup>
	           </section>
	           <output filename = "report1"
	               append_timestamp = "true"
	               report_or_display = "report">
	           </output>
	        </report>
	        <report name = "report2">
	           <section display = "object_variety3.rtv"
	               subs = "value1:value2 value3:value4"
	               timeout = "0">
	               <page_setup orientation = "landscape"
	                   margin_left = "1.0"
	                   margin_right = "1.0"
	                   margin_top = "1.0"
	                   margin_bottom = "1.0">
	               </page_setup>
	           </section>
	           <output filename = "report2"
	               append_timestamp = "true"
	               report_or_display = "report">
	           </output>
	        </report>
	
	
	        </rtvreport>
	
	The report configuration is contained within the <rtvreport> element.
	
	An rtvreport can consist of multiple reports.
	
	A report is contained in a <report> element, and has a 'name' attribute.
	
	A report consists of multiple <section> elements and an <output> 
	element.
	
	A <section element> has a <page_setup> element.
	A <section element> has the following attributes:
	               display = "object_variety3.rtv"
	               subs = "value1:value2 value3:value4"
	               timeout = "0"
	           'display' - name of rtv display to use for section
	           'subs' - any subs values to apply to rtv display
	           'timeout' - time to wait (in seconds) for data sources to update
	               before producing report for section
	
	A <page_setup> element has:
	
	           'orientation'  element - values are "portrait" or "landscape"
	           margin attributes (values are in inches)
	                   margin_left = "1.0"
	                   margin_right = "1.0"
	                   margin_top = "1.0"
	                   margin_bottom = "1.0"
	
	An <output> element has the following attributes:
	
		filename = "report2"
		append_timestamp = "true"
		report_or_display = "report"
	
		'filename' - base name of generated report file - pdf suffix will 
		be added automatically
		'append_timestamp' - values are "true" or "false" - append timestamp 
		to file basename
		- timestamp is a 'version' of ISO date format that allows sorting, and
		will work on windows filesystems
	
		'report_or_display - kind of report to generate , values are "report" 
		or "display" 
	

E10038: Click and drag scaling of objects added

	Improvements have been made in the way selected objects are displayed and how
	they are moved and scaled, as described in the following list.
	
	Objects may be selected and unselected as before: by drawing a rectangle around
	a group of objects, by clicking (with or without Shift and Control modifier
	keys) on objects, by the keyboard shortcut Control-A, and by using the Object
	List dialog.
	
	Selected objects are outlined with an extent rectangle.  Within the selection 
	extent the selected objects (if more than one) are outlined with highlights. 
	The first object selected will be outlined with a broad dashed line and the 
	others with a narrow solid line.
	
	The first object (sometimes called the focus object) will have its properties
	displayed in the property dialog and will be used as the anchor object for
	align operations.
	
	The entire selection may be moved by grabbing with the mouse any object in the
	selection or any side of the selection extent.
	
	The entire selection may be scaled by grabbing with the mouse any of the
	handles at the corners of the extent and at the midpoints of its sides. Scaling
	by grabbing a corner handle will cause the objects to be scaled in both width
	and height, while grabbing a side handle will cause the objects to be scaled in
	either width or height but not both. (Note the "scale" menu items have been
	removed.)
	
	The mouse cursor will change when over a selected object or an extent side to
	indicate the object(s) may be moved, and will change when over an extent handle
	to indicate they may be scaled. These cursor changes replace the textual
	"move" and "scale" tooltips.
	
	The cursor will also change when adding an object from a palette, or via a
	copy-paste operation, and when adding a link. These cursor changes replace the
	textual "add" and "connect" tooltips.
	
	The extent handles are disabled in drill down windows.
	The highlights within the selection may be disabled, leaving only the exterior
	extent rectangle, with the command-line option nohilites.

E12269: Preview Window added to Display Builder

	A new "Preview Window" option and toolbar button have been added
	to the Display Builder.  Selecting this option brings up the current
	display in a Preview Window, so that you can exercise control objects.
	(Control objects are not active in the main editing window).  Once
	you have made any edits, the Preview button becomes greyed out until 
	you do a Save.  This is because the Display Builder cannot do the 
	preview without loading the display from disk. 

E12085: Mechanism implemented to notify user of command failure

	In this release of RTView, commands executed by a
	custom data source or a custom command handler can return a status
	object, indicating whether the command succeeded or failed, and
	containing an optional error or information message that will be
	displayed in a dialog window.  For the Display Server, the status
	message is printed to the Display Server console but is not shown
	on the client. 

E12086: Command confirm added for control objects

	The commandConfirm property is now supported for controls. The
	default is false.

E12087: Mechanism implemented to close window on successful command

	All objects now support a commandCloseWindowOnSuccess property.
	The value of this property is a boolean.  If true, and if the object
	is displayed in a popup window, the popup window will be closed after
	the object is clicked and its command is successfully executed.
	Custom commands and custom data source commands can be coded to return
	a status object that indicates whether the command succeeded or failed
	(E12085).  Note that this commandCloseWindowOnSuccess is ignored by
	the Display Server.  Also note that all built-in system and data
	source commands return a success status, regardless of the actual
	command results, so for those commands the popup window will always
	close if commandCloseWindowOnSuccess is true. 

E11978: Command confirm  text property implemented for objects

	All objects now support a commandConfirmText property.  The value
	of this property is a string.  When an object is clicked, if a 
	command is defined for the object and the commandConfirm option is 
	checked, the value of commandConfirmText will be displayed in a 
	confirmation dialog.  The property value may be attached to data, and
	may also contain substitutions.  For control objects, it may also 
	contain $value.

B12210: Text box in System Command dialog fixed

	In the Display Builder Define Command dialog, some of the text
	 boxes would be displayed with their bottom edge truncated after text 
	was entered and the dialog re-displayed.  This has been fixed. 

B12183: Attach to Function Data now allows sub in name

	In RTView version 4.2c, a bug was introduced that
	disallows substitutions in the name of a function specified in the
	Attach to Function Data Dialog. This has been corrected. 

B12291: Thin Client grid no longer loses rows when table shrinks

	In prior RTView releases, if a scrolled grid was
	displayed on the Thin Client and the user had scrolled down in the grid,
	and if the grid was then updated with a data table that contained fewer
	rows, sometimes rows were missing or clipped in the updated grid. This
	problem is fixed.

B12245: IE browser now works with long URLs from Display Server

	The Display Server used to generate URL's that exceeded the
	 Internet Explorer limit of 2048 characters for displays that had
	 a large number of substitutions, or substitutions that contained
	 a lot of characters. This problem has been fixed.

B12185: General SQL query error in Display Server fixed

	In the previous RTView release, if the Display Server
	closed a display at the same time that it was opening another display,
	and if both displays used the same general SQL query, the query results
	were discarded and the following error appeared in the Display 
	Server's console window:
	ERROR: Can't share general SQL query.
	This has been fixed. 

B12243: Command confirm now works correctly in Display Server

	In previous versions, the command confirm did not work in	
	the Display Server for datasource commands, and did not include all
	arguments in the case of system commands. This has been fixed.

B12168: Column headers now centered in Display Server

	In the previous release, the Display Server aligned
	table column header text incorrectly. The text was
	shifted several pixels to the left to allow room for
	the sort icon, even when a column was not selected as 
	the sort column. This has been fixed.

B12169: Arrow icon missing on column sort in Display Server

	In RTView version 4.2c, a bug was introduced that caused
	the arrow icon, visible when columns are sorted in a table, to disappear
		in the Display Server.  This has been corrected. 

B12170: Scrolling no longer breaks time range in Display Server graphs

	In RTView version 4.2c, a bug was introduced that
	caused scrolling to break the time range when toggling between
	two time ranges in trend graphs in the Display Server.  This has been
	corrected. 

B12226: Stock and XY graphs on mult clients with diff range fixed

	In prior releases, the Display Server would sometimes draw a
	scrolled graph with an incorrect x or y range if multiple clients
	were viewing the same display and interacting with the scroll bar
	on the graph. This problem is fixed. 
	PALREV: (360816)

B12172: Trend graph scroll problem with multiple clients fixed

	In RTView version 4.2c, if two clients were viewing the
	same display with a trend graph, and one client changed the time range
	of the graph using a local variable, the other client would also see 
	this time range if they scrolled. This has been corrected. 

E12122: Support for using Display Server output in an HTML DIV tag

	A custom JSP tag library is now supported by the Display Server. The
	tag library, or taglib, allows users to create custom JSP pages
	containing one or more RTView displays, without writing
	JSP scriptlet code. This feature requires a servlet container that
	supports JSP 2.0 such as Tomcat 5.0 or newer.
	
	TAGS:
	The RTView taglib defines two tags:
	
	1. setup - This tag must be included once on each JSP page that uses the
	RTView taglib. It will insert references to Javascript files
	and CSS files required by the Display Server. This tag has no attributes.
	Example:
	<rtv:setup/>
	
	2. display - This tag inserts an HTML DIV tag containing an RTView
	display. Note that the setup tag must be included in the JSP page before the 
	first display tag. The display tag has the following attributes:
	
	id - (required) the ID for this tag. This must be unique on the JSP
	page. An id must start with a letter and may contain only letters
	and digits.
	
	displayname - (required) a string specifying an RTView display (.rtv)
	file name. This should correspond to the name of a display file accessible by 
	the Display Server.
	
	refresh - (optional) a positive number defining the rate, in seconds,
	at which the display inside this DIV should be refreshed. If zero,
	the DIV is not periodically refreshed. If not specified, the refresh
	rate is determined by the setting in rtvdisplay.properties.
	
	style - (optional) the CSS style to be used for this DIV
	
	Example:
	<rtv:display id="d1" displayname="MyDisplay" refresh=0"/>
	
	
	REQUIREMENTS:
	There are a several requirements for JSP pages using the RTView
	taglib:
	
	- The taglib must be defined at the top of the JSP page as follows:
	
	<%@ taglib prefix="rtv" uri="rtv.tld" %>
	
	Note that the file rtv.tld is contained in rtvdisplay.war
	
	- For proper operation of the RTView menu, the onmousedown and
	onkeydown event handler of the page's BODY should be defined as follows:
	
	<BODY onmousedown="rtvBodyMouseDown(event)"
	onkeydown="rtvBodyKeyDown(event)">
	
	If other functions are already assigned to these event handlers, then those
	functions should call rtvBodyMouseDown and rtvBodyKeyDown.
	
	- As mentioned above, the <rtv:setup> tag must be included once per JSP 
	page, before the first display tag.
	
	- As mentioned above, the id attribute of each <rtv:display> tag must be 
	unique on the page and may contain only letters and digits.
	
	- Each JSP page must include the RTView menu, as follows:
	
	<jsp:include page="rtvmenu.html"/>
	
	This is typically added near the end of the page's BODY, and should not be
	enclosed in any elements other than <BODY>.
	
	- All .jsp files must be added to the rtvdisplay.war file, which must then be
	redeployed.
	
	
	EXAMPLE:
	The following is a simple JSP page using the RTView taglib.
	
	
	<%@ page contentType="text/html;charset=UTF-8"%>
	<%@ taglib prefix="rtv" uri="rtv.tld" %>
	<HTML>
	<BODY topmargin='0' leftmargin='0'
	onmousedown="rtvBodyMouseDown(event)"
	onkeydown="rtvBodyKeyDown(event)">
	
	<rtv:setup/>
	
	<rtv:display id="d1" displayname="MyDisplay" refresh="0"/>
	<rtv:display id="d2" displayname="AnotherDisplay" refresh="30"/>
	
	<jsp:include page="rtvmenu.html"/>
	
	</BODY>
	</HTML>
	
	LIMITATIONS:
	A separate timer is used for each <rtv:display/> tag that has a nonzero
	refresh rate. If all of the display tags on a page use the same refresh
	rate, they may still be refreshed at slightly different times. Also a
	display's timer is restarted when a drilldown is performed in the display,
	which may offset its refresh timer from other refresh timers on the page.
	

E12127: Display Server now runs as a daemon process

	The Display Server can now be run on a headless host, as follows:
	
		run_displayserver -daemon

B12265: Data Servlet sometime fails to reconnect

	In prior releases, if the Display Viewer was configured to connect 
	to the Data Servlet via HTTP and if the connection was lost and then 
	quickly restored, the Display Viewer would sometimes ignore subsequent 
	data updates from the Data Server until a different display was 
	opened. This has been fixed. 

B12238: Data Server improved to avoid sending redundant data

	The Data Server has been improved to avoid sending redundant data
	when a client adds or changes data listeners.

E12187: JMS Transaction Monitor now supports JMSCorrelationID

	The JMS Transaction Monitor has been enhanced to allow the use
	of the JMSCorrelationID as an id field. 

E12246: Return command status implemented for all system commands

	The handling of system command errors in the Display
	Viewer has been improved. If a system command fails,
	a message dialog will be displayed. Also, if the command
	is invoked from an object in a popup window and the
	object's commandCloseWindowOnSuccess property is set,
	the popup window will be closed if the command succeeds
	but will not if it fails. Previously, the message was only
	printed in the Display Viewer's console window and if
	commandCloseWindowOnSuccess was set the popup window
	was closed whether or not the command succeeded.
	
	This change affects these system commands:
	
		Execute URL
		Open Browser
		Play Audio File
		Run DOS or Unix Command
	
	Note that support for this feature on Custom Commands
	and Custom Data Source Commands was added in the
	previous release. Currently, this feature is not
	supported on Data Source commands.
	
	For a DOS or UNIX system command, the Display Viewer checks
	if the command is started succesfully. It does not
	check the command's exit status.
	
	The Display Server is not affected by this change.

E12192: TIBCO Rendezvous Monitor support for RV data source added

	The TIBCO Rendezvous data source has been enhanced to support built-in
	monitoring functions.  The metrics produced by these functions are
	accessible via data attachments to special subjects that start with
	the name "RTViewDs.".
	
	There is a new Display Builder Options tab named "TIBCO Rendezvous 
	Monitoring".  On this tab, there is a check box that can be used to control 
	whether the special RTViewDs subject tables are made visible in the data 
	attachment dialog.  This is off by default, but may be turned on in order to 
	attach to the monitoring metrics.
	
	The following monitoring metrics tables are available:
	
	RTViewDs.HostStatusTotal - the latest data for all hosts obtained from the
	TIBCO Rendezvous information message: _RV.INFO.SYSTEM.HOST.STATUS
	
	RTViewDs.HostStatusCurrent - the same as the previous table, except that each
	numeric value is replaced with a delta from the previous message
	
	RTViewDs.HostStatusHistory - a running history of all the HostStatusCurrent
	rows only sets a property on an object when referenced for the first time; 
	used for trend graph history
	
	RTViewDs.HostStatusHistory2 - same as History, but sets a property on an
	object every time a new row is added; used in history table
	
	RTViewDs.ConfigServices - output from tibrvconfig getServices method
	
	RTViewDs.ConfigClientTransports - output from tibrvconfig getClientTransports
	method
	
	RTViewDs.MultiCast* - six tables showing all output from rvtrace:
	PacketSource, PacketDest, PacketTotal SubjectSource, SubjectDest, SubjectTotal
	
	In the TIBCO Rendezvous Monitoring dialog, the following options are available:
	
	Show Monitor Tables in Data Dialog - Controls whether tables appear in data 
	dialog
	
	Monitor Host Status Messages on Start - Controls whether RTView
	begins monitoring on startup or waits until a display references a HostStatus table
	
	Host Status History Depth - Sets the number of rows of data kept for each host.
	Default = 1000.  A value of 0 means keep no history.  A value of -1 means it
	is unbounded.
	
	Run Rvtrace on Start - Controls whether rvtrace begins running on startup or
	waits until a reference is made to a Multicast table
	
	Rvtrace Period - Sets the rvtrace update period.  Default is 10.  A value of
	0 means use the default of 10.
	
	The following command line options may be used to override any of the default
	values or those set by the Options Dialog and stored in RVOPTIONS.ini
	
	    -rvds:showindialog: - true or false
	    -rvds:rtviewds.hostatus.onstart: - true or false
	    -rvds:rtviewds.hoststatus.history: - set to -1, 0, or positive integer
	    -rvds:rtviewds.rvtrace.onstart: - true or false
	    -rvds:rtviewds.rvtrace.period: - set to 0 or positive integer

B12184: Objects showing RTViewDs Alert no longer cleared with alerts

	In previous releases of RTView, a scalar object (ie,
	meter, label, scale) that was displaying the Alert column of the
	RTViewDs microagent would go blank when the cleared alerts were
	removed. Cleared alerts are only removed if the Rate to Remove Cleared
	Alerts is set to a value greater than 0 in the TIBCO Hawk Methods and
	Alerts tab of the Application Options dialog. This problem has been
	fixed. 

B12209: HAWK problem when saving options fixed

	A crash would sometimes occur in the TIBCO Hawk data source
	 when saving Options if there was no default console active.
	 This has been corrected.

E12268: Support for multi-byte strings added for ODBO connections

	In previous RTView releases, OLAP databases containing
	 multi-byte characters were not supported in the ODBO connection. This 
	has been fixed. 

B12280: Objects displaying filtered EMS Manager data are now cleared

	In previous versions of RTView, filtered data was not
	 cleared from the objects displaying row filtered data in the queue 
	demo in the TIBCO EMS Manager.  This has been fixed.

B12281: Queue browser enhanced

	The behavior of the queue browser has been changed to provide a
	 snapshot of the queue on each update rather than only displaying new
	 messages in the queue.

E12233: RV Monitor demo has been added

	A new demo "rvmonitor" has been added to the demos directory.
	This demo consists of a set of displays that can be used out-of-the-box 
	to monitor the health and status of a set of TIBCO Rendezvous daemons. 

E12247:  GI Demo link added to Start Menu

	A link to the online GI Demo has been added to the Start Menu.

B12241: All substitutions now shown in JMX Monitor for Display Server

	In the JMX Monitor, the Display Server Application Manager
	RNREV: (082906)
	previously showed only the requested substitutions for each active 
	display.  This has been changed so that the current (actual)
	substitutions are shown instead, including substitutions that are
	embedded in the display as well as any substitutions made as the 
	results of drilldown-sub (SETSUB) functions on the objects in the
	display.

E12237: Several properties are renamed for consistency

	The following object properties have been renamed:
	command string is now command
	command confirm is now commandConfirm
	drill down target is now drillDownTarget

E10664: Text Area object added 

	A text area control object has been added. The control
	supports display and entry of multi-line text with optional word
	wrap. Scrollbars appear in the control as needed.
	
	A text area control can be configured to set a local variable
	or to perform a command. These actions are performed when the
	control loses focus.
	
	The text area control supports properties for font, font size,
	foreground (text) color, and background color. In this release,
	these properties are also supported for the single-line text
	edit control. In prior releases, only the background color
	property was supported.
	
	In the Display Viewer, pressing the tab key inside a text area
	control will insert a tab character in the text. To move the keyboard
	focus away from a text area control, either click outside of
	the control or press Ctrl-Tab.
	
	In the Thin Client Browser, pressing the tab key inside a text area
	will move the keyboard focus. 
	

B12140: Table Filter Properties dialog fixed to show scrollbars

	In the Display Builder the Filter Properties dialog, which lists
	the filters applied to a table, would not present scrollbars if the 
	list grew longer than the available area.  This has been fixed.

B12276: filterProperties applied correctly in Display Server

	In prior releases, if the filterProperties of an obj_table02
	instance were configured to change row, cell, or text colors
	but the filter did not apply to any cells when the display
	was loaded, then any color changes made by the filter on
	subsequent refreshes were ignored by the Display Servlet.
	This problem is fixed. 

E11893: Local variables and substitutions supported in filterProperties

	The filterProperties on a table object can now contain substitute strings
	and local variable names. These can be used in a filter's column
	name, comparison value, and action value. 

E10305: objectClassName renamed to iconProperties and dialog added 

	The Object Grid table (obj_objectgrid) now provides a full-featured
	dialog for editing the iconProperties property. This property used to be called
	objectClassName.
	
	The Icon Properties dialog allows the user to specify the Icon Class
	Name for the icon object to be displayed in the Object
	Grid.  Most of the objects listed in the various tabs of the Object
	Palette can be used as icon objects in an Object Grid.  Valid objects
	are automatically listed in the popup menu for the Icon Class Name field.
	
	Objects from the Object Palette that do not appear in the Icon Class
	Name popup menu may not be used as icon objects in the Object Grid.
	Invalid objects include the tables, controls, links and most of the
	graphs.
	
	Custom objects that do not appear in the Object Palette may be used as
	icon objects in the Object Grid by typing in the Icon Class Name.
	
	Not all of a icon object's properties may be specified through the
	iconProperties property.  The properties that are available for
	specification are listed in the Icon Properties dialog.
	
	The Map column offers three choices for each icon object property:
	Default, Value and Column.  Pick Default if you want to use the
	default value for the property.  If the default value for this
	property changes in future releases of RTView, your icon
	object will reflect the new default value.
	
	Set Map to Value to specify a particular value for the property.
	Data attachments, substitutions and local variables may not be used
	for Property Values.
	
	Set Map to Column to specify that the value for a property should be
	pulled from a particular column in the table that is attached to the
	Object Grid's tableStringValues property.  When Map is set to Column,
	the Property Value column will automatically display all of the columns
	in the table from tableStringValues.  You may specify the name of a
	column that is not yet in the attached table by simply typing in the
	column name.
	
	By default, the Object Grid will display one object instance (of type
	Icon Class Name) for each row in the table attached to the Object Grid's
	tableStringValues property.  Any properties with Map set to Column
	will pull their values from the column specified and from the row
	represented by that icon object instance.
	
	To display more than one icon object for each row in the attached table,
	turn on the "Allow multiple icon types" checkbox.  Use the Add Icon
	and Delete Icon buttons to manage the list of icon objects to be
	displayed for each row in the attached table.
	
	If you enter the name of a custom object that is not currently visible
	to the Display Builder, the Add Property and Delete Property
	buttons will allow you to manage the properties of your custom object.

B12191: New editors for line style, line thickness and marker style

	The Object Properties window now offers improved display and editing 
	of properties controlling line style, line thickness and marker style.
	
	Previously these properties were displayed and edited simply as
	numbers, with each number representing a different option index 
	value.
	
	Now the line style, line thickness and marker style properties are
	displayed with descriptive text and edited by choosing from a list
	of option descriptions.
	
	
	For line style, you may now choose from the following list:
	
	No Line
	Solid
	Dotted
	Dashed
	Dot Dashed
	
	This applies to all properties with names ending with LineStyle
	or TraceStyle, including:
	
	trace*LineStyle in the trend graph
	
	radialAxisLineStyle in the radar graph
	radialGridLineStyle in the radar graph
	valueAxisLineStyle in the radar graph
	valueGridLineStyle in the radar graph
	
	priceTraceLineStyle in the stock chart
	overlay*LineStyle in the stock chart
	
	valueHighAlarmTraceStyle in the trend, stock and xy graphs
	valueHighWarningTraceStyle in the trend, stock and xy graphs
	valueLowAlarmTraceStyle in the trend, stock and xy graphs
	valueLowWarningTraceStyle in the trend, stock and xy graphs
	
	
	For line thickness, you may now choose from the following list:
	
	Thin
	Medium
	Thick
	
	This applies to all properties with names ending with LineThickness,
	including:
	
	trace*LineThickness in the trend graph
	
	priceTraceLineThickness in the stock chart
	overlay*LineThickness in the stock chart
	
	
	For marker style, you may now choose from the following list:
	
	No Marker
	Dot
	+
	*
	o
	x
	Filled Circle
	Filled Diamond
	Filled Triangle
	Filled Square
	Filled Star
	
	This applies to all properties with names ending with MarkStyle,
	including:
	
	trace*MarkStyle in the trend graph
	
	valueHighAlarmMarkStyle in the trend, bar, radar, stock and xy graphs
	valueHighWarningMarkStyle in the trend, bar, radar, stock and xy graphs
	valueLowAlarmMarkStyle in the trend, bar, radar, stock and xy graphs
	valueLowWarningMarkStyle in the trend, bar, radar, stock and xy graphs

E12204: Support for date formatting of graph labels has been added

	Support has been added to allow date formatting of graph labels.
	In the previous RTView version, the labelColumnFormat
	property of the bar, pie, radar and xy graphs only allowed for number
	formatting of numeric graph label data.  If the graph label data is of type
	date, the labelColumnFormat property may use any of the standard
	Java date formatting strings to format the graph labels.
	
	Applying a date format string to numeric label data is not supported.
	Similarly, applying a numeric format string to date label data is
	also not supported. 

E11828: Easily scalable legend object added for charts

	The legend object (obj_legend) has been added to the Graphs
	tab of the Object Palette.  This new object has been introduced
	so that legend information may be displayed outside of a graph.
	The Legend object is especially handy for saving space when
	displaying multiple graphs that all have the same legend information.
	
	The legend object is designed to be used in conjunction with a
	bar, pie, radar or xy graph.  To associate a legend object with
	a particular graph, set the graphName property of your legend
	object to match the value displayed in the objName property of
	your graph object.
	
	The legend object will automatically pick up data and formatting
	information from the associated graph object.
	
	Use the legendValueVisFlag to display the data values associated
	with each legend label.  The horizontal space allotted to the
	data values will automatically adjust to match the length of the
	longest data value.  To reserve a minimum amount of horizontal
	space for the data values, use the legendValueMinSpace property.

E12205: X-axis rotation control enhanced

	The label rotation feature on the bar graph has been improved,
	especially when handling long labels.  In previous versions of
	RTView, long labels were often drawn on top of each
	other and clipped where they extended beyond the graph area.
	
	The horizAxisMinLabelHeight property has been added to the bar
	graph to control the minimum amount of space that will be reserved
	for the labels on the horizontal axis.  If your axis labels vary
	over time, this property may be used to reserve a consistent
	amount of space below the graph for axis labels.
	
	The horizAxisLabelRotationAngle property has been added to the
	bar graph to control the amount of rotation for labels on the
	horizontal axis.  Values for the horizAxisLabelRotationAngle
	may range from 0 to 90 degrees.  Setting the value to 0 will
	cause the bar graph to automatically pick the optimum angle
	of rotation. 

B12181: Autoscroll when bars resized in Display Server fixed

	In prior releases, the Display Server would sometimes draw a
	scrolled graph with an incorrect x or y range.  For example, this
	occurred on a scrolled bar graph if the minimum bar width was
	attached to a local variable and the variable's value changed at
	runtime.  This problem is fixed.

E10936: An improved dialog for barProperties is added

	An editor dialog has been added for the bar graph
	barProperties property. This dialog allows the user to view the
	actual bar colors and fill patterns to be used when plotting bars.

E10937: New dialog for traceProperties

	An editor dialog has been added to the bar, radar and xy graphs 
	for the traceProperties property.  This dialog allows the user to 
	specify the line color, line style, line width, marker color and
	marker style used when plotting traces in the graph.

E11542: Editor dialog added for wedgeProperties

	An editor dialog has been added to the pie graph for the
	wedgeProperties property.  This dialog allows the user to view
	the actual wedge color to be used when plotting the pie.

B12202: mouseOverFlag data corrected for sorted data

	A bug in the XY graph that was causing the incorrect data to be
	displayed in the mouseOverFlag information box has been repaired.
	This bug was visible when the xValueSortFlag was set to 1 and the
	x-value data was not already sorted in the tableStringsValues table.

E12200: Support added for reverse plotting on x-axis

	The XY graph now offers the option of reversing the orientation
	of the x-axis.  In previous versions of RTView, the x-axis always
	plotted values increasing from left to right.
	
	Turn on the xAxisReverseFlag to reverse the orientation of the
	x-axis and plot values increasing from right to left. 

E12159: The trend graph enhanced to accept timestamp information

	The trend graph has been enhanced to accept timestamp information
	along with new values to be plotted.
	
	As in previous versions of RTView, if the traceNValue
	property for a given trace is passed a single scalar value, the scalar
	value is automatically stamped with the current time and plotted
	accordingly.
	
	If the traceNValue property is passed a table containing timestamps
	in the first column and values in the second column, the new version
	of RTView plots the table values using the table timestamps.
	
	Note:  Since the traceNValue property is now defined as a table in
	the Object Properties window, entering scalar values directly into the
	property will still work, but the scalar value will no longer be
	visible in the Object Properties window. 

B12190: Combo box now updates unlisted values correctly

	In the previous RTView releases, if a non-editable
	combo box had its selectedValue property attached to a local
	variable, and the value of the local variable did not correspond to
	any of the items in the combo box drop down menu, the combo
	box would show the previously selected item instead. This has
	been fixed. 

E12234: EMS Manager problem with Display Server fixed

	In the previous release, the Display Server would sometimes throw
	a null pointer exception when a client viewed the EMS Manager display
	ems_allservers_api.rtv.  This is fixed. 

E11742: Support Fault-Tolerant EMS Server connections

	The EMS Manager for TIBCO has been enhanced to support fault-tolerant servers.
	In the EMS Server Topology display, the active server in a fault-tolerant pair
	will appear in green, with the suffix (A) appended to its URL to indicate its
	active status.  The fault-tolerant standby server will appear in blue, with the
	suffix (S) appended to its URL to indicate its status.  A blue link is drawn
	between the pair of servers, labeled "FT".  The edge widths of both nodes are
	increased to highlight the pair of servers.
	
	If a fault-tolerant node fails, the edges of both nodes in the pair and the
	link between the nodes will be drawn in red to indicate the failure.  The
	remaining active server will be drawn in green and its label will have the 
	suffix (A!) appended to indicate that it is still active, but that it's 
	fault-tolerant backup has failed.  The failed server will be drawn in red and 
	its label will have the suffix (X!) appended to indicate that it has failed.
	
	Routes are only created between the active server in a fault-tolerant pair and
	other networked servers.  Two check boxes, "Show Standby Servers" and "Show
	Inactive Servers", allow standby and inactive servers to be included or excluded
	in the topology diagram.  By default, standby servers are included in the
	diagram and inactive servers are not shown.
	
	In the Navigation tree, the names of fault-tolerant servers will have the same
	suffix (A), (S), (A!), or (X!) appended as described in the discussion above.
	In addition, once a server has been added to the Navigation tree, it is never
	removed.  If an individual (i.e. non-fault-tolerant) server becomes inactive,
	its name will have the suffix (X) appended to indicate that it was a
	once-active server.  The suffix will be removed when the server becomes active
	again.
	
	In the All EMS Servers display, a server in fault-tolerant standby mode will
	be drawn in blue.
	
	In the Manage Routes dialog, only the active server in a fault-tolerant pair
	will appear in the "Select From Server" table. In the "Select To Server" table,
	a single entry with the combined URL for the fault-tolerant pair will appear
	in the list, and the individual servers will not be shown separately.  The
	"Routes" table has also been enhanced to display the combined URL for a
	fault-tolerant server pair.
	
	
	

B12101: Monitor Messages browsing of queues and topics fixed

	In previous RTView releases, if the TIBCO EMS Manager
	option Monitor Messages was turned off, browsing of queues and topics
	always went to the local host, rather than the selected server. This 
	has been fixed.

B12163: TIBCO Hawk 4.1 and older no longer supported

	TIBCO Hawk version 4.1 and earlier is no longer supported
	by RTView. 

B12175: Run scripts no longer fail on Win200 due to command line limit

	In previous releases of RTView, some Windows 2000 users
	were not able to use the run scripts due to a command line limitation 
	of 2048 characters. This problem has been fixed.

E12011: RTView has upgraded to Java version 1.5

	RTView now requires Java version 1.5.0_01+ to run. 
	Previous versions only required Java version 1.4.2+.

E12017: Support suppressing add object buttons in Display Builder

	The Display Builder may now be invoked with the command line
	argument "-noobjecticons", which will remove the add object buttons 
	from the Object Toolbar. The add object buttons include the following:
	Add Table
	Add Object Grid
	Add Bar Graph
	Add Pie Graph
	Add Trend Graph
	Add XY Graph
	Add Radar Graph
	Add Label
	Add Circle Label
	Add Rectangle Label

E11859: The Display Builder now has a console window

	The Display Builder now has a Console Window, which will display text
	written to the standard output and error streams. The Console Window will
	display a maximum of 1500 lines, and then start removing lines from the
	top of its display. The Console Window is displayed by default, and can be
	invoked from the Tools menu.

E11701: Display Builder now centers small displays in main panel

	
	The Display Builder centers a display in the main panel if the display's 
	modelWidth or modelHeight are smaller than the panel's width or height, 
	and a shadow is drawn at the display's bottom and right edges. In prior 
	releases, the display was always positioned in the top left corner of the main panel. 
	
	Limitations
	
	If a custom background model is used, the Display Builder will center
	it as described above, but will not draw a shadow.

B11905: Tab order for widgets is no longer reversed in Display Server

	In prior releases, the tab order of control objects (list boxes,
	buttons, etc.) was reversed by the Display Server, as compared to
	the Display Builder and Display Viewer.  This is fixed.

B12053: EMS Manager applet may not draw properly when reloaded

	In prior releases, when the EMS Manager was deployed as an applet,
	the main panel would sometimes go blank after the user opened a
	popup menu or a popup window. It would redraw when the user clicked
	inside the panel. This is fixed.

B12044: Problems with Display Builder applet fixed

	If the Display Builder was run as an applet, some of the 
	dialogs which edit object properties would fail to come up, and
	others would be missing the SL icon.  These problems have been
	fixed.

B12041: Drill down model save error fixed

	In the previous release, if a drill down was performed in the 
	Display Builder to the current window and the drill down display file 
	was located in a subdirectory of the startup directory, then a save of 
	the drill down display would fail with a "File not writeable" error. 
	This has been fixed. 

B12115: Pasting objects into another display fixed

	In the Display Builder, if you copied some objects from one
	display and pasted them into another, the objects would be ordered as
	you selected them, rather than keeping the order they had in the
	original display. This has been fixed.

E11971: Commonly used non-modal dialogs now dockable

	In the Display Builder, the Functions, Local Variables, and
	Object List dialogs have been integrated into the docking framework.
	They may now be docked to any side of the main window, either in
	their own tab group or combined with existing tabs.  The Display
	Builder saves and restores the docking configuration of these
	dialogs as it does for the Object Properties and Object Palette
	dialogs. 

B11945: Keyboard shortcuts now work if dialog has focus

	In the Display Builder, the keyboard shortcuts for some
	file and edit operations that are available in the main window
	are now available when working in certain dialogs, specifically:
		Background Properties
		Application Options
		Functions
		Local Variables
	The keyboard shortcuts available in these dialogs include:
		Command    Shortcut
		New             Ctrl-N
		Open            Ctrl-O
		Save            Ctrl-S
		Print           Ctrl-P
		Undo            Ctrl-Z
		Redo            Ctrl-Y 

E11972: Tooltip string added to Undo and Redo buttons 

	The Undo and Redo buttons on the Display Builder toolbar
	now have tooltips which display the editing action which will be
	undone or redone if the button is clicked.

E11671: Common keyboard shortcuts implemented

	The following keyboard shortcuts have been added for commands
	on the File menu of the Display Builder:
	New Ctrl-N
	Open Ctrl-O
	Save Ctrl-S
	Print Ctrl-P 

E11973: Object List auto-scroll fixed

	The Display Builder's Object List dialog will now ensure that
	the selected item is visible, scrolling the list if needed. If
	there are multiple selected items it will ensure that the item
	with the lowest index is selected.

B11974: Ghost outline in Object List fixed

	In the Display Builder's Object List dialog, when an item was
	deleted, the next item in the list would become the "focused item"
	and would have an outline rectangle drawn around it.  This rectangle
	is no longer drawn.

E11851: Select objects by extent now supported in Display Builder

	It is now possible to select objects in the Display Builder by 
	drawing an extent rectangle around them. Click and drag the mouse and 
	the objects within the rectangle will be selected.

E11852: Select All option added to Edit menu

	The command Select All has been added to the Edit menu.
	This command may also be invoked by the keyboard shortcut Ctrl-A.

B11325: Pasting multiple objects with links fixed

	In the Display Builder, if a selection of nodes and links were
	copied and pasted, only the nodes would be pasted. This has been
	fixed. Note that for a link to be included in the set that is
	pasted, both its nodes must be included as well.

B11883: Background image ghosting in Display Builder fixed

	In prior releases, if a background image was used which did not 
	completely fill the Display Builder's main panel, the unused space 
	around the edges of the image would sometimes contain fragments of 
	the image or contents of other frames. This is fixed.

E11850: Support collapsable grouping of Object Properties

	The Object Properties dialog in the Display Builder now
	displays properties in categories. Individual categories
	can be expanded or collapsed using icons at the left of the
	category row; all the categories can be expanded or collapsed at
	once by means of buttons in a toolbar at the top of the dialog.
	The properties can also be displayed in alphabetic order as in the
	previous version, and can be switched between categorized and
	alphabetized view, by using buttons in the same toolbar.

E11776: Object Props and Subs windows re-sizeable

	In the Display Builder's Properties dialog, the property table
	and the substitution panel are now separated by a splitter, so
	they can be independently resized.

B12116: Empty strings in quotes no longer lost in command execution

	Previously, if a command string contained an empty string
	embedded in single quotes, it was lost before processing.
	This has been fixed.

E11337: Close Window command added to the Define System Command dialog 

	The Define System Command dialog now offers a Close Window command. When 
	executed, this command closes the window specified in the Window Name 
	argument. If no Window Name is given, this command closes the window 
	containing the object that is generating the command.
	
	The Close Window command may not be used to close the main window.

B12158: Join function exception with null cell data fixed 

	In previous releases, the Join function threw a 
	NullPointerException if the cell data in the column specified in the 
	Left Column Name argument was null. This has been fixed.

B12136: Display Server now supports quotes and \n in valueToSet

	In prior releases, the Display Server did not support pushbuttons
	and other control objects whose valueToSet property contained 
	double quotes or the backslash-n character sequence. This is fixed.
	

E12135: Display Server is now instrumented with JMX data 

	The RTView Display Server has been instrumented with 
	a JMX Management Bean (MBean) that allows it to be monitored and 
	managed using JMX.

B12128: "\" in table text is now displayed in Display Server

	Backslashes now appear as table objects in the Display Server.
	The character sequence \n is interpreted by RTView as an end-of-line
	character, however.  In this case the string will be split into
	multiple lines and the \n characters will not be displayed.

B10534: SetSubstitution function now supported by Display Server

	In the previous Display Server release, if the value of a
	substitute string is changed by the Set Substitution function,
	and that substitute is then used in a drill down or a command,
	the Thin Client would use the original value of the substitute,
	rather than the value set by the function. This is fixed.

B12055: Display Server no longer ignores columnAlignment property

	In prior releases, the Display Server ignored the columnAlignment 
	property on obj_table02 for numeric columns and always used right 
	alignment. This is fixed. 

B12054: Column alignment for exported tables is now consistent

	In the previous release, numeric columns in a table exported to 
	HTML or Excel were sometimes left aligned rather than right aligned. 
	This is fixed.

E12049: Display Server optimization for gradients 

	The memory used by the Display Server when rendering displays with 
	gradients has been reduced.

B12046: Problems with Export to Excel feature resolved

	In prior releases, there were several issues with the Display Server's Export 
	Table to Excel feature. In Internet Explorer, the export would fail if the 
	display had many substitutions set, making the rtvdisplay servlet URL longer 
	than 256 characters. Also, in Internet Explorer, if the user selected Save 
	rather than Open in the Download dialog, the save would sometimes fail. In 
	Internet Explorer or Firefox, if the user selected Save rather than Open in 
	the Download dialog, the file had a .jsp extension rather than .xls. Lastly, 
	in Firefox, the Excel window was completely obscured by a new, empty Firefox 
	browser window. These problems are fixed.
	
	(In Firefox, an empty browser window will still appear on top of the Excel 
	window, but it is now much smaller so it does not obscure Excel). 

B12039: Bug causing hidden table columns to be included in export fixed

	In the previous release, if a table with hidden columns was exported to HTML 
	or Excel, the Display Server would exclude the hidden columns from the 
	exported table's header as expected, but would not exclude them from the 
	table's rows. This problem occured only if the rowHeaderEnabledFlag property 
	was false. This problem has been fixed. 

B12022: Crash during refresh in Display Server fixed

	In prior releases, each Display Server refresh adds an entry to the servlet 
	container's error log. The following example is from Tomcat, in 
	%CATALINA_HOME%/logs/localhost_log: java.lang.IllegalStateException:
	                getOutputStream() has already been called for this response
	        at org.apache.coyote.tomcat5.CoyoteResponse.getWriter
	                (CoyoteResponse.java:611)
	        at org.apache.coyote.tomcat5.CoyoteResponseFacade.getWriter
	                (CoyoteResponseFacade.java:210)
	        at org.apache.jasper.runtime.JspWriterImpl.initOut
	                (JspWriterImpl.java:167)
	        at org.apache.jasper.runtime.JspWriterImpl.flushBuffer
	                (JspWriterImpl.java:160)
	        at org.apache.jasper.runtime.PageContextImpl.release
	                (PageContextImpl.java:235)
	        at org.apache.jasper.runtime.JspFactoryImpl.internalReleasePageContext
	                (JspFactoryImpl.java:160)
	        at org.apache.jasper.runtime.JspFactoryImpl.releasePageContext
	                (JspFactoryImpl.java:120)
	        at org.apache.jsp.getjpg_jsp._jspService(getjpg_jsp.java:59)
	        at org.apache.jasper.runtime.HttpJspBase.service(HttpJspBase.java:133)
	        at javax.servlet.http.HttpServlet.service(HttpServlet.java:856)
	
	This has been fixed. 

B12016: Display Server exception fixed

	In prior releases, the Display Server threw an exception while
	rendering an obj_table02 instance attached to a table with zero
	columns and which had its columnDisplayNames property assigned.
	This is fixed.

B11998: Problem with invisible objects remaining visible fixed

	In prior releases of the Display Server, if a control object's visFlag 
	property was initially true but was changed to false before the first display 
	refresh, the control would remain visible. This affected button, text entry, 
	list box, combo box, and checkbox controls. Radio buttons, tables, and 
	non-control display objects were not affected. This problem has been fixed.
	

B11968: Export to HTML no longer creates borderless cells 

	In prior releases, the Export Table to HTML feature of the Display
	Server would generate a table with no borders around any cell that
	contained a blank string. This is fixed. 

B11948: drilldown incorrect from object grid with sort column

	In prior releases of the Display Server, a drill down from the 
	object grid would select the incorrect element if the grid's 
	sortColumnName property was set. This is fixed.

B11839: Display Server draws invisible objects with default sizes

	In prior releases of the Display Server, if a control object was
	initially invisible and became visible on a subsequent refresh, it
	would be drawn using the default size of the control rather than its
	configured size. This has been fixed.

E11792: Table performance improved in Display Server

	The performance of large tables in the Thin Client Browser has been improved. 
	If a table has more than 500 cells (rows x columns), it is displayed in 
	virtual mode. In this mode only the visible cells are rendered by the browser, 
	reducing the time required to display, refresh, and sort a large table. 
	When a table is scrolled in virtual mode, some rows appear blank until the 
	user stops scrolling. By default, virtual mode is enabled for any table that 
	has more than 500 cells (for example, 101 rows x 5 columns). This threshold 
	can be changed by modifying the the VirtualThreshold property in 
	rtvdisplay.properties. See the documentation for more details on modifying 
	rtvdisplay.properties. Support for row headers has also been improved in the 
	Thin Client Browser. The rowHeaderFilterColorsEnabledFlag property is now 
	supported, and the user can resize the row header column interactively, as 
	with the other columns. 

E11756: Support for scroll bars on all tables and graphs added

	Support for scroll bars has been added to tables and graphs
	in the Display Server with the following limitation:
	The scrollbarSize property is not supported in the Display Server.
	The size of a scrollbar is a platform-dependent, system-wide setting,
	and cannot be individually specified per-object.

E12003: Slider control object now supported in Display Server

	The Display Server now supports the obj_c1scale control object, with the 
	following limitations:
	
	- In the Thin Client Browser, the object is drawn as a scrollbar rather than a scale/slider. No tick marks are drawn.
	- The updateWhileAdjustingFlag, bgColor, and objHeight properties are not supported by the Display Server.
	- The enabledFlag property is not supported in Firefox.

B11267: Objects not visible in Object Grid generate drill down URLs

	In prior releases, if elements in the object grid (obj_objectgrid) 
	were scrolled out of view, the Display Server would still generate 
	clickable areas for these element in the web page, outside of the 
	object grid's extent. 

E12134: Data Server now instrumented with JMX data

	The RTView Data Server has been instrumented with a
	JMX Management Bean (MBean) that allows it to be monitored and
	managed using JMX.

B12058: Data Server deadlocking issue fixed

	In previous releases, under certain conditions the Data Server would deadlock 
	and stop sending data to clients. This is fixed.

B11949: Support for transient data attachments implemented

	The SQL data source supports a new Run Query On Demand update mode for data 
		attachments. In this mode, an SQL query is run each time a display 
	that uses the query is opened and each time a substitution string that 
	appears in the query string is changed. The query is not run periodically.

E12097: Data-driven display refreshes enhancement added

	The Display Viewer and Builder have been enhanced to support
	data-driven display refreshes.
	
	In the Display Viewer and Builder, a display must be redrawn
	in order for new data values to be displayed. This is done
	periodically according to the Update Period set on the General
	Options tab. The default Update Period is 2 seconds. Data from
	an asynchronous data source can arrive at any time between
	periodic redraws. In prior releases, it was necessary to lower
	the Update Period if new asychronous data needed to be shown more
	quickly. This resulted in additional overhead. In this release,
	a display is automatically redrawn shortly after data is received
	that affects the display.
	
	The rate of data-driven redraws is determined by the
	Max Data Redraw Rate option, which can be set from the General
	Options tab. The default is 500 milliseconds (a half second).
	In most applications this should be suitable. However, in
	applications that have a continuously high rate of asynchronous
	data, it may be desirable to set this option to a higher value,
	or to disable data redraws entirely by using the corresponding
	checkbox.
	
	Please note that the SQL data source is asynchronous as of this
	release. See the release note for E11457 for details. Other
	asynchronous data sources include TIBCO Rendezvous, TIBCO Hawk,
	JMS, and any data source that is delivered via the Data Server.
	
	E11457: Multithreaded SQL queries now allowed if JDBC driver used
	*The SQL data source has been enhanced to use asynchronous
	multithreading. This can improve overall performance in some configurations.
	
	Background:
	
	On each update cycle, the SQL data builds a list of the queries that are
	due for an update based on each query's Update Mode. Each query uses
	a database connection. Database connections can be predefined on the SQL
	Options tab. Also, a database connection is defined automatically if an
	SQL attachment uses a database name that is not defined on the Options tab.
	
	In prior releases the SQL data source was single-threaded and synchronous:
	the data source would execute the first query from the list, wait for the result,
	and then run the next query on the list. After the last query on the list was
	completed, the Display Viewer would redraw the display to show the query
	results. In the Data Server, the query results would be pushed to the clients.
	A long-running query could result in delays during display callup in the Display
	Viewer, and delays in sending the results of all queries in the Data Server.
	
	In this release the SQL data source is asynchronous and multi-threaded.
	Two types of multi-threading are supported.
	
	(1) One thread per database connection: The SQL data source creates a
	separate execution thread for each database connection. This allows queries
	that use different database connections to run concurrently. Queries that use
	the same connection are still run sequentially. This is the default behavior
	of the SQL data source.
	
	(2) One thread per query: A database connection can be configured to allow
	concurrent queries. A checkbox to enable this behavior appears on the
	Add Database dialog, labeled 'Run Queries Concurrently'. If this checkbox is
	Selected, each query on the connection is run on its own execution thread. By
	default this option is disabled. This option should be used with caution since
	it may cause SQL errors when used with some configurations (for example, an
	ODBC connection to Microsoft SQL Server 2000). In addition, even if no SQL
	errors occur, this option may degrade performance due to additional database
	server overhead (for example, if the database server runs on a host with a 
	single CPU, or if all queries to the database use the same table which the 
	server locks during a query, etc). Please refer to your database documentation 
	for guidance.
	
	In either configuration, the Display Viewer and Data Server do not wait for the
	SQL queries to complete. Instead the SQL data source requests a display redraw
	or a data push when a query completes. The maximum rate for these data-driven
	redraws is determined by a new option on the General tab named
	Max Data Redraw Rate. For details please see the release note for E12097.
	
	The improvements described above apply to the SQL data source when used in the
	Display Builder, Display Viewer and Data Server. However, the Display Server
	still runs the SQL data source in single-threaded/synchronous mode, as in
	prior releases. This will be addressed in a future release.

E11999: Attach to Data and Define Command dialog layouts improved

	The Display Builder Attach to Data and Define Command dialogs have
	been improved in appearance, and the Define Command dialogs have also
	been made resizeable.

E11849: Ellipses button (...) added to Attach to Data dialogs

	An ellipses button has been added to the Attach to Data dialogs. This button 
	brings up the Select Columns dialog and is equivalent to choosing 
	Select Columns from the popup menu that appears as a result of a right-click 
	on the column-related combination box. The following dialogs now offer the 
	ellipses button:
	
	Attach to TIBCO Hawk Data
	Attach to TIBCO Rendezvous Data
	Attach to XML Data
	Attach to SQL Data
	Attach to JMS Data
	Attach to TIBCO EMS Administration Data
	Attach to Function Data 
	

E11987: Property name now shown in function and local var ATD

	In the Display Builder, the Attach to Data dialogs for Functions
	and Local Variables did not display the name of the property being
	attached. This has been fixed.

E11457: Multithreaded SQL queries now allowed if JDBC driver used

	The SQL data source has been enhanced to use asynchronous multithreading.
	This can improve overall performance in some configurations. 
	
	Background:
	
	On each update cycle, the SQL data builds a list of the queries that are
	due for an update, according to each query's Update Mode. Each query uses
	a database connection. Database connections can be predefined on the SQL
	options tab. Also, a database connection is defined automatically if an
	SQL attachment uses a database name that is not defined on the options tab. 
	
	In prior releases the SQL data source was single-threaded and synchronous:
	the data source would execute the first query from the list, wait for the
	result, and then run the next query on the list, and so on. After the last
	query on the list was completed, the Display Viewer would redraw the
	display to show the query results or, in the Data Server, the query results
	would be pushed to the clients. A long-running query could result in delays
	during display callup in the Viewer or, in the Data Server, delays in
	sending the results of all queries.
	
	In this release the SQL data source is asynchronous and multi-threaded. 
	Two types of multi-threading are supported.
	
	(1) One thread per database connection: The SQL data source creates a 
	separate execution thread for each database connection. This allows queries
	that use different database connections to run concurrently. Queries that use
	the same connection are still run sequentially. This is the default behavior
	of the SQL data source.
	
	(2) One thread per query: A database connection can be configured to allow
	concurrent queries.  A checkbox to enable this behavior appears on the
	Add Database dialog, labeled 'Run Queries Concurrently'.  If this checkbox is
	selected each query on the connection is run on its own excecution thread. By
	default this option is disabled. This option should be used with caution since
	it may cause SQL errors when used with some configurations (for example, an ODBC
	connection to Microsoft SQL Server 2000). In addition, even if no SQL errors
	occur, this option may degrade performance due to aditional database server
	overhead (for example, if the database server runs on a host with a single CPU,
	or if all queries to the database use the same table which the server locks
	during a query, etc). Please refer to your database documentation for guidance.
	
	In either configuration, the Display Viewer and Data Server do not wait for the
	SQL queries to complete. Instead the SQL data source requests a display redraw
	or a data push when a query completes. The maximum rate for these data-driven
	redraws is determined by a new option on the general tab named 
	Max Data Redraw Rate. For details please see the release note for E12097.
	
	The improvements described above apply to the SQL data source when used in the
	Display Builder, Display Viewer, and Data Server. However, the Display Server
	still runs the SQL data source in single-threaded/synchronous mode, as in
	prior releases. This will be addressed in a future release.
	

B12144: TIBCO Hawk Methods and Alerts tab now warns that restart needed

	In the RTView 4.1c1 release, the note at the bottom of 
	the TIBCO Hawk Methods and Alerts options dialog tab was missing. This 
	has been fixed. 

B12113: Cluster agent groups showing wrong agents fixed

	A bug in the TIBCO Hawk Agent Groups tab of the Application
	Options dialog has been fixed. The Selected Agents column was
	displaying too many agents for some of the automatically-generated agent
	groups.

B12014: Agents with same name on multiple domains now display correctly

	The TIBCO Hawk Data Source now supports the use of the same agent
	name within different Hawk domains.  
	
	When specifying an agent name in any of the Hawk data source dialogs,
	append the connection name, enclosed in parentheses, to specify a
	connection other than the default connection.  For example:
	
	Agent1 - This represents Agent1 from the default connection.
	Agent1(ConnectionA) - This represents Agent1 from ConnectionA.
	Agent1(ConnectionB) - This represents Agent1 from ConnectionB.
	
	This combination of agent name and connection name has been added
	to the RTViewDs microagent as the DSName property.  It is returned
	in the DSName column of the getAllData and getDSName methods.
	
	To attach to data for a particular agent name from all connections
	containing that agent, append (*) to the Agent Name value.  For
	example:
	
	Agent1(*) - This will get Agent1 from all connections.
	
	To specify all agents for a particular connection, use the TIBCO
	Hawk Agent Group that is automatically created for that connection.
	For example:
	
	*:ConnectionB - This represents all agents from ConnectionB.
	

E12137: JMS BytesMessages are now supported

	The JMS Datasource has been enhanced to support subscription
	data source has been enhanced to support subscription
	to a BytesMessage. Previously BytesMessages were completely
	ignored. Now, when a BytesMessage is received a table row is
	produced containing only a single column labeled "". The data 
	contained in the bytes message is presented only as "" and not 
	formatted in any way.

E12118: Standard JMS Message Header added to Properties

	The following standard JMS Message Header properties are now
	available in the Properties portion of a JMS data attachment:
	JMSCorrelationID, JMSMessageID, JMSType, JMSTimestamp, JMSExpiration,
	JMSDeliveryMode, JMSPriority, JMSRedelivered, JMSReplyTo.

E12089: Capability to subscribe to durables added

	The JMS data source now supports making a durable subscription.
	When adding topics in the JMS Topic Options dialog, specify the
	name of the durable along with the Topic name (optional). 
	When RTView subscribes to that topic, it will use the 
	durable subscription that was specified.

E11256: Implemented commands to send JMS topic messages

	The JMS data source has been enhanced to provide a command
	function to send a JMS Topic message. The command dialog allows
	the user to specify a JMS connection, a topic name, and a series of
	name/value pairs. You can also select whether the message type is
	Map or Text.

E10549: A JMX data source is now available

	A JMX data source has been added to Enteprise RTView. This data
	source allows you to display the MBean methods and attributes from a
	JMX instrumented application as well as to execute JMX operations.

E11885: An Agilent NETeXPERT data source is now available

	A beta version of the Agilent NETeXPERT data source is now 
	available by request. Contact SL sales for an evaluation copy.

E12091: Demo server upgraded to Tomcat 5.5

	The Tomcat demo server included with the RTView 
	installation has been upgraded to Tomcat version 5.5.

B12061: Demo server launcher displays error message on failure

	In previous versions of RTView, selecting Start Demo
	Server from the Start->Programs->RTView->Demos
	menu would fail silently if the environment variable JAVA_HOME
	was not set on the system. Now the script displays the error
	message:
	        *** JAVA_HOME is not defined.
	
	        Tomcat will require that JAVA_HOME be defined as
	        the root directory of the Java installation;
	        i.e., set JAVA_HOME so that the Java executables
	        such as java.exe are in JAVA_HOME\bin.
	
	        Please define JAVA_HOME and re-run this script.
	
	        Press any key to continue . . . 

E11950: Stock chart data added to standard XML simulator

	The XML simulator has been updated to output sample stock data.
	The simulator outputs the file stockdata.xml that contains three
	months of daily data for three stocks, and five days of intra-day data
	for three stocks.

E11956: Data Source Demo now includes JMX

	The Data Source Demo has been updated to include displays for
	the JMX data source.

E11774: An Excel SQL/ODBC example has been added to dstutorial

	Sample displays that access data from an Excel spreadsheet
	have been added to the dstutorial example located in the
	demos/dstutorial directory. Data can be queried from tabular
	data in an Excel spreadsheet as long as the data is defined as a named
	range in the spreadsheet.
	
	RTView treats the Excel spreadsheet the same way it treats
	all SQL databases. Refer to the Appendix D - SQL section for more
	information.

E12007: Image list no longer case sensitive

	In the Display Builder Object Property and Background
	Properties dialogs, properties which present a list of image files
	look for files of type ".gif" and ".jpg". However the Display Builder
	was not correctly ignoring the case of the file type, so that 
	"file.jpg" would be found but "file.JPG" would not. This has been 
	fixed.

B12072: Column widths now correct if initial data is not available

	A bug that was causing custom column widths in the table (obj_table02)
	to be ignored has been repaired.  The bug was appearing in tables
	attached to data that was not immediately available when the table 
	was initially displayed.

B12117: Rotated table supports Ctrl-C/V keyboard shortcuts

	If a Rotated Table (obj_table03) object was added to a display
	in the Display Builder and subsequently an attempt was made to
	copy and paste it into the display using Ctrl-C, this would fail. This
	problem has been fixed.

E12002: Bitmaps in table cells are now supported

	The table object, obj_table02, now supports placing images into table cells. 
	The filterProperties attribute now offers a Display Image action. To display 
	images in a table, add a new filter, specify the Condition as you would for 
	any other filter, choose Display Image for the Action, and specify an image 
	file name. Image files must be of type .gif or .jpg. Image file names may 
	contain spaces, but may not contain any of the following strings, set off by 
	spaces:
	
	if
	then
	=
	!=
	>
	>=
	=>
	<
	<=
	=<
	

E10924: Dialog interface for columnAlignment and columnsToHide added

	The object property editors that operate on column-related attributes have 
	been improved to provide a more consistent user interface. The following list 
	of properties (mostly from obj_table02) now use the new Property Editor dialog:
	
	columnAlignment
	columnDisplayNames
	columnFormat columnsToHide
	columnProperties
	drillDownColumnSubs
	
	The formats for each of these property strings have not been modified. Only 
	the dialogs for editing these property strings have changed. 

E12059: labelFormat property renamed to labelColumnFormat

	In the bar (obj_bargraph), pie (obj_pie), radar (obj_radar), and
	xy (obj_xygraph) graphs, the labelFormat property has been renamed
	to labelColumnFormat and moved to the Data Format category.
	
	The labelColumnFormat property provides formatting for labels in 
	situations where the label column is numeric.  Labels may appear 
	along the x-axis or in the legend and mouseOver tooltip information 
	area.

E11844: Improved appearance of rotated text labels

	The appearance of rotated text labels in the bar graphs have been
	improved.

E11835: Support for columnsToHide property added to graphs

	The columnsToHide property has been added to the bar, legend,
	pie, radar and xy graphs. This property allows users to prevent
	particular columns in the attached data from being used
	in the graph for plotted data or labels.
	
	For graphs with more than one data attachment, the columnsToHide
	property applies to all data attachments.
	
	If the same column name appears in both the labelColumnName and
	columnsToHide properties, the labelColumnName property takes
	precedence. Data from the labelColumnName column is used for
	labels even if that column name appears in the columnsToHide
	property.
	
	All columns from a data attachment are available for use in the
	drillDownColumnSubs property, including columns that have been
	excluded from the graph with the columnsToHide property.

B12042: Bar graph bars and traces now support NaN values

	The bar graph (obj_bargraph) now supports data attachments that contain NaN 
	(not-a-number) values. This allows the bar graph to handle missing or 
	undefined data points when rendering bars and bar traces. 

B11955: Bar graph support for more than 255 bars added

	In prior releases an exception was thrown if a bar graph contained a group 
	with more than 255 bars. This is fixed. 
	

B12038: Stock chart in intraday mode no longer plots unneeded data

	In prior releases, the stock chart in intraday mode would plot all data 
	points for the first hour of a trading day at the same horizontal position, 
	for days in which daylight savings time was in effect. This is fixed.

E11855: varToSet problem with drill down fixed

	In prior releases, if a drill down was applied to a new window
	from the Display Builder and the drill down display contained a
	control object and the user changed the value of the control (for
	example, typed a string into an edit box) the property sheet
	would sometimes show the new value as the value of the control's
	varToSet property. This is fixed.

E11854: Text Entry controls now update correctly when tabbed

	In prior releases, if a Text Entry control had executeOnFocusLost
	set and if its value affected the value of another Text Entry control 
	which was next in the tab order, then tabbing from the first Text 
	Entry control to the other did not change the value shown in the 
	second Text Entry control. This is fixed.

E11763: Support for key-value pairs in list and combo box added

	The list box and combo box controls now support label-value
	pairs in the listValues property. This allows the control to
	display a descriptive label to the user, and set a corresponding
	value when the label is selected. The pairs can be specified
	as a string on the listValues property, where a label is separated
	its corresponding value by a comma, and pairs are separated by
	a semicolon. For example:
	
	listValues: White,0;Black,7;Red,1;Green,2
	
	For the above string, the control's list will display:
	White
	Black
	Red
	Green
	
	If the user selects White, the local variable attached to the
	varToSet property is set to 0. If the user selects Black, the
	local var is set to 7, and so on.
	
	The listValues property can also be attached to a 2-column table,
	where the first column has the labels and the second column has
	the corresponding values.
	
	As in prior releases, the listValues property may contain only
	labels, in which case the values and the labels are the same.
	For example:
	
	listValues: White;Black;Red;Green
	
	For the above string, the control's list will display the
	same labels as above, but in this case if the user selects White,
	the local variable attached to the varToSet property is set to
	"White". 

B12048: Single servers now displayed in topology map

	Previously, individual servers not connected to any other servers 
	by a route would not appear in the Server Topology Diagram.
	This problem has been corrected.

E11681: SSL available for EMS servers

	JMS connections created with RTView using the
	com.tibco.tibjms.TibjmsTopicConnectionFactory may now use an SSL
	connection for added security.
	
	Additionally, the RTView TIBCO EMS Manager now supports
	the ability to monitor and administer your TIBCO EMS Servers through
	an SSL connection.
	
	Note: To use the SSL connection, you must have a working knowledge
	of writing, compiling and deploying Java classes.
	
	
	*** Using SSL in the JMS data source ***
	
	To use an SSL JMS connection, you will need to create a Java class
	named MyJmsDsSSLHandler that extends the GmsRtViewJmsDsSSLHandler
	class.
	
	In MyJmsDsSSLHandler.java, define the following method:
	
	        public Map getSSLParams (String serverUrl)
	
	This method will be called to retrieve the list of SSL parameters for
	use when RTView creates a TIBCO JMS connection factory.
	
	Add gmsjjmsds.jar, located in the lib directory (found in your
	installation directory), to your classpath when you compile
	MyJmsDsSSLHandler. The compiled MyJmsDsSSLHandler jar file must be
	included in the RTView classpath by adding it to the
	definition for the RTV_USERPATH environment variable.
	
	The following is an example of MyJmsDsSSLHandler:
	
	import java.util.*;
	import com.tibco.tibjms.TibjmsSSL;
	import com.sl.gmsjjmsds.GmsRtViewJmsDsSSLHandler;
	
	public class MyJmsDsSSLHandler extends GmsRtViewJmsDsSSLHandler
	{
	
	public Map getSSLParams (String serverUrl)
	{
	        System.out.println("==> MyJmsDsSSLHandler.getSSLParams");
	        return null;
	}
	
	}
	
	
	*** Using SSL with RTView TIBCO EMS Manager ***
	
	To use SSL with RTView TIBCO EMS Manager, you will need
	to create a Java class named MyTibJmsSSLHandler that extends the
	GmsRtViewTibJmsSSLHandler class.
	
	In MyTibJmsSSLHandler.java, define the following method:
	
	        public Map getSSLParams (String serverUrl)
	
	This method will be called to retrieve the list of SSL parameters for
	use when EMS Manager creates a TibjmsAdmin object for use in managing
	a TIBCO EMS Server.
	
	Add gmsjtibjmsadmin.jar, located in the lib directory (found in your
	installation directory), to your classpath when you compile
	MyTibJmsSSLHandler. The compiled MyTibJmsSSLHandler jar file must be
	included in the RTView classpath by adding it to the
	definition for the RTV_USERPATH environment variable.
	
	The following is an example of MyTibJmsSSLHandler:
	
	import java.util.*;
	import com.tibco.tibjms.TibjmsSSL;
	import com.sl.gmsjtibjmsadmin.GmsRtViewTibJmsSSLHandler;
	
	public class MyTibJmsSSLHandler extends GmsRtViewTibJmsSSLHandler
	{
	
	public Map getSSLParams (String serverUrl)
	{
	        System.out.println("==> MyTibJmsSSLHandler.getSSLParams");
	        return null;
	}
	
	} 

B12015: Installation dialog reference to JAVA_HOME fixed

	In previous versions of RTView, the installation dialog
	incorrectly indicated that the JAVA_HOME environment variable was
	not set if JAVA_HOME was set as a user defined variable for the
	current user.  This has been fixed.

B11529: RTView command prompt launcher fixed

	In previous versions, the RTView command prompt link
	from the Windows Start menu did not work if your installation was not 
	on the C: drive. This has been fixed.
A bug that was preventing the labelTextColor property from being

	applied to the x-axis text in the bar graph has been resolved.

B11303: File association is now set consistently by installer

	In previous versions, the file association for display (.rtv) 
	files was not always set correctly by the installer. This has been 
	corrected.

E11858:  Registration dialog now can be launched from installation

	The RTView installer now allows the user to invoke the 
	registration program.

B11857: File save location bug fixed

	In prior releases, if a display was opened in the Display Builder 
	from a directory other than the default directory, and then a drill 
	down to the same file or another file was performed, and that file 
	was then saved, it would be saved to the default directory instead 
	of the selected directory. This has been fixed.

E11270: Object List dialog added to Display Builder

	An Object List dialog has been added to the Display
	Builder.  Select Object List from the Tools menu to open the
	Object List dialog.
	
	The Object List dialog provides a list of all the objects from the
	current display.  For each object in the current display, the Object
	List will display the objName property, the object class name, and
	the objX and objY properties.
	
	Selecting any item in the Object List will cause the corresponding
	object in the display to be selected.
	
	Hold down the shift key while selecting in the Object List to extend
	the list selection.
	
	Hold down the control key while selecting in the Object List to
	add or remove individual items from the current list selection.
	
	Press the Select All button (or control-a) to select all of the 
	objects in the current display.
	
	Press the Deselect All button to select no objects in the display.

E10167: Implemented key movement in Display Builder

	 The Display Builder has been enhanced with the ability to 
	move selected objects via the keyboard arrow keys. By default each 
	key press will move the object(s) one pixel in the indicated direction.

E10011: Undo and redo now supported in the Display Builder

	The Display Builder has been enhanced with undo and redo capability. Editing 
	operations may be undone and subsequently redone.
	
	The Display Builder will keep a history of the last 20 operations.
	
	Undo and redo are supported for the following operations:
	
	Select
	Create, Copy/Paste, Delete
	Connect
	Move, Scale
	Align, Order, Distribute
	
	Undo and redo are also supported for changes to the following:
	
	Object Properties
	Background Properties
	Functions
	Local Variables

E11840: Attach to Data and Define Command dialog implementation changed

	The Attach to Data and Define Command dialogs have changed to support 
	undo and redo. They no longer have access to the GmsRtObject that is 
	being edited, instead they have a GmsObjectProperty object. The following 
	changes will need to be made in custom attach to data and define command 
	dialogs when upgrading to 4.1a1.
	
	1. Modify the constructor arguments:
	
		public MyAttachToDataDialog (JFrame dialogParent)
		public MyDefineCommandDialog (JFrame dialogParent)
	
	2. The GmsRtObject object fields is no longer available. Make the following
	changes:
		old:
			if (object.getIcon() instanceof GmsTableVariables) 
		new:
			if (objProp.isTabular()) 
	
		old:
			String dsString = object.getDsString(varName, true);
		new:
			String dsString = null;
			if (objProp.isAttached())
				dsString = (String)objProp.getPropertyValue();
	
		old:
			object.processSubs(String)
		new:
			owner.processSubs(String)
	
		old:
			object.processSubsNQ(String)
		new:
			owner.processSubsNQ(String)
	
	
		old:
			varName
		new:
			objProp.getName()

E10041: Object alignment functionality has been implemented

	
	Support has been added for aligning and distributing selections 
	of objects.  
	
	The align operations include Top, Bottom, Left, and 
	Right, which mean that the corresponding edge of the first selected  
	object will be used as a reference and the corresponding edges of the 
	remaining selected objects will be aligned with it. 
	
	The distribute operations include Horizontal and Vertical, which 
	mean that the selected objects between the first and last, 
	horizontally or vertically, will be spaced evenly in that direction. 

E11931: Display Builder interface has been enhanced

	The Display Builder menus and toolbar have been enhanced with 
	additional edit items, and have been made sensitive to editing 
	conditions, so that they are disabled if their actions are not 
	applicable to the current conditions. 

E11668: Text properties may now be edited using a text entry dialog

	Text properties in the properties sheet may now be edited via
	a text entry dialog.  This dialog makes it easier to enter and 
	modify values that have many characters or contain multiple 
	lines of text.

B11914: Local variables supported in drill down branching functions

	Previously, you could not use a local variable as the value 
	argument of a drill down branch function, if the value of the local 
	variable is set from a substitution as part of the drilldown (e.g., 
	using drilldownColumnSubs).  This problem has been fixed.

B10237: Improvements made to avoid delays displaying SQL and OLAP data

	The Display Builder, Display Viewer and Display Server have been 
	improved to avoid delays in displaying SQL and OLAP data. These 
	delays would sometimes occur after changing the value of a 
	substitution or local variable, opening a display, or 
	reconfiguring a data attachment, and were most noticeable 
	if the update period was large or if the 'nohistory' option
	was used.
	

B11827: Copy function now handles Datetime data type properly

	In the 4.0a1 release of RTView, the Copy function did 
	not handle a Datetime type column Datetime properly, resulting in an 
	empty column. This problem has been fixed.

E11829: Subtotal by Unique Value enhanced to process multiple columns

	The Subtotal By Unique Values function has been enhanced to
	operate on multiple columns. It expects a minimum of two columns,
	but may have more than two. The names of the resulting columns 
	will be "Value", for the first column containing unique values, 
	followed by "Total" for the first column with a sum total, and 
	"Total2", "Total3", etc., for additional columns with sum totals.

E11830: Set Lookup Subs function to set subs via lookup table added

	A new function has been added to the list of functions.
	The "Set Substitutions By Lookup" function sets
	multiple Substitution Strings to values that are obtained using a
	Lookup Table.  The first column in the Lookup Table contains a set
	of values that is compared against the given Selector.
	The name of each remaining column is used as the name of a substitution
	to set.  The value to set for each substitution is the value of the
	field in the corresponding column in the row that matches the Selector.
	This function returns the value of the Selector.

E11673: Format Date now accepts formatted date string and date object

	The Date Format function has been enhanced to accept formatted 
	date strings and date objects.

E11674: Single signon supported for Display Builder and all deployments

	The login now supports single singon.
	
	For the Display Builder/Viewer application, the username and password 
	can be specified by new command-line parameters, named rtvuser and 
	rtvpass. For example:
	
	   run_builder -rtvuser:admin -rtvpass:admin
	
	The role can be specified by the rtvrole option:
	
	   run_builder -rtvuser:guest -rtvpass:abc123 -rtvrole:guest
	
	If the rtvuser and rtvpass options are used to login but the 
	rtvrole option is not specified, the first role defined for the 
	user is used.
	
	For the Display Builder/Viewer applet, the username, password, and role 
	can be specified by applet parameters, using the same names as above.
	For example:
	
	   rtvuser="guest" rtvpass="abc123" rtvrole="guest"
	
	To avoid having the username and password appear in plain text, a
	parameter named rtvsign parameter can be used. This parameter takes
	a sign-on string containing the encrpyted username and password.
	For example:
	
	   run_viewer -rtvsign:8I559A5NA8A5864J6J924N0B2
	
	Or, as an applet parameter:
	
	   rtvsign="8I559A5NA8A5864J6J924N0B2"
	
	The sign-on string can be generated with the run_scrambler utility,
	as follows:
	
	   run_scrambler <username> <password>
	
	For example:
	
	   run_scrambler admin admin
	
	Note that the username may not contain a space.
	
	To enter the username and password in a dialog window rather than on
	the command line, specify the -w option:
	
	   run_scrambler -w
	
	
	The login features of the Display Server have also been enhanced. The
	username and password can be specified by new URL parameters, named 
	rtvuser and rtvpass. For example:
	
	   http://server:port/rtvdisplay/getdisplay.jsp?display=disp1&rtvuser=admin&rtvpass=admin
	
	The role can be specified by the URL parameter named rtvrole. Note that
	it may be necessary to URL-encode the username, password, or role, 
	depending on the characters they contain.
	
	To avoid having the username and password appear in plain text, the
	URL parameter named rtvsign can be used. As described above, this
	parameter takes a sign-on string containing the encrpyted username 
	and password. For example:
	
	   getdisplay.jsp?display=disp1&rtvsign=8I559A5NA8A5864J6J924N0B2
	
	The sign-on string will only contain alphanumeric characters, so it
	need not be URL-encoded. 
	
	
	For the Display Server, two additional login features have been added:
	(1) login from servlet container,
	(2) login from custom JavaScript. 
	These are described in (1) and (2) below.
	
	(1) A general feature of servlet containers (Tomcat, WebLogic, etc) is
	user authentication: A servlet can be configured to require user login
	before the web server allows access to the servlet. A servlet's
	authentication requirements are configured in its web.xml file. The 
	file named web.xml.auth_example, in the rtvdisplay directory, shows
	how web.xml could be configured for the rtvdisplay servlet. 
	It requires a user to login to the servlet container in order to open 
	any rtvdisplay URL, and grants access to all rtvdisplay server URLs 
	to any authenicated user. (The example web.xml specifies DIGEST 
	authentication mode, which tells the browser to prompt the user for a 
	username and password in a dialog window, and to encrypt the password 
	before sending it to the web server. Most modern browsers and servlet 
	containers support DIGEST mode. Other modes are also defined, but note 
	that support for the authentication modes is determined by the servlet 
	container and browser, not by RTView. For more information on 
	this topic, see http://java.sun.com/developer/Books/certification/scwcd_9.pdf).
	
	The rtvdisplay servlet can be configured to accept a username that has
	been authenticated by the servlet container as the login username for
	the Display Server. This is done by configuring web.xml as described
	above, and modifying LoginEnabled property in the rtvdisplay.properties
	file as follows:
	 
		LoginEnabled=AUTH
	
	After a user has logged in to the servlet container, the username is
	used to login to the Display Server. To allow a single sign-on to
	the servlet container and the Display Server, the servlet container 
	login name must match a username defined for the Display Server. It 
	is not necessary for the passwords to match, since its assumed that 
	the username has already been authenticated by the servlet container.
	
	For example, the user database for Tomcat is defined in the file
	<tomcat_home>/conf/tomcat-users.xml. By default, a user named 
	"admin" is defined. The default user database for RTView 
	also defines a user named "admin". If the rtvdisplay files web.xml 
	and rtvdisplay.properties are configured as described above, a user 
	could login to Tomcat as "admin" and the rtvdisplay servlet would then 
	automatically login the "admin" user to the Display Server, without
	prompting again for username and password.
	
	(2) The rtvdisplay servlet also supports login from custom JavaScript,
	by calling the following JavaScript function:
	
	       rtvLogin(username, password, role)
	
	The function returns the string "ok" if the login is successful,
	otherwise it returns a string with an error message. The role
	argument is optional. The password is encrypted before it is sent
	to the server. To call the rtvLogin function from a custom web page,
	the page must be included in the rtvdisplay.war file and it must
	import the rtv.js and rtvx.js script files. An rtvLogout function
	is also available.
	
	These functions use the XMLHttpRequest object that is included with
	most modern browsers. In Internet Explorer, if scripting of ActiveX
	objects is disabled, these functions will fail.
	
	For example, the following HTML file will present the user with
	a combo box containing the usernames "admin" and "guest", and 
	a text box for entering a password. When the user clicks OK, the
	rtvLogin function is called. If the login information is validated
	by the Display Server, the displays.html file is opened in the browser,
	otherwise an error dialog appears.
	
	=======================
	<html>
	
	<script src="rtv.js"></script>
	<script src="rtvx.js"></script>
	
	<script>
	
	function doLogin ()
	{
		var user = document.getElementById("usercombo").value;
		var pwd = document.getElementById("password").value;
		var msg = rtvLogin(user, pwd);
		if (msg != "ok")
			alert(msg);
		else
			document.location = "displays.html";
	}
	</script>
	
	<body>
	<div>Please log in</div>
	
	<table border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
		<tr><td align="right" nowrap>Username:</td>
		<td align="right">
			<select id="usercombo" style="width:120px">
				<option value="admin">admin</option>
				<option value="guest">guest</option>
			</select>
		</td></tr>
		<tr><td align="right" nowrap>Password:</td>
		<td align="right"><input type="password" id="password" 
			style="width:120px"
			value="" onkeypress="if (isEnterKey(event)) doLogin()">
		</td></tr>
		<tr><td colspan="2" align="right">
			<button onclick="doLogin()">OK
		</td></tr>
	</table>
	</body>
	</html>
	
	
	Limitation: For Tomcat, single sign-on using Tomcat authentication requires 
	version 5.0.28 or newer. 

B11958: Occasional crash in Export to HTML fixed

	In previous versions, the Thin Client 'Export to HTML'
	feature would fail if the Display Server had unloaded
	the display, which was more likely when the refresh=0
	option was used. This has been fixed.

B11915: Export to Excel no longer fails in IE if loginEnabled=true

	In previous releases, if the Display Server's loginEnabled 
	property was set to true, the Export Table to Excel feature would 
	sometimes fail when used from Internet Explorer. This has been fixed.

E11908: Initial value of mapped local variable now set properly

	In prior releases, the initial value of a local variable marked for 
	"Use as Substitution" was not included in the substitutions when a
	a drilldown or a command was performed by the Display Server. This
	has been fixed.

B10031: Improved handling of ' in conjunction with -passclientlogin

	In the previous release, if the Display Server was run with 
	the  -passclientlogin option, and an SQL database was configured with 
	the "use client credentials" option, then some queries containing 
	single quotes would fail with an SQL syntax error. This has been fixed.

B11874: Display Server no longer loads displays in PANELS.ini twice

	In prior releases, when a client viewed rtvdisplays/panels.html,
	the display server would load and update each display listed in
	PANELS.ini twice, if the display servlet login feature was enabled.
	This has been fixed.
	

B11807: drillDownSelectMode supported in Display Server

	The Display Server now supports the drillDownSelectMode property. This
	property is defined on tabular objects such as obj_table02 and 
	obj_bargraph. When set to 'Element Only', the object's drilldown or 
	command can be invoked only by clicking on an element (a bar, a table
	cell, etc). When set to 'Anywhere', the drilldown or command can be
	invoked by clicking anywhere on the object (on its border, for example)
	although if the click is not on an element the table substitutions
	($col1,  $celldata, etc) will not be set.
	
	In prior releases, the Display Server used 'Element Only' mode for all
	tabular objects, ignoring the drillDownSelectMode property. In this 
	release, the drillDownSelectMode property setting on each object is used.
	In addition, the following changes were made to improve feedback to the
	user when moving the mouse over Display Server objects:
	
	1. On a 3D bargraph, a bar can be selected by clicking any edge of the
	bar, not just its face as in prior releases. Also, a bar's mouseover 
	information will appear when the mouse is over any part of the bar.
	
	2. For tabular objects with a drill down or command:
	
	   - the browser's status bar text will show 'click to drill down' or
	     'click to run command' when the mouse is over an element in 
	     Element Only mode, or anywhere over the object in Anywhere mode
	
	   - if the mouse is over an element (bar,cell) in the object, the 
	     browser's cursor will change to a hand 
	
	   - if the mouse is over the object but not one of its elements, the
	     cursor won't change to a hand, even in Anywhere mode. This is 
	     intentional, to indicate to the user when the mouse is over an 
	     element, and that clicking to drill down will set the table
	     substitutions accordingly.
	
	Limitations:
	
	In Internet Explorer 5.5, the status bar will not show the 'click
	to drill down' text when the cursor changes to a hand. Also the cursor
	will not change to a hand when over a table cell.
	
	In Firefox, changes to the status bar text are initially disabled. To
	enable changes, open Firefox's Tools/Options dialog, click the 
	"Advanced..." button near the "Enable Javascript" checkbox, and then
	click the "Change Status Bar Text" checkbox.
	
	In Firefox versions earlier than 1.5, the browser status bar text gets
	stuck on "Transferring data ..." after the first refresh of a display.
	Afterwards, it will not change when the mouse is over an object with a 
	drill down or command until another display is opened.
	
	
	Upward Compatibility:
	
	If necessary, the old Display Server behavior (always using 'Element Only'
	mode) can be enabled by specifying the -ddelementonly command line option
	as follows:
	
	          run_displayserver -ddelementonly ...
	
	or by adding a line to the DISPLAYSERVER.ini file as follows:
	
	          ddelementonly true

E11812: Add configuration to servlets that prints to logfile	

	The rtvdisplay and rtvdata servlets have been modified to provide version 
	information.  This can be useful in verifying that the version of the servlet 
	matches the version of the installed Display Server and Data Server.
	
	The version of the rtvdisplay servlet can be viewed by browsing the following 
	URL:
	 
	        http://host:port/rtvdisplay/version.jsp
	           
	The version of the rtvdata servlet, along with other diagnostic information, 
	can be viewed by browsing the following URL:
	 
	        http://host:port/rtvdata/test.jsp?test=1
	  
	In addition, when each servlet starts, it will print the version information 
	to the standard output of its servlet container. (Tomcat's stdout log file, 
	for example).  The rtvdisplay servlet also includes the version string as a 
	comment in each HTML file it generates, as follows:   
	
		>!-- rtvdisplay servlet: version_string --<

B11814: Rapid clicking of control objects no longer causes problems

	When using the Display Server, after the user clicks on an object,
	if the server response is delayed the user may be able to click 
	on additional objects before the server reply is received.  In
	previous releases, those additional clicks were sometimes 
	lost or ignored. This has been fixed. 

E11677: Bundle tomcat directory that contains war file into rtvimage

	An Apache-Tomcat 5.0.28 Web Server is now included in the RTView
	distribution to allow users to run the server and servlet based demo components 
	of RTView without having to set them up on their own Web Server.  
	The Demo Server is located in the servers/jakarta-tomcat-5.0.28-sl directory
	of the distribution.  The following scripts have been added to the
	distribution to start and stop the Demo Server:
	
		run_startup_demoserver	starts the Apache-Tomcat Demo Server
		run_shutdown_demoserver	stops the Apache-Tomcat Demo Server
	
	The Demo Server runs on the HTTP/1.1 Connector port 8068.  The shutdown port is
	8069 and the AJP Connector port is 8070.  
	
	Once the Demo Server is started, you should be able to access both the 
	Rich and Thin Client versions of the following demos:
		
		Data Sources
		ElectroSphere
		Features
		Geothermal
		TIBCO Hawk Monitor
	
	You should also be able to run the Rich Client version of:
	
		TIBCO EMS Manager
	
	To Run Rich/Thin Client Demos
	-----------------------------
	To run a Thin Client demo you must start the Demo Server, start the 
	Display Server in the desired demo directory, start any simulators in 
	the desired demo directory and access the demo in the browser on the 
	localhost on port 8068. To determine the appropriate
	URL access the Start Programs menu items on Windows or view the
	file view_displayserver.url in the desired demo directory on UNIX.
	
	To run a Rich Client demo you must start the Demo Server (if it is
	not already running), start any simulators in the desired demo
	directory, start the Data Server in the desired demo directory,
	add access the applet in the browser on the localhost on port 8068
	(http://localhost:8068/esphere_applet).  To determine the appropriate
	URL access the Start Programs menu items on Windows or view the
	file view_applet.url in the desired demo directory on UNIX.
	
	More detailed instructions are provided in the RTView
	Documentation.
	
	
	To Modify Rich/Thin Client Demos
	--------------------------------
	If you wish to modify a Thin Client demo you need to recreate
	the .war file by executing the make_war.bat script in the desired demo
	directory and then copy the .war file to the Demo Servers web applications
	directory.  The following script has been added to the distribution to copy the
	specified .war file to the Demo Servers appication directory:
	
		install_to_demoserver warfile
	
	Note that this script stops the Demo Server if it is running, removes
	the existing .war file and directory from the Demo Server webapps directory,
	copies the new war file to the webapps directory and restarts the 
	Demo Server. The script must be run from the directory containing the
	warfile.
	
	
	If you wish to modify a Rich Client demo or add your own demo, you 
	will  need to stop the Demo Server if it is running, copy the desired 
	demo directory to the webapps\ROOT directory of the Demo Server 
	(servers\jakarta-tomcat-5.0.28-sl\webapps\ROOT) and copy the necessary
	jars from the lib directory.  
	

E11767: Date type implemented for XML, SQL, and Rendezvous data sources

	Support for date data types is now fully supported in the
	XML, SQL and Rendezvous data sources.
	
	In XML, columns may now use "date" as a data type.  Entries
	for date columns may be formatted date strings or a number
	string representing the number of milliseconds since midnight,
	January 1, 1970.
	
	For SQL data sources, the DATE, TIME and TIMESTAMP column types
	will now be interpreted as dates and not merely date strings.
	
	For Rendezvous messages, the DATETIME data type is now interpreted
	as a date and not simply a date string.
	
	No changes have been made to RTView's support for OLAP, Hawk and 
	JMS, since these data sources do not provide a date data type.
	

B11816: SQL column names with hyphens supported

	In previous releases, if a column name containing a hyphen was 
	picked from the Column(s) drop-down list in the Attach to SQL Data 
	dialog, the resulting query would fail with syntax errors. This 
	has been fixed.

E11459: Support for commands has been added to the SQL datasource

	Support for commands has been added to the SQL data source.
	The actionCommand property of a control object, or the command
	string property of a standard object, can be configured to perform
	an SQL update, insert, or delete operation to modify a database table,
	or to perform other SQL operations.
	
	An SQL Command is configured In the Builder, using the Define SQL 
	Command dialog. In the dialog, a database is selected and the SQL
	command string is entered. The SQL string can contain substitutions,
	for example:
	
	 UPDATE system_table SET Status = 'online' WHERE System = '$systype'
	
	The dialog allows selection of the "Run Affected Queries After Command"
	option. If this option is selected, the SQL data source will re-run 
	any queries that use the same database table that is modified by the
	command. This is useful for viewing changes to the table immediately,
	rather than waiting for the next scheduled query update.
	
	SQL commands use the same database connections that are used to run 
	SQL queries. If a database has the "Use Client Credentials" option
	checked in the SQL tab of the options dialog, then an SQL command
	executed on that database will use the same credentials. 
	
	If the -sqltime command-line option is specified, the elapsed time
	and status will be printed when an SQL command is executed.
	
	Limitations: The "Run Affected Queries After Command" option is
	only supported for update, insert, and delete operations in which
	the name of the database table to be modified is specified explicitly.
	If a  command performs another SQL operation (such as running a stored 
	procedure which modifies tables), then the results of the operation
	will not be displayed until the next scheduled update of each 
	affected query.  Also, display of the modified data may be delayed for
	other reasons, for example if the database does not commit the results
	immediately and instead returns the old data on the next query.
	

E11686: Support Multiple Domains for Hawk

	RTView now supports multiple connections to TIBCO Hawk on the 
	TIBCO Hawk Communications tab in the Application Options dialog. For each 
	connection, a name must be specified. This name is used to create an Agent
	Group by the same name that contains all of the agents on that connection.
	A Connection Name field has also been added to the RTViewDs microagent. 
	
	A default connection is automatically created. The parameters for this 
	connection can be modified, but it cannot be removed.
	
	Users should not create multiple connections with the same parameters as 
	some agents from that connection will be added to one group and some to the 
	other.

E11860: SonicMQ factory class name added to the JMS Connection dialog

	The SonicMQ factory class name has been added to the JMS Connection
	dialog to make it easier to create a connection to SonicMQ. See the 
	Setup section of the documentation for information on how to setup your
	classpath to include the SonicMQ classes.

E11861: Queue browsing now supported for SonicMQ

	Queue browsing is now supported for SonicMQ.

B11832: Image name handling improved

	RTView has been improved to better handle
	image file names that contain leading or trailing blank spaces.

E11652: transparencyPercent property added to most objects in palette

	The ability to apply an alpha composite value has been added to
	most of the objects in the RTView palette.  The transparencyPercent
	property controls the level of transparency used when drawing
	the object.  
	
	Valid values for the transparencyPercent property range from 0 
	to 100.  Use 0, the default, for a fully opaque object.  If you
	are stacking objects, use lower values for objects toward the
	back of the stack and increase the transparencyPercent for objects
	stacked in front.  Values approaching 100 will increase the level
	of transparency to the point of invisibility.
	
	The transparencyPercent property is not supported in the tables
	(obj_table02 and obj_table03), in the object grid (obj_objectgrid),
	or in any of the items in the Controls section of the Object Palette.
	
	The transparencyPercent property is not supported when using the
	-optimizeredraw command line argument.

B11140: The obj_text01 label object now supports rotated drawing

	The obj_text01 label object now supports rotated drawing.
	Set the rotationAngle property to a positive or negative
	number of degrees of rotation.  Use 0 degrees for no rotation.

E11920: Improved link performance

	Performance of link drawing has been increased significantly 
	especially for larger numbers of links.

E11913: Table row limit increased from 10000 to 131072

	The maximum number of rows that a table can support has been
	increased from 10000 to 131072.

E11872: Column reordering in table objects has been disabled

	In previous versions of RTView, columns in a table 
	could be reordered by dragging the column header, but this order 
	was not persisted after the display was closed. Reordering the columns 
	by dragging the column header has been disabled. To modify the order 
	of the columns in a table, modify the order of the columns in the 
	data attachment for the table.

B11871: Numeric strings that are integers are not formatted as doubles

	The table object (obj_table02) now only applies default
	formatting to numeric string columns when the column values
	look like floating point numbers (contain a decimal point).

E11751: Row highlight funtionality added to table

	The rowHighlightEnabledFlag property has been added to the table
	(obj_table02).  This property allows an entire row to be highlighted
	when selected, instead of just a single focused cell.
	
	The highlighting of the focused row takes precedence over any
	filter colors that may be applied to a row.

E11431: Option to lock the first column of a table implemented

	The table object (obj_table02) now allows the first column in 
	the data table to be locked through the use of row headers.  
	
	The rowHeaderEnableFlag turns row headers on or off.  The 
	rowHeaderBgColor, rowHeaderTextColor, rowHeaderTextFont, and 
	rowHeaderTextSize properties control the appearance of the 
	row header column.
	
	The rowHeaderFilterColorsEnabledFlag controls whether row filter 
	colors are applied to the row header.  Row visibility filters are 
	applied to the row header regardless of the setting of this flag.
	
	Limitations:
	
	1.  The row header column cannot be resized by dragging, although 
	    it can be resized using the columnProperties attribute.
	
	2.  The row header column cannot be hidden using the columnsToHide 
	    property.  A warning message will be displayed if this property 
	    is changed to include the row header column.
	

E11696: Option to lock the first column of a table supported

	The Data Server now allows the first column in the data table 
	(obj_table02) to be locked through the use of row headers.
	
	The properties that control row headers and limitations on the
	use of row headers are described in release note E11431.
	
	Additional Limitations:
	
	1.  The rowHeaderFilterColorsEnabledFlag is not supported in the
	    Display Server.  Filter colors are only applied to the table
	    cells and not to the row headers.

E11570: Formatting has been implemented for Datetime columns

	The table object (obj_table02) now supports formatting of columns
	containing date/time data.  Formatting should be applied using
	the columnFormat attribute.

E11471: Alternating row colors now supported 

	The table object (obj_table02) now has an option to display
	alternating stripes for the row background color.  This
	option may be turned on by checking the cellBgStripedFlag
	property.
	
	The stripe color is based on the cellBgColor. If cellBgColor is 
	white, the stripe color will be gray. Otherwise, it will be a 
	paler version of the cellBgColor.

B11870: Auto-scaling enhanced to work with values 10E-4 or smaller

	Auto-scaling in all graphs has been improved to now handle
	data values that are 10E-4 or smaller

E11479: Trace markers in bar, trend and xy graphs have been improved

	The trace markers in the bar, trend and xy graphs have been improved
	to provide the same functionality as the markers in the radar graph.
	
	For bar and xy graphs, the marker style index of the traceProperties 
	attribute now supports the following values:
	
	0 = no marker
	1 = dot
	2 = +
	3 = *
	4 = o
	5 = x
	6 = filled circle
	7 = filled diamond
	8 = filled triangle
	9 = filled square
	10 = filled star
	
	For trend graphs, the above values may be used for the trace*MarkStyle
	attribute.
	
	The bar, trend and xy graphs also now provide the markDefaultSize and
	markScaleMode attributes.
	
	The markDefaultSize attribute specifies the size of the markers in pixels.
	
	The markScaleMode attribute allows markers to be scaled increasingly,
	either by trace or within each trace.

B11803: Value font size adjusts to available space for stacked bars

	Bar graphs with stacked bars have been improved to prevent
	crowding and overlapping of bar value labels.  In cases where a
	bar segment is too small to contain a value label, the font
	size of the value label will be reduced to make the label
	fit.  If a label with a smaller font still does not fit within
	the bar segment, the label will not be displayed.

B11794: Bar graph flicker bug has been fixed

	A bug that was causing the bar graphs to flicker on drill down
	has been repaired.

E11748: A traceValueDivisor property has been added to the bar graph

	A traceValueDivisor property has been added to the bar graph.
	
	In previous versions, the trace values were adjusted in
	conjunction with the bar values via the valueDivisor property.
	This new property allows trace values to now be adjusted
	independently of the bar values.
	
	Setting traceValueDivisor to zero (the default) will prevent
	any adjustment of the trace values.
	
	It is important to note that previously existing displays may
	need to be revised in order to continue working in the same
	manner under the new version of RTView.  The valueDivisor
	property should be copied into the traceValueDivisor property
	for any bar graph that displays traces and has a non-zero 
	valueDivisor property.

B11656: Bug fix has removed gray gap between wedges

	A bug that was causing a gray gap to be drawn between two 
	wedges of a pie graph has been repaired.  

E11836: labelTextAlignX property added to radar graph object

	The radar graph now has a labelTextAlignX property.  This property
	provides the option of positioning the graph title label at the left,
	center or right of the graph.

B11929: Stock chart no longer throws exception when data column changed

	In prior releases, the stock chart would throw an exception if 
	a trace was attached to a data table that contained a timestamp 
	column but no columns of numeric data. This has been fixed.

B11928: Stock chart no longer crashes if scaled to be very narrow

	In previous versions, the stock chart would crash in
	candlestick mode if it was scaled to be very narrow.

B11923: Stock chart y-axis labels no longer clipped by edge of graph

	In prior releases, if a stock chart was configured to have one or 
	more overlay traces and no price trace, the y axis labels with
	large values were partially clipped at the left edge of the chart. 
	This has been fixed.

B11868: Traces update properly now if data object is updated and reused

	In the previous release, the stock chart did not update if
	it was attached to a data table from a custom datasource which
	updated the existing data table, rather than creating a new
	table. This has been fixed.

E11939: timeFormat property added to the stock chart

	The "timeFormat" property has been added to the stock chart.
	This property is only used when the timeRangeMode is CONTINUOUS.
	All other times it is ignored.  If left blank, the axis is labelled
	with a default format, determined based on the range.

E11799: x-axis labels no longer overlap

	In prior releases, the time axis labels on the stock chart
	would overlap under some conditions. This has been fixed.

E11520: Add Radio Button controls

	A Radio Button Group control (obj_c1radio) has been added to RTView.
	This control allows users to create and manage a bank of radio
	buttons.
	
	Use the radioListValues property to specify the labels and values
	for each radio button.  For this property, provide a semicolon-
	delimited list containing the information for each radio button.
	
	For example:
	
	Red;Green;Blue
	
	If you want the radio button label to be different from the value
	returned when the radio button is selected, you may provide an
	optional value property after each label, separated from the label
	by a comma.
	
	For example:
	
	Low,25;Medium,50;High,75
	
	You may optionally attach the radioListValues property to a table.
	The first column of the table will be used for the radio button
	labels.  If the table contains more than one column of data, the
	second column will be used for the radio button values.
	
	Use the selectedValue property to specify which radio button should
	be turned on.  If none of the radio button values match the value
	given in the selectedValue property, then no change will be made to
	the state of the radio button group.
	
	Use the horizontalGap property to specify the width, in pixels, of 
	the gap that separates radio buttons horizontally.
	
	Use the verticalGap property to specify the height, in pixels, of 
	the gap that separates radio buttons vertically.
	
	Use the orientationMode property to specify the order in which
	radio buttons will be laid out in the group.  When orientationMode
	is set to Horizontal, radio buttons will be populated by row.
	When orientationMode is set to Vertical, radio buttons will be 
	populated by column.
	
	For example, suppose a radio button group has room for three rows 
	and three columns of radio buttons and the button labels are A, B, 
	C, D, E, F and G.
	
	With orientationMode set to Horizontal, the buttons will appear as:
	
	A B C
	D E F
	G
	
	With orientationMode set to Vertical, the buttons will appear as:
	
	A D G
	B E
	C F
	
	Use the numberOfColumns property to force the radio button group
	to have a specific number of columns.  Specifying zero for this
	property will allow the radio button group to dynamically choose
	the number of columns.
	
	Use the numberOfRows property to force the radio button group to 
	have a specific number of rows.  Specifying zero for this property 
	will allow the radio button group to dynamically choose the number 
	of rows.
	
	The pixel dimensions of the radio button group are specified with 
	the objHeight and objWidth properties.  If not all of the radio
	buttons will fit within the group's extent, the radio buttons
	that fall outside of the extent will not be displayed.

E11700: Radio Button controls added to Display Server

	The Display Server now supports radio buttons.
	
	There are some limitations:
	
	The vertical alignment of a radio button and its label may 
	differ slightly when viewed via the Display Server as compared
	to the Display Viewer.
	
	If the is insufficient space to display the entire label text
	of a radio button, the Display Viewer and Internet Explorer will display
	ellipsis.  Firefox will clip the label text.
	
	The radio button bgColor property is not supported by the display
	server.

B11941: Edit Display improved to run on most Windows systems

	In previous versions of RTView, the Edit Display option 
	in the TIBCO EMS Manager did not work on some Windows systems. This 
	has been fixed, however the Edit Display option is not supported on 
	Windows 98 (see B11963).

B11837: Trading Exchange Demo displays fixed

	In the previous release, the Trading Exchange Demo custom
	displays in demos/emsdemo did not display data.  This has been
	fixed.

B11818: Font and colors can be configured for RtViewNavTreePanel 

	The font and colors used by the Display Viewer to display an 
	RtViewNavTreePanel can be configured, by using the new <treefont> 
	and <treecolor> tags in the navtreedata file. Typically, this file is 
	named navtree.xml.
	
	The <treefont> tag can appear anywhere in the navtree.xml file, for
	example:
	
	   <treefont name="serif" style="bold italic" size="16">
	
	The <treefont> attributes are:
	
	   name - specifies the font family name
	   style - either "plain", "bold", "italic", or "bold italic".
	   size - font point size. 
	
	If any of these attributes are omitted, the corresponding default value
	is used. If the <treefont> tag is omitted entirely, the default tree
	font is used (typically SansSerif plain 12 point).
	
	The <treecolor> tag can appear anywhere in the navtree.xml file, for
	example:
	
	   <treecolor text="pink" background="gray" selection="#00B9F3">
	
	The <treecolor> attributes are:
	
	   text - specifies the text color for the tree labels
	   background - background color for tree and non-selected tree labels
	   selection - background color for selected tree label
	
	A color attribute values can be specifed in hex RGB format #rrggbb. For
	example, cyan is specifed as #00FFFF. Or, one of the following color
	names can be used: black, white, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, 
	magenta, gray, lightGray, darkGray, orange, pink.
	
	If any of these attributes are omitted, the corresponding default color
	is used. If the <treecolor> tag is omitted entirely, the default tree
	colors are used.
	
	The font and color of an individual tree node can be specified by using
	HTML in the node's label attribute. For example, the following label will
	be drawn in green using a 50 point italic monospaced font:
	
	   <node label="<html><p style=
		'font-family:monospaced;font-style:italic;font-size:50;color:green'>
		Your Label Goes Here"
		display="med_panel">
	
	Font settings specified for a label with HTML overrides the <treecolor> 
	and <treefont> settings.
	

B11922: Uninstalling RTView no longer leaves empty menus

	In previous version of RTView the uninstall sometimes
	left an empty menu item.  This has been fixed.

E10039: Jar certificates have been updated.

	The digital certificates for the jars in previous releases 
	expire in March 2006. This will not cause them to stop functioning. If
	you are running the Display Viewer Applet with a jar that has an 
	expired certificate, and your browser is configured to present 
	certificate information to the user, the user will see that it is 
	expired. They can still choose to run it. The certificates have been 
	updated, the new expiration date is March 2009. 

E11925: Default jars are no longer signed

	In previous releases, all of the RTView jars in the lib
	directory were signed with a digital certificate. The jars in the lib
	directory are now unsigned. Signed versions of all of the jars are in
	lib\signed_jars.zip.

E11784: New -timezone option available for setting default timezone

	The -timezone command line parameter has been added to set
	the default timezone used when interpreting and displaying
	dates.
	
	The -timezone parameter should include a Java timezone ID.
	For example:
	
	-timezone:US/Eastern
	
	The timezone ID should be a full name from the list below 
	or a custom ID, such as "GMT-8:00".  Unrecognized IDs 
	will be treated as GMT.
	
	The list of timezone ID values will vary slightly with each
	Java virtual machine.
	
	If you run the RTView Builder with a valid -timezone
	parameter and then save Application Options, the
	timezone information will be preserved in the options.ini
	file.
	
	To prevent the -timezone value in the options.ini file from
	being used, pass "none" as the timezone ID in the command
	line parameter.  For example:
	
	-timezone:none
	
	See the documentation for valid Timezone ID values.
	

E11683:  XML Server and Image Server have been renamed

	The XML Server and Image Server have been renamed.
	
	The XML Server has been renamed to the Data Server. Some command line 
	options have also changed:
		Data Server
			-xmlout is now -dataout
		Display Builder and Display Viewer 
			-xmlserver is now -dataserver
	
	The options file for the Data Server has been renamed to DATASERVER.ini. 
	XMLSERVER.ini files from previous installations will still work. The 
	xmlservlet has also been renamed and is now distributed in a new 
	directory:
		\servlets\rtvdata
	
	The default URL for the servlet has also changed:
		http:\\host:port\rtvdata
	
	The installation script for the new servlet will not remove the old 
	servlet from your web server. If you would like to remove the old servlet, 
	this must be done manually.
	
	The Image Server has been renamed to the Display Server. The following 
	command line option has changed:
		-image is now -display
	
	The options file for the Display Server has been renamed to DISPLAYSERVER.ini.
	IMAGESERVER.ini files from previous installations will still work. The 
	rtvimage servlet has also been renamed and is now distributed in a new 
	directory:
		\serlvets\rtvdisplay
	
	The default URL has also changed:
		http:\\host:port\rtvdisplay
	
	Several of the properties in rtvdisplay.properties (previously named 
	rtvimage.properties) have changed:
		ImageServerHost -> DisplayServerHost
		ImageServerPort -> DisplayServerPort
		ImageServerTimeout -> DisplayServerTimeout
	
	The old property names are still supported.
	
	The installation script for the new servlet will not remove the old 
	servlet from your web server. If you would like to remove the old servlet, 
	this must be done manually.
	
	To upgrade an existing Display Server deployment:
		1. Rename IMAGESERVER.ini to DISPLAYSERVER.ini 
	
		2. Modify any references to getimage.jsp to getdisplay.jsp 
	
		3. Modify any references to imageFrame to displayFrame
	
		4. Rename rtvimage.properties to rtvdisplay.properties
		
		5. Modify rtvdisplay.properties to use new property names: 
	        	ImageServerHost -> DisplayServerHost
	        	ImageServerPort -> DisplayServerPort
	        	ImageServerTimeout->DisplayServerTimeout
	
		6. Modify description and listener in web.xml:
	        	Display Server Servlet
	        	gmsjsp.rtvdisplay
	
	If you are using the rtvimage war file included with your RTView
	installation, the URL to access the Display Server displays was
	
		http://host:port/rtvimage
	
	This will now be
		
		http://host:port/rtvdisplay

E10483: Provide dockable window framework for Display Builder

	The Display Builder now uses dockable windows to present the 
	Object Palette and Object Properties dialogs. Window layouts are 
	persisted between application runs. To revert to the initial layout, 
	select Reset Window Layout from the Tools menu.

E10229: Object name property, objName, added to all objects

	A new property, objName, has been added to all objects. A name is 
	automatically assigned to each new object when it is added to the 
	display.  You can modify this name using the objName property. The 
	name for each object must be unique.

B11622: Existing subs removed properly if linked with local variable

	Previously, the Remove Existing Substitutions option did not clear 
	subtitutions from a drill down window if the subtitution had a 
	corresponding local variable. This problem has been fixed. When 
	substitutions are cleared, any local variables are restored to their 
	initial values.

B11733: Custom user manager crash fixed

	In version 3.0e1, the custom user manager would crash when running
	with the Data Server if the getPassword() method returned null. This 
	problem has been fixed.

B10296:  Support deployment using Java Web Start

	The Display Builder, Display Viewer, Data Server and Registration 
	applications can now be deployed using Java Web Start.

B11804: Display server crash fixed

	A display server problem has been fixed that caused
	Internet Explorer to crash occasionally while updating
	the current display after clicking on an object that
	changed a substitution or local variable.

B11797: Scrollbar bug in tables with Firefox 1.5 fixed

	If using Firefox 1.5 with prior Display Server versions,
	unwanted scrollbars appear in the column headers, and the
	table's horizontal and vertical scrollbars do not appear
	when needed. These problems have been fixed.

E11448: Deployment of multiple Display Servers supported

	It is now easier to deploy multiple Display Server applications
	as the install_to_tomcat scripts have been moved to the "bin"
	directory and can be used from any Display Server application.
	The install_to_tomcat script takes one argument, the name of the 
	.war file (without the .war extension), that contains a modified 
	rtvdisplay application. In each application directory there will 
	need to be a script (e.g. make_war.bat) which copies the rtvdisplay.war
	file from the servlets/rtvdisplay directory and updates it with
	files unique to that application.  
	With this release, the demos/esphere application has been enhanced
	to include some sample files so that it can be run via the 
	display server (E11585).

B11782: Calculated columns in SQL Server no longer causes crash

	A calculated column in SQL Server, which results in a column
	with no name, previously caused a crash in RTView.  This 
	problem has been fixed.

E11783: Maximum Rows option implemented for SQL data attachments

	A new field, Maximum Rows, has been implemented to allow you to 
	specify how many rows of data are returned by a SQL query.  The
	maxNumberOfRows object property is still applicable to tables with
	a SQL data attachment with Maximum Rows set, so you may not see as
	many rows as you specify in your data attachment if you do not also	
	adjust maxNumberOfRows.

E11687: Tibco Hawk 4.6 now supported

	RTView now supports TIBCO Hawk 4.6.

E11688: SSL supported for Hawk when running on an EMS transport

	TIBCO Hawk 4.6 supports specifying SSL parameters to use when 
	connecting to Hawk agents using an EMS transport. To specify your 
	SSL parameters in RTView, you must implement a 
	MyHawkSSLHandler. See the RTView User Guide for more 
	information on how to setup this class.

E11719: Speed of OLAP queries using Applix Java API has been improved

	The OLAP datasource has been modified to improve the performance
	of database connections that use the Applix Java API. This reduces
	the time required to perform a query with a large result, and the
	time required to fill the dimensions tree when browsing a cube.
	

B11702: Incorrect lost connection errors no longer occur

	In the previous release, for some Applix TM1 databases, the
	OLAP datasource would incorrectly report lost connections
	when using the Applix Java API. This has been fixed.

B11703:  Trailing whitespace no longer causes MDX syntax error

	In the previous release, if space characters were typed at the
	end of the Columns or Rows text field in the OLAP data dialog
	when using an ODBO connection, the query was constructed
	incorrectly, causing an MDX syntax error.
	
	

B11704: Multiple dimensions in an ODBO slicer are supported

	In previous releases, the OLAP data dialog allowed selection
	of only a single item in the slicer of a query using an ODBO
	connection. Now, the dialog allows selection of items from 
	multiple dimensions for the slicer. However, only one item 
	from each dimension, which is not already used on the query's
	column or row axis, may be selected.
	
	
	

E11664:  Option added to suppress permissions errors

	An option has been added to the OLAP datasource to
	suppress errors from OLAP queries. A checkbox for this
	option, labeled "Suppress Query Errors", appears on the
	OLAP tab in the Options dialog of the Display Builder.
	From the command line, specify "-olapquiet".

E11435: Asian string support for TM1 Java API connections implemented

	OLAP connections using the Applix TM1 Java API now support
	Japanese characters, on systems running Japanese Windows.
	Japanese characters may appear in cube names, dimension names,
	element names, and query results.

B11669: Maximum number of messages in Queue Browser can be specified

	The queue browsing function now respects a limit to the number
	of messages that will be browsed from a queue.  The default is 1000.
	This can be changed by specifying the command line options:
		-jms_maxqueuemsgcount:N
	where "N" is the maximum number of messages that will be queried
	from a queue browser for any queue. This option was added to prevent 
	long delays when reading large number of messages from a queue.

E11114:  Automatic reconnection to a server is now supported

	If an established server connection fails, an attempt is now
	made to reconnect to the server and reestablish message listeners.
	This reconnect attempt is made continuously approximately every
	30 seconds by default. This can be changed using the command line 
	argument:
		-jms_minreconnecttime:N
	where "N" is the minimum number of seconds to wait before attempting
	to reconnect to the server.  This option will be saved to the 
	JMSOPTIONS.ini file if a Save is done in the Options dialog.

E11532: "Localhost" in hostnames is substituted with actual host name

	The behaviour in the EMS Manager of servers that are listed
	in the servers.xml file with "localhost" as the hostname has
	been changed.  Previously, the server table would be constructed 
	with the "localhost" retained in the URL.  This caused problems
	with the administration of routes and the selection of servers.
	Now, the localhost is always substituted with the actual host 
	name that is found on the system on which the EMS Manager is 
	running.  

E11721:  The default setting for "Enable Monitor Messages" is now false

	The default setting for "Enable Monitor Messages" is now false.
	Enabling monitor messages on a system with many servers can cause
	high network traffic.  Monitor messages should be used carefully
	and only for debugging the behavior of a system. Refer to the TIBCO
	documentation for more information about how to use monitor messages.

E11167: Server topology can be discovered via routes

	A new option has been added to the TIBCO EMS Administration dialog.
	If enabled, the "Discover Servers by Routes" option will use the 
	information contained in the server metrics "Routes" table to discover
	servers that are linked to any of the servers already known.  A new 
	server is added to the table only if the route to that server is
	"active", and is "connected".

E11722: New "Remove All Servers" button added to options

	In the TIBCO EMS Servers Option Dialog, there is a new button
	added to permit the removal of all servers in one operation.
	Note: Unless "Discover Servers" is turned off, the list will be
	repopulated immediately with all known servers.

E11659: Use of XML data files for JMS metrics is no longer supported

	The "Write Admin Data to External File" option has been removed
	in this version of the EMS Manager and the JMS Administration
	Datasource.  The use of XML data files for JMS metrics is no longer
	supported.

B11679: Admin commands are now supported in the Data Server

	In the EMS Manager, all admin commands are now implemented in the
	JMSADM data source.  This means that when the EMS Manager is used with
	the Data Server, the command is issued to the Data Server and the 
	admin function is performed in the server.  The client applications no 
	longer needs to make its own connection to the target server.

B11762: Server status no longer toggles if servers.xml contains "admin"

	 Previously, if a server specification was saved in servers.xml
	with the user name "admin", that server's status would toggle
	incorrectly between active and inactive. This problem has been fixed.

B11666: servers.xml is no longer saved as default xml source

	Previously, the servers.xml file would get saved out as the 
	default xml source.  This no longer occurs.

E11725: Maximum server metrics table size can now be specified

	In order to reduce the chance of high cpu utilization or memory
	usage, a limit has been placed on the reading of topics, queues,
	connections, and durables.  The maximum number of rows that can be
	read is 1000 by default.  If the number of rows in one of these
	metrics tables is greater than the max, no rows will be read 
	at all.  Instead, one row is added to the table with a Name field
	that has the value "TOO MANY !".  The value for the maximum row count
	can be set using the command line option:
		-jmsadm_maxmetricsrowcount:N
	where "N" is the maximum number of rows to query for topics and queues.
	This value will be saved the .ini file whenever a Save is done from the 
	Options dialog in the Display Builder.

E11731:  Pattern-searching now available for topics and queues

	The ability to select Topics and Queues by specifying a pattern to 
	match has been added to the JMSADM Datasource and also to the 
	EMS Manager Topics and Queues pages. Patterns are specified in the 
	usual TIBCO fashion, e.g. sample.* or orders.>

E11658: Adding a server with an invalid hostname no longer causes delay

	In previous versions of RTView, adding a server with an invalid
	hostname could cause a delay of up to several seconds.  This delay
	has been minimized in most cases, but still can occur occasionally.

E11644: Mechanism for retrieving EMS Server metrics has been enhanced

	The mechanism for retrieving EMS server metrics has been enhanced
	to minimize overhead and CPU utilization. Previously, all metrics
	were being retrieved from each server on every metrics update.
	Now, the ServerInfo metrics are retrieved for each server, but all
	other metrics are only retrieved if they are being monitored in an
	open display.  In addition, the "All EMS Servers" and the 
	"Server Info" displays no longer have the "keepalive" mode set
	in the emsmgr_navtree.xml control file.  This was done to minimize
	the server metrics that are regularly being retrieved.

E11654: Add field to EMS Admin dialog to set metrics update period

	The EMS Administration Options Dialog Tab has been enhanced to 
	include a way to specify the metrics update period.  This value
	is also saved in the JMSADMOPTIONS.ini file when options are saved.

E11743: Minimum server reconnect time is configurable

	The default time to wait before attempting a reconnect to a server 
	that has failed to connect is 30 seconds. It is now possible to
	configure this time by specifying the command line option:
		 -jmsadm_minreconnecttime:N
	where N is the number of seconds to wait before attempting a reconnect 
	for admin connections.  

E11585: Esphere demo enhanced to show configuration of Display Server

	The demos/esphere sample application has been enhanced to show
	how the RTView Display Server can be configured for
	an individual application.
	A "displayserver" subdirectory is now provided which contains 
	a set of files that are used to override some of the HTML,
	XML, and properties files contained in the standard rtvdisplay.war
	file contained in the %RTV_HOME%/servlets/rtvdisplay directory.
	This directory includes several HTML files, including a top-level 
	index.html page that customizes the look of the application and
	the contents of the side navigation panel.
	The web.xml file and the rtvdisplay.properties files are used to 
	customize the name of the application and the port used to run
	the Display Server.

	The esphere web application is created by running the make_war.bat 
	or make_war.sh script. This script copies the rtvdisplay.war file
	from servlets/rtvdisplay and updates the file with the contents of
	the displayserver directory.
	Once the war file is made, run the install_to_tomcat.bat or
	install_to_tomcat (unix) script to copy the war file to the Tomcat
	webapps directory, and stop and start the tomcat servlet engine.
	After this the webapp can be accessed typically using a URL 
	address like "http://localhost:8080/esphere".

	At the top level of the directory, the DISPLAYSERVER.ini file is used 
	to configure settings for the RTView Display Server.  The port number 
	specified in this file must match the port number specified in the 
	rtvdisplay.properties file. In the demos/esphere directory, you must 
	also start the Display Server application using the command "run_displayserver",
	in order to generate the displays for the application.

E11610: Hawk Monitoring demo added to the installation

	A new demo, "Hawk Monitoring", has been added to the 
	installation.  It can be accessed from the demos in the Start Menu
	or from RTV_HOME/demos/hawkmonitor.

E11611: JSP example displays have been integrated into the DS Tutorial

	The DS Tutorial example has been updated to include displays for
	Java Server Pages. The separate demos/jspdisplays example has been
	removed.

B11781: columnsToHide inconsistency bug fixed

	In prior releases, a hidden column in a table object would
	become visible if the names or number of the table columns
	changed after the table was displayed. This has been fixed.

B11761: Scrollbar visibility for invisible objects fixed

	In prior releases, setting the visFlag property to false did not
	hide the scrollbars on the bar graph, trend graph, and xy graph
	objects. This has been fixed.

E11736: New stock chart graph added

	1. Overview
	
	The stock chart object plots the price of a stock over time. 
	The chart supports intra-day, daily, weekly, monthly, 
	quarterly, and yearly plots. The price data can be plotted 
	as a line, bars, or candlesticks. A candlestick shows the 
	stock's open, high, close, and low price for each time 
	interval. Multiple overlay traces can be configured to show 
	trading volume, to compare the stock's price to that of 
	other stocks or stock indexes, and to show events such as 
	dividend payments, splits, etc. Overlay traces can be bars 
	or lines. Colors, styles, labels, gradient fill, and other 
	properties can be configured for each trace.
	
	The chart supports features available on the other 
	RTView graph objects, including:
	
	- autoscaling and multiranging on the y axis
	- a trace legend, either fixed or floating
	- a sliding cursor
	- zooming and scrolling
	- mouseover on trace points
	- drilldown from trace points
	
	
	2. Trace data
	
	The stock chart supports ten traces: one price trace and up to 9 
	overlay traces. Each trace has two properties used to provide the trace 
	data, one for the trace's initial (historical) data, and another for 
	new data to update the trace while it is displayed. For the price 
	trace, these properties are named priceTraceHistoryTable and 
	priceTraceCurrentTable, respectively. For an overlay trace, the 
	property names are overlayNHistoryTable and overlayNCurrentTable, where 
	N is the overlay number, from 1 to 9.
	
	A history table contains multiple rows of price data, one for each 
	point that will be drawn when the trace is displayed. A current table 
	is expected to contain only one row of data, which is used to either 
	update the last (most recent) point on the trace with new data, or to 
	add a new point to the end of the trace. If a trace displays only 
	historical data (for example, a trace of weekly year-to-date prices) 
	then the current table property need not be assigned.
	
	For the price trace, the historical and current table must each contain 
	5 columns. For an overlay trace the tables must each contain 2 columns. 
	The first column of all tables must contain timestamp data. The 
	timestamp can be a string, specifying a date or a date and time, or it 
	can be a numeric value representing the number of milliseconds since 
	Jan 1 1970 GMT (the conventional Java long timestamp). The table rows 
	do not need to be in time order, the chart will sort them if necessary.
	
	For an overlay trace, the second column of each table must contain the 
	data values (price, shares sold, etc) to be plotted. Any additional 
	columns are ignored.
	
	For the price trace, the second through fifth column must contain the 
	open, high, low, and close price of the stock, in that order.
	
	
	3. Time Axis
	
	The chart's x axis shows time values, increasing from left to right. By 
	default, the chart's time range is set to match the oldest and newest 
	timestamps in the price trace data tables. The time range can also be 
	controlled by several properties, and also by using the zoom and scroll 
	features, as with the trend graph object. These are described later.
	
	In addition, the timeRangeMode property determines the interval between 
	trace data points. The timeRangeMode property has several settings, as 
	described below. However, in most cases the Auto setting will be used, 
	allowing the chart to select the setting that best matches the time 
	intervals in the price trace's data tables.
	
	If timeRangeMode is set to Continuous, the chart will plot each point 
	using its corresponding timestamp from the data table. In Continuous 
	mode, the stock chart is very similar in behavior to the trend graph 
	object
	
	Intra-day mode is used for viewing price data with time intervals less 
	than one day (hourly, every 15 minutes, every minute, etc).  In intra-
	day mode, the tradeDayBegin and tradeDayEnd properties are used to 
	define the daily start and end times of the trading day. No data is 
	plotted between the end of a trading day and the beginning of the next. 
	The default values are 09:30 and 16:00.
	
	The timeRangeMode can also be set to Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or 
	Quarterly, or Yearly. In each of these "periodic" modes, at most one 
	data point is plotted for each trace at the selected period (one point 
	per day, one per week, etc). If the data tables contain data at more 
	frequent intervals than indicated by the mode (for example, 
	timeRangeMode is weekly but the data tables contain daily price data), 
	the chart will aggregate the data to match the mode. This is described 
	in more detail later in this note.
	
	If timeRangeMode is set to Auto, the interval between the two most 
	recent data points in the price trace's historical data table is used 
	to select the mode. If the interval is less than 1 minute, then 
	Continuous mode is selected. If it is one minute or more but less than 
	1 day, intra-day mode is selected. Otherwise, the periodic mode that 
	best matches the data is selected (Daily, Weekly, etc).
	
	4. Time Axis Labels
	
	The labels that appear on the time axis vary, in number and format, 
	according to the chart's visible time range, the timeRangeMode, and the 
	trace data.
	
	If timeRangeMode is Continuous, the number of time axis labels is 
	controlled by the xAxisMajorDivisions property, as with the trend 
	graph. The labels show the start and end time of the visible time 
	range, and possibly other evenly spaced times between. Note that the 
	time labels and their tick marks may not align exactly with any of the 
	trace's data points. 
	
	In the other modes, if space allows, time axis tick marks & labels are 
	shown at regular intervals and each aligns with a point in the price 
	trace. For example, a monthly chart with 12 data points would have a 
	tick mark and label showing the 3 letter abbreviation for each month. 
	However, if the chart shows a longer time range, say 5 years of monthly 
	data, then the chart may only show a tick mark and label for January of 
	each year, using the year as the label. The other months would not be 
	labeled. If the user zooms in on the chart, so that fewer months are 
	visible, then more of the months may be labeled.
	
	In Intra-day mode, the labels show the hour and minute of the day, day of week, 
	day of month, month of year, and/or year. In Daily and Weekly mode, the labels 
	show the day of the month, month of the year, and/or year. In Monthly mode, the 
	labels show month of the year, and/or year. In Quarterly mode, the labels show 
	quarter (Q1, Q2, etc) and/or year. In Yearly mode, the the labels show years.
	
	The first label for an interval may differ from the other labels. For 
	example, if the hours of the day are shown on an intra-day chart, the 
	first label for each trading day will show the day of the week (Mon, 
	Tue, etc) rather than the opening time (09:30). Similarly, on a daily 
	or weekly chart, the first trading day in the month will be labeled 
	with the name of the month, while the other labels will show the day of 
	the month. On a monthly chart with a time range of more than one year, 
	January of each year will be labeled with the year.
	
	In any mode, if the trace contains a large number of points, the 
	Continuous time axis labels described earlier are used instead of the 
	interval labels.
	
	5. Time Range
	
	The time range of the chart is controlled by the timeRange, 
	timeRangeBegin, and timeRangeEnd properties in a manner similar to the 
	trend graph. 
	
	If both timeRangeBegin and timeRangeEnd are specified, then their 
	values determining the time range of the graph, and the timeRange 
	property is ignored.
	
	If timeRangeBegin but not timeRangeEnd is specified, then the timeRange 
	property is used to determine the chart's end time. If the timeRange is 
	-1, then all data newer than timeRangeBegin is plotted.
	
	If timeRangeEnd but not timeRangeBegin is specified, then the timeRange 
	property is used to determine the chart's begin time. If the timeRange 
	is -1, then all data older than timeRangeBegin is plotted.
	
	The data time range (which is used if timeRange = -1) is determined by 
	the minimum and maximum timestamp found in the price trace's history 
	table and current table. If both of those tables are empty, the chart 
	uses the minimin and maximum timestamp of the first overlay trace that has its 
	history table and/or current table attached to data.
	
	If the timeRange is greater than zero, then its value indicates the 
	number of time units the chart should display. The units are determined 
	by the timeRangeMode, as follows.
	
	   If timeRangeMode is ...       Then the timeRange units are ...
	   -----------------------       --------------------------------
	       Continuous                seconds
	       Intra-day                 days, if < 900, else seconds
	       Daily                     days
	       Weekly                    weeks
	       Monthly                   months
	       Quarterly                 quarters (3 months)
	       Yearly                    years
	       Auto                      one of the above
	
	If timeRangeMode = Auto, and the data interval is one week, and 
	timeRange = 12, the time range of the chart will be set to twelve 
	weeks.   
	
	The format used for timeRangeBegin and timeRangeEnd is YYYY-MM-DD 
	HH:mm:ss, for example:
	    
	    2005-07-28 14:58:00
	
	The date can be omitted, for example: 14:58
	
	But if any part of the date is specified, then the string must conform 
	to the YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss time string.
	
	The timeRangeBegin and timeRangeEnd properties can also specify 
	milliseconds since Jan 1, 1970. This can be useful if either property 
	is attached to a function that provides timestamps in that format.
	
	
	6. Y Axis
	
	The stock chart supports y-axis autoscaling and multiranging, as in the 
	trend graph, although the stock chart multirange can only be set to on 
	or off. When on, it is equivalent to 'Classic' multiranging in the 
	trendgraph: the y-range for the price trace is shown on outer labels on 
	the y-axis, while the ranges for the overlay traces are shown as inner 
	y-axis labels. No y-axis labels are displayed for an event trace.
	
	The stock chart also supports a yAxisPercentFlag property. If checked, 
	each point on each trace is plotted as a percent change from the first 
	(oldest) data point of the trace. The first data point is plotted as 
	0%.  This is useful for comparing the performance of one stock to 
	another stock or index. For that reason, it is most useful when used 
	with yAxisMultiRangeFlag off, so that all traces are plotted against 
	the same y-axis.
	
	
	7. Overlay traces
	
	A chart can have zero to nine overlay traces. Each has its own history 
	and current data table attachments. Typically, the price trace's 
	history and current table will be used to determine the chart's data 
	range and its time range mode (if timeRangeMode = Auto). However, if 
	the price trace's data tables are both empty (not attached) then the 
	first overlay trace that has data is used for that purpose instead.
	
	An overlay trace's type can be set to Line, Bar, or Event. For all 
	types, the first column of the trace's historical and current data table 
	must contain timestamps, as described earlier.
	
	For Line and Bar types, the second column in the data table must be a 
	numeric value, and is used to supply the Y values for the trace. The 
	Line and Bar types are intended for overlays that display other stock 
	prices or indexes, trading volume, etc.
	
	For an Event trace, the second column can contain numeric values or 
	strings. For each row in an event trace's data table, an event marker 
	is drawn near the price trace, using the timestamp for the row. An 
	event marker is a text rectangle containing the first character of the 
	trace's label string. If the cursorFlag or mouseOverFlag is checked, 
	and the mouse is positioned near an event marker, the corresponding 
	value from the second column of the data table is displayed in the chart's 
	mouseover text or it's legend.
	
	Event traces are not aggregated (see below).
	
	8. Aggregation
	
	As mentioned earlier, if the price trace's data tables contain data at 
	more frequent intervals than indicated by the timeRangeMode property 
	the chart will aggregate the price trace data to match the mode. For example, 
	if timeRangeMode is set to Weekly, but priceTraceHistoryTable contains daily 
	prices, the chart will aggregate the daily prices into weekly prices as follows:
	   
	  open price for week W = open price for first trading day in week W
	  high price for week W = highest price for all trading days in week W
	  low price for week W = lowest price for all trading days in week W
	  close price for week W = close price for last trading day in week W
	
	Similar aggregation is done for daily-to-monthly, weekly-to-monthly, 
	monthly-to-yearly, etc.
	
	Only the price trace data is aggregated, since it is required to 
	contain open/high/low/close price data. The overlay trace data is not 
	aggregated, since the chart places no requirements on the overlay data 
	(it could represent closing price, high price, average price or volume, 
	etc). On a chart with aggregated price data, an overlay trace may 
	plot multiple Y values at the same time (x) position.
	
	9. Time Zone
	
	The time axis labels are affected by the local time zone, and the time 
	zone information, if any, in the data timestamps. The timestamps in the 
	data tables must be one of the following:
	
	1. A string with no time zone, for example: Nov 30, 2005 10:00:00 AM
	
	2. A string with a time zone, for example: Nov 30, 2005 10:00:00 AM EST
	
	3. A timestamp of milliseconds since Jan 1 1970 GMT: 1133326800000
	
	Internally, the stock chart converts types (1) and (2) into GMT (type 
	3), for efficiency. When a timestamp is displayed on the chart's time 
	axis, legend, etc., it is converted from GMT back into a string.
	
	A timestamp of type (1) will be converted to GMT using the local time 
	zone. So when the chart displays the timestamp, it will not be affected
	 by time zone differences. In other words, if the timestamp string in 
	the data is "10:00", the stock chart will display it as "10:00" 
	
	A timestamp of type (2) will be converted to GMT using the time zone 
	indicated in the string. So when the chart displays the timestamp, it 
	will be affected by time zone differences. In other words, if the 
	timestamp string in the data is "10:00 EST", and if the local time zone
	is PST, the stock chart will display it as "07:00".
	
	A timestamp of type (3) is already in GMT. So when the chart displays 
	the timestamp, it will be converted to a string using the local time 
	zone.
	
	The -timezone option can be used when starting the Display Viewer to 
	change the local time zone to a different zone. This can be useful in 
	situations like the following:
	
	   - price data is from the NY Stock Exchange (US/Eastern time zone)
	   - data timestamps are in GMT or contain a time zone designation
	   - local time zone is US/Pacific
	   - user wants chart to display times in US/Eastern
	
	In the above scenario, if the -timezone option is not specified, the
	chart will display the times as US/Pacific. The -timezone option can be
	used to display the times as US/Eastern. See the description of the 
	timezone option for more information.

E11481: Graph axis labels now support value formatting

	The RTView graphs now offer the option to apply number
	formatting to axes, values and labels.
	
	The trend graph (obj_trendgraph02) now includes the yAxisFormat and
	yValueFormat properties.  The yAxisFormat property provides formatting
	for the y-axis.  The yValueFormat property provides formatting for
	data values displayed in the legend and popup legend.
	
	The bar graph (obj_bargraph) now includes the yAxisFormat, yValueFormat,
	traceYAxisFormat, traceYValueFormat and labelFormat properties.  The 
	yAxisFormat property provides formatting for the y-axis.  The 
	yValueFormat property provides formatting for data values displayed on 
	bars and in the legend and mouseOver tooltip information box.  The
	traceYAxisFormat property provides formatting for the trace y-axis.
	The traceYValueFormat property provides formatting for trace data 
	values displayed in the legend and mouseOver tooltip information 
	box.  The labelFormat property provides formatting for labels in 
	situations where the label column is numeric.  Labels may appear 
	along the x-axis or in the legend and mouseOver tooltip information 
	area.  Note:  The yValueFormat property supercedes and replaces the
	barValuePrecision property.
	
	The pie graph (obj_pie) now includes the valueFormat and labelFormat 
	properties.  The valueFormat property provides formatting for data 
	values displayed on bars and in the legend and mouseOver tooltip
	information area.  The labelFormat property provides formatting for
	labels in situations where the label column is numeric.  Labels may
	appear in the legend and mouseOver tooltip information area.
	
	The radar graph (obj_radar) now includes the valueAxisFormat, valueFormat 
	and labelFormat properties.  The valueAxisFormat property provides 
	formatting for the value axis.  The valueFormat property provides 
	formatting for data values displayed in the mouseOver tooltip 
	information box.  The labelFormat property provides formatting for 
	labels in situations where the label column is numeric.  Labels may 
	appear along the radial axis or in the legend and mouseOver tooltip 
	information area.
	
	The XY graph (obj_xygraph) now includes the xAxisFormat, yAxisFormat, 
	xValueFormat, yValueFormat and labelFormat properties.  The xAxisFormat
	and yAxisFormat properties provide formatting for the axes.  The
	xValueFormat and yValueFormat properties provide formatting for data
	values displayed in the legend and popup legend.  The labelFormat 
	property provides formatting for labels in situations where the label 
	column is numeric.  Labels may appear in the legend and popup legend. 

B11780: Display Server Bar Graph now sets correct drill down subs 

	In the prior release, the Display Server assigned incorrect table
	substitutions ($col1, $celldata, etc) if a drill down was performed
	from the trace on a Bar Graph that also displayed bars. This has been
	fixed.

E11095: Trace color and style change color based on alarm threshold

	The Trend Graph and XY Graph now allow the color and style
	of trace lines to be changed when an alarm threshold is
	crossed. 
	
	To support this feature, the following properties were 
	added to the Trend Graph and XY Graph:
	
	   valueHighAlarmTraceColor
	   valueHighWarningTraceColor
	   valueLowAlarmTraceColor
	   valueLowWarningTraceColor
	 
	   valueHighAlarmTraceStyle
	   valueHighWarningTraceStyle
	   valueLowAlarmTraceStyle
	   valueLowWarningTraceStyle
	
	For example, if valueHighAlarmEnabledFlag is checked,
	any segment of a trace line that is above valueHighAlarm 
	is drawn using valueHighAlarmTraceColor and 
	valueHighAlarmTraceStyle. 
	
	However, if valueHighAlarmTraceStyle is set to -1, 
	the color of the line segment will not be set to
	valueHighAlarmTraceColor. This is used to support the
	behavior of prior releases, where only the marker color
	and style changed when an alarm threshold was crossed.

E11533: Gradient option added for Pie Graph wedges

	Pie Graph wedges may now be drawn with a gradient by setting
	the wedgeGradientFlag property.

B11691: Window icon no longer missing for drill down windows

	In previous releases, drill down windows did not use the correct 
	window icon if the Drill Down Windows Always on Top option was 
	deselected. This has been fixed.

E11726:  Print option added to popup menu

	A "Print ..." menu option has been added to the popup menu
	that appears on a right mouse press in the main display area.
	Any display may be printed.

B11670: EMS manager can now be opened in a directory with PANELS.ini

	In previous versions, the EMS Manager could not be opened from
	a directory where a PANELS.ini was present. This behavior has been
	fixed, and the EMS Manager now references EMSMGR_PANELS.ini instead
	of PANELS.ini.

E11705: Server topology display added to EMS Manager

	A Server Topology display has been added to the EMS Manager.
	This display shows all servers and any routes that are defined 
	between the servers.  An arrow indicates the direction of an
	"Active" route.  A server is colored green if its state is active,
	red if it is inactive.

E11732: Color indicates status of EMS Servers 

	In the All Servers display, servers with state "No Connection"
	are now shown in red.

E11746: -usehawk option added to control accessibility of Hawk displays

	The "usehawk" option is now available in the EMS Manager EMSMGR.ini
	file to control whether Hawk displays are to be provided.  This option
	functions independently from the JMSADM datasource. Even if Hawk is
	being used to discover servers, you can disable the Hawk Host Details
	page by setting "usehawk false" in the EMSMGR.ini file. Conversely, 
	if Hawk is NOT being used to discover servers, you can still enable
	the Hawk Host Details display by setting "usehawk true".

E11538: Name is automatically generated for new route

	In previous versions of the EMS Manager, it was possible to 
	enter an arbitrary name for a route when it was created.  However,
	JMS requires that the route name be the same as the server name
	to which the route makes a connection. In this version, the route
	name is automatically set to be the server name of the target
	server for the newly created route.  The Route Name field is editable
	after selection, so that the route name can be changed if the server 
	is offline but the server's name is known.

E11718: Admin functions can be performed via the Data Server

	In previous versions of the EMS Manager a problem existed in
	that you could not perform admin functions if you were using the
	Data Server to connect to the Server Metrics.  This problem has
	been fixed.  

E11699: EMS Manager no longer crashes if used without navigation tree

	If the EMS Manager applet was used without a navigation tree, a 
	crash resulted.  This has been fixed.

B11662: Navigation tree redraws correctly on refresh of applet

	A problem with refreshing the EMS Manager applet has been fixed.
	Previously, a grey area would replace the navigation tree in some
	cases.